blue rock str

CONTRACT N40085-16-B-0010

NAVFAC SPECIFICATION

NO 05-16-0010

REPAIR WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT UN240

AT

MARINE CORPS BASE CAMP LEJEUNE NORTH CAROLINA

DESIGN BY

Avolis Engineering PA

New Bern NC 28561

AE Contract 16024

SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY

Avolis Engineering PA

Date 06 July 2017

SPECIFICATION APPROVED BY

Thomas H Burton PE Director

Design Branch Public Works Division

JM Roche Commander CEC US Navy

for Commander Naval Facilities Engineering Command

05160010

REPAIR WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT UN240 05160010

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK01 12 00 CUTTING AND PATCHING01 13 00 TRAFFIC SAFETY01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS01 31 50 TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01 78 30 GIS DATA DELIVERABLES

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION02 82 30 RE-ESTABLISHING VEGETATION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 01 32 CONCRETE REHABILITATION FOR CIVIL WORKS03 11 1300 10 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS03 39 0000 10 CONCRETE CURING

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 82 14 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)



23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS26 05 1910 10 INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS32 92 19 SEEDING

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 34 00 FORCE MAINS SEWER33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 00 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATED SLIDE GATES40 95 00 PROCESS CONTROL

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 21 00 SCREENING amp GRIT CONVEYORS

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR46 23 00 GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2


SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

0908

PART 1 GENERAL

11 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

111 Project Description

The work includes repairs and upgrades to the existing headworks facility at the existing Wastewater Treatment Plant and incidental related work

112 Location

The work shall be located at Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune North Carolina approximately as shown The exact location will be indicated by the Contracting Officer

12 EXISTING WORK

In addition to FAR 52236-9 Protection of Existing Vegetation Structures Equipment Utilities and Improvements

a Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain

b Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work as approved by the Contracting Officer At the completion of operations existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started

13 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a professional utility locator to scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered Verify the elevations of existing piping utilities and any type of underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be removed but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping ducts and other work to be installed Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made

131 Notification Prior to Excavation

Notify the Contracting Officer 48 hours prior to starting excavation work in order to permit making arrangements with public works personnel to scan the area for unmarked utilities Obtain station digging permits prior to starting excavation work

SECTION 01 11 00 Page 1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

-- End of Section --



SECTION 01 12 00

CUTTING AND PATCHING

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 CUTTING

Shall be done by sawing along straight lines The amount cut out shall bethe minimum necessary to accommodate the new work No flame cutting willbe permitted without written permission of the Officer in Charge ofConstruction

12 HOLES

Shall be rotary drilled The size shall be the minimum necessary toaccommodate the new work

13 PATCHING

Shall be done with materials which match the existing in color quality andsurface texture when finished

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 13 00

TRAFFIC SAFETY

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only

US FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

MUTCD (2009) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices

12 MAINTENANCE FOR TRAFFIC

The existing road or an approved bypass shall be kept open to all traffic while undergoing improvements The Contractor shall furnish erect light and maintain barricades warning and informational signs delineators and flagmen in accordance MUTCD

121 TEMPORARY APPROACHES

Temporary approaches or crossings and intersections with trails roads streets residences and parking lots shall be maintained in a safely passable condition

13 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to assure the safety and convenience of the users and of those along the streets and roads and to assure the protection of persons and property

14 WARNING SIGNS

Warning signs shall be erected in advance of any place on the project where operations may interfere with the use of the road by traffic and at all intermediate points where the new work crosses or coincides with an existing road

141 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

The Contractor shall furnish erect maintain and remove when directed any informational identification indicated

142 CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGNS

Construction warning signs shall be displayed only when a crew is actually working at the site Men Working or Flagman signs shall be removed from view of traffic when not needed



15 TRAFFIC REROUTING PLANS

Traffic rerouting plans shall be submitted for approval seven calendar days before the anticipated rerouting and shall not be implemented before approval The Contractor shall erect and remove all detour signs

16 PAINTING -- TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT

Painting on each street or roadway shall begin within 48 hours after pavement is placed and shall be placed continuously during daylight hours except during rain until completion Painting interrupted for rain shall restart during daylight as soon as pavement is dry Provide temporary painting on all roadways and stress except where permanent markings can be placed within 48 hours after pavement is placed

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 Traffic Control Devices

MUTCD

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

a Permission to interrrupt any Station roads railroads andor utility service shall be requested in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption

12 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES

121 Station Regulations

Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Station become familiar with and obey Station regulations Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress as directed Do not enter restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry Wear hard hats in designated areas Do not enter any restricted aras unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry The Contractors equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification

122 Working Hours

Regular working hours shall consist of an eight and one-half hour period established by the Contracting Officer Monday through Friday excluding Government holidays

123 Work Outside Regular Hours

Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval Provide written request at least 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress During periods of darkness the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer

124 Occupied and Existing Buildings

The Contractor shall be working around existing buildings which are occupied Do not enter the buildings without prior approval of the Contracting Officer

The existing buildings and their contents shall be kept secure at all times Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as directed by the Contracting Officer

Provide dust covers or protective enclosures to protect existing work that remains and Government material located in the work area during the construction period

The Government will remove and relocate other Government property in the



areas of the buildings scheduled to receive work

125 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

a Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays Sundays and Government holidays Conform to procedures required in the paragraph Work Outside Regular Hours

b Ensure that new utility lines are complete except for the connection before interrupting existing service

c Interruption to water sanitary sewer storm sewer telephone service electric service air conditioning heating fire alarm compressed air shall be considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entitled Work Outside Regular Hours Such interruption shall be further limited to 4 hours This time limit includes time for deactivation and reactivation

d Operation of Station Utilities The Contractor shall not operate nor disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system including water sewer electrical and steam services The Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 20 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

0412

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only

US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EP-1110-1-8 (2009) Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating Expense Schedule

12 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Schedule of prices

13 SCHEDULE OF PRICES

131 Data Required

Within 15 calendar days of notice of award prepare and deliver to Contracting Officer a schedule of prices (construction contract) on the forms furnished by the Government Provide a detailed breakdown of the contract price giving quantities for each of the various kinds of work unit prices and extended prices therefor Schedule of prices shall be separated by individual building numbers with subtotals for each building

132 Schedule Instructions

Payments will not be made until the schedule of prices has been submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer Identify the cost for site work and include incidental work to the 5 foot line Identify costs for the building(s) and include work out to the 5 foot line Workout to the 5 foot line shall include construction encompassed within a theoretical line 5 feet from the face of exterior walls and shall include attendant construction such as cooling towers placed beyond the 5 foot line

14 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS

In conjunction with the Contract Clause DFARS 252236-7000 Modification Proposals-Price Breakdown and where actual ownership and operating costs of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting records equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions



of the EP-1110-1-8

15 CONTRACTORS PAYMENT REQUEST

151 Proper Payment Request

A proper request for paymentinvoice shall comply with all requirements specified in this Section and the contract payment clauses If any invoice does not comply with these requirements it shall be returned with a statement of the reasons why it was not a proper invoice A proper payment requestinvoice includes the following information completed forms and number of copies indicated Upon request the Contracting Officer will furnish copies of Government forms

a Contractors Invoice on NAVFAC Form 730030 which shall show the basis for arriving at the amount of the invoice Submit one original and two copies

b Contractors Monthly Estimate for Voucher (LANTNAVFACENGCOM Form 4-4330110 Submit original and two copies

c Payment Certification Furnish as specified in FAR Clause 52232-5 (c) Payments under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts Submit one original

d QC Invoice Certification Furnish as specified in Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Submit one original

1511 Progress Payments

In addition to the requirements stated in Paragraph 151 Proper Payment Request above the Contractors request for progress payments shall include the following

a Updated Progress Schedule Furnish an updated progress schedule as specified in contract clause FAR 52236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts and Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Submit one copy

1512 Final Payments

The request for final payment is submitted after completion and acceptance of all work and all other requirements of the contract Before submitting the final invoice the Contractor shall meet with the appropriate Government representatives to determine the final invoice amount including the assessment of liquidated damages if any and to make sure the final release is complete and accurate In addition to the requirements in Paragraph 151 Proper Payment Request above the Contractors request for final payment shall include the following

a A final release executed on the standard form provided by the Contracting Officer Submit two originals with final payment request

b NC Tax certified statement and report for the prime and each subcontractor (FAR 52229-7) Submit two copies

c As-built drawings (if applicable)



d Warranties (if applicable)

e OampM manuals (if applicable)

f Final payrolls (FAR 52222-6)

g A release for an assignment of claims (if applicable) Submit three originals

152 Procedures for Submitting Payment Request

a The Contractor may submit only one invoice for payment each month as the work progresses

b The invoice shall be delivered to the ROICC Office Administrative Branch between five calendar days before and five calendar days after the contract award date Invoices received outside this schedule shall be returned to the Contractor unprocessed The Contractor will have to wait until the following month to submit their next invoice

c Invoices shall be delivered during normal work hours from 730 AM up to 400 PM (EST) Monday through Friday excluding holidays

16 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR

Payments will be made on submission of a proper payment requestinvoice by the Contractor

161 Obligation of Government Payments

The obligation of the Government to make payments required under the provisions of this contract will at the discretion of the Contracting Officer be subject to the following

a Reasonable retention andor deductions due to defects in material or workmanship potential liquidated damages andor failure to comply with any other requirements of the contract

b Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or in connection with this contract and

c Unless otherwise adjusted repayment to the Government upon demand for overpayments made to the Contractor

d Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in Contract Clause FAC 5252236-9310 Record Drawings NC State tax certified statement and report in accordance with FAR 52229-2 labor payrolls in accordance with FAR 52222-6 as-built drawings in accordance with Section 01 45 10 Quality Control warranties and OampM manuals and any other requirements in the contract

162 Payment for Onsite and Offsite Materials

Progress payments may be made to the contractor for materials delivered on the site for materials stored off construction sites or materials that are in transit to the construction sites under the following conditions



a FAR 52232-5(b) Payments Under Fixed Price Construction Contracts

b Materials delivered on the site but not installed including completed preparatory work and off-site materials to be considered for progress payment shall be major high cost long lead special order or specialty items not susceptible to deterioration or physical damage in storage or in transit to the construction site Examples of materials acceptable for payment considerations include but are not limited to structural steel non-magnetic steel non-magnetic aggregate equipment machinery large pipe and fittings precast prestressed concrete products plastic lumber (eg fender piles curbs) and high-voltage electrical cable Materials no t acceptable for payment include consumable materials such as nails fasteners conduits gypsum board glass insulation and wall coverings

c Materials to be considered for progress payment prior to installation shall be specifically and separately identified in the Contractors estimates of work submitted for the Contracting Officers approval in accordance with Earned Value Report requirement of this contract Requests for progress payment considerations for such items shall be supported by documents establishing their value and that the title requirements of the clause at FAR 52232-5 have been met

d Materials are adequately insured and protected from theft and exposure

e Provide a written consent from the surety company with each payment request for offsite materials

f Materials to be considered for progress payments prior to installation shall be stored in the Continental United States

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

0213

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures


List of contact personnel

12 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

Procure and maintain during the entire period of performance under this contract the following minimum insurance coverage

a Comprehensive general liability $500000 per occurrence

b Automobile liability $200000 per person $500000 per occurrence $20000 per occurrence for property damage

c Workmens compensation as required by Federal and State workers compensation and occupational disease laws

d Employers liability coverage of $100000 except in States where workers compensation may not be written by private carriers

e Others as required by State law

13 ELECTRONIC MAIL (EMAIL)

a The Contractor is required to establish and maintain electronic mail (email) capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments in Microsoft Adobe Acrobat and other similar formats

b Within 10 days after contract award the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer a single (only one) email address for the ROICC office to send communications related to this contract correspondence The ROICC office may also use email to notify the Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant such as hurricanes terrorist threats etc

c Multiple email addresses are not authorized

d It is the Contractors responsibility to make timely distribution of all ROICC email within its own organization including field office(s)

e The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer in



writing of any changes to their email address

14 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

141 Subcontractors and Personnel

Furnish a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an emergency As changes occur and additional information becomes available correct and change the information contained in previous lists

142 Identification Badges

Identification badges will be furnished without charge Application for and use of badges will be as directed below Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer Employees are required to resubmit a complete 50 state criminal records check in order to renew their contractor badge

143 Business Access Security Requirements

1431 Business Access Definition

Contractorsubcontractor employees requiring installation access to MCB Camp Lejeune or MCAS New River NC must obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for that particular installation Regularly scheduled delivery personnel to include FEDEX UPS Pick-up and deliveries should also follow the Business Access guidelines described below Personnel requiring Business Access Identification Badges shall submit all documentation listed below Badges are not required if the contracted position requires the employee to obtain a Common Access Card (CAC) which will be identified separately within the Government contract

1432 Installation Security Access Requirements

Contractor shall accomplish the security requirements below within 10 days after award or prior to performance under the contract

1433 Business Access Identification Badge Requirement

In order to obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for access to MCB Camp Lejeune and satellite activities or MCAS New River NC all personnel providing services under this contract shall be required to present the documentation below to the following offices as applicable

MCB Camp Lejeune NC and its satellite activities Report as follows

1 Identification Card Center 60 Molly Pitcher Road for badge (910-450-8444)

MCAS New River NC Report as follows

1 Pass and Identification Office Bldg AS-187 for badge (910-449-7695) and vehicle pass (910-449-5513)

1434 Proof of Employee Citizenship or Legal Alien Status

Employers may participate in the E-verify program (1-888-464-4218 wwwDHSgove-verify) allowing US employers to verify name DOB and SSN



along with immigration information for non-citizens against federal databases in order to verify the employment eligibility of both citizens and non-citizen new hires

1435 Proof of Criminal Records Check

Commercial and contract employees must provide proof of a complete 50 state criminal records check on an annual basis The record check may be obtained from any of the following Internet investigative services Kroll (former Infolink Screening Services) at wwwkrollcom Castle Branch at wwwcastlebranchcom or any other investigative services company that provides records checks for all 50 states These services also validate social security card numbers All criminal history checks must be completed no more than 30 days prior to start date of contract (Note These Internet screening services are listed as possible sources for obtaining a criminal background check The United States government and the United States Marine Corps do not endorse nor are they affiliated with any of these services)

1436 Letter Provided By Contracting Officer Indicating Contract

Letter provided by Contracting Officer indicating contract contract period and prime contractor Proof of employment on a valid Government contract (eg a letter on company letterhead from the prime contractor including contract number and term)

1437 Photo ID

Valid state or federal issued picture identification card Acceptable documents include state drivers license DMV issued photo identification or alien registration card

1438 National Crime Investigation Center (NCIC) Check

Provost Marshals are authorized to conduct a national crime information center (NCIC) check of all persons entering the installation ifwhere applicable the NCIC check may include driverss license query wants and warrants and criminal history

144 Denial of Access

Installation access shall be denied if it is determined that an employee

a Is on the National Terrorist Watch List

b Is illegally present in the United States

c Is subject to an outstanding warrant

d Has knowingly submitted an employment questionnaire with false or fraudulent information

e Has been issued a debarment order and is currently banned from military installations

f Is a Registered Sexual Offender

g Has been convicted of a felony or a drug crime within the past five years



h Individuals who have received a DUIDWI in the last year may be allowed access to the installation but will not be permitted to drive on the installation

i Any reason the Installation Commander deems reasonable for the good order and discipline

145 Appeal Process

All appeals should be directed to the Base Inspectors Office for any individual that has been denied access to the Base

146 Display of Badges

Contractorssubcontractors shall prominently display their badges on their person at all times Upon completiontermination of this contract or an individuals employment the Contractor shall collect and turn in to the Pass amp ID Office all badges If the Contactor fails to obtain the employees badge the Pass amp ID Office will be notified within 24 hours Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer

147 Contractor and Subcontractor Vehicle Requirements

Each vehicle to be used in contract performance shall show the Contractors or subcontractors name so that it is clearly visible and shall always display a valid state license plate and safety inspection sticker To obtain a vehicle decal which will be valid for one year or contract period whichever is shorter Contractor or subcontractor vehicle operators shall provide to the Vehicle Registration Office 60 Molly Pitcher Road (910-451-1158) or to MCAS Building AS-187 (910-449-5513) for vehicle decal

a An installation sponsor request forwarded to provost Marshall office

b A valid form of Federal or state government ID

c If driving a motor vehicle a valid drivers license vehicle registration and proof of insurance

Upon completiontermination of this contract or an individuals employment the Contractor shall collect and turn in to Vehicle Registration all Government vehicle decals If any are not collected the Contractor shall notify the Vehicle Registration Office within 24 hours

148 Security Checks

Contractor personnel and vehicles shall only be present in locations relevant to contract performance All Contractor personnel entering the base shall conform to all Government regulations and are subject to such checks as may be deemed necessary to ensure that violations do not occur Employees shall not be permitted on base when such a check reveals that their presence would be detrimental to the security of the base Subject to security regulations the Government will allow access to an area for servicing equipment andor performing required services Upon request the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer questionnaires and other forms as may be required for security purposes



149 Subcontractor Special Requirements

1491 Space Temperature Control HVAC TAB and Apparatus Inspection

All contract requirements shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor No work shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor

1492 Telecommunication and High Voltage Work

When telecommunications and high voltage work is required all work associated with telecommunications and high voltage shall be accomplished by a first tier subcontractor The contractor must possess a valid North Carolina Public Utility - Electrical contractors license and be insured to do such work in the State of North Carolina

1493 Paving Associated with Utility Cuts

All pavement repairs associated with utility cuts shall be completed within 14 days of completing work within paved area

15 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION

Contactor shall comply as follows

(a) The Contractor shall not release to anyone outside the Contractors organization any unclassified information regardless of medium (eg film tape document) pertaining to any part of this contract or any program related to this contact unless -

(1) The Contracting Officer has given prior written approval or

(2) The information is otherwise in th public domain before the date of release

(b) Requests for approval shall identify the specific information to be released the medium to be used and the purpose for the release The Contractor shall submit its request to the Contracting Officer at least 45 days before the proposed date for release

(c) The Contractor agrees to include a similar requirement in each subcontract under this contract Subcontractors shall submit requests for authorization to release through the prime contractor to the Contracting Officer

16 SUPERVISION

Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading writing and conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working hours In addition if a Quality Control (CQ) representative is required on the contract then that individual shall also have fluent English communication skills

NOTE If training and experience requirements of Section 01 45 10 Quality Control and 01 35 29 Safety and Occupational Health Requirements have been met the supervisor may also serve as QC Manager and Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)



17 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the site meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and safety program preparation of the schedule of prices shop drawings and other submittals scheduling programming and prosecution of the work Major subcontractors who will engage in the work shall also attend

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 31 50

TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp Acceptance of Military Real Property

12 Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp Acceptance of Military Real Property

Submit Interim DD-1354 thirty (30) days prior to beneficial occupancy date (draft copy attached)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 32 16

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

0412

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS



Construction schedule

Equipment delivery schedule

12 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Within 21 days after receipt of the Notice of Award prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a Critical Path Method (CPM) Network Schedule in accordance with the terms in Contract Clause FAR 52236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts except as modified in this contract Primavera P6 will be utilized to produce and update all progress schedules

13 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE

131 Initial Schedule

Within 30 calendar days after approval of the proposed construction schedule submit for Contracting Officer approval a schedule showing procurement plans for materials plant and equipment Submit in the format and content as prescribed by the Contracting Officer and include as a minimum the following information

a Description

b Date of the purchase order

c Promised shipping date

d Name of the manufacturer or supplier

e Date delivery is expected

f Date the material or equipment is required according to the current construction schedule

14 NETWORK ANALYSIS SYSTEM (NAS)

The Contractor shall use the critical path method (CPM) to schedule and control construction activities The Network shall have a minimum of 25



activities and a maximum of 50 activities The schedule shall identify as a minimum

a Construction time for all major systems and components

b Manpower requirements for each activity

c Major submittals and submittal processing time and

d Major equipment lead time

141 CPM Submittals and Procedures

The Contractor shall use the critical path method (CPM) to schedule and control project activities Project schedules shall be prepared and maintained using Primavera P6 Primavera SureTrak or current mandated scheduling program Save files in Concentric P6 or current mandated scheduling program file format compatible with the Governments version of the scheduling program The network analysis system shall be kept current with changes made to reflect the actual progress and status of the construction

15 UPDATED SCHEDULES

Update the construction schedule and equipment delivery schedule at monthly intervals or when schedule has been revised Reflect any changes occurring since the last update Submit copies of the purchase orders and confirmation of the delivery dates as directed

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

111 Government-Furnished Information

Submittal register will be delivered to the contractor in hard copy format Register will have the following fields completed to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage

Column (c) Lists specification section in which submittal is required

Column (d) Lists each submittal description (SD No and type eg SD-04 Drawings) required in each specification section

Column (e) Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements

Column (f) Indicate approving authority for each submittal The Contracting Officer is approving authority for all submittals

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Submittal

Shop drawings product data samples and administrative submittals presented for review and approval Contract Clauses FAR 52236-5 Material and Workmanship paragraph (b) and FAR 52236-21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction paragraphs (d) (e) and (f) apply to all submittals

122 Types of Submittals

All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph Submittal Descriptions (SD) Submittals also are grouped as follows

a Shop drawings As used in this section drawings schedules diagrams and other data prepared specifically for this contract by contractor or through contractor by way of subcontractor manufacturer supplier distributor or other lower tier contractor to illustrate portion of work

b Product data Preprinted material such as illustrations standard schedules performance charts instructions brochures diagrams manufacturers descriptive literature catalog data and other data to illustrate portion of work but not prepared exclusively



for this contract

c Samples Physical examples of products materials equipment assemblies or workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work illustrating portion of work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both

d Administrative submittals Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract documents

123 Submittal Descriptions (SD)


Certificates of insurance

Surety bonds

List of proposed subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction Progress Schedule

Submittal schedule

Schedule of values

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality control plan

Environmental protection plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project

Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts illustrations schedules diagrams performance charts instructions and brochures illustrating size physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment for some portion of the work

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product



warranties

SD-04 Samples

Physical examples of materials equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged

Color samples from the manufacturers standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project

Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations mix designs analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material product or system identical to the material product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements (Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project)

Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site

Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site on portion of work during or after installation

Investigation reports

Daily checklists

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

SD-07 Certificates

Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product system or material attesting that product system or material meets specification requirements Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project

Document required of Contractor or of a supplier installer or subcontractor through Contractor the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications

Confined space entry permits

SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions



Preprinted material describing installation of a product system or material including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances hazards and safety precautions

SD-09 Manufacturers Field Reports

Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturers representative to confirm compliance with manufacturers standards or instructions

Factory test reports

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals


Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism

As-built drawings

Special warranties

Posted operating instructions

Training plan

124 Approving Authority

Person authorized to approve submittal

125 Work

As used in this section on- and off-site construction required by contract documents including labor necessary to produce construction and materials products equipment and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction

13 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section


Submittal register

Complete Submittal Package 2 CDDVDs

14 USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register as the work progresses Use the hard copy submittal register furnished by the Government or other approved format Do not change data which is output in columns (c) (d) (e) and (f) as delivered by government retain data which is output in columns (a) (g) (h) and (i) as approved



141 Submittal Register

Submit submittal register as a hard copy Submit with quality control plan and project schedule required by Section 01 45 10 Quality Control and Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Do not change data in columns (c) (d) (e) and (f) as delivered by the government Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing submittals Complete the following on the register

Column (a) Activity Number Activity number from the project schedule

Column (g) Contractor Submit Date Scheduled date for approving authority to receive submittals

Column (h) Contractor Approval Date Date contractor needs approval of submittal

Column (i) Contractor Material Date that contractor needs material delivered to contractor control

142 Contractor Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields in the government-furnished submittal register

Column (b) Transmittal Number Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers

Column (j) Action Code (k) Date of action used to record contractors review when forwarding submittals to QC

Column (l) List date of submittal transmission

Column (q) List date approval received

143 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register


Column (b)

Column (l) List date of submittal receipt

Column (m) through (p)

Column (q) List date returned to contractor

144 Contractor Action Code and Action Code

Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form)

NR - Not Received

AN - Approved as noted

A - Approved

RR - Disapproved Revise and Resubmit



145 Copies Delivered to the Government

Deliver one copy of submitted register updated by contractor to government with each invoice request

15 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

151 Reviewing Certifying Approving Authority

QC organization shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in compliance with contract requirements The Contracting Officer is the approving authority for all submittals

152 Constraints

a Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this section unless explicitly stated otherwise

b Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work components of definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time

c When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions items or materials included in separate subsequent submittals submittal will be returned without review

d Approval of a separate material product or component does not imply approval of assembly in which item functions

153 Scheduling

a Coordinate scheduling sequencing preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing Allow for potential requirements to resubmit

b Except as specified otherwise allow review period beginning with receipt by approving authority that includes at least 15 working days for submittals for QC manager approval and 20 working days for submittals for contracting officer approval Period of review for submittals with contracting officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organization Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal

c For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer allow review period beginning when government receives submittal from QC organization of 45 working days for return of submittal to the contractor Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal

154 Variations

Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant to contract Clause entitled FAR 52236-21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction and will be considered where advantageous to government

1541 Considering Variations

Discussion with contracting officer prior to submission will help ensure



functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP)

1542 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation deliver written request to the contracting officer with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to government If lower cost is a benefit also include an estimate of the cost saving In addition to documentation required for variation include the submittals required for the item Clearly mark the proposed variation in all

documentation

1543 Warranting That Variation Are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation if incorporated will be compatible with other elements of work

1544 Review Schedule Is Modified

In addition to normal submittal review period a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations

155 Contractors Responsibilities

a Determine and verify field measurements materials field construction criteria review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and contract documents

b Transmit submittals to QC organization in accordance with schedule on approved Submittal Register and to prevent delays in the work delays to government or delays to separate contractors

c Advise contracting officer of variation as required by paragraph entitled Variations

d Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority When resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal the contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments for use by approving authority Direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted submittal to revisions not requested by approving authority on previous submissions

e Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by contracting officer to a limit of 20 copies per submittal

f Complete work which must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in time to allow submittal to occur as scheduled

g Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as approved or approved as noted except to the extent that a portion of work must be accomplished as basis of submittal



156 QC Organization Responsibilities

a Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each submittal

b Review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents

c Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents

d Act on submittals determining appropriate action based on QC organizations review of submittal

(1) When QC manager is approving authority take appropriate action on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible

(2) When contracting officer is approving authority or when variation has been proposed forward submittal to Government with certifying statement or return submittal marked not reviewed or revise and resubmit as appropriate The QC organizations review of submittal determines appropriate action

e Ensure that material is clearly legible

f Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or approving statement except that data submitted in bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only

(1) When approving authority is contracting officer QC organization will certify submittals forwarded to contracting officer with the following certifying statement

I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with contract Number N40085- 16-B- 0010 is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification can be installed in the allocated spaces and is submitted for Government approval

Certified by Submittal Reviewer _____________________ Date _______(Signature when applicable)

Certified by QC manager _____________________________ Date ______(Signature)

g Sign certifying statement or approval statement The person signing certifying statements shall be QC organization member designated in the approved QC plan The signatures shall be in original ink Stamped signatures are not acceptable

h Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the submittal register at project site until final acceptance of all work by contracting officer

i Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site including contractors copy of approved samples



157 Governments Responsibilities

When approving authority is contracting Officer the Government will

a Note date on which submittal was received from QC manager on each submittal for which the contracting officer is approving authority

b Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents

c Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible and with markings appropriate for action indicated

158 Actions Possible

Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations

a Submittals marked not reviewed will indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and approved is not required does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by contractor or is not complete A submittal marked not reviewed will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete with appropriate action coordination or change

b Submittals marked approved approved as submitted authorize contractor to proceed with work covered

c Submittals marked approved as noted authorize contractor to proceed with work as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the notations

d Submittals marked revise and resubmit or disapproved indicate submittal is incomplete or does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract documents and shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes No work shall proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved

16 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

161 Complete Submittal Package

Contractor shall make electronic copies of all submittals including the approved transmittal sheets and provide two (2) CDDVDs containing all submittals for the project

The CDDVDs shall be marked Complete Submittal Package - Contract ______

162 Transmittal Form

Transmit each submittal except sample installations and sample panels to office of approving authority Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by contracting officer and standard for project The transmittal form shall identify contractor indicate date of submittal and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in



paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding sample panels and sample installations

163 Identifying Submittals

Identify submittals except sample panel and sample installation with the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form Mark each copy of each submittal identically with the following

a Project title and location

b Construction contract number

c Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required

d Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal

e When a resubmission alphabetic suffix on submittal description for example SD-10A to indicate resubmission

f Name address and telephone number of subcontractor supplier manufacturer and any other second tier contractor associated with submittal

g Product identification and location in project

164 Format for Product Data

a Present product data submittals for each section as a complete bound volume Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for product data

b Indicate by prominent notation each product which is being submitted indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains

c Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist Identify this material as developed specifically for project

165 Format for Shop Drawings

a Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 12 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches

b Present 8 12 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for submittals required by section Present larger drawings in sets

c Include on each drawing the drawing title number date and revision numbers and dates in addition to information required in paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals

d Dimension drawings except diagrams and schematic drawings prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale Shop drawing dimensions shall be the same unit of measure



as indicated on the contract drawings Identify materials and products for work shown

166 Format of Samples

a Furnish samples in sizes below unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified

(1) Sample of Equipment or Device Full size

(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches Built up to 8 12 by 11 inches

(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 12 by 11 inches Cut down to 8 12 by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color texture and material variations

(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials 10 inch length or length to be supplied if less than 10 inches Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails

(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials Pint Examples of non-solid materials are sand and paint

(6) Color Selection Samples 2 by 4 inches

(7) Sample Panel 4 by 4 feet

(8) Sample Installation 100 square feet

b Samples Showing Range of Variation Where variations are unavoidable due to nature of the materials submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range

c Reusable Samples Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use

d Recording of Sample Installation Note and preserve the notation of area constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project

e When color texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style include one sample of that manufacturer and style for comparison

167 Format of Administrative Submittals

a When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become part of project record other than as a submittal do not apply contractors approval stamp to document but to a separate sheet accompanying document

b Operation and Maintenance Manual Data Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data Include components required in that section and the various technical sections



17 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

171 Number of Copies of Product Data

a Submit five copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval only by the Contracting Officer Submit three copies of submittals of product data for operation and maintenance manuals

172 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data

173 Number of Samples

a Submit two samples or two sets of samples showing range of variation of each required item One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be returned to contractor

b Submit one sample panel Include components listed in technical section or as directed

c Submit one sample installation where directed

d Submit one sample of non-solid materials

174 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals

a Unless otherwise specified submit administrative submittals compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data

b Submit administrative submittals required under SD-19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals to conform to Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

18 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS

181 Samples and Submittalsr

Except as otherwise noted submit samples and submittals to

Avolis Engineering PAPO Box 15564

New Bern NC 28561

1811 Administrative Submittals

Submit administrative submittals for asbestoslead removal and environmental protection plan to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction (ROICCOICC)

1812 Fire Protection and Fire Alarm System Submittals

Submit fire protection and fire alarm system submittals to ROICCOICC



1813 TAB Submittals

Submit to ROICCOICC for all projects

182 Shop Drawings Product Data and OampM Data

As soon as practicable after award of the contract and before procurement or fabrication submit shop drawings product data and OampM Data required in the technical sections of this specification

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 35 29

SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

0714

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSESAFE)

ASSESAFE Z3591 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems Subsystems and Components

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B3022 (2016) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B303 (2016) Tower Cranes

ASME B305 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B308 (2015) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 241 (2013 Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding ConstructionAlteration and Demolition Operations

NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding Cutting and Other Hot Work

NFPA 70 (2017) National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E (2015 ERTA 1 2015) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual



US NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 191094 Ventilation

29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment

29 CFR 1919 Gear Certification

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926500 Fall Protection

12 SUBMITTALS



Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Crane Critical Lift Plan

Crane Work Plan

Proof of qualifications for Crane Operators

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports

Submit reports as their incidence occurs in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled Reports

Accident Reports

Monthly Exposure Reports

Regulatory Citations and Violations

Crane Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Confined Space Entry Permit

Certificate of Compliance (Crane)

Third Party Certification of Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes



Submit one copy of each permitcertificate attached to each Daily Report

13 DEFINITIONS

a Associate Safety Professional (ASP) An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

b Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST) An individual who is currently certified as a CHST by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

c Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) An individual who is currently certified as a CIH by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene

d Certified Safety Professional (CSP) An individual who is currently certified as a CSP by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

e Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) An individual who is currently certified as an STS by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

f Competent Person for Fall Protection A person who is cabable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof as well as their application and use with related equipment and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling

g High Visibility Accident Any mishap which may generate publicity andor high visibility

h Low-slope roof A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal)

i Medical Treatment Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel

j Multi-Employer Work Site (MEWS) A multi-employer work site as defined by OSHA is one in which many employers occupy the same site The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors

k Operating Envelope The area surrounding any crane Inside this envelope is the crane the operator riggers rigging gear between the hook and the load the load and the cranes supporting structure (ground rail etc)

l Qualified Person for Fall Protection A person with a recognized degree or professional certifictae extensive knowledge training and experience in the field of fall protection who is capable of performing design analysis and evaluation of fall protection systems and equipment

m Recordable Injuries or Illnesses Any work-related injury or illness that results in



(1) Death regardless of the time between the injury and death or the length of the illness

(2) Days away from work

(3) Restricted work

(4) Transfer to another job

(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid

(6) Loss of consciousness or

(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above

n Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) The superintendent or other qualified or competent person who is responsible for the on-site safety and health required for the project

o Steep roof A roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal)

p USACE property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be interpreted as Government property and equipment

q Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident A WHE accident occurs when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death material or equipment damage dropped load derailment two-blocking overload and collision including unplanned contact between the load crane andor other objects A dropped load derailment two-blocking overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or injury occurs A component failure (eg motor burnout gear tooth failure bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (eg dropped boom dropped load roll over etc)

14 CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

Contracting Officer will provide a Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation checklist to the Contractor at the pre-construction conference The checklist will be completed monthly by the Contractor and submitted with each request for payment voucher An acceptable score of 90 or greater is required Failure to submit the completed safety self-evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least 90 will result in a retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher

15 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract work performed shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1 and the following laws ordinances criteria rules and regulations Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work Where the requirements of this specification applicable laws criteria ordinances regulations



and referenced documents vary the most stringent requirements shall apply

16 DRUG PREVENTION PROGRAM

Conduct a proactive drug and alcohol use prevention program for all workers prime and subcontractor on the site Ensure that no employee uses illegal drugs or consumes alcohol during work hours Ensure there are no employees under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours After accidents collect blood urine or saliva specimens and test the injured and involved employees for the influence of drugs and alcohol A copy of the test shall be made available to the Contracting Officer upon request

17 SITE QUALIFICATIONS DUTIES AND MEETINGS

171 Personnel Qualifications

Work performed under this contract shall meet Level 2

1711 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) shall be provided at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The SSHO shall meet the following requirements

Level 1 Worked on similar projects10-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 yearsCompetent person training as needed

Level 2 A minimum of 3 years safety work on similar project30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 years Competent person training as needed

Level 3 A minimum of 5 years safety work on similar projects30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 yearsAn average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 yearsCompetent person training as needed

Level 4 A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance



Level 5 Provide an Associate Safety Professional (ASP) Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) andor Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST) at the work site to perform safety management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor to meet the designated safety level in paragraph 17 The ASP STS andor CHST shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1 The ASP STS andor CHST shall be at the work site at all times whenever work or testing is being performed and shall conduct and document daily safety inspections The ASP STS andor CHST shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

Level 6

Provide a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) andor Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) at the work site to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The CSP andor CIH shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1 The CSP andor CIH shall have no other duties than safety and occupational health management inspections andor industrial hygieneA minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 yearsAn average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

1712 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry

Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 who is assigned in writing by the Designated Authority to assess confined spaces and who possesses demonstrated knowledge skill and ability to

a Identify the structure location and designation of confined and permit-required confined spaces where work is done

b Calibrate and use testing equipment including but not limited to oxygen indicators combustible gas indicators carbon monoxide indicators and carbon dioxide indicators and to interpret accurately the test results of that equipment



c Perform all required tests and inspections specified in 29 CFR 1910146 and 29 CFR 1915 Subpart B

d Assess hazardous conditions including atmospheric hazards in confined space and adjacent spaces and specify the necessary protection and precautions to be taken

e Determine ventilation requirements for confined space entries and operations

f Assess hazards associated with hot work in confined and adjacent space and determine fire watch requirements and

g Maintain records required

When the work involves marine operations that handle combustible or hazardous materials this qualified person shall be a NFPA certified marine chemist

1713 Competent Person for the Health Hazard Control and Respiratory Protection Program

Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 who is

a Capable by education specialized training andor experience of anticipating recognizing and evaluating employee exposure to hazardous chemical physical and biological agents in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 6

b Capable of spe cifying necessary controls and protective actions to ensure worker health

1714 Crane Operators

Crane operators shall meet the requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and Appendix G In addition for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50000 pounds or greater crane operators shall be designated as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (ie union a government agency or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators) Proof of current qualifications shall be provided

172 Personnel Duties

1721 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)Superintendent

a Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes areaoperation inspected date of inspection identified hazards recommended corrective actions estimated and actual dates of corrections Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors daily report

b Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors

c Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site



d Attend the pre-construction conference pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting and periodic in-progress meetings

e Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs

f Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety bulletin board

g Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements

h Ensure an approved Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit prior to starting any activity on energized electrical systems

Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the superintendent andor SSHO and a project work stoppage The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement

1722 Certified Safety Professional (CSP) Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) Associate Safety Professional (ASP) Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) andor Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST)

a Perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the project

b Perform as the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1

c Be on site whenever work or testing is being performed

d Conduct and document safety inspections

e Shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract

If the CSP CIH ASP STS CHST is appointed as the SSHO all duties of that position shall also be performed

173 Meetings

1731 Preconstruction Conference

a The Contractor will be informed in writing of the date of the preconstruction conference The purpose of the preconstruction conference is for the Contractor and the Contracting Officers representatives to become acquainted and explain the functions and operating procedures of their respective organizations and to reach mutual understanding relative to the administration of the overall projects Accident Prevention Plan (APP) before the initiation of work

b Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference This includes the project superintendent site safety and health officer quality control supervisor or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the



development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans program and procedures associated with it)

c The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans programs procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officers representative as to which phases will require an analysis In addition a schedule for the preparation submittal review and acceptance of AHAs shall be established to preclude project delays

d Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for acceptance Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP

e The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the Post-Awqrd Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts

1732 Weekly Safety Meetings

Conduct weekly safety meetings at the project site for all employees The Contracting Officer will be informed of the meeting in advance and be allowed attendance Minutes showing contract title signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed shall be attached to the Contractors daily report

1733 Work Phase Meetings

The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance documented by the Contractor at the preparatory initial and follow-up phases of quality control inspection The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of safety and health controls

18 TRAINING

181 New Employee Indoctrination

New employees (prime and sub-contractor) will be informed of specific site hazards before they begin work Documentation of this orientation shall be kept on file at the project site

182 Periodic Training

Provide Safety and Health Training in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 and the accepted APP Ensure all required training has been accomplished for all onsite employees

183 Training on Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Prior to beginning a new phase training will be provided to all affected employees to include a review of the AHA to be implemented



19 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 and as supplemented herein Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix A Minimum Basic Outline for Preparation of Accident Prevention Plan Where a paragraph or subparagraph element is not applicable to the work to be performed indicate Not Applicable next to the heading Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below at paragraph 181 The APP shall be job-specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written The APP shall interface with the Contractors overall safety and health program Any portions of the Contractors overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made site-specific The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP the Contractor the on-site superintendent the designated site safety and health officer and any designated CSP andor CIH

Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP The Contracting Officer reviews and comments on the Contractors submitted APP and accepts it when it meets the requirements of the contract provisions

Once accepted by the Contracting Officer the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work at the discretion of the Contracting Officer until the matter has been rectified

Once work begins changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer project superintendent SSHO and quality control manager Should any unforeseen hazard become evident during the performance of work the project superintendent shall inform the Contracting Officer both verbally and in writing for resolution as soon as possible In the interim all necessary action shall be taken by the Contractor to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel visitors the public and the environment

Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the resident engineers office and at the job site The APP shall be continuously reviewed and amended as necessary throughout the life of the contract Unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP shall be incorporated in the plan as they are discovered

191 EM 385-1-1 Contents

In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1 the following is required



a Names and qualifications (resumes including education training experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs CIHs STSs CHSTs The duties of each position shall be specified

b Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons As a minimum competent persons shall be designated and qualifications submitted for each of the following major areas excavation scaffolding fall protection hazardous energy confined space health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

c Confined Space Entry Plan Develop a confined space entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910 29 CFR 1915 and 29 CFR 1926 and any other federal state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract Identify the qualified persons name and qualifications training and experience Delineate the qualified persons authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders (If there is no confined space work include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created)

d Health Hazard Control Program The Contractor shall designate a competent and qualified person to establish and oversee a Health Hazard Control Program in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 6 The program shall ensure that employees on-site Government representatives and others are not adversely exposed to chemical physical and biological agents and that necessary controls and protective actions are instituted to ensure health

e Crane Critical Lift Plan Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted movile cranes hoists) at any radius of lift lifts involving more thatn one crane or hoist lifts of personnel and lifts involving more than rigging or operation sensitive equipment or unusual safety risks The plan shall be submitted 15 calendar day6s prior to on-site work and include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 paragraph 16c18 and the following

(1) For lifts of personnel the plan shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926500 (g)

(2) For barge mounted mobile cranes barge stability calculations identifying barge list and trim based on anticipated loading and load charts based on calculated list and trim Teh amount of list and trim shall be within the crane manufacturers requirements

f Alcohol and Drug Abuse Plan

(1) Describe plan for random checks and testing with pre-employment screening in accordance with the DFAR Clause subpart 252223-7004 Drug Free Work Force

(2) Description of the on-site prevention program



g Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan The plan shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction It shall address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 18 m (6 feet) A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the plan The plan shall include fall protection and prevention systems equipment and methods employed for every phase of work responsibilities assisted rescue self-rescue and evacuation procedures training requirements and monitoring methods Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be revised every six months for lengthy projects reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel equipment systems or work habits The accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be kept and maintained at the job site for the duration of the project The Fall Protection Plan shall be included in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

h Training Records and Requirements List of mandatory training and certifications which are applicable to this project (eg explosive actuated tools confined space entry fall protection crane operation vehicle operator forklift operators personal protective equipment) list of requiremetns for periodic retrainingcertification outline requirements for supervisory and employee safety meetings

i Occupant Protection Plan The safety and health aspects of lead-based paint removal prepared in accordance with Section 02 83 1900 10 Lead Based Paint Hazard Abatement Target Housing amp Child Occupied Facilities 02 82 3313 20 RemovalControl and Disposal of Lead Containig Paint

j Lead Compliance Plan The safety and health aspects of lead work prepared in accordance with Section 02 83 1300 20 Lead in Construction

k Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan The safety and health aspects of asbestos work prepared in accordance with Section 02 2 1600 Engineering Control of Asbestos Containing Materials

l Site Safety and Health Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with this section

m PCB Plan The safety and health aspects of Polychlorinated Biphenyls work prepared in accordance with Sections 02 84 33 Removal and Disposal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) and 02 61 23 Removal and Disposal of PCB Contaminated Soils)

n Site Demolition Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 0000 40 Demolition and referenced sources Include engineering survey as applicable

o Excavation Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 3100 Earthwork

p Crane Work Plan The contractor shall provide a crane work plan to the Contracting Officer for acceptance The crane work plan shall include the specific model of each crane and a drawing identifying their locations (exact) the dimensions wheel sizes number of



wheels wheel spacing tire pressure(s) number of axles axle spacing minimum wheel load to be exerted during operatins and maximum outrigger load to be exerted during operations The Contractor shall allow at least 10 working days for acceptancenon-acceptance of the crane work plan No crane operations shall begin prior to written acceptance of the crane plan by the Government ROICC shall be the government approving authority

110 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase Format subsequent AHA as amendments to the APP An AHA will be developed by the Contractor for every operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform work The analysis must identify and evaluate hazards and outline the proposed methods and techniques for the safe completion of each phase of work At a minimum define activity being performed sequence of work specific safety and health hazards anticipated control measures (to include personal protective equipment) to eliminate or reduce each hazard to acceptable levels equipment to be used inspection requirements training requirements for all involved and the competent person in charge of that phase of work For work with fall hazards including fall hazards associated with scaffold erection and removal identify the appropriate fall protection methods used For work with materials handling equipment address safeguarding measures related to materials handling equipment For work requiring excavations include requirements for safeguarding excavations An activity requiring an AHA shall not proceed until the AHA has been accepted by the Contracting Officers representative and a meeting has been conducted by the Contractor to discuss its contents with everyone engaged in the activity including on-site Government representatives The Contractor shall document meeting attendance at the preparatory initial and follow-up phases of quality control inspection The AHA shall be continuously reviewed and when appropriate modified to address changing site conditions or operations The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activitys safety and health controls

The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures scheduling or hazards change

Activity hazard analyses shall be updated as necessary to provide an effective response to changing work conditions and activities The on-site superintendent site safety and health officer and competent persons used to develop the AHAs including updates shall sign and date the AHAs before they are implemented

The activity hazard analyses shall be developed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA The AHAs will be developed by the contractor supplier or subcontractor and provided t othe prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Offficer

111 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

Within 1 calendar days after commencement of work erect a safety bulletin board at the job site The following information shall be displayed on



the safety bulletin board in clear view of the on-site construction personnel maintained current and protected against the elements and unauthorized removal

a Map denoting the route to the nearest emergency care facility

b Emergency phone numbers

c Copy of the most up-to-date APP

d Current AHA(s)

e OSHA 300A Form

f OSHA Safety and Health Protection-On-The-Job Poster

g Confined space entry permit

h Hot work permit

i A sign indicating the number of hours worked since last lost workday accident

j Safety and Health Warning Posters

112 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project including those listed in the article References Maintain applicable equipment manufacturers manuals

113 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment

114 REPORTS

1141 Accident Reports

a For recordable injuries and illnesses and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2000 in damages the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident complete the Navy Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR) form or USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 1 calendar day(s) of the accident The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms

b For a weight handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form



1142 Accident Notification

Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical but not later than four hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents property damage equal to or greater than $2000 or any weight handling equipment accident Information shall include contractor name contract title type of contract name of activity installation or location where accident occurred date and time of accident names of personnel injured extent of property damage if any extent of injury if known and brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used PPE used etc) Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on site and Government investigation is conducted

1143 Monthly Exposure Reports

Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be attached to the monthly billing request This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers both prime and subcontractor The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special forms

1144 Regulatory Citations and Violations

Contact the Contracting Officer immediately of any OSHA or other regulatory agency inspection or visit and provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of each citation report and contractor response Correct violations and citations promptly and provide written corrective actions to the Contracting Officer

1145 Crane Reports

Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections

1146 Certificate of Compliance

The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate) Certificate shall state that the crane and rigging gear meet applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA regulations are applicable eg cranes used in construction demolition or maintenance shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 section 16 and Appendix H Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be used For cranes at DOD activities in foreign countries the Contractor shall certify that the crane and rigging gear conform to the appropriate host country safety standards The Contractor shall also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (eg anti-two block devices) These certifications shall be posted on the crane

1147 Third Party Certification of Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes

Barge-mounted mobile cranes shall be certified in accordance with 29 CFR 1919 by an OSHA accredited person



115 HOT WORK

Prior to performing Hot Work (welding cutting etc) or operating other flame-producingspark producing devices a written permit shall be requested from the Fire Division CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A20 BC rated extinguishers for normal Hot Work All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any Hot Work done at this activity The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit

a Oil painting materials (paint brushes empty paint cans etc) and all flammable liquids shall be removed from the facility at quitting time All painting materials and flammable liquids shall be stored outside in a suitable metal locker or box and will require re-submittal with non-hazardous materials

b Accumulation of trays paper shavings sawdust boxes and other packing materials shall be removed from the facility at the close of each workday and such material disposed of in the proper containers located away from the facility

c The storage of combustible supplies shall be a safe distance from structures

d Area outside the facility undergoing work shall be cleaned of trash paper or other discarded combustibles at the close of each workday

e All portable electric devices (saws sanders compressors extension chord lights etc) shall be disconnected at the close of each workday When possible the main electric switch in the facility shall be deactivated

f When starting work in the facility Contractors shall require their personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency phone number 911 ANY FIRE NO MATTER HOW SMALL SHALL BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY

g Obtain services from th FIRE DIVISION for HOT WORK within or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems weldingcutting on fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells manholes vaults etc) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE

The Contractor shall provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers for all required confined spaces Signs wording DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE - DO NOT ENTER - in bold letters a minimum of 25 mm(one inch) in height and constructed to be clearly legible with all paint removed The signal word DANGER shall be



red and readable from 152 m(5 feet)

22 FALL PROTECTION ANCHORAGE

Fall protection anchorage conforming to ASSESAFE Z3591 installed under the supervision of a qualified person in fall protection shall be left in place for continued customer use and so identified by signage stating the capacity of the anchorage (strength and number of persons who may be tied-off to it at any one time)

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 CONSTRUCTION ANDOR OTHER WORK

The Contractor shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1 NFPA 241 the APP the AHA Federal andor State OSHA regulations and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations The most stringent standard shall prevail

311 Hazardous Material Use

Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material Any work or storage involving hazardous chemicals or materials must be done in a manner that will not expose Government or Contractor employees to any unsafe or unhealthful conditions Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent Government or Contractor employees from being exposed to any hazardous condition that could result from the work or storage The Prime Contractor shall keep a complete inventory of hazardous materials brought onto the work-site Approval by the Contracting Officer of protective measures and storage area is required prior to the start of the work

312 Hazardous Material Exclusions

Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizingnon-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls di-isocynates lead-based paint are prohibited The Contracting Officer upon written request by the Contractor may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials

313 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

The design should have identified materials such as PCB lead paint and friable and non-friable asbestos If additional material not indicated that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous If material is not hazardous or poses no danger the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52243-4 Changes and FAR 52236-2 Differing Site



Conditions

32 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING

Contractors are required to apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance As a minimum the request should include the location of the outage utilities being affected duration of outage and any necessary sketches Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section Once approved and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down the Contractor shall attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock-outtag-out procedures for worker protection No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist

33 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION

The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards The program shall include company policy identify responsibilities education and training requirements fall hazard identification prevention and control measures inspection storage care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and escape procedures

331 Training

The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training Training requirements shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 section 21A16

332 Fall Protection Equipment

The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan andor AHA at all times when an employee is on a surface 18 m(6 feet) or more above lower levels Fall protection systems such as guardrails personnel fall arrest system safety nets etc are required when working within 18m (6 feet) of any leading edge In addition to the required fall protection systems safety skiff personal floatation devices life rings etc are required when working above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 paragraphs 05I and 05J Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom swing stages or suspended platform In addition personal fall arrest systems may be required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising lowering or travel Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926500 Subpart M and USACE EM 385-1-1

3321 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment

Personal fall arrest equipment systems subsystems and components shall meet ASSESAFE Z3591 Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest device Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system (for



uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system) Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system Only locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used Webbing straps and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 18 m (6 feet) The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system

333 Fall Protection for Roofing Work

Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed The roof area to be accessed shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading

a Low Sloped Roofs

(1) For work within 18 m (6 feet) of an edge on low-slope roofs personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems guardrails or safety nets A safety monitoring system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized

(2) For work greater than 18 m (6 feet) from an edge warning lines shall be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926500 and USACE EM 385-1-1

b Steep Roofs Work on steep roofs requires a personal fall arrest system guardrails with toe-boards or safety nets This requirement also includes residential or housing type construction

334 Safety Nets

If safety nets are used as the selected fall protection system on the project they shall be provided at unguarded workplaces leading edge work or when working over water machinery dangerous operations and or other surfaces where the use of ladders scaffolds catch platforms temporary floors fall arrest systems or restraintpositioning systems are impractical Safety nets shall be tested immediately after installation with a drop test of 1814 kg (400 pounds) dropped from the same elevation a person might fall and every six months thereafter

335 Existing Anchorage

Existing anchorages to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be certified (or re-certified) by a qualified person for fall protection in accordance with ASSESAFE Z3591 Exiting horizontal lifeline achorages shall be certified (or re-certified) by a registered professional engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems

336 Horizontal Lifelines

Horizontal lifelines shall be designed installed certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (



29 CFR 1926500 )

337 Guardrail Systems

Guardrails shall consist of top and mid-rails post and toe boards The top edge height of standard railing must be 42 inches plus or minus 3 inches above the walkingworking level When mid-rails are used they must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walkingworking level Posts shall be placed no more than 8 feet apart ( 29 CFR 1926500 and USACE EM 385-1-1 )

338 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures

When personal fall arrest systems are used the contracator must ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor and include a detailed discussion of the following methods of rescue methods of self-rescue equipment used training requirement specialized training for the rescuers procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance and transportation routes to a medical facility The Rescue and Evaluation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

34 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

All personnel who enter a construction site area shall wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) at all times as outlined in the EM 385 1-1 In addition to the requirements of the EM 385 1-1 Safety Glasses (ANSI Z871) will be worn at all times on construction sites Hearing protection is required in noise hazard areas or when performing noise hazard tasks Mandatory PPE on all construction sites includes

a Hard Hats

b Safety Glasses

c Safety-Toed Shoes or Boots

35 SCAFFOLDING

Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited Access to scaffold platforms greater than 6 m (20 feet) in height shall be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system Vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers shall not be used for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 6 m (20 feet) in height The use of an adequate gate is required Contractor shall ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward Special care shall be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is prohibited The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base Work platforms shall



be placed on mud sills Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than six feet Delineate fall protection requirements when working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work

351 Stilts

The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction renovation repair or maintenance work is prohibited

36 EQUIPMENT

361 Material Handling Equipment

a Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturers printed operating instructions

b The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions

c Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA

362 Weight Handling Equipment

a Cranes must be equipped with

(1) Load indicating devices (LIDs) and a boom angle or radius indicator

(2) or load moment indicating devices (LMIs)

(3) Anti-two block prevention devices

(4) Boom hoist hydraulic relief valve disconnect or shutoff (stops hoist when boom reaches a predetermined high angle)

(5) Boom length indicator (for telescoping booms)

(6) Device to prevent uncontrolled lowering of a telescoping hydraulic boom

(7) Device to prevent uncontrolled retraction of a telescoping hydraulic boom

b The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated Contractors operator shall remain with the crane during the spot check

c The Contractor shall comply with the crane manufacturers specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work Erection shall be performed under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B305) All testing shall be performed in accordance with the



manufacturers recommended procedures

d The Contractor shall comply with ASME B305 for mobile and locomotive cranes ASME B3022 for articulating boom cranes ASME B303 for construction tower cranes and ASME B308 for floating cranes and floating derricks

e The presence of Government personnel does not relieve the Contractor of an obligation to comply with all applicable safety regulations The Government will investigate all complaints of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions received in writing from contractor employees federal civilian employees or military personnel

f Each load shall be riggedattached independently to the hookmaster-link in such a fashion that the load cannot slide or otherwise become detached Christmas-tree lifting (multiple rigged materials) is not allowed

g Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90 of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration

h When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and shall follow the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 section 11 and ASME B305 or ASME B3022 as applicable

i Crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) shall not be used unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible Personnel shall not be lifted with a line hoist or friction crane

j A fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 10BC and a minimum nominal capacity of 5lb of extinguishing agent shall be available at all operator stations or crane cabs Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected maintained and recharged as specified in NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

k All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads

l A weight handling equipment operator shall not leave his position at the controls while a load is suspended

m The Contractor shall use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers

n The crane hookblock must be positioned directly over the load Side loading of the crane is prohibited

o A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane

p A substantial and durable rating chart containing legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane and securely mounted onto the crane cab in a location allowing easy reading by the operator while seated in the control station

q Certification records which include the date of inspection



signature of the person performing the inspection and the serial number or other identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel

r Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel

s The Contractor shall certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (eg anti-two block devices)

363 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment

a Equipment shall be operated by designated qualified operators Proof of qualifications shall be kept on the project site for review

b Manufacture specifications or owners manual for the equipment shall be on site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1 Such additional safety precautions or requirements shall be incorporated into the AHAs

c Equipment and mechanized equipment shall be inspected in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for safe operation by a competent person prior to being placed into use

d Daily checks or tests shall be conducted and documented on equipment and mechanized equipment by designated competent persons

37 EXCAVATIONS

The competent person for excavations performed as a result of contract work shall be on-site when excavation work is being performed and shall inspect and document the excavations daily prior to entry by workers The competent person must evaluate all hazards including atmospheric that may be associated with the work and shall have the resources necessary to correct hazards promptly The competent person shall perform soil classification in accordance with 29 CFR 1926

371 Utility Locations

All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a third party independent private utility locating company in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract

372 Utility Location Verification

The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations including utility depth by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground system Digging within 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment hand digging shall be used If construction is parallel to an existing utility the utility shall be exposed by hand digging every 100 feet if parallel within 5 feet of the excavation



373 Utilities Within and Under Concrete Bituminous Asphalt and Other Impervious Surfaces

Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier decks bridges parking areas and the like are extremely difficult to identify Whenever contract work involves chipping saw cutting or core drilling through concrete bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third party independentprivate locating company The third party independent private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) X-ray bore scope or ultrasound prior to the start of demolition and construction Outages to isolate utility systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the contractor from meetingthis requirement

374 Shoring Systems

Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and AHA Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on site for review Job-made shoring or shielding shall have the registered professional engineer stamp specifications and tabulated data Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electric underground cables

375 Trenching Machinery

Trenching machines with digging chain drives shall be operated only when the spotterslaborers are in plain view of the operator Operator and spotterslaborers shall be provided training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating Documentation of the training shall be kept on file at the project site

38 ELECTRICAL

381 Conduct of Electrical Work

Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method When working in energized substations only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70 high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes as a minimum electrical hard hat safety shoes insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves



fire retarding shirts coveralls face shields and safety glasses In addition provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E Insulating blankets hearing protection and switching suits may be required depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractors AHA

382 Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis

Contractor shall provide an Arc Flash RiskHazsrd Analysis in accordance with NFPA 70E for all locations where workers may be exposed to arc flash hazard (work on energized electrical equipment) The Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis shall be sealed and signed by a qualified professional engineer

383 Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis Qualifications

Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified organization to provide Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis of the electrial distribution system Organization shall be independent of th aupplier manufacturer and installer of ht equipment The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor This work shall not be performed by a second tier subcontractor

a Submit name and qualificaitons of organization Organization shall have been regularaly engaged in providing Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis for a minimum of 5 years

b Submit name and qualifications of the professional engineer performing the analysis Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the engineer with specific names nad telephone numbers for reference

384 Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit

All work on energized electrical systems including high voltage must have an approved Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit The results of a Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis per NFPA 70E shall be included in the Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit request Flame-resistant (FR) clothing and personel protective equipment (PPE) shall be rated for a minimum of 8 calories per square centimeter even if the flash hazard analysis indicates a lower value A blank copy of the permit request is attached An editable version may be obtained from the Contracting Officer

385 Portable Extension Cords

Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage All damaged extension cords shall be immediately removed from service Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70

39 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Section 06I of USACE EM 385-1-1 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910146 Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used

a Entry Procedures Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose including hot work until the qualified



person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented (See Section 06I05 of USACE EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures) All hazards pertaining to the space shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA

b Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level

c Ensure the use of rescue and retrieval devices in confined spaces greater than 15 m (5 feet) in depth Conform to Sections 06I09 06I10 and 06I11 of USACE EM 385-1-1

d Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection

e Include training information for employees who will be involved as entrants and attendants for the work Conform to Section 06I06 of USACE EM 385-1-1

f Daily Entry Permit Post the permit in a conspicuous place close to the confined space entrance

310 CRYSTALLINE SILICA

Grinding abrasive blasting and foundry operations of construction materials containing crystalline silica shall comply with OSHA regulations such as 29 CFR 191094 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix C The Contractor shall develop and implement effective exposure control and elimination procedures to include dust control systems engineering controls and establishment of work area boundaries as well as medical surveillance training air monitoring and personal protective equipment

311 HOUSEKEEPING

3111 Clean-Up

All debris in work areas shall be cleaned up daily or more frequently if necessary Construction debris may be temporarily located in an approved location however garbage accumulation must be removed each day

3112 Falling Object Protection

All areas must be barricaded to safeguard employees When working overhead barricade the area below to prevent entry by unauthorized employees Construction warning tape and signs shall be posted so they are clearly visible from all possible access points When employees are working overhead all tools and equipment shall be secured so that they will not fall When using guardrail as falling object protection all openings shall be small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects




SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS0810

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work These references are identified in each section by document number date and title The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (eg ASTM B564 Nickel Alloy Forgings) However when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes

12 ORDERING INFORMATION

The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization that information is also provided Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills MI 48331Ph 248-848-3700Fax 248-848-3701E-mail bkstoreconcreteorgInternet httpwwwconcreteorg

ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)National Headquarters1525 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600Arlington VA 22209Ph 703-358-2960Fax 703-358-2961Internet httpwwwaluminumorg

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)444 North Capital Street NW Suite 249Washington DC 20001Ph 202-624-5800Fax 202-624-5806E-Mail infoaashtoorgInternet httpwwwaashtoorg

AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)2025 M Street NW Suite 800Washington DC 20036Ph 202-367-1155



Fax 202-367-2155E-mail infoamericanbearingsorgInternet httpwwwabma-dcorg

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)1330 Kemper Meadow DriveCincinnati OH 45240Ph 513-742-2020 or 513-742-6163Fax 513-742-3355E-mail mailacgihorgInternet httpwwwacgihorg

AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)500 Montgomery Street Suite 350Alexandria VA 22314-1581Ph 703-684-0211Fax 703-684-0242E-mail websiteragmaorgInternet httpwwwagmaorg

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)One East Wacker Drive Suite 700Chicago IL 60601-1802Ph 312-670-2400Fax 312-670-5403Publications 800-644-2400E-mail pubsaiscorgInternet httpwwwaiscorg

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)1220 L Street NWWashington DC 20005-4070Ph 303-397-7993Fax 303-397-2740E-mail gregkallioihscomInternet httpwwwapiorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)1801 Alexander Bell DriveReston VA 20191-4400Ph 703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723Fax 703-295-6333E-mail memberasceorgInternet httpwwwasceorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)1791 Tullie Circle NEAtlanta GA 30329Ph 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400Fax 404-321-5478E-mail ashraeashraeorgInternet httpwwwashraeorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSESAFE)1800 East Oakton StreetDes Plaines IL 60018-2187Ph 847-699-2929Fax 847-768-3434



E-mail customerserviceasseorgInternet httpwwwasseorg

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)6666 West Quincy AvenueDenver CO 80235Ph 800-926-7337 Fax 303-347-0804E-mail smorrisonawwaorgInternet httpwwwawwaorg

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)550 NW LeJeune RoadMiami FL 33126Ph 800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353Fax 305-443-7559E-mail infoawsorg or customerserviceawspubscomInternet httpwwwawsorg

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)Three Park Avenue MS 10ENew York NY 10016-5990Ph 800-854-7179 or 800-843-2763Fax 212-591-7674E-mail infocentralasmeorgInternet httpwwwasmeorg

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)100 Barr Harbor Drive PO Box C700West Conshohocken PA 19428-2959Ph 610-832-9585Fax 610-832-9555E-mail serviceastmorgInternet httpwwwastmorg

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)933 North Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg IL 60173-4758Ph 847-517-1200 or 800-328-6306Fax 847-517-1206Internet httpwwwcrsiorg

CONCRETE SAWING AND DRILLING ASSOCIATION (CSDA)11001 Danka Way North Suite 1St Petersburg FL 33716PH 727-577-5004Fax 727-577-5012E-mail infocsdaorgInternet httpwwwcsdaorg

DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)245 Riverchase Parkway East Suite OBirmingham AL 35244Ph 205-402-8700Fax 205-402-8730E-mail infodipraorgInternet httpwwwdipraorg



FM GLOBAL (FM)270 Central AvenuePO Box 7500Johnston RI 02919Ph 401-275-3000 ext 1945Fax 401-275-3029E-mail servicedeskmyriskfmglobalcomInternet httpwwwfmglobalcom

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)University of South CaliforniaKaprielian Hall 200Los Angeles CA 90089-2531Ph 213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340Fax 213-740-8399E-mail fccchrusceduInternet httpwwwuscedudeptfccchr

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)120 Wall Street 17th FloorNew York NY 10005Ph 212-248-5000Fax 212-248-5018E-mail IESIESorgInternet httpwwwIESorg

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)445 Hoes Lane or 2001 L Street NW Suite 700Piscataway NJ 08855-1331 or Washington DC 20036-4910 USAPh 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333Fax 732-562-6380E-mail onlinesupportieeeorg or ieeeusaieeeorgInternet httpwwwieeeorg

INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)PO Box 1568Carrollton GA 30112Ph 1 800 447 3352Fax 1 303 397 2599E-mail globalihscomInternet httpwwwiceanet

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)5360 Workman Mill RoadWhittier CA 90601Ph 1-888-422-7233Fax 562-908-5524E-mail webmastericcsafeorgInternet wwwiccsafeorg

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

3050 Centre Ave Suite 102Portage MI 49024Ph 269-488-6382Fax 269-488-6383E-mail netanetaworldorgInternet httpwwwnetaworldorg



INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)3 rue de Varembe PO Box 131CH-1211 Geneva 20 SwitzerlandPh 41-22-919-0211Fax 41-22-919-0300E-mail custserviecchInternet httpwwwiecch

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)127 Park Street NEVienna VA 22180Ph 703-281-6613Fax 703-281-6671E-mail infomss-hqcomInternet httpwwwmss-hqcom

MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)2800 Engleton AvenueBurnaby BC CANADA V5C 6G7Ph 604-298-7578Fax 604-298-7571E-mail infopaintinfocomjodympinetbglmpinetInternet httpwwwpaintinfocommpi

MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)16712 Elm CircleOmaha NE 68130Ph 800-747-6422Fax 402-330-9702E-mail micatconlcomInternet httpwwwmicainsulationorg

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)800 Roosevelt Road Bldg C Suite 312Glen Ellyn IL 60137Ph 630-942-6591Fax 630-790-3095E-mail wlewis7coxnet(Vernon Lewistechnical consultant)Internet httpwwwnaammorg

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)1300 North 17th Street Suite 1752Rosslyn VA 22209Ph 703-841-3200Fax 703-841-5900Internet httpwwwnemaorg

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)1 Batterymarch ParkQuincy MA 02169-7471Ph 617-770-3000 or 800-344-3555Fax 617-770-0700E-mail webmasternfpaorgInternet httpwwwnfpaorg

NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)100 Bureau Drive



Stop 1070Gaithersburg MD 20899-1070Ph 301-975-NIST (6478E-mail inquiriesnistgovInternet httpwwwnistgov

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)900 Spring StreetSilver Spring MD 20910Ph 240-485-1165E-mail jjenkinsnrmcaorg (jacques jenkins)Internet httpwwwnrmcaorg

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)789 North Dixboro RoadPO Box 130140Ann Arbor MI 48113-0140Ph 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARKFax 734-769-0109E-mail infonsforgInternet httpwwwnsforg

POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills MI 48331Ph 248-848-3180Fax 248-848-3181E-mail infopost-tensioningorgInternet httpwwwpost-tensioningorg

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)2200 Powell Street Suite 725Emeryville CA 94608Ph 510-452-8000Fax 510-452-8001Internet httpwwwscs1com

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)40 24th Street 6th FloorPittsburgh PA 15222-4656Ph 412-281-2331Fax 412-281-9992E-mail infosspcorgInternet httpwwwsspcorg

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)2500 Wilson Blvd Suite 300Arlington VA 22201Ph 703-907-7700Fax 703-907-7727Internet httpwwwtiaonlineorg

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)2600 NW Lake RoadCamas WA 98607-8542Ph 877-854-3577Fax 360-817-6278



E-mail CECususulcomInternet httpwwwulcomUL Directories available through IHS at httpwwwihscom

US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS fromUS Army Engineer Waterways Experiment StationATTN Technical Report Distribution Section ServicesBranch TIC3909 Halls Ferry RoadVicksburg MS 39180-6199E-mail MTC-INFOerdcusacearmymilInternet httpgslerdcusacearmymilSLMTChandbookhandbookhtmOrder Other Documents fromUSACE Publications DepotAttn CEHEC-IM-PD2803 52nd AvenueHyattsville MD 20781-1102Ph 301-394-0081Fax 301-394-0084E-mail pubs-armyusacearmymilInternet httpwwwusacearmymilpublications or httpwwwhndusacearmymiltechinfoengpubshtm

US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)Order AMS Publications fromAGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch801 Summit Crossing Place Suite CGastonia NC 28054-2193Ph 704-810-8871Fax 704-852-4189E-mail seedamsusdagovInternet httpwwwamsusdagovlsgseedhtmOrder Other Publications fromUS Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service14th and Independence Avenue SW Room 4028-SWashington DC 20250Ph 202-720-2791 Fax 202-720-2166Internet httpwwwusdagovrus

US DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)Order DOD Documents fromRoom 3A750-The Pentagon1400 Defense PentagonWashington DC 20301-1400Ph 703-571-3343FAX 215-697-1462E-mail piahqafisasdmilInternet httpwwwdodgovObtain Military Specifications Standards and Related Publications fromAcquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)Building 4D



700 Robbins AvenuePhiladelphia PA 19111-5094Ph 215-697-6396 - for accountpassword issuesInternet httpassistdapsdlamilonlinestart account registration requiredObtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) fromWhole Building Design Guide (WBDG)National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)1090 Vermont Avenue NW Suite 700Washington CD 20005Ph 202-289-7800Fax 202-289-1092Internet httpwwwwbdgorgreferencesdocs_refsphp

US ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)Ariel Rios Building1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NWWashington DC 20004Ph 202-272-0167for Fax and E-mail see belowInternet httpwwwepagov--- Some EPA documents are available only from National Technical Information Service (NTIS)5301 Shawnee RoadAlexandria VA 22312Ph 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332Fax 703-605-6900E-mail infontisgovInternet httpwwwntisgov

US FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)Order for sale documents fromSuperintendent of DocumentsUS Government Printing Office (GPO)732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgovOrder free documents fromFederal Aviation AdministrationDepartment of Transportation800 Independence Avenue SWWashington DC 20591Ph 1-866-835-5322Internet httpwwwfaagov

US FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)FHWA Office of Safety 1200 New Jersey Ave SEWashington DC 20590-Ph 202-366-0411Fax 202-366-2249E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwsafetyfhwadotgovOrder fromSuperintendent of DocumentsU S Government Printing Office (GPO)



732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgov

U S GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)2101 L St NW Suite 500Washington DC 20037Fax 202-828-5110E-mail infousgbcorgInternet httpwwwusgbcorg

US GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)General Services Administration1800 F Street NWWashington DC 20405Ph 202-501-0800Internet wwwGSAgovObtain documents fromAcquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)Building 4D700 Robbins AvenuePhiladelphia PA 19111-5094Ph 215-697-6396 - for accountpassword issuesInternet httpassistdapsdlamilonlinestart account registration required

US NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)8601 Adelphi Road College Park MD 20740-6001Ph 866-272-6272Fax 301-837-0483E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwarchivesgovOrder documents fromSuperintendent of DocumentsUSGovernment Printing Office (GPO)732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgov

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 45 10

QUALITY CONTROL

0901

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A 880 (1996) Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Organizations for Examination and Inspection of Steel Stainless Steel and Related Alloys

ASTM C 1077 (2010c) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM D 3666 (2009a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D 3740 (2010) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing andor Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

ASTM E 329 (2009) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing andor Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

ASTM E 543 (2009) Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Non-Destructive Testing

12 SUBMITTALS



Quality Control Plan ( QC PLAN)

Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award

13 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

Deliver the following to the Contracting Officer



a Combined Contractor Production ReportContractor Quality Control Report (1 sheet) Original and 1 copy by 1000 AM the next work ing day after each day that work is performed

b QC Specialist Reports and Test Results Originals and 1 copy by 1000 AM the next working day after each day that work is per formed

c Testing Plan and Log 1 copy at the end of each month

d QC Meeting Minutes 1 copy within 2 calendar days of the meeting

e Rework Items List 1 copy by the last working day of the month and

f QC Certifications As required by the paragraph entitled QC Certifications

14 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section The QC program consists of a QC Organization a QC Plan attending a QC Plan meet ing attending a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conducting QC meetings performing three phases of control performing submittal review ensuring testing is performed and preparing QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials equipment workmanship fabrication construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this Contract The QC program shall cover construction operations onsite and off-site and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence

15 QC ORGANIZATION

151 QC Manager

1511 Duties

Provide a QC Manager at the work site to manage and implement the QC program The QC Manager is required to attend the QC Plan meeting attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conduct the QC meetings perform the three phases of control perform submittal review ensure testing is performed and prepare QC certifications and documentation required in this Contract The QC Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and documentation performed by the QC specialists In addition to managing and implementing the QC program the QC Manager may perform the duties of project superintendent

1512 Qualifications

An individual with a minimum of five years experience as a foreman super intendent inspector QC Manager project manager or construction manager on similar size construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract

1513 Construction Quality Management Training

In addition to the above experience and education requirements the QC Manager shall have completed the course entitled Construction Quality



Management for Contractors This course is periodically offered by the Navy and the Corps of Engineers However it is sponsered by both the AGC and the ABC of Charlotte North Carolina Call one of the following to sign up for the next available class

The Army Corps of Engineers Baltimore District(Offered in Baltimore MD)Contact Corps of Engineers Baltimore District10 South Howard StreetBaltimore MD 21201Phone 410-962-2323

The Associated General Contractors (AGC) Virginia Chapterin Cooperation with the Army Corps of Engineers Norfolk District and the Naval Facilities Engineering Command Atlantic Division(Offered at rotating locations in Norfolk Williamsburg and Richmond)Contact AGC of Virginia8631 Maylan Drive Parham ParkRichmond VA 23294Phone 804-346-3383

Carolinas Associated General Contractors (CACG)Contact CACG 1100 Euclid AvenueCharlotte NC 28203Phone 704-372-1450 (ext 5248)

Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC) Carolinas ChapterContact ABC Carolinas Chapter3705 Latrobe DriveCharlotte NC 28211Phone 704-367-1331 or 877-470-4819

152 Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications

Designate an alternate for the QC Manager at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QC Managers absence The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC Manager shall be three years of experience in one of the specified positions

16 QC PLAN

161 Requirements

Provide for approval by the Contracting Officer a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes the following

a A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order

I QC ORGANIZATION II NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS III DUTIES RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL IV OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS V APPOINTMENT LETTERS



VI SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER VII TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION VIII TESTING PLAN AND LOG IX PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS X DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES XI LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES XII PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE THREE PHASES OF CONTROL XIII PERSONNEL MATRIX XIV PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION

b A chart showing the QC organizational structure and its relationship to the production side of the organization

c Names and qualifications in resume format for each person in the QC organization

d Duties responsibilities and authorities of each person in the QC organization

e A listing of outside organizations such as architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide

f A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QC Manager and stating that heshe is responsible for managing and implementing the QC program as described in this contract Include in this letter the QC Managers authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work

g Procedures for reviewing approving and managing submittals Provide the names of the persons in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval

h Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled Accredited Laboratories or Testing Laboratory Requirements as applicable

i A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test the frequency and the person responsible for each test

j Procedures to identify record track and complete rework items

k Documentation procedures including proposed report formats

l A list of the definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements As a minimum if approved by the Contracting Officer consider each Section of the Specifications as a definable feature of work However at times there may be more than one definable feature of work in each Section of the Specifications

m A personnel matrix showing for each section of the specification who will perform and document the three phases of control and who will perform and document the testing

o Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion



Inspection process Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection prefinal inspection and final acceptance inspection

162 Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval

The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers and surveying

163 Approval

Approval of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary to ensure the specified quality of work The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify hisher submitted qualifications

164 Notification of Changes

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change including changes in the QC organization personnel a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change Proposed changes must be approved by the Contracting Officer

17 QC PLAN MEETING

Prior to submission of the QC plan meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission

18 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING

After submission of the QC Plan but prior to the start of construction meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC program required by this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details including forms to be used for documentation administration for on-site and off-site work and the coordination of the Contractors management production and QC personnel with the Contracting Officer As a minimum the Contractors personnel required to attend shall include the project manager project superintendent and QC Manager Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QC Manager and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer

19 QC MEETINGS

After the start of construction the QC Manager shall conduct weekly QC meetings at the work site with the project superintendent and QC specialists The QC Manager shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the Contracting Officer within 2 working days after the meeting The Contracting Officer may attend these meetings The QC Manager shall notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each meet ing As a minimum the following shall be accomplished at each meeting

a Review the minutes of the previous meeting



b Review the schedule and the status of work

- Work or testing accomplished since last meeting - Rework items identified since last meeting - Rework items completed since last meeting

c Review the status of submittals

- Submittals reviewed and approved since last meeting - Submittals required in the near future

d Review the work to be accomplished in the next 2 weeks and documen tation required Schedule the three phases of control and testing

- Establish completion dates for rework items - Preparatory phases required - Initial phases required - Follow-up phases required - Testing required - Status of off-site work or testing - Documentation required

e Resolve QC and production problems and

f Address items that may require revising the QC plan

- Changes in QC organization personnel - Changes in procedures

191 THREE PHASES OF CONTROL

The QC Manager shall perform the three phases of control to ensure that work complies with Contract requirements The Three Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements

192 Preparatory Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each preparatory phase Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the definable feature Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Perform the following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work

a Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections

b Review the Contract drawings

c Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and equipment have been submitted and approved Verify receipt of approved factory test results when required

d Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing

e Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work



has been completed

f Examine the required materials equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data

g Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted and

h Discuss construction methods

193 Initial Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each initial phase When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work conduct the initial phase with the QC Specialists the super intendent and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work Observe the initial segment of the definable feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met Perform the following for each definable feature of work

a Establish the quality of workmanship required

b Resolve conflicts

c Review the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and

d Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory

194 Follow-Up Phase

Perform the following for on-going work daily or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report

a Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements

b Maintain the quality of workmanship required

c Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory and

d Ensure that rework items are being corrected

195 Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work

Notify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases

110 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

Procedures for submittals are as described in Section entitled Submittal Procedures



111 TESTING

Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections perform sampling and testing required under this Contract

1111 Testing Laboratory Requirements

Provide an independent testing laboratory or establish a laboratory quali fied to perform sampling and tests required by this Contract When the proposed testing laboratory is not accredited by an acceptable accreditation program as described by the paragraph entitled Accredited Laboratories submit to the Contracting Officer for approval certified statements signed by an official of the testing laboratory attesting that the proposed laboratory meets or conforms to the following requirements

a Sampling and testing shall be under the technical direction of a Registered Professional Engineer (PE) with at least 5 years of experience in construction material testing

b Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077

c Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666

d Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock as used in engineering design and construction shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740

e Laboratories engaged in inspection and testing of steel stainless steel and related alloys will be evaluated according to ASTM A 880 Laboratories shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329

f Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing (NDT) shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 543

g Laboratories engaged in hazardous materials testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA

1112 Accredited Laboratories

Acceptable accreditation programs are the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program Furnish to the Contracting Officer a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation Scope of Accreditation and latest directory of the accrediting organization for accredited laboratories The scope of the laboratorys accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract

1113 Inspection of Testing Laboratories

Prior to approval of non-accredited laboratories the proposed testing laboratory facilities and records shall be subject to inspection by the Contracting Officer Records subject to inspection include equipment inventory equipment calibration dates and procedures library of test procedures audit and inspection reports by agencies conducting laboratory evaluations and certifications testing and management personnel



qualifications test report forms and the internal QC procedures

1114 Capability Check

The Contracting Officer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technicians testing procedures techniques and other items pertinent to testing for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract

1115 Test Results

Cite applicable Contract requirements tests or analytical procedures used Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters CONFORMS or DOES NOT CONFORM to the specification requirements whichever is applicable Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports Furnish the signed reports certifications and other documentation to the Contracting Officer via the QC Manager Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month

112 QC CERTIFICATIONS

1121 Contractor Quality Control Report Certification

Each Contractor Quality Control Report shall contain the following statement On behalf of the Contractor I certify that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best of my knowledge except as noted in this report

1122 Invoice Certification

Furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment request signed by the QC Manager attesting that as-built drawings are current and attesting that the work for which payment is requested including stored material is in compliance with contract requirements

1123 Completion Certification

Upon completion of work under this Contract the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that the work has been completed inspected tested and is in compliance with the Contract

113 DOCUMENTATION

Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities

1131 Contractor Production Report

Reports are required for each day that work is performed and shall be attached to the Contractor Quality Control Report prepared for the same day Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Production Reports are to be



prepared signed and dated by the project superintendent and shall contain the following information

a Date of report report number name of contractor contract number title and location of Contract and superintendent present

b Weather conditions in the morning and in the afternoon including maximum and minimum temperatures

c A list of Contractor and subcontractor personnel on the work site their trades employer work location description of work performed and hours worked

e A list of job safety actions taken and safety inspections conducted Indicate that safety requirements have been met including the results on the following

(1) Was a job safety meeting held this date (If YES attach a copy of the meeting minutes)

(2) Were there any lost time accidents this date (If YES attach a copy of the completed OSHA report)

(3) Was cranemanlifttrenchingscaffoldhv electricalhigh workhazmat work done (If YES attach a statement or checklist showing inspection performed)

(4) Was hazardous materialwaste released into the environment (If YES attach a description of incident and proposed action)

f A list of safety actions taken today and safety inspections conducted

g A list of equipmentmaterial received each day that is incorporated into the job

h A list of construction and plant equipment on the work site including the number of hours used idle and down for repair

i Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received problems encountered during construction work progress and delays conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications field changes safety hazards encountered instructions given and corrective actions taken delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site

1132 Contractor Quality Control Report

Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work and on the last day of a no-work period Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Quality Control Reports are to be prepared signed and dated by the QC Manager and shall contain the following information

a Identify the control phase and the definable feature of work



b Results of the Preparatory Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the drawings and specifications have been reviewed submittals have been approved materials comply with approved submittals materials are stored properly preliminary work was done correctly the testing plan has been reviewed and work methods and schedule have been discussed

c Results of the Initial Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the preliminary work was done correctly samples have been prepared and approved the workmanship is satisfactory test results are acceptable work is in compliance with the Contract and the required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests

d Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held including the location of the definable feature of work Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase and that required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests

e Results of the three phases of control for off-site work if applicable including actions taken

f List the rework items identified but not corrected by close of business

g List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken

h Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received quality control problem areas deviations from the QC plan construction deficiencies encountered QC meetings held acknowledgement that as-built drawings have been updated corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action taken by the Contractor

i Contractor Quality Control Report certification

1133 Testing Plan and Log

As tests are performed the QC Manager shall record on the Testing Plan and Log the date the test was conducted the date the test results were forwarded to the Contracting Officer remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used Attach a copy of the updated Testing Plan and Log to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month

1134 Rework Items List

The QC Manager shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract identifying what items need to be reworked the date the item was originally discovered and the date the item was corrected There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered Attach a copy of the Contractor Rework Items List to the



last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the Contracting Officer

1135 As-Built Drawings

The QC Manager is required to review the as-built drawings required by Section 01 78 00 Closeout Procedures to ensure that as-built drawings are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract drawings The QC Manager shall initial each deviation and each revision Upon completion of work the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the Contracting Officer

1136 Report Forms

The following forms which are attached at the end of this section are acceptable for providing the information required by the paragraph entitled Documentation While use of these specific formats are not required any other format used shall contain the same information

a Combined Contractor Production Report and Contractor Quality Control Report (1 sheet) with separate continuation sheet

b Testing Plan and Log

c Rework Items List

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used



SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)

AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)

FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies

FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control

12 SUBMITTALS



Traffic control plan

SD-03 Product Data

Backflow preventers

SD-06 Test Reports

Backflow Preventer Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Backflow Tester Certifications

Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval

13 BACKFLOW TESTER CERTIFICATIONS

Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List University of Southern California attesting that the design size and make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval Certificate



of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable

131 Backflow Preventers Certificate

The Contractor shall submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours or training in backflow preventer installations The certificate must be current

14 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

141 Availability of Utility Services

a The Contract clause related to utilities applies Reasonable amounts of water and electricity from the nearest outlet will be provided free of charge for pursuance of work within a facility under this contract If the nearest available outlet cannot be utilized by the Contractor because of improper voltage insufficient current improper pressure incompatible connectors etc it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide temporary utilities as required

b Reasonable amounts of utilities for contractor trailers and storage buildings will be made available to the Contractor when available The Contractor shall be responsible for providing transformers electrical service poles and drops for electrical services and backflow preventer devices on connections to domestic water lines Final taps and tie-ins to the Government utility grid will be made by the Contractor after approval by the Contracting Officer Tap-in cost if any shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Under no circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining domestic water

142 Trailers

Electrical service will be supplied by the Government when available except at Tarawa Terrace where Carolina Power and Light Company will be the supplier

143 Energy and Utilities Conservation

The Contractor shall carefully conserve utilities furnished without charge The Contractor at his own expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines and remove the same prior to final acceptance of the construction

144 Location of Underground Utilities

Location and Protection of underground utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Where existing-to-remain piping utilities and underground obstructions of any type are indicted in locations to be traversed by new piping ducts and other excavations the elevations of the existing utilities and obstructions shall be determined before the new work is completed

a In addition the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a professional utility locator prior to digging Contractor will provide documentation that the site has been



surveyed and checked for underground utilities All utilities must be located including but not limited to power water sewer storm drains fiber optics TV cable telephone and intrusion detection wiring A set of known utility drawings will be available in the ROICC office for review to assist the locator

b It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact the Base Telephone Office (451-2531) prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune A telephone office representative will assist in locating telephone lines

c It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact Charter Communications cable TV service prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune to ensure that all buried cable lines are identified Contact Mr Olin Criswell at 353-8677 for assistance

d It is mandatory that the contractor also contact the North Carolina One-Call Center to coordinate the location of underground natural gas infrastructure North Carolina 811 Inc can be reached at 811 on a touch-tone phone in the state of North Carolina or toll-free at 18006324949 if calling from out of state Work requests may also be submitted online at wwwnc811org

1441 The Locations of Underground Utilities

The locations of underground utilities shown at only approximate and the information provided may be incomplete Contractor shall attempt to ascertain locations of existing underground utilities prior to and during digging operations

1442 Damage to Underground Utilities

Immediate notice shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer of any damage The Contractor shall make temporary repairs immediately and shall provide permanent repairs as soon as practicable For any additional work required by reason of conflict between the new and existing work an adjustment in contract price will be made in accordance with Contract clause entitled Differing Site Conditions if appropriate

15 WEATHER PROTECTION

Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are monitored carefully Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent and at the end of each workday Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage

151 Building and Site Storm Protection

When a warning of gale force winds is issued take precautions to minimize danger to persons and protect the work and nearby Government property Precautions shall include but are not limited to closing openings removing loose materials tools and equipment from exposed locations and removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work Close openings in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government property



1511 Hurricane Conditions of Readiness

Unless directed otherwise comply with

a Condition FIVE Normal weather conditions are expected for the foreseeable future No action is required

b Condition FOUR (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 72 hours) Contractors shall continue normal daily clean up and good house keeping practices Collect and store in piles or containers scrap lumber waste material and rubbish for removal and disposal at the close of each work day Stack lumber in neat piles less than 4 feet high Prepare to remove or secure all debris trash or stored materials that could become missile hazards during high wind conditions Meetings should be held on-site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to need to be taken should the base go to a higher readiness condition Contact the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions

c Condition THREE (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 48 hours) Once Condition 3 is set contractors shall shift their focus from their normal activities to taking the actions that are required to prepare the job site for the potential of destructive weather All debris and rubbish shall be removed form the site at the end of the workday All stored materials shall either be removed from the job site or secured (metal straps or heavy linesropes) All tools equipment and gear shall be secured at the end of the workday Begin preparations to adequately secure the facility (windows boarded up etc) Meetings should be held on-site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to be taken should base go to a higher readiness condition Contract the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions

d Condition TWO (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 24 hours) Cease all normal activities until the job-site is completely prepared for the onslaught of destructive weather The job site should be completely free of debris rubbish and scrap materials The facility being worked on should be made weather-tight All scaffolding planking shall be removed All formwork and free standing structural steel shall be braced All machinery tools equipment and materials shall be properly secured or removed from the job-site Expend every effort to clear all missiles hazards and loose equipment from the job site When the contractor secures for the day the job site should be left in a condition that is ready for the storm and the contractor should assume that they will not be allowed to return to their job site until after the storm passes and the base is reopened Contact ROICC for additional updates and upon completion of required actions

e Condition ONE (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 12 hours) If still on the job site the contractor will be required to immediately leave the base until the storm passes and the base is reopened



16 STORAGE AREAS

The Contract Clause entitled FAR 52236-10 Operations and Storage Areas and the following apply

161 Storage Size and Location

The open site available for storage shall be confined to the indicated operations area

17 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

Provide adequate sanitary conveniences of a type approved for the use of persons employed on the work properly secluded from public observation and maintained in such a manner as required and approved by the Contracting Officer Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance Upon completion of the work remove the conveniences from the premises leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance Dispose of sewage through connection to a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system Where such systems are not available use chemical toilets or comparably effective units and periodically empty wastes into a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system or remove waste to a commercial facility Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors

18 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS

Locate these where directed and within the indicated operations area

181 Maintenance of Temporary Facilities

Suitably paint and maintain the temporary facilities Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal

182 Trailers or Storage Buildings

Trailers or storage buildings will be permitted where space is available subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer The trailers or buildings shall be in good condition free from visible damage rust and deterioration and meet all applicable safety requirements Trailers shall be roadworthy and comply with all appropriate state and local vehicle requirements Failure to maintain storage trailers or buildings to these standards shall result in the removal of non-complying units at the Contractors expense A sign not smaller than 24 by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed on the trailer depicting the company name business phone number and emergency phone number Trailers shall be anchored to resist high winds and must meet applicable state of local standards for anchoring mobile trailers

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 Backflow Preventers

Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements AWWA C511 Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged cast iron mounted gate valve and strainer 304 stainless steel or bronze internal parts The particular make modeldesign and size of backflow preventers to be installed shall be included in the latest edition of the List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR List



and shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Provide an approved reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly at each location where the Contractor taps into the Government potable water supply

A certified tester(s) shall perform testing of backflow preventer(s) for proper installation and operation and provide subsequent tagging Backflow preventer tests shall be performed using test equipment procedures and certification forms conforming to those outlined in the latest edition of the Manual of Cross-Connection Control published by the FCCCHR Manual Test and tag each reduced pressure backflow preventer upon initial installation (prior to continued water use) and quarterly thereafter Tag shall contain the following information make model serial number dates of tests results maintenance performed and signature of tester Record test results on certification forms conforming to requirements cited earlier in this paragraph

Not used




SECTION 01 57 19

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

0914

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


US DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-S-16165 (Rev E) Shielding Harnesses Shielding Items and Shielding Enclosures for Use in the Reduction of Interference from Engine Electrical Systems

MIL-STD-461 (2007 Rev F) Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment

MIL-STD-462 (Rev D Notice 4) Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics

US ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 832-R-92-005 (1992) Storm Water Management for Construction Activities Developing Pollution Preventions and Plans and Best Management Practices



40 CFR 12226 Storm Water Discharges (Applicable to State NPDES Programs see section 12325)

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and



Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan

49 CFR 171 General Information Regulations and Definitions

49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table Special Provisions Hazardous Materials Communications Emergency Response Information and Training Requirements

49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings

12 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection

Contractors shall complete and provide environmental training documentation for training required by Federal State and local regulations

13 DEFINITIONS

131 Sediment

Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind

132 Solid Waste

Rubbish debris garbage and other discarded solid materials except recyclables and hazardous waste as defined in paragraph entitled Hazardous Waste resulting from industrial commercial and agricultural operations and from community activities

133 Sanitary Wastes

Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage

134 Rubbish

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as non-recyclable paper and cardboard crockery and bones

Recyclables includes clean paper cardboard glass plastics (No 1 amp 2) metal and cans

Non-recyclable paper and cardboard are defined as material that has become wet or contaminated with food or other residue that render it un-acceptable for recycling

Treated woodlumber is defined as wood that has been stained or treated to prevent rot or composite wood products such as OSB pressboard furniture etc

Untreated wood is defined as lumber trees stumps limbs tops and shrubs



135 Debris

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as ashes and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work (excluding organic matter) leaves pine straw grass and shrub clippings

136 Chemical Wastes

This includes salts acids alkalies herbicides pesticides and organic chemicals

137 Garbage

Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation cooking dispensing and consumption of food

138 Hazardous Waste

Hazardous substances as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and local regulations

139 Hazardous Materials

Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172

1310 Landscape Features

Trees plants shrubs and ground cover

1311 Lead Acid Battery Electrolyte

The electrolyte substance (liquid medium) within a battery cell

1312 Oily Waste

Petroleum products and bituminous materials

1313 Class I Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)

Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Sections 602 (a and b) of The Clean Air Act

14 SUBMITTALS




Preconstruction survey report

Permit for storm water discharge

Notice of Intent

Notice of Termination



Pollution Prevention Plan


Solid waste disposal permit

Disposal permit for hazardous waste

Environmental training documentation

Permit to transport hazardous waste

Hazardous waste certification

Erosion and sediment control inspection reports

Environmental Plan Review

Annual Report of Products Containing Recovered Materials

141 Solid Waste Disposal Permit

Submit one copy of a State and local permit or license for the solid waste disposal facility

142 Disposal Permit for Hazardous Waste

Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and State permits manifests or licenses for transportation treatment storage and disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities

143 Permit to Transport Hazardous Waste

Submit one copy of the EPA or State permit license or regulation for the transporter who will ship the hazardous waste to the permitted Treatment Storage and Disposal (TSD) facility

144 Hazardous Waste Certification

Submit written certification that hazardous waste turned in for disposal was generated on Government property and is identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 40 CFR 261 40 CFR 262 and 40 CFR 263

145 Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports

Submit to the Contracting Officer once every 7 calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event that produces 05 inch of rain

15 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain during the life of the contract environmental protection as defined in this Section Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction practice Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project Comply with Federal State and local regulations pertaining to the environment including but not limited to water air solid waste and noise pollution



16 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

161 Contents of Environmental Protection Plan

a Include any hazardous materials (HM) planned for use on the station shall be included in the station HM Tracking Program maintained by the Safety Department To assist this effort submit a list (including quantities) of HM to be brought to the station and copies of the corresponding material safety data sheets (MSDS) Submit this list to the Contracting Officer At project completion remove any hazardous material brought onto the station Account for the quantity of HM brought to the station the quantity used or expended during the job and the leftover quantity which (1) may have additional useful life as a HM and shall be removed by the Contractor or (2) may be a hazardous waste which shall then be removed as specified herein

b The Environmental Protection Plan shall list and quantify any Hazardous Waste (HW) to be generated during the project

c In accordance with station regulations store HW near the point of generation up to a total quantity of one quart of hazardous waste or 55 gallons of hazardous waste Move any volume exceeding these quantities to a HW permitted area within 3 days Prior to generation of HW contact Contracting Officer for labeling requirements for storage of hazardous wastes

d In accordance with station regulations substitute materials as necessary to reduce the generation of HW and include a statement to that effect in the Environmental Plan

e Contact Contracting Officer for conditions in the area of the project which may be subject to special environmental procedures Include this information in the Preconstruction Survey Describe in the Environmental Protection Plan any permits required prior to working the area and contingency plans in case an unexpected environmental condition is discovered

f Obtain permits for handling HW and deliver completed documents to Contracting Officer for review File the documents with the appropriate agency and complete disposal with the approval of Contracting Officer Deliver correspondence with the State concerning the environmental permits and completed permits to Contracting Officer

162 Environmental Protection Plan Format

The Environmental Protection Plan shall follow the following format

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

Contractor OrganizationAddress and Phone Numbers

1 Hazardous materials to be brought onto the station 2 MSDS package 3 Employee training documentation 4 HW storage plan





5 HW to be generated 6 Preconstruction survey results 7 Permitting requirements identified

163 Environmental Plan Review

Fourteen days after the environmental protection meeting submit the proposed environmental plan for further discussion review and approval

164 Preconstruction Survey

Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site with the Contracting Officer and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site

17 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

40 CFR 12226 EPA 832-R-92-005 Provide Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

a Identify potential sources of pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the site

b Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity at the construction site

c Ensure compliance with terms of EPA general permit for storm water discharge

d Select applicable management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005

e Provide completed copy of Notice of Intent and Notice of Termination except for effective date

171 Notice of Intent

The Contractor shall prepare a completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form in accordance with the requirements of the States general permit for storm water discharges from construction sites Submit NOI and the appropriate permit fee to the Contracting Office a minimum of 14 days prior to start of construction

The Contractor shall keep a copy of the approved permit on site at the Contractors trailer at all times

172 Class I and II ODS Prohibition

Class I ODS as defined and identified herein shall not be used in the performance of this contract nor be provided as part of the equipment This prohibition shall be considered to prevail over any other provision specification drawing or referenced documents



18 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

181 Licenses and Permits

Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to FAR 52236-7 Permits and Responsibilities except for those permits which will be obtained by the Contracting Officer as follows

For permits obtained by the Contracting Officer whether or not required by the permit perform inspections of the work in progress and submit certifications to the applicable regulatory agency via the Contracting Officer that the work conforms to the contract and permit requirements The inspections and certifications shall be provided through the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the work is being performed As a part of the quality control plan which is required to be submitted for approval by the quality control section provide a subitem containing the name PE registration number address and telephone number of the professional engineer(s) who will be performing the inspections and certifications for each permit listed above

19 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS

The Contractor shall familiarize himself with requirements of the attached Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune Contractor Environmental Guide

110 CAMP LEJEUNE SANITARY LANDFILL INFORMATION

1 Contractors may ONLY use the Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill for the disposal of asbestos containing materials building products with tightly adhered lead containing paint non-contaminated clean dirt and clean gravel The hours of operation are 0730-1530

2 Delivery of acceptable materials (identified above) shall be by appointment only Appointments made by phone at 910-451-5011 or 910-451-2946 ALL other contractor generated material shall be weighed through the Base Landfill scales before being removed from the Base Contractors utilizing the base scales will require Contracting Officer assisted pre-registration with the Landfill Manager

3 The Contracting Officer will register the contract via E-mail with the Base Landfill All haul vehicles will maintain a secure vehicle placard as a condition to utilize the scale E-mail the contract information to the Landfill Clerk including the name on the Prime Contractor contract number job namedescription completion date and whether or not any of the above materials will be delivered to the Landfill

4 As of May 01 2014 the above supersedes any other statementsspecifications pertaining to the delivery of materials to the Base Landfill

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS

The Contractor shall submit data annually (by December 1) products used during the previous fiscal year (October 1 - September 30) as required by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by Resource Conservation



and Recovery Act (RCRA) Report forms is attached to end of this section as Appendix A

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of work Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified Conform to the State permitting requirements of the Clean Water Act

311 Land Resources

Except in areas to be cleared do not remove cut deface injure or destroy trees or shrubs without Contracting Officers permission Do not fasten or attach ropes cables or guys to existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by Contracting Officer Where such use of attach ropes cables or guys is authorized the Contractor shall be responsible for any resultant damage

3111 Protection of Trees

Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged by construction operations Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas By approved excavation remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed Removal of trees and the procedure for removal requires approval of the Contracting Officer

3112 Landscape Replacement

Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations and replace with equivalent undamaged trees and landscape features Obtain Contracting Officers approval before removal or replacement

3113 Temporary Construction

Remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads work area structures foundations of temporary structures stockpiles of excess or waste materials and other signs of construction Grade temporary roads parking areas and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours

312 Water Resources

3121 Stream Crossings

The Contracting Officers approval is required before any equipment will be permitted to ford live streams In areas where frequent crossings are required install temporary culverts or bridges Remove temporary culverts or bridges upon completion of work and repair the area to its original condition or as indicated

3122 Oily Wastes

Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground



drainage areas or local bodies of water Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks in the event of leakage or spillage

313 Fish and Wildlife Resources

Do not disturb fish and wildlife Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife except as indicated or specified

32 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Contracting Officer historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed by the Contracting Officer to resume work The Government retains ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources

33 NOISE

Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products as certified by the EPA Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted without written permission from the Contracting Officer and then only during designated times

34 RESTRICTIONS ON EQUIPMENT

341 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression

a Electric motors must comply with MIL-STD-461 relative to radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference A test for electromagnetic interference will not be required for motors that are identical physically and electrically to those that have previously met the requirements of MIL-STD-461 An electromagnetic interference suppression test will not be required for electric motors without commutation or sliprings having no more than one starting contact and operated at 3600 revolutions per minute or less

b Equipment used by the Contractor shall comply with MIL-S-16165 for internal combustion engines and MIL-STD-461 for other devices capable of producing radiated or conducted interference

c Conduct tests for electromagnetic interference on electric motors and Contractors construction equipment in accordance with MIL-STD-461 and MIL-STD-462 Test location shall be reasonably free from radiated and conducted interference Furnish testing equipment instruments and personnel for making the tests a test location and other necessary facilities

342 Radio Transmitter Restrictions

Conform to the restrictions and procedures for the use of radio transmitting equipment as directed Do not use transmitters without prior approval



35 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

351 Local Erosion and Sediment Control Plan

Follow the approved storm water management erosion and sediment control plan

352 Burnoff

Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted

353 Borrow Pit Areas

Manage and control borrow pit areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby streams or lakes Restore areas including those outside the borrow pit disturbed by borrow and haul operations Restoration includes grading replacement of topsoil and establishment of a permanent vegetative cover Uniformly grade side slopes of borrow pit to not more than a slope of 1 part vertical to 2 parts horizontal Uniformly grade the bottom of the borrow pits to provide a flat bottom and drain by outfall ditches or other suitable means Stockpile topsoil removed during the borrow pit operation and use as part of restoring the borrow pit area

354 Protection of Erodible Soils

Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade as indicated or specified Immediately protect side and back slopes upon completion of rough grading Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils

355 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils

Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation

3551 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site This includes construction of diversion ditches benches berms and use of silt fences and strawbales to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses

3552 Sediment Basins

Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins Pump dry and remove accumulated sediment after each storm Use a paved weir or vertical overflow pipe for overflow Remove collected sediment from the site Institute effluent quality monitoring programs

3553 Borrow

Permit only in areas where suitable environmental controls are possible

3554 Vegetation and Mulch

Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent vegetation temporary vegetation mulching or netting Stabilize slopes by hydroseeding anchoring mulch in place covering with anchored netting



sodding or such combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control

a Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed Include topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of grass

36 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES

Pick up and separate solid wastes and place in covered containers which are regularly emptied Do not prepare or cook food on the project site Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes At project completion leave the areas clean

361 Disposal of Metal Paint Cans

All metal paint cans shall be taken to Building 962 for recycling The cans shall be empty and completely dry The cans shall be triple rinsed and stenciled Triple Rinsed prior to turn in The Contractor shall give the Government 72 hours advance notice prior to turn-in Contractor is responsible for rinsing stenciling crushing and deposting in Government owned receptable located at Building 962

362 Disposal of Rubbish and Debris

Rubbish and debris shall be taken off-base for disposal unless specifically directed otherwise

Metals shall be taken to the DRMO disposal area at Lot 203 as specified

363 Disposal Off-Base

a Provide 24-hour advance written notice to the Contracting Office of Contractors intention to dispose of off base

b Disposal at sites or landfills not holding a valid State of North Carolina permit is specifically prohibited The prohibition also applies to sites where a permit may have been applied for but not yet obtained

c Off-base disposal of construction debris outside the parameters of this paragraph at site without State permits andor not in accordance with regulatory requirements shall require the Contractor at his own expense to remove transport and relocate the debris to a State approved site The Contractor shall also be required to pay any fines penalties or fees related to the illegal disposal of construction debris

37 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

371 Hazardous Waste Generation

Handle generated hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 262

372 Hazardous Waste Disposal

Dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with Federal State and local regulations especially 40 CFR 263 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 265 Removal of hazardous waste from Government property shall not occur without prior



notification and coordination with the Contracting officer Transport hazardous waste by a permitted licensed or registered hazardous waste transported to a TSD facility Hazardous waste shall be properly identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 49 CFR 172 Provide completed manifest for hazardous waste disposed of off-site to the Contracting Officer within 7 days of disposal Hazardous waste shall not be brought onto the station

373 Hazardous Waste Storage

Store hazardous waste in containers in accordance with 49 CFR 178 Identify hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261 and 40 CFR 262 Identify hazardous waste generated within the confines of the station by the stations EPA generator identification number

374 Spills of Oil and Hazardous Materials

Take precautions to prevent spills of oil and hazardous material In the event of a spill immediately notify the Contracting Officer Spill response shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and applicable State regulations

375 Lead-Acid Batteries

Dispose of lead-acid batteries that are not damaged or leaking at a State-approved battery recycle or at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility For lead-acid batteries that are leaking or have cracked casings dispose of the electrolyte solution using one of the following alternatives

a An industrial waste water treatment plant if available and approved by the Contracting Officer for disposing of lead-acid battery electrolyte

b Dispose of the lead-acid battery electrolyte at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility

The management and disposal of waste lead-acid batteries and electrolyte shall comply with requirements for management and disposal of hazardous wastes

376 Mercury Control

Prior to starting work remove thermostats switches and other components that contain mercury Upon removal place items containing mercury in doubled polyethylene bags label and turn over to the Contracting Officer for disposal

377 Petroleum Products

Protect against spills and evaporation during fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles Dispose of lubricants to be discarded and excess oil

38 DUST CONTROL

Keep dust down at all times including nonworking periods Sprinkle or treat with dust suppressants the soil at the site haul roads and other areas disturbed by operations Dry power brooming will not be permitted



Instead use vacuuming wet mopping wet sweeping or wet power brooming Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks concrete and bituminous concrete Do not shake bags of cement concrete mortar or plaster unnecessarily

381 Abrasive Blasting

3811 Blasting Operations

The use of silica sand is prohibited in abrasive blasting

Provide tarpaulin drop cloths and windscreens to enclose abrasive blasting operations to confine and collect dust abrasive agent paint chips and other debris in accordance with the requirements specified Perform work involving removal of hazardous material in accordance with 29 CFR 1910

3812 Disposal Requirements

Collect dust abrasive paint and other debris resulting from abrasive blasting operations and store in 55 gallon drums with watertight lids Take a representative sample of this material and test for EP toxicity with respect to lead chromium and cadmium content The sampling and testing shall be performed in accordance with 40 CFR 261 Handle debris resulting from the abrasive blasting operations as a hazardous material and dispose of in accordance with 40 CFR 262 40 CFR 263 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 265 Transport hazardous material by a transporter licensed and permitted for transportation of hazardous materials Dispose of hazardous material in an EPA-approved and permitted facility specifically designated for hazardous waste disposal

39 QUARANTINE FOR IMPORTED FIRE ANT (482)

Onslow Jones and Cartaret Counties and portions of Duplin and Craven Counties have been declared a generally infested area by the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) for the imported fire ant Compliance with the quarantine regulations established by this authority as set forth in USDA Publication 30181 of 31 December 1992 is required for operations hereunder Pertinent requirements of the quarantine for materials originating on the Camp Lejeune reservation the Marine Corps Air Station (Helicopter) New River and the Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point which are to be transported outside Onslow County or adjacent suppression areas include the following

a Certification is required for the following articles and they shall not be moved from the reservation to any point outside Onslow County and adjacent designated areas unless accompanied by a valid inspection certificate issued by an Officer of the Plant Protection and Quarantine Program (PPQ) of the US Department of Agriculture

(1) Bulk soil

(2) Used mechanized soil-moving equipment (Used mechanized soil-moving equipment is exempt if cleaned of loose noncompacted soil)

(3) Other products articles or means of conveyances if it is determined by an inspector that they present a hazard of



transporting spread of the imported fire ant and the person in possession thereof has been so notified

b Authorization for movement of equipment outside the imported fire and regulated area shall be obtained from USDA Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS) Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) Box 28 Goldsboro North Carolina 27533-0028 Attn Mr William Scroggins or Mr Frank Best telephone (919) 735-1941 If Mr Scroggins or Mr Best are not available contact Mr Jim Kelley at (910) 815-4667 the supervisors office in Wilmington Requests for inspection shall be made sufficiently in advance of the date of movement to permit arrangements for the services of authorized inspectors The equipment shall be prepared and assembled so that it may be readily inspected Soil on or attached to equipment supplies and materials shall be removed by washing with water or such other means as necessary to accomplish complete removal Resulting spoil shall be wasted as necessary and as directed



ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS

Page 1 of 3

Contractor shall submit data annually (By 1 December) for the followingproducts used during the previous fiscal year (1 October - 30 September) asrequired by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as ammended by ResourceConservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)

Contract Number __________________ Fiscal Year _____________=============================================================================| MATERIAL | UNIT | QUANTITY (CRM) | TOTAL QUANTITY |=============================================================================|A Insulation | | | || 1 Loose fill | Ft3 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 2 Blanket or batt | Ft2 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 3 Board | Ft2 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 4 Spray-in-place | m3 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 5 Other | | | ||============================|=========|===================|================||B Cement and Concrete | yd3 | | ||============================|=========|===================|================||C Paper and Paper Products | | | || 1 Copy Paper | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 2 PrintingWriting Paper| Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 3 Corrugated and | | | || fiberboard boxes | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 4 Folding boxboard and | | | || cartons | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 5 Stationary office | | | || papers envelopes and| | | || computer paper | $Amt | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 6 Toilet tissue paper | | | || towels fasial tissue| | | || paper napkins doilies| | | || and industrial wipes | $Amt | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 7 Brown papers and | | | || coarse papers | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 8 Other | | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| | | | ||===========================================================================|

APPENDIX A



Page 2 of 3

=============================================================================| MATERIAL | DEFINITION |=============================================================================|1 Quantity (CRM) | Quantity used containing recovered materials||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||2 Total Quantity | Quantity used containing recovered materials || | plus quantity used not containing recovered || | materials ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||3 Unit | Ft3 (cubic feet) Ft2 (square feet) || | m3 (cubic meters) yd3 (cubic yards) box || | (number of boxes used) $ Amt (dollar value || | of material used) ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||4 Loose-Fill Insulation | Includes but is not limited tocellulose || | fiber mineral fibers (fiberglass and rock || | wool) vermiculite and perlite ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||5 Blanket or Batt | Includes but is not limited to mineral || Insulation | fibers (fiberglass and rock wool) ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||6 Board Insulation | This category refers to sheathing roof || | decking and wood panel insulation It || | includes but is not limited to cellulose|| | fiber fiberboard perlite composite board || | polyurethane polyisocyanurate polystyrene || | phenolics and composites ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||7 Spray-in-place | Includes but is not limited to foam-in- || Insulation | place polyurethane and polyisocyanurate || | and spray-on cellulose ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||8 Cement or Concrete | || Containing Recovered | || Materials Cement or | || Concrete Containing | || Fly Ash | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||9 Copy Paper | This item refers to any grade of paper || | suitable for copying by the xerographic || | method ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||10 Printing amp Writing | This item refers to paper designed for || Paper | printing other than newsprint such as || | offset or book paper and paper || | suitable for pen and ink pencil typewriter || | or printing ||===========================================================================|

APPENDIX A



Page 3 of 3

=============================================================================| MATERIAL | DEFINITION |=============================================================================|11 Corrugated amp Fiberboard | Corrugated boxes refer to boxes made of || Boxes | corrugated paperboard which in turn is || | made from a fluted corrugating medium pasted || | to two flat sheets of paperboard || | (linerboard) Fiber or fiberboard boxes || | refer to boxes made from containerboard || | either solid fiber or corrugated paperboard || | (general term) or boxes made from solid || | paperboard of the same material throughout ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||12 Folding Boxes and | This item refers to a paperboard || Cartons | suitable for the manufacture of folding || | cartons ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||13 Stationery Office | This item is considered self-explanatory || Papers Envelopes and | however if questions arise refer to || Manifold Business Forms | 40 CFR 2504 for definitions of any of these || | items ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||14 Toilet Tissue Paper | This item is considered self-explanatory || Towels Facial Tissue | however if questions arise refer to || Paper Napkins Doilies | 40 CFR 2504 for definitions of any of these || and Industrial Wipes | items ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||15 Brown Papers and Coarse| Brown papers refer to papers usually || Papers | made from unbleached kraft pulp and used || | for bags sacks wrapping paper and so || | forth Coarse papers refer to papers || | used for industrial purposes as || | distinguished from those used for cultural || | or sanitary purposes ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||16 Other | Any other type of paper not included in any || | of the above categories ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||===========================================================================|



APPENDIX A




SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


US GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED BD+C (2009 R 2010) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Building Design and Construction (LEED-NC)

12 GOVERNMENT POLICY

Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design construction and use of facilities As part of the implementation of that policy (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing cutting and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse Divert a minimum of 60 percent by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill

13 MANAGEMENT

Develop and implement a waste management program Take a pro-active responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors vendors and suppliers to participate in the effort The Environmental Manager as specified in Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS is responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal excess or unusable construction materials packaging materials for construction products and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work In the management of waste consider the availability of viable markets the condition of the material the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates Implement any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage or recycling accrue to the Contractor Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling reuse and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal state and local regulations Also provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation handling recycling salvage reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project

14 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL



PROCEDURES


Waste Management Plan ( LEED BD+C)


Records ( LEED BD+C)

15 MEETINGS

Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings After award of the Contract and prior to commencement of work schedule and conduct a meeting with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste management The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL At a minimum discuss environmental and waste management goals and issues at the following additional meetings

a Preconstruction meeting

b Regular site meetings

c Work safety meetings

16 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Submit a waste management plan within 15 days after contract award and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting The plan demonstrates how to meet the the project waste diversion goal Also include the following in the plan

a Name of individuals on the Contractors staff responsible for waste prevention and management

b Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation

c Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management

d Description of the specific approaches to be used in recyclingreuse of the various materials generated including the areas on site and equipment to be used for processing sorting and temporary storage of wastes

e Characterization including estimated types and quantities of the waste to be generated

f Name of landfill andor incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the project

g Identification of local and regional reuse programs including non-profit organizations such as schools local housing agencies and organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity Include the name location and



phone number for each reuse facility to be used and provide a copy of the permit or license for each facility

h List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale salvaged and reused on the current project salvaged and stored for reuse on a future project or recycled Identify the recycling facilities by name location and phone number including a copy of the permit or license for each facility

i Identification of materials that cannot be recycledreused with an explanation or justification to be approved by the Contracting Officer

j Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item (h) above will be protected from contamination

k Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site)

l Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue generated by sale of the materials and the incineration andor landfill cost avoidance

Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer Approval of Contractors Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project cumulative waste diversion requirement Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to each subcontractor the Quality Control Manager and the Contracting Officer

17 RECORDS

Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated the quantity of waste diverted through sale reuse or recycling and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration Quantities may be measured by weight or by volume but must be consistent throughout List each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date Identify the landfill recycling center waste processor or other organization used to process or receive the solid waste Provide explanations for any waste not recycled or reused With each application for payment submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion and submit manifests weight tickets receipts and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material Make the records available to the Contracting Officer during construction and deliver to the Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records

18 REPORTS

Provide quarterly reports and a final report to the Contracting Officer Include project name information for waste generated this quarter and cumulative totals for the project in quarterly and final reports Also include in each report supporting documentation to include manifests weight tickets receipts and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material Include timber harvest and demolition information if any



19 COLLECTION

Separate store protect and handle at the site identified recyclable and salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and salvagability of identified materials Provide the necessary containers bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable Locate out of the way of construction traffic Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and coordinate with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Separate materials by one of the following methods

191 Source Separated Method

Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (eg free of dirt adhesives solvents petroleum contamination and other substances deleterious to the recycling process) Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area

a Land clearing debris

b Asphalt

c Concrete and masonry

d Metal (eg banding stud trim ductwork piping rebar roofing other trim steel iron galvanized stainless steel aluminum copper zinc lead brass bronze)

(1) Ferrous

(2) Non-ferrous

e Glass (colored glass allowed)

f Paper

(1) Bond

(2) Newsprint

(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials

g Plastic



Type

1 Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET PETE)

2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

3 Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)

4 Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)

5 Polypropylene (PP)

6 Polystyrene (PS)

7 Other Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above or is made of more than one resin listed above and used in a multi-layer combination

192 Co-Mingled Method

Place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and then transport to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed

193 Other Methods

Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer

110 DISPOSAL

Control accumulation of waste materials and trash Recycle or dispose of collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications dispose of in accordance with the following

1101 Reuse

Give first consideration to salvage for reuse since little or no re-processing is necessary for this method and less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form Coordinate reuse with the Contracting Officer Consider sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse

1102 Recycle

Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse but having value as being recyclable Recycle all fluorescent lamps HID lamps and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials



1103 Waste

Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to waste-to-energy plants where available As the last choice dispose of materials at a landfill or incinerator

1104 Return

Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used -- End of Section --



SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS



Equipmentproduct warranty list

Submit Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data


As-built drawings

Record of materials


Equipmentproduct warranty tag

12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

As-Built Drawings will be submitted as specified in 121 along with GIS Deliverables which will be created and submitted as specified in Section 01 78 30 DIGITAL DATA DELIVERABLES (GIS)


FAC 5252236-9310 Record Drawings As-built drawings will be submitted in redline mark-up format

122 As-Built Record of Materials

Furnish a record of materials

Where several manufacturers brands types or classes of the item listed have been used in the project designate specific areas where each item was used Designations shall be keyed to the areas and spaces depicted on the contract drawing Furnish the record of materials used in the following format

MATERIALS SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER MATERIALS USED WHERE DESIGNATION (MANUFACTURERS USED DESIGNATION)

__________ _____________ ____________ _______________ ________




13 EQUIPMENTPRODUCT WARRANTIES

131 EquipmentProduct Warranty List

Furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing written warranties for equipmentproducts that have extended warranties (warranty periods exceeding the standard one-year warranty) furnished under the contract and prepare a complete listing of such equipmentproducts The equipmentproducts list shall state the specification section applicable to the equipmentproduct duration of the warranty therefor start date of the warranty ending date of the warranty and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty The warranty period shall begin on the same date as project acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period Execute the full list and deliver to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance of the facility

132 Equipment Warranty Tags and Guarantors Local Representative

Furnish with each warranty the name address and telephone number of the guarantors representative nearest to the location where the equipment and appliances are installed The guarantors representative upon request of the station representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty At the time of installation tag each item of warranted equipment with a durable oil- and water-resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer Attach tag with copper wire and spray with a clear silicone waterproof coating Leave the date of acceptance and QCs signature blank until project is accepted for beneficial occupancy Tag shall show the following information

EQUIPMENTPRODUCT WARRANTY TAG

Type of EquipmentProduct ____________________Warranty Period __________ From __________ To __________Contract No ____________________Inspectors Signature ____________________ Date Accepted ______________

Construction ContractorName ____________________Address _______________________Telephone _______________________

Warranty Contact __________________Name ____________________Address ________________________Telephone ________________________

STATION PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

14 COMPLETE SUBMITTAL PACKAGE

Contractor shall make electronic copies of all submittals including the approved transmittal sheets and provide two (2) CDDVDs containing all



submittals for the project


15 CLEANUP

Leave premises broom clean Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view remove temporary labels stains and foreign substances polish transparent and glossy surfaces vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition Clean filters of operating equipment Clean debris from roofs gutters downspouts and drainage systems Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas Remove waste and surplus materials rubbish and construction facilities from the site

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA0706

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM E1971 (2005 R 2011) Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings

12 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit Operation and Maintenance (OampM) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment product or system stressing and enhancing the importance of system interactions troubleshooting and long-term preventative maintenance and operation The subcontractors must compile and prepare data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel The Contractor must compile and prepare aggregate OampM data including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain OampM requirements at the system equipment component and subassembly level Include an index preceding each submittal Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

121 Package Quality

Documents must be fully legible Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted

122 Package Content

Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections including the content of the packages and addressing each product component and system designated for data package submission except as follows Commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections must use Data Package 3 Commissioned items with a Data Package 1 or 2 requirement must use instead Data Package 3

123 Changes to Submittals

Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data must be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the OampM Data Submit changes additions or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change



requirement

124 Review and Approval

The Contractors Commissioning Authority (CA) must review the commissioned systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability The CA must verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the requirements of the Contract documents and design intent particularly as they relate to functionality energy performance water performance maintainability sustainability system cost indoor environmental quality and local environmental impacts The CA must communicate deficiencies to the Contracting Officer Upon a successful review of the corrections the CA must recommend approval and acceptance of these OampM manuals to the Contracting Officer This work is in addition to the normal review procedures for OampM data

125 OampM Database

Develop a database from the OampM manuals that contains the information required to start a preventative maintenance program

13 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN OampM DATA PACKAGES

131 Operating Instructions

Include specific instructions procedures and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system

1311 Safety Precautions and Hazards

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions

1312 Operator Prestart

Include procedures required to install set up and prepare each system for use

1313 Startup Shutdown and Post-Shutdown Procedures

Provide narrative description for Startup Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure

1314 Normal Operations

Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment

1315 Emergency Operations

Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire explosion spills or other foreseeable contingencies Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled



1316 Operator Service Requirements

Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication adjustment inspection and recording gage readings

1317 Environmental Conditions

Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature humidity and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each product component or system Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run

1318 Operating Log

Provide forms sample logs and instructions for maintaining necessary operating records

132 Preventive Maintenance

Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials

1321 Lubrication Data

Include preventative maintenance lubrication data in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled Operator Service Requirements

a A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications

b Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points recommended types and grades of lubricants and capacities

c A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency

1322 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule

Include manufacturers schedule for routine preventive maintenance inspections tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance Provide manufacturers projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily weekly monthly and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft For periodic calibrations provide manufacturers specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation

1323 Cleaning Recommendations

Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E1971

133 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)

Include manufacturers recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air



quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials

1331 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement

1332 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work On diagrams number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type identically to actual installation configuration and numbering

1333 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards

1334 Removal and Replacement Instructions

Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal replacement disassembly and assembly of components assemblies subassemblies accessories and attachments Provide tolerances dimensions settings and adjustments required Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations

1335 Spare Parts and Supply Lists

Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain

134 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours

Include manufacturers projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including requirements by type of craft Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately

135 Appendices

Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment Include the following

1351 Product Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections



1352 Manufacturers Instructions

Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions submittals required in the applicable technical sections

1353 OampM Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections

1354 Parts Identification

Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component assembly subassembly and accessory of the end items subject to replacement Include special hardware requirements such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts Identify parts by make model serial number and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification Provide clear and legible illustrations drawings and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items When illustrations omit the part numbers and description both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index reference or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components assemblies and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment components assemblies subassemblies attachments or accessories such as typically shown in a master parts catalog

1355 Warranty Information

List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force Include warranty information for primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system

1356 Extended Warranty Information

List all warranties for products equipment components and sub-components whose duration exceeds one year For each warranty listed indicate the applicable specification section duration start date end date and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment Also list or reference all specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to keep the warranty valid

1357 Personnel Training Requirements

Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems

1358 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information

Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation maintenance and repair of components



1359 Testing and Performance Data

Include completed prefunctional checklists functional performance test forms and monitoring reports Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms

13510 Field Test Reports

Provide Field Test Reports (SD-06) that apply to equipment associated with the system

13511 Contractor Information

Provide a list that includes the name address and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment or system For each item also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturers representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site Provide the name address and telephone number of the product equipment and system manufacturers

14 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS OampM DATA PACKAGES

Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems

a Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions features modes and other operations including unoccupied operation seasonal changeover manual operation and alarms Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms

b Full as-built sequence of operations

c Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not Cx tests)

d Full points list A listing of rooms shall be provided with the following information for each room

(1) Floor

(2) Room number

(3) Room name

(4) Air handler unit ID

(5) Reference drawing number

(6) Air terminal unit tag ID

(7) Heating andor cooling valve tag ID

(8) Minimum cfm

(9) Maximum cfm

e Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system



f Full as-built print out of software program

g Electronic File

(1) Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file in PDF format Provide HDDrsquos DVDs or CDs as appropriate so that each one contains all maintenance and record files and also the Project Record Documents and Training Videos of the entire program for this facility

(2) Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory

(3) Link the index to separate files within the composite of files Book mark maintenance and record files that have a Table of Contents according to the Table of Contents

h Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations

15 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Furnish the OampM data packages specified in individual technical sections The required information for each OampM data package is as follows

151 Data Package 1

a Safety precautions

b Cleaning recommendations

c Maintenance and repair procedures

d Warranty information

e Contractor information

f Spare parts and supply list

152 Data Package 2


b Normal operations

c Environmental conditions

d Lubrication data

e Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

f Cleaning recommendations

g Maintenance and repair procedures

h Removal and replacement instructions



i Spare parts and supply list

j Parts identification

k Warranty information

l Contractor information

153 Data Package 3


b Operator prestart

c Startup shutdown and post-shutdown procedures

d Normal operations

e Emergency operations

f Environmental conditions

g Lubrication data

h Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

i Cleaning recommendations

j Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

k Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

l Maintenance and repair procedures

m Removal and replacement instructions

n Spare parts and supply list

o Product submittal data

p OampM submittal data

q Parts identification

r Warranty information

s Testing equipment and special tool information

t Testing and performance data

u Contractor information

154 Data Package 4


b Operator prestart




d Normal operations


f Operator service requirements

g Environmental conditions

h Lubrication data

i Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

j Cleaning recommendations

k Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

l Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

m Maintenance and repair procedures

n Removal and replacement instructions

o Spare parts and supply list

p Corrective maintenance man-hours

q Product submittal data

r OampM submittal data

s Parts identification

t Warranty information

u Personnel training requirements

v Testing equipment and special tool information

w Testing and performance data

x Contractor information

155 Data Package 5


b Operator prestart

c Start-up shutdown and post-shutdown procedures

d Normal operations

e Environmental conditions

f Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

g Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques



h Wiring and control diagrams

i Maintenance and repair procedures

j Removal and replacement instructions

k Spare parts and supply list

l Product submittal data

m Manufacturers instructions

n OampM submittal data

o Parts identification

p Testing equipment and special tool information

q Warranty information

r Testing and performance data

s Contractor information

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 78 30

GIS DATA DELIVERABLES

0814

PART 1 GENERAL

11 OBJECTIVE

The primary objective of this section is to provide detailed specifications for collection and delivery of geospatial data commonly referred to as Geographic Information System (GIS) data Additionally this section shall provide guidance to ensure that all GIS data delivered is compatible and will add value to the Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune Installation Geospatial Information and Services (IGIampS) GEOdatabase

Failure to comply with the specifications outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverables

111 Point of Contact for MCB Camp Lejeune

The Points of Contact (POC) for assistance in preparation of GISdeliverables are

Resident Officer In Charge Of Construction Public Works DivisionConstruction Manager (CM) Project Manager (PM) or GIS1005 Michael Drive 1005 Michael RoadCamp Lejeune NC 28547-2521 Camp Lejeune NC 28547-2521 (910) 451-2581 (910) 451-2212

12 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


GIS Data Deliverables

13 GOVERNMENT GEOSPATIAL DATA AND SCHEMA

1 The IGIampS repository model schema is based on the Spatial Data Standards for Facilities Infrastructure and Environment (SDSFIE) GEOFidelis Data Model with recurring business driven modifications and or adaptations

a Data will be created and delivered by developing an ARCGIS Personal GEODatabase using ArcGIS 101 or higher if a higher version is being utilized by the Government at the time the deliverable is being developed

b The Contractor shall verify the ArcGIS and schema version via the CM or PM at the commencement of this contract All GIS DATA DELIVERABLES will be created in accordance with the current version and these specifications



c The Contractor is responsible for requesting the existing GIS Data Schema and Domain Properties by means of a Data Request Package (DRP) Receipt of request will include Geospatial Database table structure schema Domain configuration Attribute text format ie case size as well as Meta Data information

d The DRP should be submitted prior to the start of data collection efforts and again on an as needed basis The Contractor shall ensure that all GIS data has been created and delivered utilizing the most up to date IGIampS GEODatabase schema

2 The Contractor shall submit a request for a Geospatial DRP to the CM or the PM

a Request shall be completely filled out and include the all information as instructed on the data request form

b Request only GIS data and or schema for feature classes that are relevant to the contract and within the boundary of project area

c Utilize associated Government modified domain structure(s)

d Attach Scope of Work which is defined by this GIS DATA DELIVERABLES section for each project request

e Return the DRP to the CM or PM for sponsorship and submittal to the Installation Geospatial Information amp Services (IGIampS) Office

f Incomplete forms may delay receipt of the requested GIS data and Schema

The following Spatial Data Standards for Facilities Infrastructure and Environment (SDSFIE) website may offer definitions for Feature data sets Feature Classes and other applicable information However please note that specific Schema or Domain modifications are not available via this resource

httpwwwsdsfieonlineorg

131 Global Positioning System (GPS) and Spatial Reference Properties

GPS data shall be completed in accordance with the GPS Data Collection and Documentation Standards Version 3 (or higher version if available at the time of this project) as prepared by Geographic Information Coordinating Council (GICC) Statewide Mapping Advisory Committee (SMAC) and adopted by the North Carolina Geographic Information Coordinating Council

1 Prior to GPS efforts ALL underground utilities shall be located utilizing a utility locating service in order to verify and obtain accurate feature locations

2 Only bench marks included in the North Carolina Geodetic Survey Base Station Network shall be used for GPS data collection

3 Mission planning is essential and Contractor shall utilize the best Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) values for data accuracy

4 Utility data as identified in paragraph ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION



AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES will be collected utilizing Survey Grade GPS data collection methods

5 Infrastructure data as identified in paragraph ATTRIBUTE DATACOLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES shall be collected utilizing Sub-Foot or better GPS data collection methods

a Spatial accuracy requirements for Survey and Sub-Foot grade data collection are as follows

i Sub-Foot requirements

1) All points shall be within + 12 inches

2) 95 accuracy rate for all points

ii Survey Grade requirements

1) All points shall be within + 1 centimeter


6 Every effort shall be made to capture feature locations without using offsets All Offsets will be noted in the Final Report for each feature

7 Excessive offsets included in the Final Data which shall be referenced in the Final Report shall be reviewed for quality control

a Resubmittal of data will be required if PDOP planning was not observed per this specification

The following GEODatabase Coordinate Systems and Spatial Reference Properties should be utilized for Camp Lejeune

1 Transverse Mercator (UTM) Zone 18N

a GRS 1980 spheroid

b North American Datum 1983 (NAD83) horizontal datum

c North American Vertical Datum 1988 (NAVD88) vertical datum

2 Domain precision of 1000 which will result in a database accuracy of 11000 m

132 Demolished and Abandoned in Place (AIP) features

The Contractor shall reference all Demolished and or AIP features in the data delivered Should the current feature data class attributes and or domains not reference AIP or demolished features the Contractor shall be responsible for appropriately delivering these features by creating an associated Demolished or AIP feature class ie CLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment

The Contractor shall

1 Utilize a blank schema for the associated feature class



2 Rename associated feature class and add DEMO or AIP as a prefix ie DEMOCLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment AIPCLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment

3 All demolished and or AIP features should provide existing spatial and non-spatial data which may be copied from existing data

4 The Contractor will update attributes appropriately to include the following

a Contract Number

b Drawing Number

c isDemolished

d dateDemolished or dateAIP

e Status

133 Creating a New Feature Class

Should a new feature class be required that is not readily available in the current GIS schema provided by the Government the Contractor shall develop the feature class utilizing the schema consistent with the most current version of SDSFIE and document in the Final Report

1 The Contractor shall include the following modifications (fields) to the schema structure and shall submit all information to the CM or PM for direction and final approval

a Contract Number

b Drawing Number

134 GIS Topology Rules

All data must be created using GIS topology rules for polygons points and lines such as but not limited to the following examples

1 Polygons Polylines and points rules please reference illustrating topology rules in ArcGIS at wwwesricom

2 Polygons must not have slivers

3 All utility or infrastructure system data which is but is not limited to transportation system and electrical water steam distribution and wastewater collection etc will be created using GIS spatial connectivity rules which specify that vertex edge and endpoints be snapped to features within the system

4 Features will be snapped to the appropriate item

5 Data will be created to represent the real world for example water sewer and transportations systems etc will be drawn and or created in the direction of flow

6 Utility and transportation systems will be created from source to sink etc



7 Abandoned In Place (AIP) utility lines will be located and updated in the current feature data set and identified as AIP in the attribute table

135 Creation of Geographic Data Documentation (METADATA)

For each digital file delivered containing geographic information the Contractor shall provide documentation consistent with the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) Content Standards for Digital Geospatial Metadata (CSDGM) Both GEOFidelis Mandatory and FGDC Mandatory fields shall be completed for each geographic data set

The Geospatial Information amp Services (IGIampS) Metadata Authoring Guide is included in the DRP package

Metadata generation tools included in the ArcGIS suite of software (or equivalent technology) shall be used in the production of the required metadata in XML format Regardless of the tools used for metadata creation the Contractor must ensure that the metadata is delivered in XML format and can be easily imported into the IGIampS GEODatabase A copy of the FGDC metadata standard can be obtained on the internet at httpwwwfgdcgov or by contacting

Federal Geographic Data Committee590 National CenterReston Virginia 20192Email fgdcfgdcgov

(NOTE The metadata should be formatted from the Government perspective not the Contractor project perspective Therefore such items as Point of Contact (POC) should be the POC currently associated with the data and NOT the Contractors Project Manager The Contractor shall use language and format consistent with existing metadata)

136 New Feature Class Requirements

When developing a new feature class the Contractor shall develop the initial structure consistent with the most current version of SDSFIE

a If further modifications to the database structure are required the Contractor shall consult with the Government Project Manager for direction and final approval

b All new feature data classes shall be created in compliance with SDSFIE noted on the final report

137 GIS Submittals Guidelines

All GIS Submittals will be submitted to the CM or PM and then analyzed by Government GIS personnel prior to final approval Failure to comply with the specifications outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverables

1 Prior to any database development the Contractor shall provide the Government with a technical approach document for review and approval The Technical Approach document will describe in detail the Contractors technical approach to designing and developing the database



2 All attributes shall be populated in accordance with the ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES and shall be obtained via contract specifications plans and record drawings

3 The Contractor may be required to conduct research collect data and make copies of reports and studies as necessary to verify existing andor record drawing data Record drawing data and closed contracts can be located in the Technical Records Section in the Public Works Department

4 Raw GPS data and collection data files shall be included with every phase of delivery

5 Actual spatial and non-spatial conditions in the field always supersede drawings It is the Contractors responsibility to locate and field verify all features to ensure attribute data and location is correctly recorded

6 The Contractor shall submit a preliminary review of data at 15 to 25 percent contract completion to ensure specifications compliance

7 The Contractor shall deliver digital geographic maps GPS collection files and related data All working text and documents and personal geodatabase shall be included for review in the draft and final delivery of data

a All maps of GIS DATA DELIVERABLES will be ANSI C size and include a project title contract number scale legend standard symbology attributes ie building numbers road names segment diameters etc

8 The Contractor may be required to provide a technical consultant to meet on site

9 The Contractor shall not deliver blank unused schema or feature class data with no attributes Deliver only data pertinent to the contract that adds value to the GEODatabase per this section

10 The Contractor shall deliver GIS Data at the end of each phase for all Phased Projects and Construction projects

11 The Contractor accepts the responsibility to perform quality assurance for all data and related materials required in the section prior to submitting product to the Government

12 The data will be analyzed for discrepancies in subject content correct format in accordance with this statement of work and compatibility with the existing GIS system as well as all other specifications in this section

138 Formats Versions and Guidelines

All data deliverables will be in the following formats andor versions

1 GIS data will be provided in an ArcGIS 101 or higher if a higher version is being used by the Government at the time of this project The Contractor shall verify the ArcGIS version via the CM or PM at the commencement of this contract



2 Microsoft Office (MS) Suite data shall be delivered in MS 2010

3 Microsoft Windows 7 operating system unless otherwise approved by the Government

4 All reports and maps will be delivered as a hard copy and in a searchable Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)

5 All text spreadsheet and database files reports and maps shall be delivered on Compact Disc read - only memory (CD-ROM) or Digital Versatile Disc read - only memory (DVD-ROM)

6 The Contractor shall verify required version(s) of software and schema via the CM or PM

7 Map submittals shall accompany each geospatial deliverable

a Include ANSI C map for each projectarea

b Data should be labeled and attributed per specification

c All maps should include the date a legend scale contract title and number

139 Final Report Requirements with additional Guidelines

The Contractor shall follow the following

1 Specific procedures and list of equipment software and versions that were utilized for the GPS data collection and creation of geospatial data

2 Submit all GPS data files

3 Provide the date(s) the IGIampS schema and geospatial data was received

4 Provide steps taken to create the GEODatabase

5 Provide details on any offsets to include justification as to why offsets were utilized and on which features and or points offsets were used

6 Describe all modifications to the geodatabase to include the name of all new features classes ie new demolished or AIP

7 Provide the source that was utilized for required attributes

a Include an ANSI C size copy of all design drawings that were referenced in the attribute data This information should be included in all phases of delivery to include draft and final reviews

b Provide the overall utility site plan drawing(s)with each submittal

8 Specify Deliverable Draft or Final Submittal when data is submitted to the CM or PM for review



9 Provide the name and contact information for the GIS Technical Point of Contact who can answer questions regarding the data deliverable

10 GIS DATA DELIVERABLES must be provided in a format that does not require translation or prepost processing prior to being loaded into the IGIampS GEODatabase

11 Provide any miscellaneous information that the Contractor deems significant

12 Provide the current version of the GIS DATA DELIVERABLES specification utilized for this contract submittal

1310 Ownership

All digital files final hardcopy products GPS raw data source data acquired for this project and related materials including that furnished by the Government shall become the property of the Government and will not be issued posted distributed or published by the Contractor

Note No endorsement of software or hardware is implied

14 ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES

141 CLJNCLCommon

GPS and collect attribute data as specified for each feature listed with GPS accuracy as described in paragraph Global Positioning System (GPS) and Spatial Reference Properties

GPS and collect the following attributes

CLJNCLRoadCenterline (The center of the road area)

a) roadCategoryb) numberOfLanesc) speedLimitd) isPaved YNe) isOneWay YNf) baseRoadName g) dateConstructedh) gisFeatureCollectionMethodi) contractNumberj) designDrawingNumber

142 CLJNCLREALPROPERTY



CLJNCLBuilding (A roofed floored and walled structure that is completely enclosed)

a) isDemolishedb) structureNumberc) buildingType



d) buildingUsee) heightMaxf) heightUOMg) dateConstructedh) dateDemolishedi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) sdsFeatureNamem) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLFence (A freestanding structure designed to restrict or prevent movement across a boundary)

a) fenceIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) fenceMaterial c) fenceUsed) dateConstructede) gisFeatureCollectionMethodf) contractNumberg) designDrawingNumberh) sdsFeatureNamei) sdsFeatureDescription

143 CLJNCLUTILITIES



CLJNCLElecUtilNode_eExteriorLight (Exterior lighting is supplied by local distribution systems and is generally the only service for which the electric utility installs operates and maintains utilization equipment)

a) exteriorLightTypeb) electricalNodeTypec) operationalStatusd) isLEDe) cableCircuitNamef) hasSensorg) lightingFixtureHeighth) heightUOMi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_eSupportStructure (A structure that supports electric devices Examples include poles towers Hframes and push brace poles)

a) utilityFeatureTypeb) networkTypec) heightValue



d) heightUOMe) utilityOwnerf) operationalStatusg) cableCircuitName - List is available from CM or PMh) gisFeatureCollectionMethodi) contractNumberj) designDrawingNumberk) equipmentInstallationDatel) sdsFeatureNamem) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_sPretreatmentDevice (A wastewater pretreatment device is a piece of equipment that removes contaminants before they enter the waste stream ie OWS amp Trap etc)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) operationalStatusd) pretreatmentDeviceTypee) designCapacityf) designCapacityUOMg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sPumpStation (This is a collection of waste water Pump Station is a facility - this is used to show total capacity for the station)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) numberOfPumpse) totalDesignCapacityf) designCapacityUOMg) totalRatedFlowh) ratedFlowUOMi) operationalStatusj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sSCADASensor (The SCADA sensor is a feature that is used to remotely measure the status of network components)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatus



f) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sSepticTank (A wastewater septic tank is a small-scale anaerobic digester and leach field designed to treat wastewater from an individual facility and is not connected to the wastewater collection system)

a) utilityFeatureTypeb) networkTypec) storageTankProductd) tankLocatione) volumef) volumeUOMg) isContainedh) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemai) isRegulatedj) numberLateralsk) operationalStatusl) gisFeatureCollectionMethodm) contractNumbern) designDrawingNumbero) equipmentInstallationDatep) sdsFeatureNameq) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sUtilityArea (The sUtilityArea is an area of land surrounding a wastewater utility asset or an area of land specifically designated for wastewater utility use ie septic fields storm water basin Oil water separator etc)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) wastewaterUtilityAreaTyped) networkTypee) networkSubTypef) designCapacityg) designCapacityUOMh) operationalStatusi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sFitting (The wastewater fitting class represents the joint between two lines)

a) wastewaterNodeTypeb) networkSubTypec) diameterd) diameterUOM



e) operationalStatusf) pipeMaterialg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sManhole (The wastewater fitting class represents the joint between two lines)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) operationalStatusd) numberOfPipese) pipeMaterialf) diameterg) diameterUOMh) rimElevationi) elevationUOMj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sPump (A wastewater pump is a piece of equipment that adds energy to a fluid being conveyed through a pipe or other closed conduit)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) networkSubTypec) ratedFlowd) ratedFlowUOMe) operationalStatusf) pumpHorsepowerg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment (Wastewater Line - A pipeline for the transport of sewage or industrial waste between the source holding facilities andor treatment facilities)

a) wastewaterSegmentTypeb) networkSubTypec) pipeLocationd) utilityOwner (CLJN ONWASA)e) operationalStatusf) pipeMaterialg) isLinedh) isMarkedForLocating



i) diameterj) diameterUOMk) gisFeatureCollectionMethodl) contractNumberm) designDrawingNumbern) equipmentInstallationDateo) sdsFeatureNamep) downstreamInvertElevationq) upstreamInvertElevationr) elevationUOMs) slopet) slopeUOMu) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sCleanOut (A wastewater A clean out is an access point in a lateral used for maintenance purposes)

a) wastewaterNodeTypeb) pipeMaterialc) diameterd) diameterUOMe) operationalStatusf) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sSystemValve (A system valve is a facility that is fitted to a pipeline or orifice in which the closure member is either rotated or moved transversely or longitudinally in the waterway so as to control or stop the flow)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) networkSubTyped) wastewaterValveMateriale) diameterf) diameterUOMg) operationalStatush) wastewaterValveTypei) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sTreatmentPlant (A facility designed to treat wastewater using physical chemical andor biological processes prior to discharge into receiving waters)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) designCapacityd) designCapacityUOM



e) operationalStatusf) buildingIDFKg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

144 CLJNCLUTILITIES_RESTRICTED



CLJNCLElectricalUtilityNode_eSwitch (Electrical Switches are installed at strategic locations throughout distribution feeder circuits)

a) normalPositionb) operationalStatusc) electricalSwitchTyped) electricalSwitchInstallatione) cableCircuitNamef) numberOfPhasesg) numberOfSwitchesh) voltagei) utilityOwnerj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLElectricalUtilitySegment (A subdivision of an electrical distribution network particularly a line for the transmission of electricity)

a) electricalSegmentTypeb) electricCableMaterialc) pipeLocationd) voltagee) utilityOwnerf) operationalStatusg) electricalCableClassh) electricCableMaterialSubtypei) insulationMaterialj) conductSizek) neutralSizel) numberOfConductm) numberOfNeutraln) numberOfPhaseso) cableCircuitName - List is available from CM or PMp) gisFeatureCollectionMethodq) contractNumberr) designDrawingNumber



s) equipmentInstallationDatet) sdsFeatureNameu) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_eUndergroundStructure (UndergroundStructure is a simple junction feature that includes vaults and manholes that house and protect electrical equipment)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK (Structure Number)b) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatusf) electricalJunctionType (manhole Junction Box Handhole etc)g) diameterh) diameterUOMi) numberOfCablesj) rimElevationk) rimElevationUOMl) cableCircuitName List is available from CM or PMm) gisFeatureCollectionMethodn) contractNumbero) designDrawingNumberp) equipmentInstallationDateq) sdsFeatureNamer) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_oPumpingFacility (A structure typically a building containing pumps filters and controls as part of a larger fuel handling system)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatusf) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

145 Non-Compliance

Failure to follow the specification outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverable

Note Geospatial data delivery does not replace record drawing requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 145 (1991 R 2012) Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes

AASHTO T 180 (2015) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 454-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in) Drop


ASSESAFE A106 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations



US FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

FAA AC 707460-1 (2015 Rev L) Obstruction Marking and Lighting


40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

12 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

121 Demolition Plan

Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged coordination with other work in progress and a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations Identify components and materials to be salvaged for reuse or recycling with reference to paragraph Existing Facilities to be Removed Append tracking forms for all removed materials



indicating type quantities condition destination and end use Coordinate with Waste Management Plan Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning

122 General Requirements

Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer The work of this section is to be performed in a manner that maximizes the value derived from the salvage and recycling of materials Remove rubbish and debris from the project site do not allow accumulations inside the work area The work includes demolition salvage of identified items and materials and removal of resulting rubbish and debris Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily unless otherwise directed Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer In the interest of occupational safety and health perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 23 Demolition and other applicable Sections

13 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE

Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place to be reused or to remain the property of the Government Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated Construct and maintain shoring bracing and supports as required Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal or demolition work performed under this contract Do not overload structural elements or pavements to remain Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition deconstruction or removal work Repairs reinforcement or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work

131 Existing Construction Limits and Protection

Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas Remove dust dirt and debris from work areas daily

132 Utility Service

Maintain existing utilities - electrical power SCADA controlmonitor and water indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations Prior to start of work utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor

133 Facilities

Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities Where removal of existing utilities is specified or indicated provide approved barricades temporary covering of exposed areas and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities Floors roofs walls columns pilasters and other structural components that are



designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring and are determined to be in stable condition must remain standing without additional bracing shoring or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing shoring or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal or demolition work performed under this contract

14 BURNING

The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted Where burning is permitted adhere to federal state and local regulations

15 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS

Areas in which the work is to be accomplished will be available in accordance with the following schedule

Schedule

Area Date

French Creek WWTP Headworks and Adjacent Area as Shown by the Plans

To Coincide with Notice to Proceed

16 SUBMITTALS



Demolition Plan

Existing Conditions

SD-07 Certificates

Notification

17 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Submit timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to Federal State regional and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M Notify the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M Comply with federal state and local hauling and disposal regulations In addition to the requirements of the Contract Clauses conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSESAFE A106 Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified Use of explosives will not be permitted

171 Dust and Debris Control

Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a



nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as but not limited to ice flooding or pollution

18 PROTECTION

181 Traffic Control Signs

a Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work use traffic barricades with flashing lights Notify the Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work

Provide a minimum of 2 FAA type L-810 steady burning red obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above ground level The use of LED based obstruction lights are not permitted For temporary structures (including cranes) over 200 ft above ground level provide obstruction lighting in accordance with FAA AC 707460-1 Light construction and installation shall comply with FAA AC 707460-1 Lights shall be operational during periods of reduced visibility darkness and as directed by the Contracting Officer Maintain the temporary services during the period of construction and remove only after permanent services have been installed and tested and are in operation

182 Protection of Personnel

Before during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site No area section or component of floors roofs walls columns pilasters or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing shoring or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area

19 RELOCATIONS

Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items including the grit removal units as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved Repair or replace items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer

110 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before beginning any demolition work survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls finish floor elevations possible conflicting electrical conduits plumbing lines alarms systems the location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to starting work It is the Contractors responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work and to note these outages on the record document Submit survey results



PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FILL MATERIAL

a Comply with excavating backfilling and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill basements voids depressions or excavations resulting from demolition of structures

b Fill material shall conform to the definition of satisfactory soil material as defined in AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1 A-2-4 A-2-5 and A-3 In addition fill material shall be free from roots and other organic matter trash debris frozen materials and stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension

c Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved soil testing laboratory as follows

Soil classification AASHTO M 145

Moisture-density relations AASHTO T 180 Method B or D

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse Existing construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated set aside and prepared as specified and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse remanufacture recycling or other disposal as specified Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible

311 Utilities and Related Equipment


Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided Do not begin demolition work until all utility disconnections have been made Shut off and cap utilities for future use as indicated

312 Concrete

Unless specified otherwise s aw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work and the remaining concrete is sound At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete

313 Patching

Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent



finished surfaces using on-site materials when available Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish Patching shall be as specified and indicated and shall include

a Concrete and Masonry Completely fill holes and depressions caused by previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions

314 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect mechanical and electrical hardware at the nearest connection to existing services to remain unless otherwise noted Disconnect mechanical equipment and fixtures at fittings Remove service valves attached to the unit Remove existing mechanical bar screen in such a way as to facilitate installation of new equipment with minimum disassembly of of adjacent structures and equipment to remain in-servce Any disassembly and re-assembly of adjacent service catwalk andor conveyor shall require design drawing for re-assembly signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina The frame for each of the existing barscreen(s)is embedded in the concrete channel wall Prior to demolition the contractor shall submit an installation plan for the proposed equipment that adheres to requirements of the manufacturer for review and approval by the Contracting Officer The contractor shall not remove the mechanical bar screen without approval of the installation plan and permission from Contracting Officer

3141 Preparation for Temporary Storage

Remove water dirt dust and foreign matter from units Seal openings with caps plates or plugs Secure motors attached by flexible connections to the unit Change lubricating systems with the proper oil or grease Disconnect grit unit attachments to structures including foundation piers influent channel effluent channel wastewater pipes non-potable water pipes power or control coduitwire and other appurtenances Move the grit units to area convenient to the work that allows performance of modifications as shown by the drawings

315 Electrical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect primary secondary control communication and signal circuits at the point of attachment to their distribution system

3151 Electrical Devices

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of switches switchgear transformers conductors including wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable regulators meters instruments plates circuit breakers panelboards outlet boxes and similar items as shown by the drawings Box and tag these items for identification according to type and size

3152 Wiring Ducts or Troughs

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of wiring ducts or troughs as



shown by the drawings

3153 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of conduit except where embedded in concrete or masonry as shown by the drawings

32 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

321 Title to Materials

Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections and for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property Title to materials resulting from demolition and materials and equipment to be removed is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractors demolition and removal procedures and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of or damage to such property after contract award Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited

322 Reuse of Materials and Equipment

Remove and store materials and equipment including the grit units indicated to be reused or relocated in a manner to prevent damage and reinstall as the work progresses

323 Salvaged Materials and Equipment

Remove materials and equipment that are indicated to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the Government and deliver to a storage site as directed by the Contracting Officer

a Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible

b Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the Contracting Officer and remove from Government property before completion of the contract On site sales of salvaged material is prohibited

c Remove salvaged items to remain the property of the Government in a manner to prevent damage and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage or during shipment Items damaged during removal or storage must be repaired or replaced to match existing items Properly identify the contents of containers Deliver the items reserved as property of the Government to the areas designated by the Contracting Officer

324 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material

Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable noncombustible material in the disposal area designated by the Contracting Officer

33 CLEANUP

Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or



adjacent areas Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal

34 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

341 Regulation of Removed Materials

Dispose of debris rubbish scrap and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal state and local regulations as contractually specified off the Government property Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited

342 Burning on Government Property

Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures will not be permitted on Government property

343 Removal from Government Property

Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures except waste soil from Government property for legal disposal Dispose of waste soil as directed

35 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS

Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before installation Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations or restore them as necessary to usable condition




SECTION 02 82 30

RE-ESTABLISHING VEGETATION

0312

PART 1 GENERAL

11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The work covered by this section consists of preparing seedbeds furnishing and placing limestone fertilizer and seed compacting seedbeds furnishing placing and securing mulch mowing and other operations necessary for the permanent establishment of grasses

Seeding and mulching shall be performed on all earth areas disturbed by construction The Contractor shall adapt his operations to variations in weather or soil conditions as necessary for the successful establishment and growth

The quantity of mowing to be performed will be affected by the actual conditions which occur during the construction of the project The quantity of mowing may be increased decreased or eliminated entirely at the direction of the Contracting Officer Such variations in quantity will not be considered as alterations in the details of construction or a change in the character of the work

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FERTILIZER

The quality of all fertilizer and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Fertilizer Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Agriculture in accordance with the provisions of said law in effect at the time of sampling Fertilizer shall be 10-10-10 Dry fertilizer shall have been manufactured from cured stock Liquid fertilizer shall be stored and cared for after manufacture in a manner that will prevent loss of plant food values

22 LIMESTONE

The quality of all limestone and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Lime Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Limestone shall be agricultural grade ground Dolomitic limestone All limestone shall contain not less than 90 percent calcium carbonate equivalents Dolomitic limestone shall contain not less than 10 percent of magnesium Dolomitic limestone shall be so graded that at least 90 percent will pass through a US Standard 20 mesh screen and at least 35 percent will pass through a US Standard 100 mesh screen

23 SOD

Sod shall consist of a live dense well rooted growth of centipede grass free from an excessive amount of restricted noxious weeds as defined by



the North Carolina Board of Agriculture The area from which sod is to be obtained shall have been mowed to a height of not less than 2 inches Sod shall be cut into rectangular sections of sizes convenient for handling without breaking or loss of soil It shall be cut with a sod cutter or other acceptable means to a depth that will retain in the sod practically all of the dense root system of the grass During wet weather the sod shall be allowed to dry sufficiently before lifting to prevent tearing during handling and placing and during extremely dry weather it shall be watered before lifting if such watering is necessary to insure its vitality and to prevent loss of soil during handling

24 MULCH FOR EROSION CONTROL

Mulch for erosion control shall consist of grain straw or other acceptable material and shall have been approved by the Contracting Officer before being used All mulch shall be reasonably free from mature seed bearing stalks roots or bulblets Material for holding mulch in place shall be asphalt or other approved binding material

25 SEED

The quality of all seed and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Seed Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Agriculture Seed shall have been approved by the North Carolina Department of Agriculture before being sown No seed will be accepted with a date of test more than 8 months prior to the date of sowing excluding the month in which the test was completed Seed mix by weight shall be as specified on the plans

26 MATTING FOR EROSION CONTROL

261 General

Matting for erosion control shall be or excelsior matting Other acceptable material manufactured especially for erosion control may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer in writing before being used Matting for erosion control shall not be dyed bleached or otherwise treated in a manner that will result in toxicity to vegetation

262 Erosion Control Matting

Matting shall consist of a machine produced mat of curled wood excelsior a minimum of 47 inches in width The mat shall weigh 16 pounds per square yard with a tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent At least 80 percent of the individual fibers shall be 6 inches or more in length The fibers shall be evenly distributed over the entire area of the blanket One side of the excelsior matting shall be covered with an extruded plastic mesh The mesh size for the plastic mesh shall be a maximum of 1 inch x 1 inch

263 Wire Staples

Staples shall be machine made of No 11 gage new steel wire formed into a U shape The size when formed shall be not less than 6 inches in length with a throat of not less than 1 inch in width

27 WATER

Water used in the planting or care of vegetation shall meet the requirements



of Class C fresh waters as defined in 15 NAC 2B0200

PART 3 EXECUTION


The work shall be performed immediately upon completion of earthwork areas No exception will be made to this requirement unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Contracting Officer Upon failure or neglect on the part of the Contractor to coordinate his grading with seeding and mulching operations and diligently pursue the control of erosion and siltation the Contracting Officer may suspend the Contractors operations until such time as the work is coordinated in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer

32 SEEDBED PREPARATION

The Contractor shall cut and satisfactorily dispose of weeds or other unacceptable growth on the areas to be seeded The soil shall then be scarified or otherwise loosened to a depth of not less than 3 inches except as otherwise provided below or otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer Clods shall be broken and the top 2 to 3 inches of soil shall be worked into an acceptable seedbed by the use of soil pulverizers drags or harrows or by other methods approved by the Contracting Officer All rock and debris 3 inches or larger shall be removed prior to the application of seed and fertilizer On cut slopes that are 21 and steeper both the depth of preparation and the degree of smoothness of the seedbed may be reduced as permitted by the Contracting Officer but in all cases the slope surface shall be scarified grooved trenched or punctured so as to provide pockets ridges or trenches in which the seeding materials can lodge On cut slopes that are either 21 or steeper the Contracting Officer may permit the preparation of a partial or complete seedbed during the initial grading of the slope If at the time of final sodding and mulching operations such initial preparation is still in a condition acceptable to the Contracting Officer additional seedbed preparation may be reduced or eliminated Seedbed preparation within 2 feet of the edge of any pavement shall be limited to a depth of 2 to 3 inches The preparation of seedbeds shall not be done when the soil is frozen extremely wet or when the Contracting Officer determines that it is an otherwise unfavorable working condition

33 LIMESTONE AND FERTILIZER

Limestone may be applied as a part of the seedbed preparation provided it is immediately worked into the soil If not so applied limestone and fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the prepared seedbed and then harrowed raked or otherwise thoroughly worked into the seedbed Apply fertilizer at the rate as specified on the plans Apply lime at the rate as speicified on the plans Application equipment for liquid fertilizer other than a hydraulic seeder shall be calibrated to ensure that the required rate of fertilizer is applied uniformly

34 SODDING

Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent breaking the sod sections and to prevent the sod from drying out Any sod that is torn broken or too dry will be rejected Torn or broken sod if kept moist may be used for filling unavoidable small gaps in sod cover as permitted by the Contracting Officer Sod shall be placed on the designated areas within 24



hours after being cut The area to be sodded shall be brought to a firm uniform surface The limestone and fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area The area shall be roughened by means of picks rakes or other approved means to a depth of not less than 2 inches without distorting the uniformity of the surface The finished surface shall be moistened with water prior to placing the sod Within 24 hours after soil preparation has been completed place the sod Each piece of sod shall be packed tightly against the edge of adjacent pieces so that the fewest possible gaps will be left between the pieces Unavoidable gaps shall be closed with small pieces of sod Sod shall be placed beginning at either the top or the toe of the slope Sod shall be placed with the long edge horizontal and with staggered vertical joints The edge of the sod shall be turned slightly into the ground at the top of a slope and a layer of earth placed over it and tamped as to conduct the surface water over and onto the top of the sod On all slopes 21 or steeper in drainage channels and on any areas that are in such condition that there is danger of sod slipping sod shall be stapled in place by driving staples flush with the sod Stapling shall be done concurrently with sod placement and prior to tamping Use wire staples per Section 263 The number of staples shall be sufficient to prevent slipping or displacement of the sod Staples shall be driven perpendicular to the slope Where backfill is necessary on cut slopes to obtain a uniform sodding area staples shall be of sufficient length to reach a minimum of 3 inches into the solid earth underneath the backfill Sod shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 32 degrees F Frozen sod shall not be used After sod has been placed and tamped it shall be carefully and thoroughly watered as required to maintain the sod in a healthy condition Watering shall be conducted until final acceptance Application of water may be made by the use of hydraulic seeding equipment farm type irrigation equipment or by other acceptable means

35 MULCHING

All seeded areas shall be mulched Grain straw or excelsior mat may be used as mulch at any time of the year Mulch shall be applied within 24 hours after completion of seeding unless otherwise permitted by the Contracting Officer Care shall be exercised to prevent displacement of soil or seed or other damage to the seeded area during the mulching operations Mulch shall be uniformly spread by hand or by approved mechanical spreaders or blowers which will provide an acceptable application An acceptable application will be that which will allow some sunlight to penetrate and air to circulate but also partially shade the ground reduce erosion and conserve soil moisture Mulch shall be held in place by applying a sufficient amount of asphalt or other approved binding material to assure that the mulch is properly held in place The rate and method of application of binding material shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer Where the binding material is not applied directly with the mulch it shall be applied immediately following the mulch application During the application of binding material adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to vehicles structures guardrails and devices Areas where seeding and mulching have been performed shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until final acceptance of the project Maintenance shall include mowing at the location and times directed by the Contracting Officer Areas of damage or failure due to any cause shall be corrected by being repaired or by being completely redone as may be directed by the Contracting Officer Excelsior matting shall be installed on all seeded slopes greater than 31 (hv) Install the matting per the manufacturers printed instructions



36 SEEDING

Seed shall be distributed uniformly over the seedbed at the rate as specified on the plans Seed shall be harrowed dragged raked or otherwise worked so as to cover the seed with a layer of soil The depth of covering shall be 14 inch When a hydraulic seeder is used for application of seed and fertilizer the seed shall not remain in water containing fertilizer for more than 30 minutes prior to application unless otherwise permitted by the Contracting Officer Immediately after seed has been properly covered the seedbed shall be compacted in the manner and degree approved by the Contracting Officer




SECTION 03 01 32

CONCRETE REHABILITATION FOR CIVIL WORKS1109

PART 1 GENERAL

11 RELATED SECTIONS

111 Formwork

Formwork shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 11 1300 10 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING Do not use form oil with epoxy or polymer-modified repair materials

112 Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

113 Field-Molded Sealants

Field-molded sealants shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

114 Compression Seals

Compression seals shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

115 Concrete

Unless otherwise specified concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

116 Disposal of Waste Materials

Dispose waste materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Dispose of waste water in accordance with 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

12 UNIT PRICES

121 Concrete Removal

1211 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with concrete removal which includes preparatory work removal of concrete and embedded items and disposal of debris Payment will be made at the contract price per cubic yard of concrete removed No payment will be made for concrete removal as such that is in connection with items for which payment is made as a lump sum

1212 Measurement

Concrete removal will be measured for payment based upon the actual volume



of concrete removed within the pay lines as indicated on the drawings Measurement will be made in accordance with paragraph MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES No measurement will be made of concrete removal outside the pay lines shown which is incidental to the indicated removal unless such removal is specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or for voids or embedded items that are either less than five cubic feet in volume or one square foot in cross section

1213 Unit of Measure

Unit of measure cubic yards

122 Drilling and Grouting Dowels and Anchors

1221 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with drilling holes and grouting dowels and anchors for anchoring new concrete and for repairs to existing concrete The price shall include the cost of furnishing all equipment labor and materials except dowels and anchors and all other incidental costs in connection with completing the item of work as shown and as specified Payment for dowels and anchors will be made as specified for dowels anchors and reinforcing steel bars

1222 Measurement

Measurement of drilling holes and grouting dowels and anchors will be made by the linear foot of hole actually drilled and grouted to the depth indicated Measurement will be made from the surface of the concrete after removal or surface preparation and will be made to the nearest inch No payment will be made for holes improperly drilled or grouted nor for repairs required due to damage caused by the drilling and grouting operations


Unit of measure linear feet

123 Dowels and Anchors

Measurement and payment for furnishing and placing dowels anchors and reinforcing steel bars for anchorage will be made as specified in Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

124 Concrete

Measurement and payment for cement-based concrete will be made as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

1241 Payment

Payment for polymer-modified concrete will be made at the respective contract unit prices per cubic yard These payments shall constitute full compensation for performing the work and shall include the cost of all labor equipment and tools materials and supplies required to complete the concrete work under this contract except steel reinforcement and embedded parts which are specified to be paid for separately No



measurement and payment will be made for concrete as such which is placed in structures for which payment is made as a lump sum No separate payment will be made for bonding coats or agents

1242 Measurement

Measurement of concrete will be made on the basis of the actual volume of concrete placed within the limits of work as indicated on the contract drawings Measurement of concrete placed against the sides of any excavation without the use of intervening forms will be made only within the pay lines of the structure shown on the contract drawings Measurement will be made in accordance with paragraph MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or space occupied by metal work electrical conduits or other materials nor for individual voids or embedded items which are either less than five cubic feet in volume or one square foot in cross section


Unit of measure cubic yard

125 Crack or Joint Sealing

Measurement and payment for crack or joint sealing including sawing or routing cracks or joints removing existing deteriorated sealants and joint materials surface preparation installing sealant and backup materials and cleanup upon completion of sealing will be made as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

126 Notch and Seal Crack Filling

1261 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with filling cracks with dry-pack mortar or polymer-modified mortar including preparing the cracks Payment for will be made at the contract price per cubic foot of material placed

1262 Measurement

Measurement of crack filling will be made on the basis of the actual volume of mortar placed and accepted within the limits of work as indicated on the contract drawings


Unit of measure cubic foot

127 Measurement Procedures


Remove concrete to the lines of removal indicated on the contract drawings A tolerance of plus or minus 12 inch will be allowed about the lines indicated Concrete removals that vary by more than the indicated tolerance will be acceptable unless evidence indicates that deteriorated concrete is still present or the variation in tolerance results in a violation of the requirements for material placement in



which case removal shall continue to the lines indicated Additional concrete removal beyond the allowable tolerance will be acceptable when deteriorated concrete is found as determined in accordance with paragraph Determination of Removal Limits and the limits of such removal are set and approved by the Contracting Officer Unauthorized concrete removals in excess of 1 inch beyond the lines shown will not be acceptable and repair of such excess area shall be performed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to the Government

1272 Measurement of Vertical Concrete Removal

Determine the volume of vertical concrete removal from cross sections made prior to and after removal Make cross sections from surveyed measurements at a minimum of 20 points unless otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer Take initial survey of the existing surface prior to removal and take final surveys on the same control stations Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified For areas of vertical concrete removal which are not readily accessible for survey determine the volume of concrete from the neat lines of concrete removal as shown on the contract drawings with the approval of the Contracting Officer Do not include any volume of concrete removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

1273 Measurement of Horizontal Concrete Removal

Determine volumes of horizontal concrete removal from cross sections made prior to and after removal Make cross sections from surveyed measurements at a minimum of 20 points unless otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer Take initial survey of the existing surface prior to removal and take final cross sections at the same control stations Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified Do not include any volume of concrete removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

1274 Measurements of Concrete

For areas that are readily accessible by a survey crew determine volumes by cross sections of the areas prior to and after concrete placement Take the initial and final cross sections at the same control stations used for concrete removal where possible Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified For areas of concrete placement which are not readily accessible for survey determine the volume of concrete from the neat lines of concrete placement as shown on the contract drawings Do not include any volume of concrete placed to compensate for removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

13 REFERENCES



AASHTO T 334 (2008 R 2016) Standard Method of Test for Estimating the Cracking Tendency of



Concrete

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 117 (2010 Errata 2011) Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary

ACI 2111 (1991 R 2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Heavyweight and Mass Concrete

ACI 318 (2014 Errata 1-2 2014 Errata 3-5 2015 Errata 6 2016) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary

ACI 5484 (2011) Standard Specification for Latex-Modified Concrete (LMC) Overlays

ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual


ASTM A36A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A615A615M (2016) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A996A996M (2016) Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C1059C1059M (2013) Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete

ASTM C1077 (2016) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM C109C109M (2016a) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in or (50-mm) Cube Specimens)

ASTM C117 (2013) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C136C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C143C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C1438 (2013) Standard Specification for Latex



and Powder Polymer Modifiers for Hydraulic Cement Concrete and Mortar

ASTM C144 (2011) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C157C157M (2008 R 2014 E 2014) Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete

ASTM C172C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C192C192M (2016a) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory

ASTM C231C231M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C273C273M (2016) Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials

ASTM C31C31M (2015a E 2016) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33C33M (2016) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39C39M (2016b) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C469C469M (2014) Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poissons Ratio of Concrete in Compression

ASTM C494C494M (2016) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C596 (2009 E 2015) Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing Hydraulic Cement

ASTM C881C881M (2015) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

ASTM C937 (2016) Grout Fluidifier for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete

ASTM C940 (2016) Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory

ASTM D1623 (2009) Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics



ASTM D75D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates

ASTM E488E488M (2015) Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

CONCRETE SAWING AND DRILLING ASSOCIATION (CSDA)

CSDA-W-104 (June 1 1998 R 2007) Track Mounted Wall Sawing

POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)

PTI TAB1 (2006) Post-Tensioning Manual


COE CRD-C 164 (1992) Standard Test Method for Direct Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete or Mortar Specimens

COE CRD-C 39 (1981) Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Concrete

COE CRD-C 400 (1963) Requirements for Water for Use in Mixing or Curing Concrete


US GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

CID A-A-55614 (Basic Notice 2) Shield Expansion (Non-Drilling Expansion Anchors)

14 DEFINITIONS

141 Concrete

A mixture of binder material water and fine and coarse aggregate with or without admixtures

142 Mortar

A mixture of binder material water and fine aggregate with or without admixtures

143 Grout

A mixture of binder material and water with or without a filler

144 Cement-Based Material

A material consisting of portland cement andor other cementitious materials as a binder and aggregate As used in this specification cement-based materials do not include materials with polymer modifiers



145 Polymer-Modifier

A polymer used to modify the properties of a cement-based concrete or mortar The polymers commonly associated with concrete rehabilitation are styrene-butadiene and acrylic latex

146 Polymer-Modified Material

A combination of polymer portland cement andor other cementitious materials and fine andor coarse aggregate Polymer-modified concrete is normally placed to a thickness of 1 inch or greater Polymer-modified mortar is normally placed to a thickness of less than 1 inch

147 Epoxy Resin Binder

A two-component epoxy resin binder system in low and medium viscosities used by itself as a primer or for producing epoxy concrete or mortars when mixed with aggregate

148 Epoxy Concrete

A combination of epoxy resin and fine and coarse aggregate

149 Epoxy Mortar

A combination of epoxy resin a mineral filler and fine aggregate

1410 Non-Pressure Epoxy Grout

A combination of epoxy resin binder a mineral filler and a thixotropic agent

1411 Epoxy Injection Adhesive

A low viscosity epoxy resin system pumped under pressure into cracks

1412 Rapid-Hardening Repair Material

A combination of rapid-setting cement and aggregate(s) that can develop sufficient compressive strength at an early age to permit intended use

1413 Non-Structural Cracks

Cracks that do not affect the load-carrying capacity of the structure

1414 Structural Cracks

Cracks that affect the load-carrying capacity of the structure

15 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

151 Design Requirements

Submit manufacturers literature from suppliers that demonstrates compliance with applicable specifications for the above materials For proportioned materials submit three copies of the proposed mix design prior to placement The mix design shall indicate the weight of each ingredient of the mixture No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the proposed mix design No deviation from the approved job-mix



formula will be permitted without prior approval

a Concrete Design the concrete mixtures in accordance with Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

b Grout Design the grout mixtures to produce material having an average compressive strength of 8000 psi at 28 days of age determined in conformance with ASTM C109C109M Design the mixtures to secure an air content by volume of 5 percent plus or minus 1-12 percent based on measurements made on concrete at the point of placement in conformance with ASTM C231C231M The range of slump shall be 12 to 2 inches when tested in accordance with ASTM C143C143M except that maximum slump may be increased to 4 inches when the Contractor has included an approved water-reducing high range admixture conforming to ASTM C494C494M in the mix design To minimize drying shrinkage the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio by weight shall be 045 and the maximum cement content shall be kept to a minimum to limit water volume Make mix design studies and tests in accordance with ASTM C39C39M and ASTM C192C192M and submit the test results for approval

d Repair Materials Provide the services of a technical specialist experienced in using the polymer for repair materials

152 Repair Material Performance Requirements

Place repair materials to the lines indicated on the drawings Construction tolerances for concrete and mortar repair materials shall meet the requirements of ACI 117 Design repair materials to conform to the following requirements at 28 days unless otherwise indicated

Physical Properties of Cement-Based Repair materials

Property Test method Criteria

Tensile Strength (28 days) COE CRD-C 164 400 psi (minimum)

Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C469C469M 3500000 psi (maximum)

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

COE CRD-C 39 67 millionthsdegree F(maximum)

Drying Shrinkage ASTM C157C157M (modified)

(28 days) 400 millionths (maximum)

(1 year) 1000 millionths (maximum)

Restrained Shrinkage Cracking Implied strain at 1 year

AASHTO T 334 No cracks within 14 days1000 millionths (maximum)

Notes on Table

a ASTM C157C157M (modified) The modifications to the test method for this requirement are as follows

(1) Standard specimen size is 3x3x11-14 inch for concrete mortar expanded with aggregate and mortar



(2) Remove sample from mold at 23 plus or minus 12 hours and make initial comparator reading immediately (For rapid hardening materials remove sample from mold at 3 hours and make initial comparator reading)

(3) The specimens are then stored under the standard conditions at 734 plus or minus 3 degrees F and 50 plus or minus 4 percent RH

Subsequent comparator readings are to be taken at ages of 3 days 7 days 14 days 1 month 2 months measurements shall continue until 90 percent of ultimate drying shrinkage is reached Ultimate shrinkage is to be determined as described in ASTM C596

153 Sequencing and Scheduling

Unless otherwise specified perform the work in such sequence that new work does not damage previously completed work Do not perform concrete removal and other operations which cause vibrations within 50 feet of repair materials that have cured less than 24 hours Perform the work as shown in the following SCHEDULE

SCHEDULE

Concrete Removal Methods

Removal Method

Feature A B C D E F G H I J K

Horizontal Surface X X X X X X X X

Vertical Surface X X X X X X X X X X

Slab-On-Grade X X X X X

A Controlled Blasting

B Abrasive Water Jet Cutting

C Diamond Blade Cutting

D Diamond Wire Cutting

E Stitch Cutting

F Boom Mounted Breaker

G Hand Held Breaker

H Hydromilling

I Rotary Head Milling

J Presplitting (Expansive Agent)

K Mechanical Presplitting



Repair Material

Repair Material

Feature A B C D E F G H I

Horizontal Surfaces (repair)

X X X X X

Horizontal Surfaces (Overlay)

X X X X

Vertical Surfaces (repair) X X X X X X X X

Vertical Surfaces (Refacing)

X X X X X X

A Cement-Based Concrete

B Cement-Based Mortar

C Precast Portland Cement Concrete

D Polymer-Modified Mortar

E Polymer-Modified Concrete

F Epoxy Mortar

G Epoxy Concrete

H Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete

I Shotcrete

Crack Repair

Repair Method

Type of Crack A B C D E F

Open Crack on Surface X X

Structural Crack (Inactive) X X X X

Structural Crack (Active) X X



Crack Repair

Repair Method


A Clean and Seal

B Clean and Fill

C Drill and Plug

D Injection

E Stitching

F Mechanical Anchoring

16 SUBMITTALS



Work PlanDemolition and Removal PlanWater Control PlanContractor QualificationsWorker QualificationsBlasting Personnel Qualifications

SD-03 Product Data

Rapid-Hardening Repair MaterialPolymer ModifierPolyurethane Injection AdhesivePolyester Resin GroutEpoxy Resin MaterialsBond BreakerMechanical AnchorsHigh Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) SealerTesting Technicians

SD-04 Samples

Field-Molded Sealants and Primer

SD-05 Design Data

Repair Material Mixture Proportioning

SD-06 Test Reports

Compression Seals and LubricantCement-Based Concrete



Cement-Based MortarDry-Pack MortarPolymer-Modified ConcretePolymer-Modified MortarSieve Analysis Test for AggregateEpoxy Resin Binder TestsEpoxy Resin Grout Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Grout FluidifierAggregate


Polymer-Modified MortarPolymer-Modified ConcretePolymer ModifierEpoxy ConcreteEpoxy MortarEpoxy GroutEpoxy Injection AdhesiveRapid-Hardening Repair MaterialPolyurethane Injection AdhesiveHigh Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) SealerManufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets


Perform all work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials conform to the applicable manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local regulation Submit the MSDS for epoxies polyurethanes and other potentially hazardous materials

171 Qualifications

The submittals shall where applicable identify individuals who will be working on this contract and their relevant experience Do not make changes in approved personnel without prior approval of the Contracting Officer

1711 Contractor Qualifications

The Contractor performing the repair work shall have been involved in a minimum of three (3) concrete repair projects similar in size and scope to this project for at least five (5) years Submit information including name dollar value date and point-of-contact for similar projects which demonstrates the required experience andor training

1712 Worker Qualifications

Each worker engaged in the use of specialized removal or application equipment including saw operators epoxy injection process shall have satisfactorily completed an instruction program in the operation of the equipment Each worker engaged in the operation of specialized equipment for the contract work shall have a minimum of three years of experience in the operation of the equipment



1713 Quality Control Personnel Qualifications

The individuals who sample and test concrete as required in this specification shall have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I Submit resumes pertinent information past experience training and education of all operators of specialized demolition equipment if needed for this and the three paragraphs above

172 Regulatory Requirements

Perform all work in accordance with applicable Federal State and local safety health and environmental requirements and EM 385-1-1 The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all permits required by Federal State and local agencies for the performance of the work

173 Pre-Construction Conference

Arrange a pre-construction conference for the repair materials to ensure that the Contractors personnel understand all aspects of the repair material its properties and application procedures The conference shall include the Contracting Officer or authorized representative the Contractor and a competent Technical Representative of the material manufacturer The Technical Representative shall be fully qualified to perform the work

174 Repair Material Mixture Proportioning

Submit at least 15 days before work commences a repair material mixture proportioning for each use of polymer-modified concrete Test reports and test results shall accompany the mixture proportions Identify the proposed source of the materials and state the proportions of each constituent When determining the mixture design use samples of materials to be used on the job

a Trial batches Trial batches and testing requirements for various repair materials specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor The laboratory performing the tests shall be on site and shall conform to ASTM C1077 Samples of aggregates shall be obtained in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D75D75M Samples of materials other than aggregate shall be representative of those proposed for the project and shall be accompanied by the manufacturers test reports indicating compliance with applicable specified requirements Trial mixtures having proportions consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on methodology described in ACI 2111 which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for the work The maximum water-cementitious materials ratios required in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS RATIO will be converted to a weight ratio of water to cementitious materials

b Supporting criteria Include in the submittal the following data for each trial batch

(1) Proportions by weight

(2) Unit weights and specific gravities of constituents



(3) Batch weights

(4) Compressive strengths in accordance with the following

Material Specimen Size Test

Concrete 6 by 12 inch cylinders ASTM C39C39M

Mortar 3 by 6 inch cylinders ASTM C39C39M

Grout 2 inch cube ASTM C109C109M

(5) Curing time

(6) Working time (polymer-modified materials)

(7) Slump

(8) Air content

175 Test Reports


Include the following

a Viscosity

b Consistency

c Gel time

d Absorption

e Shrinkage

f Thermal compatibility

1752 Epoxy Resin Grout


a Epoxy number

b Consistency

c Compressive single shear strength

d Pot life

1753 Cement-Based Concrete and Cement-Based Mortar


a Initial Slump

b Slump over Time



c Air Content

d Compressive Strength at 7 28 56 days

e Water to cementitious materials ratio

f Tensile Strength

g Flexural Strength

1754 Polymer-Modified Concrete


a Tensile Strength (28 days)

b Modulus of Elasticity

c Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

d Drying Shrinkage

e Restrained Shrinkage

f Cracking

g Implied strain at 1 year

176 Field Samples

Prepare a work plan describing the methods of concrete removal and repair including methods equipment and materials to be used for each feature Submit the work plan for approval at least 30 days prior to the start of the work The plan shall include but shall not be limited to repair materials to be used with specific information on products andor constituents and requirements for handling storage etc equipment to be used surface preparation and requirements for placement finishing curing and protection specific to the materials used The work plan shall include a description of field demonstrations Do not commence work until the work plan and field demonstration representative of the type of work are approved


Prior to commencement of production concrete removal perform a test break on an area of sufficient size to demonstrate that the proposed removal procedure will result in compliance with the specified requirements The test break shall verify suitability of the equipment to remove the existing materials

1762 Joint and Crack Sealing

Prepare and seal a test section consisting of approximately 2 feet at a location determined by the Contracting Officer to demonstrate the preparatory and application procedures prior to beginning production sealing Additional test sections may be required by the Contracting Officer Remove any material that does not comply with the contract requirements and replace at no additional cost to the Government Test



sections that comply with the contract requirements may remain in place and will be included payment for the work Use the same procedures and materials as used in the successful test section for production work The test section may be incorporated in the final work if accepted by the Contracting Officer

1763 Sample Repair Panels

Construct field test panels prior to beginning of work using the repair materials and procedures proposed for use on the job to demonstrate the results to be attained The panel shall contain reinforcing steel and embedded items as the production work The quality and appearance of each panel are subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer and if not judged satisfactory construct additional panels until approval is attained Formed and finished surfaces in the completed structure must match the quality and appearance of the approved sample repair panel For wall refacing construct a minimum of one sample panel at least 4 feet by 5 feet and the same thickness as the production panel to demonstrate each type of formed and unformed finish required Each panel must include a full length and full width joint line

18 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

181 Packing Shipping Handling and Unloading

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage unload and store with a minimum of handling Deliver resin components and aggregate materials in original sealed containers where applicable

182 Epoxy-Resin Materials

Deliver epoxy-resin materials to the site in such manner as to avoid damage or loss Do not allow epoxy-resin materials to freeze Storage areas shall be in a windowless and weatherproof but ventilated insulated noncombustible building with provision nearby for conditioning the material to 70 degrees F to 85 degrees F for a period of 48 hours prior to use Store epoxy resin components and aggregate materials in dry covered areas at temperatures below 90 degrees F Remove unused mixed materials that have reached end of working or pot life from the job site Use epoxy-resin materials before the expiration date marked on the packaging

183 Polymer Materials

Storage areas shall be in a windowless and weatherproof but ventilated insulated noncombustible building Store polymer materials at temperatures between 40 degrees F to 85 degrees F Do not allow polymer materials to freeze

184 Chemical Admixtures

Protect chemical admixtures and store and maintain between 40 degrees F to 90 degrees F Remove from the site any admixtures subjected to temperatures outside this range or stored for longer than recommended by the manufacturer Do not use any admixture that has been in storage for longer than recommended by the manufacturer or that has been subjected to freezing in the work Remove such materials from the site



185 Waste Management and Disposal

Prepare a water control plan to describe methods and equipment to be used for controlling collection treatment and disposal of wastewater from drilling sawing and other concrete removal operations at least 15 days prior to performance of any operations that produce wastewater The plan shall include copies of required permits or other evidence of compliance with applicable Federal State and local laws and regulations Unless otherwise specified do not permit concrete and other debris to drop into the water or wastewater in Plant Collect concrete andor debris and retain near to its point of removal Submit the demolition and removal plan describing the method of debris control and removal and the procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the demolition and removal work The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work including procedures and methods to provide necessary supports lateral bracing and shoring when required careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged protection of property which is to remain undisturbed coordination with other work in progress and timely disconnection of utility services The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operations in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Where applicable the plan shall include drilling patterns and means of controlling crack propagation The work plan shall also include an access plan for personnel and method of controlling collecting and removing debris The method of debris control and removal shall be approved by the Contracting Officer Dispose of debris in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Remove all concrete which falls into the water wastewater at no additional cost to the Government Do not permit waste water from surface preparation cleaning drilling and cutting operations to directly enter the Plants water wastewater Collect wastewater and treat in accordance with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

19 PROJECTSITE CONDITIONS

191 Environmental Requirements

Do not place repair materials when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of the finished product Do not place cement-based repair materials when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F in the shade When air temperature is likely to exceed 90 degrees F the cement-based repair material shall have a temperature not exceeding 90 degrees F when deposited and the surface of such placed cement-based repair material shall be kept damp with a water fog until the approved curing medium is applied Do not place polymer-modified repair materials when the air temperature is below 45 degrees F or above 85 degrees F unless approved by the polymer manufacturer Do not place sealant in joints or cracks when the temperature is below 50 degrees F Placement restrictions for other materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturers published literature Halt work when weather conditions are potentially detrimental to the quality of repairing or bonding concrete Apply epoxy resin materials only when the contact surfaces are completely dry and if the ambient and surface temperature ranges are suitable for the specified epoxy material Follow manufacturers instructions for weather conditions and temperature ranges



192 Existing Conditions

1921 Embedded Materials

The contract drawings and reference drawings do not constitute a complete description of all metal parts and other materials that may be encountered but represent the best information available to the Government Other items or different locations for items shown may exist Exercise care to avoid drilling through functional embedded items intended to remain in service The Contractors selection of equipment and methods shall consider the presence of such materials and the Government will not be responsible in any way for the effect of such items on the Contractors equipment or progress Where indicated remove existing metal items to the limits noted on drawings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Cement-Based Materials

Cementitious materials shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

212 Admixtures

Admixtures to be used when required or permitted shall conform to the appropriate specification listed Admixtures shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Grout Fluidifier shall conform to ASTM C937 submit manufacturers certifications in lieu of laboratory test results for proposed materials Certificates should certify compliance with the appropriate specification referenced herein Do not place materials without prior approval from the Contracting Officer

213 Aggregate

Aggregates shall meet the quality and grading requirements of ASTM C33C33M Class Designations 4M or better or state highway department specification and the following specific requirements For material passing No 200 sieve provide a non-plastic material composed of a minimum of 75 percent limestone dust talc or silica inert filler Provide dry aggregate

a For epoxy concrete ASTM C33C33M maximum size 38 inch

b For epoxy mortar ASTM C144

c For dry-pack mortar ASTM C144 maximum size No 16 sieve

d For polymer-modified concrete ASTM C33C33M Size No 8

214 Water

Water for cleaning mixing and curing shall be fresh clean potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali except that non-potable water may be used if it meets the requirements of COE CRD-C 400




2151 Polymer Modifier for Concrete or Mortar

ASTM C1438 Type II

2152 Polyurethane Injection Adhesive

Two part system composed of polyurethane resin and water Polyurethane resin shall be 100 percent hydrophilic resin capable of forming either a flexible closed-cell foam or cured gel when mixed with water When mixed with water the resin shall meet the following requirements

Performance Criteria Properties of the Cured Polyurethane Injection Grout

Property Test Method Criteria

Tensile Strength ASTM D1623 20 psi (minimum)

Elongation ASTM D1623 400 percent (minimum)

Bond to Concrete (wet) ASTM C273C273M 20 psi (minimum)

2153 Latex Bonding Compound

Latex bonding compound agents for bonding fresh to hardened concrete shall conform to ASTM C1059C1059M Type II

216 Epoxy Resin Materials

Epoxy compounds for repairs shall be moisture insensitive

2161 Epoxy Resin Binder for Concrete and Mortar

ASTM C881C881M Type III Grade and Class as required by application


ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 2 with or without mineral filler For setting anchors and dowels use Type III Grade 2 or 3 with mineral filler


ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 1 without filler

2164 Crack Surface Sealer for Injection Grouting

ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 3 with mineral filler

2165 Epoxy Bonding Agent

ASTM C881C881M Type II or V Type II material for non-loadbearing applications Type V material for load bearing applications



217 Field-Molded Sealants and Primer

Sealants and primers shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

218 Compression Seals and Lubricant

Compression seals shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

219 Anchors

ASTM A615A615M ASTM A996A996M ASTM A36A36M

2110 Dowels


2111 Anchor Head

Anchor head shall consist of steel bearing plate with nut Anchorage devices shall be capable of developing 95 percent of the guaranteed ultimate strength of prestressing steel The anchorage devices shall conform to the static strength requirements of Section 316 (1) and Section 318 (1) and (2) of PTI TAB1 Threaded anchorage items for epoxy coated bars shall be designed to fit over the epoxy coating and maintain the capacity of the prestressing steel

2112 Mechanical Anchors

CID A-A-55614 galvanized unless otherwise indicated Provide sleeve anchors of the length and diameter indicated Minimum concrete embedment shall be as shown Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E488E488M

a Minimum ultimate pullout value shall be 3600 lb

b Minimum ultimate shear value shall be 4185 lb

22 EQUIPMENT

Assemble at the site of the work sufficient equipment that is dependable appropriate and adequate to accomplish the work specified Deliver the equipment a sufficient time before the start of repairs to permit thorough inspection calibration of weighing and measuring devices adjustment of parts and the making of any repairs that may be required Machines tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory condition at all times Maintain the equipment in good working condition Provide dust suppression on equipment as needed to comply with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

221 Cement-Based Concrete Mixing Equipment

Mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS



222 Polymer-Modified Concrete Mixing Equipment

Use proportioning and mixing equipment with capacity and continuous rate so that final finishing can be completed prior to the formation of a plastic film on the polymer-modified concrete surface The equipment shall consistently produce a uniformly blended mixture within the specified air content and slump limits The mixer shall also

a Be equipped with a recording meter with a ticket printout device to record an indication of the cement quantity being introduced into the mix The metering device shall be accurate within a tolerance of -1 to +3 percent

b Be equipped with a polymer metering device to indicate volume dispensed The metering device shall be accurate within a tolerance of -1 to +2 percent In addition the polymer tank shall have a stand pipe marked in gallons

c Be equipped with a water flow indicator and have a water flow control that is readily adjustable to provide for minor variations in aggregate moisture content The flow indicator shall be accurate within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 percent in the range of expected use

d Be equipped with a control to regulate the quantity of each of the polymer-modified concrete components to permit production of a mix having the specified composition To ensure that the mixer can accurately proportion and blend all components of the polymer-modified concrete on a continuous or intermittent basis the mixer shall be calibrated prior to the start of the overlay placement

223 Epoxy Mixing Equipment

Use a container recommended by the epoxy manufacturer as the mixing vessel Use a power drive (air or spark-proof) propeller type blade for mixing except that hand mixing may be used for small batches Use equipment specified by epoxy manufacturer for field mixing of aggregates and epoxy resin

224 Grout Mixing Equipment

Use a high-speed high-shear colloidal type grout mixer capable of continuous mechanical mixing that will produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout which is free of lumps and undispersed cement The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable water and admixture measuring devices calibrated to read in cubic feet and tenths and so designed that after each delivery the device can be conveniently set back to zero

225 Joint and Crack Sealing Equipment

Joint and crack sealing equipment shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

226 Drilling Equipment

Use percussion or rotary drilling equipment of a type suitable for the depth diameter and material to be drilled Use only rotary drilling equipment where vibration from percussion drilling could damage the concrete to remain or adjacent structures Use equipment capable of



maintaining the required alignment

227 Hydromilling Equipment

Use hydromilling equipment consisting of filtering and pumping units operating in conjunction with a remote-controlled robotic device or beam The equipment shall operate at a noise level of less than 90 decibels at a distance of 50 feet from the equipment The equipment shall produce a highly roughened bondable surface

228 Rotary Milling Equipment

2281 Horizontal Surfaces

Use milling equipment for horizontal surfaces consisting of a self-propelled unit with rotary cutter head with tungsten-carbide bits

2282 Vertical Surfaces

Use rotary equipment consisting of a boom-mounted rotary cutter

23 ACCESSORIES

231 Stitching staples

ASTM A615A615M bar size as shown with legs bend for embedment as shown on the drawings

24 MIXTURE PROPORTIONING

241 Cement-Based Concrete

Mixes for cement-based concrete shall be in accordance with paragraph DESIGN REQUIREMENTS and the applicable provisions of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Approved batch tickets shall be furnished for each load of ready-mixed concrete

242 Dry-Pack Mortar

Prepare mortar consisting of one part portland cement three parts fine sand which passes a No 16 sieve and only enough water so the mortar will stick together in a ball when molded by hand The water-cementitious materials ratio shall not be greater than 045 by weight Let mortar set 12 hour prior to placing

243 Polymer-Modified Mortar

Polymer-modified mortar shall consist of portland cement fine aggregate water and polymer Proportion mortar in accordance with polymer manufacturers recommendations Cured mortar shall comply with the requirements of paragraph REPAIR MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


Polymer-modified concrete shall consist of portland cement fine and coarse aggregate water and polymer Proportion concrete in accordance with polymer manufacturers recommendations Cured concrete shall comply with the requirements of paragraph REPAIR MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Polymer-modified concrete for overlays shall conform to



ACI 5484

245 Ultra-fine Cement Grout

Proportion the ultra-fine cement grout to eliminate shrinkage The watercement ratio shall be by volume and shall not exceed manufacturer recommendations for the required strength Proportion the grout to limit bleed water The final bleeding in accordance with ASTM C940 shall be less than 2 percent The expansion in accordance with ASTM C940 shall be 0 to 5 percent Mix the ultra-fine cement using a high shear colloidal mixer

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION

311 Protection of Existing Features

Before beginning any concrete removal work carefully survey the structure and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work Take all necessary precautions to insure against damage to existing concrete or other structures to remain in place and repair or replace any damage to such items as approved by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government Carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work and construct and maintain shoring bracing and supports as required Insure that structural elements are not overloaded and increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any removal work performed under any part of this contract


Insure that adequate measures are in place to protect workers facility operation personnel and the public from injury due to the operations being performed Provide protective measures in accordance with EM 385-1-1

32 REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE

321 General

Prepare a demolition plan describing the methods and equipment to be used to remove existing concrete Remove the existing concrete in the area to be repaired to the minimum depth indicated and to such additional depth where necessary to expose a surface of sound unweathered concrete that is uncontaminated by oils greases or deicing salts or solutions The actual depth of removal shall be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer Remove concrete with care to avoid damage to adjacent structures and concrete that is not to be repaired under this contract and embedded metal that is not to be removed Repair any such damage at no additional cost to the Government Mark on the surface the limits of concrete removal for approval by the Contracting Officer prior to any removal Do not remove metal and other embedded items exposed during the concrete removal operations without authorization of the Contracting Officer Unless otherwise indicated continue removal using appropriate equipment to remove unsound concrete and to eliminate any offsets in the area to be repaired which would cause an abrupt change in thickness of the repair and to remove protrusions between holes Variations in the final prepared surface shall not exceed the nominal maximum size aggregate of the repair material except for relatively thin repairs in which case the variation



shall not exceed 25 percent of the repair thickness Any removal beyond the limits shown on the drawings shall be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to performing the additional removal All equipment and removal methods shall comply with applicable sections of EM 385-1-1

3211 Determination of Removal Limits

Approximate locations and areas of repairs are indicated on the drawings Determine actual locations and limits of deteriorated concrete by visual inspection and by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and listening for dull or hollow sounds On horizontal surfaces a chain drag may be used in lieu of the hammer or rod Perform sounding in the presence of the Contracting Officer or authorized representative Mark areas where sounding does not produce a solid tone with highly visible paint After the investigation process is completed the Contracting Officer will inspect the areas marked by the Contractor to confirm andor adjust the limits of removal Do not remove concrete from these areas until the Contracting Officer or authorized representative approves the areas Upon completion of removal sound the surface and remove additional concrete until testing produces a solid tone Additional removal of concrete within these areas will be measured for payment as specified

3212 Perimeter Saw Cut

Make a perpendicular saw cut at least 1 inches deep but no deeper than the reinforcing steel a minimum of 1 inch outside of the area to be repaired to delineate the perimeter of the repair area and avoid feather edges The perimeter saw cut shall have no angles less than 90 degrees Exercised care not to cut through existing steel reinforcement or embedded metal that is not to be removed Omit saw-cutting where prohibited by existing metal or other items which are not to be removed Perform sawing in accordance with CSDA-W-104 except as specified herein Edges of repaired areas which are not mechanically anchored shall be dove-tailed Where concrete is being removed from a vertical face by controlled blasting mechanical presplitting or expansive agents sawcut the bottom limit of the removal area to the full depth of the removal

3213 Preliminary Surface Cleaning

Clean concrete surfaces that are contaminated with oil grease or dirt prior to beginning concrete removal in the area Use detergents proprietary cleaners formulated for removal of contaminants from concrete or steam cleaning in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions Do not use solvents for removal of oil or grease All traces of cleaning agents and contaminants shall be removed from the surface


Following the concrete removal operation inspect the condition of all exposed reinforcing bars designated to remain in place Remove and replace bars which are deteriorated at any point where the original cross section of any bar has been reduced by more than 50 percent Splice new replacement steel in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318 Secure to adjacent bars all reinforcing steel that is free to vibrate or otherwise move excessively Concrete reinforcement shall conform to Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING Where the bond between the concrete and any reinforcing steel has been destroyed or where the concrete deterioration is caused by corrosion of the reinforcing steel remove the



adjacent concrete to a depth that will permit cleaning of the steel and bonding of the concrete Provide a minimum clearance below the steel of 1 inch or 14 inch plus the maximum size of aggregate in the repair material which ever is greater clearance around the steel except where other reinforcing steel makes this impractical Use chipping hammers weighing less than 15 pounds abrasive water cutting or high-pressure water for removal of concrete around reinforcing steel Remove all corrosion from reinforcing steel by sandblasting

322 Cutting

3221 General

Use cutting to remove segments of concrete intact or to define the limits of removal by other methods

3222 Diamond-Blade Cutting

Use diamond-blade cutting for cutting through relatively thin sections and defining limits of removal to be performed by other methods Perform diamond blade cutting using equipment of the correct type and power and with appropriate blade composition for the material being cut Use a track system for maintaining the alignment of the saw for vertical cuts or where multiple cuts are required for deep cuts Provide supports as required to support the concrete to be removed Core drill corners of removal area or use corner saw to avoid overcutting

323 Impacting

Removal of concrete may be accomplished by use of impact-type power tools Take adequate precautions to prevent impact equipment from vibrating on reinforcing steel All demolition equipment shall be subject to approval of the Contracting Officer

3231 Hand-Held Breaker

Use hand-held breakers or chipping hammers for removal of concrete in small or restricted areas where the energy to be applied is limited to prevent damage to adjacent concrete structures or facilities which are not to be removed and to complete removal where other methods have been used

324 Milling

3241 Hydromilling

Remove concrete from vertical or horizontal surfaces by means of high pressure water applied though nozzles attached to a remotely-controlled device or beam Adjust water pressure and rate of movement as required to remove concrete to the required depth and avoid excessive removal Supplement hydromilling with abrasive water-jet high-pressure wand or other methods in areas not accessible to the hydromilling equipment Submit proposed hydromilling equipment and procedures to the Contracting Officer for review and approval before beginning work Remove slurry from the prepared surface before it hardens

3242 Rotary Head Milling

Use rotary head milling for uniform depth removal on horizontal or



vertical surfaces Use boom-mounted milling head for vertical surfaces When operating rotary head equipment from top of wall for removal from vertical surfaces provide communication between observer and operator to aid in control of removal

33 ANCHORING AND REINFORCING


Drill holes for dowels and anchors using drilling equipment suitable for the intended purpose as approved by the Contracting Officer Diameter of holes shall be as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer Clean holes by flushing with water and compressed air prior to placing grout Anchor dowels and anchors with epoxy grout Place grout and install dowels and anchors as recommended by the grout manufacturer Remove excess grout after the dowel or anchor has been set in place

332 Drilling and Installing Mechanical Anchors

Drill holes for anchors using drilling equipment suitable for the intended purpose as approved by the Contracting Officer Diameter of holes shall be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer Clean holes by flushing with water and compressed air prior to placing grout Install anchors and set anchors in place in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

333 Installing Reinforcement

Place reinforcement steel and accessories as specified and as shown on the contract drawings Placement details of steel and accessories not specified or shown on the drawings shall be in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318 or as directed by the Contracting Officer Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

34 MIXING MATERIALS

Make batches small enough to ensure placement before binder sets Mix materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations

35 SURFACE PREPARATION

351 General

After removal of concrete to the specified limits clean the surface to which the repair material is to be applied to remove dust debris and laitance Perform final cleaning immediately prior to placement of the repair material Unless otherwise specified keep the existing concrete wet for a minimum of 12 hours and dried for 12 hours immediately prior to placing new concrete The surface shall be dry with no standing water on the surface upon which concrete is placed

352 Cleaning

Perform all cleaning operations to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer Protect adjacent structures and embedded items Use potable water for all cleaning operations Perform a preliminary washing as soon as the chipping and trimming are completed to remove loose materials and dust particles Clean surfaces to which new concrete is to be bonded in accordance with Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE



FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph CONSTRUCTION JOINT TREATMENT Final cleaning shall remove all laitance carbonation scum dirt oil grease and loose or disintegrated concrete Perform additional surface chipping to remove coarse aggregate that is undercut by cleaning process Perform such additional chipping as determined necessary by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government Wire brush or sandblast metal surfaces against which concrete is to be placed to remove rust and other contaminants which would prevent proper bond with the concrete Perform final cleaning immediately prior to concrete placement Protect all work from contamination during all phases of cleanup and preparation prior to repair

353 Waste Water Disposal

Dispose of waste water employed in cutting washing and rinsing of concrete surfaces in a manner such that the waste water does not stain discolor or affect exposed surfaces of the structures or damage the environment of the project area The method of disposal shall meet all requirements of Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

36 SURFACE REPAIRS

Place dowels and anchors as shown on the contract drawings

361 Epoxy Mortar

Prime surfaces with epoxy resin binder Scrub prime coat into surface with a stiff bristle brush Place epoxy mortar while primer is still tacky Apply at a thickness recommended by the manufacturer Work mortar into place and consolidate thoroughly so that contact surfaces are wetted by the mortar Finish surface of mortar to the required texture Do not feather edge epoxy mortar onto adjacent surfaces

362 Polymer-Modified Mortar or Concrete


Prime surfaces prepared to receive repair material using the manufacturers recommended bonding agent using a stiff bristle brush and in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Place polymer-modified concrete before the bonding agent dries and in layers not exceeding one inch thick for mortar and two inches thick for concrete Moist cure polymer-modified material for a minimum of 24 hours but not more than 48 hours and then air dry


For vertical surfaces that are troweled follow the procedure for horizontal surfaces For formed vertical surfaces follow the procedure for cement-based concrete for vertical surfaces Moist cure polymer-modified material for a minimum of 24 hours but not more than 48 hours and then air dry



37 CRACK REPAIR

371 Routing and Sealing

3711 Preparation

Clean cracks by saw cutting or routing to provide the proper profile for sealants After the crack is sawcut or routed clean the surfaces by sandblasting andor waterjetting Adjust the height angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to provide satisfactory results Provide protective covers and barriers as required to prevent over-spray onto adjacent surfaces Remove dust dirt and loosely bonded materials resulting from cleaning Ensure surfaces are dry before application of repair material Apply bond breaker to the bottom of the routed or sawed crack Where cracks extend through surfaces to be repaired make the repair first and then tool rout or saw the original line of the cracks into the repaired area

3712 Rate of Progress

Limit the stages of crack sealing which includes preparation and placement of bond breaker so only that length of crack that can be sealed during the same workday is prepared

3713 Time of Application

Seal prepared cracks immediately following the cleaning and drying process Walls of the prepared crack shall be surface dry and the atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of the sealant Provide an approved temporary seal for open routed cracks that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified

3714 Sealing

Do not apply sealant until the prepared cracks have been inspected and approved Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a crack cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after crack has been filled and tooled Fill the cracks from the bottom up and tool the top surface as indicated or as recommended by the manufacturer Apply sealant as recommended by the manufacturer

3715 Preformed Compression Seals

Rout or cut the crack to the dimensions indicated Install the seals with equipment that is capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal and with no more than five percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the crack and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant and install the seal to the depth indicated with joint installation equipment Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant

38 CLEANING AND RESEALING JOINTS

381 Preparation of Joints

Immediately before the installation of the sealant thoroughly clean the



joints to remove all laitance loose or deteriorated filler and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the joint space to be sealed Clean joints to sufficient depth to remove all loose material and debris and to permit placement of the backup material and sealant as shown on the drawings Concrete surfaces shall be dry at the time of sealant application

3811 Existing Sealant Removal

Cut the in-place sealant and expansion joint material loose from both joint faces and to the minimum depth required to permit placement of the back-up material and sealant depth equal to one half the width of joint or as recommended by the sealant manufacturer unless otherwise shown on the drawings using the waterjetting equipment as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Removal may be efficiently accomplished using high pressure water jet with abrasive added Prior to further cleaning operations remove all loose old sealant remaining in the joint opening by blowing with compressed air Chipping spalling or otherwise damaging the concrete will not be permitted For compression seals sawcut the joint to the width and depth shown on the drawings

3812 Sandblasting and Waterjetting

Sandblast or waterjet clean the newly exposed concrete joint faces to at least the depth of the back-up material and sealant and the concrete surfaces extending a minimum of 12 inch from the joint edges Use a multiple-pass technique until the surfaces are free of dust dirt filler old sealant residue or any foreign debris that might prevent the bonding of the sealant to the concrete After final cleaning and immediately prior to sealing blow the joints out with compressed air to ensure that the joints are completely free of debris and water

3813 Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation

Limit the joint preparation which includes sandblasting or waterjetting air pressure cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal footage that can be sealed during the same day

382 Installation of Sealant

Store and apply the primer and sealant in accordance with the manufacturers written safety instructions and precautions and using manufacturer recommended procedures


Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint sidewalls and following the placement of the bond breaker and back-up material Reclean open joints that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified or when rain interrupts sealing operations and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant

3822 Back-Up Material and Bond Breaker

Plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation



3823 Sealing Joints

Perform a final cleaning with compressed air immediately preceding but not more than 50 feet ahead of the sealing operations The joint surfaces shall be dry at the time the sealant is installed Apply primer evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturers instructions before placement of the back-up material Place bond breaker material after the primer is applied Fill the joints from the bottom up to the surface of the concrete Depth of sealant shall be one-half the joint width or as recommended by the sealant manufacturer Commence sealing of joints at the bottom of the slope or wall and continue up the concrete slope or wall Remove excess or spilled sealant from the concrete surface by approved methods and discard Install the sealant using a gun cartridge in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air Do not install sealant material using gravity methods or pouring pots Check joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified Tool the sealant concave immediately after application

383 Installation of Preformed Compression Seals

Install the joint seals with equipment capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal and with no more than five percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the joint and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant and install the seal to the depth indicated with joint installation equipment Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant

39 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

391 General

The individuals who sample and test repair materials as required in this specification shall have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I

392 Preparations for Placing

Inspect prepared surfaces forms and embedded items in sufficient time prior to each placement of repair material to certify that the surfaces are ready to receive the repair material

393 Grouted Dowels and Anchors

Test the first three dowels or anchors of each type and a minimum of three dowels or anchors per 1000 dowels or anchors in accordance with ASTM E488E488M Use incremental loading for tensile test to 75 percent of the yield strength of the dowel or anchor Consider anchors to have failed if displacement exceeds 01 inch or if any of the failure modes of paragraph 122 occur

394 Epoxy Mortar

3941 Sampling

As soon as epoxy resin and aggregate materials are available for sampling obtain by random selection a sample of each batch Clearly identify



samples by designated name specification number batch number project contract number intended use and quantity involved

3942 Testing

At the discretion of the Contracting Officer samples provided may be tested by the Government for verification

3943 Inspection

Check each repaired area for cracks spalls popouts and loss of bond between repaired area and surrounding concrete Check each repaired area for voids by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and listening for dull or hollow sounds Immediately repair defects

395 Polymer-Modified Concrete and Mortar

3951 Air Content

Check air content at least once during each shift that concrete is placed for each type and class of repair material required Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172C172M and test in accordance with ASTM C231C231M

3952 Slump

Check slump once during each shift that concrete is produced for each type and class of repair material required Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172C172M and test in accordance with ASTM C143C143M

3953 Consolidation and Protection

Ensure that the repair material is properly consolidated finished protected and cured

3954 Compression Tests

Prepare compression test cubes in accordance with ASTM C31C31M and cure at the site under the same conditions as the repair Test in accordance with ASTM C109C109M

3955 Curing

a Moist-Curing Inspections - At least once each shift and once per day on nonwork days inspect all areas subject to moist curing Note and record the surface moisture condition

b Membrane-Curing Inspection - Do not apply curing compound until the Contractors authorized representative has verified that the compound is properly mixed and ready for spraying At the end of each operation estimate the quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area of repair material surface covered and compute the rate of coverage in square feetgallon Note whether or not coverage is uniform

c Sheet-Curing Inspection - At least once each shift and once per day on nonwork days inspect all areas being cured using material sheets Note and record the condition of the covering and the tightness of the laps and tapes



396 Aggregates

Test gradation in accordance with ASTM C136C136M and ASTM C117 Determine the percent passing the No 200 sieve by washing in accordance with ASTM C117

397 Action Required

3971 Placing

The placing foreman shall not permit placing to begin until he has verified that appropriate placement consolidation and finishing equipment which are in working order and have competent operators are available

3972 Grouted Anchors and Dowels

Test a minimum of two adjacent anchors or dowels for each anchor or dowel that fails

3973 Air Content

Whenever a test result is outside the specification limits do not deliver the concrete to the forms and adjust the dosage of the air-entrainment admixture

3974 Slump

Whenever a test result is outside the specification limits do not deliver the concrete to the forms and an adjustment should be made in the batch weights of water and fine aggregate The adjustments are to be made so that the water-cementitious materials ratio does not exceed that specified in the submitted concrete mixture proportion

3975 Curing

a Moist-Curing Corrective Action - When a daily inspection report lists an area of inadequate curing take immediate corrective action and extend the required curing period for such areas by one day

b Membrane-Curing Corrective Action - When the coverage rate of the curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not uniform spray the entire surface

c Sheet-Curing Corrective Action - When a daily inspection report lists any tears holes or laps or joints that are not completely closed promptly repair the tears and holes or replace the sheets close the joints and extend the required curing period for those areas by one day

398 Final Inspection

Following completion of the work inspect surfaces for damage staining and other distresses Inspect repairs for cracking crazing delamination unsoundness staining and other defects Inspect the finish and surface tolerances of the repairs to verify that all requirements have been met Repair all surfaces exhibiting defects as directed at no cost to the Government when defects are due to Contractor workmanship or procedures



399 Reports

Report the results of all tests and inspections conducted at the project site 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL Submit copies of test results within 24 hours of physical completion of laboratory testing Manufacturers certifications may be submitted rather than laboratory test results for proposed materials Certificates should certify compliance with the appropriate specification referenced herein Do not place materials without prior approval from the Contracting Officer

3910 Manufacturer Field Service

Provide the services of a manufacturers technical representative experienced in mixture proportioning and placement procedures for the following materials

a Epoxy mortar or concreteb Polymer-modified mortar or concreteb Epoxy injection groutd Concrete containing High-Range Water Reducers (HRWRA)e Concrete containing Silica Fume

Provide at no additional cost to the Government the services of the manufacturers experienced technical representative during mixture proportioning planning and production The manufacturers representative shall be available for consultation by both the Contractor and the Contracting officer during mixture proportioning planning and production of the materials and shall be on-site immediately prior to and during at least the first placement of the material and at other times if directed

310 CLEAN UP

Clean all surfaces of concrete and adjacent facilities which are stained by dirt oil grease fuel or other byproducts that are created by the construction operations with detergent and pressure wash Dispose of debris in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

311 DUST CONTROL

Control dust resulting from demolition to prevent the spread of dust and avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area Do not use water when it will result in or create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice flooding or pollution

312 PROTECTION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

Where shelter or other protective measures are provided for repair during inclement weather maintain such protective measures until the repair material has cured and discontinuance of the measures is authorized




SECTION 03 11 1300 10

STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




ACI 301 (2016) Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 347 (2004 Errata 2008 Errata 2012) Guide to Formwork for Concrete


ASTM C578 (2016) Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Formwork

Form Removal Schedule

SD-03 Product Data

Form Materials

SD-04 Samples

Sample Panels

Fiber Voids

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 1


Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

Fiber Voids


Provide Sample Panels of sufficient size to contain joints and not less than 6 feet long and 4 feet wide The panels shall be of typical wall thickness and constructed containing the full allocation of reinforcing steel that will be used in the structure with the forming system that duplicates in every detail the one that will be used in construction of the structure Use the same concrete mixture proportion and materials the same placement techniques and equipment and the same finishing techniques and timing that are planned for the structure Construction of a finish SF-30 will not be permitted until sample panels have been approved Protect sample panels from construction operations in a manner to protect approved finish and are not to be removed until all surface finish SF-30 concrete has been accepted After shop drawings have been reviewed submit sample panels for a surface finish SF-30 with applied architectural treatment build panels on the project site where directed


Store fiber voids above ground level in a dry location Keep fiber voids dry until installed and overlaid with concrete

PART 2 PRODUCTS


The design engineering and construction of the formwork is the responsibility of the Contractor Design formwork in accordance with methodology of ACI 347 for anticipated loads lateral pressures and stresses and capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration of concrete Comply with the tolerances specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES However for surfaces with an ACI Class A surface designation limit the allowable deflection for facing material between studs for studs between walers and walers between bracing to 00025 times the span Design the formwork as a complete system with consideration given to the effects of cementitious materials and mixture additives such as fly ash cement type plasticizers accelerators retarders air entrainment and others Monitor the adequacy of formwork design and construction prior to and during concrete placement as part of the Contractors approved Quality Control Plan Submit design analysis and calculations for form design and methodology used in the design

22 FORM MATERIALS

Submit manufacturers data including literature describing form materials accessories and form releasing agents

221 Formwork

Comply with ACI 301 Section 2 Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view a surface finish SF-10 Provide for surfaces exposed to public view

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 2


a surface finish SF-30 Patch holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301 Submit form removal schedule indicating element and minimum length of time for form removal

222 Fiber Voids

Fiber voids must be the product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the commercial production of fiber voids Construct the voids of double faced corrugated fiberboard Fabricate the corrugated fiberboard of standard kraft paper liners impregnated with paraffin and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive with a board strength of 275 psi Voids which are impregnated with paraffin after construction in lieu of being constructed with paraffin impregnated fiberboard are acceptable Design voids to support not less than 1000 psf To prevent separation during concrete placement fiber voids assemble with steel or plastic banding at 4 feet on center maximum or by adequate stapling or gluing as recommended by the manufacturer Fiber voids placed under concrete slabs and that are 8 inches in depth may be heavy duty waffle box type constructed of paraffin impregnated corrugated fiberboard Submit one sample unit of fiber voids prior to installation of the voids and certificates attesting that fiber voids conform to the specified requirements

23 FIBER VOID RETAINERS

231 Polystyrene Rigid Insulation

Polystyrene rigid insulation must conform to ASTM C578 Type V VI or VII square edged Size 1-12 inches thick by 16 inches in height by 3 feet in length unless otherwise indicated

232 Precast Concrete

Precast concrete units must have a compressive strength of not less than 2500 psi reinforced with 6 inch by 6 inch by W14 WWF wire mesh and 12 inches (height) by 3 feet (length) by 1-58 inches (thickness) in size unless indicated

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

311 Formwork

Comply with ACI 301 Section 2 with surface tolerances in accordance with ACI 117

312 Fiber Voids

Place voids on a smooth firm dry bed of suitable material to avoid being displaced vertically and set tight with no buckled cartons in order that horizontal displacement cannot take place Seal the ends of each section of void by dipping in paraffin with any additional cutting of voids at the jobsite field dip in the same type of sealer unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with paraffin Prior to placing reinforcement cover the entire formed area for slabs with a 4 x 8 feet minimum flat sheets of fiber void corrugated fiberboard Seal joints with a moisture resistant tape having a minimum width of 3 inches If voids are destroyed or damaged and are not capable of supporting the design

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 3


load replace prior to placing of concrete

313 Fiber Void Retainers

Install fiber void retainers continuously on both sides of fiber voids placed under grade beams in order to retain the cavity after the fiber voids biodegrade

32 INSPECTION

Inspect forms and embedded items in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete Report the results of each inspection in writing Submit field inspection reports for concrete forms and embedded items


SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 4


SECTION 03 15 0000 10

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C919 (2012) Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications

ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D1751 (2004 E 2013 R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D1752 (2004a R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D2628 (1991 R 2011) Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements

ASTM D2835 (1989 R 2012) Lubricant for Installation of Preformed Compression Seals in Concrete Pavements

ASTM D412 (2016) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

ASTM D471 (2016a) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids

ASTM D5249 (2010 R 2016) Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold-and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints


COE CRD-C 513 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications for Rubber Waterstops

COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 1


for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Waterstops

SD-03 Product Data

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

Sealant

Waterstops

SD-04 Samples

Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals

Field-Molded Type

Waterstops

Splicing Waterstops

SD-07 Certificates


Sealant

Waterstops


Protect material delivered and placed in storage off the ground from moisture dirt and other contaminants Deliver sealants in the manufacturers original unopened containers Remove sealants from the site whose shelf life has expired

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

Use preformed expansion joint filler material conforming to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752 Type I or resin impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752 Submit certified manufacturers test reports for premolded expansion joint filler strips compression seals and lubricant and metallic waterstops to verify compliance with applicable specification Unless otherwise indicated filler material must be 38 inch thick and of a width applicable for the joint formed Backer material when required must conform to ASTM D5249

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 2


22 SEALANT

Joint sealant conforming to the following

221 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type

ASTM D2628

222 Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals

ASTM D2835 Submit a piece not less than 9 ft of 1 inch nominal width or wider seal or a piece not less than 12 ft of compression seal less than 1 inch nominal width Provide one quart of lubricant

223 Field-Molded Type

ASTM C920 Use Type M Grade P or NS Class 25 Use T sealant for horizontal joints Type M Grade NS Class 25 Use NT for vertical joints Use polyethylene tape coated paper metal foil or similar type materials as bond breaker The back-up material must be compressible non-shrink nonreactive with sealant and non-absorptive material type such as extruded butyl or polychloroprene rubber Submit 1 gallon of field-molded sealant and 1 quart of primer (when primer is recommended by the sealant manufacturer) identified to indicate manufacturer type of material quantity and shipment or lot represented

23 WATERSTOPS

Submit a sample of each material consisting of a piece not less than 12 inches long cut from each 200 feet of finished waterstop furnished but not less than a total of 4 linear feet of each type and size furnished For spliced segments of waterstops to be installed in the work furnish one spliced sample of each size and type for every 50 splices made in the factory and every 10 splices made at the job site for inspection and testing Make the spliced samples using straight run pieces with the splice located at the mid-length of the sample and finished as required for the installed waterstop the total length of each spliced sample not less than 12 inches Submit waterstop materials and splice samples for inspection and testing identified to indicate manufacturer type of material size and quantity of material and shipment represented Submit a shop drawing of the waterstops showing the placement and configuration

231 Non-Metallic Materials `

Manufacture non-metallic waterstops from a prime virgin resin reclaimed material is not acceptable The compound must contain plasticizers stabilizers and other additives to meet specified requirements Rubber waterstops conforming to COE CRD-C 513 Polyvinylchloride waterstops conforming to COE CRD-C 572 Thermoplastic elastomeric rubber waterstops conforming to ASTM D471 Submit a piece not less than 12 inch long cut from each 200 ft of finished waterstop furnished but not less than a total of 4 ft of each type size and lot furnished One splice sample of each size and type for every 50 splices made in the factory and every 10 splices made at the job site Make the splice samples using straight run pieces with the splice located at the mid-length of the sample and finished as required for the installed waterstop the total length of each splice not less than 12 inches long

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 3


232 Non-Metallic Hydrophilic

Swellable strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene rubber that swells upon contact with water conforming to ASTM D412 as follows Tensile strength 420 psi minimum ultimate elongation 600 percent minimum Hardness must be 50 minimum on the type A durometer and the volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 70 degrees F shall be 3 to 1 minimum

24 TESTS INSPECTIONS AND VERIFICATIONS

241 Splicing Waterstops

2411 Procedure and Performance Qualifications

Demonstrate procedure and performance qualifications for splicing waterstops in the presence of the Contracting Officer Submit procedures for splicing waterstops for approval

2412 Non-Metallic Waterstops

Demonstrate procedure and performance qualifications for splicing non-metallic waterstops by the manufacturer at the factory and the Contractor at the job site by each making three spliced samples of each size and type of finished waterstop

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Provide joint locations and details including materials and methods of installation of joint fillers and waterstops as specified and indicated In no case may any fixed metal be continuous through an expansion or contraction joint

311 Expansion Joints

Use preformed expansion joint filler in expansion and isolation joints in slabs around columns and between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where indicated Extend the filler to the full slab depth unless otherwise indicated neatly finish the edges of the joint with an edging tool of 18 inch radius except where a resilient floor surface will be applied Where the joint is to receive a sealant install the filler strips at the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered dressed and oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top to form a recess to the size shown on the drawings Remove the wood strip after the concrete has set Contractor may opt to use a removable expansion filler cap designed and fabricated for this purpose in lieu of the wood strip Thoroughly clean the groove of laitance curing compound foreign materials protrusions of hardened concrete and any dust If blowing out the groove use oil-free compressed air

312 Joint Sealant

Fill sawed contraction joints and expansion joints in slabs with joint sealant unless otherwise shown Joint surfaces must be clean dry and free of oil or other foreign material which would adversely affect the bond between sealant and concrete Apply joint sealant as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 4


3121 Joints With Preformed Compression Seals

Install compression seals with equipment capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal or concrete and with no more than 5 percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the joint and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant

3122 Joints With Field-Molded Sealant

Do not seal joints when the sealant material ambient air or concrete temperature is less than 40 degrees F When the sealants are meant to reduce the sound transmission characteristics of interior walls ceilings and floors follow the guidance provided in ASTM C919 Coat joints requiring a bond breaker with curing compound or with bituminous paint Install bond breaker and back-up material where required Prime joints and fill flush with joint sealant in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

32 WATERSTOPS INSTALLATION AND SPLICES

Install waterstops at the locations shown to form a continuous water-tight diaphragm Embed the bottom of each waterstop a minimum of 6 inches in firm rock or sealed to other cut-off systems Make adequate provision to support and completely protect the waterstops during the progress of the work Repair or replace any waterstop punctured or damaged Protect exposed waterstops during application of form release agents to avoid being coated Provide suitable guards to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of partially embedded waterstops from damage when concrete placement has been discontinued Accomplish splices with certified trained personnel using approved equipment and procedures

321 Non-Metallic

Fittings must be shop made using a machine specifically designed to mechanically weld the waterstop Use a miter guide proper fixturing (profile dependant) and portable power saw to miter cut the ends to be joined to ensure good alignment and contact between joined surfaces Splice straight lengths by squaring the ends to be joined Maintain continuity of the characteristic features of the cross section of the waterstop (for example ribs tabular center axis protrusions) across the splice

3211 Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop

Make splices by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop edges together using a thermoplastic splicing iron utilizing a non-stick surface specifically designed for waterstop welding Use the correct temperature to sufficiently melt without charring the plastic Reform waterstops at splices with a remolding iron with ribs or corrugations to match the pattern of the waterstop The spliced area when cooled must show no signs of separation holes or other imperfections when bent by hand in as sharp an angle as possible

3212 Quality Assurance

Edge welding will not be permitted Compress or close centerbulbs when

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 5


welding to non-centerbulb type Waterstop splicing defects which are unacceptable include but are not limited to the following 1) Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent section 2) Free lap joints 3) Misalignment of centerbulb ribs and end bulbs greater than 116 inch 4) Misalignment which reduces waterstop cross section more than 15 percent 5) Bond failure at joint deeper than 116 inch or 15 percent of material thickness 6) Misalignment of waterstop splice resulting in misalignment of waterstop in excess of 12 inch in 10 feet 7) Visible porosity in the weld area including pin holes 8) Charred or burnt material 9) Bubbles or inadequate bonding 10) Visible signs of splice separation when cooled splice is bent by hand at a sharp angle

322 Non-Metallic Hydrophilic Waterstop Installation

Miter cut ends to be joined with sharp knife or shears Adhere the ends with cyanacryiate (super glue) adhesive When joining hydrophilic type waterstop to PVC waterstop the hydrophilic waterstop shall be positioned as shown on the drawings Apply a liberal amount of a single component hydrophilic sealant to the junction to complete the transition

33 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Treat construction joints coinciding with expansion and contraction joints as expansion or contraction joints as applicable


SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 6


SECTION 03 20 0000 10

CONCRETE REINFORCING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 UNIT PRICES

111 Deformed Steel Bars

1111 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement Payment for steel in laps will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1112 Measurement

Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place The measured lengths will be converted to weights for the size of bars listed by the use of the nominal weights per linear foot specified in ASTM A615A615M


Unit of measure per pound

112 Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats

1121 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing fabricated deformed steel bar mats for concrete reinforcement Payment for steel in laps will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1122 Measurement

Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place Determine the weights by weighing or by manufacturers or catalog weights when weighing is not practicable



113 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement

1131 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing steel welded wire reinforcing for concrete Payment for steel in laps

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 1


will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1132 Measurement

Steel Welded Wire Reinforcing for Concrete will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place Determine the weights by weighing or by manufacturers or catalog weights when weighing is not practicable



114 Accessories

No payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing accessories incidental to and included in the payment for other items of work

12 REFERENCES






AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D14D14M (2011) Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel


ASTM A1035A1035M (2016a) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-carbon Chromium Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A1064A1064M (2016b) Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement Plain and Deformed for Concrete

ASTM A184A184M (2006 E2011) Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 2


ASTM A370 (2016) Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products

ASTM A53A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe Steel Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless


ASTM A675A675M (2014) Standard Specification for Steel Bars Carbon Hot-Wrought Special Quality Mechanical Properties

ASTM A706A706M (2016) Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A884A884M (2014) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

CRSI 10MSP (2009 28th Ed) Manual of Standard Practice

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcement

SD-03 Product Data

Reinforcing Steel

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests Inspections and Verifications

SD-07 Certificates

Reinforcing Steel

Qualified Welders


141 Welding Qualifications

Welders are required to be qualified in accordance with AWS D14D14M Perform qualification test at the worksite and notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours prior to conducting tests Special welding procedures and welders qualified by others may be accepted as permitted by

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 3


AWS D14D14M Submit a list of qualified welders names


Store reinforcement and accessories off the ground on platforms skids or other supports

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 DOWELS

Provide dowels conforming to ASTM A675A675M Grade 80 Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53A53M Schedule 80 may be used as dowels provided the ends are closed with metal or plastic inserts or with mortar

22 FABRICATED BAR MATS

Fabricated bar mats conforming to ASTM A184A184M

23 REINFORCING STEEL

Reinforcing steel of deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615A615M ASTM A706A706M or ASTM A1035A1035M grades and sizes as indicated Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement must conform to ASTM A1064A1064M

Submit certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing steel furnished contains no less than 25 percent recycled scrap steel and meets the requirements specified herein prior to the installation of reinforcing steel

24 WELDED WIRE REINFORCING

Welded wire reinforcing conforming to ASTM A1064A1064M When directed by the Contracting Officer for special applications use welded wire reinforcing conforming to ASTM A884A884M For wire with a specified yield strength (fy) exceeding 60000 psi fy must be the stress corresponding to a strain of 035 percent

25 WIRE TIES

Use wire ties that are 16 gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire Ties for epoxy-coated bars mustl be vinyl-coated or epoxy-coated Use zinc-coated ties for zinc-coated bars

26 SUPPORTS

Design bar supports for formed surfaces in accordance with CRSI 10MSP and fabricate of steel or precast concrete blocks Provide precast concrete blocks with wire ties and not less than 4 inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground Precast concrete block must have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete Coat steel supports for coated or galvanized bars with electrically compatible material for a distance of at least 2 inches beyond the point of contact with the bar Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be painted use galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel supports within 12 inch of concrete surface Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view must have the same color and texture as the finish surface For slabs on grade and topping slabs on steel deck supports use precast concrete blocks plastic coated steel fabricated with

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 4


bearing plates or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of plastic

27 SYNTHETIC FIBER REINFORCEMENT

Polypropylene synthetic fiber with a denier less than 100 and a nominal fiber length of 2 inches


Perform material tests specified and required by applicable standards by an approved laboratory and certified to demonstrate that the materials are in conformance with the specifications Perform and certify tests inspections and verifications and certify Submit certified tests reports of reinforcement steel showing that the steel complies with the applicable specifications for each steel shipment and identified with specific lots prior to placement Submit three copies of the heat analyses for each lot of steel furnished certifying that the steel conforms to the heat analyses

281 Reinforcement Steel Tests

Perform mechanical testing of steel in accordance with ASTM A370 except as otherwise specified or required by the material specifications Perform tension tests on full cross-section specimens using a gage length that spans the extremities of specimens with welds or sleeves included From chemical analyses of steel heats report the percentages of carbon phosphorous manganese sulphur and silicon present in the steel

282 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds

Perform non-destructive testing of welds in accordance with AWS D14D14M Section 7 except that radiographic testing is not permitted

PART 3 EXECUTION 31 REINFORCEMENT

Fabricate and place reinforcement steel and accessories as specified as indicated and as shown on approved shop drawings Fabrication and placement details of steel and accessories not specified or shown mustl be in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318 Cold bend reinforcement unless otherwise authorized Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill Do not bend bars after embedment in concrete Place safety caps on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement bars that pose a danger to life safety Face wire tie ends away from the forms Submit detail drawings showing reinforcing steel placement schedules sizes grades and splicing and bending details Show support details including types sizes and spacing

311 Placement

Reinforcement must be free from loose rust and scale dirt oil or other deleterious coating that could reduce bond with the concrete Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 at locations indicated plus or minus one bar diameter Do not continue reinforcement through expansion joints and place as indicated through construction or contraction joints Cover with concrete coverage as indicated or as required by ACI 318 If bars are moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 5


reinforcement conduits or embedded items the resulting arrangement of bars including additional bars required to meet structural requirements requires approval before concrete is placed

312 Placing Tolerances

Conform bar spacing and concrete cover to ACI 117

313 Splicing

Conform splices of reinforcement to ACI 318 and make only as required or indicated Bars may be spliced at alternate or additional locations at no additional cost to the Government subject to approval Splicing must be by lapping or by mechanical or welded butt connection except that lap splices must not be used for bars larger than No 11 unless otherwise indicated

3131 Lap Splices

Place lapped bars in contact and securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in concrete Do not space lapped bars farther apart than 15 the required length of lap or 6 inches

32 WELDED-WIRE REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT

Place welded-wire reinforcement in slabs as indicated Reinforcement placed in slabs on grade must be continuous between expansion construction and contraction joints Reinforcement placement at joints must be as indicated

May lap splices in such a way that the overlapped area equals the distance between the outermost crosswires plus 2 inches Stagger laps to avoid continuous laps in either direction Wire or clip together reinforcement at laps at intervals not to exceed 4 feet Position reinforcement by the use of supports

33 DOWEL INSTALLATION

Install dowels in slabs on grade at locations indicated and at right angles to joint being doweled Accurately position and align dowels parallel to the finished concrete surface before concrete placement Rigidly support dowels during concrete placement Coat one end of dowels with a bond breaker


SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 6


SECTION 03 31 0100 10

CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES





ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting

ACI SP-15 (2011) Field Reference Manual Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 301-05 with Selected ACI References




ASTM C1017C1017M (2013 E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C1064C1064M (2011) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete


ASTM C1107C1107M (2014a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 1


ASTM C1157C1157M (2011) Standard Specification for Hydraulic Cement


ASTM C123C123M (2014) Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate

ASTM C1240 (2014) Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C127 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C128 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

ASTM C131C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine


ASTM C142C142M (2010) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates


ASTM C150C150M (2016 E 2016) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C1602C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete



SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 2


ASTM C260C260M (2010a R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C295C295M (2012) Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete




ASTM C40C40M (2016) Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C441 (2011) Effectiveness of Pozzolans or Ground Blast-Furnace Slag in Preventing Excessive Expansion of Concrete Due to the Alkali-Silica Reaction


ASTM C535 (2016) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM C595C595M (2016) Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements

ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C666C666M (2015) Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

ASTM C87C87M (2010) Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar

ASTM C94C94M (2016a) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C989C989M (2014) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars


SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 3




NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

NIST HB 44 (2013) Specifications Tolerances and Other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)

NRMCA CPMB 100 (2000 R 2006) Concrete Plant Standards


COE CRD-C 104 (1980) Method of Calculation of the Fineness Modulus of Aggregate

COE CRD-C 114 (1997) Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing of Concrete Specimens

COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles

COE CRD-C 143 (1962) Specifications for Meters for Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregate

COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete

COE CRD-C 94 (1995) Corps of Engineers Specification for Surface Retarders

12 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Design in accordance with ACI 301 Section 4 Submit concrete mix designs with the following properties

121 Air Content

Air content between 4 and 7 percent as delivered to the forms and as determined by ASTM C231C231M except that when the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate is 34 inch between 45 and 75 percent

122 Slump

The slump within the range of 1 to 4 inches as determined in accordance with ASTM C143C143M Where placement by pump is approved the slump must not exceed 6 inches

123 Concrete Strength

Provide specified compressive strength fc as follows

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 4


COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSI) STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

4000 28 days All New Concrete

124 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material (WC) Ratio

Maximum WC allowed as follows

WATER-CEMENT RATIO BY MASS

STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

045 All New Concrete

These WCs may cause higher strengths than that required by paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH

125 Construction Tolerances

Except as specified otherwise a plus tolerance increases and a minus tolerance decreases the dimension to which it applies A tolerance without sign means plus or minus Where only one sign is specified there is no limit in the other direction Tolerances are not cumulative The most restrictive tolerance will control Tolerances can not extend the structure beyond legal boundaries

a Make level and grade tolerance measurements of slabs as soon as possible after finishing When forms or shoring are used make the measurements prior to removal

b Construction tolerances must meet the requirements of ACI 117 and any of the following requirements that are applicable

1251 Formed Concrete Surfaces

For High Velocity flow Class A-HV-Abrupt variation a positive offset between concrete surfaces is a raise of elevation in the direction of water flow and a negative offset is a drop of elevation in the direction of the water flow

Direction of water flow + 0 inches

- 18 inch

Perpendicular to the direction of water flow

18 inch

1252 Appearance

Clean permanently exposed surfaces if stained or otherwise discolored by a method that does not harm the concrete and that is approved by the Contracting Officer

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 5


Reinforcing steel

SD-03 Product Data

Concrete Mix DesignsBatch PlantConcrete MixersConveying EquipmentPlacing EquipmentCold-Weather RequirementsHot-Weather RequirementsCementitious Materials Admixtures and Curing CompoundNonshrink GroutMechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors

SD-06 Test Reports

AggregatesMill Test ReportsTests and InspectionsQuality of AggregatesWater

SD-07 Certificates

Concrete Field Testing TechniciansConcrete Construction Inspector (CCI)Cementitious MaterialsBlended Hydraulic Cement


Curing Compound


The Government will sample and test aggregates and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples Samples of aggregates will be obtained at the point of batching in accordance with ASTM D75D75M Concrete will be sampled in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Do not use a material until the Contracting Officer gives notice that test results are satisfactory The Government will sample and test chemical admixtures curing compounds and cementitious materials The individuals who sample and test concrete or the constituents of concrete as required in this specification must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I The individuals who perform the inspection of concrete construction must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Construction Inspector (CCI) Submit statements that the concrete testing technicians and the concrete inspectors meet the specified requirements Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15 and CRSI 10MSP at project site

141 Cement and Pozzolan

If cement or pozzolan is to be obtained from more than one source state the estimated amount to be obtained from each source and the proposed

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 6


schedule of shipments in the initial notification

1411 Prequalified Cement Sources

Deliver and use cement directly from a mill of a producer designated as a qualified source Samples of cement for check testing will be taken at the project site or concrete-producing plant by a representative of the Contracting Officer for testing at the expense of the Government A list of prequalified cement sources is available from Director US Army Corps of Engineers Engineer Research and Development Center - Structures Laboratory 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180-6199 ATTN CEERD-SC

1412 Prequalified Pozzolan Sources

Deliver and use pozzolan directly from a producer designated as a qualified source Samples of pozzolan for check testing will be taken at the project site by a representative of the Contracting Officer for testing at the expense of the Government A list of prequalified pozzolan sources is available from the Director US Army Corps of Engineers Engineer Research and Development Center - Structures Laboratory 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180-6199 ATTN CEERD-SC

142 Cementitious Materials Admixtures and Curing Compound

At least 60 days in advance of concrete placement notify the Contracting Officer of the sources for cementitious materials admixtures and curing compound along with sampling location brand name type and quantity to be used in the manufacture andor curing of the concrete Cementitious Materials including Cement and Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag will be accepted on the basis of the manufacturers certification of compliance Do not use cementitious materials until receiving Contracting Officer notice of acceptance Cementitious materials will be subject to check testing from samples obtained at the source at transfer points or at the project site as scheduled by the Contracting Officer and such sampling will be by or under the supervision of the Government at its expense Promptly remove material not meeting specifications from the site of work Submit samples of materials for Government testing and approval Submit manufacturers instructions for placement of curing compound


Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing and reject if test results are not satisfactory Chemical admixtures will be accepted based on compliance with the requirements of paragraph CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Submit mill test reports attesting that materials meet the requirements of the specification under which they are furnished Certification and mill test reports must be from samples taken from the particular lot furnished Certify the following for compliance with all specification requirements Impervious-Sheet Curing Materials Air-Entraining Admixture Other Chemical Admixtures Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 7


Submit descriptive literature of the Nonshrink Grout proposed for use together with a certificate from the manufacturer stating that it is suitable for the application or exposure for which it is being considered

211 Cementitious Materials

Cementitious materials are portland cement portland-pozzolan cement portland blast-furnace slag cement portland cement in combination with pozzolan or GGBF slag or portland cement in combination with silica fume conforming to appropriate specifications listed below Restrict the use of cementitious materials in architectural concrete to one color one source and one type

2111 Portland Cement

ASTM C150C150M Type I or II except that the maximum amount of C3A in Type I cement is 15 percent low alkali when used with aggregates listed at the end of this section which require it In lieu of low-alkali cement the Contractor may use a combination of portland cement that does not meet the low-alkali requirement with a pozzolan or GGBF slag provided the following requirement is met The expansion of the proposed combination when tested in accordance with ASTM C441 must be equal to or less than the expansion of a low-alkali cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C150C150M when tested in general conformance with ASTM C441 Run the expansion tests concurrently at an independent laboratory that is nationally recognized to perform such tests The Government reserves the right to confirm the test results and to adjust the percentage of pozzolan or slag in the combination to suit other requirements

2112 Fly Ash

ASTM C618 Class F except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must not exceed 6 percent Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 8 percent and a total equivalent alkali content less than 15 percent Add with cement

2113 Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

Natural pozzolan must be raw or calcined and conform to ASTM C618 Class N including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction and must have an ignition loss not exceeding 3 percent Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent and total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent

2114 Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan

Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) must conform to ASTM C618 Class F or N and the following additional requirements

a The strength activity index at 28 days of age is at least 95 percent of the control specimens

b The average particle size doest not exceed 6 microns

c The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 is greater than 77 percent

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 8


2115 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

Conform to ASTM C989C989M Grade 100

2116 Silica Fume

Silica fume may be furnished as a dry densified material or as a slurry Silica fume unprocessed or before processing into a slurry or a densified material must conform to ASTM C1240 with Table 2 and the Specific Surface Area and Uniformity Requirements in Table 4 invoked Provide the services of a manufacturers technical representative experienced in mixture proportioning placement procedures and curing of concrete containing silica fume Make the manufacturers representative available for consultation by both the Contractor and the Government during mixture proportioning planning and production of silica-fume concrete and onsite immediately prior to and during at least the first placement of concrete containing silica fume and at other times if directed

2117 Blended Hydraulic Cement

Conform to ASTM C595C595M and ASTM C1157C1157M Type IP or IS including the optional requirement for mortar expansion and sulfate soundness and consist of a mixture of ASTM C150C150M Type I or Type II cement and a complementary cementing material Provide slag added to the Type IS blend conforming to ASTM C989C989M ground granulated blast-furnace slag Use pozzolan added to the Type IP blend conforming ASTM C618 Class F and interground with the cement clinker Provide the manufacturers written statement that the amount of pozzolan in the finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the finished cement from lot-to-lot or within a lot The percentage and type of mineral admixture used in the blend cannot change from that submitted for the aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning

212 Aggregates

ASTM C33C33M except as modified herein Furnish aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one source Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33C33M

2121 Aggregate Expansion

Provide fine and coarse aggregates with expansions less than 008 percent at 28 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C1260 Should the test data indicate an expansion of 008 percent or greater reject the aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C1567 and using the proposed mix design In this case include the mix design low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials

a GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious

b Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of

(1) 30 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 65 percent or more(2) 25 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more(3) 20 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more(4) 15 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 9


c Silica fume at a minimum of 7 percent of total cementitious

If a combination of these materials is chosen the minimum amount must be a linear combination of the minimum amounts above Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 008 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567

2122 Unfavorable Properties

Do not provide aggregates possessing properties or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C295C295M


Provide chemical admixtures when required or permitted that conform to the appropriate specification listed

2131 Air-Entraining Admixture

Conform to ASTM C260C260M and consistently cause the concrete to have an air content in the specified ranges under field conditions

2132 Accelerating Admixture

Meet the requirements of ASTM C494C494M Type C or E except that calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride is not permitted

2133 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture

21331 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixtures

ASTM C494C494M Type A B or D except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived

21332 High-Range Water Reducing Admixture

ASTM C494C494M Type F or G except that the 6-month and 1-year strength requirements are waived The admixture may be used only when approved by the Contracting Officer such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractors Quality Control Plan

2134 Other Chemical Admixtures

Provide other chemical admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete in compliance with ASTM C1017C1017M Type 1 or 2 Only use these admixture for concrete listed in paragraph SLUMP

214 Water

Provide water for mixing and curing compliance with the requirements of ASTM C1602C1602M potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali Submit test report showing water complies with ASTM C1602C1602M

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 10



Provide reinforcing bars conforming to the requirements of ASTM A615A615M Grade 60 deformed Welded steel wire reinforcement must conform to the requirements of ASTM A1064A1064M Detail reinforcement not indicated in accordance with ACI 301 Provide mechanical reinforcing bar connectors in accordance with ACI 301 and with 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar

216 Nonshrink Grout

Cconform to ASTM C1107C1107M and a commercial formulation suitable for the application proposed

22 EQUIPMENT

Submit data on placing equipment and methods Conform the batch plant to the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 and as specified however rating plates attached to batch plant equipment are not required Submit batch plant data forconformance with applicable specifications

221 Batching Equipment

Use partially automatic semiautomatic or automatic batching controls Provide the semiautomatic batching system with interlocks such that the discharge device cannot be actuated until the indicated material is within the applicable tolerance Equip the batching system with an accurate recorder or recorders that meet the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 Provide separate bins or compartments for each size group of aggregate and cement pozzolan and GGBF slag Weigh aggregates either in separate weigh batchers with individual scales or cumulatively in one weigh batcher on one scale Do not weigh aggregate in the same batcher with cement pozzolan or GGBF slag If both cement and pozzolan or GGBF slag are used they may be batched cumulatively provided that the portland cement is batched first If measured by mass do not weigh the mass of the water cumulatively with another ingredient Interlock water batcher filling and discharging valves so that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully closed Provide an accurate mechanical device for measuring and dispensing each admixtured Interlock each dispenser with the batching and discharging operation of the water so that each admixture is separately batched and discharged automatically in a manner to obtain uniform distribution throughout the batch in the specified mixing period Do not combine admixtures prior to introduction in water Arrange the plant to facilitate the inspection of all operations at all times Provide facilities for obtaining representative samples of aggregates from each bin or compartment Clearly mark all filling ports for cementitious materials bins or silos with a permanent sign stating the contents

222 Scales

Provide equipment for batching by mass conforming to the applicable requirements of NIST HB 44 except that the accuracy is plus or minus 02 percent of scale capacity Provide standard test weights and any other auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating performance of each scale or other measuring devices Perform tests at the frequency required in paragraph TESTS AND INSPECTIONS and in the presence of a Government inspector

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 11


223 Batching Tolerances

a Weighing Tolerances

MATERIAL PERCENT OF REQUIRED MASS

Cementitious materials 0 to plus 2

Aggregate plus or minus 2

Water plus or minus 1

Chemical admixture 0 to plus 6

b Volumetric Tolerances - For volumetric batching equipment the following tolerances apply to the required volume of material being batched

Water Plus or minus 1 percent

Chemical admixtures Zero to plus 6 percent

224 Moisture Control

The plant must be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture content of the aggregates and to change the masses of the materials being batched Provide an electric moisture meter complying with the provisions of COE CRD-C 143 for measuring moisture in the fine aggregate Arrange the sensing element so that the measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the sand bin or in the sand batcher

225 Concrete Mixers

Do not charge the concrete mixers in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer Operate the mixers at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer Maintain the mixers in satisfactory operating condition and keep the mixer drums free of hardened concrete Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory results promptly discontinue its use until it is repaired Submit concrete mixer data including the make type and capacity of concrete mixers proposed for mixing concrete

2251 Stationary Mixers

Concrete plant mixers must be tilting nontilting horizontal-shaft vertical-shaft or pugmill and provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed The mixing time and uniformity must conform to all the requirements in ASTM C94C94M applicable to central-mixed concrete

2252 Truck Mixers

Truck mixers the mixing of concrete therein and concrete uniformity must conform to the requirements of ASTM C94C94M A truck mixer may be used either for complete mixing (transit-mixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a stationary mixer (shrink-mixed) Equip each truck with two

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 12


counters from which it will be possible to determine the number of revolutions at mixing speed and the number of revolutions at agitating speed

226 Conveying Equipment

Submit data on the conveying equipment and methods for transporting handling and depositing the concrete Conform the conveying equipment to the following requirements

2261 Buckets

The interior hopper slope shall be not less than 58 degrees from the horizontal the minimum dimension of the clear gate opening shall be at least five times the nominal maximum-size aggregate and the area of the gate opening shall not be less than 2 square feet The maximum dimension of the gate opening shall not be greater than twice the minimum dimension The bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed and may be manually pneumatically or hydraulically operated except that buckets larger than 2 cubic yards shall not be manually operated The design of the bucket shall provide means for positive regulation of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position

2262 Transfer Hoppers

Concrete may be charged into nonagitating hoppers for transfer to other conveying devices Transfer hoppers must be capable of receiving concrete directly from delivery vehicles and have conical-shaped discharge features Equip the transfer hopper with a hydraulically operated gate and with a means of external vibration to effect complete discharge Do not hold concrete in nonagitating transfer hoppers more than 30 minutes

2263 Trucks

Truck mixers operating at agitating speed or truck agitators used for transporting plant-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94C94M Nonagitating equipment may be used for transporting plant-mixed concrete over a smooth road when the hauling time is less than 15 minutes Bodies of nonagitating equipment shall be smooth watertight metal containers specifically designed to transport concrete shaped with rounded corners to minimize segregation and equipped with gates that will permit positive control of the discharge of the concrete

2264 Chutes

When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer agitator or nonagitating equipment the chutes attached to this equipment by the manufacturer may be used Use a discharge deflector when required by the Contracting Officer Separate chutes and other similar equipment will not be permitted for conveying concrete

2265 Belt Conveyors

Design and operate to assure a uniform flow of concrete from mixer to final place of deposit without segregation of ingredients or loss of mortar and provide with positive means for preventing segregation of the concrete at the transfer points and the point of placing Construct belt conveyors such that the idler spacing does not exceed 36 inches The belt speed must be a minimum of 300 feet per minute and a maximum of 750 feet

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 13


per minute If concrete is to be placed through installed horizontal or sloping reinforcing bars discharge the conveyor concrete into a pipe or elephant trunk that is long enough to extend through the reinforcing bars

2266 Concrete Pumps

Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pump when approved The pumping equipment must be piston or squeeze pressure The pipeline must be rigid steel pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose The inside diameter of the pipe must be at least three times the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate in the concrete mixture to be pumped but not less than 4 inches Do not use aluminum pipe

227 Vibrators

Use vibrators of the proper size frequency and amplitude for the type of work being performed in conformance with the following requirements

APPLICATION HEAD DIAMETER (inches)

FREQUENCY (VPM)

AMPLITUDE (inches )

Thin walls beams etc

1-14 to 2-12 9000 to 13500 002 to 004

General construction 2 to 3-12 8000 to 12000 0025 to 005

Determine the frequency and amplitude in accordance with COE CRD-C 521

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION FOR PLACING

311 Embedded Items

Before placement of concrete take care to determine that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated on the drawings or required Embedded items must be free of oil and other foreign matter such as loose coatings or rust paint and scale The embedding of wood in concrete will be permitted only when specifically authorized or directed Temproarily fill voids in sleeves inserts and anchor slots with readily removable materials to prevent the entry of concrete into voids Welding including tack welding will not be permitted on embedded metals within 2 feet of the surface of the concrete

312 Concrete on Earth Foundations

Earth surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed must be clean damp and free from debris frost ice and standing or running water Prior to placement of concrete compact the earth foundation in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

313 Concrete on Rock Foundations

Rock surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed mustl be clean free from oil standing or running water ice mud drummy rock coating debris and loose semidetached or unsound fragments Clean joints in rock to a satisfactory depth as determined by the Contracting Officer and to firm rock on the sides Immediately before the concrete is placed thoroughly clean all rock surfaces by the use of air-water jets or sandblasting as described in paragraph CONSTRUCTION JOINT TREATMENT Keep

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 14


all rock surfaces continuously wet for at least 24 hours immediately prior to placing concrete thereon Cover all approximately horizontal surfaces immediately before the concrete is placed with a layer of mortar proportioned similar to that in the concrete mixture Cover the mortar with concrete before the time of initial setting of the mortar

314 Construction Joint Treatment

Submit the method and equipment proposed for joint cleanup and waste disposal for review and approval Conform construction joint treatment to the following requirements

3141 Joint Preparation

Prepare concrete surfaces to which additional concrete is to be bonded for receiving the next lift or adjacent concrete by cleaning with either air-water cutting sandblasting high-pressure water jet or other approved method Air-water cutting will not be permitted on formed surfaces or surfaces congested with reinforcing steel Regardless of the method used the resulting surfaces must be free from all laitance and inferior concrete so that clean well bonded coarse aggregate is exposed uniformly throughout the lift surface Do not undercut the edges of the coarse aggregate Wash the surface again as the last operation prior to placing the next lift No standing water is allowed on the surface upon which concrete is placed

3142 Air-Water Cutting

Perform air-water cutting of a construction joint at the proper time and only on horizontal construction joints The air pressure used in the jet must be 90 to 110 psi and the water pressure must be just sufficient to bring the water into effective influence of the air pressure When approved by the Contracting Officer a retarder complying with the requirements of COE CRD-C 94 may be applied to the surface of the lift to prolong the period of time during which air-water cutting is effective Prior to receiving approval furnish samples of the material to be used and demonstrate the method to be used in applications After cutting wash and rinse the surface long as there is any trace of cloudiness of the wash water Where necessary to remove accumulated laitance coatings stains debris and other foreign material high-pressure water jet or sandblasting will be required as the last operation before placing the next lift

3143 High-Pressure Water Jet

A stream of water under a pressure of not less than 3000 psi may be used for cleaning Delay its use until the concrete is sufficiently hard so that only the surface skin or mortar is removed and there is no undercutting of coarse-aggregate particles If the water jet is incapable of a satisfactory cleaning clean the surface by sandblasting

3144 Wet Sandblasting

This method may be used when the concrete has reached sufficient strength to prevent undercutting of the coarse aggregate particles Then thoroughly wash the surface of the concrete to remove all loose materials

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 15


3145 Waste Disposal

Dispose of the waste water employed in cutting washing and rinsing of concrete surfaces such that the waste water does not stain discolor or affect exposed surfaces of the structures or damage the environment of the project area The method of disposal is subject to approval

32 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE

Convey and place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 Do not reconstitute concrete that has begun to solidify

321 Cold-Weather Requirements

Place concrete in cold weather in accordance with ACI 306R

322 Hot-Weather Requirements

Place concrete in hot weather in accordance with ACI 305R

323 Placing Concrete in Ogee Section

Finish he unformed portion of the ogee section by placing concrete slightly above grade and striking off to grade by accurate screeding Screeding may be accomplished by semimechanical devices or by a mechanical screed that consolidates and screeds the surface in one operation Ribs embedded in the fresh concrete as guides for screeds will not be permitted

33 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES

331 Setting of Plates

After being plumbed and properly positioned provide column base plates bearing plates for beams and similar structural members and machinery and equipment base plates with full bearing with nonshrink grout The space between the top of concrete or masonry-bearing surface and the bottom of the plate must be approximately 124 of the width of the plate but not less than 12 inch for plates less than 12 inches wide Concrete surfaces must be rough clean and free of oil grease and laitance and damp Clean metal surfaces free of oil grease and rust

332 Nonshrink Grout Application

Water content must be the minimum that will provide a flowable mixture and fill the space to be grouted without segregation bleeding or reduction of strength

3321 Mixing and Placing of Nonshrink Grout

Mix and place in accordance with the material manufacturers instructions and as specified Thoroughly dry-mix ingredients before adding water After adding water mix the batch for 3 minutes Size batches to allow continuous placement of freshly mixed grout Discard grout not used within 30 minutes after mixing Fill the space between the top of the concrete or masonry-bearing surface and the plate solid with the grout Use forms of wood or other equally suitable material for retaining the grout and remove after the grout has set If grade A grout as specified in ASTM C1107C1107M is used form all surfaces to provide restraint Work the placed grout to eliminate voids however avoid overworking and

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 16


breakdown of the initial set Do not be retemper or subject grout to vibration from any source Where clearances are unusually small place under pressure with a grout pump Maintain temperature of the grout and of surfaces receiving the grout at 65 to 85 degrees F until after setting

3322 Treatment of Exposed Surfaces

After the grout has set cut back the exposed surfaces of those types containing metallic aggregate 1 inch and immediately cover with a parge coat of mortar proportioned by mass of one part portland cement two parts sand and sufficient water to make the mixture placeable The parge coat must have a smooth dense finish The exposed surface of other types of nonshrink grout must have a smooth dense finish

3323 Curing

Cure grout and parge coats in accordance with Section 03 39 0000 10 CONCRETE CURING


Submit test results and inspection reports daily and weekly Tests and inspect in accordance the following

341 General

Perform the inspections and tests described below and based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action required and submit reports as required When in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the concreting operation is out of control cease concrete placement Locate the laboratory performing the tests on site and conform with ASTM C1077 The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to start of concreting operations and at least once per year thereafter for conformance with ASTM C1077

342 Testing and Inspection Requirements

3421 Fine Aggregate

34211 Grading

At least once during each shift when the concrete plant is operating perform one sieve analysis and fineness modulus determination in accordance with ASTM C136C136M and COE CRD-C 104 for the fine aggregate or for each size range of fine aggregate if it is batched in more than one size or classification The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for control However the Contractor is responsible for delivering fine aggregate to the mixer within specification limits

34212 Corrective Action for Fine Aggregate Grading

When the amount passing on any sieve is outside the specification limits immediately resample and retest the fine aggregate If there is another failure on any sieve immediately be report to the Contracting Officer

34213 Moisture Content Testing

When in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the electric moisture meter

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 17


is not operating satisfactorily perform at least four tests for moisture content in accordance with ASTM C566 during each 8-hour period of mixing plant operation Randomly select the times for the tests within the 8-hour period Make an additional test whenever the slump is shown to be out of control or excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman When the electric moisture meter is operating satisfactorily make at least two direct measurements of moisture content per week to check the calibration of the meter Use the results of tests for moisture content to adjust the added water in the control of the batch plant

34214 Moisture Content Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of the fine aggregate changes by 05 percent or more adjust the scale settings for the fine-aggregate batcher and water batcher (directly or by means of a moisture compensation device) if necessary to maintain the specified slump

3422 Coarse Aggregate

34221 Grading

At least once during each shift in which the concrete plant is operating conduct a sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136C136M for each size of coarse aggregate The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for production control A test record of samples of aggregate taken at the same locations must show the results of the current test as well as the average results of the five most recent tests including the current test The Contractor may adopt limits for control which are coarser than the specification limits for samples taken at locations other than as delivered to the mixer to allow for degradation during handling

34222 Corrective Action for Grading

When the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits immediately resample and retest the coarse aggregate If the second sample fails on any sieve report that fact to the Contracting Officer Where two consecutive averages of five tests are outside specification limits consider the operation out of control and report to the Contracting Officer Stop concreting and take immediate steps to correct the grading

34223 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Content

Make a test for moisture content of each size group of coarse aggregate at least twice per week When two consecutive readings for smallest size coarse aggregate differ by more than 10 percent increase frequency of testing to that specified above for fine aggregate until the difference falls below 10 percent

34224 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of any size of coarse aggregate changes by 05 percent or more adjust the scale setting for the coarse aggregate batcher and the water batcher if necessary to maintain the specified slump

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 18


3423 Quality of Aggregates

Submit aggregate quality tests at least 30 days prior to start of concrete placement

34231 Frequency of Quality Tests

Thirty days prior to the start of concrete placement perform all tests for aggregate quality listed below In addition after the start of concrete placement perform tests for aggregate quality in accordance with the frequency schedule shown below Take amples tested after the start of concrete placement immediately prior to entering the concrete mixer

FREQUENCY

PROPERTY FINE AGGREGATE COARSE AGGREGATE TEST

Specific Gravity Every 3 months Every 3 months ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Absorption Every 3 months Every 3 months ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Durability Factor (using Procedure A)

Every 12 months Every 12 months COE CRD-C 114 ASTM C666C666M

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles

Every 3 months Every 3 months ASTM C142C142M

Material Finer than No 200 Sieve

Not applicable Every 3 months ASTM C117

Impurities Every 3 months Not applicable ASTM C40C40M ASTM C87C87M

LA Abrasion Not applicable Every 6 months ASTM C131C131M ASTM C535

Soft and Friable (Scratch Hardness)

Not applicable Every 6 months COE CRD-C 130

Chert less than 240 specific gravity


Coal and Lignite less than less than 200 specific gravity


Petrographic Examination


34232 Corrective Action for Aggregate Quality

If the result of a quality test fails to meet the requirements for quality immediately prior to start of concrete placement change production

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 19


procedures or materials and perform additional tests until the material meets the quality requirements prior to proceeding with either mixture proportioning studies or starting concrete placement After concrete placement commences whenever the result of a test for quality fails the requirements immediately rerun the test If the second test fails the quality requirement report the fact to the Contracting Officer and take immediate steps to rectify the situation

3424 Scales

34241 Weighing Accuracy

Check the accuracy of the scales by test weights prior to start of concrete operations and at least once every 3 months for conformance with the applicable requirements of paragraph BATCHING EQUIPMENT Also make such tests as directed whenever there are variations in properties of the fresh concrete that could result from batching errors

34242 Batching and Recording Accuracy

Once a week check the accuracy of each batching and recording device during a weighing operation by noting and recording the required weight recorded weight and the actual weight batched Confirm that the calibration devices described in paragraph EQUIPMENT for checking the accuracy of dispensed admixtures are operating properly

34243 Scales Corrective Action

When either the weighing accuracy or batching accuracy does not comply with specification requirements do not operate the plant until necessary adjustments or repairs have been made Correct discrepancies in recording accuracies immediately

3425 Batch-Plant Control

Continuously control the measurement of all constituent materials including cementitious materials each size of aggregate water and admixtures Adjust the aggregate weights and amount of added water as necessary to compensate for free moisture in the aggregates Adjust the amount of air-entraining agent to control air content within specified limits Prepare a report indicating type and source of cement used type and source of pozzolan or slag used amount and source of admixtures used aggregate source the required aggregate and water weights per cubic yard amount of water as free moisture in each size of aggregate and the batch aggregate and water weights per cubic yard for each class of concrete batched during plant operation

3426 Concrete Mixture

34261 Air Content Testing

Conduct air content tests when test specimens are fabricated In addition make at least two tests for air content on randomly selected batches of each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour period of concrete production Make additional tests when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Government quality assurance representative Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM C231C231M Plot test results on control charts which at all times are readily available to the Government Keep copies of the current

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 20


control charts in the field by the Contractors quality control representatives and plotted results as tests are made When a single test result reaches either the upper or lower action limit immediately conduct a second test Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the air content of the batch to plot on both the control chart for air content and the control chart for range and for determining the need for any remedial action Plot the result of each test or average as noted in the previous sentence on a separate chart for each mixture on which an average line is set at the midpoint of the specified air content range from paragraph AIR CONTENT Set an upper warning limit and a lower warning limit line 10 percentage point above and below the average line Set an upper action limit and a lower action limit line 15 percentage points above and below the average line respectively Plot the range between each two consecutive tests on a control chart for range where an upper warning limit is set at 20 percentage points and up upper action limit is set at 30 percentage points Samples for air content may be taken at the mixer however the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated air content If the materials or transportation methods cause air content loss between the mixer and the placement take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the air content at the mixer as directed

34262 Air Content Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for percent air reach either warning limit immediately adjust the amount of air-entraining admixture batched As soon as is practical after each adjustment conduct another test to verify the result of the adjustment Whenever a point on the control chart range reaches the warning limit recalibrate the admixture dispenser to ensure that it is operating accurately and with good reproducibility Whenever a point on either control chart reaches an action limit line the air content is considered out of control and immediately halt the concreting operation until the air content is under control Make additional air content tests when concreting is restarted

34263 Slump Testing

In addition to slump tests made when test specimens are fabricated make at least four slump tests on randomly selected batches in accordance with ASTM C143C143M for each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour or less period of concrete production each day Also make additional tests shall when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Governments quality assurance representative Plot test results on control charts which are readily available to the Government at all times Keep copies of the current control charts in the field by the Contractors quality control representatives and plot results as tests are made When a single slump test reaches or goes beyond either the upper or lower action limit immediately make a second test on the same batch of concrete Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the slump of the batch to plot on both the control chart for percent air and the chart for range and for determining the need for any remedial action Set an upper warning limit at 12 inch below the maximum allowable slump on separate control charts for percent air used for each type of mixture as specified in paragraph SLUMP and set an upper action limit line and lower action limit line at the maximum and minimum allowable slumps respectively as specified in the same paragraph Plot the range between each consecutive slump test for each type of mixture on a single control chart for range on which an upper action limit is set at

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 21


2 inches Take samples for slump at the mixer however the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated slump If the materials or transportation methods cause slump loss between mixer and the placement take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the slump at the mixer as directed

34264 Slump Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for slump reach the upper warning limit immediately adjust the batch weights of water and fine aggregate Make adjustments so that the total water content does not exceed that amount allowed by the maximum WC specified based upon aggregates which are in a saturated surface-dry condition When a single slump reaches the upper or lower action limit no further concrete may be delivered to the placing site until proper adjustments have been made Immediately after each adjustment make another test to verify the correctness of the adjustment Whenever two consecutive slump tests made during a period when there was no adjustment of batch weights produce a point on the control chart for range at or above the upper action limit immediately halt the concreting operation and take appropriate steps to bring the slump under control Also make additional slump tests as directed

34265 Temperature

Measure the temperature of the concrete when compressive strength specimens are fabricated Measure in accordance with ASTM C1064C1064M Report the temperature along with the compressive strength data

34266 Compressive-Strength Specimens

Obtain samples and test concrete for quality control during placement Sample fresh concrete for testing in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Make six test cylinders Test concrete for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for each design mix and for every 100 cubic yards of concrete Test two cylinders at 7 days two cylinders at 28 days and hold two cylinders in reserve Prepare concrete test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31C31M Perform compressive strength testing in accordance with ASTM C39C39M

3427 Inspection Before Placing

Inspect foundation or construction joints forms and embedded items for quality in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete Report the results of each inspection in writing

3428 Placing

34281 Placing Inspection

The placing foreman supervises all placing operations determines that the correct quality of concrete or grout is placed in each location as directed and is for measuring and recording concrete temperatures and ambient temperature hourly during placing operations weather conditions time of placement yardage placed and method of placement

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 22


34282 Placing Corrective Action

The placing foreman must not permit batching and placing to begin until he has verified that an adequate number of vibrators in working order and with competent operators are available Discontinue placing if any pile of concrete is inadequately consolidated If any batch of concrete fails to meet the temperature requirements take immediate steps to improve temperature controls

3429 Vibrators

34291 Vibrator Testing and Use

Determine the frequency and amplitude of each vibrator in accordance with COE CRD-C 521 prior to initial use and at least once a month when concrete is being placed Make sdditional tests as directed when a vibrator does not appear to be adequately consolidating the concrete Determine the frequency at the same time the vibrator is operating in concrete with the tachometer held against the upper end of the vibrator head while almost submerged and just before the vibrator is withdrawn from the concrete Determine the amplitude with the head vibrating in air Take two measurements one near the tip and another near the upper end of the vibrator head and average these results Report the make model type and size of the vibrator and frequency and amplitude results in writing

34292 Vibrator Corrective Action

Immediately remove any vibrator not meeting the requirements of paragraph VIBRATORS from service and repair or replace

34210 Mixer Uniformity

Submit the results of the initial mixer uniformity tests at least 5 days prior to the initiation of placing


Prior to the start of concrete placing and once every 6 months when concrete is being placed or once for every 75000 cubic yards of concrete placed whichever results in the longest time interval dtermine uniformity of concrete mixing in accordance with ASTM C94C94M

342102 Truck Mixers

Prior to the start of concrete placing and at least once every 6 months when concrete is being placed determine uniformity of concrete in accordance with ASTM C94C94M Randomly select the truck mixers for testing When satisfactory performance is found in one truck mixer the performance of mixers of substantially the same design and condition of the blades may be regarded as satisfactory

34211 Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action

When a mixer fails to meet mixer uniformity requirements either remove the mixer from service on the work increase the mixing time change the batching sequence reduce the batch size or adjust the mixer until compliance is achieved

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 23


343 Reports

Report all results of tests or inspections conducted informally as they are completed and in writing daily Prepare a weekly report for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week During periods of cold-weather protection make reports of pertinent temperatures daily These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs Confirm such reports of failures and the action taken in writing in the routine reports The Contracting Officer has the right to examine all test and inspection records


SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 24


SECTION 03 39 0000 10

CONCRETE CURING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




ACI 3081 (2011) Specification for Curing Concrete



12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Curing Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing and Inspection for CQC


Curing Compound


Store materials in such a manner as to avoid contamination and deterioration Materials must be capable of being accurately identified after bundles or containers are opened

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CURING MATERIALS

Provide curing materials in accordance with ACI 301 Sections 5 and ACI 3081 Section 2 Submit product data and manufacturers instructions for concrete curing compound

SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 1


22 WATER

Provide water for curing that is fresh clean potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali except that non-potable water may be used if it meets the requirements of ASTM C1602C1602M

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 CURING AND PROTECTION

Cure and protect concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5

32 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CQC

Perform the inspection and tests described below and based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action required Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports including curing compound proposed for use on this project

321 Moist Curing Inspections

At least once each shift and not less than twice per day on both work and non-work days inspect all areas subject to moist curing Note and record the surface moisture condition

322 Moist Curing Corrective Actione

When a daily inspection report lists an area of inadequate curing take immediate corrective action and extend the required curing period for those areas by 1 day

323 Membrane Curing Inspection

Apply no curing compound until the Contractor has verified that the compound is properly mixed and ready for spraying At the end of each operation estimate the quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area of concrete surface covered compute the rate of coverage in square feetgallon and note whether or not coverage is uniform

324 Membrane Curing Corrective Action

When the coverage rate of the curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not uniform spray the entire surface again

325 Sheet Curing Inspection

At least once each shift and once per day on non-work days inspection all areas being cured using impervious sheets Note and record the condition of the covering and the tightness of the laps and tapes

326 Sheet Curing Corrective Action

When a daily inspection report lists any tears holes or laps or joints that are not completely closed promptly repair the tears and holes or replace the sheets close the joints and extend the required curing period for those areas by 1 day


SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 2


SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 3


SECTION 05 50 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA DAF45 (2003 Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 303 (2016) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges


AWS D11D11M (2015 Errata 1 2015 Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel


ASME B1821 (2012 Errata 2013) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)

ASME B1822 (2010) Nuts for General Applications Machine Screw Nuts Hex Square Hex Flange and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B18211 (2009 R 2016) Washers Helical Spring-Lock Tooth Lock and Plain Washers (Inch Series)

ASME B1862 (1998 R 2010) Slotted Head Cap Screws Square Head Set Screws and Slotted Headless Set Screws Inch Series

ASME B1863 (2013) Machine Screws Tapping Screws and Machine Drive Screws (Inch Series)


ASTM A123A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A153A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware



ASTM A307 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM A467A467M (2007 R 2012) Standard Specification for Machine Coil Chain

ASTM A500A500M (2013) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes


ASTM A653A653M (2015 E 2016) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780A780M (2009 R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A924A924M (2016a) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B108B108M (2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B221 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars Rods Wire Profiles and Tubes

ASTM B26B26M (2014 E 2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM C1513 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections

ASTM D1187D1187M (1997 E 2011 R 2011) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal




MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 (2009) Metal Bar Grating Manual

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC SP 6NACE No3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication Drawings

Stainless Steel Weir Box

Galvanzied Steel Platform

Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder

Galvanized Steel Stairs with Aluminum Treads

Installation Drawings


Galvanized Steel Platform

Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder


Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s) connections to structural system and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303

Submit templates erection and installation drawings indicating thickness type grade class of metal and dimensions Show construction details reinforcement anchorage and installation with relation to the building construction

Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of weir box platform grating and ladder shall be designed in accordance with NC Building Code and other applicable standards Structural analysis shall be prepared signed and sealed by a NC Professional Engineer who is responsible for preparation

SD-03 Product Data



Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder

Aluminum Treads

13 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D11D11M Use procedures materials and equipment of the type required for the work

14 DELIVERY STORAGE AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion deformation and other types of damage Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather Remove and replace damaged items with new items

15 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

151 General

In engineering stair units ladders handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following

Aluminum AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures

Stainless Steel ASCE Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members

Cold-Formed Structural Steel AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

AISC Steel Construction Manual

Construct metal stair units to sizes and arrangements indicated to support a minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot Provide framing hangers columns struts clips brackets bearing plates and other components as required for the support of stairs and platforms

152 Structural Performance of Steps Ladders Handrails Monorails and Railing Systems

Design fabricate and install to withstand structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for steps ladders handrails railing systems anchors and connections Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems Structural loads shall be as prescribed by the State Building Code in the State the project is located Whether the above systems including platforms are not shown as structurally designed on the Contract drawings or the Contractor requests deviation the Contractor shall provide erection drawings signed and sealed by a Registered Engineer responsible for the design The Design Professional shall be registered in the State the project is located

153 Field Measurements

Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal



fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work

154 Thermal Movements

Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering fabricating and installing steps ladders handrails and railing systems to prevent buckling opening of joints overstressing of components and connections and other detrimental effects Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss

Temperature Change (Range) 120 degrees F (67 deg C) ambient 180 degrees F100 deg C) material surfaces

155 Control of Corrosion

Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Structural Carbon Steel

ASTM A36A36M

212 Structural Tubing

ASTM A500A500M

213 Steel Pipe

ASTM A53A53M Type E or S Grade B

214 Anchor Bolts

ASTM A307 Where exposed shall be of the same material color and finish as the metal to which applied

2141 Adhesive Anchors

Provide 58 in ch diameter unless otherwise noted adhesive anchors Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4 12 in ch Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E488E488M



2142 Lag Screws and Bolts

ASME B1821 type and grade best suited for the purpose



2143 Bolts Nuts Studs and Rivets

ASME B1822 or ASTM A307

2144 Screws

ASME B1821 ASME B1862 ASME B1863 and ASTM C1513

2145 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18211 Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels square or rectangular tapered in thickness and smooth Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18211

215 Aluminum Alloy Products

Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate ASTM B221 for extrusions and ASTM B26B26M or ASTM B108B108M for castings as applicable Provide aluminum extrusions at least 18 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0050 inch thick

22 FABRICATION FINISHES

221 Galvanizing

Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated after fabrication where practicable Galvanizing ASTM A123A123M ASTM A153A153M ASTM A653A653M or ASTM A924A924M G90 as applicable

222 Galvanize

Anchor bolts grating fasteners washers and parts or devices necessary for proper installation unless indicated otherwise

223 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A780A780M or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing as approved by Contracting Officer Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material

224 Shop Cleaning and Painting

2241 Surface Preparation

Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6NACE No3 Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust dirt oil grease or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces including contact surfaces within slip critical joints but coat with rust preventative applied in the shop



2242 Pretreatment Priming and Painting

Apply pretreatment primer and paint in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions On surfaces concealed in the finished construction or not accessible for finish painting apply an additional prime coat to a minimum dry film thickness of 10 mil Tint additional prime coat with a small amount of tinting pigment

225 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating anodic or organic coatings

226 Aluminum Surfaces

2261 Surface Condition

Before finishes are applied remove roll marks scratches rolled-in scratches kinks stains pits orange peel die marks structural streaks and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces

2262 Aluminum Finishes

Unexposed sheet plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated Sandblast castings finish medium AA DAF45 Otherwise provide all other aluminum items with an anodized A41 finish

23 FLOOR GRATINGS AND STAIR TREADS

Design aluminum grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 for bar type grating

a Design floor gratings to support a live load of 300 pounds per square foot for the spans indicated with maximum deflection of L240

b NAAMM MBG 531 band edges of grating with bars of the same size as the bearing bars Weld banding in accordance with the manufacturers standard for trim Design tops of bearing bars cross or intermediate bars to be in the same plane and match grating finish

c Slip resistance requirements must exceed both wet and dry a static coefficient of friction of 05

d The weight of individual panels should not exceed 80 pounds

e All grating shall lie flat with no tendency to rock when installed

f Toeplates shall extend the full depth of grating and 4 inches above the top shall be provided around openings and on the open sides of stairway landings overhead platforms overhead walkways and other locations indicated on the drawings

24 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework such as miscellaneous mountings and frames Provide with connections and fasteners

Provide angles and plates ASTM A36A36M as indicated



25 SAFETY CHAINS

Construct safety chains of galvanized steel straight link type 316 inch diameter with at least twelve links per foot and with snap hooks on each end Test safety chain in accordance with ASTM A467A467M Class CS Provide snap hooks of boat type Provide galvanized 38 inch bolt with 34 inch eye diameter for attachment of chain anchored as indicated Supply two chains 4 inches longer than the anchorage spacing for each guarded area Locate safety chain where indicated Mount the top chain 3 feet 6 inches above the floor and mount the lower chain 2 feet above the floor

26 ALUMINUM HANDRAILING

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings all railings provided under this section shall be of the same type and design Aluminum railings shall be provided

All welding of aluminum shall be done in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society Welds shall be free of porosity cracks holes and flux

All fasteners used in connection with aluminum railings shall be stainless steel

261 Railings

All aluminum railings shall be fabricated from 1 12 inch Schedule 40 pipe or 2 inch square tubing with wall thickness of at least 18 inch

All fabricated aluminum railings shall be provided with the manufacturers standard clear anodic A41 finish

262 Connections

All angles offsets or other changes in alignment in pipe railings shall be made with fabricated railing ells and welding connectors All fittings and connections in prefabricated aluminum railings shall be as recommended by the railing manufacturer Field joints in welded railings shall be made with manufacturer double lock or splice lock at least 3 34 inches long Welding connectors and splice-locks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

263 Fabrication

Railings shall be smooth with all projecting joints and sharp corners ground smooth Welded joints shall be flush type Members shall be neatly coped and continuously welded or mechanically connected at all junctions Top rails shall run continuously over posts All rails and posts shall be in the same plane and shall not be offset All welding shall be done neatly and substantially by a TIG or MIG process to produce a smooth weld All weld spatter and burrs shall be removed and all welds shall be thoroughly brushed with a stainless steel power wire brush

27 WEIR PLATES

Stainless steel weir plates shall be fabricated to dimensions indicated on



the drawings with top surface cut to shape The top edge of each weir plate shall be straight within 18 inch Particular care shall be taken in cutting operations All burrs or irregularities on cut edges shall be removed by grinding Weir plates shall fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel Before installation surfaces in contact with concrete shall be given a heavy coating of sealant as specified in the caulking section Weir plates shall be adjusted after installation to provide uniform overflow rate at all points

28 GALVANIZED STEEL STAIRS

Galvanized steel stairs shall be of the dimensions arrangements sizes and members to match existing conditions as indicated on the drawings They shall be accurately framed strongly and rigidly connected and smoothly finished When erected stairs shall be true to line and slope rigidly supported and shall be braced and tightened to prevent movement Treads shall be similar to grating All treads shall be level and in perfect alignment and spacing Grating stair treads shall be provided with carrier plates and abrasive nosings Stair treads shall be fastened to stair stringers with stainless steel bolts Handrails shall be in alignment and rigidly connected

After installation stairs shall be rigid and shall not sway noticeably or deflect under foot traffic If necessary to prevent noticeable movement additional supports or bracing shall be provided

29 ALUMINUM LADDERS

Aluminum ladders shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and shall be fabricated to meet all applicable OSHA requirements Ladder rails shall be fabricated of 1 12 diameter schedule 40 aluminum tubing Ladder rung s shall be at least a 1 square aluminum extrusion with grooves for nonslip surface Provide connections as shown on plans All connections shall be minimum of 12 stainless steel

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Install items at locations indicated according to manufacturers instructions Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials shall generally match in color and finish and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item even though such work is not definitely shown or specified Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection Conceal fastenings where practicable Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water Items listed below require additional procedures

32 WORKMANSHIP

Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true curves Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces Provide continuous welding along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth Provide a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise



approved flush exposed riveting Mill joints where tight fits are required Corner joints shall be coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place Install in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions and approved drawings cuts and details

33 ANCHORAGE FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts expansion shields and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts lag bolts and screws for wood Do not use wood plugs in any material Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials generally matching in color and finish to which fastenings are applied Conceal fastenings where practicable

34 BUILT-IN WORK

Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry or provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses

35 WELDING

Perform welding welding inspection and corrective welding in accordance with AWS D11D11M Use continuous welds on all exposed connections Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation

36 FINISHES

361 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action Where aluminum is in contact with concrete plaster mortar masonry wood or absorptive materials subject to wetting protect with ASTM D1187D1187M asphalt-base emulsion

362 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer Surfaces when assembled shall be free of rust grease dirt and other foreign matter


Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F unless approved by the Contracting Officer

37 MOUNTING OF SAFETY CHAINS

Mount safety chains 3 feet 6 inches and 2 feet above the floor






SECTION 06 82 14

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS0215

PART 1 GENERAL

This Section includes but is not limited to new fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and tube railingguards mounting systems and accessories

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7 (2010 Errata 2011 Supp 1 2013) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


ASSESAFE A103 (2013) Operations - Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems





ASME B18212M (1999 R 2014) Lock Washers (Metric Series)





ASTM C1107C1107M (2014a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic-Cement Grout



(Nonshrink)

ASTM D1148 (2013) Standard Test Method for Rubber DeteriorationmdashDiscoloration from Ultraviolet (UV) and Heat Exposure of Light-Colored Surfaces

ASTM D2344D2344M (2016) Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates

ASTM D430 (2006 R 2012) Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration - Dynamic Fatigue

ASTM D638 (2014) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D696 (2016) Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer

ASTM D790 (2015 E 2016 E 2016) Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials


ASTM E84 (2016) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC IBC (2015) International Building Code


NFPA 101 (2015 ERTA 2015) Life Safety Code


29 CFR 191023 Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes


12 SUBMITTALS



Manufacturers Sample Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings




SD-03 Product Data

FRP Pipe and Tube

RailingsGuards

Anchorage Materials

Adhesives

Resins

Hardeners

SD-06 Test Reports

Ultraviolet Test Reports

Thermal Expansion Test Reports

Flame Spread Test Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Manufacturers Certification by the State of North Carolina Product Approval

Proof of Certification from a minimum of two quality assurance programs for its facilities or products (UL DNV ABS USCG AARR)


Manufacturers Instructions


Manufacturers Certification of Installation


Manufacturers Warranty

13 QUALITY CONTROL

131 Qualifications of Manufacturer

Provide items within this section from manufacturers having a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems

Submit documentation proving of a minimum of at least 5 previous separate similar installations within the last 5 years

Provide Manufacturers sample warranty for all FRP products against defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of 5 years Provide evidence of manufacturers ISO 9001-2000 standard certification



14 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE

Deliver all manufactured materials in original unbroken pallets packages containers or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturers clearly marked and identified relative to the complete system Provide all adhesives resins and their catalysts and hardeners in clearly marked or noted crates or boxes to facilitate their safe movement to a dry indoor storage facility with a constant temperature range between 70 and 85 degrees F until they are required

Handle all materials to prevent abrasion cracking chipping twisting or other deformations and other types of damage

PART 2 PRODUCTS


211 Installation Drawings

Submit templates erection and installation drawings indicating thickness type and dimensions Show construction details reinforcement anchorage and installation with relation to the building construction

Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to other work Indicate for installed products to comply with design loads Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation

212 Product Data

Submit manufacturers catalog data including two copies of manufacturers specifications load tables dimension diagrams and anchor details for the following items

a FRP Pipe and Tube

b RailingsGuards

c Anchorage Materials

d Adhesives

e Resins

f Hardeners


Ensure all posts and rails are FRP structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process Compose structural shapes of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities quantities properties arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements in accordance with ASCE 7 29 CFR 191023 NFPA 101 and dimensions specified

Ensure fiberglass reinforcements a combination of continuous roving continuous strand mat and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application andor physical properties required



Provide resins with appropriate hardeners of isophthalic polyester with chemical formulation necessary for corrosion resistance strength and other physical properties as required

Ensure all finished surfaces of FRP items including FRP pipe and tube railingsguards anchorage materials and fabrications are smooth resin-rich free of voids and without dry spots cracks and un-reinforced areas Provide complete coverage of all glass fibers with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering

Protect all pultruded structural shapes from ultraviolet (UV) attack with

a Integral UV inhibitors within the resin

b Synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a resin rich surface

c UV resistant coating for outdoor exposures

Provide FRP products which have a flame spread rating of 25 or less as per ASTM E84 Tunnel Test Submit five (5) copies of Flame Spread Test Reports to the Contracting Officer

Ensure rails posts and kick plates are integrally pigmented yellow Submit five (5) copies of Ultraviolet Test Reports for FRP material similar to the requirements of ASTM D1148 for rubber deterioration and ASTM D430 to the Contracting Officer Submit testing data relating to Thermal Expansion Test Reports

Provide structural shapes in the guardrail system to meet minimum longitudinal mechanical properties as follows

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 30000 psi

Tensile Modulus ASTM D638 2500000 psi

Flexural Strength ASTM D790 30000 psi

Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 1800000 psi

Flexural Modulus-Full Section

2800000 psi

Short Beam Shear ASTM D2344D2344M 4500 psi

Shear Modulus-Transverse 450000 psi


ASTM D696 000008 ininF

Flame Spread ASTM E84 25 or less

214 Performance Requirements

2141 Structural Performance of Pipe and Tube Railings

Provide a pipe and tube railing system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads in accordance with ASCE 7 and International Building



Code ICC IBC the State of North Carolina Building Code with the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

a Handrails

(1) Uniform load of 50 lbfft applied in any direction

(2) Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction

(3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently

b Top Rails of Guards




c Infill of Guards

(1) Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq ft

(2) Uniform load of 25 lbfsqft applied horizontally

(3) Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently

22 FABRICATION

Perform fabrication of the handrail postrail connection such that the rails are unbroken and continuous through the post without the use of packs or splices Install the bottom rail through the post at a prepared hole made to fit the outside dimensions of the rail and the top rail fit into a machined u-shaped pocket formed into top of the post such that the rail is located at the center of the post Radius all exposed corners to eliminate sharp edges Join the rails to the post through a combination of bonding and riveting No sharp protruding edges are to remain after assembly of the handrail Spacing of the posts are not to exceed 6-0 Attach post base according to the construction contract drawings Reinforce post base to a height of 8-12-inches All field and shop fabricated cuts are to be coated with a vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance

23 MATERIALS

231 Fasteners

Provide Type 316 stainless-steel concealed fasteners unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated

232 Anchors

Provide cast-in-place epoxy mechanical anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to six times the design load imposed when installed in unit



masonry and equal to four times the design load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488E488M

233 Grout And Anchoring Cement

Provide factory-packaged non-shrink nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C1107C1107M or water-resistant non-shrink anchoring cement recommended by manufacturer for exterior use Ensure all other adhesives conform to the manufacturers recommendations and instructions

234 Component Connections


Provide lag screws and bolts conforming to ASME B1821 of the type and grade best suited for the purpose

2342 Toggle Bolts

Provide toggle bolts conforming to ASME B1821


Provide bolts nuts studs and rivets conforming to ASME B1822 and ASTM A307

2344 Power Driven Fasteners

Follow safety provisions of ASSESAFE A103

2345 Screws

Provide screws conforming to ASME B1821 ASME B1862 and ASME B1863

2346 Washers

Provide plain washers conforming to ASME B18211 Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels square or rectangular tapered in thickness and smooth Provide lock washers conforming to ASME B18212M and ASME B18211

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install items in accordance with 29 CFR 191023 and 29 CFR 1926 at locations indicated according to manufacturers instructions Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication Materials and parts necessary to complete each item even though such work is not definitely shown or specified to be included Perform cutting drilling and fitting required for installing railings Set railings accurately in location alignment and elevation Submit five (5) signed copies of Manufacturers Certification of Installation

a Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 116 inch in three (3) feet

b Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 14 inch in twelve (12) feet



311 Anchorage Fastenings and Connections

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous FRP items securely in place Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts expansion shields and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts and screws Conceal fastenings where practicable

312 Workmanship

FRP work to be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true curves Drilling and punching to produce clean true lines and surfaces Exposed surfaces of work in place to have a smooth finish Where tight fits are required joints to be milled Corner joints to be coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place Installation to be in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions and approved drawings cuts and details

32 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

321 Warranty

Submit five (5) signed copies of the Manufacturers Warranty 30 calendar days before final inspection


Submit manufacturers instructions for shipping handling erection procedures and care and maintenance upon completion of installation




SECTION 07 13 53

ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING0216

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C1305 (2008) Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane

ASTM D1004 (2013) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting

ASTM D1149 (2007 R 2012) Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber

ASTM D1204 (2014) Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature

ASTM D146D146M (2004 E 2012 R 2012) Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing

ASTM D1876 (2008 R 2015 E 2015) Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test)

ASTM D2136 (2002 R 2012) Coated Fabrics - Low-Temperature Bend Test

ASTM D2240 (2015) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

ASTM D297 (2015) Rubber Products - Chemical Analysis

ASTM D3045 (1992 R 2010) Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics Without Load

ASTM D41D41M (2011 R 2016) Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing Dampproofing and Waterproofing


ASTM D429 (2014) Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid



Substrates


ASTM D5385D5385M (1993 R 2014 E 2014) Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes

ASTM D570 (1998 E 2010 R 2010) Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics

ASTM D573 (2004 R 2010) Standard Test Method for Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven

ASTM D624 (2000 R 2012) Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers


ASTM D746 (2014) Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact

ASTM D751 (2006 R 2011) Coated Fabrics

ASTM D903 (1998 R 2010) Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds

ASTM E154E154M (2008a R 2013 E 2013) Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs on Walls or as Ground Cover

ASTM E96E96M (2016) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturers Standard Details

Elastomeric Waterproofing Sheet Material

Primers Adhesives and Mastics

SD-06 Test Reports


Field Quality Control documentation

SD-07 Certificates





Draft Special Warranties

Final Special Warranties

Certificates Of Compliance




Certificates Of Compliance with sustainable requirements for items listed in SD-07

13 MANUFACTURERS DETAILS

Submit manufacturers standard details indicating methods of attachment and spacing transition and termination details and installation details Include verification of existing conditions

14 PRODUCT DATA

Include data for material descriptions recommendations for product shelf life requirements for protective coverings and manufacturers material safety data sheets (MSDS) for primers adhesives and mastics

15 DELIVERY STORAGE HANDLING IDENTIFICATION

Deliver and store materials in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions out of the weather in manufacturers original packaging with brand name and product identification clearly marked Keep materials wrapped and separated from off-gassing materials (such as drying paints and adhesives) Do not use materials that have visible moisture or biological growth Do not permit unidentified materials in the work area or in the project

16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when there is ice frost surface moisture or visible dampness on the surface to receive waterproofing for when ambient and surface temperatures are 40 degrees F or below

17 SPECIAL WARRANTIES

171 Guarantee

Guarantee waterproofing membrane installation against failure due to leaks for a period of two years from the date of Beneficial Occupancy Submit draft and final guarantees in accordance with Sections 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS and 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA



172 Warranty

Provide manufacturers material warranty for all system components for a period of ten years from the date of Beneficial Occupancy Submit draft and final warranties in accordance with Sections 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS and 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Provide one of the types of elastomeric waterproofing sheet material and related primers adhesives and mastics as specified herein Ensure compatibility of waterproofing materials with each other and with materials on which they are applied Provide materials that comply with applicable requirements cited below when tested in accordance with the referenced ASTM publications

22 BUTYL RUBBER SHEETING

Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness

221 Butyl Rubber Sheeting Performance Requirements

a Thickness Tolerance ASTM D412 Plus or minus 10 percent

b Specific Gravity ASTM D297 120 plus or minus 005

c Tensile Strength ASTM D412 1200 psi minimum

d Tensile Stress at 300 percent elongation ASTM D412 600 psi minimum

e Elongation ASTM D412 300 percent minimum

f Tear Resistance Die C ASTM D624 150 pound force per inch (lbfinch) minimum

g Shore A Hardness ASTM D2240 5-second interval before reading 60 plus or minus 10

h Ozone Resistance ASTM D1149 No cracks 7 days - 50 pphm - 100 degrees F 20 percent elongation

i Heating Aging-Accelerated ASTM D573 Tensile retention 60 percent of minimum original elongation retention 60 percent of minimum original requirement 7 days 240 degrees F

j Butyl Identification ASTM D471 REV A Tricresyl Phosphate Immersion Maximum volume swell 10 percent 70 hrs 212 degrees F

k Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D746 No failure at minus 40 degrees F

l Water Absorption ASTM D471 REV A Plus 1 percent maximum 7 days 158 degrees F

m Exposure to Fungi and Bacteria in Soil ASTM E154E154M REV A Minimum 16 Weeks Unaffected



n Water Vapor Transmission 80 degrees F Permeance ASTM E96E96M Procedure B or BW 015 perms maximum

222 Adhesive Cement and Tape for Use with Butyl Rubber

As recommended by the butyl rubber waterproofing membrane manufacturer

23 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) flexible sheets with non-woven fiberglass reinforcing not less than 60 mils minimum thickness

231 Thermoplastic Membrane Performance Requirements

a Overall thickness ASTM D751 059 inches minimum

b Tensile strength ASTM D638 1600 psi minimum

c Elongation at break ASTM D638 250 percent minimum

d Seam strength ASTM D638 90 percent minimum of tensile strength

e Retention of properties after heat aging ASTM D3045

f Tensile strength ASTM D638 95 percent of original

g Elongation ASTM D638 95 percent of original

h Tear resistance ASTM D1004 17 lbf

i Low Temperature Bend ASTM D2136 minus 40 degrees F

j Liner Dimensional Change ASTM D1204 0002 percent

k Weight Change After Immersion in Water ASTM D570 20 percent maximum

232 Adhesives

a Adhesive for thermoplastic flashings as recommended by manufacturer

b Adhesive for Sub-Membrane Grid 100 percent solids two part urethane with minimum tensile strength of 150 psi in accordance with ASTM D412 and adhesion to concrete of 12 ply in accordance with ASTM D429 as recommended by manufacturer

233 Accessories

Securement Strip 14 gauge stainless steel metal bar 1 inch wide pre-punched 1 inch on center for securement

24 COMPOSITE SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE SHEETING

Cold applied composite sheet consisting of rubberized asphalt and cross laminated high density polyethylene film Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness is required

241 Composite Self-Adhering Sheeting Performance Requirements

a Tensile Strength ASTM D412 Die C 250 psi minimum



b Ultimate Elongation ASTM D412 Die C 200 percent minimum

c Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E96E96M 80 degrees F Permeance Procedure B 01 perm maximum

d Pliability degrees ASTM D146D146M (180 degrees Bend Over 1 Inch Mandrel) No cracks at minus minus 25 degrees F

e Provide test report data for crack bridging ability Either in accordance with ASTM C1305 as modified for a dry film thickness specified by the manufacturer and conducted at low temperature or in accordance with a cycling over crack test also conducted for the specified dry film thickness at low temperature Using either test verify crack bridging up to 14 inch without damage to the membrane system

f Puncture Resistance ASTM E154E154M REV A 40 lb minimum

g Lap Adhesion at Minimum Application Temperature ASTM D1876 Modified 5 lbsin

h Peel Strength ASTM D903 Modified 9 lbsin

i Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D5385D5385M 231 ft of water

j Water Absorption ASTM D570 01 percent maximum

242 Primers

Asphalt composition ASTM D41D41M or synthetic polymer in solvent as recommended by the membrane manufacturer

243 Mastics

Polymer modified asphalt in suitable solvent of trowel grade consistency and as recommended by the membrane manufacturer

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

Before starting the work verify surfaces that must be waterproofed are in satisfactory condition Notify the Contracting Officer of defects or conditions anticipated to prevent a satisfactory application Do not start application until defects and conditions have been corrected


Ensure surfaces to receive treatment are clean dry smooth and free from deleterious materials and projections Cut off high spots or grind smooth Finish top surfaces of projecting masonry or concrete ledges below grade except footings to a steep bevel with Portland cement mortar Sweep surfaces to receive covering before applying waterproofing to remove dust and foreign matter Cure concrete by a method compatible with the waterproofing system



33 APPLICATION

331 General Installation Requirements

Provide sheet waterproofing in accordance with manufacturers printed installation instructions Ensure the surface to receive membrane is clean smooth and dry without surface irregularities correct deficiencies prior to installation When using solvent welding liquid avoid prolonged contact with skin and breathing of vapor and provide adequate ventilation Carry waterproofing of horizontal surfaces up abutting vertical surfaces and adhere solid to the substrate Avoid wrinkles and buckles in applying membrane and joint reinforcement

3311 Non-Self-Adhering Membrane

Unroll membrane and allow to remain flat for at least one-half hour before application Apply an asphalt concrete primer prior to application of asphaltic adhesive Where solvent adhesive is applied allow major portion of solvent to evaporate so that bonding adhesive does not stick to a dry finger touching it Apply elastomeric waterproofing membrane in a full bed of adhesive at a uniform coverage rate in accordance with the membrane manufacturers printed instructions Where membrane on horizontal surfaces are to receive concrete fill apply adhesive in 4 inch wide strips at 2 feet on center Pull membrane tight without stretching As soon as adhesive is fully set and dry recheck lap splices Where openings or fishmouths appear reseal and reroll lap splices

3312 Self-Adhering Membrane

Apply composite self-adhering membrane on surfaces primed at a uniform coverage rate in accordance with membrane manufacturers printed instructions Remove release sheet and apply with tacky surface in contact with dried primer

3313 Protection

Protect membrane over horizontal surfaces from traffic during installation Use only equipment with rubber tires Provide walkway protection where heavy traffic from other trades is expected Do not store material on membrane

332 Butyl Rubber

Lap sheets at sides and ends a minimum of 6 inches over the preceding sheet Apply lap splicing cement over entire 6 inches splice area prior to application of sealant Make sealant continuous along the entire length of the splice Maintain a continuous bead of sealant at all membrane splices or as required by the manufacturer Provide a tongue and groove cemented splice a minimum of 6 inches wide with factory made heat vulcanized seam of not less than 2 inches or as required by the manufacturer when membrane is below water table

333 Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC)

Consult with membrane manufacturer prior to grid application Install 12 inches wide sub-membrane containment grid as required by manufacturer Provide the containment grid at intervals across the width and length of the substrate at the base of all transitions walls curbs penetrations and at the perimeter of each decksubstrate section Fully adhere strips



to the deck in a full bedding of two-part urethane adhesive Weld adjacent sheets in accordance with manufacturers instructions Hot-air weld all side and end lap joints Provide lap area a minimum of 3 inch wide when machine welding and a minimum of 4 inch wide when hand welding but not less than recommended by the manufacturer Orient overlaps with the direction of flow of water

34 COMPOSITE SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE

Lap sheets at edges and ends a minimum of 2-12 inches over the preceding sheet Provide all side laps a minimum 2-12 inches and end laps 5 inches Provide self-adhesive mastic laps in accordance with manufacturers recommendation Roll or firmly press to adhere membrane to substrate Cover corners and joints with two layers of reinforcement by first applying a 12 inch width of membrane centered along the axis Flash drains and projections with a second ply of membrane for a distance of 6 inches from the drain or projection Finish exposed terminated edges of membrane on horizontal or vertical surfaces with a toweled bead of mastic Apply mastic around edges of membrane and drains and projections Apply mastic at end of each work day

35 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Notify the Contracting Officer 5 working days prior to date of performing tests Before concealment cover elastomeric waterproofing on horizontal surfaces over finished spaces with 4 inches of ponded water for 24 hours Do not add water after start of 24 hour period Accurately measure water level at beginning and end of 24 hour period If water level falls remove water and inspect waterproofing membrane Make repairs or replacement as directed and repeat test Do not proceed with work that conceals membrane waterproofing before receiving approval and acceptance of the Contracting Officer




SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

Furnish and install tested and listed firestopping systems combination of materials or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls partitions floors and ceiling-floor assemblies including through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps

a Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes tubes conduit wires cables and vents

b Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion contraction wind or seismic movement firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the joint

Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the roof or floor deck above and at the intersection of shaft assemblies and adjoining fire resistance rated assemblies

12 REFERENCES



ASTM E119 (2016a) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

ASTM E1399E1399M (1997 E 2013R 2013) Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems

ASTM E1966 (2015) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

ASTM E2174 (2014b) Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops

ASTM E2307 (2015a) Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale Multi-story Test Apparatus

ASTM E2393 (2010a) Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers



ASTM E699 (2009) Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing Quality Assurance and Evaluating of Building Components

ASTM E814 (2013a) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops


FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM 4991 (2013) Approval of Firestop Contractors

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide httpwwwapprovalguidecom

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1479 (2015) Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

UL 2079 (2004 Reprint Dec 2014) Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

UL 723 (2008 Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL Fire Resistance (2014) Fire Resistance Directory

13 SEQUENCING

Coordinate the specified work with other trades Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes and ducts prior to insulating unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Apply firestopping materials at building joints and construction gaps prior to completion of enclosing walls or assemblies Cast-in-place firestop devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement Pipe conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made inaccessible Firestop material shall be inspected and approved prior to final completion and enclosing of any assemblies that may conceal installed firestop

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Firestopping System

SD-03 Product Data



Firestopping Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

Inspector Qualifications


Installer Qualifications


151 Installer

Engage an experienced Installer who is

a FM Research approved in accordance with FM 4991 operating as a UL Certified Firestop Contractor or

b Certified licensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary staff training and a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of manufacturers products in accordance with specified requirements Submit documentation of this experience A manufacturers willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer installer qualifications on the buyer The Installer shall have been trained by a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent) in the proper selection and installation procedures The installer shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit written certification of training and retain proof of certification for duration of firestop installation

152 Inspector Qualifications

The inspector shall meet the criteria contained in ASTM E699 for agencies involved in quality assurance and shall have a minimum of two years experience in construction field inspections of firestopping systems products and assemblies The inspector shall be completely independent of and divested from the installer the manufacturer and the supplier of any material or item being inspected The inspector shall not be a competitor of the installer the contractor the manufacturer or supplier of any material or item being inspected Include in the qualifications submittal a notarized statement assuring compliance with the requirements stated herein


Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name Store materials off the ground protected from damage and exposure to elements and temperatures in accordance with manufacturer requirements Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the site Use materials within their indicated shelf life



PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM

Submit detail drawings including manufacturers descriptive data typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report For those firestop applications for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer a manufacturers engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be submitted for review and approval prior to installation Submittal must indicate the firestopping material to be provided for each type of application When more than a total of 5 penetrations andor construction joints are to receive firestopping provide drawings that indicate location F T and L ratings and type of application

Also submit a written report indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firstopping used at each location record type by UL list printed numbers

22 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping materials supplied from a single domestic manufacturer consisting of commercially manufactured asbestos-free nontoxic products FM APP GUIDE approved or UL listed for use with applicable construction and penetrating items complying with the following minimum requirements

221 Fire Hazard Classification

Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory

222 Toxicity

Material shall be nontoxic and carcinogen free to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions and shall not contain hazardous chemicals or require harmful chemicals to clean material or equipment

223 Fire Resistance Rating

Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM APP GUIDE approved with F rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected Where required firestop systems shall also have T rating at least equal to the fire-rated floor in which the openings are to be protected

2231 Through-Penetrations

Firestopping materials for through-penetrations as described in paragraph SYSTEM DESCRIPTION shall provide F T and L fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 Fire resistance ratings shall be as follows



22311 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions

F Rating = 2 hour 2 Rating of wall or partition being penetrated

22312 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors Floor-Ceiling Assemblies and the Ceiling Membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies

F Rating = 2 hour Where the penetrating item is outside of a wall cavity the F rating must be equal to the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated

22313 Penetrations of Fire and Smoke Resistance Rated Walls Floors Floor-Ceiling Assemblies and the ceiling membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies

F Rating = 2 hour

2232 Construction Joints and Gaps

Fire resistance ratings of construction joints as described in paragraph SYSTEM DESCRIPTION and gaps such as those between floor slabs and curtain walls shall be as follows construction joints in walls 2 hour construction joints in floors 2 hour gaps between floor slabs and curtain walls 2 hour gaps between top of the walls and the bottom of roof and floor decks 2 hour Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E119 ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating Curtain wall joints shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E2307 to meet the required fire resistance rating Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E1399E1399M or UL 2079 All joints at the intersection of the top of a fire resistance rated wall and the underside of a fire-rated floor floor ceiling or roof ceiling assembly shall provide a minimum class II movement capability

224 Material Certification

Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified requirements For all intumescent firestop materials used in through penetration systems manufacturer shall provide certification of compliance with UL 1479

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

Areas to receive firestopping must be free of dirt grease oil or loose materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system For cast-in-place firestop devices formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement must be sound and capable of supporting device Prepare surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer

32 INSTALLATION

Completely fill void spaces with firestopping material regardless of geometric configuration subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction must be capable of supporting the same load as the



floor is designed to support or be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturers written instructions Provide tested and listed firestop systems in the following locations except in floor slabs on grade

a Penetrations of duct conduit tubing cable and pipe through floors and through fire-resistance rated walls partitions and ceiling-floor assemblies

b Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases elevator shafts and utility chutes

c Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls including inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab

d Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks

e Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions

f Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction

321 Insulated Pipes and Ducts

Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Replace thermal insulation with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics

322 Data and Communication Cabling

Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re-enterable firestopping products and devices as indicated

3221 Re-Enterable Devices

Firestopping devices shall be pre-manufactured modular devices containing built-in self-sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves additions or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials Devices must be capable of maintaining the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill of penetrants while maintaining L rating of lt10 cfmsf measured at ambient temperature and 400 degrees F at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill

3222 Re-Sealable Products

Provide firestopping pre-manufactured modular products containing self-sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping products shall allow for cable moves additions or changes Devices shall be capable of maintaining the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill of penetrants

33 INSPECTION

For Navy projects install one of each type of penetration and have it inspected and accepted by the Atlantic Division Naval Facilities



Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer prior to the installation of the remainder of the penetrations At this inspection the manufacturers technical representative of the firestopping material shall be present For all projects the remainder of the firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved by the Contracting Officer The inspector must inspect the applications initially to ensure adequate preparations (clean surfaces suitable for application etc) and periodically during the work to assure that the completed work has been accomplished according to the manufacturers written instructions and the specified requirements Submit written reports indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at each location type shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers

331 Inspection Standards

Inspect all firestopping in accordance to ASTM E2393 and ASTM E2174 for firestop inspection and document inspection results to be submitted

332 Inspection Reports

Submit inspection report stating that firestopping work has been inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturers recommendations and the specified requirements




SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS0511

PART 1 GENERAL

The contractor shall paint exterior items including the bar screen motors plus ferrous and non-ferrous metals - primarily exposed pipelines valves and fittings plus other related items (not galvanized and not stainless steel)installed as shown by the drawings Interior walls uncovered to allow mounting of electricalcontrol panels shall be painted upon direction of the Contracting Officer

The coatings for concrete rehabilitation including specialty products are specifed elsewhere

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH 0100 (2015 Suppl 2002-2016) Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices


ASTM D235 (2002 R 2012) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)

ASTM D4214 (2007 R 2015) Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films

ASTM D4263 (1983 R 2012) Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

ASTM D523 (2014) Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

ASTM F1869 (2016) Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride


MPI 101 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

MPI 107 (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water-Based)

MPI 108 (Oct 2009) High Build Epoxy Coating Low Gloss



MPI 138 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance Latex MPI Gloss Level 2




MPI 144 (Oct 2009) Institutional Low Odor VOC Interior Latex MPI Gloss Level 2


MPI 146 (Oct 2009) Institutional Low OdorVOC Interior Latex MPI Gloss Level 4

MPI 147 (May 2016) Institutional Low Odor VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 164 (Oct 2009) Exterior WB Light Industrial Coating Gloss MPI Gloss Level 6

MPI 23 (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer

MPI 4 (Oct 2009) InteriorExterior Latex Block Filler

MPI 50 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer

MPI 72 (Oct 2009) Polyurethane Two Component Pigmented Gloss


MPI 9 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd Gloss MPI Gloss Level 6

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

SCS SP-01 (2000) Environmentally Preferable Product Specification for Architectural and Anti-Corrosive Paints


SSPC 7NACE No4 (2007 E 2004) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC PA 1 (2000 E 2004) Shop Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel

SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982 E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint



Application

SSPC QP 1 (2012 E 2012) Standard Procedure for Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field Application to Complex Industrial Structures)

SSPC SP 1 (2015) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 12NACE No5 (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating

SSPC SP 2 (1982 E 2000 E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 (1982 E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning


SSPC VIS 1 (2002 E 2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning

SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Hand and Power Tool Cleaning




MIL-STD-101 (2014 Rev C) Color Code for Pipelines and for Compressed Gas Cylinders


FED-STD-313 (2014 Rev E) Material Safety Data Transportation Data and Disposal Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government Activities


29 CFR 19101000 Air Contaminants

12 SUBMITTALS


The current MPI Approved Product List which lists paint by brand label product name and product code as of the date of contract award will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI Approved Product List however only one list may be used for the entire



contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer No variation from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable

Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with specification requirements

In keeping with the intent of Executive Order 13101 Greening the Government through Waste Prevention Recycling and Federal Acquisition products certified by SCS as meeting SCS SP-01 shall be given preferential consideration over registered products Products that are registered shall be given preferential consideration over products not carrying any EPP designation

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Piping identification

Submit color stencil codes

SD-03 Product Data

Coating

Manufacturers Technical Data Sheets

SD-04 Samples

Color

Submit manufacturers samples of paint colors

SD-07 Certificates

Applicators qualifications


Application instructions

Mixing

Detailed mixing instructions minimum and maximum application temperature and humidity potlife and curing and drying times between coats

Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets

Submit manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings solvents and other potentially hazardous materials as defined in FED-STD-313

13 APPLICATORS QUALIFICATIONS

131 SSPC QP 1 Certification

All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or coating application shall be certified by the Society for Protective Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the



requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award and shall remain certified while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating application The painting contractors and painting subcontractors must remain so certified for the duration of the project If a contractors or subcontractors certification expires the firm will not be allowed to perform any work until the certification is reissued Requests for extension of time for any delay to the completion of the project due to an inactive certification will not be considered and liquidated damages will apply Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in contractor certification status


141 Field Samples and Tests

The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government Take samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph Sampling Procedures Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph Testing Procedure Products which do not conform shall be removed from the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced specification Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing shall be at no cost to the Government

1411 Sampling Procedure

The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that have been delivered to the job site for sample testing The Contractor shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials The samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer and labeled identifying each sample Provide labels in accordance with the paragraph Packaging Labeling and Storage of this specification

1412 Testing Procedure

Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings The qualification testing lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and the result of each test The summary shall clearly indicate whether the tested paint meets each test requirement Note that Qualification Testing may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform due to the extent of testing required

Submit name address telephone number FAX number and e-mail address of the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of coating samples for compliance with specification requirements Submit documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint samples for conformance with specifications and that employees performing testing are qualified If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch Quality Conformance testing the above submittal information is not required only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI will perform the testing


151 Environmental Protection

In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of



the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to conform

152 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 006 percent by weight of nonvolatile content

153 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate

154 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos

155 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds

156 Silica

Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica

157 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100 confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2)

16 PACKAGING LABELING AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number designation name formula or specification number batch number color quantity date of manufacture manufacturers formulation number manufacturers directions including any warnings and special precautions and name and address of manufacturer Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers written directions and as a minimum stored off the ground under cover with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F

17 SAFETY AND HEALTH

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the following

Work shall comply with applicable Federal State and local laws and regulations and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1 The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone

171 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3



172 Toxic Materials

To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials conform to the most stringent guidance of

a The applicable manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local regulation

b 29 CFR 19101000

c ACGIH 0100 threshold limit values


Comply at minimum with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation during and after installation

181 Coatings

Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are

a Less than 5 degrees F above dew point

b Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations

182 Post-Application

Vacate space for as long as possible after application Wait a minimum of 48 hours before occupying freshly painted rooms Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the curing period or for 72 hours after application

a Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day

b Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour when outside temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is between 30 percent and 60 percent

c Supply airflow at a rate of 15 air changes per hour when outside air conditions are not within the range stipulated above

19 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified Where not indicated or specified colors shall be selected by the Contracting Officer Manufacturers names and color identification are used for the purpose of color identification only Named products are acceptable for use only if they conform to specified requirements Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to specified requirements

Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of coats



110 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1101 Painting Included

Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following unless indicated otherwise

a Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal of fasteners such as screws and bolts

b New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work

c Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work

11011 Exterior Painting

Includes new surfaces existing coated surfaces and existing uncoated surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances Also included are existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations

11012 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces existing uncoated surfaces and existing coated surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following items unless indicated otherwise

a Exposed columns girders beams joists and metal deck and

b Other contiguous surfaces

1102 Painting Excluded

Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise

a Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards fixed ductwork machinery and equipment fixed in place

b Surfaces in concealed spaces Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings furred spaces attic spaces crawl spaces elevator shafts and chases

c Steel to be embedded in concrete

d Copper stainless steel aluminum brass and lead except existing coated surfaces

e Hardware fittings and other factory finished items

1103 Mechanical and Electrical Painting

Includes field coating of interior new and existing surfaces

a Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following items unless indicated otherwise (1) Exposed piping



conduit and ductwork

(2) Supports hangers air grilles and registers

(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings

b Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise

(1) New zinc-coated aluminum and copper surfaces under insulation

(2) New aluminum jacket on piping

1104 Exterior Painting of Site Work Items

Field coat the following items

Exposed pipe fittings valves and appurtenances 1105 Definitions and Abbreviations

11051 Qualification Testing

Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in the product specification This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify each product for the MPI Approved Product List and may also be accomplished by Contractors third party testing lab if an alternative to Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired

11052 Batch Quality Conformance Testing

Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product specification This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab

11053 Coating

A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate A coating may be a metal alloy paint or solidliquid suspensions on various substrates (metals plastics wood paper leather cloth etc) They may be applied by electrolysis vapor deposition vacuum or mechanical means such as brushing spraying calendaring and roller coating A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or both The term coating as used herein includes emulsions enamels stains varnishes sealers epoxies and other coatings whether used as primer intermediate or finish coat The terms paint and coating are used interchangeably

11054 DFT or dft

Dry film thickness the film thickness of the fully cured dry paint or coating

11055 DSD

Degree of Surface Degradation the MPI system of defining degree of surface degradation Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual



11056 EPP

Environmentally Preferred Products a standard for determining environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101

11057 EXT

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system

11058 INT

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system

11059 micron microns

The metric measurement for 0001 mm or oneone-thousandth of a millimeter

110510 mil mils

The English measurement for 0001 in or oneone-thousandth of an inch equal to 254 microns or 00254 mm

110511 mm

The metric measurement for millimeter 0001 meter or oneone-thousandth of a meter

110512 MPI Gloss Levels

MPI system of defining gloss Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals Traditionally Flat refers to G1G2 Eggshell refers to G3 Semigloss refers to G5 and Gloss refers to G6

Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows

Gloss Description Units UnitsLevel at 60 degrees at 85 degrees

G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 maxG2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 minG5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70 G6 Gloss 70 to 85G7 High Gloss

Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D523 Historically the Government has used Flat (G1 G2) Eggshell (G3) Semi-Gloss (G5) and Gloss (G6)

110513 MPI System Number

The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting Manual and defined as an exterior (EXTREX) or interior system (INTRIN) The Division number follows the CSI Master Format



110514 Paint

See Coating definition

110515 REX

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems

110516 RIN

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3 Submit manufacturers technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents Submit manufacturers application instructions Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications remove mask or otherwise protect hardware hardware accessories machined surfaces radiator covers plates lighting fixtures public and private property and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated Following completion of painting workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials to original condition and repair damaged items


Remove dirt splinters loose particles grease oil and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet newly painted surfaces Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints shall be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas

321 Additional Requirements for Preparation of Surfaces With Existing Coatings

Before application of coatings perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-adhered coatings defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife

a Test existing finishes for lead before sanding scraping or removing If lead is present refer to paragraph Toxic Materials



b Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings except stucco and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean dry cloth saturated with mineral spirits ASTM D235 Allow surface to dry Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the first coat of any coating unless specified otherwise

c Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss Brush and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust

d The requirements specified are minimum Comply also with the application instructions of the paint manufacturer

e Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted or damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease dirt dust or other foreign matter

f Blistering cracking flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings shall be removed

g Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214 the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8

h Slick surfaces shall be roughened Damaged areas such as but not limited to nail holes cracks chips and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas

i Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth

j Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements Solvent mechanical or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting

k New proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings

322 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand spackle and treat minor defects to render them smooth Minor defects are defined as scratches nicks cracks gouges spalls alligatoring chalking and irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coatings Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214 the chalk rating is not less than 8

323 Removal of Existing Coatings

Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces

a Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects

b Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area and

c Surfaces designated by the Contracting Officer such as surfaces where rust shows through existing coatings

324 Substrate Repair

a Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal

b Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal



and

c Clean and prime the substrate as specified

33 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

331 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces

a Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease Where shop coat is missing or damaged clean according to SSPC SP 3 Use inhibitor as recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent premature rusting Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection

b Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances Clean entire surface in accordance with SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 SSPC SP 12NACE No5 WJ-2

332 Final Ferrous Surface Condition

For tool cleaned surfaces the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and SSPC SP 3 As a visual reference cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3

For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces the requirements are stated in SSPC 7NACE No4 SSPC SP 6NACE No3 and SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 As a visual reference cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1

34 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

341 Concrete and Masonry

a Curing Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting except concrete slab on grade which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting

b Surface Cleaning Remove the following deleterious substances

(1) Dirt Grease and Oil Wash new surfaces with a solution composed of 12 cup trisodium phosphate 14 cup household detergent and 4 quarts of warm water Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water For large areas water blasting may be used

c Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects including but not limited to spalls in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and prior to coating application

d Allowable Moisture Content Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces but not to surfaces with droplets of water Do not apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F1869 In all cases follow manufacturers recommendations Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30 days before painting



35 APPLICATION

351 Coating Application

Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal state and local laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1 SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates except as modified herein

At the time of application paint shall show no signs of deterioration Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application

Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer paint may be applied by brush roller or spray Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based paints or using spray equipment with any paints

Paints except water-thinned types shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch

Thoroughly work coating materials into joints crevices and open spaces Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges corners crevices welds and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces

Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs drops ridges waves pinholes or other voids laps brush marks and variations in color texture and finish Hiding shall be complete

Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material

a Drying Time Allow time between coats as recommended by the coating manufacturer to permit thorough drying but not to present topcoat adhesion problems Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat

b Primers and Intermediate Coats Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days or longer than recommended by manufacturer before applying subsequent coats Follow manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats

c Finished Surfaces Provide finished surfaces free from runs drops ridges waves laps brush marks and variations in colors

d Thermosetting Paints Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window recommended by the manufacturer



352 Mixing and Thinning of Paints

Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint except when thinning is mandatory to suit surface temperature weather conditions application methods or for the type of paint being used Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use

When thinning is allowed paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding full film thickness or required gloss Thinning shall not cause the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed

353 Two-Component Systems

Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of substrate

354 Coating Systems

a Systems by Substrates Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications listed in the following Tables

Table

Division 5 Exterior Metal Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table

Division 3 Interior Concrete Paint Table

Division 4 Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table

b Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) Apply paints primers varnishes enamels undercoats and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables Coating thickness where specified refers to the minimum dry film thickness

c Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise Coat surfaces which have not been specified the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure

d Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces Coat surfaces with the following

(1) One coat of primer

(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat

(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces

e Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Painted Apply coatings conforming to the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein except that pretreatments sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces where existing coatings are soundly adhered and in good condition Do not omit undercoats or primers



36 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior

a Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation requirements at time of application

b Inaccessible Surfaces Prior to erection use one coat of specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection

c Shop-primed Surfaces Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer

d Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane Apply MPI 101 15 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings

e Pipes and Tubing The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat but shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application of finish coats

f Exposed Nails Screws Fasteners and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107

37 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 4 for Interior

38 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

Piping Identification Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-101 Place stenciling in clearly visible locations On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101 stencil approved names or code letters in letters a minimum of 12 inch high for piping and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere Stencil arrow-shaped markings on piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint

39 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

In addition to meeting previously specified requirements demonstrate mobility of moving components including swinging and sliding doors cabinets and windows with operable sash for inspection by the Contracting Officer Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment

310 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers Close and seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary for reuse Store in protected well-ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers



311 PAINT TABLES

All DFTs are minimum values Acceptable products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products List available at httpwwwspecifygreencomAPLProductIdxByMPInumasp

3111 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 5 EXTERIOR METAL FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

STEEL FERROUS SURFACES

A New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3

1 New MPI EXT 51Q-G6 (Gloss) Existing MPI REX 51D-G6 Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 23 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

B New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6NACE No3

1 New MPI EXT 51D-G6 (Gloss) Existing MPI REX 51D-G6 Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

C Existing steel that has been spot-blasted to SSPC SP 6NACE No3

1 Surface previously coated with alkyd or latex

Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI REX 51C-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

2 Surface previously coated with epoxy

Waterborne Light Industrial MPI REX 51L-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

Pigmented Polyurethane b MPI REX 51H-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 72 System DFT 85 mils

D New and existing steel blast cleaned to SSPC SP 10NACE No 2

1 Waterborne Light Industrial MPI EXT 51R-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 164 System DFT 85 mils



STEEL FERROUS SURFACES 2 Pigmented Polyurethane MPI EXT 51J-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 72 System DFT 85 mils

EXTERIOR SURFACES OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)

E Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces Mechanical Electrical valves conduit hangers supports and miscellaneous metal items not otherwise specified Match surrounding finish

1 Alkyd MPI EXT 51D-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

2 Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI EXT 51C-G6(Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

3112 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 4 INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

A Uncoated Existing Concrete masonry

1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 42D-G4 (Satin) Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 NA MPI 140 MPI 140 System DFT 11 mils

Fill all holes in masonry surface

2 Institutional Low Odor Low VOC Latex New MPI INT 42E-G4 (Satin) Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 NA MPI 146 MPI 146 System DFT 4 mils

B Existing previously painted Concrete masonry

1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI RIN 42K-G2 (Flat) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 138 MPI 138 System DFT 45 mils

MPI RIN 42K-G3 (Eggshell) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT 45 mils



DIVISION 4 INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE MPI RIN 42K-G4 Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 140 MPI 140 System DFT 45 mils

MPI RIN 42K-G5 (Semigloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 141 MPI 141 System DFT 45 mils

2 Institutional Low Odor Low VOC Latex Existing MPI RIN 42L-G2 (Flat) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 144 MPI 144 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G3 (Eggshell) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 145 MPI 145 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G4 (Satin) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 146 MPI 146 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G5 (Semigloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 147 MPI 147 System DFT 4 mils




SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE1115

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASME A11261M (1997 R 2012) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use


ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2672 (2014) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement

ASTM D2855 (2015) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F1760 (2016) Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content


ICC IPC (2015) International Plumbing Code

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded Socket-Welding Solder Joint Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-58 (1993 Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials Design and Manufacture Selection Application and Installation



NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSFANSI 14 (2016a) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSFANSI 61 (2016) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects


PL 93-523 (1974 A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Plumbing System

Detail drawings consisting of schedules performance charts instructions diagrams and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections dimensions for roughing-in foundation and support points schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated details shall include loadings and proposed support methods Mechanical drawing plans elevations views and details shall be drawn to scale

SD-03 Product Data

Plumbing System

Diagrams instructions and other sheets proposed for posting Manufacturers recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria completion and testing of the installed system Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls

SD-07 Certificates

Materials and Equipment

13 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a



manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period


Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer Replace damaged or defective items


Unless otherwise required herein plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC


The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work verify dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work

17 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install valves cleanouts and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content in accordance with ASTM F1760 Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials Plastic pipe fittings and solvent cement shall meet NSFANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended Plastic pipe fittings and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal NSF-PW In line devices such as water meters check valves valves and fittings shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSFANSI 61 Section 8

211 Pipe Joint Materials

a Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855

212 Miscellaneous Materials

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following

a Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures ASME A11261M



213 Pipe Insulation Material

Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

22 PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58

23 VALVES

Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures Valves 2 inches and larger shall be PVC Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application Valves shall conform to the following standards

Description Standard

Ball Valves Threaded Socket-Welding MSS SP-110

231 Frost Proof Hydrants

Two-inch frost proof hydrants shall have valve housings located below heat trace and insolation Water from the casing shall be drained after valve is shut off Hydrant shall be bronze with cast-iron box or casing guard A 10-inch diameter handwheel shall be provided

24 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

241 Pipe Hangers (Supports)

Provide MSS SP-58 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods except as specified or indicated otherwise Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21 28 29 or 30 clamps Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping

PART 3 EXECUTION


The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fittings valves and accessories Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building unless otherwise indicated A ball valve shall be installed on water service laterals inside the building at indicated locations Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines

311 Water Pipe Fittings and Connections

3111 Utilities

The piping shall be extended to fixtures outlets and equipment The non-potable piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining The supply line to each item of equipment shall be equipped



with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures Supply piping to equipment and valves shall be anchored to prevent movement

3112 Cutting and Repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided Damage to piping wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved

3113 Protection of Fixtures Materials and Equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt water chemicals and mechanical injury Upon completion of the work the fixtures materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned adjusted and operated

3114 Mains Branches and Runouts

Piping shall be installed as indicated Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top bottom or side of main using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions Supply pipes valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 12 inch between finished covering on the different services Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice Change in direction shall be made with fittings

312 Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended

313 Supports

3131 General

Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment to direct the expansion movement and to prevent buckling swaying and undue strain Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe



run Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent

3132 Pipe Hangers Inserts and Supports

Installation of pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 except as modified herein

a Types 5 12 and 26 shall not be used

b Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe

c Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts

d Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-58 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable

e Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter

f Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames

g Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe

h Type 40 shields shall

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater

i Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-58 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction

j Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications

k Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress distort cut or abrade the piping and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansioncontraction

3133 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in



concrete inserts built-in anchors or masonry anchor devices Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5 Supports shall not be attached to metal decking Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only

314 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required Cleanouts in connection with PVC pipe where indicated shall be wye fittings with plastic plugs installed Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches

32 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

321 Identification Tags

Identification tags made of brass engraved laminated plastic or engraved anodized aluminum indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves Tags shall be 1-38 inch minimum diameter and marking shall be stamped or engraved Indentations shall be black for reading clarity Tags shall be attached to valves with No 12 AWG copper wire chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose

322 Pipe Color Code Marking

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

33 PAINTING

Painting of pipes hangers supports and other iron work either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

34 TESTS FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

341 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC

a Water Supply Systems Tests

342 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable

343 System Flushing

3431 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection water piping system shall be flushed Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that



is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system

3432 After Flushing

System shall be drained

344 Hydrostatic Tests

The pipeline shall be subjected to both a pressure test and a leakage test The test may be witnessed by the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 7 days in advance of equipment tests The final test report shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of the test

3441 Pressure Test

After the pipe has been installed joints completed thrust blocks have been in place for at least five days and the trench has been partially backfilled leaving the joints exposed for examination the pipe shall be filled with water to expel all air The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of 150 psi for a period of at least one hour Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test The exposed pipe joints fittings and valves shall be examined for leaks Visible leaks shall be stopped or the defective pipe fitting joints or valves shall be replaced

3442 Leakage Test

The leakage test may be conducted subsequent to or concurrently with the pressure test The amount of water permitted as leakage for the line shall be placed in a sealed container attached to the supply side of the test pump No other source of supply will be permitted to be applied to the pump or line under test The water shall be pumped into the line by the test pump as required to maintain the specified test pressure as described for pressure test for a 2 hour period Exhaustion of the supply or the inability to maintain the required pressure will be considered test failure PE pipe can experience diametric expansion and pressure elongation during initial testing The manufacturer shall be consulted prior to testing for special testing considerations Allowable leakage shall be determined by the following I-P formula

L = NDPK Where

L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour

N = Number of joints in length of pipeline tested

D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches

P = Square root of the test pressure in psig

K = 7400 for pipe materials

At the conclusion of the test the amount of water remaining in the container shall be measured and the results recorded in the test report



3443 Retesting

If any deficiencies are revealed during any test such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted until the results of the tests are within specified allowances without additional cost to the Government

35 TABLES

TABLE II

PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Item Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A SERVICE B SERVICE C SERVICE D

1 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120 ASTM D1785

X

2 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent cement ASTM D2672

X

SERVICE A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses - Type L - Hard - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors - In or under slab floors only brazed joints




SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS0213

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only At the discretion of the Government the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 901 - IP (2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings



ASTM C1136 (2012) Standard Specification for Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C195 (2007 R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C534C534M (2014) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 (2015) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 (2016a) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C916 (2014) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation


ASTM E2231 (2015) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E84 (2016) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building



Materials


FM GLOBAL (FM)




MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial amp Industrial Insulation Standards


NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B (2015) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems



UL 94 (2013 Reprint Mar 2016) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances


121 General

Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein

122 Recycled Materials

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are



Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight

Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight

Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material

13 SUBMITTALS


Submit the three SD types SD-02 Shop Drawings SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions at the same time for each system

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe Insulation Systems




Recycled Content for Pipe Insulation Materials


141 Installer Qualification

Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years


Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturers unopened containers Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather humidity dirt dust and other contaminants The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty dusty wet or contaminated by some other means Packages or standard containers of insulation jacket material cements adhesives and coatings delivered for use and samples required for approval shall have manufacturers stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand and a description of the material date codes and approximate shelf life (if applicable) Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

For products in this section where applicable and to extent allowed by



performance criteria provide and document the following

211 Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials

Provide documentation that the following products meet the recycled content requirements as outlined in this section

a Pipe Insulation Systems


Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening Submit a complete list of materials including manufacturers descriptive technical literature performance data catalog cuts and installation instructions The product number k-value thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included The product data must be copyrighted have an identifying or publication number and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet (SD-02) Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable

221 Insulation System

Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification Provide field-applied insulation for piping systems that are located within on under and adjacent to buildings and for plumbing systems Provide CFC and HCFC free insulation

222 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified insulation must have a maximum flame spreadindex of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested inaccordance with ASTM E84 Flame spread and smoke developed indexesshall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723 Test insulation inthe same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in theactual construction Prepare and mount test specimens according to ASTM E2231

23 MATERIALS

Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP Insulation exterior shall be cleanable grease resistant non-flaking and non-peeling Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion soften or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state Materials shall be asbestos free Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE

231 Adhesives

2311 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable fire-resistant adhesive conforming to



ASTM C916 Type I

2312 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195

232 Caulking

ASTM C920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use A

233 Jackets

2331 Aluminum Jackets

Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated embossed or smooth sheet 0016 inch nominal thickness ASTM B209 Temper H14 Temper H16 Alloy 3003 5005 or 3105 Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel 0015 inch thick 12 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0016 inch aluminum matching jacket material The jacket may at the option of the Contractor be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or Z type longitudinal joint When the Z joint is used the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place

234 Heat Trace Tape

Provide 120 V heat tape and thermostat controls for all insulated pipe fittings and valves as recommended by manufacturer for temperatures down to 0 Degrees F Tape shall be self-regulating to prevent over-temperature and shall be easily field spliced to the desired length Provide terminations splices tee and seal kits as required

235 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type the styrene-butadiene rubber type or the butyl type of sealants Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 002 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96E96M and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84

24 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Conform insulation materials to Table 1 and minimum insulation thickness as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP Comply with EPA requirements for material with recycled content Limit pipe insulation materials to those listed herein and meeting the following requirements

241 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg F )

Insulation for outdoor indoor exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows

2411 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552 Type II and Type III Supply the insulation from the fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ))



ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic

2412 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive complying with ASTM C534C534M Grade 1 Type I or II Type I Grade 1 for tubular materials Type II Grade 1 for sheet materials Type I and II shall have vapor retardervapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications

2413 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)

ASTM C547 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4

25 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS

251 Duct Insulation Jackets

2511 Metal Jackets


ASTM B209 Temper H14 minimum thickness of 27 gauge ( 0016 inch ) with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide stainless steel bands minimum width of 12 inch

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists studs columns ducts hangers etc The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period any insulation found to pull apart after one hour shall be replaced

311 Display Samples

Submit and display after approval of materials actual sections of installed systems properly insulated in accordance with the specification requirements Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site Each material used shall be identified by indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material and the material by each manufacturer intended to meet the requirement The Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the construction period Upon completion of construction the display sample



sections will be closed and sealed

3111 Pipe Insulation Display Sections

Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee a valve dielectric waterways and flanges a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert or dowel as required at support point method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap circumferential lap butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs and terminating points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines both interior and exterior even when the same type of insulation is used for these services

312 Installation

Except as otherwise specified material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of this specification are completed Material such as rust scale dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation Insulation shall be kept clean and dry Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition the insulation will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces Insulation jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings

313 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls fire partitions above grade floors and fire rated chase walls the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A andor NFPA 90B All other penetrations such as piping conduit and wiring through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL FM or a NRTL

314 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

315 Pipes That Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes except for omitted items as specified

32 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturers published installation instructions



321 Pipe Insulation

3211 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarderbarrier including straight runs fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following

a Pipe used solely for fire protection

b Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures However fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain including the trap insulated where exposed

c Sanitary drain lines

d Air chambers

e Adjacent insulation

f ASME stamps

g Cleanouts or handholes

3212 Pipes Passing Through Hangers

Insulation whether hot or cold application shall be continuous through hangers All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-58 Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used

32121 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches at 60 Degrees F and Above

Supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-58 and Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE

32122 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches and Below 60 Degrees F

Supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP-58 An insulation insert of cellular glass prefabricated insulation pipe hangers or perlite above 80 degrees F shall be installed above each shield The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation as an option to installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert



32123 Vertical Pipes

Supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-58 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation as an option instead of installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe penetrating the pipe insulation These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service

32124 Inserts

Covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-12 inches and seal as required for the pipe jacket The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136 Type 1 and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material

3213 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe On pipes larger than 12 inches the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 13 of the pipe Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarderbarrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications

3214 Pipes in high abuse areas

In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms kitchens and mechanical rooms aluminum jackets shall be utilized Pipe insulation shall be fully protected All project piping requires full jacketed protection

3215 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

Pipe insulation materials must be as listed in Table 1 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP



TABLE 1

Insulation Material for Piping

Service

Material Specification Type Class VRVB Reqd

Cold Water Piping

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular ASTM C534C534M I No

TABLE 2

Piping Insulation Thickness ( inch ) Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications exposed to

outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4

Cold Water Piping

Cellular Glass 15 15 15 15 15

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1 1 1 NA NA

322 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted This includes but is not limited to the following

a Non-potable water lines

b Grit underdrain lines

3221 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2

3222 Factory or Field applied Jacket

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacketvapor barrier or field applied aluminum jacket shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather In high abuse areas aluminum jackets shall be provided for pipe insulation

3223 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Cold Pipe

Apply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints Seal all butted joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape

32231 Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket Material

Overlap not less than 1-12 inches Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for circumferential joints



32232 Laps and Butt Strips

Secure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing If staples are used seal in accordance with paragraph STAPLES below Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems

32233 Factory Self-Sealing Lap Systems

May be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation Install the lap system in accordance with manufacturers recommendations Use a stapler only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer Where gaps occur replace the section or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling

32234 Staples

Coat all staples including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape Coat all seams except those on factory self-seal systems with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape

32235 Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket Material

Patch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it with adhesive staple and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape Extend the patch not less than 1-12 inches past the break

32236 Penetrations Such as Thermometers

Fill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape


Install by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing Alternately whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing Secure all seams and butt joints and seal with adhesive When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive Push insulation on the pipe never pulled Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints Clean cut all edges Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted Use proper tools such as sharp knives Do not stretch Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches On pipes larger than 12 inches adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 13 of the pipe

3224 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000



perm adhesive tape

b Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein 5 for anchors 10 11 and 13 for fittings 14 for valves and 17 for flanges and unions Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity Where precutpreformed is unavailable rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used If nesting size insulation is used the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 1220 Mitered Insulation Elbow Submit a booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each pipe duct or equipment insulating system after approval of materials and prior to applying insulation

(1) The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and the specific insulation application Submit all MICA plates required showing the entire insulating system including plates required to show insulation penetrations vessel bottom and top heads legs and skirt insulation as applicable The MICA plates shall present all variations of insulation systems including locations materials vaporproofing jackets and insulation accessories

(2) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of edited MICA Plates the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal

c Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges unions valves anchors fittings and accessories terminations seams joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 116 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape standard grade silver white black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 116 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation

d Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface

e Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions strainers and check valves

3225 Optional PVC Fitting Covers

At the option of the Contractor premolded one or two piece PVC fitting



covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape adhesive seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers Seams in the cover and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal

323 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed After this procedure a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed) vapor barrierweatherproofing jacket - less than 00000 permeability (greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white black and embossed aluminum jacket Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3




SECTION 26 00 0000 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS0706

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM D709 (2016) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 100 (2000 Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE C2 (2017) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C571228 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C571229 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)



12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to certain sections of Division 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS and Division 33 UTILITIES This section applies to all sections of Division 26 ELECTRICAL Division 40 PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS and Division 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections This section has been incorporated into and thus does not apply to and is not referenced in the following sections

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 1


13 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100

b The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products installation procedures and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types

c The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products systems installation procedures equipment and test methods

14 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 60 Hz and 277480 volts secondary three phase four wire Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing MCC shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer

15 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable

151 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices

152 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves



In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated

162 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 2


regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section

1621 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished

1622 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise

17 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract

18 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel The operating instructions shall include the following

a Wiring diagrams control diagrams and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment

b Start up proper adjustment operating lubrication and shutdown procedures

c Safety precautions

d The procedure in the event of equipment failure

e Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic Post instructions where directed For operating instructions exposed to the weather provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 3


19 MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATE

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturers name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable

110 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 25 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 025 inch high normal block style

111 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations pad-mounted transformers pad-mounted switches generators and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts

a When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C571228 or IEEE C571229 such as for pad-mounted transformers and pad-mounted SF6 switches provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s) Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters The word DANGER shall be in white letters on a red background and the words HIGH VOLTAGE shall be in black letters on a white background Decal shall be Panduit No PPSO710D72 or approved equal

b When such equipment is guarded by a fence mount signs on the fence Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT printed in three lines of nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field

112 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein

113 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

Where specified in the technical sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment including pertinent safety requirements as required Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man-days of instruction are

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 4


specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

32 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets

33 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart


SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 5


SECTION 26 05 1910 10

INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE0516

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-58-679 (2014) Control Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Conductor Identification


ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 (2014) Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the Distribution of Electric Energy

NEMA WC 26 (2008) Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard

NEMA WC 57 (2014) Standard for Control Thermocouple Extension and Instrumentation Cables

NEMA WC 70 (2009) Power Cable Rated 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy--S95-658

NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 (2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy




UL 83 (2014) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Wire and Cable

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 1


Conductors

Cable Manufacturing Data

SD-06 Test Reports

Test Report(s) Inspection Report(s) and Verification Report(s)


Furnish cables on reels or coils Each cable and the outside of each reel or coil must be plainly marked or tagged to indicate the cable length voltage rating conductor size and manufacturers lot number and reel number Each coil or reel of cable must contain only one continuous cable without splices Cables for exclusively dc applications as specified in paragraph High-Voltage Test Source must be identified as such Shielded cables rated 2001 volts and above must be reeled and marked in accordance with NEMA WC 26 as applicable Reels must remain the property of the Contractor

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Wire Table

Furnish wire and cable in accordance with the requirements of the wire table below conforming to the detailed requirements specified herein

212 Rated Circuit Voltages

All power wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Power wire and cable for circuit voltages rated 0-600 volts must be rated not less than 600 volts Control wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 57 but must be rated 600 volts if routed in raceway with other conductors that are rated 600 volts

213 Conductors

2131 Material for Conductors

Conductors must conform to all the applicable requirements of NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Copper conductors must be annealed copper material and they may be bare or tin- or lead-alloy-coated if required by the type of insulation used

2132 Size

Minimum wire size must be No 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits No 10 AWG for current transformer secondary circuits No 14 AWG for potential transformer relaying and control circuits No 16 AWG for annunciator circuits and No 19 AWG for alarm circuits Minimum wire sizes for rated circuit voltages of 2001 volts and above must not be less than those listed for the applicable voltage in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 2


2133 Stranding

Conductor stranding classes cited herein must be as defined for control conductors in NEMA WC 57 or as defined for 0-2000 volts power conductors in NEMA WC 70 as applicable Lighting conductors No 10 AWG and smaller must be solid or have Class B stranding Any conductors used between stationary and moving devices such as hinged doors or panels must have Class H or K stranding All other conductors must have Class B or C stranding except that conductors as shown or in the schedule as No 12 AWG may be 19 strands of No 25 AWG and conductors shown as No 10 AWG may be 19 strands of No 22 AWG Conductor stranding classes for circuit voltages 2001 volts and above must be as defined in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 and NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

2134 Conductor Shielding

Use conductor shielding conforming to NEMA WC 57 for control wire and cable as applicable Use conductor shielding conforming to ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable on power cables having a rated circuit voltage above 2000 volts

2135 Separator Tape

Where conductor shielding strand filling or other special conductor treatment is not required a separator tape between conductor and insulation is permitted

214 Insulation

2141 Insulation Material

Unless specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 wires in conduit other than service entrance must be 600-volt Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83 Insulation for control wire and cable must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 57 Insulation requirements for wire and cable rated less than 2000 volts must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 70

a XLPE if used must be tree-retardant

b Insulation must be chemically bonded to conductor shielding

c The insulation material and its manufacturing handling extrusion and vulcanizing processes must all be subject to strict procedures to prevent the inclusion of voids contamination or other irregularities on or in the insulation Insulation material must be inspected for voids and contaminants

d Cables with repaired insulation defects discovered during factory testing or with splices or insulation joints are prohibited

2142 Insulation Thickness

The insulation thickness for each conductor must be based on its rated circuit voltage

21421 Power Cables 2000 Volts and Below

The insulation thickness for single-conductor and multiple-conductor power cables rated 2000 volts and below must be as required by NEMA WC 70 as

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 3


applicable Some thicknesses of NEMA WC 70 will be permitted only for single-conductor cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated cables without a jacket NEMA WC 70 ethylene-propylene rubber-insulated conductors must have a jacket

21422 Single-Conductor and Multiple-Conductor Control Cables

The insulation thickness of control conductor sizes 22 AWG to 10 AWG used for control and related purposes must be as required by NEMA WC 57 as applicable Control conductors larger than 10 AWG must be as required by NEMA WC 70

2143 Insulation Shielding

Unless otherwise specified provide insulation shielding for conductors having rated circuit voltages of 2001 volts and above The voltage limits above which insulation shielding is required and the material requirements are given in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The material if thermosetting must meet the wafer boil test requirements as described in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The method of shielding must be in accordance with the current practice of the industry however the application process must include strict precautions to prevent voids or contamination between the insulation and the nonmetallic component Voids protrusions and indentations of the shield must not exceed the maximum allowances specified in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The cable must be capable of operating without damage or excessive temperature when the shield is grounded at both ends of each conductor All components of the shielding system must remain tightly applied to the components they enclose after handling and installation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations Shielding systems which require heat to remove are prohibited unless specifically approved

215 Jackets

All cables must have jackets meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 and NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable and as specified herein Individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be required to have jackets only if they are necessary for the conductor to meet other specifications herein Jackets of single-conductor cables and of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables except for shielded cables must be in direct contact and adhere or be vulcanized to the conductor insulation Multiple-conductor cables and shielded single-conductor cables must be provided with a common overall jacket which must be tightly and concentrically formed around the core Repaired jacket defects found and corrected during manufacturing are permitted if the cable including jacket afterward fully meets these specifications and the requirements of the applicable standards

2151 Jacket Material

The jacket must be one of the materials listed below

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 4


21511 General Use

Heavy-duty black neoprene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Heavy-duty chlorosulfonated polyethylene NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Heavy-duty cross-linked (thermoset) chlorinated polyethylene

NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

21512 Accessible Use Only 2000 Volts or Less

Cables installed where they are entirely accessible such as cable trays and raceways with removable covers or where they pass through less than 10 feet of exposed conduit only must have jackets of one of the materials in item a General Use or one of the following

General-purpose neoprene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Black polyethylene (MDPE) NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Thermoplastic chlorinated polyethylene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

2152 Jacket Thickness

The minimum thickness of the jackets must be not less than 80 percent of the respective nominal thicknesses specified below

21521 Multiple-Conductor Cables

Thickness of the jackets of the individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be as required by NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable and must be in addition to the conductor insulation thickness required by the applicable respective NEMA publication for the insulation used Thickness of the outer jackets and associated coverings of the assembled multiple-conductor cables must be as required by NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

21522 Single-Conductor Cables

Single-conductor cables must have a jacket thickness as specified in

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 5


NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable


Grounding conductor(s) conforming to NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable must be furnished for each multiple-conductor cable Assembly and cabling must be as specified in paragraph CABLING

22 CABLE IDENTIFICATION

221 Color-Coding

Insulation of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be color-coded in accordance with ICEA S-58-679 except that colored braids will not be permitted Only one color-code method must be used for each cable construction type Control cable color-coding must be in accordance with ICEA S-58-679 Method as follows - 277480 VAC Power cable color-coding must be brown for Phase A orange for Phase B blue for Phase C white for grounded neutral and green for an insulated grounding conductor if included

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Submit cable manufacturing data The following information must be provided by the cable manufacturer for each size conductor quantity and type of cable furnished

a Minimum bending radius in inches - For multiple-conductor cables this information must be provided for both the individual conductors and the multiple-conductor cable

b Pulling tension and sidewall pressure limits in pounds

c Instructions for stripping semiconducting insulation shields if furnished with minimum effort without damaging the insulation

d Upon request compatibility of cable materials and construction with specific materials and hardware manufactured by others must be stated Also if requested recommendations must be provided for various cable operations including installing splicing terminating etc

32 TEST REPORT(S) INSPECTION REPORT(S) AND VERIFICATION REPORT(S)

321 Cable Data

Do not begin any wire and cable fabrication until materials are submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer Submit cable data for approval including but not limited to dimensioned sketches showing cable construction and sufficient additional data to show that wire and cable meet the requirements of this Section

322 Inspection and Tests

Inspection and tests of wire and cable furnished under these

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 6


specifications must be made by and at the plant of the manufacturer The Government may require or perform further tests before or after installation Testing in general must comply with NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Specific tests required for particular materials components and completed cables must be as specified in the sections of the above standards applicable to those materials components and cable types Tests must also be performed in accordance with the additional requirements specified below Submit six (6) certified copies of test reports


SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 7


SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM0214

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium-Hard or Soft




IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System



ANSI C801 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C803 (2015) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA ICS 1 (2000 R 2015) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements

NEMA ICS 2 (2000 R 2005 Errata 2008) Industrial Control and Systems Controllers Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 V

NEMA ICS 4 (2015) Terminal Blocks



NEMA ICS 6 (1993 R 2011) Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2016) Motors and Generators

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA WD 1 (1999 R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications

NEMA Z5354 (2011) American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels




NFPA 780 (2017) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises


UL 1 (2005 Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1063 (2006 Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool Wires and Cables

UL 1203 (2013 Reprint Apr 2015) UL Standard for Safety Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1283 (2015 Reprint Oct 2016) UL Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters

UL 1449 (2014 Reprint Mar 2016) UL Standard for Safety Surge Protective Devices



UL 1660 (2014) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 20 (2010 Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 360 (2013 Reprint Jan 2015) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2014 Reprint Feb 2015) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 467 (2013) Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B (2013 Reprint Jan 2016) Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2013 Reprint Jan 2016) Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2012 Reprint Jul 2016) UL Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 50 (2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 506 (2008 Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999 Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 510 (2005 Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2012 Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (2014 Reprint Dec 2014) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes Flush-Device Boxes and Covers

UL 6 (2007 Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 651 (2011 Reprint Jun 2016) UL Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 674 (2011 Reprint Jul 2013) Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1



Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 797 (2007 Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel


UL 870 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Wireways Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings

UL 943 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

UL 984 (1996 Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors

12 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings are as defined in IEEE 100

13 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Motor control centers

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices

Wireways

Existing MCCs

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles

Circuit breakers

Switches

Enclosed circuit breakers

Motor controllers

Combination motor controllers



Surge protective devices

Include performance and characteristic curves

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test

Grounding system test

Ground-fault receptacle test

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses


Electrical Systems Data Package 5

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein


141 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph FUSES of this section


In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall or must had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Provide equipment materials installation and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship and

a Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size

b Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period

c Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required provide products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section






Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable

15 MAINTENANCE

151 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building Include the following

a Single line diagram of the as-built building electrical system

b Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC covered elsewhere)

c Manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment

16 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

As a minimum meet requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials equipment and devices

22 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following

221 Rigid Steel Conduit PVC Coated

2211 Rigid Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C801 UL 6


1 Rigid threaded zinc coated steel conduit

2 Rigid steel conduit ANSI C801 FS WW C 581 Conduits shall be



rigid steel hot dipped galvanzied sinc metallized sherradized mild steel Schedule 40 size threaded manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratory standard and so labeled Rigid galvanized conduit shall include a PVC jacket PVC jacket shall have a minimum thickness of 15-20 mills

222 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40 and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2 UL 651

223 Electrical Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797 ANSI C803

224 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1

2241 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Steel

UL 360

225 Fittings for Metal Conduit EMT and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B Ferrous fittings cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B

2251 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type Split couplings unacceptable

2252 Fittings for EMT

Die Castcompression type

226 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC and UL 514B

227 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660

23 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A cadmium- or zinc-coated if ferrous metal UL 514C if nonmetallic

24 CABINETS JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches UL 50 hot-dip zinc-coated if sheet steel

25 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation jacket and conductor specified or indicated Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site



251 Conductors

Provide the following

a Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper unless indicated otherwise

b Conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter stranded

c Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter solid

d Conductors for remote control alarm and signal circuits classes 1 2 and 3 stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise

e All conductors copper 2511 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements

When manufacturers equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment provide copper conductors or splices splice boxes and other work required to satisfy manufacturers requirements

2512 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following

a Branch circuits No 12 AWG

b Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits No 14 AWG

c Class 2 low-energy remote-control and signal circuits No 16 AWG

252 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service feeder branch control and signaling circuit conductors

2521 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows

a Grounding conductors Green

b Neutral conductors White

c Exception where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals color coding white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each

2522 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows

a 208120 volt three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red



(3) Phase C - blue

b 480277 volt three-phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

c 120240 volt single phase Black and red

253 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83

254 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller diameter ASTM B8 Class B stranded bare copper wire for sizes No 6 AWG and larger diameter

26 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes Connectors for No 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires insulated pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector) Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors

27 DEVICE PLATES


a UL listed one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed

b For metal outlet boxes plates on unfinished walls zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges

c Plates on finished walls satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum minimum 003 inch thick

d Screws machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate

e Sectional type device plates are not be permitted

f Plates installed in wet locations gasketed and UL listed for wet locations

28 SWITCHES

281 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1 UL 20 single pole totally enclosed with bodies of



thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw Include the following

a Handles ivory thermoplastic

b Wiring terminals screw-type side-wired

c Contacts silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy

d Switches rated quiet-type ac only 120277 volts with current rating and number of poles indicated

282 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1 Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated where switches are rated higher than 240 volts and for double-throw switches Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches unless indicated otherwise Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means Provide switches in NEMA 4-X Stainless Steel enclosure

29 FUSES

NEMA FU 1 Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers for proper operation Submit coordination data for approval Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage

210 RECEPTACLES


a UL 498 hospital grade grounding-type

b Ratings and configurations as indicated

c Bodies ivory as per NEMA WD 1

d Face and body thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap

e Dimensional requirements per NEMA WD 6

f Screw-type side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement

g Grounding pole connected to mounting strap

h The receptacle containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts

2101 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles UL listed for use in wet locations Include cast metal box with gasketed hinged lockable and weatherproof while-in-use cover plate



2102 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943 duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices Provide screw-type side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads

211 PANELBOARDS

2111 Circuit Breakers

UL 489 thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted Breaker terminals UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable

21111 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A B and C respectively

212 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489 Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings number of poles overload trip setting and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated Enclosure type as indicated Provide solid neutral

213 MOTORS

Provide motors in accordance with the following

a NEMA MG 1 invertor duty rated

b Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors Also comply with UL 984

c Provide the size in terms of HP or kVA or full-load current or a combination of these characteristics and other characteristics of each motor as indicated or specified

d Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters

e Rate motors for operation on 208-volt 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts and those for operation on 480-volt 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts

f Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating

g Unless otherwise indicated use continuous duty type motors if rated 1 HP and above

h Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment



manufacturer provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated

2131 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified make adjustments to wiring disconnect devices and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay

2132 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies the conduit and wiring connecting such centers assemblies or other power sources to equipment as specified herein Power wiring and conduit conform to the requirements specified herein Control wiring provided under and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment

214 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following

a UL 508 NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2

b Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase and one spare normally open auxiliary contact and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact

c Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss undervoltage and overvoltage

d Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay

e When used with pressure float or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch provide a handoffautomatic selector switch with the controller

f Connections to selector switch wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in hand position

g Safety control devices such as low and high pressure cutouts high temperature cutouts and motor overload protective devices connected in motor control circuit in hand and automatic positions

h Control circuit connections to handoffautomatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device made in



accordance with indicated or manufacturers approved wiring diagram

i Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position

j Provide a disconnecting means capable of being locked in the open position for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location As an alternative provide a motor controller disconnect capable of being locked in the open position to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location

l Overload protective devices provide adequate protection to motor windings be thermal inverse-time-limit type and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case

m Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in off position

n Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller 18000 rms symmetrical amperes

o Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated

2141 Control Wiring

Provide control wiring in accordance with the following

a All control wire stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44 or Type MTW meeting UL 1063 and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards

b Hinge wire Class K stranding

c Current transformer secondary leads not smaller than No 10 AWG

d Control wire minimum size No 14 AWG

e Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below the same type as control wiring with No 12 AWG minimum size

f Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points

2142 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following

a NEMA ICS 4

b Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring molded or fabricated type with barriers rated not less than 600 volts

c Provide terminals with removable binding fillister or washer head screw type or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts



d Terminals not less than No 10 in size with sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal

e Terminal arrangement subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent whichever is greater provided on each block or group of blocks

f Modular pull apart terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type

g Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires are of adequate current-carrying capacity and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts

21421 Types of Terminal Blocks

a Short-Circuiting Type Short-circuiting type terminal blocks furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit Terminal blocks comply with the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above

b Load Type Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits except those for feeder tap units Provide terminals of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated For conductors rated more than 50 amperes provide screws with hexagonal heads Conducting parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating Provide eEach connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color

2143 Control Circuits

Control circuits maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure Transformers conform to UL 506 as applicable Transformers other than transformers in bridge circuits provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load Provide disconnect switch on primary side Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded

2144 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 6

2145 Pushbutton Stations

Provide with startstop momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts and red lights to indicate when motor is running Stations heavy duty oil-tight design



2146 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide LED cluster lamps

215 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)

2151 Pilot Lights

Provide yoke-mounted seven element LED cluster light module Color green red amber in accordance with NEMA ICS 2 Provide yoke-mounted candelabra-base sockets rated 125 volts and fitted with glass or plastic jewels Provide clear 6 watt lamp in each pilot switch Jewels for use with switches controlling motors green jewels for other purposes white red amber

216 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2161 Ground Rods

UL 467 Ground rods copper-clad steel with minimum diameter of 34 inch and minimum length 10 feet Sectional ground rods are permitted

2162 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated

217 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Electrical materials equipment and devices for installation in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 specifically approved by Underwriters Laboratories Inc or Factory Mutual for particular Class Division and Group of hazardous locations involved Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations as indicated Equipment in hazardous locations comply with UL 1203 for electrical equipment and industrial controls and UL 674 for motors


Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturers name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable


Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following

a ASTM D709

b Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified or as indicated on the drawings

c Each nameplate inscription identify the function and when applicable the position

d Nameplates melamine plastic 0125 inch thick white with black center core



e Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated

f Surface matte finish Corners square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core

g Minimum size of nameplates one by 25 inches

h Lettering size and style a minimum of 025 inch high normal block style

220 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z5354 for switchboards panelboards industrial control panels and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination adjustment servicing or maintenance of the equipment


Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

222 WIREWAYS

UL 870 Material steel 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches Provide in length required for the application with screw-cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6

223 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance panelboards MCC and control panels Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker

Provide the following modes of protection

FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Phase to phase ( L-L ) Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )

Provide SPDs per NFPA 780 for the lightning protection system

Maximum L-N L-G and N-G Voltage Protection Rating

600V for 120V single phase system 600V for 120240V single phase system 600V for 208Y120V three phase system 1200V for 480Y277V three phase system



Provide SPDs Maximum L-N L-G and N-G Voltage Protection Rating


The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L-G modes of operation 120 of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below 115 of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts

Provide EMIRFI filtering per UL 1283 for each mode with the capability to attenuate high frequency noise Minimum attenuation 20db


Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following

a NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein

b Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting

c Exterior surfaces free from holes seams dents weld marks loose scale or other imperfections

d Interior surfaces receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice

e Exterior surfaces primed filled where necessary and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish

f Equipment located indoors ANSI Light Gray

g Provide manufacturers coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts plenums and other air-handling spaces conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein

311 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection

312 Hazardous Locations

Perform work in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular Class Division and Group of



hazardous locations involved Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70 Provide conduit with tapered threads

313 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices switches and enclosures labeled and identified as such

3131 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure as permitted by NFPA 70 label each enclosure new and existing as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices Label at minimum indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES Use lettering of at least 025 inch in height and engrave on black-on-white matte finish Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure provided only as permitted by NFPA 70

314 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit IMC rigid nonmetallic conduit or EMT except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise Grounding conductor separate from electrical system neutral conductor Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways Minimum conduit size 12 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls fire-rated partitions or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

3141 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits Pull wire plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire

315 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls ceilings and floors Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project

3151 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a Do not install underground

b Do not encase in concrete mortar grout or other cementitious materials

c Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but



not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT

d Do not use in hazardous areas

e Do not use outdoors

f Do not use in fire pump rooms

g Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3152 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to mechanical equipment rooms electrical equipment rooms hospitals power plants missile magazines and other such areas

(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas

(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms

(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions or fire-rated floors

(5) Do not use above grade except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise

(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3153 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3154 Underground Conduit

Plastic-coated rigid steel plastic-coated steel IMC PVC Type EPC-40 Convert nonmetallic conduit other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 to plastic-coated rigid or IMC steel conduit before rising through floor slab Plastic coating extend minimum 6 inches above floor

3155 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab

3156 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6



inches above floor Where no equipment connections are made install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end

3157 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps wall brackets threaded rod conduit hangers or ceiling trapeze Fasten by wood screws to wood by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick and by machine screws welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel work Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 12 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 34 inch in concrete joints Fill unused holes In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws In suspended-ceiling construction run conduit above ceiling Do not support conduit by ceiling support system Conduit and box systems supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals Where conduit crosses building expansion joints provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means For conduits greater than 2 12 inches inside diameter provide supports to resist forces of 05 times the equipment weight in any direction and 15 times the equipment weight in the downward direction

3158 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine Do not install crushed or deformed conduits Avoid trapped conduits Prevent plaster dirt or trash from lodging in conduits boxes fittings and equipment during construction Free clogged conduits of obstructions

3159 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulated bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box otherwise use at least minimum single locknut and bushing Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures Install bushings on ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70

31510 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for motors Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack Minimum flexible steel conduit size 12 inch diameter Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations



for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission movement or motors Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections

316 Boxes Outlets and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures Boxes for metallic raceways cast-metal hub-type when located in wet locations when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically indicated Boxes in other locations sheet steel except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures minimum 4 inches square or octagonal except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations as approved Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls square-cornered tile-type or standard boxes having square-cornered tile-type covers Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and with machine screws or welded studs on steel Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws expansion shields or machine screws In open overhead spaces cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers Where bar hangers are used attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box When penetrating reinforced concrete members avoid cutting reinforcing steel

3161 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems minimum 1 12 inches deep except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets minimum 4 inches square except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet Telecommunications outlets a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 18 inches deep Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls

3162 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers Where several feeders pass through common pull box tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics circuit number and panel designation

3163 Extension Rings

Extension rings are not permitted for new construction Use only on



existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish

317 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards enclosed circuit breakers motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated Mount other devices as indicated Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in the hazardous area to the bottom of the outlet box

318 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap splice or termination is made For conductors No 6 AWG and smaller diameter provide color coding by factory-applied color-impregnated insulation For conductors No 4 AWG and larger diameter provide color coding by plastic-coated self-sticking markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shrink-type sleeves Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Vendor drawings

3181 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following

a Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips fastened by screws to each terminal block for wire designations

b Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides or provide two marking strips with each block

d Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers

e Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractors schematic and connection diagrams

f The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractors wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractors standard practice however provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Governments wire designations

g Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings along with any rearrangement of points required

319 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations Make splices in conductors No 10



AWG and smaller diameter with insulated pressure-type connector Make splices in conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation

3110 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices Plaster fillings are not permitted Install plates with alignment tolerance of 116 inch Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations

3111 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls partitions floors or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

3112 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780 Ground exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment metallic raceway systems grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways telecommunications system grounds grounding conductor of nonmetallic sheathed cables and neutral conductor of wiring systems Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential This includes lightning protection electrical service telecommunications system grounds as well as underground metallic piping systems Make interconnection to the gas line on the customers side of the meter Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system In addition to the requirements specified herein provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607 Where ground fault protection is employed ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection

31121 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods Measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81 Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod additional rods spaced on center not less than twice the distance of the length of the rod or if sectional type rods are used additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod In high-ground-resistance UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add

31122 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or compression connector

a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturers written recommendations Welds which are puffed up



or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds

b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire

31123 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor Make connections and splices of the brazed welded bolted or pressure-connector type except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment For raised floor equipment rooms in computer and data processing centers provide a minimum of 4 one at each corner ground buses connected to the building grounding system Use bolted connections in lieu of thermoweld so they can be changed as required by additions andor alterations

31124 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system do not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms contact Contracting Officer for further instructions

3113 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified automatic control wiring control devices and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment

3114 Repair of Existing Work

Perform repair of existing work as follows

31141 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance Exercise care where cutting channeling chasing or drilling of floors walls partitions ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation support or anchorage of conduit raceways or other electrical work Repair damage to buildings piping and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved

31142 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed

Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source Remove conductors cut conduit flush with floor underside of floor and through walls and seal openings



31143 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System

Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipments associated wiring including conductors cables exposed conduit surface metal raceways boxes and fittings back to equipments power source as indicated

31144 Continuation of Service

Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain Maintain existing circuits of equipment energized Restore circuits wiring and power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to original condition

3115 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet




Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test

351 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times demonstrating satisfactory operation each time

352 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance Minimum resistance 250000 ohms

353 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a load (such as a plug in light) to verify that the line and load leads are not reversed



354 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made




SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AASHTO LTS (2013 Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs Luminaires and Traffic Signals


ASHRAE 1891 (2014) Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings



ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011 Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010 Addendum A 2008 Addenda B 2009 Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011 Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources






IEEE C62412 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits


ANSI C13613 (2004 R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment Metal Brackets for Wood Poles

ANSI C13621 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminaires

ANSI C1363 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments


NEMA ANSLG C78377 (2015) American National Standard for Electric Lampsmdash Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA C13631 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

NEMA C8277 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment

NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)




47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 1310 (2011 Reprint Dec 2014) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units



UL 1598 (2008 Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

UL 8750 (2015 Reprint Nov 2016) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

12 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16

b For LED luminaire light sources Useful Life is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions This is also known as 70 percent Rated Lumen Maintenance Life as defined in IES LM-80

13 SUBMITTALS



Photometric Plan

LED Luminaire Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings

Poles

SD-03 Product Data

HIDand LED Luminaires

Luminaire (Drivers)

Lighting standard

Aluminum poles

SD-04 Samples

Submit one sample of each luminaire type complete with light source and ballast generator or power supply unit Sample will be returned to the Contractor for installation in the project work

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report



LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Operating test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled Field Quality Control

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided The useful life shall be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21 Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration


Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information summary of procedures and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project Indicate manufacturers commitment to reclaim materials for recycling andor reuse


141 Drawing Requirements

1411 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions effective projected area (EPA) accessories and installation and construction details Photometric data including zonal lumen data average and minimum ratio aiming diagram and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings

1412 Poles

Include dimensions wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS pole deflection pole class and other applicable information

142 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires include computer-generated photometric analysis of the designed to values for the end of useful life of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 07 For LED and all other types of luminaires the submittal shall include the following

Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade taken at a maximum of every 10 feet

Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade

Minimum and maximum footcandle levels

Average maintained footcandle level



Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only

143 Design Data for Luminaires

a Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in IES HB-10

b Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or BUG rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15

c Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family Include listing labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC) Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include CSA (Canadian Standards Association) ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory) and UL (Underwriters Laboratories)

d Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21 Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80

e Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area

144 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturers standard production model luminaire Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements as well as all other pertinent data outlined under 140 Test Report in IES LM-79

145 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturers standard production LED package array or module Submittal shall include

a Testing agency report number date type of equipment and LED light source being tested

b All data required by IES LM-80

1451 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following

a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program

b One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy Efficiency amp Renewable Energy Solid-State Lighting web site

c A manufacturers in-house lab that meets the following criteria

1 Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and



production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturers lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years

2 Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology




Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 15-year period


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise

15 WARRANTY


151 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate




a Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material fixture finish and workmanship On-site replacement includes transportation removal and installation of new products

1 Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering cracking peeling chalking or fading

2 Material warranty shall include

(a) All power supply units (drivers)

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting

b Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment

16 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options and submit to Contracting Officer Services shall reclaim materials for recycling andor reuse Services shall not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury When such a service is not available local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires equipment or accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

22 LED LUMINAIRES

UL 1598 NEMA C8277 and UL 8750 Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity type and wattage indicated All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer


a LED luminaire housings shall be explosion proof

b LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 122 degrees F

c Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598 Optical compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529



d LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table tested per IES LM-79 Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable

Application Luminaire Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior PoleArm-Mounted Decorative Luminaires

65

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60

e Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10

f Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel anodized or baked-on powder coat paint Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling

g Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight Uplight and Glare (BUG) ratings

1 Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed

2 Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0

3 Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed

h Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory

i The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans

j Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel

k Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic Provide polycarbonate vandal-resistant lenses as indicated

l The wiring compartment on pole-mounted street and area luminaires must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws bolts or hardware

m Incorporate modular electrical connections and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics heat sinks power supply units ballasts surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver

n Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturers name address model number date of manufacture and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place The nameplate of the distributing



agent will not be acceptable

o Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with ANSI C1363

p Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C13631

q All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp locking or latching style connectors Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable

222 Luminaire Light Sources

2221 LED Light Sources

a Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA ANSLG C78377

Nominal CCT 4000 degrees K 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

b Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be

Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 degrees K light sources

c Color Consistency

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires

223 Luminaire (Drivers

2231 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements

a Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent

b Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA plus or minus 10 percent

c Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22 degrees F and 104 degrees F

d Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal

e Operating frequency shall be 50 or 60 Hz

f Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 090

g Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent

h Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15 Class B

i Shall be RoHS-compliant



j Shall be mounted integral to luminaire Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed

k Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure such as a canopy or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A

l Shall be dimmable and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system

m Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved

224 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as defined by IEEE C62412 Scenario 1 Location Category C

23 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

Controls shall comply with Section 9 of ASHRAE 901 - IP ASHRAE 1891

24 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors Scratched stained chipped or dented poles shall not be installed

241 Rigid Galvanized ConduitPole with PVC Jacket

Provide 2-inch rigid galvanized conduitpipe with PVC jacket 15 - 20 mils

25 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

ANSI C1363 ANSI C13613 and ANSI C13621 as applicable Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 14 inch stainless steel pipe secured to pole Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head

26 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

261 Manufacturers Nameplate




262 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper light source type The following light source characteristics shall be noted in the format Use Only LED

a Light source type wattage bulb type (eg ED17 BD56) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires

b Start type (eg programmed-start rapid-start instant-start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires

c ANSI ballast type (eg M98 M57) for HID luminaires

d Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires

Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place



PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein

311 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles luminaires mounting arms brackets and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose




Upon completion of installation verify that equipment is properly installed connected and adjusted Conduct an operating test after 100 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section




SECTION 31 23 0000 20

EXCAVATION AND FILL0406

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances


ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 1140 (2000 R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56000 ft-lbfft3) (2700 kN-mm3)

ASTM D 2216 (2005) Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

ASTM D 2321 (2008) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D 2434 (1968 R 2006) Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head)

ASTM D 2487 (20 10) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 4318 (2005) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2008a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D 698 (2007e1) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 1


Effort (12400 ft-lbfcu ft (600 kN-mcu m))


EPA 530F-93004 (1993 Rev O Updates I II IIA IIB and III) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste (Vol IA IB IC and II) (SW-846)

EPA 6004-79020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Scope of Work

As shown by the drawings the Scope of Work for which this specification is applicable includes but is not limited to excavation to uncover existing force main pipelines that discharge to the headworks to allow installation of tapping tee and adjacent pipe fittings and valves plus excavation for placement of temporary by-pass piping beneath access to the work-site In concert with excavation and pipe installation backfill shall be placed to protect the pipe installation and reinstate access to the work-site

Upon completion of the project work excavation and backfill shall be required to allow removal of temporary by-pass piping and resumption of flow through the existing permanent pipe that discharges to the headworks In addition to these primary objectives this specification is applicable to incidental work such as replacement of sidewalks or other parts of the existing facility as required by construction activity

Installation of the temporary by-pass piping and its backfill are for performance of project work by the Contractor and not subject to soil test and compaction requirements The installation of backfill associated with permanent tapping-tee and blind-flange plus piping specified elsewhere are subject to test requirements called for by the specification The placement of soil about pipes to remain in-service and soil placed beneath and adjacent to the work inlcuding the access are subject to soil testing and compaction requirements called for by the specification

122 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 for general soil types abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density

123 Hard Materials

Weathered rock dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of rock but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal

124 Rock

Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting drilling and the

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 2


use of expansion jacks or feather wedges or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers also large boulders buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceeding 12 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production

125 Pile Supported Structure

As used herein a structure where the foundation is pile supported

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Borrow Site Testing

Fill and backfill test

Select material test

Density tests

Moisture Content Tests

Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test


Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials

15 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria

a Surface elevations are as indicated

b Pipes or other artificial obstructions except those indicated will not be encountered

c Hard materials and rock will not be encountered

d Borrow material in the quantities required is not available at the project site

e Blasting will not be permitted Remove material in an approved manner

16 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL

Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH BTEX and full TCLP including ignitability corrosivity and reactivity Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and less than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene Toluene Ethyl Benzene and Xylene (BTEX) and shall not fail the

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 3


TCPL test TPH concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 6004-79020 Method 4181 BTEX concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 530F-93004 Method 50308020 TCLP shall be performed in accordance with EPA 530F-93004 Method 1311 Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site with at least one test from each borrow site Material shall not be brought on site until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer


171 Shoring and Sheeting Plan

The Contractor shall perform excavation in accordance with Industry Saefty Standards and Conformance to OSHA Requirements

172 Utilities

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractors risk Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction excavate by hand Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SOIL MATERIALS

211 Satisfactory Materials

Any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW GP GM GP-GM GW-GM GC GP-GC GM-GC SW SP SMSP-SMfree of debris roots wood scrap material vegetation refuse soft unsound particles and deleterious or objectionable materials Unless specified otherwise the maximum particle diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location

212 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills trash refuse or backfills from previous construction Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter frozen material and stones larger than 3 inches The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials

213 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW GP SW and SP Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC SC ML CL MH and CH Materials classified as GM GP-GM GW-GM SW-SM SP-SM and SM shall be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic (plasticity index equals zero) Materials classified as GM and

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 4


SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero

214 Common Fill

Approved unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location

215 Backfill and Fill Material

ASTM D 2487 classification GW GP GM GCSW SP SM SCwith a maximum ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35 maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12 and a maximum of 25 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140 No 200 sieve

216 Select Material

Provide materials classified as GW GP SW or SP by ASTM D 2487 where indicated The liquid limit of such material shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 The plasticity index shall not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and not more than 35 percent by weight shall be finer than No 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140 Coefficient of permeability shall be a minimum of 0002 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434 217 Topsoil

Natural friable soil representative of productive well-drained soils in the area free of subsoil stumps rocks larger than one inch diameter brush weeds toxic substances and other material detrimental to plant growth Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 55 to 7

22 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL

Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600 Type 4 except as specified herein Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows

a Class I Angular 025 to 15 inches graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral slag cinders crushed stone and crushed shells

b Class II Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 15 inches including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines generally granular and noncohesive either wet or dry Soil Types GW GP SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487


221 Sand

Clean coarse-grained sand classified as SW or SP by ASTM D 2487 for bedding

23 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of Government property at Contractors

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 5


cost

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION

311 Drainage and Dewatering

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction

3111 Drainage

So that construction operations progress successfully completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry The Contractor shall establishconstruct storm drainage features (pondsbasins) at the earliest stages of site development and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity andor provide temporary ditches dikes swales and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils prevent erosion and undermining of foundations When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing Excavation shall be performed so that the site the area immediately surrounding the site and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained

3112 Dewatering

Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls boils uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction French drains sumps ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure except with specific written approval and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material

312 Underground Utilities

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department for assistance in locating existing utilities The Contractor shall scan the construction site with electromagnetic and sonic equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered

313 Machinery and Equipment

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractors risk Repair or remove and

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 6


provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged


321 Clearing and Grubbing

Unless indicated otherwise remove trees stumps logs shrubs brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction operations within the clearing limits Remove stumps entirely Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below existing surface

322 Stripping

Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for backfilling Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading Where sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed

323 Unsuitable Material

Remove vegetation debris decayed vegetable matter sod mulch and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs

33 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours elevation and dimensions indicated Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location Keep excavations free from water Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractors operations soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density Unless specified otherwise refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill and fill material and satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated without specific direction of the Contracting Officer shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade except as specified for spread footings Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer

331 Pipe Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length Rock where encountered shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 7


332 Excavated Materials

Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

34 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

Fill and backfill to contours elevations and dimensions indicated Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift

341 Select Material Placement

Provide under structures not pile supported Place in 8 inch lifts Do not place over wet or frozen areas Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted Backfill against concrete only when approved Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structure

342 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction testing and acceptance of work permits Place and compact backfill to top of trench in 8 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas

35 BORROW

Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations approved borrow materials shall be obtained from off-base sources at Contractors expense

36 COMPACTION

Determine in-place density of existing subgrade if required density exists no compaction of existing subgrade will be required

361 General Site

Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557

362 Structures Spread Footings and Concrete Slabs

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 Compact fill and backfill material to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

363 Adjacent Area

Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557

364 Paved Areas

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 Compact fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 8


37 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling and brush refuse stumps roots and timber


381 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests

382 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used Provide additional tests for each source change

3821 Fill and Backfill Material Testing

Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable

3822 Select Material Testing

Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable

3823 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938 When ASTM D 6938 density tests are used verify density test results by performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 6938 tested as specified herein Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the start of the job and for every 10 ASTM D 6938 density tests thereafter Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of subgrade in cut Include density test results in daily report

3824 Moisture Content Tests

In the stockpile excavation or borrow areas a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of materials being placed is required during stable weather conditions During unstable weather tests shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved moisture content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 2216 Include moisture content test results in daily report


SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 9


SECTION 32 01 19

FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS0808

PART 1 GENERAL

11 UNIT PRICES

111 Measurement

Determine the quantity of each sealing item to be paid for by actual measurement of the number of linear feet of in-place material that has been approved by the Contracting Officer

112 Payment

Payment will be made at the contract unit bid prices per linear foot for the sealing items scheduled The unit bid prices will include the cost of all labor materials and the use of all equipment and tools required to complete the work

12 REFERENCES



ASTM C1016 (2014) Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Absorption of Sealant Backing (Joint Filler) Material

ASTM D5893D5893M (2016) Standard Specification for Cold Applied Single Component Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements

ASTM D789 (2015) Determination of Relative Viscosity and Moisture Content of Polyamide (PA)

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturers Recommendations

SD-04 Samples

Materials




Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects unload and store them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage Provide storage facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at the temperatures and conditions recommended by the manufacturer

15 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising at the time of application of the materials Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed in the joint

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SEALANTS

Materials for sealing cracks in the various paved areas indicated on the drawings shall be as follows

Area Sealing Material

Concrete Sidewalks ASTM D5893D5893M

22 BACKUP MATERIALS

Provide backup material that is a compressible nonshrinking nonstaining nonabsorbing material nonreactive with the joint sealant The material shall have a melting point at least 5 degrees F greater than the pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with ASTM D789 The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5 percent of the sample weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C1016 Use backup material that is 25 plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter than the nominal width of the crack

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXECUTING EQUIPMENT

Machines tools and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be approved before the work is started maintained in satisfactory condition at all times

311 Joint Cleaning Equipment

3111 Concrete Saw

Provide a self-propelled power saw with water-cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for refacing joints or cleaning sawed joints where sandblasting does not provide a clean joint

3112 Hand Tools

Hand tools may be used when approved for removing defective sealant from a crack and repairing or cleaning the crack faces



312 Sealing Equipment

3121 Cold-Applied Single-Component Sealing Equipment

The equipment for installing ASTM D5893D5893M single component joint sealants shall consist of an extrusion pump air compressor following plate hoses and nozzle for transferring the sealant from the storage container into the joint opening The dimension of the nozzle shall be such that the tip of the nozzle will extend into the joint to allow sealing from the bottom of the joint to the top Maintain the initially approved equipment in good working condition serviced in accordance with the suppliers instructions and unaltered in any way without obtaining prior approval Small hand-held air-powered equipment (ie caulking guns) may be used for small applications

32 SAFETY

Do not place joint sealant within 25 feet of any liquid oxygen (LOX) equipment LOX storage or LOX piping Thoroughly clean joints in this area and leave them unsealed

33 PREPARATION OF JOINTS

Immediately before the installation of the sealant thoroughly clean the joints to remove all laitance curing compound filler protrusions of hardened concrete and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the joint space to be sealed


Cut loose the in-place sealant from both joint faces and to the depth shown on the drawings using the concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Depth shall be sufficient to accommodate any separating or backup material that is required to maintain the depth of new sealant to be installed Prior to further cleaning operations remove all loose old sealant remaining in the joint opening by blowing with compressed air Hand tools may be required to remove sealant from random cracks Chipping spalling or otherwise damaging the concrete will not be allowed

332 Sawing

3321 Facing of Joints

Accomplish facing of joints using a concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT to remove all residual old sealant and a minimum of concrete from the joint face to provide exposure of newly cleaned concrete Thoroughly clean immediately following the sawing operation the joint opening to remove all saw cuttings and debris

333 Back-Up Material

When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant depth plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation



34 PREPARATION OF SEALANT

341 Single-Component Cold-Applied Sealants

Inspect the ASTM D5893D5893M sealant and containers prior to use Reject any materials that contain water hard caking of any separated constituents nonreversible jell or materials that are otherwise unsatisfactory Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be cause for rejection

35 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT


Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and following the placement of the separating or backup material Open joints that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant

352 Sealing Joints

Immediately preceding but not more than 50 feet ahead of the joint sealing operations perform a final cleaning with compressed air Fill the joints from the bottom up to 14 inch plus or minus 116 inch below the pavement surface Remove and discard excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods Install the sealant in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air In no case shall gravity methods or pouring pots be used to install the sealant material Traffic shall not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting Officer Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified

36 INSPECTION

361 Joint Cleaning

Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or back-up material and joint sealant

362 Joint Sealant Application Equipment

Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements proper proportioning and mixing and proper installation Evidences of bubbling improper installation failure to cure or set will be cause to suspend operations until causes of the deficiencies are determined and corrected

363 Joint Sealant

Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set bonding to the joint walls cohesive separation within the sealant reversion to liquid entrapped air and voids Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the joint wasted and replaced as specified herein at no additional



cost to the Government

37 CLEAN-UP

Upon completion of the project remove all unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition




SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS0408

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 182 (2005 R 2012) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats


ASTM A185A185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement Plain for Concrete



ASTM C171 (2016) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete


ASTM C173C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method


ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete










Provide plant equipment machines and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product meeting grade controls thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete

Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control

Copies of all reports within 24 hours of completion of the test


141 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling or is already below that point Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising or is already above 40 degrees F Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air aggregates or water is below 35 degrees F placement and protection shall be approved in writing Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions The



underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited Mixing water and aggregates shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved The aggregates shall be free of ice snow and frozen lumps before entering the mixer Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period

142 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used The mixing water andor aggregates shall be cooled if necessary to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at any time

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONCRETE

Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-12 inches

211 Air Content

Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer

212 Slump

The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143C143M

213 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615A615M Wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185A185M

22 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

221 Impervious Sheet Materials

Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171 type optional except that polyethylene film if used shall be white opaque

222 Burlap

Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182

223 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309 Type 2

23 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS

Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal



parts by volume of linseed oil and either mineral spirits naphtha or turpentine At the option of the Contractor commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable

24 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

241 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter

Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard

242 Expansion Joint Filler Premolded

Expansion joint filler premolded shall conform to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752 12 inch thick unless otherwise indicated

25 JOINT SEALANTS

Joint sealant cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893D5893M

26 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions lines and elevations and within the tolerances specified Forms shall be of wood or steel straight of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete Wood forms shall be surfaced plank 2 inches nominal thickness straight and free from warp twist loose knots splits or other defects Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet Radius bends may be formed with 34 inch boards laminated to the required thickness Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming corner forms form spreaders and fillers Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms

261 Sidewalk Forms

Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement Subgrade shall be placed and compacted as directed

311 Sidewalk Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms



312 Maintenance of Subgrade

The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited

32 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment grade and dimensions Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet Corners deep sections and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces as required Clamps spreaders and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed Wood forms may instead be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed except that with probable freezing temperatures oiling is mandatory

321 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 18 inch in any 10 foot long section After forms are set grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge Forms shall have a transverse slope of 14 inch per foot with the low side adjacent to the roadway Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed

33 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

331 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer When consolidated and finished the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated After concrete has been placed in the forms a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off

332 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging when most of the water sheen has disappeared and just before the concrete hardens finish the surface with a wood or magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves irregularities or tool marks A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic followed by edging

333 Edge and Joint Finishing

All slab edges including those at formed joints shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 18 inch Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned



and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished

334 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 516 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 14 inch

34 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers whichever is less and shall be continuous across the slab Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in width Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement using joint filler of the type thickness and width indicated Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally

341 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness using a jointer to cut the groove or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw unless otherwise approved Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 18 inch blade to the depth indicated An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations

342 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed with 12 inch joint filler strips Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752 or building paper Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing Immediately after finishing operations are completed joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 18 inch and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed At the end of the curing period expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color Joints shall be sealed as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned



343 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed



Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period

3511 Mat Method

The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days

3512 Impervious Sheeting Method

The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used The curing medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days

3513 Membrane Curing Method

A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane If any drying has occurred the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feetgallon for the total of both coats The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat The compound shall form a uniform continuous coherent film that will not check crack or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections If pinholes abrasion or other discontinuities exist an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied



shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints and that no curing compound enters the joints The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane

352 Backfilling

After curing debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled graded and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated

353 Protection

Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed

354 Protective Coating

Protective coating of linseed oil mixture shall be applied to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured

3541 Application

Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yardsgallon for first application and not more than 70 square yardsgallon for second application except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry

3542 Precautions

Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame sparks and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators Material shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50



degrees F



Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing Based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action and submit reports as required below and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met

362 Concrete Testing

3621 Strength Testing

Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31C31M by an approved testing laboratory Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days unless otherwise specified or approved Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi

3622 Air Content

Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173C173M or ASTM C231C231M ASTM C231C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector If results are out of tolerance the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified

3623 Slump Test

Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete

363 Thickness Evaluation

The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement the subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the



thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab

364 Surface Evaluation

The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks

37 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

371 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 14 inch the deficient section will be removed between regularly scheduled joints and replaced

372 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 14 inch Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced

373 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified Areas which exhibit excessive cracking discoloration form marks or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced




SECTION 32 92 19

SEEDING1006

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C602 (2013a) Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D4972 (2013) pH of Soils

US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

AMS Seed Act (1940 R 1988 R 1998) Federal Seed Act

DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No 42 Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual Version 30

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Stand of Turf

95 percent ground cover of the established species


Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL applies to this section for plant establishment requirements with additions and modifications herein

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Mulch

Fertilizer

Include physical characteristics and recommendations

SD-06 Test Reports

Topsoil Composition Tests (reports and recommendations)

SD-07 Certificates

State certification for seed




151 Delivery

1511 Seed Protection

Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery on-site storage and handling

1512 Fertilizer and Lime Delivery

Deliver to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturers chemical analysis name trade name trademark and indication of conformance to state and federal laws Instead of containers fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information

152 Storage

1521 Seed Fertilizer and Lime Storage

Store in cool dry locations away from contaminants

1522 Topsoil

Prior to stockpiling topsoil treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil

1523 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles

16 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

161 Restrictions

Do not plant when the ground is frozen snow covered muddy or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit

17 TIME LIMITATIONS

171 Seed

Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SEED

211 Classification

Provide State-certified seed of the latest seasons crop delivered in original sealed packages bearing producers guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures purity germination weedseed content and inert material Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws Wet moldy or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the



presence of the Contracting Officer

212 Seed Purity

Common Name Minimum Pure Live Seed

Maximum Total Other Crop Seed

Maximum Total Weed Seed

Bermuda 70 200 100

Fescue Tall (KY-31) 80 200 100

Centipede 80 200 100

213 Permanent Seeding Schedule

Planting Date Seeding Mixture and Rate

Season 1(March through August)

50acre Fescue KY-3125acre Bermuda Grass (Hulled)10acre Centipede

Season 2(September through February)

50acre Fescue KY-3135acre Bermuda Grass (Unhulled)10acre Centipede

Temporary seeding of disturbed areas shall be performed whenever one or more of the following conditions exist

(1) The Contracting Officer determines temporary seeding is necessary to

prevent or stop erosion of disturbed areas

(2) Work is suspended or delayed on any portion of the project for 15 days and the potential for erosion exists

(3) Whenever permanent seeding is delayed beyond that required by the contract documents

22 TOPSOIL

221 On-Site Topsoil

Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled Composition When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

222 Off-Site Topsoil

Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled Composition Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor

223 Composition

Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the



topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon 6A Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42 Maximum particle size 34 inch with maximum 3 percent retained on 14 inch screen The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4972 Topsoil shall be free of sticks stones roots and other debris and objectionable materials Other components shall conform to the following limits

Silt 25-50 percent

Clay 10-30 percent

Sand 20-35 percent

pH 55 to 70

Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

23 SOIL CONDITIONERS

Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with composition standard for topsoil as specified herein

231 Lime

Commercial grade hydrate limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (CCE) as specified in ASTM C602 of not less than 100 percent

232 Sand

Clean and free of materials harmful to plants

24 FERTILIZER

241 Granular Fertilizer

Organic granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients

10 percent available nitrogen20 percent available phosphorus20 percent available potassium

25 MULCH

Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds mold and other deleterious materials

251 Straw

Stalks from oats wheat rye barley or rice Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Straw shall contain no fertile seed

26 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no elements toxic to plant life



27 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS

Erosion control material shall conform to the following

271 Erosion Control Blanket

100 percent agricultural straw stitched with a degradable nettings designed to degrade within 18 months

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

311 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners as required) fertilizing seeding and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces unless indicated otherwise and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractors operations

3111 Topsoil

Provide 4 inches of off-site or on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade incorporate fertilizer and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking harrowing tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer Remove debris and stones larger than 34 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic

3112 Soil Conditioner Application Rates

Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site

Lime 4000 pounds per acre

3113 Fertilizer Application Rates

Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site

Fertilizer 10-20-20 500 pounds per acre

32 SEEDING

321 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions

Immediately before seeding restore soil to proper grade Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions submit a written request to the Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and proposed variance Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation Sow seed by approved sowing equipment Sow one-half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing



322 Seed Application Method

Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding

3221 Broadcast and Drop Seeding

Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate of 05 pounds per 1000 square feet Use broadcast or drop seeders Sow one-half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 14 inch in clay soils and 12 inch in sandy soils by means of spike-tooth harrow cultipacker raking or other approved devices

323 Mulching

3231 Straw Mulch

Straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre Mulch shall be spread by hand blower-type mulch spreader or other approved method Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes and continued uniformly until the area is covered The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading

3232 Mechanical Anchor

Mechanical anchor shall be a V-type-wheel land packer a scalloped-disk land packer designed to force mulch into the soil surface or other suitable equipment

3233 Asphalt Adhesive Tackifier

Asphalt adhesive tackifier shall be sprayed at a rate between 10 to 13 gallons per 1000 square feet Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface

324 Rolling

Immediately after seeding firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width

325 Erosion Control Material

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions where indicated or as directed by the Contracting Officer

326 Watering

Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off During the germination process seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out



33 RESTORATION

Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations at the Contractors expense




SECTION 33 34 00

FORCE MAINS SEWER0408

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

API Spec 6D (2014 Errata 1-2 2014 Errata 3-5 2015 ADD 1 2015) Specification for Pipeline Valves




AWWA C110A2110 (2012) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111A2111 (2012) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C115A2115 (2011) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

AWWA C151A2151 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast for Water

AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service




ASTM D3139 (1998 R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D3261 (2016) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing



ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape

ASTM F477 (2014) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)

DIPRA TRD (2006) Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe


MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings

Installation and As-Built drawings as specified

SD-06 Test Reports

Hydrostatic Tests

Copies of test results


Do not damage pipe fittings and accessories and pipe coatings during delivery handling and storage

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Unless otherwise shown or specified force main products shall be asspecified in this section

21 PIPE AND FITTINGSTemporary bypass piping for force mains 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be ductile iron or high density polyethylene pipe Force main exposed piping shall be ductile iron pipe with bolted flange joints All temproary bypass piping and fittings shall be proivded as restrained joint Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below

211 Ductile Iron Pipe

a Ductile Iron Pipe AWWA C151A2151 working pressure not less than 200 psi unless otherwise shown or specified

b Fittings Mechanical AWWA C110A2110 rated for 200 psi



c Fittings Push-On AWWA C110A2110 and AWWA C111A2111 rated for 150 psi

212 High Density Polyethylene Pipe

a HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSIAWWA C906 and shall meet pressure classification and dimension ratios (DR) as indicated in the following table

Nominal Size Pressure Class DR

4 - 24 200 psig 9

HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to Standard DIPS (Ductile-Iron OD Pipe Sizing) Dimensions If CONTRACTOR wants to use Standard IPS (Iron Pipe OD pipe sizing) dimension then the next larger pipe shall be installed at no additional cost to the OWNER

Materials used for the manufacture of HDPE pipe and fittings shall meet the following physical property requirements

Property Unit Test (1) Procedure Typical Value

Material Designation - PPIASTM PE 3408

Material Classification - D-1248 III C 5 P34

Cell Classification - D-3350 345434C

Density gmcm3 D-1505 0955

Melt Index gm10 min D-1238 010

Flexural Modulus psi D-790 133000

Tensile Strength psi D-638 3200

ESCR Hrs D-1693 gt5000

HDB psi D-2837 1600

UV Stabilizer Carbon Black D-1603 2 to 3

Elastic Modulus psi D-638 110000

Brittleness Temperature Degrees F D-746 -180

Vicat Softening Temp Degrees F D-1525 255

Thermal Expansion inindegrees F D-696 8 x 10 -5




Hardness Shore D D-2240 64

Molecular Weight Category - Extra High

Molecular Weight - GPC 330000

HDB 734 Degrees F psi D-2837 1600


(1) Test procedures are ASTM unless otherwise specified

(PPI - Plastics Institute GPC = Gel Permenation Chromatography)

The pipe shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved

b Fittings for HDPE Fittings for HDPE shall be miter fusion fabricated and shall provide a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe Outlet ends of such fabricated fittings shall be machined to match system piping

Molded butt fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3261

Special flanged stub end transition fittings recommended by the HDPE pipe manufacturer shall be used when joining HDPE pipe to other types of pipes The transition fitting shall be capable of resisting pull out forces due to seasonal subsurface temperature changes or from changes in anticipated internal or external loadings

22 JOINTS

221 PVC Piping

a Push-On Joint Fittings ASTM D3139 with ASTM F477 gaskets

b Solvent Cement ASTM D2564

c Couplings for use with plain end pipe shall have centering rings or stops to ensure the coupling is centered on the joint

222 Ductile Iron Piping

a Push-on Joints AWWA C111A2111 Class 200

b Mechanical Joints AWWA C111A2111 as modified by AWWA C151A2151 Class 350 for 24 and smaller and Class 250 forfittings larger than 24

c Flanged Joints AWWA C115A2115 Class 125


Joints for HDPE Pipe HDPE pipe and fittings shall be butt fusion jointed utilizing procedures tools and equipment recommended by the pipe manufacturer The procedure shall be performed by craftsmen knowledgeable



and experienced in the techniques of butt fusion of HDPE pipe for high pressure service

A representative of the pipe manufacturer qualified to perform butt fusion procedures on HDPE pipe shall be on site to advise the CONTRACTOR as to procedures and quality control to ensure the best quality and integrity of the completed HDPE pipe system unless waived by the OWNER and ENGINEER as a result of superior qualifications presented by the CONTRACTOR himself

23 VALVES

231 Gate Valves

Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall comply with AWWA C500 Valves for buried service shall be non-rising stem (NRS) 2 inch square nut operated with joints applicable to the pipe or installation Buried valves shall be furnished with extension stems comprising socket extension stem and operating nut and shall be of an appropriate length to bring operating nut to within 6 inches of grade One 4 foot T handle valve wrench shall be furnished for each quantity of 6 buried valves Gate valves that are exposed or installed inside shall be outside screw and yoke (OSampY) handwheel operated with flange ends unless otherwise indicated Gate valve operating nuts and handwheels shall have an arrow and the word OPEN cast in raised letters to indicate the direction of opening Gate valves 14 inches and larger shall be equipped with gearing to reduce operating effort Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in horizontal lines in horizontal position with stems horizontal shall be equipped with bronze track roller and scrapers to support the weight of the gate for its full length of travel Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in vertical pipe lines with stems horizontal shall be fitted with slides to assist the travel of the gate assembly

232 Plug Valves

Cast iron valves shall comply with MSS SP-78 Steel plug valves shall comply with API Spec 6D

24 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Miscellaneous materials shall comply with the following requirements

241 Joint Lubricants

Joint lubricants shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer

242 Bolts Nuts and Glands

AWWA C111A2111

243 Joint Compound

A stiff mixture of graphite and oil or inert filler and oil

244 Joint Tape

ASTM D3308



PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Pipe pipe fittings and appurtenances shall be installed at the locations indicated Excavation trenching and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

311 Cutting

Pipe shall be cut in a neat manner with mechanical cutters Wheel cutters shall be used where practicable Sharp and rough edges shall be ground smooth and loose material removed from the pipe before laying

312 Laying

Except where otherwise authorized pipe shall be laid with bells facing the direction of laying Before lowering and while suspended the pipe shall be inspected for defects Defective material shall be rejected Pipe shall be laid in compliance with the following

a Ductile Iron AWWA C600

b High density polyethylene Manufacturers instructions

313 Jointing

3131 Joints for 4D PE Pipe

Heat fusion joints shall comply with the manufacturers instructions concerning equipment temperature melt time heat coat and joining time Flanged and mechanical joints shall be made in compliance with the manufacturers instructions

3132 Joints for Ductile Iron Pipe

Installation of mechanical and push-on type joints shall comply with AWWA C600 and the manufacturers instructions Installation of flanged joints shall comply with manufacturers instructions

314 Installation of Valves

Prior to installation valves shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and inspected for damage Valves shall be fully opened and closed to ensure that all parts are properly operating Valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertical position

315 Installation of Temporary Valve Boxes (PVC Pipe)

Temporary valve boxes shall be fashioned from PVC pipe and installed over each outside gate valve unless otherwise indicated Valve boxes shall be centered over the valve Fill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet

316 Thrust Restraint

Plugs caps tees and bends deflecting 11-14 degrees or more either vertically or horizontally shall be provided with thrust restraint



Valves shall be securely anchored or shall be provided with thrust restraints to prevent movement Thrust restraints shall be either thrust blocks or for ductile-iron pipes restrained joints

3161 Thrust Blocks

Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 cement 2-12 sand 5 gravel and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored Unless otherwise indicated or directed the base and thrust bearing sides of thrust blocks shall be poured directly against undisturbed earth The sides of thrust blocks not subject to thrust may be poured against forms The area of bearing shall be as shown or as directed Blocking shall be placed so that the fitting joints will be accessible for repair Steel rods and clamps protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks

3162 Restrained Joints

For ductile iron pipe restrained joints shall be designed by the Contractor or the pipe manufacturer in accordance with DIPRA TRD

32 HYDROSTATIC TESTS

The pipeline shall be subjected to both a pressure test and a leakage test The method proposed for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic tests shall be approved by the Contracting Officer Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor The test may be witnessed by the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 7 days in advance of equipment tests The final test report shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of the test

321 Pressure Test

After the pipe has been installed joints completed thrust blocks have been in place for at least five days and the trench has been partially backfilled leaving the joints exposed for examination the pipe shall be filled with water to expel all air The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of 150 psi for a period of at least one hour Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test The exposed pipe joints fitting and valves shall be examined for leaks Visible leaks shall be stopped or the defective pipe fitting joints or valve shall be replaced

322 Leakage Test

The leakage test may be conducted subsequent to or concurrently with the pressure test The amount of water permitted as leakage for the line shall be placed in a sealed container attached to the supply side of the test pump No other source of supply will be permitted to be applied to the pump or line under test The water shall be pumped into the line by the test pump as required to maintain the specified test pressure as described for pressure test for a 2 hour period Exhaustion of the supply or the inability to maintain the required pressure will be considered test failure HDPE pipe can experience diametric expansion and pressure elongation during initial testing The manufacturer shall be consulted prior to testing for special testing considerations Allowable leakage shall be determined by the following I-P formula



L = NDPK Where







323 Retesting





SECTION 33 71 02

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION0215

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire





IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary Glossary of Terms amp Definitions


NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


ANSI C1191 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts

NEMA RN 1 (2005 R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit


NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC



Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TC 9 (2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation












UL 854 (2004 Reprint Nov 2014) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables



Items provided under this section must be specifically suitable for the following service conditions


Section 26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELETRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

14 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary

b In the text of this section the words conduit and duct are used



interchangeably and have the same meaning

c Underground structures subject to aircraft loading are indicated on the drawings

15 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Copper conductors

Submit modified drawings and engineering calculations associated with design changes required for use of copper conductors

SD-03 Product Data

Compositefiberglass handholes

Cable supports

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Cable Installation Plan and Procedure

Six copies of the information described below in 8-12 by 11 inchbinders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced including a separate section for each cable pull Separate sections by heavy plastic dividers with tabs with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull

a Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified

b A list of equipment used with calibration certifications The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull

c The cable manufacturer and type of cable

d The dates of cable pulls time of day and ambient temperature

e The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions

f The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull

SD-07 Certificates

Directional Boring Certificate of Conformance




161 Directional Boring Certificate of Conformance

Provide certification of compliance with the registered Professional Engineers design requirements for each directional bore including HDPE conduit size and type bend radius elevation changes vertical and horizontal path deviations conductor size and type and any conductor derating due to depth of conduit Record location and depth of all directional-bore installed HDPE conduits using Global Positioning System (GPS) recording means with resource grade accuracy


In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word must had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items must be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable unless specified otherwise

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONDUIT DUCTS AND FITTINGS

211 Rigid Metal Conduit

UL 6



2111 Rigid Metallic Conduit PVC Coated

NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness must be nominal 85 Shore A durometer dielectric strength must be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz and tensile strength must be minimum 3500 psi

212 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial and Riser Applications

UL 651 and NEMA TC 2 EPC-40 or EPC-80

213 Duct Sealant

UL 94 Class HBF Provide high-expansion urethane foam duct sealant that expands and hardens to form a closed chemically and water resistant rigid structure Sealant must be compatible with common cable and wire jackets and capable of adhering to metals plastics and concrete Sealant must be capable of curing in temperature ranges of 35 degrees F to 95 degrees F Cured sealant must withstand temperature ranges of -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F without loss of function

214 Fittings

2141 Metal Fittings

UL 514B

2142 PVC Conduit Fittings

NEMA TC 3

2143 PVC Duct Fittings

NEMA TC 9

2144 Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit

Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit must be cast-metal cadmium or zinc-coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and must conform to UL 514A

22 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 including listing requirements Wires and cables manufactured more than 24 months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854 type USE

221 Conductor Types

Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHNTHWN unless otherwise noted Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller must be solid Conductors No 8 AWG and larger must be stranded Conductors No 6 AWG and smaller must be copper Conductors No 4 AWG and larger may be either copper or aluminum at the Contractors option All conductors must be copper



222 Conductor Material

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 wires in conduit other than service entrance must be 600-volt Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83 Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8

223 Cable Marking

Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length

Identify each cable by means of a fiber laminated plastic or non-ferrous metal tags or approved equal in each manhole handhole junction box and each terminal Each tag must contain the following information cable type conductor size circuit number circuit voltage cable destination and phase identification

Conductors must be color coded Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made Conductor identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers colored nylon cable ties and plates heat shrink type sleevesor colored electrical tape Control circuit terminations must be properly identified Color must be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals must be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows


(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue


(1) Phase A - brown




d On three-phase four-wire delta system high leg must be orange as required by NFPA 70

23 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS

Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors

a For use with copper conductors UL 486A-486B



24 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES

Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply with ANSI C1191

241 Heat Shrinkable Splice

Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions

242 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice

Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation The installation must not require heat or flame or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive It must be designed for use with inline compression type connectors or indoor outdoor direct-burial or submerged locations

25 TAPE

251 Insulating Tape

UL 510 plastic insulating tape capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C

252 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

253 Fireproofing Tape

Provide tape composed of a flexible conformable unsupported intumescent elastomer Tape must be not less than 030 inch thick noncorrosive to cable sheath self-extinguishing noncombustible adhesive-free and must not deteriorate when subjected to oil water gases salt water sewage and fungus

26 PULL ROPE

Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds

27 GROUNDING AND BONDING

271 Driven Ground Rods

Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 34 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length Sectional type rods may be used for rods 20 feet or longer

272 Grounding Conductors

Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B8 Class B soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated Solid-bare copper conductors must



conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No 8 and smaller Insulated conductors must be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded except that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts Aluminum is not acceptable

28 LOW VOLTAGE EXTERIOR PULL BOX

a Concrete polymer pull boxes impact resistant per ASTM D 2444 high strength low water absorption

b Design load 22500 lbs test load 33750 lbs per ANSI tier 22

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturers published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable

32 CABLE INSPECTION

Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions signs of physical damage and broken end seals prior to installation If end seal is broken remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturers recommendations

33 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE

Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction insulation type cable diameter bending radius cable temperature limits for installation lubricants coefficient of friction conduit cleaning storage procedures moisture seals testing for and purging moisture maximum allowable pulling tension and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure

34 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE SYSTEM

341 Trenching

Excavate trenches for direct-burial cables to provide a minimum cable cover of 24 inches below finished grade for power conductors operated at 600 volts or less and 30 inches below finished grade for over 600 volts in accordance with IEEE C2 When rock is encountered remove to a depth of at least 3 inches below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 14 inch Bottoms of trenches must be smooth and free of stones and sharp objects Where materials in bottoms of trenches are other than sand a 75 mm 3 inch layer of sand must be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil Trenches must be not less than 6 inches wide and must be in straight lines between cable markers Bends in trenches must have a radius of not less than 36 inches

342 Cable Installation

Ducts must extend at least 5 feet beyond each edge of any paving and at least 5 feet beyond each side of any railroad tracks Cables may be pulled into duct from a fixed reel where suitable rollers are provided in the trench Where direct burial cable transitions to duct-enclosed cable



direct-burial cables must be centered in duct entrances and a waterproof nonhardening mastic compound must be used to facilitate such centering If paving or railroad tracks are in place where cables are to be installed coated rigid steel conduits driven under the paving or railroad tracks may be used in lieu of concrete-encased ducts Prevent damage to conduit coatings by providing ferrous pipe jackets or by predrilling Where cuts are made in any paving the paving and subbase must be restored to their original condition Where cable is placed in duct(eg under paved areas roads or railroads) slope ducts to drain

343 Splicing

Provide cables in one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which cables are manufactured Where splices are required install splices only in maintenance manholeshandholes or cabinetspedestals

344 Bends

Bends in cables must have an inner radius not less than those specified in NFPA 70 for the type of cable or manufacturers recommendation

345 Horizontal Slack

Leave approximately 3 feet of horizontal slack in the ground on each end of cable runs on each side of connection boxes and at points where connections are brought above ground Where cable is brought above ground leave additional slack to make necessary connections

346 Identification Slabs or Markers

Provide a slab at each change of direction of cable over the ends of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and roadways over the ends of ducts or conduits stubbed out for future use and over each splice Identification slabs must be of concrete approximately 20 inches square by 6 inches thick and must be set flat in the ground so that top surface projects not less than 34 inch nor more than 1 14 inches above ground Concrete must have a compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi and have a smooth troweled finish on exposed surface Inscribe an identifying legend such as electric cable telephone cable splice or other applicable designation on the top surface of the slab before concrete hardens Inscribe circuit identification symbols on slabs as indicated Letters or figures must be approximately 2 inches high and grooves must be approximately 14 inch in width and depth Install slabs so that the side nearest the inscription on top must include an arrow indicating the side nearest the cable Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

35 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS

351 Requirements

Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated Bond bare copper grounding conductor to ground rings (loops) in all manholes and to ground rings (loops) at all equipment slabs (pads) Ducts must have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings laid with a minimum slope of 3 inches per 100 feet Depending on the contour of the finished grade the high-point may be at a terminal



a manhole a handhole or between manholes or handholes Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures

Perform changes in ductbank direction as follows

a Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers unless specifically indicated as acceptable

b The minimum manufactured bend radius must be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter

c As an exception to the bend radius required above provide field manufactured longsweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees either horizontally or vertically using a combination of curved and straight sections Maximum manufactured curved sections 30 degrees

352 Treatment

Ducts must be kept clean of concrete dirt or foreign substances during construction Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools and match factory tapers A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid Plastic ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun

353 Conduit Cleaning

As each conduit run is completed for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit After which draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs For conduit sizes less than 3 inches draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs

354 Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures

Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be disturbed and under roads and railroad tracks must be zinc-coated rigid steel jacked into place Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement rigid steel conduit must be installed because of its strength To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used Separators or spacing blocks must be made of steel concrete plastic or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers Hydraulic jet method must not be used

355 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations

Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs pavement and walls) in wet locations must be PVC coated and must extend from at least 2 inches



within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete (minimum of 6 inches from penetration)

356 Multiple Conduits

Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches except that light and power conduits must be separated from control signal and conduits by a minimum distance of 12 inches Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally Spacer assembly must consist of base spacers intermediate spacers ties and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly Install spacers per manufacturers instructions but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly

357 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope

New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs on each end Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits

358 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement

Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench Grade bottom of trench smooth where rock soft spots or sharp-edged materials are encountered excavate the bottom for an additional 3 inches fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles that would be retained on a 14 inch sieve The first 6 inch layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously specified The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

3581 Directional Boring

HDPE conduits must be installed below the frostline and as specified herein

For branch circuit wiring less than 600 volts depths to the top of the conduit must not be less than 30 inches in pavement- or non-pavement-covered areas

359 Duct Encased in Concrete

3591 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads

For duct bank connections to concrete pads break an opening in the pad out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad Cut the steel and extend into the duct bank envelope Chip out the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope

3592 Partially Completed Duct Banks

During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank prevent debris such as mud and and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs Fit concrete envelope of a partially



completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the envelope Provide one No 4 bar in each corner 3 inches from the edge of the envelope Secure corner bars with two No 3 ties spaced approximately one foot apart Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring

3593 Removal of Ducts

Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures close the openings to waterproof the structure Chip out the wall opening to provide a key for the new section of wall

3510 Duct Sealing

Seal all electrical penetrations for radon mitigation maintaining integrity of the vapor barrier and to prevent infiltration of air insects and vermin

36 CABLE PULLING

Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions including turnups into switches transformers switchgear switchboards and other enclosures Cable with tape shield must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating

361 Cable Lubricants

Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables

37 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths Form cables to closely parallel walls not to interfere with duct entrances and support on brackets and cable insulators Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the splice Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks leaving top space open for future cables except as otherwise indicated for existing installations Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure

371 Cable Tag Installation

Install cable tags in each manhole as specified including each splice Tag wire and cable provided by this contract Install cable tags over the fireproofing if any and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes

38 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING

Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or



specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes handholes or aboveground termination pedestals

39 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms

391 Grounding Electrodes

Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded If the specified ground resistance is not met an additional ground rod must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not less than 6 feet from the first rod) Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer immediately



a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturers written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds

b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies must be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire


Provide bare grounding conductors except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors Ground cable sheaths cable shields conduit and equipment with No 6 AWG Ground other noncurrent-carrying metal parts and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment Ground metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No 6 AWG Provide direct connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated full-size conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit which is spliced within the manhole

394 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints

Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement Use stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across such separations



310 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

3101 Reconditioning of Surfaces

31011 Unpaved Surfaces

Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area re-seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding and provide topsoiling fertilizing liming seeding sodding sprigging or mulching

311 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3111 Concrete Slabs (Pads) for Equipment

Unless otherwise indicated the slab must be at least 8 inches thick reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W29 by W29 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab Slab must be placed on a 6 inch thick well-compacted gravel base Top of concrete slab must be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage Edges above grade must have 12 inch chamfer Slab must be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment

Stub up conduits with bushings 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas

3112 Sealing

When the installation is complete seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound Seals must be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents insects or other foreign matter


3121 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS

31211 Low Voltage Cables 600-Volt

Perform tests after installation of cable splices and terminations and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits

a Visual and Mechanical Inspection

(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage

(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with



contract plans and specifications

(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections

(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation

(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition

(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement

b Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 1000 volts dc for one minute

(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection

31212 Grounding System

a Visual and mechanical inspection

Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications

b Electrical tests

Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE 81 On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturers instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument must be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with associated distances and provide a plot of resistance vs distance

3122 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing




SECTION 40 05 00

STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATED SLIDE GATES0617

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AWS A54A54M (2012) Specification for Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding

AWS D16 (2007) Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel


AWWA C560 (2000 R2007) Cast Iron Slide Gates

AWWA C561 (2004) Fabricate Stainless Steel Slide Gates


ASTM A193A193M (2016) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A240A240M (2016) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A276A276M (2016a) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM B584 (2014) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

ASTM B62 (2015) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

ASTM D4020 (2011) Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials

ASTM F593 (2013a E 2016) Standard Specification for



Stainless Steel Bolts Hex Cap Screws and Studs

ASTM F594 (2009 E 2015) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts



12 DEFINITIONS

This section includes materials installation and testing of fabricated stainless steel slide gate open channel type conforming to AWWA C561 and as supplemented herein and also includes requirements for materials installation and testing of cast stainless steel slide gates (formerly called sluice gates) conforming to AWWA C560 and as supplemented herein Gates shall be installed complete with electric actuatorsoperators where indicated

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop and Erection Drawings

Certified shop and erection drawings including but not limited to dimensional drawings calculations to show that gates stems and left meet the specifications all catalog data and detail drawing showing slide gate parts and described by material of construction specification (such as AISI ASTM SAE or CDA) and grade or type show coatings show each gate by tag number data regarding motor characteristics and performance accessory items templates or certified setting plans with tolerances for anchor bolts manufacturers literature operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists warranty listing of reference installations as specified with contact names and telephone numbers qualifications of field service engineer list of spare parts other than those specified recommendations for long term and short term storage special tools shop and field testing procedures and equipment to be used number of service man days provided and per diem field service rate manufacturers product data and specifications for shop painting listing of material recommended for each service specified and indicated providing compatibility with process fluid and service specified and indicated


Maintenance Manuals

14 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for a two year period



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Fabricated gates shall be self contained upward opening type with guides for surface mounting on existing wall or pipe flange as required The gates shall be furnished with floorstand where indicated Gates at grit influent are manual

Electric actuators shall be provided to replace manual operators on two (2) existing stainless steel slide gates located downstream of the existing bar screens


Fabricated stainless steel gates shall comply with AWWA C 561 except as modified herein Leakage shall not exceed 01 gpm per foot of wetted seating perimeter Gates shall be design complete with gates guides frames base plates seats stems stem guides seals actuator and anchor bolts for a minimum seating and unseating head of 10 feet Measure the seating and unseating heads from the top surface of the water to the centerline of the disc Provide rising stem design


Gate performance requirements are outlined under the design requirements

22 MATERIALS

221 Fabricated Stainless Slide Gates Design

Design frames to be suitable for flush mounting on existing wall or pipe flange as noted herein The fabricated slide gate guides shall incorporate a two-slot design One slot shall accept the disc plate The second slot shall accept the reinforcing ribs of the disc The guides shall extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for handwheel operator stand The extended guides or posts shall require no additional reinforcing to support the operator Construct the guides of formed plate into a rigid continuous structural shape Provide a flush invert at the bottom of the frame Provide a rubber insert to function as a seating surface for the gate disc Provide rubber J-bulb or UHMW polyurethane seals or seats along the sides of the gatesFor self-contained gates provide replaceable polyethylene bearing strips in extruded retainer slots along the guides Provide strips along both sides of the guide channels containing the disc Mount strips in dovetail grooves in the guides Alternatively mount the replaceable polyethylene bearing strips on the disc Provide rubber or UHMWPE J-bulb seals along the top of the gate for submerged applications Fabricate the disc using stainless steel flat plate with stainless steel structural or formed members welded to the plate Provide disc components with a minimum material thickness of 14 inch The disc shall be a one-piece plate reinforced with ribs so that the disc will not deflect more than 1720 the gate span when the upstream side of the gate is subjected to the specified seating head and the downstream side of the gate contains no liquid Design the disc to limit deflection to a maximum of 18 inch when the disc is subjected to the maximum specified unseating head Attach reinforcing ribs to disc by welding do not use bolting Reinforcing ribs shall extend into the guides such that they overlap the seating surface of the guide Design the disc so that all surfaces are free of metal-to-metal contact with the frames



Attach the actuator support yoke to the extensions of the guides Provide two angles or structural channels bolted to opposite sides of the guide extensions Mount the actuator on a plate bolted to the support yoke Maximum deflection of the yoke shall not exceed 14 inch when subjected to a load induced by an 80-pound pull on the actuator or 1360 span when subjected to a load induced by a 40-pound pull on the actuator whichever is less Lifting stems shall be one piece with a minimum diameter of 1 12 inches The stem shall withstand an actuator effort of 80 pounds without buckling assuming the critical buckling load as determined by using the Euler Column Formula with C = 20 Support the stems with stem guides such that the LR ratio for the unsupported part of the stem does not exceed 200 The stem connection to the disc shall be either the clevis type with structural members welded to the slide and containing a bolt to act as a pivot pin or a threaded and bolted or keyed thrust nut supported in a welded nut pocket The pocket shall be capable of withstanding a load of 80 pounds on the actuator Design crank-operated or handwheel-operated floor stand hoists to permit gate operation with 40 pounds of maximum effort under the head conditions noted in the drawings Provide clear plastic polycarbonate stem cover with position indication graduated in feet and inches Provide vent holes in the cover to prevent condensation

222 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates Materials of Construction

Materials of construction shall be as listed in AWWA C561 and conform to the requirements listed below

Component Material Specification

Guides Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M or ASTM A276A276M Type 316 or 316L

Disc Yoke Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M or ASTM A276A276M Type 316 or 316L

Stems Stem Guides Bushings Pivot Pin

Stainless Steel ASTM A276A276M Type 304 or 303

Bolts Fasteners (Including Anchor Bolts)

Stainless Steel ASTM A193A193M ASTM F593 or ASTM F594 Grade B8M

Lift Nut Bronze ASTM B62 or ASTM B584 Alloys C83600 C83800 or C86500

J-Bulb Seals Flush Bottom Seals

Rubber or UHMW Polyurethane ASTM D2000 Grades BC610 BC611 BC612 BC613 BC614 or BC615 or ASTM D4020

23 ELECTRIC OPERATOR

Electric operators shall be provided complete with actuators speed controls and accessories The actuators shall operate on 480 VAC 3 phase 60 Hz with a 100 percent duty cycle and shall be equipped with an AC thermal overload protector with automatic rest reversing (bi-directional) operation for use with rotating equipment to full rotation Gearing shall be a two-stage planetary permanently lubricated self-locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings connections via male output staff The start-up torque shall be suitable for the gate being operating The stall



torque shall exceed the start-up torque by no less than 25 Two travel stop limit switches with cams internal independent adjustable and actuated by cams shall be mounted on the drive shaft A side mounted hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual override The actuators shall have a NEMA 250 Type 4X corrosion resistant enclosure as standard The actuator shall operate in a temperature range of -40 to plus 65 degrees C -40 to plus 150 degrees F Actuators shall fail in last position unless otherwise indicated Electric operators shall be furnished with features noted on the gate schedule in the contract drawings Limit switches shall be provided on all actuators

231 Limit Switches

Limit switches shall be single-pole double-throw (SPDT) type rated 10 amps at 120 volts ac housed in a NEMA 250 Type 4X enclosure and adjustable for open and closed positions

24 SPARE PARTS

Provide the following spare parts for each size of fabricated slide gate

Quantity Description

2 Lift Nuts

4 Stem Guides for Each Type and Size

2 Pivot Pins

1 Set Sealing Strips

Pack spare parts in a wooden box label with the manufacturers name and local representatives name address and telephone number and attach list of materials contained within

25 SHOP AND FACTORY FINISHING

Coat any cast-iron and steel surfaces above deck level including actuator per Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS Apply the prime coat at the factory Color of the finish coat shall be OSHA Safety Red unless directed otherwise Do not coat stainless steel components

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

Examine all gates delivered to the site Reject damaged products

32 INSTALLATION

Install fabricated stainless steel slide gates per AWWA C561 paragraph 46 Install the cast stainless steel slide gates per AWWA C560 paragraph 46 Welder qualifications shall comply with AWS D16 Welding rod and electrodes shall comply with AWS A54A54M In addition to structural welds seal weld interfaces between mating parts to prevent moisture intrusion




331 Tests

Operate each fabricated stainless steel slide gate through two complete cycles Gates shall operate without binding Determine the pulling force required to turn the handwheel with a torque wrench Pulling force required shall be less than the limit specified Fill channels to which the gates are attached with water Measure leakage through each slide gate Measure the actual field seating and unseating heads The allowable leakage shall be as specified above If the leakage rate is exceeded adjust or replace the gate and retest until it passes




SECTION 40 95 00

PROCESS CONTROL1007

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



IEEE 142 (2007 Errata 2014) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book

IEEE C62411 (2002 R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits



INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 61131-3 (2013) Programmable Controllers - Part 3 Programming Languages






NIST SP 250 (1991) Calibration Services Users Guide


UL 1059 (2001 Reprint Oct 2011) Standard for Terminal Blocks

12 DEFINITIONS

Definitions Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations shall conform to IEEE Stds Dictionary as applicable




The existing SCADA system at the French Creek WWTP consists of parallel data highway loops interconnecting six (6) Allen-Bradley 540 Programmable Logic Controllers to the Human-Machine Interface located in the Control Room of the Administration Building The six (6) existing PLCs are located in instrumentation rooms strategically located throughout the existing WWTP to monitor and control operation of various process equipment The existing control system provides for operator interaction overall control system supervision and process equipment control and monitoring The existing SCADA programming software is Citect by Schneider Electric

PLC No 1 is located in the instrumentation room of the Primary Sludge Pump Station which is in close proximity to the existing headworks structure and equipment Motor starters with integral hand-off -auto switches for the existing bar screen screening conveyors screenings washercompactor and grit conveyor are housed in the Motor Control Center in the electrical room located adjacent to the instrumentation room Local hand-off-auto switches are located at each individual piece of equipment The main control panel for the existing grit removal system is located beside the grit removal system Control and monitoring functions for the existing screening equipment as well as the grit removal system are integrated through existing PLC No 1

The existing process instrumentation and control system will be modified to integrate control and monitoring requirements associated with upgrades to the screening system equipment and grit removal system at the headworks structure The systems integrator shall modify the process instrumentation and control system to integrate controls signals alarms etc associated with modified equipment and controls provided by others


Equipment and control changes for the WWTP include

1 Two (2) mechanical bar screens with main control panel located remotely in the instrumentation room adjacent to the bar screens at the headworks

2 One (1) new wash presscompactor with main control panel located remotely in the instrumentation room adjacent to the existing PLC No 1 and local push button control station located adjacent to the wash press at the headworks

One (1) new main control panel for grit removal system located adjacent to the grit removal system at the headworks

The bar screen main control panel will include a PLC During normal operation bar screen operations are controlled from the main control panel based on water level in the bar screen channels The bar screen main control panel also provides the run signal to initiate operation of the downstream screening conveyors and wash presscompactor Dry contact discrete and analog signals and alarms from the screening equipment motor starters and control panels shall be terminated and integrated through PLC No 1 to accommodate remote monitoring alarm registers data logging reporting etc The main control panel for the grit removal system includes a PLC to provide various timer functions for operations of electric valves grit classifiers and grit conveyor Dry contact



discrete signals and alarms from the grit equipment motor starters and control panel shall be terminated and integrated through PLC No 1 to accommodate remote monitoring at the HMI

132 Operation

Control system modifications provided under this specification shall operate using algorithms or ladder logic type supervisory control to provide the required sequences of operation Input data to the controller shall be obtained from instruments and controls interfaced to new mechanical electrical and utility systems as shown and specified All required setpoints settings alarm limits and sequences of operation shall be as identified in the sequences of operation

133 Points

Inputs to and outputs from the control system shall be in accordance with the InputOutput (IO) Summary Table included herein as Table I Each connected analog output (AO) analog input (AI) digital output (DO) digital input (DI) and other input or output device connected to the control system shall represent a point where referred to in this specification

134 Data Transmission Systems (DTS)

Data transmission systems for communication between PLCs and field control panels shall be as shown on the drawings

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation

Wiring

Detail drawings containing complete piping wiring schematicflow diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate thatthe system has been coordinated and will properly function as aunit Piping and Instrumentation (PampID) drawings (prepared usingindustry recognized device symbols clearly defined and describingpiping designations to define the service and materials ofindividual pipe segments and instrument tags employing InstrumentSociety of America suggested identifiers) Include in theDrawings as appropriate product specific catalog cuts adrawing index a list of symbols a series of drawings for eachcontrol system using abbreviations symbols nomenclature andidentifiers as shown valve schedules etc

SD-03 Product Data

Control Drawings

Manufacturers descriptive and technical literature performance charts and installation instructions Product specific catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed to the unique identifiers



and shall consist of data sheets that document compliance with the specification Where multiple components are shown on a catalog cut mark the application specific component

Performance Verification Test (PVT)

The performance verification test procedure it shall refer to the actions and expected results to demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequence of control Include a list of the equipment to be used during the testing plus manufacturers name model number equipment function the date of the latest calibration and the results of the latest calibration

Field Test Procedure

Documentation containing field test methods and procedures

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Test Report

Testing Adjusting and Commissioning

Performance Verification Test(PVT)

Endurance Test

Test Results in report format

SD-07 Certificates

Certified test results for surge protection


Instrumentation and Control System

Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the instructions layout wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and trouble shooting guides

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Materials and equipment must be standard unmodified products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer Items of the same type and purpose shall be identical and supplied by the same manufacturer unless replaced by a new version



approved by the Government

212 Nameplates

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturers name and address and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for equipment devices and panels furnished Each nameplate shall identify the device such as pump P-1 or valve VLV-402 Labels shall be coordinate with the schedules and the process and instrumentation drawings Laminated plastic shall be 18 inch thick white with black center core Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 by 3 inches with minimum 14 inch high engraved block lettering Nameplates for devices smaller than 1 by 3 inches shall be attached by a nonferrous metal chain All other nameplates shall be attached to the device


Equipment located outdoors not provided with climate controlled enclosure shall be capable of operating in the ambient temperature range indicated in paragraph ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS unless otherwise specified Electrical equipment will conform to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Equipment and wiring must be in accordance with NFPA 70 with proper consideration given to environmental conditions such as moisture dirt corrosive agents and hazardous area classification

23 MONITORING AND CONTROL PARAMETERS

The control system shall be complete including sensors field preamplifiers signal conditioners offset and span adjustments amplifiers transducers transmitters control devices engineering units conversions and algorithms for the applications and shall maintain the specified end-to-end process control loop accuracy from sensor to display and final control element Control equipment shall be powered by a 120 vAc single phase 60 Hz power source with local transformers included as needed for signal transmission and subsystem operation Connecting conductors shall be suitable for installed service Enclosures shall be rated for NEMA Class 1 Div 2 within 5 feet of the headworks structure

231 Electrical Instrumentation

Electrical power measurements with a range for the specific application plus or minus 10 percent of range (display and print to nearest kWh and kW) Electrical measurements with a range for the specific application plus or minus 10 percent of range (display and print to nearest 01 for volts and amperes and to the nearest 001 for VAR and PF)

24 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)


The existing WWTP SCADA PLC is Allen-Bradley 540 with Citect programming software by Schneider Electric The systems integrator shall modify the existing PLC and appurtenances to integrate input signals from various new control panels provided by others PLC interfaces to the existing WWTP SCADA system with DH+ communication protocol



242 Modular PLC

2421 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Module

The existing CPU module is a self contained microprocessor based unit that provides time of day scanning application (ladder rung logic) program execution storage of application programs storage of numerical values related to the application process and logic IO bus traffic control peripheral and external device communications and self diagnostics Utilize the existing CPU to facilitate proposed improvements

2422 Communications Module

The existing communications module allow s peer-to-peer communication with other PLCs and allow s the PLC to communicate with the central station or workstation The communication module utilize s the manufacturers standard communication architecture and protocol ethernet architecture and protocol or a combination of these The communication module allow s programming of the PLC to be done locally through the use of a laptop computer or from the central station or remote workstation Utilize the existing communications module

2423 Power Supply Module

Existing power supply modules shall continue to be utilized to power other modules installed in the same cabinet Power supply modules shall plug directly into the backplane Auxiliary power supplies may be used to supply power to remote cabinets or modules as necessary

a Power supply modules shall use AC power with a nominal voltage of 120 vAc plus or minus 5 percent with 24 vDc or 5 vDc as required by PLC components The power supply module shall monitor the incoming line voltage level and shall provide over current and over voltage protection If the voltage level is detected as being out of range the power supply module shall continue to provide power for an adequate amount of time to allow for a safe and orderly shutdown Power supply modules shall be capable of withstanding a power loss for a minimum of 20 milliseconds while still remaining in operation and providing adequate power to all connected modules

b Each power supply module shall be provided with an on-off switch integral to the module If the manufacturers standard power supply module is not provided with an on-off switch a miniature toggle type switch shall be installed near the PLC and shall be clearly labeled as to its function

c Provide power supply modules with an indicating light which shall be lit when the module is operating properly

2424 InputOutput (IO) Modules

Existing IO Modules are self contained microprocessor based units that provide an interface to field devices Provide additional IO modules to match existing Located in the same mounting rack as the other PLC components The unit shall plug directly into the backplane of the mounting rack Each module shall contain visual indication to display the on-off status of individual inputs or outputs



243 Loop PLC

Existing PLC is a single or multiple loop controller based on the control system requirements Controller is self contained and include s a central processing unit (CPU) program memory power supply inputoutput capability network communications capability and displaykeyboard The controller has a scaleable process variable for each loop Analog input signals are based on the use of proportional integral and derivative (PID) control logic Analog outputs are configured as direct acting or reverse acting The controller has keyboard display automanual selection for control of each loop output remote setpoint adjustmentlocal setpoint adjustment selection with adjustable high-end and low-end limits ratio and bias adjustment on remote setpoint input operator-initiated self-tunemanual-tune selection and anti-reset wind-up feature Controller power s analog output loops to 20 mAdc when connected to a load of 600 ohms Utilize existing PLC for integration of new signals

2431 Power Requirements

Existing controller is powered by 120 vAc Power consumption does not exceed 25 watts Controller provide s electrical noise isolation between the AC power line and the process variable inputs remote setpoint inputs and output signals of not less than 100 dB at 60 Hertz common mode rejection ration and not less than 60 dB at 60 hertz normal-mode rejection ration

2432 On-Off Switch

Existing controller is provided with an integral on-off switch Otherwise a miniature toggle type switch is installed near the controller

2433 Parameter Input and Display

Control parameters shall be entered and displayed directly in the correct engineering units through a series of keystrokes on a front panel display with decimal point and polarity indication Display shall be in English units

2434 Self Tuning

Controllers are provided with self-tuning operation which shall apply to proportional integral and derivative modes of control and shall modify the mode constants as required Self-tuning shall only be in operation when selected from the front panel

2435 Manual Tuning

Controllers are provided with manual tuning operation which shall apply to proportional integral and derivative modes of control by means of individually adjustable mode constants Adjustments shall be set for the appropriate value if a particular control mode action is required or to zero if that particular mode is not desired

244 Program StorageMemory Requirements

The CPU utilize s the manufacturers standard non-volatile memory for the operating system The controller shall have electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) for storage of user programs and battery backed RAM for application memory



245 InputOutput Characteristics

Each controller shall allow for analog input analog output discrete input and discrete output The number and type of additional inputs and outputs for the system shall be as indicated herein The system capacity shall include a minimum of 20 percent spare input and output points (no less than two points) for each point type provided During normal operation a malfunction in any inputoutput channel shall affect the operation of that channel only and shall not affect the operation of the CPU or any other channel Analog input circuits shall be available in 4-20 mA Discrete input circuits shall be available in 79-132 vAc All input circuits shall have a minimum optical isolation of 1500 VRMS and shall be filtered to guard against high voltage transients from the externally connected devices Analog output circuits shall be available in 4-20 mA Discrete output circuits shall be available in 79-132 vAc All output circuits shall have a minimum optical isolation of 1500 VRMS and shall be filtered to guard against high voltage transients from the externally connected devices

246 Wiring Connections

Wiring connections shall be heavy duty self lifting pressure type screw terminals to provide easy wire insertion and secure connections The terminals shall accept two 14 AWG wires A hinged protective cover shall be provided over the wiring connections The cover shall have write-on areas for identification of the external circuits Identification shall be typed Hand written is not acceptable

247 Diagnostics

Each PLC shall have diagnostic routines implemented in firmware The CPU shall continuously perform self-diagnostic routines that will provide information on the configuration and status of the CPU memory communications and inputoutput The diagnostic routines shall be regularly performed during normal system operation A portion of the scan time of the controller shall be dedicated to performing these housekeeping functions In addition a more extensive diagnostic routine shall be performed at power up and during normal system shutdown The CPU shall log inputoutput and system faults in fault tables which shall be accessible for display When a fault affects inputoutput or communications modules the CPU shall shut down only the hardware affected and continue operation by utilizing the healthy system components All faults shall be annunciated at the PLC and the central station Diagnostic software shall be useable in conjunction with the portable tester

248 Accuracy

Controllers shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 025 percent of input span

25 PLC SOFTWARE

Existing PLC software is Citect by Schneider Electric and shall be utilized function seamlessly with the existing PLCSCADA System



251 Operating System

Utilize the existing Allen-Bradley DH+ operating system Programming methods and interactions shall be based on IEC 61131-3 A combination of the programming methods shall be possible within a single controller The operating system shall allow loading of software locally or from the central station and data files from the portable tester It shall also support data entry and diagnostics using an operator interface panel attached directly to the PLC

2511 Startup

Utilize the PLC with startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention including startup of all connected IO functions A PLC restart program based on detection of power failure at the PLC shall be included in the PLC software The restart program shall include start time delays between successive commands to prevent demand surges or overload trips

2512 Failure Mode

Upon failure for any reason each PLC shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all PLC outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device

252 Functions

The controller operating system shall be able to scan inputs control outputs and read and write to its internal memory in order to perform the required control as indicated in the sequence of control on the drawings The controller shall periodically perform self diagnostics to verify that it is functioning properly

2521 Analog Monitoring

The system shall measure and transmit all analog values including calculated analog points

2522 Logic (Virtual)

Logic (virtual) points shall be software points entered in the point database which are not directly associated with a physical IO function Logic (virtual) points shall be analog or digital points created by calculation from any combination of digital and analog points or other data having all the properties of real points including alarms without the associated hardware Logic (virtual) points shall be defined or calculated and entered into the database The calculated analog point shall have point identification in the same format as any other analog point

2523 State Variables

If an analog point represents more than two (up to 8) specific states each state shall be nameable For example a level sensor shall be displayed at its measured engineering units plus a state variable with named states usable in programs or for display such as low alarmlownormalhighhigh alarm



2524 Analog Totalization

Any analog point shall be operator assignable to the totalization program Up to eight analog values shall be totalized within a selectable time period

2525 Trending

Any analog or calculated point shall be operator assignable to the trend program Up to eight points shall be sampled at individually assigned intervals selectable between 1 minute and 2 hours A minimum of the most recent 128 samples of each trended point shall be stored The sample intervals shall be able to be defined modified or deleted online

253 Alarm Processing

PLC shall have alarm processing software for AI DI and PA alarms for all real and virtual points connected to that PLC

2531 Digital Alarms

Digital alarms are those abnormal conditions indicated by DIs as specified and shown The system shall automatically suppress analog alarm reporting associated with a digital point when that point is turned off

2532 Analog Alarms

Analog alarms are those conditions higher or lower than a defined value as measured by an AI Analog readings shall be compared to predefined high and low limits and alarmed each time a value enters or returns from a limit condition Unique high and low limits shall be assigned to each analog point in the system In control point adjustment (CPA) applications key the limit to a finite deviation traveling with the setpoint The system shall automatically suppress analog alarm reporting associated with an analog point when that analog point is turned off

254 Constraints

2541 Equipment Constraints Definitions

Each control point in the database shall have PLC resident constraints defined and entered by the Contractor including as applicable maximum starts (cycles) per hour minimum off time minimum on time high limit (value in engineering units) and low limit (value in engineering units)

2542 Constraints Checks

All control devices connected to the system shall have the PLC constraints checked and passed before each command is issued Each command point shall have unique constraints assigned High and low reasonableness values or one differential rate-of-change value shall be assigned to each AI Each individual point shall be capable of being selectively disabled by the operator from the central station

255 Control Sequences and Control Loops

Specific functions to be implemented are defined in individual system control sequences and database tables shown on the drawings and shall include as applicable the following functions PI control shall provide



proportional control and proportional plus integral control two position control shall provide control for a two state device by comparing a set point against a process variable and an established dead band floating point control shall exercise control when an error signal exceeds a selected dead band and shall maintain control until the error is within the dead band limits signal selection shall allow the selection of the highest or lowest analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to cascade analog values so that large numbers of inputs can be reduced to one or two outputs signal averaging shall allow the mathematical calculation of the average analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to weight the individual analog values so that the function output can be biased as necessary to achieve proper control reset function shall develop an AO based on up to two AIs and one operator specified reset schedule

256 Command Priorities

A scheme of priority levels shall be provided to prevent interaction of a command of low priority with a command of higher priority Override commands entered by the operator shall have higher priority than those emanating from applications programs

257 Resident Application Software

Utilize existing Citect applications program developed in accordance with paragraph Graphical Object Oriented Programming to achieve the sequences of operation parameters constraints and interlocks necessary to provide control of the process systems connected to the control system All application programs shall be resident in the PLC and shall execute in the PLC and shall coordinate with each other to insure that no conflicts or contentions remain unresolved

2571 Program Inputs and Outputs

Use program inputs listed for each application program to calculate the required program outputs Where specific program inputs are not available a default value or virtual point appropriate for the equipment being controlled and the proposed sequence of operation shall be provided to replace the missing input thus allowing the application program to operate

2572 Failure Mode

In the event of a PLC failure the controlled equipment shall continue to function in the failure mode specified

2573 Graphical Object Oriented Programming

The system includes Citect graphical object oriented programming functionwhich shall be used to create or modify all control sequences utilized in the new control panels This function shall reside in the central station to create modify and test software for control panel resident programs The graphical object oriented programming function shall provide programming elements to be connected together to create a logic diagram The diagram shall be compilable to produce executable code for the control panel The graphical object oriented programming function shall include elements necessary to create logic diagrams that represent sequences of operation Program elements shall be able to be combined into a custom



template which can then be used as a standard function Program checkout and debug facilities shall include display of dynamic andor simulated system variables and points on the programming screens The user shall be able to fix or force values of variables to enable program checkout duringdebugging The programming shall allow for the use of the portable testerfor loading files directly into the control panel uploading of existingcontrol panel programming and database information and downloading ofcontrol panel programming and database information

Existing graphical screens associated with screening and grit removal equipmentfacilities shall be modified or replaced to reflect function status and alarms associated with new system controls

26 CONTROL PANELS

261 Components

2611 Terminal Blocks

Terminal blocks shall comply with NEMA ICS 4 and UL 1059 Terminal blocks for conductors exiting control panels shall be two-way type with double terminals one for internal wiring connections and the other for external wiring connections Terminal blocks shall be made of bakelite or other suitable insulating material with full deep barriers between each pair of terminals A terminal identification strip shall form part of the terminal block and each terminal shall be identified by a number in accordance with the numbering scheme on the approved wiring diagrams

262 Panel Assembly

Control panels shall be modified to accommodate installation and mounting of devices as required Each panel shall be modified for control system wiring and communications system wiring to other control panels as necessary

263 Electrical Requirements

Wiring shall terminate inside the panel on terminal blocks Electrical work shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown on the drawings

27 CENTRAL STATION AND OPERATORS WORKSTATION EQUIPMENT

271 Workstation Computer

Interface new process control items with existing PLCSCADA SYSTEM and its HMI Modify or replace graphical screens associated with screening and grit removal systems to accommodate function status and alarms

28 FIELD TEST

The control system shall be tested following installation Written notification of planned testing shall be given to the Government at least 21 days prior to testing and in no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Government approval of the test procedures

281 Field Test Setup

Conduct the field test setup as specified to prove that performance of the



system satisfies all requirements of this project including system communications requirements in accordance with the approved test procedures The field test shall take place during regular daytime working hours on weekdays The field test setup shall include the following

Field Test

modified control panel

test set one of each type

portable tester one of each type

communications circuits one of each type and speed to be utilized in the proposed system including bridges modems encoderdecoders transceivers and repeaters

surge protection equipment for power communications IO functions and networks

IO functions sufficient to demonstrate the IO capability and system normal operation

software software required for proper operation of the proposed system

282 Field Test Procedure

Test procedures shall define the tests required to ensure that the systemmeets technical operational and performance requirements The testprocedures shall define milestones for the tests and identify simulation programs equipment and supplies required The test procedures shall provide for testing all control system capabilities and functions specified and shown The procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for test setup execution and evaluation of test results The test reports shall document results of the tests Reports shall be delivered to the Government within 7 days after completion of each test The procedures shall include the following

Test Procedure

equipment block diagram

hardware and software descriptions



Test Procedure

commands operator commands

IO functions test database points with failure modes

each type of digital and analog point in the test database

description

test equipment list

surge protection circuit diagrams

inputs required (IO point values and status) and corresponding expected results of each set of input values

for each application program

default values for the application program inputs not implemented or provided for in the contract documents for the application programs to be tested

283 Field Test Report

Original copies of data produced during the field test shall be delivered to the Government at the conclusion of the test The report shall be arranged so that commands responses and data acquired are correlated to allow logical interpretation of the data

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

311 Installation

Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and provide necessary interconnections services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system Adjust or replace devices not conforming to the required accuracies Replace factory sealed devices rather than adjusting

a Install instrumentation and communication equipment and cable grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops noise and surges from adversely affecting system operation

b Install wiring in exposed areas including low voltage wiring in conduit as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

c Submit detail drawings containing complete piping wiring schematic flow diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit Piping and Instrumentation (PampID) drawings (prepared using industry recognized device symbols clearly defined and describing piping designations to define the service and materials of individual pipe



segments and instrument tags employing Instrument Society of America suggested identifiers) Include in the Drawings as appropriate product specific catalog cuts a drawing index a list of symbols a series of drawings for each control system using abbreviations symbols nomenclature and identifiers as shown valve schedules compressed instrument air station schematics and ASME air storage tank certificates for each type and make of compressed instrument air station

3111 Isolation Penetrations and Clearance from Equipment

Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals are used for connection and support Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exteriors shall be made watertight Holes in concrete brick steel and wood walls shall be drilled or core drilled with proper equipment conduits installed through openings shall be sealed with materials which are compatible with existing materials Openings shall be sealed with materials which meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Installation shall provide clearance for control-system maintenance Control system installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance

3112 Device Mounting

Devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as shown Control devices to be installed in piping shall be provided with required gaskets flanges thermal compounds insulation piping fittings and manual valves for shutoff equalization purging and calibration Any deviations shall be documented and submitted to the Government for approval prior to mounting Damaged insulation shall be replaced or repaired after devices are installed to match existing work Damaged galvanized surfaces shall be repaired by touching up with zinc paint

312 Sequences of Operation

Study the operation and sequence of equipment controls provided by others as a part of the conditions report and note any deviations from the described sequences of operation on the contract drawings Perform necessary adjustments to make the equipment operate in an optimum manner and shall fully document changes made

32 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

Install equipment as specified as shown and as required in the manufacturers instructions for a complete and fully operational control system

321 Control Panels

Devices located in the control panels shall be as shown on the drawings or as needed to provide the indicated control sequences

33 WIRE CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE

331 Metering and Sensor Wiring 3311 Power Line Surge Protection

Control panels shall be protected from power line surges Protection



shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62411 and IEEE C62412 Fuses shall not be used for surge protection

34 SOFTWARE

Utilize Citect software to produce an operational control system including databases (for points specified and shown) operational parameters and system command and application programs Adjust tune debug and commission all software and parameters for controlled systems to assure proper operation in accordance with the sequences of operation and database tables

35 CONTROL DRAWINGS

Control drawings reproducible with corresponding CADD files shall be provided for equipment furnished and for interfaces to equipment at each respective equipment location Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system manually shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified for the instrumentation and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams Diagrams and instructions shall be submitted prior to posting The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system

36 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT

Provide personnel equipment instrumentation and supplies necessary to perform site testing The Government will witness the PVT and written permission shall be obtained from the Government before proceeding with the testing Original copies of data produced including results of each test procedure during PVT shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing prior to Government approval of the test The test procedures shall cover actual equipment and functions specified for the project

361 Testing Adjusting and Commissioning

After successful completion of the factory test as specified the Contractor will be authorized to proceed with the installation of the system equipment hardware and software Once the installation has been completed test adjust and commission each control loop and system in accordance with NIST SP 250 and shall verify proper operation of each item in the sequences of operation including hardware and software Calibrate field equipment including control devices adjust control parameters and logic (virtual) points including control loop setpoints gain constants constraints and verify data communications before the system is placed online Test installed ground rods as specified in IEEE 142 and submit certification stating that the test was performed in accordance with IEEE 142 Calibrate each instrumentation device connected to the control system control network by making a comparison between the reading at the device and the display at the workstation using a standard at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated Check each control point within the control system control network by making a comparison between the control command at the central station and field-controlled device Deliver trend logsgraphs of all points showing to the Government that stable control has been achieved Points on common systems shall be trended simultaneously One log shall be provided showing concurrent samples taken once a minute for a total of 4 hours One log shall be



provided showing concurrent samples taken once every 30 minutes for a total of 24 hours Verify operation of systems in the specified failure modes upon Control system network failure or loss of power and verify that systems return to control system control automatically upon a resumption of control system network operation or return of power Deliver a report describing results of functional tests diagnostics calibrations and commissioning procedures including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated tested adjusted and commissioned and is ready to begin the PVT The report shall also include a copy of the approved PVT procedure

362 Performance Verification Test (PVT)

Submit test procedures for the PVT The test procedure shall describe all tests to be performed and other pertinent information such as specialized test equipment required and the length of the PVT The test procedures shall explain in detail step-by-step actions and the expected results to demonstrate compliance with all the requirements of the drawings and this specification The test procedure shall be site specific and based on the inputs and outputs required calculated points and the sequence of control Refer to the actions and expected results to demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequence of control Include a list of the equipment to be used during the testing plus manufacturers name model number equipment function the date of the latest calibration and the results of the latest calibration

Demonstrate that the completed Control system complies with the contract requirements All physical and functional requirements of the project including communication requirements shall be demonstrated and shown Demonstrate that each system operates as required in the sequence of operation The PVT as specified shall not be started until after receipt of written permission by the Government based on the written report including certification of successful completion of testing adjusting and commissioning as specified and upon successful completion of training as specified Upon successful completion of the PVT furnish test reports and other documentation

363 Endurance Test

Use the endurance test to demonstrate the overall system reliability of the completed system The endurance test shall be conducted in phases The endurance test shall not be started until the Government notifies the Contractor in writing that the PVT is satisfactorily completed training as specified has been completed outstanding deficiencies have been satisfactorily corrected and that the Contractor has permission to start the endurance test Provide an operator to man the system 8 hours per day during daytime operations including weekends and holidays during Phase I endurance testing in addition to any Government personnel that may be made available The Government may terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified Upon termination of testing by the Government or by the Contractor commence an assessment period as described for Phase II Upon successful completion of the endurance test deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the Government prior to acceptance of the system

3631 Phase I (Testing)

The test shall be conducted 24 hours per day 7 days per week for 7 consecutive calendar days including holidays and the system shall



operate as specified Make no repairs during this phase of testing unless authorized by the Government in writing

3632 Phase II (Assessment)

After the conclusion of Phase I identify failures determine causes of failures repair failures and deliver a written report to the Government The report shall explain in detail the nature of each failure corrective action taken results of tests performed and shall recommend the point at which testing should be resumed After delivering the written report convene a test review meeting at the job site to present the results and recommendations to the Government The meeting shall not be scheduled earlier than 5 business days after receipt of the report by the Government As a part of this test review meeting demonstrate that failures have been corrected by performing appropriate portions of the performance verification test The Government reserves the right to cancel the test review meeting if no failures or deficiencies occur during the Phase I testing If the Government chooses to do so the Contractor will be notified in writing Based on the Contractors report and the test review meeting the Government will determine if retesting is necessary and the restart point The Government reserves the right to require that the Phase I test be totally or partially rerun Do not commence any required retesting until after receipt of written notification by the Government After the conclusion of any retesting which the Government may require the Phase II assessment shall be repeated as if Phase I had just been completed

3633 Exclusions

The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures resulting from the following Outage of the main power supply in excess of the capability of any backup power source provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the control system performed as specified Failure of a Government furnished communications link provided that the PLC automatically and correctly operates in the stand-alone mode as specified and that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment installation or software Failure of existing Government owned equipment provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment installation or software

37 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES

Obtain the services of a manufacturers representative experienced in the installation adjustment and operation of the equipment specified The representative shall supervise the installing adjusting and testing of the equipment

38 FIELD TRAINING

Field training oriented to the specific system shall be provided for designated personnel Furnish a copy of the training manual for each trainee plus two additional copies Manuals shall include an agenda the defined objectives for each lesson and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson Furnish audiovisual equipment and other training supplies and materials Copies of the audiovisuals shall be delivered with the printed training manuals The Government reserves the right to videotape training sessions for later use A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction excluding lunchtime Monday



through Friday during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility Submit the training manual and schedule to receive approval from the Government at least 30 days before the training

381 Preliminary Operator Training

Prior to the start of field testing preliminary operator training shall be taught at the project site for 2 consecutive training days Upon completion of this course each student using appropriate documentation should be able to perform elementary operations with guidance and describe the general hardware architecture and functionality of the system This course shall include general system architecture functional operation of the system including workstations operator commands application programs control sequences and control loops database entry and modification reports generation alarm reporting diagnostics and historical files

382 Additional Operator Training

Following the field testing additional classroom training for operators shall be taught for 2 consecutive training days individual instruction sessions of 4-hour periods in the morning (or afternoon) of the same weekday for 2 consecutive days and an additional 1 day classroom session for answering operator questions Individual instruction shall consist of hands-on training under the constant monitoring of the instructor Classroom training shall include instruction on the specific hardware configuration of the installed control system and specific instructions for operating the installed system Schedule activities during this period so that the specified amount of time on the equipment will be available for each student The final session will address specific topics that the students need to discuss and to answer questions concerning the operation of the system Upon completion of the course the students should be fully proficient in system operation and have no unanswered questions regarding operation of the installed control system Each student should be able to start the system operate the system recover the system after a failure and describe the specific hardware architecture and operation of the system and be fully proficient in all system operations Report the skill level of each student at the end of this course

383 Maintenance Training

Following the endurance test a minimum period of five training days shall be provided by a factory representative or a qualified Contractor trainer for ten designated personnel on maintenance of the equipment The training shall include physical layout of each piece of hardware calibration procedures preventive maintenance procedures schedules troubleshooting diagnostic procedures and repair instructions

39 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA REQUIREMENTS

Outline the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the instructions layout wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features

List routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and trouble shooting guides



310 TABLES

TABLE I

PLC-1 ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION STATESPAN TYPE REMARK

Power On Running DI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1

Forward Running DI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1

Fault Fail DI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1

High Water Alarm DI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1





Upstream Water Level 00 - 70 FT AI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1

Downstream Water Level

00 - 70 FT AI Main Control Panel - Bar Screen 1






TABLE I



Power On Running DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

Start Solenoid Running DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

Common Fault Fail DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

In Auto Auto DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

Grit King 1 in Auto Status DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal




Grit King 1 Underflow

Open DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal








Closed DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal



TABLE I









Grit Classifier 1 Run DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal


Grit Classifier 1 Fault DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal


Grit Conveyor Run DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal




SECTION 41 21 00

SCREENING amp GRIT CONVEYORS0617

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)

AGMA 6013 (2016) Standard for Industrial Enclosed Gear Drives





AWS A59A59M (2012) Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and Rods


ASME B201 (2015) Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment


ASTM A108 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Bar Carbon and Alloy Cold-Finished


ASTM A194A194M (2016a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service or Both






ASTM A48A48M (2003 R 2012) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

ASTM C581 (2015) Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service

12 DEFINITIONS

This section includes material and installation of serpentine belt conveyors for screenings and grit Conveyors include motor drive idlers take-up belt scraper drip pan plows structural steel supports safety equipment and other appurtenances to provide a complete and ready to operate system

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings

Submit dimensional drawings Show relationship between conveyors and the equipment feeding them such as bar screen washer compactor and grit washerdewatering screws Submit manufacturers catalog data and detail drawings showing all conveyor parts and described by material of construction specification (such as AISI ASTM SAE or CDA) and grade or type Show coatings Identify each conveyor by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain

SD-03 Product Data

Conveyor Belt Material

Drive Sprocket and Take-up Sprocket

Conveyor Gear Drive

SD-05 Design Data

Design Calculations

Seismic and Wind load calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer


Provide manufacturers installation instructions




Provide a manufacturers field report certifying that the conveyor is installed correctly


Maintenance Manuals

Five copies of operation and five copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished Once complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance Operation manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the operation manuals the manufacturers name model number parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features List in the maintenance manuals routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides Maintenance manuals shall include equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training course


Ship equipment material and spare parts complete except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection of components Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and piece of equipment for which intended Store equipment according to manufacturers instructions

15 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty document for a three year period from the date of the acceptance of the work

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide and test troughed type conveying equipment and appurtenances as indicated and specified Unit shall collect screenings or dewatered grit as shown on the drawings and transport it to dumpsters Conveyor controls shall be integrated with the bar screenwasher compactor and grit collectiongrit washing equipment as indicated


Coordinate with equipment so that conveyors receive material to be conveyed without problems Coordinate discharge with receiving equipment Coordinate drip pan drains with building drains as indicated


Screenings and grit conveying equipment shall transport screenings and dewatered grit from location of equipment to discharge indicated Conveying equipment shall be capable of handling capacity range and range of moisture content of material continuously Conveying equipment shall



be capable of being cleaned of all material and shall continuously and substantially remove material that would otherwise cling to the belt on the return side Material will tend to cling at normal operating conditions Conveying equipment shall not spatter or drip material

22 GENERAL

Submit seven copies of shop drawings and five copies of maintenance manuals for the conveyor equipment in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

23 MANUFACTURED UNITS

Conveyor system shall consist of conveyor belt pans tracks and supports take-up and drive stations The conveyor belt material shall have a watertight modular conveying surface with a 20-degree troughed cross-section Each modular conveying section shall have a convolution that permits the assembled belt to make continuous vertical horizontal and helical turns and that will flatten out as it goes over the terminal for scraping Reinforce the modular belt pan section with nonmetallic stiffeners molded into each modular belt section to achieve troughing Design the conveyor so that the moving parts of the system except the drive and take-up stations will pass a single designated point along the conveying path which may be used for maintenance andor service of the unit Provide list of proposed products for the conveyor components shall include track sections supports frame drip pan belt motor gear reducer chain sprockets and skirtboards Comply with ASME B201 Maximum belt speed shall be 30 fpm

24 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND SUPPORTS

Provide design calculations for the girt conveyor Design frame supports with stiffeners and top flanges anchor bolts and lifting system per the following requirements

a Seismic Design Parameters - Conform to ICC IBC (and North Carolina Building Code) Section 1613 and ASCE 7 Chapter 15

Si per USGS ASCE 7 Centroid Sa data

Seismic Importance Factor I 150

R 3

b Wind Design Parameter - Conform to IBCNorth Carolina Building Code

Wind Velocity mph 130

I 115

Exposure Category C

Adjustment Factor 121 per ASCE 7 Figure 6-2

c Weight W Weight of conveyor system plus 60 pounds per linear foot load on belt

d An unreinforced concrete housekeeping pad above the reinforced concrete structural slab shall not be considered to have structural



value in the design of the anchor bolts Tension and shear values for drilled or epoxied anchor shall be ICBO approved

25 EQUIPMENT

Performance conditions and design data shall be as shown in Tables that follow

Screenings Conveyor No 1

Type Integral Pickup and Horizontal Run

Capacity Tons per hour

Service Outdoor environment with temperature - 10 Degrees F to 100 Degrees F

Elevation 30 MSL +-

Relative Humidity Up to 100

Motor Type TEFC

Motor Horse Power (Minimum) 3 HP - minimum

Material Carried Loose screenings from raw wastewater





Elevation 30 MSL +-


Motor Type TEFC


Material Carried Compact screenings from raw wastewater

Grit Conveyor





Grit Conveyor



Elevation 30 MSL +-


Motor Type TEFC


Material Carried Grit from raw wastewater

26 COMPONENTS

Drive sprocket and take-up sprocket shall be 8-tooth 20 inches in diameter and 12 inch thick Fabricate sprockets from Type 316 stainless steel The guide channel shall be an ultra high molecular weight polyethylene track (formed with minimum 1 inch thick sides 38-inch thick base and 58 inch thick top caps) to guide the 4 inch pitch steel chain The guide channel shall be permanently attached to a steel I-beam structure Provide 10-gauge skirtboards on both sides of the conveyor at the loading point only The skirtboards shall be supported with aluminum support bands and retaining bars shall be 019 inch thick minimum Provide a 019 inch thick aluminum support bracket for each band Provide stainless steel nuts bolts and washers Provide splash guards (12-gauge minimum thickness) on both sides along the full length of the conveyor

Belt shall have a minimum overall width of 24 inches Provide a minimum carry width of 22 inches design the belt for a minimum working tension of 210 pounds per inch of width the conveying surface shall consist of individually replaceable modular belt pan sections of molded plastic fastened every 8 inches and supported by a steel attachment welded to a case hardened steel chain having a breaking strength of 32000 pounds that guides the conveying surface Each modular belt pan section shall have a convolution at least 1-12 inches high permanently molded into the rubber The dual flex steel chain links with alternate single and double bars shall be joined by pins that are slightly loose in the single bar link holes so the chain can be turned in two or more directions The dual flex steel chain links with alternate single and double bars shall be joined by pins that are slightly loose in the single bar link holes so the chain can be turned in two or more directions

The belt take-up station shall consist of a tail sprocket a constant pressure spring-loaded tensioner and track all mounted in a structural steel frame ready for installation Furnish Type 316 stainless steel expanded guards around the take-up sprocket

Provide a Type 316 stainless steel scraping mechanism with a replaceable rubber strip to remove material from the conveying surface at the discharge end of the conveyor

Provide a minimum 18-gauge stainless steel enclosure safety guards for



exposed gears chain sprockets flexible couplings and V-belts Guards shall be rigidly supported and designed to permit easy removal Provide expanded metal shield around the take-up sprocket

Provide a motor and gear reducer to drive the belt Conveyor gear drive shall be of the helical and spiral-bevel type or of the worm-gear type The thermal rating shall equal or exceed the mechanical rating Spiral bevels shall be heavy-duty right-angel construction using only case hardened matched and lapped gears Spiral bevels shall be manufactured to AGMA 6013 Quality 10 level per the AGMA 6013 Classification Manuals 2009 and 2011 Helical gears and worms shall be through hardened or if case hardened shall be either ground after hardening or 100 analytically checked and documented to AGMA 6013 Quality 10 levels Gear drive housings shall be either steel ( ASTM A36A36M or ASTM A108) or cast iron (ASTM A48A48M Class 30 or higher) and shall be fully stress relieved prior to machining Drive housings shall be pressure tested Drives shall be test run at the factory for one hour while filled with oil Minimum AGMA 6013 rating for the gear drive shall be 15 for continuous 24-hour per day service Provide two antifriction bearing assemblies for the gear drive One assembly shall be free to float within the frame to carry radial thrust only Design the other bearing assembly to carry both radial and axial thrust Bearings may be either ball or tapered roller type Bearing life shall be a minimum of 20000 hours per the AFBMA L-10 rating Bearings shall be oil automatically lubricated via 120 VAC solenoid controlled oiler Oiler solenoid shall open when the conveyor motor is operating and shall close when the conveyor motor is off

Provide chain and sprockets with OSHA safety guard for reduction to final belt speed Provide each drive with a shear pin and slip clutch to protect the drive in the event of overloading

27 MATERIALS

Stainless steel members shall have a minimum thickness of 14 inch with minimum diameter bolts of 12 inch All bearings with high pressure grease fittings shall have extended tubing where necessary for greasing from the accessible side of the conveyor

Materials of construction for the conveyor shall be as follows


Skirtboards belt scrapers frame and supports shafts drip pans guards adjustable motor bases all-thread for motor bases expanded metal guards splash guards take-up assemblies

Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M

Type 316 or 316L

Grease fittings Stainless Steel ASTM A276A276M

Type 303




Screws keys bolts nuts Stainless Steel ASTM A193A193M ASTM A194A194M

Type 316

28 ACCESSORIES

Provide cable-operated safety stop switch equipped with positive safety lock complete with 3 32-inch orange vinyl coated 7 x 7 preformed stainless steel aircraft-type cable on all accessible sides of conveyor belt

Provide full width hoods on portion of conveyor located outdoors except where equipment discharges onto conveyor Hoods shall be 14 inch thick (minimum) FRP or minimum 004 inch thick aluminum For FRP hoods use a resin resistant to moist hydrogen sulfide gas (up to 5000 ppm) attack as determined by ASTM C581 Construct hoods in accordance with ASTM D3982 For the hood aluminum support bands and retaining bars shall be 019 inch thick minimum Provide a 019 inch thick aluminum support bracket for each band Provide Type 316 stainless steel nuts bolts and washers Provide the following spare parts for each conveyor unit


10 Belt pans with hardware

2 Chain master links

3 Thrust bearings

2 Rubber scraper blades

2 Radial bearings

6 Sets Shear pins


29 CONTROL

291 Screenings Conveyor No 1

Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the bar screen control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR


Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency



Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the compactor control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR

293 Grit Conveyor

Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the grit control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 23 00 GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Welder qualification shall comply with AWS D16 Welding rod and electrodes shall comply with AWS A54A54M Bare wire shall comply with AWS A59A59M Welds shall be continuous along the full length of contact of adjoining members Do not use skip or spot welding

Install the equipment in strict conformance with the reviewed shop drawings and the manufacturers written instructions Install equipment to interface items



Provide equipment manufacturers services at the jobsite for the minimum labor days listed below travel time excluded

Three labor days to check the installation and advise during start-up testing and adjustment of the equipment

One labor day to instruct the Owners personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment


331 Demonstration

Operate the belt conveyor for a minimum of 8 consecutive hours for 3 days to assure proper installation Check for binding sticking and overloading and repair all malfunctions Simulate conditions to initiate automatic operation and verify that the controls are operating normally

34 PROTECTION

Shop apply to all exterior ferrous surfaces a high solids (69) polyamidoamine self priming epoxy applying three coats of 4 to 6 mils per coat Color to be selected by the Owner Top coat the epoxy with an opaque polyurethane coating to prevent chalking Do not coat stainless steel




SECTION 46 20 20

MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR0211

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

ABMA 11 (2014) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

ABMA 9 (2015) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings


ASCE 7-10 (2010 Errata 2011 Supp 1 2013) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures



ASTM A47A47M (1999 R 2014) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings





NEMA ICS 3 (2005 R 2010) Medium-Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 V AC










UL 98 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Materials And Equipment

Detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials including manufacturers descriptive and technical literature catalog cuts and installation instructions Detail drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams equipment layout and anchorage and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit

SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 1 month prior to equipment start up The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service

Framed Instructions

SD-06 Test Reports

Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic as specified

Tests

Test reportsupon completion and testing of the installed system in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to provide compliance with the specified performance criteria Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls


Operating and Maintenance Instructions



Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides The instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as installed

SD-11 Closeout Materials



Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather humidity and temperature variation dirt and dust or other contaminants

14 EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish a complete set of manufacturers recommended standard spare parts

a Manufacturer shall provide any speciality toolds and recommended spare parts required for maintaining the equipment as follows

1 Drive Clevis Pin (1)

2 SnapRetaining Rings (10)

3 Link Clevis Pins (4)

4 Scraper Bolts (4)

5 Scraper Nuts (4)

6 Snap Ring Tool (1)

7 Never Seez 1 oz tube (1)

b Manufacturer shall provide one tube of Multi-Purpose grease which is a 5-year supply of lubrication required for maintaining all bar screen components

PART 2 PRODUCTS


a Provide material and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products that conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified and that essentially duplicate equipment that has been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is in the opinion of the Contracting Officer reasonably convenient to the site

b Each major item of equipment shall have manufacturers name address and catalog or model number on a plate securely attached to item A 316 stainless steel engraved nameplate with manufacturers name or



trademark shall be permanently attached to the washpress compactor and bar screen

c Fully enclose moving parts of the equipment such as drive chains and sprockets in removable guards Equipment above the level of the sewage-carrying channel shall be fully enclosed in a brushed satin finish 14 gauge 304 stainless steel sheet steel or housing Housing shall be provided with a sufficient number of doors or removable panels to ensure ready access to any part of equipment for repairs replacements or cleaning The joint(s) between the housing and the concrete foundation shall be made leak-proof after equipment and enclosure installation and the Contractor shall also install as required field-fit closeout platinggrating to the washpress compactor and bar screen

d Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials including manufacturers descriptive and technical literature catalog cuts and installation instructions Detail drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams equipment layout and anchorage and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit

e Project ton include two catenary style mechanically cleaned fine bar screens to discharge to existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 Screenings Conveyor No 1 will feed a single proposed Wash PressCompactor The proposed Wash PressCompactor will discharge existing Screenings Conveyor No 2 which feeds the compacted and dewatered debris into an existing solids waste container Existing and proposed components shall be integrated into a seamless working design provided by a single manufacturer

211 Bearings

ABMA 9 and ABMA 11

212 Iron Steel and Miscellaneous Metal

2121 Miscellaneous Metal

Bolts nuts anchors washers and other types of supports necessary for the installation of equipment shall be of steel or 316 stainless steel

2122 Malleable Iron

ASTM A47A47M grade No 32510 minimum

2123 Structural Stainless Steel

ASTM A276A276M

213 Motors Electric

NEMA 250 NEMA ICS 1 NEMA ICS 3 NEMA ICS 4 NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA MG 1

214 Motor Controls

NEMA ICS 2



215 Switches Enclosed

UL 98

22 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide electrical equipment and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Electrical characteristics shall be as indicated Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not shown on electrical plans shall be provided under this section of the specification

221 Electric Motors

Provide equipment complete with inverter duty rated motors of the EPNV ball-bearing squirrel-cage induction type with a maximum speed not to exceed 1800 rpm Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to drive equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding rating shown on nameplate attached to the motor

222 Motor Controls

A single integrated main control panel shall be provided that integrates operation of the bar screens existing screenings conveyors and wash presscompactor The Main Control Panel shall be remotely located from the bar screens in an ambient controlled instrumentation room The main controls shall include both PLC and relay-based controls to monitor differential water level in the bar screen channel and operate the screens in multiple operator-selected modes The Main Control Panel shall house the variable frequently drives provide a main fusible disconnect hand-off-auto selector switches E-stop button run time meters and indicatorsalarms as specified Local Control Push Button stations shall be provided at each bar screen to provide forward jog reverse and E-stop buttons to meet required safety codes

23 MECHANICALLY-CLEANED BAR SCREEN

Bar screen shall consist of a stationary bar screen a screen rake a catenary style rake mechanism operated by an electric drive unit and a dead plate and rake-cleaning device Equipment shall be installed so as not to obstruct the flow of sewage to bar screen Unless otherwise specified metal that is submerged in the sewage-carrying channel or that comes in contact with sewage shall the manufacturers highest grade of stainless steel and as a minimum the grade specified herein

231 Bar Screen

Each bar screen shall be suitable for installation in a rectangular channel 6-feet 0-inches wide by 7-feet 0-inches deep and shall be designed for handling sewage flows as follows

a Minimum 25 MGD

b Average 15 MGD

c Maximum 24 MGD

d Total 2 bar screens



e Bar rack spacing 38 inch clear opening

f Setting inclination 75 degrees from horizontal

232 Screen Rake Scrapers

Scrapers shall be designed to rake up screenings collected on the bar screen and in the openings between bars and to convey screenings to existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 Scrapers shall be of 304 stainless steel and UV stable UHMW-PE materials Scraper teeth shall be spaced so as to pass between bars of the screen Scraper plate s shall be easily removable and replaceable

2321 Rake Mechanism

a Mechanism shall be endless catenary-chain type and shall include parts and accessories necessary for a complete operating unit Parts of the mechanism shall be amply proportioned for stresses that may occur during fabrication erection and operation Individual parts that are alike in each unit shall be interchangeable A VFD is included as an electronic mechanism and shall be provided for overload protection RakeScraper speed shall not exceed 28 inches per minute at standard operating speed of 12 rpm Rake mechanism shall be provided with a complete and adequate system of lubrication to moving parts subject to wear Bearings shall be grease- or oil-lubricated except submerged bearings which shall be of alloy-bearing metal designed to operate without any lubrication and to prevent accumulation of deposits Bearings shall have a 247365 L10 life of 20 years

b The mechanically cleaned bar screen system shall be fully automatic and shall consist of the following components

1 Bar Rack - 316 Stainless Steel

2 Dead Plate - 316 Stainless Steel

3 Discharge Chute - 316 Stainless Steel

4 RakeScraper Assembly - 316 Stainless SteelUHMW-PE

5 Frame Supports and Guides - 316 Stainless Steel

6 Drive Machinery - 316 Stainless Steel

7 Link System - 316 Stainless Steel

8 Electrical Cable Assembly shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor

9 Electrical Controls and Control Panel - NEMA 12 painted carbon steel

10 Anchor Bolts - 316 Stainless Steel

11 Screen Enclosure - 316 Stainless Steel

In addition any other components required to provide a system which



will be capable of fully performing the functions specified

c The design shall be such to ensure that all planned maintenance can be accomplished at the operating floor level or above No part of the drive system including sprockets shall be located below the water surface at maximum design flow

d All platforms ladders or other safety devices required as a part of this equipment design shall be in accordance with applicable OSHA Regulations and be provided by the Contractor

e The device output shaft rotation shall be constant and in one direction during normal operation in order to reduce maintenance requirements

f All equipment shall be designed and built for 247 continuous service and for moderate shock without overheating excessive vibration or strain

g Design screens to comply with the STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND SUPPORTS article of this specification

2322 Frame Assembly

a The side frames shall be formed from plate with a minimum of four engineered bends to provide a rigid assembly capable of withstanding all operating forces when installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

b The frame shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel plate having a minimum thickness of 316 inches The frame shall extend fully from the bottom of the channel to the top of the bar screen assembly Channel width is 6 feet 0 inches

c Link slide assembly shall be provided per manufacturer standard design and shall be constructed of UV Stable UHMW PE rollers and 316 stainless steel supports and components

2323 RakeScraper Assembly

a Scrapers shall be spaced 21 inches apart To provide long product life the scraper shall move at no greater than 28 inches per minute at standard operating speed of 12 rpm Staging Scrapers and Thru Bar Scrapers shall be a maximum ratio of 31 per manufacturer recommendations At least one scraper every 84 inches shall fully penetrate the bar screen cleaning all three sides of the bars as well as through to the cross members

1 Staging Scrapers shall be 1 inch thick x 4 inches x screen width UV Stable UHMW-PE with a serrated edge

2 Thru Bar Scrapers shall be minimum 375 inch thick x 5 inches x screen width 316 stainless steel

b The equipment shall have multiple scrapers on the bar screen at one time cleaning continuously from bottom to top the entire width of the bar screen

c All structural components of the rake assembly shall be 316 stainless



steel

2324 Drive Assembly

a Each mechanically cleaned bar screen unit shall operate independently and shall have its own drive unit and driven components The drive head shall be located at the top of the mechanically cleaned bar screen Drive sprockets and end castings shall be cast 304 stainless steel Drive shaft shall be 316 stainless steel

b Gearbox shall be shaft-mounted right angle type and include spiral bevel gearing The output shaft speed shall be controlled by a vector type inverter or per rake manufacturers recommendation It shall have at least a 152 or great service factor based on machine torque requirements The gearbox shall be grease filled Oil filled gearboxes are not allowed

c The motor shall be AC induction type inverter duty 1 phase 120240 or 3 phase 240480 volt and mounted to the gear reducer The motor shall be 12 hp designed for 1800 rpm base speed and rated for Class I Groups C amp D Class II Groups F amp G environments The motor shall have an EPNV enclosure NEMA design B with a 56C frame size Service factor shall be 10 or greater Class F insulation and be optimized for IGBT type inverters The motor must be UL listed and designed for continuous operation

d Motor shall have built in normally closed thermostat to protect from overheating that is to be field wired to corresponding terminal in control panel for redundant (ambient) overload protection

e Bearing shall be greased ball bearing type non self-aligning sealed and lubricated and shall have a 247365 L10 life of 20 years when in compliance with stated OampM recommendations Non-sealed bearings are not acceptable

f Speed reducer shall be a double-reduction cycloidal style and shall comply with all applicable AGMA Standards The speed reducer shall be capable of a 41 speed range with variable output speeds between 050 to 22 output rpm (in high flow conditions) The speed reducer shall produce an output torque of 11417 in lb and have a gear ratio of 8091

2325 Bar Rack

a The bar rack shall consist of equally spaced parallel bars having 38-inch clear spacing between each bar The bars shall be straight and inclined at 75 degrees above the horizontal plans

b A stainless steel channel bottom plate shall be an integral part of the bar screen assembly to fully engage scrapers in the bar screen at the base of the unit and assure that the raking mechanism reaches the bottom of the screen to prevent debris accumulation

c Screen bars shall be 316L stainless steel and be tear-shaped with a hydraulic coefficient shape factor of 076 and the minimum dimensions of 025 inch x 075 inch x 013 inch Bars shall be individually replaceable without welding



2326 Dead Plate

a Dead plate shall be 025 inch thick 316 stainless steel The dead plate shall be flat and true span the entire width of the unit and transition from bar screen to discharge point

b Designs in which the dead plate does not extend to the point of discharge shall not be acceptable

2327 Discharge Chute

a The discharge chute shall be 11ga ( 012 inch ) 304 stainless steel The discharge chute shall be bolted to the dead plate and shall be designed to allow debris to be transferred from discharge point into the debris containment

b The rake assembly shall be designed to each a predetermined discharge height above the floor elevation A discharge chute positioned at the top of the dead plate shall be a part of each bar screen

c Discharge chute shall be fully enclosed

2328 Wiper Assembly

a A 316 stainless steel and UV Stable UHMW-PE debris blade assembly which does not require a separate drive shall be installed to assist in removing debris from the scraper on the mechanically cleaned bar screen unit as recommended by the manufacturer Hydraulic shock or spring controlled debris blade mechanisms are not acceptable

2329 Side Frame Enclosures

a The bar screen shall be provided with removable enclosures encompassing both the upstream and downstream portions of the bar screen side frame

b A 14ga 4 brushed satin finish 316 SSTL Enclosure shall be installed to cover the screen above the operating deck level Front Enclosure shall have removable panels for access to equipment Removable panels shall be 16ga 316 SSTL and shall be provided with knurled knobs for no tool required access Rear Enclosure shall have hinged removable doors and shall be secured with a lift-slide-latch handle Rear removable door shall include an integral viewing door that shall be secured with a lift-slide-latch handle All fasteners hinges and latches shall be 316 stainless steel

233 Controls

Controls for each rake shall be in an enclosure provided by the bar screen manufacturer The bar screen manufacturer shall be responsible for proper sizing and function of the controls at 480V unless specified otherwise

a Main control panel shall be capable of operating within a temperature range between 35 degrees F and 104 degrees F

b Controls shall be designed to accept incoming power supply and shall include a step-down transformer as needed to achieve 120V



c Control panel shall be constructed to meet the appropriate NEMA classification requirements and will include a main lockable disconnect The panel shall be constructed by a UL certified control panel build facility to support UL labeling

d Controls shall be tested prior to shipment The rake manufacturer shall verify all overload settings in the rake controller to insure proper overload and speed settings required for the application are properly programmed

e Control panel shall be wired complete with a minimum of 16 MTW wire in the appropriate colors for the circuits being supplied 120VAC control shall be red grounded AC neutral shall be white DC control shall be blue DC neutral shall be blue with a white tracer equipment ground shall be green and all incoming and outgoing external power source wires shall be a yellow configuration All AC power wiring shall be a minimum of 12 black All wires shall be labeled at both ends with heat-shrink wire markers Internal panel wiring shall be contained in non-flammable covered wire way

f Panel and all panel mounted devices shall be labeled with engraved ID markers that reference back to the system schematics Tags shall be white with black core engraved as required

g All field wiring and power cables between the bar screen Main Control Panel and the Local Push Button Station shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor Motor cables shall be VFD rated to accommodate required length from panel to bar screen

2331 Main Control Panel

a Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 painted for indoor installation

b Enclosure shall not be located in an explosive environment

c Main Control Panel shall be designed with a SCCR rating of 18KA at 480VAC minimum and labeled as such unless otherwise specified

d All terminals utilized in the main panel shall be 600V rated terminals and 20 spare terminal space shall be provided for any potential future revisions

e The Main Control Panel shall include at a minimum the following

1 Main fusible disconnect with lockable operator unless otherwise specified

2 Physical or virtual HandOffAuto (HOA) Selector and PushPull E-Stop button

3 Elapsed run-time meter

4 Indication for Power On Forward and necessary faults

f PLC Based Controls shall include the following

1 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)



3 HMI programmable functions as required

4 SCADA Interlocking via Hard Contact andor Ethernet Communications Protocols as required

2332 Local Control Push Button Station

a Enclosure shall be NEMA 79 rated

b Local station shall be mounted within 10 feet or as close to the equipment as safely possible and be field wired by the Electrical Subcontractor to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

c The remote push button station shall include Forward Jog Reverse and E-Stop buttons

2333 Instrumentation

Each screen assembly shall have a separate level system that shall be installed and field wired by the Electrical Contractor per the manufacturers instructions The level transducertransmitter shall be remotely mounted on the headworks structure remotely and wired to the control panel

a Differential Level Control The bar screen main control panel shall be fitted with a PLC and built-in HMI The PLC shall be compatible with the existing WWTP SCADA PLC which is Allen-Bradley 540 using Citect software in order to facilitate communications status signals alarms levels etc via dry contact discrete and analog signals to the WWTP SCADAEthernet System

The control panel shall transmit the following dry contact signals

Discrete Outputs

1 Bar Screen 1 - Power On

2 Bar Screen 1 - Forward

3 Bar Screen 1 - Fault




7 Bar Screen 1 - High Water


Analog Outputs

1 Bar Screen 1 - Upstream Water Level

2 Bar Screen 1 - Downstream Water Level





The control panel shall receive analog water level signals from the upstream and downstream level transducerstransmitters to provide the following primary functions

1 Control operations of the two (2) mechanical bar screens

2 Provide openclose signals and timing function to control automatic action of two (2) motorized slide gates located upstream of each bar screen

3 Provide automatic run signal to Screenings Conveyor No 1 which receives screenings discharge from each bar screen

4 Provide run signal to washer compactor main control panel

5 Provide high water level alarm to SCADA and local alarm beacon

The PLC shall include differential setpoints used to automatically startstop the rake based on the headloss across the screen The PLC shall also allow for single or dual screen operation as well as alternation to equalize run times The variable frequency drive shall provide for rake speed adjustment

The logic shall include multiple differential water level setpoints as follows in order to control operation of the screens and motorized slide gates Setpoints shall be operator definable at the OIT

1 Low Rake Off setpoint to avoid intermittent screen startingstopping intermittent opening and closing of slide gates and to allow alternation between the lead and lag screens

2 Lead Screen On Low Speed

3 Lead Screen On High Speed

4 Lead and Lag Screens On Low Speed

5 Lead and Lag Screens On High Speed

6 High Water Alarm

Cycle timing logic shall also be included in the program to function in parallel with the differential level control logic for optimal rake run time

Under normal operating conditions the lead slide gate will be open and the associated lead screen will be called to run at low speed when the lead screen water level differential is achieved Should water level continue to rise the lead screen VFD will increase to its maximum speed setting when the associated water level differential is achieved Under high flow conditions should the water level continue to rise the lag slide gate will open and its associated lag screen will be called to run The VFD for both screens will operate at low speed If water level differential continues to increase then both VFDs will increase to their maximum speed setting when the associated



differential level is achieved Should the high water level be achieved the control panel will convey an alarm signal to the WWTP SCADA system as well as activate a local beacon located at the headworks structure When both slide gates are open and dual screens are called to run they will operate in tandem until the low water Rake Off setpoint is achieved If the parallel cycle time has expired then the lead slide gate will close and its associated bar screen will deactivate while the alternate slide gate and screen will become the lead If the cycle time has not yet expired both gates will remain open but the alternate screen will become the lead

Level sensing instrumentation shall be installed upstream and downstream from the rakes and shall be the following type

Two (2) Siemens Hydroranger 200 HMI with (4) Ultrasonic Level Transducers (two transducers per each transmitter) Transducers shall be installed upstream and downstream of each rake at least 1 foot above the highest anticipated water elevation and the beam angle shall not have obstructions between the transducer face and the water surfaces

b Float Switches Two normally open direct acting float switches shall be provided for installation upstream of each bar screen The float switches shall be compatible without modification to the control system and shall be capable of operating at temperatures from zero degrees F to 180 degrees F

Each float shall have molded polyethylene body internal redundant polyurethane foam flotation and potted switch and cable connections The cable shall be fine-stranded KAWG 18 with heavy-duty synthetic rubber jacket and supplied in ample length to provide a continuous unspliced run to a waterproof junction box The Contractor shall supply clamps and brackets for mounting the float in the channel

The switch within the float shall be mercury-to-electrode tilt type normally open contact for a pump-down application ONOFF operation shall occur on differentials of less than 1 inch of liquid level change The liquid level float switches shall operate at 24 VAC Floats shall be installed by the Contractor as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

24 WASHING PRESSCOMPACTOR FOR SCREENINGS

a Design Features

1 Compacting Action Dual augers shall provide positive displacement action be positioned on top of each other and rotate in opposing directions The augers shall be intermeshed and be of (1) left hand and (1) right hand lead and shall have ability to rotate 97 RPM in opposing directions Compactor augers shall be designed with a limited float on top of a perforated plate allowing them to accommodate irregular debris

2 Washing Action Wash port manifold shall be integrated prior to the compaction housing and deliver 3 to 5 GPM from a supply with 40 to 60 PSI at a 12 inch NPT connection for attaching water source utilizing filtered effluent or municipal water Washing action shall be flood wash type from a single 12 inch NPT supply Drain connection shall be 3 inch NPT male



3 Operation Washer compactor shall be designed to be continuous run not requiring operator Washer compactor shall be equipped with a self-regulating active pressure zone designed to accept non-standard wastewater debris in its original form such as rocks broken concrete and metal (bolts short pipe etc) up to 4 inches long Washer compactor shall have the ability to process multiple pieces of clothing variable volumes of debris and unprocessed septage or grease Compactor shall move at normal operating speed of 98 RPM with the ability to run intermittently to sync with upstream equipment

b Design Requirements

Number of Units 1

Peak Capacity 140 cubic fthr (for approx 5 minutes)

Average Capacity 90 cubic fthr (continuous service)

Mass Reduction Up to 60

Volume Reduction Up to 84

Wash Water Requirements 3 - 5 gpm at 40 - 60 PSI

c The inlet hopper for the washing press shall be designed to receive screenings material form existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 to the washing press screw housing The inlet hopper shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel All attachment hardware shall be of 316 stainless steel

241 Components

a Compactor Housing Shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and be a minimum of 11 gauge and connect to 38 inch thick flanges

b Augers Shall be of 316 stainless steel with flights 38 inch and have a 4 inch flight pitch Augers shall be coupled to a transmission at the drive end and supported at the compaction end with UHMW plane bearings Such arrangement shall allow movement for accommodation of irregular debris

c Drive Assembly

1 The washing presscompactor unit shall operate independently and have its own drive unit and driven components The gearbox shall not be vented to the outside atmosphere

2 The gearbox shall be grease lubricated and designed for 5 years (or 20000 hours of operation) between recommended clean and re-grease services The gearbox shall be right angle type and shall incorporate cycloidal and spiral bevel gearing with a total ration of 1791 The gear reducer output shaft speed shall be 35 rpm minimum - 98 rpm maximum and controlled by an AC Tech vector type inverter or greater service factor based on unit torque requirements The gearbox shall be shaft mounted utilizing a keyless bushing



3 The motor shall be mounted to the gear reducer by utilizing a quill C-Face mounting style The gearmotor shall be AC induction type 3 hp 360230460 volt explosion proof inverter duty model

d Auger Transmission

1 The drive assembly shall be coupled to a dual gear transmission which drives the augers in counter rotation

2 The spur gears are contained in a stainless steel housing and supported by plane bearings

3 Grease fittings shall be located outside of the transmission housing to provide lubrication to the gears

e Speed Reducer Shall have a maximum output of 98 rpm 1791 reduction ration with 18142 in-lb of output torque

f Thrust Bearings Shall be self-lubricating and capable of withstanding a minimum of 2000 lb of thrust load (each auger) at 98 rpm for life of machine

g Screw Supports Shall be UHMW plane type self-lubricating and fastened into place using stainless steel fasteners

h Spur Gears Shall be 17-4 PH stainless steel

242 Controls

a Controls shall be provided by Washer Compactor manufacturer

b Controls shall be designed to accept 3 PH 240480 volt incoming power supply Control panel power shall be 1PH120VAC and shall include a step-down transformer to achieve 120V

c Controls shall be built by a UL-approved panel builder and bear the UL-approved logo Controls shall be tested by panel builder and by the Washer Compactor manufacturer prior to shipment to Owner The Washer Compactor Manufacturer shall verify all overload settings in the Washer Compactor controller to insure proper overload and speed settings required for the application are properly programmed

2421 Main Panel

a Main control panel shall be operated within a temperature range between 35 and 104 F

b The controls shall be rated NEMA 12 and located in a climate-controlled environment

c Control panel shall have an inner door pocket that includes a copy of As-Built drawings from the manufacturer as well as any other pertinent documentation necessary to properly operate the controls

d The control package shall include the following and utilize the panel builders standard component manufacturers unless otherwise approved by the Washer Compactor manufacturer



1 N4X 304 SSTL enclosure with continuous hinge exterior lockable door

2 High volt transformer

3 HOA Selector where Hand mode shall enable the local station and Auto receives a Run signal from a remotediscrete source When input signal is cut the Washer Compactor shall utilize an off-delay timer to allow debris to finish depositing

4 Speed controlled (based on vector drive technology) pre-programmed for speedoverload control by the panel builder and verified by the Washer Compactor manufacturer

5 Dry contact input for motor thermostat to shut down if motor overtemp condition occurs

6 Dry contact output signals for Run Start Solenoid Common Fault and In Auto conditions Washer Compactor main control panel shall provide automatic run signal to Screenings Discharge Conveyor No 2 which receives compacted and dewatered screenings Off-delay timer shall maintain screen conveyor run signal until compactor debris has finished depositing

7 120 VAC output power to wash water solenoid

8 Dry contact input terminals for Remote Run Motor Thermostat and remote station

9 Main control power breaker with lockable thru-door operator


11 Push-to-Test type indicator lights for Power One Forward VFD Fault and Motor Overtemp

12 Phenolic label on outer door indicating equipment identification number

13 PushPull E-Stop on outside of enclosure

2422 Remote Panel

a A NEMA 79 remote push button station is required to maintain equipment requirements and local safety codes

b The remote station shall be rated NEMA 79 and include Forward Jog Reverse and E-Stop buttons The remote station shall be mounted as close to the equipment as safely possible and be field-wired by the Electrical Subcontractor to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

2423 Sequence of Operations

a The controls shall enable the remote push button station installed near the Washer Compactor when in Hand mode and utilize an input signal from a remote source when in Auto mode Upon receiving a stop signal in Auto mode the Washer Compactor shall utilize an off-delay



timer to allow debris to finish depositing

b The speed controller fault shall be cleared by turning off the Washer Compactor then waiting approximately three minutes (to time designated per current UL standards) and then turning the HOA back to the desired setting A motor overtemp fault shall clear automatically when the motor cools to be within normal operating range

2424 Miscellaneous

a The following shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor and are not part of the Water Compactor manufacturers scope of supply

1 Mounting stands

2 Mounting hardware

3 Field wiring and conduit

4 Junction boxes

5 Installation

b The field wiring shall include (but not be limited to) the following connections as applicable

1 Incoming power supply to the main control panel

2 All required grounding of the motor and controls

3 Motor to the main control panel

c VFD rated motor cable for all motors

d Motor cables shall be provided to accommodate required length from panel to WasherCompactor

e Motor thermostat to the terminal inputs in the control panel

f Input and output signal wiring for remote startstop

g Remote station contacts to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

243 Fasteners

All fasteners and anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated in this specification Anchor bolts shall be provided by the manufacturer for mounting the washing press and the solenoid valve manifoldlocal control station support stand All threaded fasteners shall be coated with a nickel based anti-seize thread lubricant prior to assembly

244 Lubrication

The lubricant type and quantity shall be provided in the manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Manual



245 Protective Coatings

a Stainless steel and plastic components shall not be painted The stainless steel structural components and enclosures panels shall be bead blasted and passivated as required after fabrication to remove embedded iron surface rust and weld burn All other surfaces shall be blast cleaned to an SSPC SP 6NACE No3 finish removing all dirt rust scale and foreign materials

b Motor gearbox shall be coated in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers specification Surface preparation shall be done in accordance with SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 Near White The three-part coating system shall be manufactured by Tnemec as follows Prime Coat Series 90-97 Tnemec Zinc at 25 - 35 mils DFT Intermediate Coat Series 27 FC Typoxy at 30 - 50 mils DFT and Top Coat Series 1075U Endura-Shield II at 20 - 30 mils DFT Standard color is 11SF Safety Blue Material shall meet all State and Federal VOC and other regulatory requirements

246 Spare Parts

The manufacturer shall furnish the following spare parts for each press

Two (2) side screw supports

Two (2) upperlower screw supports

Fasteners

All spare parts shall be properly packed in a white wooden box labeled and stored where directed by the Contracting Officer


Provide design calculations for the bar screens and for the screenings washercompactor discharge pipe and supports Design frame supports with stiffeners and top flanges anchor bolts and lifting system per the following requirements

a Seismic Design Parameters - Conform to ICC IBC (and North Carolina Building Code) Section 1613 and ASCE 7-10 Chapter 15

1 Si per USGS ASCE 7-10 Centroid Sa data

2 Seismic Importance Factor I 150

3 R3


1 Wind Velocity mph 130

2 I 115

3 Exposure Category C

4 Adjustment Factor 121 per ASCE 7-10 Figure 6-2

c Weight W Weight of discharge system plus 80 pounds per linear foot



load in pipe

d An unreinforced concrete housekeeping pad above the reinforced concrete structural slab shall not be considered to have structural value in the design of the anchor bolts Tension and shear values for drilled or epoxied anchor shall be ICBO approved

26 PAINTING

Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned primed and given two finish coats of paint at the factory in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and compatible with field paint requirements specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work

32 INSTALLATION

Install all materials and equipment as shown and in accordance with the approved written recommendations of the equipment manufacturer

33 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS

Use concrete for foundations as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTRAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Concrete foundations shall be integral with and of same strength as the building floor unless otherwise specified Concrete used in foundations that are entirely separated from the surrounding floor shall be 2500 psi When new foundations are constructed on existing concrete new concrete shall be bonded to old as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Furnish foundation bolts as required for proper positioning during placement of concrete

34 FIELD PAINTING

Field painting is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS


351 Tests

After installation of the sewage bar screen S and wash presscompactor is complete conduct operational tests required to demonstrate that the equipment will operate in accordance with the requirements of this section of the specifications Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls

352 Manufacturers Field Services

Obtain the services of the manufacturers representative who is experienced in the installation adjustment and operation of the equipment specified The representative shall supervise the installation adjustment and testing of the equipment




361 Framed Instructions

Provide framed instructions including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system posted where directed The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams Submit proposed diagrams instructions and other sheets prior to posting

362 Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Submit operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Submit maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides The instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as installed

363 Training

Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members Training shall be provided for a total period of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions

364 Manufacturers Warranty

Manufacturer shall provide a written one year standard warranty from the date of use of the mechanically cleaned bar screen and was press compactor equipment to guarantee that there shall be no defects in material or workmanship in any item supplied

Manufacturer shall warrant for the period of 5 years all rotating parts of the Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screen and Wash Press Compactor including the gear motor bearing drive head and the link system including the links castings pins and retaining rings Manufacturer warrants that these components shall be replaced if damaged or defective in the normal use of the equipment




SECTION 46 23 00

GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS0211

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


ASCE 7-10 (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures














ASTM B30 (2016) Standard Specification for Copper Alloys in Ingot Form

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent



Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems






SSPC PS 1001 (1982 E 2004) Hot-Applied Coal Tar Enamel Painting System

SSPC Paint 16 (2006 R 2015 E 2015) Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint



MIL-DTL-24441 (2009 Rev D) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide General Specification for

MIL-DTL-2444129 (2009 Rev B) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide Green Primer Formula 150 Type IV

MIL-DTL-2444131 (2009 Rev B) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide White Formula 152 Type IV

MIL-P-21035 (1991 Rev B Notice 2 2003) Paint High Zinc Dust Content Galvanizing Repair (Metric)

MIL-PRF-24635 (2009 Rev E) Coating Systems Weather Resistant Exterior Use


CID A-A-3120 (Rev A) Paint For Swimming Pools

FS TT-P-645 (Rev C) Primer Paint Zinc-Molybdate Alkyd Type

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Grit

The settleable solids load present in wastewater such as sand gravel cinders metal fragments not ameliorated by secondary treatment andor sludge removal techniques and capable of producing excessive wear on mechanical equipment

122 Grit Separation

The process of separating grit from wastewater by controlling the velocity



of the wastewater to suspend organics andor by tank configuration to separate the grit from the organic solids by differential sedimentation and scour

123 Grit Collection

The process of gathering the separated grit in a hopper or other point of collection by mechanical equipment designed for the purpose

124 Grit Removal

The process of conveying grit out of the chamber from the point of collection in the chamber to classifying equipment for further processing Grit removal equipment may accomplish some dewatering

125 Grit Classifying and Grit Dewatering Unit

The process of further separation of grit by washing putrescible matter from the removed grit by means of sprays or washing the tanks and dewatering with screw conveyors These screw conveyors also convey the grit to the indicated point of discharge


The existing grit removal system is designed to separate collect remove classify and deposit grit at the indicated point of its discharge within the area and at the elevations indicated The existing grit collectionremoval system will be modified and lowered to the elevation indicated in order to increase its hydraulic capacity Stainless steel extensions shall be fabricated and installed on the existing grit separator to increase the equipment height to the elevations indicated A new Class I Division 2 HOA local control panel shall be provided to select local or automated operation of the grit system existing grit classifiers and grit conveyor A new PLC-based control panel shall be provided for automated operation monitoring and control of the grit system equipment including classifiers and conveyor The PLC control panel shall convey status and signals via dry contacts to the WWTP PLCSCADA system The WWTP PLC is Allen Bradley 540 using Citect SCADA software Grit system PLC shall be compatible with the WWTP PLC Equipment shall duplicate units that have been manufactured installed and operated for a minimum of 2 years

131 Vortex Type Grit Removal System

Grit is separated in a vortex type grit removal system Removal of grit is by carrier water Classifying equipment is screw-type classifiers

132 System Requirements

System is capable of separating and removing 95 percent of 110 mesh grit having a specific gravity of 265 from a flow ranging from 0 to 375 million gallons per day Following modification the system shall be capable of separating and removing 95 percent of 300 micron grit having a specific gravity of 265 from a flow ranging from 0 to 6 million gallons per day

14 SUBMITTALS




PROCEDURES

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Grit handling and control equipment modifications layout



SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

Spare parts for each different item of material and equipment specified after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 1 month prior to equipment start up The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service

Framed Instructions



Grit handling and control equipment Data Package 3

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit operation and maintenance data for each item of the grit separation collection removal classifying and control system


Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance



Submit text of posted operating instructions for each component of the grit separation collection removal and classifying system





Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D11D11M using procedures materials and equipment of the type required for the work

151 Layout Drawings

Submit drawings showing layout of all equipment Include construction and erection details for all modifications to the complete grit separation collection removal and classifying system and also show associated piping to connection with plant piping


Equipment and parts shall be packaged for shipment to prevent breakage damage or cause out-of-adjustment calibration readings or controls Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage and shall be unloaded and stored with a minimum of handling Equipment and materials shall be stored indoors off the floor Area shall be dry with adequate ventilation free from dust or water and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling

17 SPARE PARTS

Spare parts for the equipment specified above shall be furnished by the manufacturer in the quantities listed below The spare parts shall be identical and interchangeable with the original parts The parts shall be furnished in wooden containers clearly marked with contents on two sides and top Where the number of spare part units required by the schedule results in a fractional number of units the number furnished shall be rounded off to the next highest

Description of Spare Part Unit Number of Spare Units Required as Percentage of Part Units Installed

a 3 electric actuated plug valve1 each

b 2 solenoid valve 1 each

c 1 solenoid valve 1 each


Manufacturer to p rovide new posted operating instructions including wiring and control diagrams showing the layout of the entire system posted where directed Provide condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system in typed form framed as specified above for wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Unless otherwise specified materials and equipment shall be standard commercial products in regular production by the manufacturers and suitable for the required service Components shall be 304 stainless steel where called out in the specificationsdrawings Unless otherwise specified structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36A36M hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123A123M or ASTM A153A153M Submerged steel shall have a minimum thickness of 14 inch Unless otherwise specified cast iron shall conform to ASTM A48A48M Grade 30 Bronze castings not otherwise specified shall conform to ASTM B30 Drives lubrication and bearings shall be accessible from walkways at or above ground level

211 Equipment

2111 Design Data

Number of Existing Units 4

Existing Size 95 diameter

Existing Configuration Free Standing on concrete piers lower existing units on existing piers

Proposed Design Flow (mgd) 15 Proposed Peak flow (mgd) 24

Performance Existing 95 removal of all grit (specific gravity 265) greater-than or equal to 110 microns at design flow of 375 MGD

Proposed 95 removal of all grit (specific gravity 265) greater-than or equal to 300 microns at peak flow of 6 MGD

Average FlowUnit Existing 375 MGD with no more than 4 headloss

Peak Hourly FlowUnit (4 units online) Proposed 6 MGD with 17 headloss

Depth of Flow Design AveragePeak Hourly in effluent channel 1216

Recommended Underflow Rate 112 gpm

Existing Influent Connection 16 flanged pipe

Existing Effluent Connection 24 wide channel



Existing Underflow Connection 3

Existing Underflow Layout Gravity

Existing Underflow Control Reg-U-Flo Vortex Valve

Existing EFW Connection 1 NPT

Existing Materials of Construction 304 SS

Existing Operating Pressure Atmospheric

2112 Operation

Each Grit Separator is designed to separate grit from screened rawwastewater using Hydro-dynamic separation and boundary layer effects to aidgravitational forces

All flow passages shall be self-cleaning and free of sharp projections orfittings that may snag stringy or fibrous materials

Each Grit Separator is characterized by a predetermined flow path caused bythe vessel geometry and flow modifying components to maximize theconcentration and removal of settleable solids

Each Grit Separator includes a fluidizing system to prevent the collected grit from compacting in the collection area release entrapped organics aid in transporting the accumulated grit to the Grit Classifier (Grit Dewatering Unit)

2113 Construction

a The Grit Separator consists of a free standing vessel with a sloping base fabricated from stainless steel

(1) The Grit Separator and overflow channel extension walls shall be 14 inch thick Manufacturer shall supply 8 inch channel height extensions for each unit specific to the layout of each unit

(2) The channel extension shall be fabricated from 304 SS

(3) The Grit Separator and effluent channel extension shall be bolted onto existing Grit King bodies and effluent channels

b A center shaft and cone is mounted so that its edge is clear of the sloping base of the vessel It is removable from the top of the unit

(1) The center shaft extensions shall be 10 gauge in thickness with38 thick top and bottom plates Manufacturer shall supply center shaft extensions at 8 inches in height for each unit

(2) The center shaft extension shall be fabricated from 304 SS

(3) The center shaft extension shall be bolted onto the existingcenter shaft with 304 SS fasteners by Contractor

c The installation of the extension to each Grit Separator shall beperformed by the Contractor Disassembly of existing parts shall be



required prior to installation

2114 Valves and Accessories

a Manufacturer shall supply each Grit Separator with the following new valves

(1) One (1) 3 cast iron plug valve with electric actuator 120 V 60Hz 1 PH NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) to control the underflow

(2) One (1) 3 cast iron plug valve with quarter-turn lever actuator

(3) One (1) 1 NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) brass sole noid valve 120 V 60 Hz 1 PH to automate the fluidizing water supply

(4) One (1) 1 bronze ball valve to shut off the fluidizing water isolate the solenoid valve

(5) One (1) 2 NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) brass solenoid valve 120 Hz 1 PH to automate flushing water supply

(6) One (1) 2 bronze ball valve to shut off flushing and fluidizing water to isolate the solenoid valves

b The following pressure gauges shall be provided for each grit removalsystem

One (1) 0-100 psig pressure gauge to monitor the flushing water delivery pressure

c Each pair of Grit Separators are currently provided with an existing Type 364 SV Reg-U-Floreg Vortex Valve installed on the underflow pipe to regulate the flow rate to each grit classifierdewatering unit

d Water

Each Grit Separator shall require an intermittent supply of minimum 50gpm clarified non-potable water (EFW) at 50 psig supplied to the grit flushingfluidizing pipe via a 2 NPT connection

e Manufacturer shall supply each grit separator with one (1) flow switch 120 V 60 Hz 1 PH suitable for tapping and sensing flow within the 16-inch inlet pipe

2115 Overflow Weir

Depth of liquid in the grit influent channel shall be regulated by anoverflow weir fitted at the end of the settling tank The weir shall befabricated of structural stainless steel or aluminum conforming to ASTM B209or ASTM B221 Alloy 6061 Temper T6

22 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

221 HOA Control Panel

a One new (1) HOA control panel shall be furnished completely pre-wired andtested



b The control panel shall adhere to the following specifications

(1) Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 for Class I Division 2 Environment

(2) Material Cast Aluminum

(3) Voltage 120 Volt

(4) Phase 1 Phase

(5) Frequency 60 Hz

(6) Load TBD Amp c The HOA Control panel shall contain switches indicator lights and

other components necessary to operate the following equipment in hand mode

(1) Four (4) Modified Grit Separators

(2) Two (2) Existing Grit Classifiers

(3) One (1) New Grit Conveyor

In auto mode equipment shall be controlled from the PLC control panel In off position the equipment shall be un-powered

f The HOA panel door layout shall include the following items

(1) Front panel mounted combination main disconnect switch and circuit breaker

(2) Control Power OnOff Switch

(3) Grit Separator 1-4 three position HOA switch

(4) Grit Separator 1-4 fluidizing water valve OpenClose switch

(5) Grit Separator 1-4 fluidizing water valve OPEN indicating light

(6) Grit Separator 1-4 underflow plug valve OpenClose switch

(7) Grit Separator 1-4 underflow plug valve OPENCLOSE indicating lights

(8) Grit Separator 1-4 flushing valve OpenClose switch

(9) Grit Separator 1-4 flushing valve OPEN indicating light

(10) Grit Classifier 1-2 running light

(11) Grit Classifier 1-2 fail indicating light

(12) Grit Classifier 1-2 three position HOA switch

(13) Grit Conveyor three position HOA switch



222 PLC Control Panel

a One (1) new PLC control panel shall be furnished pre-wired and tested


(1) Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 for indoor installation

(2) Material Painted Steel


(4) Phase 1 Phase

(5) Frequency 60 Hz

(6) Load TBD Amp

(7) Logre PLC shall be compatible with WWTP SCADA PLC which is Allen Bradley 540 with Citect SCADA software

c The PLC panel shall contain front panel mounted combination disconnect switch and circuit breaker PLC Operator Interface Terminal rail mounted terminal blocks inputoutput cards and other components necessary to operate the following equipment when the HOA control panel is in automatic mode


(2) Two (2) Existing Grit Classified


In hand mode equipment shall be controlled by the operator from the HOA control panel In off position the equipment shall be un-powered

d The PLC control panel shall be programmed to provide monitoring control and timing functions as described by the Sequence of Operation below

e Dry contacts shall be provided to transmit discrete output signals to the WWTP SCADA PLC as indicated below

(1) Grit King in Auto (x4)

(2) Grit King Underflow Opened (x4)

(3) Grit King Underflow Closed (x4)

(4) Grit Classifier Running (x2)

(5) Grit Classifier Fault (x2)

(6) Grit Conveyor Running

223 Sequence Of Operation

a The system shall be controlled to provide PLC automatic operation or HOA manual operation The system shall provide starting and stopping



and system shut down when a fault is detected

b Clarified plant water shall be supplied to the Grit Separator

c Grit Separator

(1) Screened raw wastewater shall be gravity fed into the Grit Separator continuously

(2) A PLC-based time clock (TC) shall initiate when grit discharge cycles occur The time clock shall be adjustable to initiate cycles up to every 20 minutes

(3) When the time clock initiates a cycle the Grit Classifier and Grit Conveyor operate for an adjustable time period

(4) Concurrently the control panel shall send a signal to open the solenoid valve located on the fluidizing line for an adjustable time period (typically 60 seconds)

(5) After the fluidizing time runs out and the solenoid valve closesthe electrically actuated plug valve shall open for an adjustable time period (typically 120 seconds)

(6) After the plug valve closes the flushing solenoid valve located on the underflow line between the Grit King and classifier shall open for an adjustable time period to ensure the line is clear from grit

(7) The classifier and conveyor will continue to operate for a period of time after the flushing solenoid closes to ensure the solids are discharge off the end of the unit

224 Sub Title

Text


Unless indicated or specified otherwise electrical components of mechanical equipment such as control stations electrical disconnecting (isolating) means and other devices functioning to control associated mechanical equipment are included under this section The work shall be complete and operable and shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 Installation shall be made with conduit and fittings as indicated on the drawings Liquid tight flexible steel conduit shall be used for short connections to motors and their controllers Wiring and equipment in hazardous locations as defined by the NFPA 70 shall conform to Class I Group I Division D requirements The interconnecting conduit and wire (except when included in factory-assembled equipment) in the motor-control equipment forming a part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies and the electrical connection of the mechanical equipment to the electrical power circuit are specified in Section 26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

24 WELDING

Perform welding welding inspection and corrective welding in accordance with AWS D11D11M Weld in a manner to prevent permanent distortion of



the connected parts Weld continuously along the entire area of contact Grind smooth visible welds in the finished installation

25 REPAIR OF ZINC-COATED SURFACES

Repair surfaces damaged by welding or other means with galvanizing repair paint conforming to MIL-P-21035 or by the application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing as approved Clean areas to be repaired and remove the slag from the welds Surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied shall be heated with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste spread the molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe the excess material off

26 TREATMENT AND PAINTING

Except as otherwise specified equipment shall be treated and painted in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice Exposed surfaces of ferrous metals other than piping including those to be submerged shall be sandblasted in accordance with SSPC SP 6NACE No3 and shop coated with two coats of epoxy polyamide conforming to SSPC Paint 16 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils per coat The maximum time between coats shall be 72 hours The following items shall be finished in accordance with manufacturers standard practice suitable for end use environment motors gear motors motor-driven speed reducers shafts and pushbutton stations Aluminum shall have an AA DAF45 finish Stainless steel stellite and nonferrous metals shall not be coated Exposed surfaces of concrete tanks shall be provided with two coats of rubber-base paint gloss or semi-gloss conforming to CID A-A-3120 Surfaces of housings and enclosures shall be coated with zinc-molybdate primer conforming to FS TT-P-645 and finish coat conforming to MIL-PRF-24635 or an epoxy polyamide system in accordance with MIL-DTL-24441 with a primer coat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444129 intermediate coat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444131 and a topcoat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444131 Exterior surfaces of piping which are not subject to submersion or which are buried shall be given a coal tar coating system in accordance with SSPC PS 1001

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install grit handling equipment and accessories specified herein in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations Includes providing all lubricants for initial operation

311 Water Piping

Piping shall be installed in alignment and supported with pipe hangers and supports Mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 Flanged joints shall be made up tight care being taken to avoid undue strain on flanges valves fittings and other equipment and accessories Screwed joints shall be made up tight with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape pipe cement and oil or PTFE powder and oil applied to the male threads only Threads shall be full cut not more than three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed Provide exposed ferrous pipe threads with one coat of FS TT-P-645 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil Joints for PVC pipe shall be made with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564 and shall be joined in



accordance with the Appendix thereto


321 Grit Separation Collection Removal and Classifying Equipment

Test in operation to demonstrate correct alignment smooth operation freedom from vibration and freedom from noise and overheating of moving machinery Correct all defects

322 Performance Tests

Provide field test data from full scale units of comparable design capacity demonstrating the performance of grit removal efficiencies as specified Grit removal efficiency shall be determined by averaging the results obtained from at least 20 sample performance test runs on similar installations

323 Manufacturers Representative

Equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of an engineer representative to supervise the field installation of the equipment and accessories in accordance with the manufacturers specifications In addition manufacturer of the equipment shall provide the services of an engineer representative for 1 man day to instruct operating personnel during the initial operating period



SUBMITTAL FORMJan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 15 PAGES


01 20 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

13Schedule of prices


141List of contact personnel

01 31 50 SD-11 Closeout Submittals

12Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp

Acceptance of Military Real

Property


12Construction schedule

13Equipment delivery schedule


141Submittal register

161Complete Submittal Package


19Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

110Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

191Crane Critical Lift Plan

191Crane Work Plan

1714Crane Operators

SD-06 Test Reports

114Reports

1141Accident Reports

1143Monthly Exposure Reports

1144Regulatory Citations and

Violations

SUBMITTAL REGISTERCONTRACT NO

TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTORSCHEDULE DATES

CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION

GOVT OR AE REVWR SUBMIT

APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR

DATE FWDTO OTHERREVIEWER

DATE RCDFROM OTHREVIEWER

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)



01 35 29 1145Crane Reports

SD-07 Certificates

111Confined Space Entry Permit

1146Certificate of Compliance

1147Third Party Certification of

Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes


16QC PLAN

01 50 00 SD-03 Product Data

21Backflow preventers

SD-06 Test Reports

31Backflow Preventer Tests

SD-07 Certificates

13Backflow Tester Certifications

131Backflow Preventers Certificate


161Environmental protection plan

164Preconstruction survey

17Permit for storm water discharge

17Notice of Intent

171Notice of Intent

17Notice of Termination

17Pollution Prevention Plan


141Solid waste disposal permit




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




01 57 19 142Disposal permit for hazardous

waste

12Environmental training

documentation

143Permit to transport hazardous

waste

144Hazardous waste certification

145Erosion and sediment control

inspection reports

163Environmental Plan Review

21Annual Report of Products

Containing Recovered Materials


16Waste Management Plan


17Records

01 78 00 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data

131Equipmentproduct warranty list


121As-built drawings

122Record of materials


132Equipmentproduct warranty tag


137GIS Data Deliverables




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





121Demolition Plan

110Existing Conditions

SD-07 Certificates

17Notification


176Work Plan

185Demolition and Removal Plan

185Water Control Plan

1711Contractor Qualifications

1712Worker Qualifications

SD-03 Product Data

2151Polymer Modifier

2152Polyurethane Injection Adhesive

216Epoxy Resin Materials

2112Mechanical Anchors

1713Testing Technicians

SD-04 Samples

217Field-Molded Sealants and

Primer

SD-05 Design Data

174Repair Material Mixture

Proportioning

SD-06 Test Reports

218Compression Seals and Lubricant

1753Cement-Based Concrete




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 01 32 1753Cement-Based Mortar

174Polymer-Modified Concrete


213Aggregate

1751Epoxy Resin Binder


1752Epoxy Resin Grout

SD-07 Certificates

212Grout Fluidifier

213Aggregate

SD-08 Manufacturerrsquos Instructions




361Epoxy Mortar

2162Epoxy Grout

2163Epoxy Injection Adhesive


17Manufacturers Material Safety

Data Sheets

03 11 1300 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings

221Formwork

311Formwork

221Form Removal Schedule

SD-03 Product Data

22Form Materials




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 11 1300 10 SD-04 Samples

13Sample Panels

222Fiber Voids

SD-05 Design Data

21Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

32Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

222Fiber Voids


23Waterstops

SD-03 Product Data

21Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

22Sealant

23Waterstops

SD-04 Samples

222Lubricant for Preformed

Compression Seals

223Field-Molded Type

23Waterstops

241Splicing Waterstops

SD-07 Certificates


22Sealant

23Waterstops





CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 20 0000 10 31Reinforcement

SD-03 Product Data

23Reinforcing Steel

SD-06 Test Reports

28Tests Inspections and

Verifications

SD-07 Certificates

23Reinforcing Steel

141Qualified Welders


215Reinforcing steel

SD-03 Product Data

12Concrete Mix Designs

22Batch Plant

225Concrete Mixers

226Conveying Equipment

22Placing Equipment

321Cold-Weather Requirements

322Hot-Weather Requirements

142Cementitious Materials

Admixtures and Curing

Compound

216Nonshrink Grout

215Mechanical Reinforcing Bar

Connectors

SD-06 Test Reports




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 31 0100 10 212Aggregates

21Mill Test Reports

34Tests and Inspections

3423Quality of Aggregates

214Water

SD-07 Certificates

14Concrete Field Testing

Technicians

14Concrete Construction Inspector

(CCI)


2117Blended Hydraulic Cement


142Curing Compound

03 39 0000 10 SD-03 Product Data

21Curing Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

32Testing and Inspection for CQC


21Curing Compound


131Manufacturers Sample Warranty

SD-03 Product Data

212FRP Pipe and Tube

212RailingsGuards

212Anchorage Materials




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




06 82 14 212Adhesives

212Resins

212Hardeners

SD-06 Test Reports

213Ultraviolet Test Reports

213Thermal Expansion Test Reports

213Flame Spread Test Reports


322Manufacturers Instructions

SD-09 Manufacturerrsquos Field

Reports

31Manufacturers Certification of

Installation


321Manufacturers Warranty


13Manufacturers Standard Details

21Elastomeric Waterproofing Sheet

Material

14Primers Adhesives and Mastics


SD-06 Test Reports


Material

35Field Quality Control

SD-07 Certificates




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




07 13 53 21Elastomeric Waterproofing Sheet

Material



17Special Warranties





07 84 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings

21Firestopping System

SD-03 Product Data

22Firestopping Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

33Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

152Inspector Qualifications


151Installer Qualifications


38Piping identification

38stencil

SD-03 Product Data

21Coating

21Manufacturers Technical Data

Sheets




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




09 90 00 SD-04 Samples

19Color

SD-07 Certificates

13Applicators qualifications


321Application instructions

352Mixing


Data Sheets


341Plumbing System

SD-03 Product Data

341Plumbing System

SD-06 Test Reports

34Tests Flushing and Disinfection

SD-07 Certificates

13Materials and Equipment


24Pipe Insulation Systems


SD-03 Product Data









CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





211Recycled Content


211Wire and Cable

2131Conductors

31Cable Manufacturing Data

SD-06 Test Reports

32Test Report(s) Inspection

Report(s) and Verification

Report(s)


222Wireways

SD-03 Product Data

210Receptacles

2111Circuit breakers

28Switches

212Enclosed circuit breakers

214Motor controllers

223Surge protective devices

SD-06 Test Reports


354Grounding system test

353Ground-fault receptacle test

SD-07 Certificates

29Fuses




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





Data

151Electrical Systems


142Photometric Plan

151LED Luminaire Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings

1411Luminaire drawings

1412Poles

SD-03 Product Data

223Luminaire (Drivers)

SD-05 Design Data

143Design Data for luminaires

SD-06 Test Reports

144LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test

Report

145LED Light Source - IES LM-80

Test Report

32Operating test

SD-07 Certificates

151Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data

16Operational Service

31 23 0000 20 SD-06 Test Reports

3821Fill and backfill




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




31 23 0000 20 3822Select material

3823Density tests

3824Moisture Content Tests


21Concrete

SD-06 Test Reports



24Fertilizer

SD-06 Test Reports

223Topsoil Composition Tests

SD-07 Certificates

21seed

33 34 00 SD-06 Test Reports

32Hydrostatic Tests


3121Field Acceptance Checks and

Tests

33Cable Installation Plan and

Procedure

SD-07 Certificates

161Certificate of Conformance


311Installation

311Wiring

SD-03 Product Data




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




40 95 00 35Control Drawings

362Performance Verification Test

(PVT)

SD-06 Test Reports

361Testing Adjusting and

Commissioning

362Performance Verification

Test(PVT)


21Materials And Equipment

SD-03 Product Data

361Framed Instructions

SD-06 Test Reports

351Tests


Data

362Operating and Maintenance

Instructions


151layout


Data

21equipment


18Posted operating instructions




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS


March 2016

Version Number 3

CAMP LEJEUNE CONTRACTOR ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDE FINAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK


i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents i

Record of Changes ix

Certification Page xi

List of Acronyms and Abbreviations xiii

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory xix

10 Contractor Environmental Guide Overview 1-1

11 Key Definitions and Concepts 1-3

111 Key Definitions 1-3

112 Key Concepts 1-4

12 Installation Background 1-5

121 Environmental Management Division and

Environmental Affairs Department 1-6

122 Expectations 1-7

13 Overview of Requirements 1-8

131 Contractor Environmental Guide 1-9

132 Environmental and EMS Training 1-10

14 Points of Contact 1-12

15 Overview Map 1-13

20 Environmental Management System 2-1

21 Key Definition and Concepts 2-2





24 EMS Responsibilities 2-8

25 Contractor Environmental Guide and EMS 2-9


ii

30 Training 3-1






33 Training Requirements 3-4

331 General Environmental Awareness 3-4


333 Recordkeeping 3-5

40 Air Quality 4-1






43 Permit Requirements 4-5

44 Additional Activities of Concern 4-6

50 Environmental Emergency Planning and Response 5-1






53 Spill Notification 5-6

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill Notification

Procedures 5-6

532 Wastewater Spill and Water Line Break

Notification 5-8

54 Follow-Up 5-9

60 Cultural Resources 6-1



iii





63 Procedures 6-7

70 Hazardous MaterialsHazardous Waste Management 7-1






73 Hazardous Materials Requirements 7-14

74 Universal Waste Requirements 7-16

75 Hazardous Waste Requirements 7-18

751 Storage 7-19

752 Manifesting and Disposal 7-21

76 NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Requirements 7-22

761 Used Oil and Oil Filters 7-22

762 Used Antifreeze 7-24

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily Rags 7-

25

764 Used Electronic Equipment 7-25

765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated as

Universal Waste) 7-25

80 Asbestos 8-1






83 Responsibilities Before a Demolition or Renovation

Project 8-6

831 Identification of ACM and PACM 8-7


iv

832 Notification 8-8

833 Removal 8-8

834 Training 8-9

84 Responsibilities During a Demolition or Renovation

Project 8-9

85 Disposal of ACM Waste 8-10

90 Lead-Based Paint 9-1






93 Responsibilities Before Renovation or Demolition 9-6

94 Permits 9-8

95 Disposal 9-8

96 Training 9-9

100 Natural Resources 10-1






103 National Environmental Policy Act 10-10

104 Timber 10-11

105 Threatened and Endangered Species 10-13

106 Wetlands 10-14

1061 Avoidance 10-14

1062 Permits 10-15

1063 Impacts 10-18

1064 Mitigation 10-19

107 Temporary Construction 10-20


v

110 Stormwater 11-1






113 Prior to Site Work 11-11

1131 Construction Notifications 11-12

1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I Industrial

Permit 11-12

1133 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase II

Municipal Permit 11-13

1134 Project-Specific Construction Permits 11-13

114 Responsibilities During Site Work 11-16

120 Solid Waste Recycling and Pollution Prevention (P2) 12-

1






123 Solid Waste Requirements 12-7

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable Waste

Streams 12-9

124 Recycling Requirements 12-14

1241 Recycling Center 12-15

1242 Other Recyclables 12-16

125 Pollution Prevention and Green Procurment 12-17

130 Potential Discovery of Undocumented Contaminated

Sites 13-1





vi



133 Unforeseen Site Condition Procedures 13-4

1331 Petroleum Oil and Lubricants 13-5

1332 Munitions and Ordnance 13-6

140 Permitting 14-1






143 Project Permits and Approvals 14-3

1431 Stormwater (Section 110) 14-4

1432 Asbestos (Section 80) 14-5

1433 Lead-Based Paint (Section 90) 14-5

1434 Air Quality (Section 40) 14-6

1435 Wetlands (Section 106) 14-7

1436 Drinking WaterWastewater 14-8


vii

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Contacts in Case of a Spill 1-13

Table 2-1 Practices Identified Under MCB Camp Lejeunersquos

EMS 2-10

Table 5-1 Environmental Emergency Response Contacts 5-3

Table 12-1 Base Landfill Requirements 12-11

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB Camp

Lejeune) Organization Chart 1-7

Figure 1-2 Environmental Affairs Department (MCAS New

River) Organization Chart 1-7

Figure 1-3 Overview Map 1-14

Figure 2-1 Plan Do Check Act Cycle 2-4

Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and Demolition

Activities with the Environment 2-7

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow Chart 6-8

Figure 7-1 Diamond Hazard Label 7-7

Attachments and Appendix

Attachment 2-1 MCB Camp Lejeunersquos Environmental Policy

Statement

Attachment 3-1 Spill Reporting Form

Attachment 4-1 Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site

Inspection Form MCB Camp Lejeune


Inspection Form MCAS New River

Appendix General EMS amp Environmental Awareness

Training for Contractors amp Vendors


viii



ix

RECORD OF CHANGES

Date Description of

Changes Page NameInitials


x



xi

CERTIFICATION PAGE

I certify that I have read understood and accept this document

and all attachments and that all those within my party working

on a job site within Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune andor

Marine Corps Air Station New River will comply with the

environmental policies and regulations herein I am aware that

there are penalties for not complying with this Guide

__________________________________

Signature

__________________________________

Date


xii



xiii

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND

ABBREVIATIONS

ACM Asbestos-Containing Material

AHERA Asbestos Hazard and Emergency Response

Act

AHPA Archaeological and Historic Preservation

Act

ARPA Archeological Resource Protection Act

ASHARA Asbestos School Hazard Abatement

Reauthorization Act

ASD Accumulation Start Date

ASO Air Station Order

BMP Best Management Practice

BO Base Order

CampD Construction and Demolition

CAA Clean Air Act

CAMA Coastal Area Management Act

CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response

Compensation and Liability

CETEP Comprehensive Environmental Training and

Education Program

CFC Chlorofluorocarbon

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CG Commanding General

CWA Clean Water Act

CZMA Coastal Zone Management Act

DHHS Department of Health and Human Services

DLADS Defense Logistics Agency Disposition

Services

DM Decision Memorandum


xiv

DMM Discarded Military Munitions

DoD Department of Defense

DoN Department of Navy

DOT Department of Transportation

DRMS Defense Reutilization and Marketing

Service

EA Environmental Assessment

EAD Environmental Affairs Department

ECON Environmental Conservation Branch

EISA Energy Independence and Security Act

EHS Extremely Hazardous Substances

ELLAP Environmental Lead Laboratory

Accreditation Program

EMD Environmental Management Division

EMS Environmental Management System

EO Executive Order

EOD Explosives and Ordnance Disposal

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

EPR Extended Producer Responsibility

EPCRA Emergency Planning and Community Right-

to-Know Act

EPEAT Electronic Product Environmental

Assessment Tool

FAR Federal Acquisition Regulation

FIFRA Federal Insecticide Fungicide and

Rodenticide Act

FSC Facilities Support Contracts

FWS Fish and Wildlife Service

GIS Geographic Information System

GP Green Procurement

HAP Hazardous Air Pollutants


xv

HCFC Hydrochlorofluorocarbon

HCS Hazard Communication Standard

HHCU Health Hazards Control Unit (North

Carolina)

HM Hazardous Material

HMTA Hazardous Materials Transportation Act

HQMC Headquarters Marine Corps

HQW High Quality Water

HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning

HW Hazardous Waste

HWMP Hazardous Waste Management Plan

IGIampS Installation Geospatial Information amp

Services

INRMP Integrated Natural Resources Management

Plan

IRP Installation Restoration Program

LBP Lead-Based Paint

LDA Land-Disturbing Activities

LQG Large Quantity Generator

MAG Marine Aircraft Group

MCAS Marine Corps Air Station

MCB Marine Corps Base

MCM Minimum Control Measure

MCIEAST Marine Corps Installations East

MCO Marine Corps Order

MEC Munitions and Explosives of Concern

MEF Marine Expeditionary Force

MRF Materials Recovery Facility

MS4 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems

MSW Municipal Solid Waste

NAPL Non-Aqueous Phase Liquid


xvi

NC North Carolina

NCAC North Carolina Administrative Code

NCDAQ North Carolina Department of Air Quality

NCDCM North Carolina Division of Coastal

Management

NCDEQ North Carolina Department of

Environmental Quality

NCDFR North Carolina Division of Forest Resources

NCDMS North Carolina Division of Mitigation

Services

NCDWR North Carolina Division of Water Resources

NEPA National Environmental Policy Act

NESHAP National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants

NHPA National Historic Preservation Act

NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination

System

NPL National Priorities List

NRC National Response Center

NRHP National Register of Historic Places

ODS Ozone-Depleting Substance

OPA Oil Pollution Act

ORW Outstanding Resource Water

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health

Administration

OWS Oil-Water Separator

P2 Pollution Prevention

PACM Presumed Asbestos-Containing Material

PCB Polychlorinated biphenyl

POC Point of Contact

POL Petroleum Oil and Lubricant

PPA Pollution Prevention Act

ppm Parts Per Million


xvii

PPV Public-Private Venture

PWD Public Works Division

QRP Qualified Recycling Program

RACM Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material

RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act

RCRS Resource Conservation and Recovery

Section

ROICC Resident Officer in Charge of Construction

RRP Renovation Repair and Painting

SAA Satellite Accumulation Area

SARA Superfund Amendments amp Reauthorization

Act

SDS Safety Data Sheet

SHPO State Historic Preservation Officer

SPCC Spill Prevention Control and

Countermeasures

SSPP Strategic Sustainability Performance Plan

SWDA Solid Waste Disposal Act

SWPPP Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (Also

referred to as SPPP in NC)

TampP Treatment and Processing

TCLP Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure

TSD Treatment Storage and Disposal

TSI Thermal System Insulation

ULCP Unit Level Contingency Plan

USC United States Code

USACE United States Army Corps of Engineers

USMC United States Marine Corps

UW Universal Waste


xviii

UXO Unexploded Ordnance

XRF X-Ray Fluorescence


xix

CONTRACTORrsquoS PHONE DIRECTORY

In the event of an emergency refer to the emergency

numbers below All non-emergency contractor inquiries

regarding the operations at Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp

Lejeune and Marine Corps Air Station New River should be

directed to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction

(ROICC) or Contract Representative The ROICC or

Contract Representative will either directly contact or refer

contractors to the appropriate Division or Organization

Emergency and Important Non-Emergency Numbers

Fire and Emergency Services Division 911

Ambulance 911

Hearing Impaired (910) 451-4444

CHEMTREC (Emergency 24-hourOutside MCB Camp

Lejeune) (800) 424-9300

Hazardous Chemical Spill 911

Military Police 911

National Response Center (Outside MCB Camp

Lejeune) (202) 372-2428

Toll Free (800) 424-8802

Provost Marshall Office 911

Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune

Operator Directory Assistance (910) 451-1113

Confined Space Program Manager (910) 451-5725

Environmental Management Division (910) 451-5003

-Environmental Compliance Branch (910) 451-5837


xx

Asbestos Management

Resource Conservation and Recovery Section

(910) 451-1482

Hazardous Material Consolidation SiteFree Issue

(910) 451-1482

Recycling Center Building 982 (910) 451-4214

-Environmental Conservation Branch (910) 451-5063

Fish amp Wildlife

Forestry Management

NEPA

Conservation Law Enforcement

(910) 451-21965226

-Environmental Quality Branch (910) 451-5068

Air Quality

Underground Storage Tanks

Water Quality

Explosives and Ordnance Disposal (910) 451-0558

Public Works Division (910) 451-5307

-Construction Project Managers (910) 451-2583

-Contracts Branch (910) 451-2582

-Officer In Charge of Construction (Main) (910) 451-2581

-Public Works Base Utility Director (910) 451-5024

Water Line BreakWastewater Line Break (910)

451-7190 (x225)

-Public Works Solid Waste DivisionLandfill

(910) 451-2946

Range Control (910) 451-3064

Regional Geospatial Information amp Services (Installation

Manager) (910) 451-8915

Safety Department (910) 451-5725


xxi

Marine Corps Air Station New River

Confined Space Program (910) 449-4964

Consolidated Hazardous Material Reutilization and

Inventory Management Program (910) 449-45314533

Environmental Affairs Department

(Director) (910) 449-5441

-Environmental Affairs Department (Environmental

Manager) (910) 449-5442

-Environmental Affairs Department (GIS

Manager) (910) 449-6144

-Environmental Affairs Department (Hazardous

Waste) (910) 449-5997

-Conservation Law Enforcement (910) 449-0108

Explosives Safety Officer (910) 449-5443

Military Police (Non-Emergency) (910) 449-42484249


-Officer In Charge of Construction (910) 449-5587



1-1



1-1

10 CONTRACTOR

ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDE

OVERVIEW

Environmental protection is an integral part of the Marine

Corps mission in order to protect public health preserve

environmental quality comply with regulatory

requirements and develop and strengthen relationships

between the Marine Corps community and external

stakeholders The purpose of the MCB Camp Lejeune

Contractor Environmental Guide is to assist contractors

working aboard Marine Corps Installations Eastrsquos

(MCIEASTrsquos) Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune

and Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS) New River in

maintaining the mission by complying with Federal and

State environmental laws and regulations as well as the

United States Marine Corps

(USMC) and installation

environmental policies This

guide is written in accordance

with Marine Corps Order

(MCO) P50902A and designed

to answer many of the

environmental questions that

arise as well as to provide

pertinent information on

environmental topics and

training requirements

NOTE This document should be used only as a guide to the

environmental issues contractors may face while working

This document should be used only as a guide to the environmental issues contractors may face while working aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River



1-2

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River It is

expected that contractors will work closely with the

Environmental Management Division (EMD) at MCB Camp

Lejeune the Environmental Affairs Department (EAD) at

MCAS New River and Contract Representatives regarding

environmental management issues concerns andor

questions Should the need arise this guide provides

contractors with EMD EAD

and emergency response points

of contact (POCs) All initial

inquiries should be directed to

the Resident Officer in Charge of

Construction (ROICC) or

Contract Representative who

will either direct the contractor

or contact the appropriate environmental office if additional

clarification regarding an environmental issue is necessary

NOTE It is very important to note that this guide is designed

to provide requirements specific to MCB Camp Lejeune-

issued contracts It is the contractorrsquos responsibility to know

and comply with all Federal State and local regulations

MCB Camp Lejeune environmental personnel will assist

contractors with compliance issues however the primary

burden of regulatory identification familiarity and

compliance lies with the contractor This training does not

replace any required regulatory environmental training or

certification as per contract requirements All required

environmental training should be completed prior to

working at MCIEAST installations

Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative with any

questions


1-3

NOTE It is the contractorrsquos responsibility to review the

project-specific contract and specifications Additional

environmental requirements submissions andor meetings

not documented in this guide may be required

11 KEY DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS

The following key definitions and concepts are used

throughout this guide If you have any questions about these

definitions or concepts please consult the ROICC or

Contract Representative who will contact the appropriate

environmental office if additional clarification is necessary

111 Key Definitions

Environment Surroundings to include all surface

water groundwater drinking water supply land

surface or subsurface area or ambient air within the

United States or under the jurisdiction of the United

States including manmade structures indoor air

environments natural resources and archeological

and cultural resources

Environmental Management Division MCB

Camp Lejeunersquos division responsible for

environmental issues and compliance at MCB Camp

Lejeune

Environmental Affairs Department MCAS New

Riverrsquos department responsible for environmental

issues and compliance at MCAS New River

Environmental Management System (EMS) A

systematic approach for integrating environmental


1-4

considerations and accountability into day-to-day

decisionmaking and long-term planning processes

across all missions practices and functions The

EMS institutionalizes processes for continual

environmental improvement and reducing risks to

mission through ongoing planning review and

preventive or corrective action

112 Key Concepts

Environmental Requirement A defined standard

pertaining to environmental compliance pollution

prevention (P2) or naturalcultural resources subject

to uniform application Environmental requirements

may be in the form of a law regulation Executive

Order (EO) policy ordinance permit Base Order

(BO) or other form that prescribes a standard

Executive Order Legally binding orders given by

the President as head of the Executive Branch to

direct Federal agencies and officials in their

execution of congressionally established laws or

policies

MCB Camp Lejeune Throughout this document

MCB Camp Lejeune includes all MCB Camp

Lejeune real property and contracts for work

performed at MCAS New River and all outlying

fields associated with MCB Camp Lejeune

Marine Corps Order A directive of continuing

authority or information meant to be a permanent

reference and requiring continuing action issued by

Headquarters Marine Corps (HQMC) In accordance


1-5

with MCO 52151K (10 May 2007) all MCOs shall

where applicable establish describe or change

existing policy programs and major activities and

organizations define missions assign

responsibilities issue procedural guidance and be

written in standardized format

Resident Officer In Charge of Construction The

ROICC administers construction contracts and is the

contractorrsquos first line of contact with the government

Regulatory Requirements Government (including

Federal State and local) environmental regulations

implemented by environmental statutes Federal

regulations often establish minimum standards for

State and local governmentsrsquo implementing

programs

Statutory Requirements Federal environmental

statutes are laws that generally require compliance

by US Department of Defense (DoD) installations

12 INSTALLATION BACKGROUND

MCB Camp Lejeune was established in 1941 in Onslow

County along the southern coast of North Carolina (NC)

MCB Camp Lejeune is just south of MCAS New River

MCB Camp Lejeune takes advantage of 156000 acres and

11 miles of beach capable of supporting amphibious

operations 32 gun positions 48 tactical landing zones three

state-of-the-art training facilities and 80 live fire ranges for

its training mission


1-6

The primary function of MCB Camp Lejeune is national

defense providing a home installation for the II Marine

Expeditionary Force (MEF) 2nd Marine Division 2nd

Force Service Support Group and other combat units and

support commands MCB Camp Lejeunersquos mission is to

maintain combat-ready units for expeditionary deployment

MCB Camp Lejeune maintains and utilizes supply

warehouses maintenance shops hazardous material storage

nonhazardous and hazardous waste storage bulk fuel storage

and transfer facilities fleet parking housing areas

recreational areas two golf courses and a marina

MCAS New River is the principal USMC helicopter

operating location on the East Coast and supports aircrew

training in the H-53 helicopter It is also the evaluation and

prospective bed-down site for the V-22 Osprey The mission

of MCAS New River is to provide the necessary support for

its Marine Aircraft Group (MAG) tenant units MAG-26 and

MAG-29

121 Environmental Management Division

and Environmental Affairs Department

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMD within the Installation and

Environment Department is responsible for all natural

resource and environmental matters aboard the installation

EMD works closely with MCB Camp Lejeune personnel

educating and training them to comply with environmental

laws while accomplishing the military mission

The EAD at MCAS New River works closely with the EMD

on environmental compliance and protection matters Due to


1-7

various joint operations MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS

New River participate together in one EMS See Figure 1-1

and Figure 1-2 for organization charts of EMD and EAD

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB

Camp Lejeune) Organization Chart


River)

Organization Chart

122 Expectations

Contractors aboard the installation which are committed to

strict compliance with environmental laws and regulations


1-8

assist MCB Camp Lejeune in providing the best possible

training facilities for todayrsquos Marines and Sailors while

honoring our environmental responsibilities and objectives

Violation of environmental laws may result in severe civil or

criminal penalties and fines

13 OVERVIEW OF REQUIREMENTS

Contractors operating aboard MCB Lejeune and MCAS

New River must be aware of and adhere to all applicable

environmental regulations and requirements which include

but may not be limited to the following

EO 12088 Federal Compliance with Pollution

Control Standards (October 13 1978) Requires

all facilities owned by or leased to or by the military

to be designed operated and maintained in

compliance with all applicable environmental

standards Military and civilian personnel must

cooperate with Federal State and local

environmental protection agencies and comply with

applicable standards and criteria issued by these

agencies to the extent permitted by law

EO 13423 Strengthening Federal Environmental

Energy and Transportation Management

Requires Federal agencies to comply with applicable

Federal State local and host nation environmental

laws and regulations Additionally requirements

include more widespread use of EMSs as the

framework for sustainability management


1-9

EO 13514 Federal Leadership in Environmental

Energy and Economic Performance Requires

Federal agencies to meet various sustainability goals

to include the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions

Applicable provisions for meeting these goals are to

be included in acquisition and service contracts

MCO P50902A Environmental Compliance and

Protection Manual (26 August 2013) USMC

policies and responsibilities for compliance with

environmental statutes and regulations as well as the

management of USMC environmental programs

131 Contractor Environmental Guide

This guide consists of the following information

MCB Camp Lejeune Contractor Environmental

Guide

EMS overview and requirements

Environmental program-specific requirements

MCB Camp Lejeune General EMS and

Environmental Awareness Training for Contractors

and Vendors

Signature Page


1-10

Prior to beginning work onsite

or within 30 days of beginning

work onsite all contractors and

their employees performing

work aboard MCB Camp

Lejeune must review these

materials and complete EMS and

General Environmental

Awareness training This guide

summarizes the EMS and

environmental programs at

MCB Camp Lejeune as well as

key requirements associated

with the various environmental

issues contractors may

encounter while performing

work aboard the installation

Contractors are expected to work

with their ROICC or Contract

Representatives and EMDEAD when environmental

concerns or issues arise

132 Environmental and EMS Training

In accordance with Department of Defense (DoD)

instructions and MCOs EMD has implemented a

Comprehensive Environmental Training and Education

Program (CETEP) The goal of the CETEP is to ensure that

appropriate environmental instruction and related

information are provided to all levels of the Marine Corps in

the most effective and efficient manner to achieve full

compliance with all applicable environmental training

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors and their employeesperforming work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune mustreview these materials and complete EMS and General EnvironmentalAwareness

training

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors and their employees performing work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must review these materials and complete EMS and General Environmental Awareness

training


1-11

requirements A major component of the CETEP is to

provide general environmental

awareness training to all

individuals associated with the

installation including

contractors

In addition to CETEP

requirements MCB Camp

Lejeune has implemented an

installation-wide EMS The

EMS highlights the fact that the

authority and principal

responsibility for controlling environmental impacts belong

to those commands units offices and personnel (including

contractors) whose activities have the potential to impact the

environment

All contractors are required to receive both EMS and general

environmental awareness training at the level necessary for

their job function This guide satisfies these training

requirements (See the Appendix)

As such contractors working aboard MCB Camp Lejeune

will do the following

Conduct job responsibilities in compliance with

environmental regulations and in conformance with

EMS requirements

Complete all applicable environmental training and

maintain associated records as per contract

requirements

All contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness training at the level necessary for their job function


1-12

Complete EMS and general environmental

awareness training and be aware of and understand

the MCB Camp Lejeune Environmental Policy

Contact their ROICC or Contract Representative

immediately regarding environmental andor EMS

issues

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days all

contractors must sign and date the signature page and return

it to the installation Contract Representative Anyone who

works on a contract at any point during the contract period

must receive this information and training

14 POINTS OF CONTACT

EMD Branches and phone numbers are found in the

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory on pages xv and xvi of this

Guide All initial inquiries regarding an environmental issue

should be directed to the ROICC or Contract Representative

who will either directly contact or refer the contractor to the

appropriate environmental office if additional clarification is

necessary In the case of a spill or environmental emergency

immediately dial 911 Additional emergency response

procedures are provided in Section 50 of this Guide


1-13

Table 1-1 Contacts in Case of a Spill

15 OVERVIEW MAP

Figure 1-3 provides an overview map that displays the

locations of installation facilities discussed throughout this

Guide

For spills of Call

Follow-

up

Hazardous waste 911 Spill

Report

Unknown materials 911 Spill

Report

Material on a permeable

surface 911

Spill

Report

Any amount of a POL or Hazardous Material

911 Spill

Report

Material that reaches

stormwater inlets or

waterways

911

Nonhazardous waste (910)

451-1482911


1-14

Figure 1-3 Overview Map


2-1

20 ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS

New River jointly operate an

EMS which provides a

systematic way of continually

implementing environmental

requirements and evaluating

performance The EMS is

founded on the principles of

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos

Environmental Policy which is

endorsed by the Commanding

General (CG) Three key

principles of the Environmental

Policy are to

Comply with relevant environmental laws and

regulations

Prevent pollution and

Continually improve the EMS

The EMS promotes sustained mission readiness through

actively identifying and implementing opportunities for

efficient resource use The USMC implements EMS at all

levels to continually improve environmental compliance

programs and meet evolving EOs and DoD requirements for

mission sustainability The EMS highlights the fact that the

authority and principal responsibility for controlling

environmental impacts belong to those commands units

Three key principles of the Environmental Policy are to comply with relevant environmental laws and regulations prevent pollution and continually improve our EMS


2-2

offices and personnel (including contractors and vendors)

whose activities have the potential to impact the

environment

21 KEY DEFINITION AND CONCEPTS

The following key definitions

and concepts are associated with

an EMS Please consult the

ROICC or Contract

Representative with any

questions about these definitions

or concepts

211 Key Definitions

Environment Surroundings in which an

organization operates including air water land

natural resources flora fauna humans and their

interrelation

Environmental Aspect A characteristic of an

organizationrsquos activities products or services that

may cause in normal operation or upset mode an

impact to an environmental or other resource Each

practice may have several aspects

Environmental Impact An effect beneficial or

adverse of a practicersquos aspect on an environmental

or other resource Each practice may have several

impacts

Environmental Resources Sensitive

environmental receptors (eg air water natural

Please consult the ROICC or Contract Representative with any

questions


questions


2-3

resources) or cultural or historic assets at MCB Camp

Lejeune or MCAS New River in the surrounding

community within the ecosystem or beyond that

may be impacted by the operation of practices

Practice A unit process that supports a military

mission and may impact environmental resources (It

is the ability to impact an environmental resource

that is key to defining a practice However practices

may also impact other resources)

Practice Owner Person(s) responsible for control of

practices EMS procedures use the term practice

owner when the assignment of more specific

responsibilities is left to the owning organizations

Requirement Legislation regulation or policy

issued by any Executive Federal State local DoD

Department of Navy (DoN) or USMC authority that

addresses environmental considerations and requires

action

212 Key Concepts

Environmental Management System A




across all missions activities and functions The


environmental improvement and for reducing risks

to mission through ongoing planning review and



2-4

Environmental Policy Public commitment by

senior leaders to the management of the installationrsquos

environmental affairs including environmental

compliance pollution prevention naturalcultural

resource management cleanup risk to mission and

continual improvement of the EMS

Plan Do Check Act Four-step model by which the

EMS carries out change ndash Plan establish objectives

and processes Do implement and execute the plan

Check study and analyze the results Act take

action based on what you learned

Figure 2-1 Plan Do Check Act Cycle


2-5


Contractors operating aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and

MCAS New River must be aware of and adhere to all

applicable regulations and requirements concerning EMS

which include but may not be limited to the following

EO 13148 Greening the Government Through

Leadership in Environmental Management

Mandates that environmental management

considerations must be an integral component of

Federal Government policies operations planning

and management with the primary goal for each

agency to promote the sustainable management of

Federal facility lands through the implementation of

cost-effective environmentally sound practices and

programs to reduce adverse impacts to the natural

environment



Establishes the EMS as the primary management

approach for addressing environmental aspects

including energy and transportation aspects and as

the reporting mechanism for communicating

progress on meeting performance goals

EO 13514 Leadership in Environmental Energy

and Economic Performance Requires continuing

implementation of formal EMSs at all appropriate

organizational levels to support the sustainability

performance requirements of the Order


2-6

23 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM

An EMS is a systematic way to identify and eliminate or

minimize the installationrsquos environmental risk-to-mission

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMS identifies practices and their

aspects as a starting point for prioritizing environmental

management initiatives Each installation practice such as

constructionrenovationdemolition equipment

operationmaintenancedisposal landscaping or

pesticideherbicide management and application has one or

more environmental aspects Figure 2-2 illustrates the

simplified potential interactions of one practice

constructionrenovationdemolition with the environment


2-7

Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and

Demolition Activities with the Environment


2-8

24 EMS RESPONSIBILITIES

Contractors are expected to understand that the practices

they support on the installation may interact with and have

the potential to impact the

environment Therefore it is

expected that contractors will do

the following

Review the Contractor

Environmental Guide

Be aware of the

Environmental Policy

(Attachment 2-1)

Conduct practices in a

way that avoids andor

minimizes impacts to the

environment by complying with all applicable

Federal State and local environmental regulations

and BOs

Be familiar with spill response procedures

Report all environmental emergencies and spills

Report any environmental problems or concerns

promptly and notify the ROICC or Contract

Representative

Respond to data collection efforts upon request

Contractors are expected to understand that the activities performed on the installation may interact with the environment and have the potential to impact the

environment


environment


2-9

25 CONTRACTOR ENVIRONMENTAL

GUIDE AND EMS

The sections of this Contractor Environmental Guide are

categorized based on the type of environmental requirements

routinely encountered by contractors at MCB Camp

Lejeune The following matrix is derived from MCB Camp

Lejeunersquos EMS Working Group sessions and relates the

contents of this guide to the practices aboard MCB Camp

Lejeune It is provided to assist contractors in narrowing

down specific requirements that may apply to onsite

activities


2-10


EMS

MCB Camp Lejeune 2015 Practices E

nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se

S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites

S

ec

tio

n 1

30

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Was

te R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

T

rain

ing

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Battery management

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Boat operation maintenance

Boat ramp dock cleaning

Boiler operation Building operation maintenance repair

Channel dredging

Chlorination

Composting Constructiondemo renovation

Cooling tower operation and maintenance

De-greasing Drinking water management

Engine operation and maintenance

Equipment operation maintenancedisposal

Erosion runoff control

Fish stocking


2-11


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

Tra

inin

g

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Fueling and fuel mgt storage

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Grease traps

Habitat management

HCP operation

HM storage

HM transportation HW disposal offsite transport

HW satellite accumulation area

HW storage (lt90 days)

HW transportation

Land clearing

Landfill gas energy recovery system

Landscaping

Laundry Live fire range operation

Livestock operation

Metal working Non-destructive inspection

ODS halon management

Packagingunpack-aging


2-12


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

T

rain

ing

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Paint booth

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Paint gun cleaning

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement Pesticideherbicide mgt and application

Polishing Pumping station force main

Range residue clearance

Recreational facilities operation

Road construction and maintenance

Rock-crushing operations

Roofing kettle

Sewers

Sidewalk and road deicing

Soil excavationgrading

Solid waste collectiontransportation

Storage tank management


2-13


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

Tra

inin

g

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Sec

tio

n 1

40

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Stormwater collection conveyance

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Surface washing Swimming pool operation and maintenance

Timber management

Universal waste storage collection

Urban wildlife management

UXOEOD operations

Vehicle maintenance

Vehicle parking

Wash rack


2-14



2-15

Attachment 2-1

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos Environmental

Policy Statement


2-16


2-17



2-18


3-1

30 TRAINING

The contractor is responsible

for ensuring that every

employee completes a

program of classroom

instruction or on-the-job

training that teaches the

employee to perform his or

her duties in compliance with

Federal State and local

regulatory requirements

To minimize the

environmental impact of

MCB Camp Lejeune

operations all civilian and

military personnel including

contractors are required to

receive both EMS and general environmental awareness

training at the level necessary for their job function Use of

the Contractor Environmental Guide satisfies these training

requirements A training presentation is provided in the

Appendix

NOTE The contractor is responsible for knowing and

complying with Federal State and local regulations MCB

Camp Lejeune environmental personnel will assist




Please consult the ROICC or Contract Representative with any questions or concerns about the information in this section

To minimize the environmental impact of MCB Camp Lejeune operations all contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness training at the level necessary for their job function


3-2

replace any required regulatory training as per contract

requirements Required training should be completed prior

to working at MCB Camp Lejeune




contractor training If you have

any questions or concerns about

the information in this section

please consult the ROICC or


will contact the appropriate

environmental office if

additional clarification is

necessary

311 Key Definitions

Explicitly Required Training Training expressly

required by specific laws regulations or policies that

apply due to the nature of work assignments job

functions andor specific licensing or certification

requirements mandated by environmental laws

regulations or policies

Implicitly Required Training

Instructioninformation that is not expressly required

by laws regulations or policies but that may be

reasonably inferred as being required to maintain

compliance or is determined through EMS to reduce

overall environmental risk



3-3

312 Key Concepts

Comprehensive Environmental Training and

Education Program (CETEP) The USMC training

program designed to ensure that high-quality

efficient and effective environmental training

education and information are provided at all levels

of the USMC

Environmental Management System (EMS) The

part of the overall management system that includes

organizational structure planning activities

responsibilities practices procedures processes

and resources for developing implementing

achieving reviewing and maintaining the


EMS Training All contractors are required to

receive EMS training at the level necessary for their

job function

General Environmental Awareness Training

Instruction designed to ensure that MCB Camp

Lejeune and MCAS New River personnel become

familiar with the installation environmental policies

and programs for regulatory compliance natural

resource conservation P2 and environmental

protection General EMS and Environmental

Awareness Training for contractors and vendors is

required for all MCB Camp Lejeune contractors The

training presentation is included as an Appendix to

this document


3-4

313 Environmental Management System

Training is potentially applicable to all EMS practices

conducted aboard MCB Camp Lejeune




regulations and requirements concerning training which

include but may not be limited to the following

Executive Order 13423 Strengthening Federal

Environmental Energy and Transportation

Management Requires implementation of an EMS at

all appropriate organizational levels

33 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

331 General Environmental Awareness

In accordance with DoD instructions

and MCO the EMD at MCB Camp

Lejeune has implemented a CETEP A

major component of the CETEP is to


awareness training to all individuals

associated with the installation

including contractors and vendors

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning

work onsite all contractors and their

employees performing work aboard Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors are required to receive

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness

training


3-5

MCB Camp Lejeune must receive general environmental

awareness training


In addition to CETEP requirements MCB Camp Lejeune

has implemented an installation-wide EMS per EO 13423

Strengthening Federal Environmental Energy and

Transportation Management and DoD and USMC EMS

policy The EMS highlights the fact that the authority and

principal responsibility for controlling environmental

impacts belong to those commands units offices and

personnel (including contractors and vendors) whose

activities have the potential to impact the environment

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all

contractors and their employees performing work aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune must receive EMS training

333 Recordkeeping

Upon completion of the training materials included in the

Appendix of the Contractor Environmental Guide each

employee must sign the Training Roster The Contracting

Representative must maintain these records in the contract

file

All training records including other applicable

environmental training must be maintained onsite for

review


3-6



4-1

40 AIR QUALITY

The Air Quality Program is responsible for ensuring that the

installation complies with all applicable Federal State and

local air quality regulations The ROICC or Contract

Representative will provide a copy of BO 50906A Air

Quality Management which has additional information




air quality If you have any

questions or concerns about the

information in this section






necessary

411 Key Definitions

Criteria Pollutants Pollutants that the US

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

Administrator has determined will cause or

contribute to air pollution that may reasonably be

anticipated to endanger public health and welfare

and for which air quality criteria have been

established (ie sulfur dioxide nitrogen oxides




4-2

ground-level ozone carbon monoxide lead and

particulate matter)

Dust-Causing Activity Any activity that has the

potential to generate an excess level of dust

including but not limited to construction and

demolition (CampD) blasting and sanding

construction of haul roads land clearing or fallow

fields

Hazardous Air Pollutants Air pollutants as

identified within 42 United States Code (USC) 7412

that cause or may cause cancer or other serious health

effects such as reproductive effects or birth defects

or adverse environmental and ecological effects

Ozone-Depleting Substance Chemicals such as

certain refrigerants that cause depletion of the

stratospheric ozone layermdashprimarily

chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and

hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) and their blends

Particulate Matter A criteria air pollutant that

includes dust soot and other small materials that are

released into and transported by air

Title V Operating Permit Permit issued under the

Clean Air Act (CAA) Amendments of 1990 for all

major sources of air pollution All emission sources

at the installation must be listed on the permit

412 Key Concepts

Emission Sources Before beginning any emitting

activity please have the ROICC or Contract


4-3

Representative contact EMD to determine whether

any permitting monitoring reporting testing andor

recordkeeping requirements apply

Permitted Sources Ensure that

constructionauthorization permits are in place prior

to beginning construction andor prior to the arrival

onsite of new or additional emission sources

(emergency generators paint booths etc)


Contractor activities associated with air quality include the

following

Boat operationmaintenance

Boiler operation

Chlorination

Degreasing


Fueling and fuel managementstorage

Hazardous material (HM) storagetransportation

Hazardous waste (HW) satellite accumulation

areaHW transportation

Live fire range operations

Metal working

Ozone-depleting substance (ODS)halon

management


4-4

Paint booth operationspaint gun cleaningpaint

removal

Polishing





Unexploded ordnance (UXO)explosives and

ordnance disposal (EOD) operations

Vehicle maintenance

The potential impacts of these activities on the environment

include degradation of air quality degradation of quality of

life and depletion of nonrenewable resources


Contractors operating aboard the installation must be aware

of and adhere to all applicable regulations and requirements

regarding air quality which include but may not be limited

to

Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 Protect

human health and clean air resources by establishing

standards and regulations for the control of air

pollutants

Title V Operating Permit Operating permit

required for any major stationary source that emits or


4-5

has the potential to emit 100 tons per year or more of

any criteria air pollutant and outlines the

requirements to address and ensure air quality

compliance

BO 50906A Air Quality Management

Implements policies and procedures at the

installation level that all personnel must follow in

order to demonstrate compliance with the Title V

permit and USMC requirements

Base Bulletin 5090 Open Burning of Vegetative

Debris Outlines procedures for conducting open

burning in accordance with State regulations and

installation procedures

North Carolina Department of Air Quality

(NCDAQ) Rules Outlines all State-specific air

quality rules control requirements procedures for

permits and approvals contained in 15A North

Carolina Administrative Code (NCAC) 02D 02H

and 02Q applicable to North Carolina entities

43 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS

The installation has a single permit the CAA Title V

Construction and Operating Permit which includes all

stationary air emission sources at the facility therefore all

permit application submittals to the NCDAQ must be

coordinated through the EMD The NCDAQ will review and

process the application and then issue a permit to construct

and operate or to modify the emission source(s) A permit is

required prior to the construction of any emission source

Timely submittal of the permit application is required to

A permit is required for the construction of any emission source Timely submittal of the permit application is necessary to ensure the permit is available before commencing

construction


4-6

obtain the final permit prior to

commencing construction The most

common types of emission sources

at the installation are as follows

Boilers

Generators

Engine test stands

Surface coatingpainting

operations

Paint removal (chemical and

mechanical) abrasive

blasting or other surface preparation activities

Fuel storage and fuel dispensing

Grinding

Woodworking

Welding

ODSrefrigerant recovery and recycling operations

(industrial chillers refrigerators air conditioning

compressors cleaning agents etc)

Bulk chemical and flammable materials storage

44 ADDITIONAL ACTIVITIES OF

CONCERN

Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative for

additional information regarding activities that do not


construction


4-7

necessarily require modification to the Title V permit but

that must be coordinated with or tracked by EMD or the

NCDAQ Examples of these activities include but are not

limited to the following

Use Maintenance and Management of

Refrigerants and other ODS Includes installation

recovery replacement conversion or service of

refrigerant-containing equipment (chillers

refrigerators air conditioning condensers etc) All

contractors will use Best Management Practices

(BMPs) during refrigerant management activities

All Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning

(HVAC) technicians will maintain their appropriate

State-specific licenses and present them to the

ROICC or Contract Representative upon request

Emergency Generators Includes the installation

and temporary use of emergency generators during

electrical failures and construction activities All

contractors will coordinate with the ROICC or

Contract Representative to determine if the intended

generator may be exempted or must be temporarily

permitted for the intended use

Open Burning (eg right-of-way clearing storm

debris burning) Open burning activities aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River must

coordinated through EMD and the Fire Department

Open burning activities are only permissible for land

clearing and right-of-way maintenance when the

following conditions are met


4-8

The wind direction at the time the burning is

initiated is away from any public transport roads

within 250 feet so they are not affected by smoke

ash or other air pollutants from the burning

The location of the burning is at least 500 feet

from any dwelling group of dwellings

commercial or institutional establishment or

other occupied structure not located on the

property on which the burning is conducted

unless an air curtain burner is used If an air

curtain burner is used the regional office

supervisor may grant exceptions to the setback

requirements

Heavy oils asphaltic materials (eg shingles and

other roofing materials) items containing natural

or synthetic rubber or any materials other than

vegetative plant growth are not burned

Initial burning must begin between 0800 and

1800 After 1800 no material may be added to

the fire until 0800 the following day

No fires may be started and no vegetation may

be added to existing fires when the North

Carolina Division of Forest Resources has

banned burning for that area

Burners that have the potential to burn more than

8100 tons per year may be subject to Title V air

quality permitting requirements

Situations that require a regulatory exemption

evaluation by the NCDAQ Regional Office


4-9

Supervisor are coordinated through EMDrsquos

Environmental Quality Branch Air Quality Program

Manager The ROICC or Contract Representative

will address any additional questions or provide a

copy of Base Bulletin 5090 which contains a

summary of the installationrsquos open burning

requirements

The four designated sites at MCB Camp Lejeune that

are permitted for storing andor burning storm debris

are in the following areas Mainside at the borrow pit

near the Piney Green landfill Courthouse Bay Camp

Johnson and Camp Geiger Only storm debris may

be accumulated at these sites EMD must notify the

NCDAQ if the installation intends to burn the storm

debris at one of these sites Contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative for more information

Fire training outside of designated fire training

pits State approval is required to conduct fire

training outside of the designated fire training pits

First complete the Notification of Open Burning for

the Training of Firefighting Personnel form The

form is available at the following site

httpdaqstatencusenfopenburnob_firetrainpdf

Before the training exercise an accredited North

Carolina Asbestos Inspector must inspect any

structure to be burned to ensure that it is free from

asbestos Turn in the completed form to EMD for

submittal to NCDAQ and the Division of Public

Health Health Hazards Control Unit Contact the


4-10

ROICC or Contract Representative for additional

information

Dust-causing activities (eg concrete and rock

crushing) Wet suppression is required during the

entire dust-causing operation Ensure that an

adequate water supply is available and coordinate

with the Fire and Emergency Services Division if

access to a fire hydrant is necessary Applicable wet

suppression may be required during temporary

concrete-crushing operations during CampD activities

Noise Management USMC commands engaged in

any activity resulting in noise emissions must

comply with Federal State interstate and local

requirements for the control and management of

environmental noise to minimize disruption to the

local community To the maximum extent

practicable personnel should limit the use of power

tools machinery construction equipment and other

noisy devices to normal working hour


5-1

50 ENVIRONMENTAL EMERGENCY

PLANNING AND RESPONSE

Environmental emergency planning and response can reduce

injuries protect employees reduce asset losses minimize

downtime and minimize environmental impacts of

uncontrolled releases of pollutants to air land and water

The purpose of emergency planning is to prepare for

mitigate respond to and recover from environmental

emergencies while minimizing any potential impacts to

human health and the environment Contractors operating

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must be aware of and adhere to

all environmental emergency response procedures and

notification requirements to minimize detrimental effects

from inadvertent releases

Procedures relating to emergencies caused by unforeseen

site conditions are addressed in Section 50of this guide If

an environmental emergency is identified contact 911

immediately Additional inquiries should be directed to the

ROICC or Contract

Representative

51 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS

The following key definitions and

concepts are associated with

environmental emergency

response and spill response

requirements If you have any

Please consult the ROICC or Contract Representative with any questions or concerns about the information in

this section


this section


5-2

questions or concerns about the information in this section

please consult the ROICC or Contract Representative who

will contact the appropriate environmental office if

additional clarification is necessary

511 Key Definitions

Berm A mound used to prevent the spread of a

contaminant

Discharge Any spilling leaking pumping pouring

emitting emptying or dumping not explicitly

permitted

Navigable waters The waters of the United States

and territorial seas including waters that have been

or may be used for commerce waters subject to tidal

flow interstate waters and wetlands and all other

waters (intrastate lakes rivers streams intermittent

streams flats wetlands sloughs prairies wet

meadows natural ponds tributaries etc)

Petroleum Oil and Lubricant (POL) A broad

term that includes all petroleum and associated

products or oil of any kind or in any form including

but not limited to petroleum fuel oil vegetable oil

animal oil sludge oil refuse and oil mixed with

wastes

Release Pumping pouring emitting emptying

discharging injecting escaping leaching dumping

or disposing into the environment (including the

abandonment or discarding of barrels containers

and other closed receptacles) of any hazardous


5-3

chemical hazardous substance or extremely

hazardous substance (EHS) Releases may be

aboveground belowground or to water

Spill Event The reportable discharge of oil into or

upon the navigable waters of the United States or

adjoining shorelines in harmful quantities as defined

by the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in 40 CFR

110

512 Key Concepts

Environmental Emergency Response Contacts

The following table identifies the emergency contact

information for various spill scenarios In addition to

these emergency response contacts the ROICC or

Contract Representative should be notified

immediately after an incident

Table 5-1 Environmental Emergency Response Contacts

For spills of Call

Follow-

up


Report


Report


surface 911

Spill

Report


5-4

Contractors have containment and cleanup

responsibilities following a spill and there may be

additional follow-up reporting or requirements


additional guidance


Environmental planning and response are potentially

applicable to all EMS practices conducted aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune




regulations and requirements regarding emergency response

For spills of Call

Follow-

up


911 Spill

Report



waterways

911


451-1482911


5-5

and spill response procedures which include but may not be


Clean Air Act of 1970 Section 112r Mandates the

prevention and control of air emissions and specifies

emergency planning where the potential exists for

accidental release of hazardous air pollutants

Clean Water Act (CWA) of 1972 Establishes the

basic structure for regulating discharges of pollutants

into the waters of the United States The CWA

establishes that there should be no discharges of oil

or hazardous substances into or upon the navigable

waters of the United States or adjoining shorelines

which may affect natural resources under the

management of the United States

Comprehensive Environmental Response

Compensation and Liability (CERCLA) Act of

1980 Authorizes a Federal response to any release

or threatened release of a hazardous substance into

the environment This act defines hazardous

substances by reference to substances that are listed

or designated under other environmental statutes

Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-

Know Act (EPCRA) of 1986 Section 304

Establishes requirements for reporting a release to

ensure a quick response by local emergency

responders Notification requirements apply to two

chemical lists the CERCLA Hazardous Substance

list and the EHS list The ldquoList of Listsrdquo provides a

comprehensive identification of hazardous


5-6

substances and EHSs In addition facilities may be

required to submit a list of their hazardous materials

inventory maintained onsite or Safety Data Sheets

(SDS) to response personnel

Oil Pollution Act (OPA) of 1990 Addresses oil

storage at facilities and emphasizes preparedness and

response activities This act prohibits the harmful

discharge of oil and hazardous substances into waters

of the United States The OPA requires contingency

planning for ldquoworst caserdquo discharges and

demonstrated response capabilities through

planning equipment training and exercises

Resource Conservation and Recovery Act

(RCRA) of 1976 Protects human health and the

environment from the hazards associated with

hazardous waste handling generation

transportation treatment storage and disposal

Subtitle C of the RCRA requires owners and

operators of hazardous waste facilities to develop

comprehensive management plans that address spill

prevention and cleanup

53 SPILL NOTIFICATION

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill

Notification Procedures

In accordance with MCB Camp Lejeune notification

requirements any discharge of oil or hazardous materials

must be immediately reported to the MCB Camp Lejeune

Fire Department at 911

Contractors must develop a Unit-Level Contingency Plan that addresses the spill response for their specific sites and potential spill types


5-7

MCB Camp Lejeune maintains a Spill Prevention Control

and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan that establishes

procedures to prevent oil spills and documents existing oil

spill prevention structures procedures and equipment The

Installation SPCC Plan provides general information for any

type of response actions needed for spills aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune Contractors

engaged in the handling and

transfer of POL or hazardous

materials must develop a Unit-

Level Contingency Plan (ULCP)

that addresses the spill response for

their specific sites and potential

spill types This ULCP must be

maintained onsite and all personnel

working within that site must be

made aware of its location and use

In the event of a spill contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative (after contacting emergency responders) to

obtain a spill report form Return the completed spill report

form to EMD (fax to (910) 451-3471) and to the ROICC or

Contract Representative A copy of the spill report form is

included as Attachment 5-1 The following information must

be provided when reporting a spill

Name and phone number

Location of spill (building number street)

Number and type of injuries if any

Type and amount of spilled material



5-8

Source of the spill (container vehicle etc)

Action being taken if any to control the spill

Estimated time of spill

Do not wait to report a spill even if all of the required

information is not immediately available


Notification


MCAS New River must be aware of water and wastewater

utilities in their specific workproject area

Wastewater Spills

In the event of a wastewater spill report the incident to the

Public Works Base Utilities at (910) 451-7190 (x225) In

addition report the incident immediately to the ROICC or

Contract Representative The following information must be

provided


Location of spill (building number street address)


Source of the spill




5-9

Water Line Breaks

In the event of a water line break report the incident to the




provided



Reason for the break

Estimated time of the break

54 FOLLOW-UP

If surface run-off is contaminated the contractor will under

the advisement of the Fire Department or EMD construct a

temporary berm or containment area Contaminated surface

water will be removed in accordance with all safety and

environmental requirements for the installation Notify the

Resource Conservation and Recovery Section (RCRS) at

(910) 451-1482) the RCRS will provide concurrence for

temporary containment areas and removal of contaminated

runoff

If solid or hazardous waste was generated as the result of a

spill refer to Sections 120 and 70 of this guide for disposal

requirements


5-10



5-11

Attachment 5-1

Spill Reporting Form


5-12


5-13



5-14


6-1

60 CULTURAL RESOURCES

MCB Camp Lejeune enjoys a rich history and remnants of

our past may be found throughout the real properties that

make up the installation All personnel at MCB Camp

Lejeune are responsible for ensuring the cultural resources

entrusted to the USMC care remain intact and available for

future generations Contractors are responsible for notifying

the ROICC or Contract Representative immediately if they

encounter suspected archaeological sites artifacts or human

remains




cultural resource management If

you have any questions or

concerns about the information

in this section please consult the

ROICC or Contract

Representative who will contact

the appropriate environmental

office if additional clarification

is necessary

611 Key Definitions

Archaeological Resource Defined by the

Archaeological Resources Protection Act (ARPA) as

any material remains of past human life or activities


this section


this section


6-2

that are at least 100 years old and are capable of

providing scientific or human understanding of past

human behavior and cultural adaptation including

the site on which the remains are located Examples

include pottery basketry bottles weapons weapon

projectiles tools structures or portions of structures

pit houses rock paintings rock carvings intaglios

graves human skeletal materialsremains or any

portion or piece of any of the foregoing items or

structures Non-fossilized and fossilized

paleontological specimens or any portion or piece

thereof are not considered archaeological resources

unless found in an archaeological context

(According to the National Historic Preservation Act

(NHPA) of 1966 some historic properties built

within the past 50 years can achieve significance if

they are of exceptional importance [National

Register Criteria Consideration G])

Cultural Resource A generic term for the collective

evidence of the past activities and accomplishments

of people including buildings structures districts

sites features and objects of significance in history

architecture archaeology engineering or culture

per MCO P50902A

Effect Any condition of a project that may cause a

change in the quality of the historic architectural

archaeological or cultural character of a property

that qualifies it for listing in the National Register of

Historic Places (NRHP) A project is considered to

have an effect on a historic or cultural property when

any aspect of the project changes the integrity of the


6-3

location design setting materials workmanship

feeling or association of the property that

contributes to its significance

Historic Property Any prehistoric or historic

district site building structure or object significant

in US history architecture archaeology

engineering or culture and included or eligible for

listing in the NRHP per the NHPA and MCO

P50902A

State Historic Preservation Officer The person

designated to administer the State Historic

Preservation Program including identifying and

nominating eligible properties to the NRHP and

administering applications for listing historic

properties in the NRHP

612 Key Concepts

Notification Contractors must notify the ROICC or

Contract Representative if they encounter any

cultural resources

Policy DoD policy is to preserve significant historic

and archaeological resources


Contractor practices associated with cultural resources

include the following

Constructiondemolitionrenovation

Land clearing


6-4




include damage destruction alteration theft or demolition

of historic properties


It is DoD policy to integrate the archeological and historic

preservation requirements of applicable laws with the

planning and management of activities under DoD control

to minimize expenditures through judicious application of

options available in complying with applicable laws and to

encourage practical economically feasible rehabilitation

and adaptive use of significant historical resources



regulations and requirements regarding cultural resources


BO 50908A Sets forth regulations and establishes

responsibilities associated with management of

archaeological and historic resources aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune

Archaeological and Historic Preservation Act

(AHPA) of 1974 (16 USC 469 et seq) Amends the

Reservoir Salvage Act to extend its provisions

beyond the construction of dams to any terrain

alteration resulting from any Federal construction


6-5

project or federally licensed project activity or

program

Archeological Resources Protection Act of 1979

(16 USC 470 et seq) Requires Federal land

managers to issue permits for the excavation or

removal of artifacts from lands under their

jurisdiction The ARPA requires that relevant Native

American tribes be notified of permit issuance if

significant religious or cultural sites will be affected

It prohibits the excavation damage alteration theft

or defacement of an archaeological site or artifacts

unless permitted by the Federal land manager

DoD Directive 47101 Archaeological and

Historic Resources Management Provides policy

for the management of archaeological and historic

resources on land and in water under DoD control

EO 11593 May 13 1971 Requires all Federal

agencies to administer cultural properties under their

control Agencies are required to direct their policies

plans and programs so that significant sites and

structures are preserved

Historic Sites Buildings and Antiquities Act of

1935 (Public Law 74-292 16 USC 461 et seq)

States that it is Federal policy to preserve historic and

prehistoric properties of national significance

National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) of

1969 (42 USC 4321 et seq) States that it is Federal

government policy to preserve important historic

cultural and natural aspects of our national heritage


6-6

and requires the consideration of environmental

concerns during project planning and execution

National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16

USC 470 et seq) Establishes historic preservation

as a national policy and requires Federal agencies

undertaking actions that may affect NRHP-eligible

historic properties to consult State historic

preservation offices and the Advisory Council on

Historic Preservation Section 110 of NHPA requires

Federal agencies to inventory evaluate identify and

protect cultural resources that are determined eligible

for listing in the NRHP

Public Buildings Cooperative Use Act of 1976

(Public Law 94-541) Encourages adaptive reuse of

historic buildings as administrative facilities for

Federal agencies

Title 36 CFR Part 65 National Historic

Landmarks Program Identifies and designates

National Historic Landmarks and encourages the

long-range preservation of nationally significant

properties that illustrate or commemorate the history

and prehistory of the United States


6-7

63 PROCEDURES

All contractors are expected to follow these procedures

Notify the ROICC or Contract Representative

immediately concerning

any encounter with

suspected archaeological

sites artifacts human

remains or any other

suspected cultural

resources during

contractor activities

Stop work in the

immediate area of the

discovery until directed

by the Contract

Representative to resume

work

Be particularly aware of surroundings when working in a

designated historic area The Camp Lejeune Installation

Geospatial Information amp Services Office of the Geospatial

Services Division can provide resource mapping of known

cultural resource areas for all planners project managers

contractors and others through formal request The ROICC

or Contract Representative will assist with making

arrangements to request access for Geographic Information

System mapping

Notify the ROICC or Contract Representative immediately concerning any encounter with suspected archaeological sites artifacts or human remains during contractor activities



6-8

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow

Chart


7-1

70 HAZARDOUS

MATERIALSHAZARDOUS WASTE

MANAGEMENT

All persons on a USMC installation are subject to

compliance with Federal State and local regulations and

permit conditions addressing the proper management of

hazardous materials and waste Mishandling these wastes

and materials may result in violation notices fines andor

penalties The EPA regulates hazardous wastes through the

RCRA which provides specific regulatory definitions for

hazardous waste and its management The RCRA governs

all hazardous waste from the point of generation to ultimate

disposal including hazardous waste generated by

contractors aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New

River Hazardous materials including those used by

contractors aboard the installation are also regulated by the

EPCRA Additionally the North Carolina Department of

Environmental Quality (NCDEQ) has issued more stringent

rules and regulations governing hazardous materials and

hazardous waste management that also apply to contractors




hazardous materials (HM)

hazardous wastes (HW) and

their management If you have



Direct questions or concerns about the information in this section to the ROICC or Contract Representative



7-2




711 Key Definitions

90-day Accumulation Area These areas are used to

store HW temporarily until it is either manifested and

shipped off site for disposal or transferred to a

permitted storage facility HW may be accumulated

for up to 90 days in these areas MCB Camp

Lejeunersquos 90-day accumulation facility is located on

Michael Road

Generator Any person whose activity or process

produces HW or whose activity or process subjects

HW to regulation

Hazardous Material A chemical compound or a

combination of compounds posing or capable of

posing a significant risk to public health safety or

the environment as a result of its quantity

concentration or physicalchemicalinfectious

properties

Hazardous Waste Any discarded material

(including solid liquid or gas) or combination of

discarded materials which due to quantity

concentration or physical chemical or infectious

characteristics may

Cause or significantly contribute to an increase in

mortality or cause a serious irreversible or

incapacitating reversible illness or


7-3

Pose a substantial present or potential hazard to

human health or the environment when

improperly treated stored transported disposed

of or otherwise managed

Manifest A document that allows all parties

involved in HW management (eg generators

transporters disposal facilities EPA State agencies)

to track the movement of HW from the point of

generation to the point of ultimate treatment storage

or disposal All HW manifests for waste generated

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must be reviewed and

released by personnel from the Resource

Conservation and Recovery Section EMD who can

be contacted at (910) 451-1482

NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Waste that is not

regulated or is exempt from regulation under RCRA

HW requirements but has other regulatory

requirements for proper management

Satellite Accumulation Area (SAA) Designated

areas at or near the point of generation where HW is

accumulated Generators may accumulate up to 55

gallons of HW or one quart of acute HW at a satellite

area for an indefinite amount of time When 55

gallons of HW (or 1 quart of acute HW) are

exceeded the generator must date the container and

transfer it to an approved 90-day site or long-term

HW storage facility within 72 hours EMD

authorization for an SAA must be obtained and

posted at the site EMD authorization will establish

individual limits for each SAA No SAA


7-4

authorizations will exceed 55 gallons of HW or 1

quart of acute HW In accordance with installation

policy HW in an SAA should not be stored longer

than 365 days even if the container is not full

Safety Data Sheet (SDS) A document that provides

information about (1) chemical properties

environmental hazards and health hazards and (2)

protective measures along with safety precautions

for handling storing and transporting hazardous

chemical products The Hazard Communication

Standard (HCS) 29 CFR 19101200(g) was revised

in 2012 to mandate the use of a single Globally

Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling

of Chemicals (GHS) by manufacturers distributors

and importers to communicate information on

chemical-related hazards The information contained

in the SDS is standardized in a 16-section format

Employers must ensure that the SDSs for all

hazardous chemicals in the workplace are readily

accessible to employees

Treatment Any method technique or process

designed to change the physical chemical or

biological character or composition of any HW to

neutralize the waste or to recover energy or material

resources from the waste or to render such waste

nonhazardous or less hazardous safer to transport

store or dispose of or amenable for recovery or

storage or reduction in volume

Treatment Storage and Disposal (TSD)

Facilities TSD facilities conduct HW treatment


7-5

storage or disposal operations and require an RCRA

part B permit for final approval to operate The part

B permit is maintained to accurately identify the

most current operations at the TSD facility MCB

Camp Lejeune does not have a TSD facility

Universal Waste (UW) UW regulations streamline

HW management standards for batteries pesticides

mercury-containing equipment and fluorescent

lamps The regulations govern the collection and

management of these widely generated wastes thus

facilitating environmentally sound collection and

proper recycling or treatment In North Carolina

batteries thermostats obsolete agricultural

pesticides and fluorescent lamps may be managed

under the UW Rule UW must be transferred off site

within 1 year of the date when the material was first

identified as waste

Used Oil Any oil that has been refined from crude

oil or synthetic oil and as a result of use storage or

handling has become unsuitable for its original

purpose due to the presence of impurities or loss of

original properties Used oil may be suitable for

further use and is economically recyclable therefore

it is managed as a separate category of material

712 Key Concepts

HW Management The systematic control of the

collection source separation storage transportation

processing treatment recovery and disposal of HW

In addition HW Management includes processes to


7-6

reduce the HWrsquos effect on the environment and to

recover resources from it

HW Minimization The USMC policy is to reduce

the quantity of HW disposed of by source reduction

recycling treatment and disposal The highest

priorities are reducing HW generation and

recycling The goal of the USMC is to achieve

continuous reduction of HW generation through P2

initiatives BMPs and use of the best available

demonstrated technology

National Fire Protection Association The US

trade association that creates and maintains private

copyrighted standards and codes including the

diamond hazard label in Figure 7-1 which is used by

emergency personnel to quickly and easily identify

the risks posed by hazardous materials


7-7

Figure 7-1 Diamond Hazard Label


7-8


Contractor practices associated with HM and HW

management include but are not limited to the following

Battery management


Boiler operation

Building operation maintenancerepair

Chlorination


Constructionrenovation demolition

Degreasing

Drinking water management




Habitat management

HCP operation

HM storage

HM transportation

HW disposal offsite transport



7-9


HW transportation

Laboratory

Landscaping

Laundry


Metal working

Non-destructive inspection

ODShalon management

Paint gun cleaning

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement

Pesticideherbicide management and

application

Polishing

Pumping stationforce main



Roofing kettle



Swimming pool operation and maintenance


7-10

Universal waste storagecollection

UXOEOD operations

Vehicle maintenance

The potential impacts of these activities on the

environment include depletion of the HW landfill

depletion of non-renewable resources and

degradation of soil quality


7-11




regulations and requirements regarding HM and HW which


BO 50909 Hazardous MaterialWaste

ManagementAir Station Order (ASO) 50902

Environmental Compliance and Protection

Program for MCAS New River Establishes

procedures and general responsibilities for the

disposal of HM and HW under environmental

permits and authorizations


Know Act Establishes requirements regarding

emergency planning and the reporting of hazardous

chemical storage and use

Hazardous Material Transportation Act (HMTA)

of 1975 The principal Federal law regulating the

transportation of HM Established to mitigate the

risks to health property and the environment

inherent in the transportation of HM in intrastate

interstate and foreign commerce The HMTA is

administered by the US Department of

Transportation (DOT) and regulates the shipping

marking labeling placarding and recordkeeping

requirements for HM including HW and military

munitions


7-12

Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976

Establishes standards for HW generators as

necessary to protect human health and the

environment by instituting statutory standards for

generators and transporters of HW that will ensure

the following proper recordkeeping and reporting

use of a manifest system use of appropriate labels

and containers containerization and accumulation

time and proper management of TSD facilities In

addition it gives the EPA and State agencies

authority to access facility premises and all records

regarding HW management

40 CFR Subchapter I (Parts 260ndash299) Solid

Wastes Federal regulations promulgated under the

1976 RCRA that regulate HW management

generators transporters and owners or operators of

TSD facilities North Carolina has adopted the

Federal HW rules by reference

Because the installation is designated as a Large Quantity

Generator (LQG) of HW all HW generated aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune must meet the regulatory requirements of this

generator designation An LQG may maintain three types of

HW accumulationstorage areas satellite 90-day and

permitted Typically HW is accumulated at an SAA and

later transferred to a 90-day or permitted storage area

Both MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River maintain

Hazardous Waste Management Plans (HWMPs) that outline

the specific requirements for managing HM and HW The

HWMP identifies and provides guidance to implement all

regulatory HW management activities and is available to all


7-13

personnel who accumulate generate transport (including

on-installation transportation) treat store or dispose of

HW

Contractors are responsible for

the management of all HM and

the ultimate disposition of any

HW generated aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune during a contract

performance period The ROICC

or Contract Representative will

contact Environmental

personnel who will provide

additional guidance and

oversight to verify compliance

with applicable Federal State

and local laws governing the generation handling and

disposal of HM HW UW used oil petroleum-

contaminated materials RCRA-regulated HW and nonndash

RCRA-regulated waste

Depending on the type of project contractors may be

required to submit a site-specific HWMP to the ROICC or

the Contract Representative prior to beginning work

Additionally the Contracting Officer may require a

Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log and

corresponding SDSs for all materials to be used during the

execution of the contract EMDEAD will use the SDSs to

help contractors establish their Hazardous Material Storage

and SAAs

Contractors may be required to submit a Hazardous Waste Management Plan to the ROICC or the Contract Representative prior to beginning work


7-14

73 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

REQUIREMENTS

If a project uses HM

Reducereuserecycle when possible meet contract

requirements for recycling

Segregate incompatible

materials Consult the SDS

or material manufacturers

with questions about a

materialrsquos compatibility

Some examples of

incompatible materials

likely to be used by

contractors are

Corrosives (eg batteries stripping and cleaning

compounds containing acids or bases) and

Flammables (eg fuels oils paints and

adhesives)

Corrosives and Oxidizers (eg peroxide

perchlorates sodium hypochloritebleach or

calcium hypochlorite)

Oxidizers and Flammables

All compatible materials should be segregated and

stored within designated storage lockers or cabinets

(ie flammable materials should be stored in

designated flammable storage lockers or cabinets

and corrosives should be stored in designated

corrosives storage lockers or cabinets)

Do not store large quantities of materials Keep on hand only what can be used



7-15

Do not store large quantities of materials Keep on

hand only what can be used

Maintain an inventory of all HM maintained onsite

with adequate controls in place to prevent

unauthorized access

Do not dump any HM into floor drains sinks oil-

water separators (OWSs) or storm drains or onto the

ground

Store containers that

hold 55 gallons or more

(including in-use electrical

generators and portable

equipment) in proper

secondary containment

Permanent secondary

containment must be

inspected weekly temporary

secondary containment must

be inspected daily all

inspections and drainage of

stormwater from secondary

containment must be documented

Maintain SDSs and appropriate spill controlcleanup

materials onsite at all times

Provide HM storage and usage information for

regulatory reporting to the appropriate

environmental office upon request

Stop work immediately if a project unearths any

unknown HM (eg munitions and explosives of

Stop work immediately if a project unearths a hazardous material (such as MECDMMUXO) and report the situation to the ROICC or Contract Representative


7-16

concern [MEC] discarded military munitions

[DMM] or unexploded ordnance [UXO]) and

immediately report the situation to the ROICC or

Contract Representative

Do not leave HM (or HW) onsite once the contract is

completed Remove it from the installation or make

arrangements through the ROICC or Contract

Representative to contact RCRS or EAD for turn-in

procedures upon completion of the contract

74 UNIVERSAL WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

The NCDEQ allows thermostats obsolete agricultural

pesticides lamps and certain types of batteries to be

managed as UW UW has less stringent requirements for

storage transport and collection but it must still comply

with full HW requirements for final recycling treatment or

disposal Federal UW requirements are outlined in 40 CFR

273 Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative

regarding any additional direction or questions on the

handling of UW

All UW must be properly containerized stored and labeled

when the waste is first generated Containersareas for

accumulating UW must be labeled as follows

Words UNIVERSAL WASTE

Content Noun name found on the specific

Hazardous Waste Profile Sheet (DRMS Form 1930)

which is available from EMD (eg batteries


7-17

fluorescent lamps pesticides mercury-containing

equipment)

Accumulation Start Date (ASD) The ASD must be

marked on the subject container as soon as the UW

item is placed in the container Storage of UW cannot

exceed 365 days

Number of Containers The number of containers

marked reflects the total number of containers

disposed of within the current document (ie 1 of 1

etc)

Contractors who need UW accumulation areas should

contact the ROICC or Contract Representative who will

contact RCRS or EAD personnel to help contractors

establish an accumulation area for UW Key points for this

process

The containers must be under the control of the

contractor generating the waste and must be closed

at all times except when waste is being adding

Per installation policy UW containersareas must be

inspected weekly using the Weekly Hazardous Waste

(HW) Site Inspection Form included as Attachment

7-1 and Attachment 7-2 Written records noting

discrepancies and corrective actions must be

maintained onsite for 3 years Copies of inspection

reports should be provided to the ROICC or Contract

Representative

When the ASD reaches 1 year or when the container

is full the waste generator has 72 hours (3 days) to

arrange for the transportation of the UW to an RCRA

The appropriate environmental office must be notified before any hazardous waste is generated on projects managed by the ROICC or

the FSC


7-18

Part B permitted storage area Contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative to coordinate the removal of

the UW when the container is full or the contract is

finished

75 HAZARDOUS WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

The appropriate environmental

office must be notified before any

HW is generated on projects

managed by the ROICC or the

Facilities Support Contracts (FSC)

Have the ROICC or Contract

Representative contact RCRS or

EAD with questions regarding

whether or not a waste meets the

definition of HW Installation

personnel must approve all

regulated waste and HW storage locations

If a project generates HW

Minimize generation through waste minimization

and P2 techniques

Have the ROICC or Contract Representative contact

RCRS or EAD with questions regarding how to

manage the waste Do not mix waste types (eg used

oil rags and solvent rags)


RCRS or EAD for turn-in procedures as wastes are


the FSC


7-19

generated to determine if waste can be disposed of

on the installation

Do not dump any HW into floor drains sinks OWSs

or storm drains or onto the ground Do not place HW

into generalmunicipal trash dumpsters

Ensure that HW drums are properly labeled and lids

are secured (wrench tight)

Ensure that SAAs are managed properly and storage

limits are not exceeded have the ROICC or Contract

Representative consult RCRS or EAD prior to

creating a new SAA

751 Storage

All HW must be properly containerized stored and labeled

at the time the waste is first generated HW must be stored

in containers that meet applicable DOT specifications HW

labels as required by the EPA and the NCDEQ must contain

the following information

Words HAZARDOUS WASTE



provided by RCRS or EAD

ASD For HW accumulated in an SAA the ASD will

be affixed once the container is filled or at the 1-year

anniversary whichever comes first

Number of Containers Reflects the total number of

containers (e g 1 of 1 etc)


7-20

Any HW generated by contractors must be stored in an SAA

Contractors who need an SAA should contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative who will contact RCRS or EAD

personnel to help the contractor establish each SAA A

summary of procedures follows

The HW generator may accumulate as much as 55

gallons of a specific HW stream (or up to one quart

of acute HW) in a container at or near the point of

generation


contractor generating the waste and must be kept

closed (wrench tight) at all times except when waste

is being added

HW containers must be inspected weekly using the

Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site Inspection

Form included as Attachment 7-1 and Attachment

7-2 Written records noting discrepancies and

corrective actions must be maintained for a period of

3 years Copies of inspection reports should be

provided to the ROICC or Contract Representative

The generating contractor must monitor the level of

waste in the SAA container and contact the ROICC

or Contract Representative to coordinate disposal or

determine if the contractor can turn in the HW to

RCRS or EAD before the container is full If the

SAA container becomes full the generating

contractor has 72 hours (3 days) to arrange for the

transport of the HW to an RCRA Part B permitted


7-21

storage area Storage of HW in an SAA should not

exceed 365 days even if the container is not full

752 Manifesting and Disposal

All disposal of HW generated by contractors must be

coordinated with the installation HW and UW generated

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River must be

transported off the installation by a permitted HW

transporter and must include a Uniform Hazardous Waste

Manifest form (EPA Form 8700-22) or an equivalent

approved manifest The following procedures must be

followed for disposal of HW

Use the MCB Camp Lejeune or MCAS New River

EPA identification number for disposal of all

contractor-generated HW

HW may only be transported by authorized

personnel or permitted companies Prior to

transportation offsite the HW

generator must ensure that all

DOT requirements for labeling

marking placarding and

containerizing are met The HW

generator must also ensure that

the transporter has obtained the

installationrsquos EPA identification

number for the transportation of

HW and that an appropriate

waste manifest accompanies

each shipment

Only personnel from EMD who have been designated in writing by the MCB Camp Lejeune Commanding General can sign the hazardous waste manifest


7-22

The HW manifest can only be signed by personnel

from the installation who have been designated in

writing by the CG The ROICC or Contract

Representative should contact RCRS or EAD about

manifesting regulated and non-regulated wastes

offsite Under NO circumstances can a contractor

ROICC or Contract Representative sign a HW

manifest or use another EPA identification number

for wastes generated at the installation

All HW must be submitted to a permitted TSD

facility HW generators must certify that the facility

receiving the waste employs the most practical and

current treatment storage or disposal methods for

minimizing present and future threats to human

health and the environment

76 NONndashRCRA-REGULATED WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

Non-RCRA-regulated wastes include used oil (when

recycled) non-terne (tin and lead alloy) plated oil filters (not

mixed with listed waste) CFC refrigerants (from totally

enclosed equipment) certain wastes containing

Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) asbestos and batteries not

managed as UW

761 Used Oil and Oil Filters

Used motor oil itself is not regulated as HW in North

Carolina if it is recycled or burned for energy recovery If

used oil is not recycled the generator must determine prior

to disposal whether it is HW Used oil must be collected in


7-23

drums or another approved container marked ldquoUsed Oilrdquo If

the used oil storage container has a volume of 55 gallons or

more it must be stored in secondary containment

Do not dump used oil into drains sinks or trash

containers or onto the ground

Do not store used oil in open buckets or drip pans

damaged or rusted containers or containers that

cannot be fully closed

Do not mix used oil with other waste materials

Terne plated oil filters contain an alloy of tin and lead They

are considered a hazardous waste due to their lead content

and are typically located on industrial and heavy duty

vehicles and equipment All other used oil filters are not

regulated as HW in North Carolina as long as they are not

mixed with listed HW To qualify for this exclusion the

following conditions must be met

Used oil filters must be gravity hot-drained by

puncturing the filter anti-drain back valve or filter

dome and hot draining into a ldquoUsed Oilrdquo storage

drum ldquoHot-drainedrdquo means that the oil filter is

drained at a temperature that approximates the

temperature at which the engine operates

Any incidental spillage that occurs must be cleaned

up with a dry sweep rags or ldquoabsorbent mattingrdquo

Drained used oil filters must be collected in a

container that is in good condition and is labeled with

the words ldquoDrained Used Oil Filtersrdquo


7-24

No other waste streams should be deposited in

containers collecting used oil filters for disposal

Coordinate with the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if the drained used oil

filters can be given to RCRS or EAD

762 Used Antifreeze

Antifreeze is composed of regulated chemicals including

ethylene glycol and propylene glycol and during typical use

may become contaminated with traces of fuel or metal

particles (ie lead cadmium or chromium) It may also

become HW if it has been mixed with other wastes such as

gasoline or solvents Additional characterization may be

required to determine whether or not used antifreeze is HW

Used antifreeze that is not recycled may be regulated as HW

if the results from the Toxic Characteristics Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) indicate metal contents that meet or

exceed RCRA thresholds

The State of North Carolina does not regulate used antifreeze

as HW as long as it is recycled by reuse distillation

filtration or ion exchange Used antifreeze must be stored in

closed containers on an impermeable concrete surface with

adequate spill controls (secondary containment appropriate

stocked spill kits etc) Contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if used antifreeze can be given

to RCRS or EAD


7-25

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily

Rags

Petroleum-contaminated wipes and oily rags are to be

managed as non-regulated waste Follow these procedures

Store oil-contaminated wipes and oily rags in metal

containers because of their

flammabilitycombustibility and to protect them

from the weather

Do not throw these non-regulated waste items into

solid waste dumpsters or garbage cans

Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative to

determine if petroleum-contaminated wipes and oily

rags can be given to RCRS or EAD

764 Used Electronic Equipment

Used electronic equipment may contain lead solder or PCB

oils (eg light ballast) Turn in these items as they are

generated Have the ROICC or Contract Representative

contact RCRS or EAD for proper handling andor turn-in

procedures

765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated

as Universal Waste)

Store compatible batteries together (ie lithium

batteries should be stored with other lithium

batteries)


7-26

Store batteries off the ground to prevent them from

coming into contact with water

Store lead-acid batteries away from an open flame

Place rechargeable batteries in plastic bags before

storing them with other rechargeable batteries

Do not dispose of batteries unless authorized


RCRS or EAD for proper handling andor turn-in

procedures


7-27

Attachment 7-1

Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site

Inspection Form

MCB Camp Lejeune


7-28



7-29

MCB Camp Lejeune Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site

Inspection

Universal Waste (UW)Satellite Accumulation Area (SAA)

Building Numberlocation of HW Site _______________

Unit Evaluated _____________________________

Evaluation Date _______________

Evaluation By (Site Manager) __________________

Evaluation Time _______________

QUESTION YES NO Location of Discrepancy

and Proposed Corrective

Action 1 Is housekeeping maintained

in acceptable manner

2 Is any HW present at the

site

3 Are HW containers properly

marked

4 Are HW containers in

serviceable condition

5 Are container bungs caps

and openings properly secured

6 Is a unit spill planactivation

prominently posted

7 Is 911 spill response sign

posted

8 Are Danger-Unauthorized

Personnel Keep Out signs

posted so they may be seen

from any approach

9 Are No Smoking signs

posted


7-30



Action 10 Does the site have

emergency communication

system or two-man rule in

effect If the two-man rule is

implemented is a sign posted

with the legend Two-Man

Rule in Effect

11 Are properly charged fire

extinguishers as well as eye

wash stations present and

inspected at least monthly

12 Is the post indicator valve in

good operating condition and

secured in the closed position

and are there any structural

defects such as cracked

concrete

13 Is the proper spill response

equipment readily available

14 Is the site designated and

recognizable and is the EMD

Authorization posted within the

site as to be visible to personnel

placing waste into the

container (SAA site only)

15 Are all HWs properly

segregated and stored in the

designated site

16 Are any hazardous materials

being stored in the Satellite

Accumulation Area or lt 90-day

storage site


7-31

Attachment 7-2


Inspection Form

MCAS New River


7-32



7-33

Weekly Hazardous Waste Storage

Area Inspection Form

Squadron _____________ Inspector ___________________

Date ___________ Signature ________________

Question Yes No Corrective Actions or

NA

1 Is the HW container located

at or near the point of

generation

2 Is the HW container DOT

approved

3 Is the HW container marked

correctly with the words

ldquoHazardous Wasterdquo correct

noun name of contents

NSNrsquoS and unit designator

4 Is the HW container closed

and wrench tight when no one

is adding to the container

5 If a funnel is left in place

does that funnel have a plug or

ball valve to be considered

closed or secured

6 Is the HW container in good

condition (No excessive rust

or dents in critical areas seals

are in place no bulging or

collapsing and no signs of

spillage or leakage)

7 Is the Spill Contingency

Plan posted and in plain view

8 Is the SAA Site approval

letter from EAD posted at the

SAA site

9 Is the SAA Site limited to

Authorized Personnel only


7-34


NA

10 Is the HW container below

the proper ullage for a liquid

to expand (4 inches from the

top)

11 Are SAA HW containers

moved to the 90-Day Site

within 72 hours when filled to

the proper ullage or weight

capacity of the container

12 (90-Day Site only) Are all

palletized waste streams

correctly marked with

ldquoHazardous Wasterdquo or

ldquoUniversal Wasterdquo noun

name of the waste NSN and

unit designator on the pallet or

wall of the waste structure


HW containers turned in prior

to the 90th day after the ASD

14 Are adequate spill

response supplies readily

available for use in case of

spill or leakage

15 Is there a means of


between storage facilities and

working spaces

16 Is the SAA site or 90-Day

Site in a good state of police


7-35


7-36



8-1

80 ASBESTOS

Asbestos was widely used in many products (especially

building parts) prior to 1990 for its fire resistance strength

and affordability However exposure to friable asbestos can

lead to lung diseases including cancer Contractors working

aboard the installation must follow all Federal State and

local regulationsspecifications for the proper notification

removal disposal and management of all asbestos-

containing materials (ACM) associated with demolition and

renovation projects

81 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS



asbestos and its management If you

have any questions or concerns

about the information in this section



EMD program if additional clarification is necessary

811 Key Definitions

Abatement Work performed to repair maintain

remove isolate or encapsulate ACM

Asbestos Asbestos is the generic term for a group of

naturally occurring fibrous silicate minerals

including those that typically exhibit high tensile


this section


this section


8-2

strength flexibility and resistance to thermal

chemical and electrical conditions Asbestos was

commonly used in installed products such as roofing

shingles floor tiles cement pipe and sheeting

roofing felts insulation ceiling tiles fire-resistant

drywall and acoustical products

Asbestos-Containing Material Any material

containing more than 1 percent asbestos per 29 CFR

19261101

Category I Non-friable ACM Asbestos-containing

packings gaskets resilient floor covering and

asphalt roofing products containing more than 1

percent asbestos per 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

Category II Non-friable ACM Any material

excluding Category I non-friable ACM containing

more than 1 percent asbestos that when dry cannot

be crumbled pulverized or reduced to powder by

hand pressure per 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

Demolition The wrecking or removal of any load-

bearing walls or structure with any related handling

operations

Friable Any ACM that when dry can be crumbled

pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure

(may include damaged ACM that was previously

identified as non-friable) per 40 CFR 763

Glove Bag A sealed compartment with attached

inner gloves that is used for handling ACM Glove

bags provide a small work area enclosure typically

used for small-scale asbestos stripping operations


8-3

Presumed Asbestos-Containing Material

(PACM) Thermal system insulation (TSI) and

surfacing material found in buildings constructed no

later than 1980 per 29 CFR 19261101

Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material

(RACM) Includes friable ACM Category I non-

friable ACM that has become friable Category I

non-friable ACM that has been sanded ground cut

etc and Category II non-friable ACM that has a high

probability of becoming crumbled pulverized or

reduced to powder during demolition or renovation

per 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

Removal Stripping chipping sanding sawing

drilling scraping sucking and other methods of

separating material from its installed location in a

building

Renovation Altering a facility or its components in

any way including stripping or removal of RACM


812 Key Concepts

Demolition Notification North Carolina law

requires notification for all demolition regardless of

whether asbestos is present 10 working days prior to

starting demolition

Disposal ACM waste can be accepted at the MCB

Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill Work with the

ROICC or Contract Representative to coordinate the

disposal through the MCB Camp Lejeune Sanitary


8-4

Landfill Asbestos waste is only accepted on

Mondays through Thursdays from 0700 to 1000

Removal Requirements Permits for asbestos

removal or demolition must be obtained when the

ACM present exceeds 260 linear feet 160 square

feet or 35 cubic feet Additionally proper work

practice procedures must be followed during

demolition or renovation operations

Renovation Notification If ACM is present within

a structure North Carolina law requires notification

of renovation 10 working days prior to starting

renovation


Contractor practices associated with asbestos management


Building operationmaintenancerepair


Equipment operationmaintenancedisposal

HW transportation

Parts replacement


include soil contamination degradation of water quality and

air quality and the potential exposure of installation

occupants


8-5




regarding ACM which include but may not be limited to the

following

Asbestos General Standard 29 CFR 19101001 ndash

Asbestos Applies to all occupational exposures to

asbestos in all industries covered by the

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA)

Asbestos Hazard and Emergency Response Act

(AHERA) 1986 AHERA was written primarily to

provide officials in schools grades K-12 with rules

and guidance for the management of ACM

Asbestos School Hazard Abatement

Reauthorization Act 1992 This act extended

AHERA regulations to cover public and commercial

buildings

National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air

Pollutants (NESHAP) Subpart A General

Provisions and 40 CFR 61 ndash Subpart M ndash

National Emission Standard for Asbestos

Includes standards for asbestos demolition

renovation and disposal and administrative

requirements

Naval Facilities Engineering Service Center

Facilities Management Guide for Asbestos and

Lead Summarizes asbestos and lead requirements


8-6

that routinely affect facilities operations to protect

workers building occupants and the environment

Naval Facilities Guide Specifications and

Engineering Control of Asbestos Materials

Covers the requirements for safety procedures and

requirements for the demolition removal

encapsulation enclosure repair and disposal of

ACM

North Carolina Asbestos Hazard Management

Program NC General Statutes Chapter 130A

Article 19 10A NCAC 41C0601ndash0608 and 0611

Incorporates 40 CFR 763 and 29 CFR 19261101 by

reference and outlines criteria for asbestos exposures

in public areas accreditation of persons conducting

asbestos management activities and asbestos

permitting and fee requirements

Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

Asbestos 29 CFR 19261101 Regulates asbestos in

the construction demolition alteration repair

maintenance or renovation of structures that contain

asbestos

83 RESPONSIBILITIES BEFORE A

DEMOLITION OR RENOVATION

PROJECT

Prior to starting a demolition or renovation project

contractors must

The ROICC or Contract Representative is required to notify Camp Lejeunersquos Asbestos Program Manager of all work involving asbestos removals including glove bag projects


8-7

Determine whether ACM PACM andor RACM are

present in the buildings involved in the project

Complete the necessary notifications to the State of

North Carolina and obtain any necessary permits for

the removal of ACM PACM andor RACM

Understand what actions to

take if ACM PACM andor

RACM are unexpectedly

encountered during project

execution

Remove all non-friable and

friable ACM in accordance

with all Federal State and

local regulations prior to

demolition activities

Know how to properly

dispose of ACM and

provide any waste disposal

manifests generated for disposal

831 Identification of ACM and PACM

Contract documents will identify

the presence of known ACM

PACM and RACM Contact the

ROICC or Contract Representative

with questions regarding the

presence of these materials as

identified in the contract

documents An inspection conducted by a Health Hazards

Form DHHS 3768 must be posted onsite during all permitted projects

A demolition renovation notification form DHHS 3768 must be submitted to the NC HHCU



8-8

Control Unit (HHCU)-licensed asbestos inspector may be

necessary to confirm the location and quantities of any

ACM PACM andor RACM and determine if any

previously unidentified materials are present

832 Notification

To maintain accurate files and

records the ROICC or Contract

Representative is required to notify

the Asbestos Program Manager who

is part of the Installations and

Environment Department of all

work involving asbestos removals

including glove bag projects

The North Carolina Department of

Health and Human Services (DHHS)

Form 3768 Asbestos Permit

Application and Notification for

Demolition and Renovation must be submitted to the North

Carolina HHCU 10 working days in advance of demolition

activities regardless of whether asbestos is present This

form must be posted onsite during the entire duration of the

project Have the ROICC or Contract Representative contact

the Asbestos Program Manager with questions or concerns

about requirements for notification of demolition or

renovation

833 Removal

Any ACM PACM andor RACM present must be removed

before the area is disturbed during renovation or demolition

A demolition renovation notification form DHHS 3768 must be submitted to the NC HHCU 10 working days before demolition activities regardless of whether asbestos

is present


8-9

activities (except in certain rare instances) Certification and

handling requirements for asbestos removal are provided in

10A NCAC 41C and the Asbestos NESHAP Refer to these

regulations for detailed requirements

834 Training

North Carolina regulations require that all persons who

perform asbestos management activities in the State of North

Carolina must be accredited by the North Carolina HHCU

under the appropriate accreditation category (ie Building

Inspector Project Supervisor andor Abatement Worker)

Training documentation should be available upon request

84 RESPONSIBILITIES DURING A


PROJECT

North Carolina regulations require that DHHS Form 3768

Asbestos Permit Application and Notification for Demolition

and Renovation be acquired by the contractor and posted

onsite during all permitted projects Contractors must post

this form when the project will remove the following at least

260 linear feet 160 square feet or 35 cubic feet of RACM

or asbestos that might become regulated as a result of

handling The form must also be posted for nonscheduled

asbestos removal that will exceed these numbers in a

calendar year

During a renovation or demolition project if the contractor

suspects the presence of additional ACM (other than the

materials identified in contract documents) the contractor


8-10

must immediately report the suspected area to the ROICC or

Contract Representative Before proceeding the facility

must be inspected by an asbestos inspector licensed by the

North Carolina HHCU The individual performing the

asbestos survey will coordinate with the ROICC or Contract

Representative throughout the

process A legible copy of the

building inspection report must

be provided to the North

Carolina HHCU prior to each

demolition and upon request for

renovations a building

inspection report will be

acceptable only if the inspection

was performed during the 3

years prior to the demolition A

copy of the report should also be

forwarded to the Asbestos

Program Manager

For specific work procedures and requirements for glove bag

projects refer to 29 CFR 19261101

85 DISPOSAL OF ACM WASTE

Contractors can dispose of ACM waste at the MCB Camp

Lejeune Sanitary Landfill after first coordinating with the

MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill office through the ROICC or

Contract Representative The contractor must provide the

MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill with Form DHHS 3787

North Carolina Health Hazards Control Unitrsquos Asbestos

During a renovation or demolition project a contractor who suspects additional ACM is present must immediately report the suspected area to the ROICC or Contract Representative


8-11

Waste Shipment Record The contractor must submit this

form to the North Carolina HHCU for all permitted

asbestos removal projects


8-12



9-1

90 LEAD-BASED PAINT

Lead was used in paint for its color and water-resistant

properties until it was banned in 1978 for its highly toxic

properties that may cause a range of health problems

especially in young children Improper removal of lead-

based paint (LBP) may result in paint chips and dust which

may contaminate a structure inside and out The North

Carolina DHHS regulations require any person who

performs an inspection risk assessment or abatement to be

certified North Carolina DHHS also requires a person to

obtain a permit for conducting an abatement of a child-

occupied facility or target housing


The following key definitions and concepts are associated

with LBP activities If you have any questions or concerns

about the information in this section please consult the

ROICC or Contract Representative who will contact the

appropriate Environmental Department or Safety

Representative if additional clarification is necessary

911 Key Definitions

Abatement The permanent removal or elimination

of all LBP hazards

Demolition The removal of any load-bearing walls

or structure


9-2

Inspection A surface-by-surface investigation to

determine the presence of LBP and a report

explaining the results of the investigation

Lead-Based Paint Surface coatings that contain

lead in amounts equal to or in excess of 10 milligram

per square centimeter as measured by X-ray

fluorescence (XRF) or laboratory analysis or more

than 05 percent by weight per 40 CFR 745

Lead-Containing Paint Surface coatings that

contain lead in any amount greater than the

laboratory reporting limit but less than 10 milligram

per square centimeter or less than 05 percent by

weight per 29 CFR 192662 and 29 CFR 19101025

(also contained in 40 CFR 745 Subpart L and

adopted by the State of North Carolina under North

Carolina General Statute Chapter 130A Article

19A)

Renovation Alteration of a facility or its

components in any way

Target Housing Any housing constructed before

1978 with the exception of housing for the elderly

and persons with disabilities (unless a child under the

age of 6 lives there) and residential dwellings where

the living areas are not separated from the sleeping

areas (efficiencies studio apartments dormitories

etc)


9-3

912 Key Concepts

Disposal Analysis is required to determine proper

disposal of waste (non-hazardous or hazardous) A

Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

analysis must be conducted to determine whether

lead levels have exceeded 5 parts per million (ppm)

which is the RCRA threshold for HW determination

LBP Survey A LBP survey is required prior to

disturbing painted surfaces to determine whether the

paint meets the criteria of lead containing over 10

milligram per square centimeter or over 05 percent

by weight

Training LBP training requirements set forth by the

OSHA must be followed by all personnel involved in

all LBP removal activities MCB Camp Lejeune

Base Safety tracks this training for contract staff as

the Safety Office houses the Lead Program Manager


Contractor practices associated with LBP include the

following


HW transportation

Paint removal


include the potential degradation of soil water and air


9-4

environments and the potential exposure of installation

occupants



of and adhere to all applicable Federal State and local

regulations and requirements regarding LBP activities





that routinely impact facilities operations in order to

protect workers building occupants and the

environment

Lead-Based Paint Hazard Management Program

NC General Statutes Chapter 130A Article 19A

Section 130A-45301 through 45311 Requires a

person who performs an inspection risk assessment

abatement or abatement design work in a child-

occupied facility (daycare center pre-school etc) or

housing built before 1978 to be certified and

establishes the requirements for certification

including the oversight of required training It also

requires a person who conducts an abatement of a

child-occupied facility or target housing to obtain a

permit for the abatement establishes work practice

standards for LBP abatement activities and has

adopted requirements included in 40 CFR Part 745

Subpart L and 40 CFR Part 745 Subpart D


9-5


for Renovation Repair and Painting (RRP) 10A

NCAC 41C0900 Common renovation activities

may create hazardous lead dust and chips by

disturbing LBP which may be harmful to adults and

children This article requires that dust sampling

technicians firms and individuals performing

renovation repair and painting projects for

compensation that disturb LBP in housing and child-

occupied facilities built before 1978 be certified and

follow specific work practices to prevent lead

contamination Child-occupied facilities include but

are not limited to child care facilities and schools

(with children under the age of 6) that were built

before 1978

10A NCAC 41C0800 Lead-Based Paint Hazard

Management Program Requires (1) all individuals

and firms involved in LBP activities to be certified

and (2) all LBP activities to be carried out in

accordance with 40 CFR 745

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction Contains the OSHA requirements for

construction activities where workers may come into

contact with lead

40 CFR Part 745 Lead-Based Paint Poisoning

Prevention in Certain Residential Structures

Ensures that (1) LBP abatement professionals

including workers supervisors inspectors risk

assessors and project designers are well trained in

conducting LBP activities and (2) inspections for the


9-6

identification of LBP risk assessments for the

evaluation of LBP hazards and abatements for the

permanent elimination of LBP hazards are conducted

safely effectively and reliably by requiring

certification of professionals

93 RESPONSIBILITIES BEFORE

RENOVATION OR DEMOLITION

Ordinary renovation and

maintenance activities may

create dust that contains lead but

following lead-safe work

practices may help mitigate or

prevent lead hazards The North

Carolina RRP Program (10A

NCAC 41C0900) mandates that contractors property

managers and others working for compensation in homes

and child-occupied facilities built before 1978 be trained in

and use lead-safe work practices In addition it mandates

that contractors provide the owner and occupants with The

Lead-Safe Certified Guide to Renovate Right information

pamphlet which is found at the following website

httpepipublichealthncgovleadpdfRenovateRightpdf

Individuals must be certified by the State of North Carolina

to perform RRP activities for compensation in housing and

child-occupied facilities built before 1978 A firm engaged

in regulated renovation activities (such as RRP that disturbs

more than 6 square feet of interior painted surfaces or 20

square feet of exterior painted surfaces or dust sampling

after renovation) must be a certified renovation firm

Buildings constructed prior to 1978 are assumed to contain LBP


9-7

To address the hazards associated with the improper

abatement or removal of LBP any person who performs an

inspection risk assessment abatement or abatement design

work in a child-occupied facility (child development centers

preschools etc) or housing built before 1978 must be

certified by the State of North Carolina Any person who

conducts an abatement of a child-occupied facility or target

housing must also obtain a permit for the abatement

Individuals conducting LBP abatement activities in North

Carolina such as inspections risk assessments LBP hazards

abatement clearance testing or abatement project design in

housing and child-occupied facilities built before 1978 must

be certified by the State of North Carolina A firm engaged

in abatement activities must be a certified lead abatement

firm

Prior to any renovation or demolition aboard the installation

that involves the disturbance of painted surfaces a LBP

survey must be completed by an inspector certified in North

Carolina retained through the ROICC or Public Works

Division (PWD) Certain projects will use PWD staff to

conduct the sampling and other projects will use contracted

personnel Buildings constructed prior to 1978 are assumed

to contain LBP therefore no LBP survey is necessary The

LBP survey (through sampling and analysis) will determine

whether painted surfaces meet the criteria of LBP (lead

content equal to or greater than 10 milligram per square

centimeter as measured by XRF or lab analysis or 05

percent by weight) Naval Facilities Guide Specifications

and contract documents must be implemented for contracts

where LBP is to be abatedremoved prior to demolition or

renovation


9-8

If the area is to be reoccupied final clearance must be

conducted including a visual inspection and sample

collection prior to reoccupation Clearance on all projects

involving abatement must be provided by a certified risk

assessor or a certified LBP inspector Clearance for RRP

projects may be conducted by a certified risk assessor

certified LBP inspector or certified dust sampling

technician

94 PERMITS

Contractors must obtain a North Carolina LBP Abatement

Permit from North Carolina DHHS when lead paint is

removed from targeted structures (child-occupied facilities

or housing built prior to 1978)

95 DISPOSAL

If the LBP survey determines

that LBP will be abated as part of

a renovation or demolition

project the contractor must take

analytical samples to determine

whether the waste material is

hazardous Usually a TCLP

sample is collected from a

ldquorepresentativerdquo sample of the

material removed The

laboratory conducting the sample analysis must be

accredited by the Environmental Lead Laboratory

Accreditation Program A list of these accredited labs is

available by contacting (703) 849-8888 or visiting

If the LBP survey determines that LBP will be abated as part of a renovation or demolition project analytical samples must be taken to determine whether the material is hazardous



9-9

httpappsaihaorgqms_aihapublicpagesreportspublicSc

opeViewaspxProgramCode=37ampVersion=2

If the LBP is removed from the underlying building material

then the paint is the waste stream If the LBP is removed with

the building material then both materials are considered the

waste stream

If the lead content is below HW regulatory disposal levels

consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to determine

whether if the contract allows for the disposal of the material

in the MCB Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill Lead waste is

only accepted on Mondays through Thursdays from 0700 to

1000

If the abated LBP is above HW regulatory levels refer to

Section 70 of this guide for information on HW

management and disposal requirements

96 TRAINING

Before the project begins workers who are subject to lead

exposure during abatement or removal activities must be

trained according to the OSHA regulations in 29 CFR

192662 concerning lead exposure in construction and they

must receive all training and certification specified by

10A NCAC 41C0800 and 10A NCAC 41C0900 The

contractor is responsible for providing this training before

initiating any work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune


9-10



10-1

100 NATURAL RESOURCES

The installation has stewardship and recovery

responsibilities over the natural resources on the installation

These responsibilities are regulated under numerous laws

described in this section The installation ensures

compliance with these laws through an interdisciplinary

process of review and coordination of all activities occurring

on the installation

Contractors working on the installation are responsible for

complying with conditions and measures imposed on their

work as a result of this process these responsibilities include

preserving the natural resources within the project

boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work

restoring work sites to an equivalent or improved condition

after the work is complete and confining construction

activities to the limits of the work indicated or specified The

contractor is advised that the installation is subject to strict

compliance with Federal State and local wildlife laws and

regulations The contractor must not disturb wildlife (birds

nesting birds mammals reptiles amphibians and fish) or

the native habitat adjacent to the project area except when

indicated or specified

101 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS



natural resources management If

you have any questions or concerns




10-2

about the information in this section or require assistance

regarding any wildlife matters (snakes nesting birds

nuisance wildlife etc) on the site or within the project area


will contact the Environmental Conservation Branch

1011 Key Definitions

Conservation The planned management use and

protection of natural resources to provide their

sustained use and continued benefit to present and

future generations

Ecosystem A dynamic natural complex of living

organisms interacting with each other and with their

associated nonliving environment

Habitat An area where a plant or animal species

lives grows and reproduces and the environment

that satisfies its life requirements

Natural Resource Soil water air plants and

animals according to the Natural Resources

Conservation Service

Endangered or Threatened Species Federally

listed taxon that is ldquoin danger of extinction

throughout all or a significant portion of its rangerdquo or

ldquolikely to become endangered within the foreseeable

future throughout all or a significant portion of its

rangerdquo

Riparian Buffer Vegetated area bordering a body

of water such as a stream lake or pond


10-3

Wetland Areas that are inundated or saturated by

surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration

sufficient to support and that under normal

circumstances do support a prevalence of vegetation

typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions

Wetlands generally include swamps marshes bogs

and similar areas per the EPA

1012 Key Concepts

Coastal Zone Management Act (CZMA) of 1972

Requires each installation to ensure that its

operations activities projects and programs

affecting the coastal zone in or on coastal lands or

waters are consistent with the federally approved

Coastal Zone Management Plan of the State

Ecosystem Management A goal-driven approach

to managing natural and cultural resources that

supports present and future mission requirements

preserves ecosystem integrity is at a scale

compatible with natural processes is cognizant of

natural processesrsquo time scales recognizes social and

economic viability within functioning ecosystems is

adaptable to complex changing requirements and is

realized through effective partnerships among

private local State tribal and Federal interests

Ecosystem management is a process that considers

the environment as a complex system functioning as

a whole not as a collection of parts and recognizes

that people and their social and economic needs are

a part of the whole


10-4

Integrated Natural Resources Management Plan

(INRMP) A planning document using ecosystem

management principles to direct the management

and conservation of installation natural resources

which includes all elements of natural resources

management applicable to the installation

National Environmental Policy Act Requires

Federal agencies including the USMC to consider

the environmental impacts of projects prior to

implementation All projects that support military

training minor and major military construction

maintenance and natural resources management

actions are reviewed for potential environmental

impacts Contractors must obtain and review any

NEPA documentation associated with their projects

All NEPA documentation can be obtained from the


Threatened and Endangered Species Specific

requirements regarding protected areas on the

installation apply to contractor activities Eight

federally threatened and endangered species are

currently managed at MCB Camp Lejeune ndash red-

cockaded woodpecker green sea turtle loggerhead

sea turtle rough-leaved loosestrife seabeach

amaranth piping plover red knot and American

alligator In addition as of March 25 2015 the US

Fish and Wildlife Service lists six species as

threatened and nine as endangered for Onslow

County NC Consult the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if there are any project


10-5

requirements regarding threatened or endangered

species

Timber Contractors must ensure that the ROICC or

Contract Representative notify the EMDrsquos Forest

Management Program prior to conducting site work

Timber will not be released to contractors without the

approval of the Forest Management Program

Waters of the United States All waters that are

currently used were used in the past or may be

susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce

interstate waters the territorial seas impoundments

tributaries adjacent waters including wetlands

ponds lakes oxbows and impoundments waters

determined to have a significant nexus Carolina

bays Pocosins and waters within the 100-year

floodplain or within 4000 feet of the high tide line

or ordinary high water mark per 33 USC 1251 et

seq Section 3283

Wetlands Any work in installation waters or

wetlands requires a permit prior to the start of an

activity


Contractor practices associated with natural resources


Erosionrunoff control

Fish stocking

Habitat management


10-6

Land clearing




Timber management



include air emissions sedimentation eutrophication of

surface waters (addition of nutrients that stimulate aquatic

plant growth and depletes oxygen) degradation of habitat

impacts to marine mammals damage to commercial and

noncommercial timber impacts to endangered species and

natural resources and degradation of soil quality




regarding natural resources which include but may not be


Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act of 1940 as

Amended (16 USC 688 et seq) Prohibits taking

possessing and transporting bald eagles and golden

eagles and importing and exporting their parts nests

or eggs The definition of ldquotakerdquo includes pursue

shoot shoot at poison wound capture trap collect

molest or disturb


10-7

BO 509011A Protected Species Program Sets

forth regulations and establishes responsibilities to

ensure the conservation of threatened and

endangered species and species at risk aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune

BO 509012 Environmental Impact Review

Procedures Implements NEPA 1969 and NEPA

policy and guidance in Chapter 12 of MCO

P50902A

Clean Water Act of 1972 Establishes the basic

structure for regulating wastewater discharges and

placing fill materials into the waters of the United

States

CZMA of 1972 (16 USC 1451 et seq) Requires that

Federal actions affecting any landwater use or

coastal zone natural resource be implemented

consistent with the enforceable policies of an

approved State coastal management program

Requires concurrence from the State before taking an

action affecting the use of land water or natural

resources of the coastal zone

Endangered Species Act of 1973 (16 USC 1531 et

seq) Requires all Federal agencies to carry out

programs to conserve federally listed endangered

and threatened species of plants and wildlife

EO 11990 Protection of Wetlands 24 May 1977

Addresses Federal agency actions required to

identify and protect wetlands minimize the risk of

wetlands destruction or modification and preserve


10-8

and enhance the natural and beneficial values of

wetlands

EO 13186 Responsibilities of Federal Agencies to

Protect Migratory Birds 10 January 2001

Requires each Federal agency taking actions that

have or are likely to have a measurable negative

effect on migratory bird populations to develop and

implement a plan to promote the conservation of

migratory bird populations

Marine Mammal Protection Act of 1972

(MMPA) as Amended (16 USC 1361 et seq)

Mandates a moratorium on the killing capturing

harming and importing of marine mammals and

marine mammal products The MMPA also prohibits

the taking of any marine mammal including to

harass hunt capture collect or kill any marine

mammal including any of the following collection

of dead animals or their parts restraint or detention

of a marine mammal tagging a marine mammal the

negligent or intentional operation of an aircraft or

vessel or any other negligent or intentional act that

results in disturbing or molesting a marine mammal

Migratory Bird Treaty Act of 1918 as Amended

(16 USC 703 et seq) Protects migratory birds (listed

in 50 CFR 1013) and their nests and eggs and

establishes a permitting process for the taking of

migratory birds by establishing a Federal prohibition

to ldquopursue hunt take capture kill attempt to take

capture or kill possess offer for sale sell offer to

purchase purchase deliver for shipment ship cause


10-9

to be shipped deliver for transportation transport

cause to be transported carry or cause to be carried

by any means whatever receive for shipment

transportation or carriage or export at any time or

in any manner any migratory bird or any part nest

or egg of any such birdrdquo


Protection Manual Provides guidance and

instruction to installations to ensure the protection

conservation and management of watersheds

wetlands natural landscapes soils forests fish and

wildlife and other natural resources as vital USMC

assets

NEPA 1969 (42 USC 4321 et seq) Requires


the environmental impacts of projects before the

decisionmaker proceeds with the implementation

All projects that support military training major and

minor military construction maintenance and

natural resources management actions are reviewed

for potential environmental impacts

Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899 Prohibits the

excavation filling or alteration of the course

condition or capacity of any port harbor or channel

without prior approval from the Chief of Engineers

Sikes Act of 1960 as Amended (16 USC 670 et

seq) Requires military installations to manage

natural resources for multipurpose uses and public

access appropriate for those uses as well as ensuring

no net loss to training testing or other defined


10-10

missions of the installation through the development

and implementation of an INRMP

Neuse River Basin Riparian Buffer Rules (15A

NCAC 02B0233) Require a 50-foot riparian buffer

that is divided into two zones The 30 feet closest to

the water (Zone 1) must remain undisturbed The

outer 20 feet (Zone 2) may include managed

vegetation such as lawns or shrubbery The riparian

buffer rules also require diffuse flow of stormwater

runoff The buffers apply to intermittent streams

perennial streams lakes ponds estuaries and

modified natural streams that are depicted on the

most recent printed version of the soil survey map

prepared by the Natural Resources Conservation

Service or the 124000 scale quadrangle topographic

map prepared by the US Geologic Survey

103 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL

POLICY ACT

Staff specialists from various installation departments

participate in the NEPA process which coordinates the

review of projects and documents environmental impacts (or

lack thereof) for projects before implementation

The documentation of this review process occasionally

includes mandatory conditions affecting the design and

construction implementation of the project The

documentation when completed is provided to the action

proponent who is expected to provide it to the ROICC or



10-11

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to obtain or

review any NEPA documentation associated with the

project The documentation marks the end of the NEPA

review process it does not constitute approval for the

proponent of the action to implement the action Some

contracts may include stipulations from the NEPA document

that must be implemented prior to the onset of work to

prevent environmental impacts

and violations of Federal or State

rules and regulations

Stipulations could include

replacing monitoring wells if

damages occur from contractor

operations stopping work if

contamination is encountered

notification that a wetlands

permit is required seasonal

restrictions etc

104 TIMBER

Potential timber resources are identified during the NEPA

process The contractor is responsible for advising the

ROICC or Contract Representative to notify EMDrsquos Forest

Management Program prior to beginning site work

Additionally the ROICC or Contract Representative andor

contractor is required to notify the Forest Management

Program if the contract has been amended with

modifications to the site location

MCB Camp Lejeune manages its forest in accordance with

the installation INRMP The Forest Management Program

The contractor is responsible for advising the ROICC or Contract Representative to notify the Forest Management Program at (910) 451-7223 prior to beginning site work

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to obtain or review any NEPA documentation associated with

the project


10-12

maintains first right of refusal for all timber products on

construction projects and will determine whether the

Government will harvest the timber or release it to the

contractor The Government retains exclusive rights to all

forest products on construction projects If the Government

elects to harvest the timber only merchantable timber will

be removed

Contractors must adhere to the following requirements when

performing site work that may

impact timber resources

Do not remove cut

deface injure or destroy

trees or shrubs without

authorization from the

ROICC or Contract

Representative

Do not fasten or attach

ropes cables or guy

wires to nearby trees for

anchorages without authorization from the ROICC

or Contract Representative (If these actions are

authorized the contractor is responsible for any

resultant damage)

Protect trees that are to remain in place and that may

be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged

by construction operations

With the ROICC or Contract Representativersquos

approval use approved methods of excavation to

Protect existing trees that are to remain in place and that may be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged by construction operations


10-13

remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root

systems destroyed


approval remove trees and other landscape features

scarred or damaged by equipment operations and

replace with equivalent undamaged trees and

landscape features

Please refer to Section 120 for disposal information for

land-clearing debris

105 THREATENED AND ENDANGERED

SPECIES

With the exception of

improved roadways entry into

a threatened or endangered

species site or shorebird

nesting area marked with signs

andor white paint is prohibited

without written permission

from installation personnel BO

509011A lists threatened and

endangered species that may be

encountered at the installation

The following restrictions

apply on the installation unless

written permission is explicitly

provided

Work on Onslow Beach or Brownrsquos Island is not

permitted between April 1 and October 31 Traffic

Entry into a threatened or endangered species site or shorebird nesting area marked with signs andor white paint is prohibited without written permission from installation personnel

Entry into a threatened or endangered species site or shorebird nesting area marked with signs andor white paint is prohibited without written permission from installation

personnel


10-14

on the beaches should be limited to below the high

tide line

Vehicles and lighting are prohibited on the beaches

overnight between May 1 and October 31

Construction activities are prohibited within 1500

feet of a bald eaglersquos nest (JD MC and IF Training

area)

Cutting or damaging pine trees is not permitted

Altering hydrology through excavation ditching

etc is prohibited

Fish and wildlife must not be disturbed

Water flows may not be altered the native habitat

adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of

fish and wildlife may not be significantly disturbed

except as indicated or specified

106 WETLANDS

1061 Avoidance

In accordance with MCO

P50902A all facilities and

operational actions must

avoid to the maximum

degree feasible wetlands

destruction or degradation

regardless of the wetlands

size or legal necessity for a

permit Prior to the onset of

Contractors must incorporate avoidance and minimization measures to comply with the national policy to permit no overall net loss of wetlands


10-15

construction coordination with the Environmental

Conservation Branch of EMD should have taken place

during project design to ensure CWA permitting issues are

addressed by the contractor at the earliest opportunity

Contractors must incorporate avoidance and minimization

measures to comply with the national policy to permit no

overall net loss of wetlands as well as meeting concept

design criteria while incorporating avoidance and

minimization measures to protect wetlands streams and

waters of the United States Any proposed action that would

significantly affect wetlands must be coordinated with the

CG of MCB Camp Lejeune

The contractor must ensure that construction of all buildings

facilities and related amenities including earthwork

grading landscaping drainage stormwater management

parking lot and paved roadway sidewalks site excavation

sanitary sewer system extensions and domestic water

extensions avoids to the maximum degree feasible

wetlands destruction or degradation

Identified and mapped boundaries of the legally defined

wetlands on all USMC lands within the project area will be

distributed to the ROICC or Contract Representative for use

(if available) and included in all design products including

drawings plans and figures

1062 Permits

All unavoidable potential impacts to wetlands or waters of

the United States require prior coordination as described in

this section Failure to acquire written authorization for

If work in wetlands is required know who is responsible for obtaining permits and what the terms and conditions of the


10-16

impacts to wetlands andor

waters of the United States may

result in significant project

delays or design modifications

No discharge of fill material

mechanized land clearing or any

other activity is allowed in

jurisdictional wetlands or waters

of the United States without the

proper approvals The contractor

may be responsible for obtaining the following permits

(including pre-permit coordination preparation and

submission of all permit applications after review and

concurrence by the installation) and complying with all

regulations and requirements stipulated by the State of North

Carolina as conditions upon issuance of the permits

U S Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) Section

404 Permit (individual or applicable nationwide

permit) CWA of 1977 as Amended (Public Law 95-

217 33 U S C 1251 et seq)

North Carolina Division of Water Resources

(NCDWR) Section 401 Water Quality Certification

ndash (15A NCAC 02H) NCDEQ CWA of 1977 as

Amended (Public Law 95-217 33 U S C 1251 et

seq)

North Carolina Division of Coastal Management

(NCDCM) Federal Consistency Determination

(15A NCAC 07) NCDEQ CZMA of 1972 (16 USC

1451 et seq)


permits require


10-17

Two types of activities generally require a permit from the

USACE

Activities within navigable waters Activities such

as dredging constructing docks and bulkheads and

placing navigation aids

require review under

Section 10 of the Rivers

and Harbors Act of 1899

to ensure that they will

not cause an obstruction

to navigation

Activities in wetlands

and waters of the

United States

(regulated by Section

404 of the CWA of

1972) A major aspect of

the regulatory program

under Section 404 of the CWA is determining which

areas qualify for protection as wetlands Contractors

should contact the USACE the NCDWR or the

NCDCM if there is any question about whether

activities could impact wetlands streams or

protected buffers

Contractors working on the installation will not perform any

work in waters of the United States or wetlands without an

approved permit (even if the work is temporary) Examples

of temporary discharges include dewatering of dredged

material prior to final disposal and temporary fills for access

roadways cofferdams storage and work areas

Contractors working on the installation will not perform any work in waters of the United States or wetlands without an approved permit (even if the work is

temporary)


temporary)


10-18

1063 Impacts

Any disturbance to the soil or substrate (bottom material) of

a wetland or water body including a stream bed or protected

buffer is an impact and may adversely affect the hydrology

of an area Discharges of fill material generally include the

following without limitation

Placement of fill material that is necessary for the

construction of any structure or impoundment

requiring rock sand dirt or other material for its

construction site-development fills for recreational

industrial commercial residential and other uses

and causeways or road fills

Dams and dikes

Artificial islands

Property protection or reclamation devices such as

riprap groins seawalls breakwaters revetments

and beach nourishment

Levees

Fill for intake and outfall pipes and subaqueous

utility lines

Fill associated with the creation of ponds

Any other work involving the discharge of fill or

dredged material


10-19

1064 Mitigation

Any facility requirement that cannot be sited to avoid

wetlands must be designed to minimize wetlands

degradation and must include compensatory mitigation as

required by wetland regulatory agencies (USACE and

NCDWR) in all phases of project planning programming

and budgeting

The contractor may be required

to develop onsite mitigation if

appropriate consisting of

wetlandstreambuffer

restoration or creation for all

unavoidable wetland stream

and buffer impacts whenever

possible and feasible Use of

USMC lands and lands of other

entities may be permissible for

mitigation purposes for USMC

projects when consistent with

EPA and USACE guidelines or

permit provisions Land within

the project area suitable for

establishment of mitigation may be evaluated by the

contractor and used for mitigation where compatible with

mission requirements and approved by the CG Proposals for

permanent resource areas must be approved by the Assistant

Secretary of the Navy (Installations and Environment) or

hisher designee

The contractor may be required to develop onsite mitigation consisting of wetlandstream restoration or creation for all unavoidable wetland and stream impacts whenever possible

and feasible


10-20

Offsite mitigation is preferred and should be coordinated

through the North Carolina Division of Mitigation Services

or an approved private mitigation bank

107 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

Traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul

roads work areas structures foundations of temporary

structures stockpiles of excess or waste materials and other

signs of construction should be removed upon completion

of a contract or project Temporary roads parking areas and

similar temporarily used areas should be graded to conform

to surrounding contours and the area restored to the degree

practical to its state prior to any disturbing activities


11-1

110 STORMWATER

MCB Camp Lejeune is responsible for stormwater permits

associated with construction industrial or municipal

activities that discharge to outfalls leading to receiving

waters The most applicable permit for contractors is the

construction permit since the majority of the contractor

activities are affiliated with

constructionrenovation

However the contractor is also

responsible for adhering to the

requirements of the industrial and

municipal permits held by MCB

Camp Lejeune for all of the

contractor activities on the

installation In essence all

contractors for the installation

need to know and implement the

necessary measures to prevent stormwater runoff and

pollution runoff from land-disturbing activities (LDAs) and

associated construction permit requirements as well as

industrial and municipal activities The general requirements

for each area as they apply to contractors are discussed in

the following subsections



with stormwater If you have any questions or concerns




this section


this section


11-2


necessary


Best Management Practices Schedules of

activities prohibitions of practices maintenance

procedures and other management practices to

prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the

United States BMPs include structural and

nonstructural stormwater controls operation and

maintenance procedures treatment requirements

and practices to control site runoff (eg sediment

spillage or leaks sludge or waste disposal or

drainage from material storage) See the following

website for more information

httpdeqncgovaboutdivisionsenergy-mineral-

land-resourcesstormwater

Certificate of Stormwater Compliance A

document providing approval for development

activities that meet the requirements for coverage

under a stormwater general permit

Discharge (Pollutant) The addition of any pollutant

or combination of pollutants to waters of the United

States from any point source including but not

limited to any spilling leaking pumping pouring

emitting emptying or dumping of any pollutant this

excludes discharges in compliance with a National

Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)

permit


11-3

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Any

plan amended plan or revision to an approved plan

submitted to the North Carolina Division of Land

Resources or its delegated authority in accordance

with North Carolina General Statute 113A-57

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plans show the

devices and practices that are required to retain

sediment generated by the land-disturbing activity

within the boundaries of the tract during construction

and upon development of the tract Note that in North

Carolina the Erosion and Sedimentation Control

Plan and the NCG010000 Construction General

Permit are considered the Stormwater Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP or SPPP) for a

construction site See the following website for more

information



Land Disturbance Areas that are subject to

clearing excavating grading stockpiling and

placementremoval of earth material

Nonpoint Source Discharge All discharges from

stormwater runoff that cannot be attributed to a

discernible confined and discrete conveyance (See

also point source discharge below)

Point Source Discharge Any discernible confined

and discrete conveyance including but specifically

not limited to any pipe ditch channel tunnel

conduit well discrete fissure container rolling

stock or concentrated animal feeding operation from


11-4

which pollutants are or may be discharged to waters

of the State (See also nonpoint source discharge

above)

Stormwater (Runoff) The portion of precipitation

(rain andor snowmelt) that does not naturally

infiltrate into the ground or evaporate but flows via

overland flows channels or pipes into a defined

surface-water channel or stormwater system during

and immediately following a storm event As the

runoff flows over the land or impervious surfaces

(such as streets parking lots and building rooftops)

it accumulates sediment andor other pollutants that

could pollute receiving streams

Stormwater Associated with Construction

Activities The discharge of stormwater from

construction activities including clearing grading

and excavating that result in a land disturbance of

equal to or greater than 1 acre per 40 CFR 122

Stormwater Associated with Industrial Activities

The discharge from any conveyance that is used for

collecting and conveying stormwater and which is

directly related to manufacturing processing or raw

materials storage areas from an applicable industrial

plant or activity per 40 CFR 122

Stormwater Associated with Municipal Activities

The discharge of stormwater from municipal

activities including public works shops vehicle

maintenance shops and other municipal activities

with the potential to cause stormwater pollution


11-5

1112 Key Concepts

Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) In

December 2007 Section 438 of EISA was issued

This section requires that Federal facility projects

over 5000 square feet must ldquomaintain or restore to

the maximum extent technically feasible the

predevelopment hydrology of the property with

regard to temperature rate volume and duration of

flowrdquo In January 2010 the DoD Policy of

Implementing Section 438 of the EISA was issued

this document includes a flowchart with

implementation steps

Good Housekeeping Good housekeeping practices

refer to the maintenance of a clean and orderly

facility to prevent potential pollution sources from

coming into contact with stormwater The practices

include procedures to reduce the possibility of

mishandling materials or equipment Good

housekeeping practices benefit stormwater quality

and also provide for a clean safe place for employees

and clients Note that good housekeeping is one of

the six minimum control measures (MCMs) of the

MS4 permit requirements

Low Impact Development (LID) LID is a holistic

approach that incorporates site-specific ecosystem

and watershed-based considerations for planning and

design The goal of LID is to mimic a sitersquos

predevelopment hydrology by using design

techniques that infiltrate filter store evaporate and

detain runoff close to the source LID seeks to control


11-6

non-point source pollutants ldquonaturersquos wayrdquo through

the application of plant-soil-water mechanisms that

maintain and protect the ecological and biological

integrity of receiving waters and wetlands

National Pollution Discharge Elimination System

The national program for issuing modifying

revoking reissuing terminating monitoring and

enforcing permits The NPDES stormwater program

regulates stormwater discharges from three potential

stormwater sources as follows

o Construction Activities LDAs that disturb 1 or

more acres need an NPDES permit At a

minimum these permits require the development

of a site-specific Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan to address sediment controls during

construction and upon development of the tract

As previously noted the Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Plan and the NCG010000

Construction General Permit are considered the

SWPPP for a construction site in North Carolina

In the applicable areas of the installation a State

Stormwater Management Permit and coverage

under the Construction General Permit may be

required Note that construction site runoff

control is also one of the six MCMs of the

Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems (MS4)

permit requirements

Industrial Activities Owners and operators of

industrial facilities that fall into any of the 30

industrial sectors identified by EPA stormwater


11-7

regulations need an NPDES Phase I permit if

stormwater is discharged directly into surface

water (or MS4) The permit regulations specify

steps that facility operators must take prior to

becoming eligible for permit coverage and

actions that must be taken to continue coverage

under an existing permit These steps and actions

include but are not limited to effluent limits

monitoring inspection sampling reporting and

corrective action requirements

Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems

Owners and operators of MS4s need an NPDES

Phase II permit An MS4 is a system of pipes and

drainage ditches within an urbanized area used to

collect storm runoff and convey it to receiving

waters Polluted runoff is commonly transported

through MS4s from which it is often discharged

untreated into local waterbodies

Operational Requirements Equipment discharge

and material use requirements that apply to all

construction and industrial activities

Post-Construction Requirements The

management of stormwater generated on a stable

established site after the construction process is

complete The State Stormwater Management

Program sets forth requirements for post-

construction stormwater runoff control Note that

post construction is one of the six MCMs of the MS4

permit requirements


11-8

Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan A plan

required by permits provided under NPDES that

provides guidance to prevent stormwater pollution

from construction industrial or municipal activities

Note that the terminology for this plan (and

associated acronym) varies somewhat from State to

State


Contractor practices associated with stormwater include the

following


Channel dredging

Composting




HM storage

Land clearing

Laundry

Landscaping

Livestock operations

Pesticideherbicide management and application



11-9


Sewers



Stormwater collectionconveyance

Surface washing

Vehicle parking

Wash rack

Other activities that contractors could be involved in that

may cause stormwater pollution include

Grounds maintenance (herbicide pesticides

fertilizer etc)

Outdoor material storage

Buildingroof repairs

Industrial activities


include degradation of water quality and damage to public

and private property due to flooding




regarding potential stormwater contamination which

include but may not be limited to


11-10


structure for regulating discharges of pollutants into

the waters of the United States The CWA establishes

that no oil or hazardous substances should be

discharged into or upon the navigable waters of the

United States or adjoining shorelines which may

affect natural resources under the management of the

United States through the following goals (1)

eliminate the introduction of pollutants into waters of

the United States and (2) develop water quality

which protects and propagates fish shellfish and

wildlife and provides for recreation in and on the

water

40 CFR 122 National Pollutant Discharge

Elimination System Requires industrial

construction and municipal stormwater permits for

the discharge of pollutants from any point source into

waters of the United States

15A NCAC Chapter 4 Requires all persons

conducting a land-disturbing activity to take all

reasonable measures to protect all public and private

property from damage caused by the release of

sediments from the activity The primary tool used to

accomplish the objective is the development of an

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan

Identify critical areas

Limit exposure areas

Limit time of exposure

Control surface water


11-11

Control sedimentation

Manage stormwater runoff

More information can be found at

httpreportsoahstatencusncacaspfolderNa

me=Title2015A20-

20Environmental20QualityChapter2004

20-20Sedimentation20Control

15A NCAC 02H1000 Stormwater Management

The State Stormwater Management Program

requires all persons conducting LDAs that (1) require

a Coastal Area Management Act (CAMA) Major

Development Permit or an Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Plan and (2) are located

within coastal counties or drain to specific

classifications of water bodies to protect surface

waters and highly productive aquatic resources from

the adverse impacts of uncontrolled high-density

development or the potential failure of stormwater

control measures To receive permit approval

projects must limit the density of development

reduce the use of conventional collection systems in

favor of vegetative systems and incorporate post-

construction structural BMPs

113 PRIOR TO SITE WORK

Contractors are required to address the following in the

below section prior to beginning site work


11-12

1131 Construction Notifications

Any project involving LDAs aboard the installation must be

reviewed by the installationrsquos NEPA Review Board prior to

the onset of work so that potential impacts of the project and

associated mitigation measures (if necessary) can be

determined Documentation of

this review should have been

provided to the ROICC or

Contract Representative and may

include mandatory conditions

affecting the

constructionimplementation of

the project Consult the ROICC or

Contract Representative to obtain

or review any NEPA

documentation associated with the

project in the contract

1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I

Industrial Permit

Discharges of industrial

stormwater have the potential to

contain contaminants from

industrial activity Because of this

MCB Camp Lejeune holds a

Stormwater Phase I industrial

permit This type of discharge is

defined and regulated in 40 CFR

122 the EPA final rule regarding

NPDES stormwater permitting

Any project involving LDAs aboard the installation must be reviewed by the installationrsquos NEPA Review Board prior to the onset of work

Contractors are responsible for preparing project-specific permit

Contractors are responsible for preparing project-specific permit applications and related plans and for coordinating the permit review schedule with the ROICC or Contract

Representative


11-13

Daily industrial operations discharging stormwater aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River are covered

under an individual NPDES permit In accordance with the

permit the installation maintains an industrial SWPPP that

identifies potential sources of pollution that may affect the

water quality of stormwater discharges associated with an

industrial activity Refer to Section 114 for more

information on contractor responsibilities associated with

this permit


Municipal Permit

Discharges of municipal stormwater have the potential to

contain contaminants from municipal activity Because of

this MCB Camp Lejeune holds a Stormwater Phase II

municipal permit This type of discharge is defined and

regulated in 40 CFR 122 the EPA final rule regarding


Daily municipal operations discharging stormwater aboard


under an NPDES permit In accordance with the permit the

installation maintains a municipal Stormwater Plan to

address the six MCMs of the permit as well as other

requirements Refer to Section 114 for more information on

contractor responsibilities associated with this permit

1134 Project-Specific Construction Permits

Contractors are responsible for preparing all project-specific

stormwater permit applications and related plans and for

coordinating the permit review schedule with the ROICC or

All permit-required plans and applications must go through internal approval before being submitted to the appropriate State

agency


11-14

Contract Representative MCB Camp Lejeune is the

responsible party for all project-specific stormwater permits

located outside of Public-Private

Venture (PPV) housing All

permit-required plans and

applications must be submitted

to the appropriate MCB Camp

Lejeune organization to go

through internal approval prior

to submission to the appropriate

State agency The permit review

schedule should allow adequate

time for internal review prior to

State submission deadlines

Adequate review time fluctuates and is based on the type of

permit application Stormwater compliance should be

coordinated with the appropriate PPV partner for housing-

related projects outside the jurisdiction of MCB Camp

Lejeune

Permit coverage is required under the North Carolina

General Permit No NCG010000 (General Permit) for

construction activities that disturb 1 acre or more of land

Three copies of a proposed Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan must be prepared and submitted to the NCDEQ

Sedimentation Control Commission (or to an approved local

program) at least 30 days prior to beginning construction

activity to obtain coverage under the General Permit A copy

of the plan will be kept on file at the job site at all times while

the site is active Coverage under the permit becomes

effective when a plan approval is issued No LDAs may

take place prior to receiving the plan approval The


agency


11-15

approved plan is considered a requirement or condition of

the General Permit deviation from the approved plan will

constitute a violation of the terms and conditions of the

permit unless prior approval for the deviations has been

obtained

A State Stormwater Management Permit issued in

accordance with 15A NCAC 02H1000 is required for all

development activities that require a CAMA Major

Development Permit or an Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan and that meet any of the following criteria

Development within the 20 coastal counties

Development within 1 mile of and draining to any

waters classified as High Quality Water (HQW) and

rated ldquoexcellentrdquo based on biological and physical

chemical characteristics through the NCDWR

monitoring or special studies primary nursery areas

designated by the Marine Fisheries Commission and

other functional nursery areas designated by the

Marine Fisheries Commission

Development that drains to

an Outstanding Resource

Water which is a subset of

HQW that is intended to

protect unique and special

waters having excellent

water quality and being of

exceptional ecological or

recreational significance to

the State or Nation

A State Stormwater Management Permit is required for all activities that will disturb 1 acre or more of land



11-16

Because the installation is in a coastal county any project

that disturbs greater than 1 acre of land (requiring coverage

under the General Permit for construction activity) will also

require a State Stormwater Management Permit A State

Stormwater Management Permit application must be

submitted and filed with the NCDEQ Division of Water

Quality after the construction plans and specifications are

complete and before construction activities begin

Additional information is available on the NCDEQ website

httpdeqncgovaboutdivisionsenergy-mineral-land-

resourcesstormwater

State Stormwater Management Permits typically specify

design standards for conveyance systems and structural

BMPs a schedule of compliance and general conditions to

which the permittee must adhere

114 RESPONSIBILITIES DURING SITE

WORK

The contractor is responsible for maintaining the quality of

the stormwater runoff and preventing pollution of

stormwater at the constructionjob site The job site may be

inspected by installation environmental personnel to ensure

compliance with the contractorrsquos construction andor the

installationrsquos industrial SWPPP municipal stormwater plan

and applicable permits The following requirements apply to

all projects at the installation that have the potential to

impact water quality


11-17

Any changes to the project area that do not comply

with the approved Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan alter the approved post-construction

stormwater conveyance system or could otherwise

significantly change the nature or increase the

quantity of pollutants discharged should be

immediately communicated to the ROICC or


All permitted erosion and sedimentation control

projects will be inspected by the contractor at least

once every 7 calendar days (unless discharges to a

303(d)-listed water body are occurring) and within

24 hours after any storm event greater than 05 inch

of rain per 24-hour period as required by the North

Carolina General Permit No NCG010000

Inspection results shall be maintained by the

designated contractor throughout the duration of an

active construction project

Equipment used during the project activities must be

operated and maintained in such a manner as to

prevent the potential or actual pollution of the surface

or ground waters of the State

No POL products (eg fuels lubricants hydraulic

fluids) coolants (eg antifreeze) or any other

substance shall be discharged onto the ground into

surface waters or down storm drains (to include

leaking vehicles heavy equipment pumps andor

structurally deficient containers of hazardous

materials)


11-18

Spent fluids shall be disposed of in a manner so as

not to enter surface or ground waters of the State or

storm drains Disposal of spent fluids is outlined in

Section 70

Implement spill prevention measures clean up all

spills immediately and follow the spill reporting

requirements presented in Section 50 Any spilled

fluids shall be cleaned up to the extent practicable

and disposed of in a manner so as not to allow their

entry into the water (surface or ground) of the State

Refer to Section 50 for emergency and spill response

procedures

Herbicide pesticide and fertilizer use shall be

consistent with the Federal Insecticide Fungicide

and Rodenticide Act and shall be used in accordance

with label restrictions Refer to Section 70 for

additional information on Hazardous

MaterialHazardous Waste Management

Particular care must be used when storing materials

outside Materials and equipment stored outside that

could potentially affect the quality of stormwater

runoff include but are not limited to garbage

dumpsters vehicles miscellaneous metals chemical

storage fuels storage wood products and empty

storage drums These materials should be stored

under cover whenever practicable Contact the

ROICC or Contract Representative with any

questions about whether an outdoor storage practice

is acceptable


11-19

Use good housekeeping practices to maintain clean

and orderly work areas paying particular attention to

those areas that may contribute pollutants to

stormwater For industrial activities refer to the link

below for more information on best management

practices to prevent stormwater pollution EPA

Industrial Fact Sheet Series for Activities Covered by

EPArsquos multi-sector general stormwater permit

httpwwwepagovnpdes


11-20



12-1

120 SOLID WASTE RECYCLING

AND POLLUTION PREVENTION

(P2)

The installation has a proactive

P2 and recycling program and

contractors should minimize the

amount of solid waste requiring

disposal in a landfill This section

addresses solid waste including

both municipal solid waste

(MSW) and construction and

demolition (CampD) waste HM and HW are discussed in

Section 70 of this guide Contractors are required to comply

with all Federal State and local laws and regulations for

proper disposal and recycling of all solid wastes



with solid waste recycling and

pollution prevention If you have






environmental office if additional

clarification is necessary

Contractors should minimize the amount of solid waste requiring disposal in a landfill




12-2


Construction and Demolition Debris Inert

materials generated during the construction

renovation and demolition of buildings roads and

bridges CampD waste often contains bulky heavy

materials such as concrete lumber (from buildings)

asphalt (from roads and roofing shingles) gypsum

(the main component of drywall) and glass (from

windows)

Green Procurement (GP) The purchase of

products and services that are environmentally

preferable when compared with competing products

that serve the same purpose in accordance with

federally mandated ldquogreenrdquo procurement preference

programs GP is intended to have a lesser or reduced

negative effect on human health and the

environment and to permit fulfilling the social

economic and other requirements of present and

future generations

Pollution Prevention Reducing the amount of

pollution entering waste streams or otherwise

released to the environment through source reduction

and process efficiencies

Recycling Activities that may include collection

separation and processing by which products or

other materials are recovered from the solid waste

stream for use as raw materials in the manufacturing

of new products Recycling also includes using

reusing or reclaiming materials as well as processes


12-3

that regenerate a material or recover a usable product

from it

Municipal Solid Waste Any solid materials

discarded including garbage construction debris

commercial refuse non-hazardous materials non-

recyclable wood or other non-recyclable material

per BO 113501 Refuse Disposal Procedures

1212 Key Concepts

Pollution PreventionGreen Procurement

Installation contractors are strongly encouraged to

use P2 and GP practices

Qualified Recycling Program (QRP) An

organized operation that diverts or recovers scrap or

waste streams and that identifies segregates and

maintains the integrity of the recyclable materials in

order to maintain or enhance the marketability of the

materials

Recycling Recycling is required on the installation

The MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill (Base Landfill)

Recycling Center accepts specified recyclables

according to the schedule in Table 12-1 Call (910)

451-4214 prior to a bulk turn-in

Solid Waste Solid waste is disposed of in

accordance with contract specifications (off the

installation or at the Base Landfill) Data related to

disposal off the installation (to include CampD waste)

must be provided to the ROICC or Contract

Representative on a monthly basis


12-4

Source Reduction Any practice that reduces the

amount of any HM pollutant or contaminant

entering any waste stream or released into the

environment prior to recycling treatment and

disposal that could reduce the hazard to public health

and the environment Source reduction may include

equipment or technology modification process or

procedure modification reformulation or redesign of

products substitution of raw materials and

improvements in housekeeping maintenance

training or inventory control


Contractor practices associated with solid waste recycling

and P2 include the following

Battery management


Composting



Grease traps


Land clearing


Metal working

Packagingunpackaging


12-5

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement

Polishing



Road construction maintenance

Rock crushing operations




Vehicle maintenance


include soil degradation surface water quality degradation

depletion of landfill space and depletion of nonrenewable

resources




regarding solid waste disposal recycling and P2 which


BO 509017 Solid Waste Reduction ndash Qualified

Recycling Program Provides guidance for solid


12-6

waste reduction P2 and management of recyclable

materials

BO 113502D Refuse Disposal Procedures

Establishes procedures for the separation collection

and disposal of refuse and the disposal of waste wood

products

DoD Instruction 47154 Pollution Prevention

Establishes the DoD requirement for installation

QRPs and calls for GP



Integrates prior practices strategies and

requirements to further enhance the environmental

and energy performance and compliance

requirements The EO sets goals in several

environmental areas including recycling


Energy and Economic Performance Expands on

the environmental performance requirements for

Federal agencies to include setting goals for solid

waste diversion

Pollution Prevention Act of 1990 (42 USC 13101

et seq) Establishes the national policy that

ldquopollution should be prevented or reduced at the

source whenever feasiblerdquo and establishes the

following hierarchy source reduction recycling

treatment and disposal


Governs the disposal of solid waste and establishes


12-7

Federal waste disposal standards and requirements

for State and regional authorities The objectives of

Subtitle D are to assist in developing and

encouraging methods for the disposal of solid waste

that are environmentally sound and that maximize

the utilization of valuable resources recoverable

from solid waste

Solid Waste Disposal Act (SWDA) of 1965

Requires Federal facilities to comply with all

Federal State interstate and local requirements

concerning the disposal and management of solid

wastes including permitting licensing and

reporting requirements The SWDA encourages the

reuse of waste through recycling and requires the

procurement of products that contain recycled

materials

123 SOLID WASTE REQUIREMENTS

Contractors must follow all Federal State and local

requirements regarding the collection storage and disposal

of solid waste Contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative for additional information regarding solid

waste requirements

At a minimum the following actions are required for all

contractors

1 Prior to performing work that will or may generate

solid waste at the installation all contractors must

provide their ROICC or Contract Representative

with a copy of their Solid Waste Disposal Permit


12-8

unless the use of the Base Landfill is authorized for

disposal If the Base Landfill is authorized the

contractor must contact the Base Landfill Operations

Clerk to ensure the contract is registered in the

Landfill Tracking System Recycling should be

coordinated with the ROICC or Contract

Representative and the Landfill Manager

2 Provide the weight of ALL waste both MSW and

CampD that is either disposed of or recycled to the

ROICC or Contract Representative with a copy to

the Landfill Manager This requirement does not

apply if the landfillrecycling facility picks up or

accepts materials directly from the contractor If

contractors transport waste offsite for disposal it is

mandatory that they track the material weight and

provide that information to their ROICC or Contract

Representative for input into the annual Pollution

Prevention Annual Data Summary

In addition contractors producing solid waste on the

installation are required to take these steps

Pick up solid waste separate it according to material

type and place it in covered containers of the correct

type that are regularly emptied for recycling or

landfilling

Verify that the solid waste contains no HM or HW

Prevent contamination of the site and the

surrounding areas when handling and disposing of

waste


12-9

Leave the project site clean upon completion of a

project

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable

Waste Streams

To dispose of waste at the Base Landfill contractors must be

authorized with a valid construction pass and placard

representing the related contract Contractors must also

contact the Landfill Operator prior to unloading refuse


questions regarding use of the landfill or to coordinate

disposal

The Base Landfill accepts certain types of solid waste under

the conditions specified in Table 12-1 Base Landfill hours

of operation are 0730 to 1530 Monday through Friday but

ACM waste must be delivered between 0700 and 1000

Monday through Thursday Each material must be separated

into different loads


12-10



12-11

Table 12-1 Base Landfill Requirements

No Personal Property

Off-Base Trash Accepted

Landfill Operating Hours

0700-1500 Monday ndash Thursday

0700-1400 Friday

Wood Products

The following products may be

mixed together and delivered

to the landfill

Scrap lumber (unpainted)

Embark boxes (broken down)

Pallets (brokenuntreated)

The following products must be separated and delivered

to the landfill

Trees (cut to 10 feet or less and free of soil)

Leaves and scrubs

Serviceable pallets

Lead Based Painted Wood Products

Delivered before 1400 Monday ndash Thursday

Not accepted on Friday

Cut in less than 8-foot lengths

Wrapped in 6-millimeter plastic bagssealed

Asbestos (all types)

Appointment needed (910-451-5011 2946)

Delivered by 1000 (Mon ndash Thurs)


Double wrapped in 6-millimeter plastic bags


12-12

Sealed with duct tape

Labeled and manifested prior to delivery

Organic Products

Leaves pine straw grass and shrub clippings

No bags or containers allowed

No twigs or limbs over 2 inches in diameter

Less than 6-foot lengths

Concrete

Delivered separately from other items

Wire and rebar must be cut off flush with

exposed surfaces

Concrete and culverts

Bricks and blocks

Mortar products

Soil

Non-contaminated soil accepted

Recyclable Products

(Must be separated and dropped off at a designated

recycling drop-off point or at a Recycling Center)

Wood pallets (delivered separately)

White paper (mixed flat or shredded)

Newspaper

Magazines

Military publications (binders removed)

Phone books

Plastic and glass (containers or bottles)

Toner cartridges

Cardboard (delivered separately if in bulk)


12-13

Vinyl siding (delivered separately in less than 6-

foot lengths)

Asphalt shingles (delivered separately)

Scrap metals

Other Related Information

Asphalt may be accepted in small quantities as needed

at the discretion of the Landfill Manager (large quantities

of asphalt must be taken off the installation)

All furniture must be accompanied by a DD Form 1348

with a classification of rejected by the Base Property

Office AND downgraded to scrap by Defense Logistics

Agency Disposition Services (DLADS)

All other Base or USMC property must be

accompanied by a DD Form 1348 and downgraded to

scrap by DLADS

Scrap materials related to ordinance ammunition or

dangerous items including containers tubes and

packing must also be accompanied by Ammunition

Explosives and Other Dangerous Articles (AEDA)

certifications and copies of the certifier and verifierrsquos

appointment letters

Phone Numbers (area code 910)

Landfill Manager 451-4998

Recycling Manager 451-4214

Landfill Fax 451-9935

Landfill Clerk 451-2946

EMD 451-5837

EOD 451-0558


12-14

Unacceptable Items Hazardous Waste

Liquid Waste

Useable Appliances

Paint and Paint Cans

Appliances

Electronics

Computer Equipment

Batteries

Wire (CommunicationBarbed Concertina)

Oyster Shells

Contaminated Soil

Tires

55-Gallon Drums

Oil Filters

Petroleum Containers

Regulated Medical Waste

PCBs or PCB containers

Demilitarized Waste

Construction and Demolition Debris (unless

specified in the contract)

124 RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS

The installationrsquos QRP is managed by the EMD in

collaboration with the Public Works Division Reducing

solid waste saves money and helps protect the environment

by conserving natural resources Additionally USMC

facilities are mandated to recycle and the installation must

meet solid waste diversion goals specified in EO 13514 the


12-15

DoD Strategic Sustainability Performance Plan and the

EMS

1241 Recycling Center

The MCB Camp Lejeune Recycling Center Building 982 is

co-located with the Base Landfill on Piney Green Road

Normal working hours are Monday through Thursday

0700ndash1500 and Friday 0700-1400 All materials should be

brought to the Recycling Center Have the ROICC or

Contract Representative contact the Recycling Center at

(910) 451-4214 for additional details Call Recycling

Coordinator at (910) 451-4214 for specific types and

categories of materials accepted

The following types and categories of materials are accepted

for recycling but must be delivered to the Recycling Center

on Piney Green Road

Scrap metal

Steel (high temperature corrosion resistant)

Brass (includes spentfired munitions but excludes

brass casings above 50 caliber please call the

Recycling Coordinator at (901) 451-4214 for details

and documentation requirements)

Copper and copper wire

Aluminum (plate sheet scrap) and aluminum cans

Paper (white news magazine)

Cardboard


12-16

Glass bottles (no window windshields or drinking

glass)

Plastic bottles

Toner cartridges

Special arrangements may be made for other materials

(CampD waste) or larger volumes of commonly recycled

materials from events such as CampD Regulations set forth in

BO 113501 must be followed

1242 Other Recyclables

Asphalt Pavement Asphalt must be removed and

delivered to an asphalt recycling facility Contractors

must provide a record of the total tons of asphalt

recycled and the corporate name and location of the

recycling facility to their ROICC or Contract

Representative with a copy to the Landfill Manager

Empty Metal Paint Cans Take empty metal paint

cans to Building S-962 for recycling Turn in all HM

cans or HM containers that are generated from MCB

Camp Lejeune or MEF contracts to Building S-962

on Michael Road on the scheduled contractor turn-in

day Have the ROICC or Contract Representative

contact EMD for more information Any waste

generated from this process must be managed

appropriately

Other Metals Take other metals to the DLADS

disposal area in Lot 201 following the guidelines of

BO 509017


12-17

Red Rag Recycling Contractors should seek a red

rag program to supply and launder shop rags This

service supplies clean rags and picks them up after

use The rags are laundered offsite and returned

Universal Waste See Section 70 of this guide for

management procedures

Unused Hazardous Materials Turn in these

materials to the HM Free Issue Point Building 977

on Michael Road Have the ROICC or Contract

Representative contact the Free Issue Point at (910)

451-1482

White Rag Recycling White rags are used in

painting (these have no dye and thus do not interfere

with these types of operations) and may be laundered

offsite in a program analogous to the red rag

recycling service

125 POLLUTION PREVENTION AND

GREEN PROCURMENT

MCB Camp Lejeune is subject to GP requirements GP

implements environmentally protective principles in the

procurement arena and includes preferential use of the

following

Products made from recovered materials

Biobased products

Water- and energy-efficient products

Alternatives to ozone-depleting substances


12-18

Non-toxic and less-toxic products

Electronics that meet Electronic Product

Environmental Assessment Tool standards

Products that do not contain toxic chemicals

hazardous substances or other pollutants targeted for

reduction and elimination by the DoD

Products with alternative fuel useincreased fuel

efficiency

Environmentally preferable purchasing practices

Contractors are encouraged to employ GP practices

whenever feasible


13-1

130 POTENTIAL DISCOVERY OF

UNDOCUMENTED CONTAMINATED

SITES

MCB Camp Lejeune was placed on the EPA National

Priorities List effective November 4 1989 To ensure the

protection of human health and the environment a proactive

Installation Restoration Program has been established to

assess and remediate various sites on the installation

Numerous investigations have been performed to ensure that

all of the installationrsquos contaminated sites have been found

but additional contaminated areas may still exist It is the

contractorrsquos responsibility to notify the ROICC or Contract

Representative of any unforeseen site conditions while on

the installation It is recommended that any contractors

performing intrusive activities on the installation be properly

trained in accordance with the OSHA standards in 29 CFR

1910120(e) If intrusive

activities are planned for known

contaminated areas all required

environmental training should be

completed prior to working at

MCB Camp Lejeune Copies of

training records should be

available upon request by Federal

or State regulators

Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative with questions or concerns about the information in this section


13-2



with unforeseen site conditions If you have any questions or

concerns about the information in this section please consult

the ROICC or Contract Representative who will contact the


necessary


Free Product A discharged HMHW POL or

environmental pollutant that is present in the

environment as a floating or sinking non-aqueous

phase liquid that exists in its free state (ie exceeds

the solubility limit of liquids or saturation limit of

soilsolids)

National Priorities List List of sites of national

priority among the known releases or threatened

releases of hazardous substances pollutants or

contaminants

Petroleum Oil and Lubricants A broad term that

includes all petroleum and associated products or oil

of any kind or in any form including but not limited

to petroleum fuel oil vegetable oil animal oil

sludge oil refuse and oil mixed with wastes

Unforeseen Site Condition A potentially hazardous

or unanticipated site condition encountered on a job

site



13-3

Munitions and Explosives of Concern Military

munitions that may pose explosives safety risks

including MEC UXO DMM and munitions

constituents present in a high enough concentration

to present an explosives hazard

1312 Key Concepts


Contract Representative in writing of any

unforeseen site conditions prior to disturbing them

Response Contractors must stop working and

evacuate work areas if unforeseen site contaminants

HM or MECDMMUXO are suspected to be

present


Unforeseen site conditions are potentially applicable to all

EMS practices conducted aboard MCB Camp Lejeune




regarding unforeseen site conditions which include but may

not be limited to the following

CERCLA of 1980 and Superfund Amendments amp

Reauthorization Act (SARA) of 1986 Establishes

the Nationrsquos HW site cleanup program


13-4

Occupational Safety and Health Standards 29

CFR 1910 Federal standards that govern

occupational health and safety to ensure the

protection of employees from recognized hazards

such as exposure to toxic chemicals excessive noise

levels mechanical dangers heat or cold stress or

unsanitary conditions The standards include

provisions for many facets of employee safety and

health including but not limited to employee

training personal protective equipment HM

communication medical surveillance and

emergency planning

133 UNFORESEEN SITE CONDITION

PROCEDURES

Contractors must promptly before the conditions are

disturbed give a written notice to the ROICC or Contract

Representative of (1) any subsurface or latent physical

conditions at the site that differ materially from those

indicated in the contract or (2) any unknown physical

conditions at the site of an unusual nature that differ

materially from those ordinarily encountered

The ROICC or Contract Representative will investigate the

site conditions promptly after receiving the notice

The most common unforeseen conditions at MCB Camp

Lejeune typically relate to POL contamination and

MECDMMUXO Procedures for these scenarios are

provided in the following sections


13-5

1331 Petroleum Oil and Lubricants

The most frequently encountered condition that requires

EMD assistance is the presence of a POL odor while

excavating If an odor or any free product is encountered

during construction or excavation activities take the

following actions

Stop work

Immediately clear the area

of all personnel to a safe

distance upwind of the

suspected area

Call the Fire and

Emergency Services

Division (911)

immediately if personnel

are affected or injured by the suspected contaminant

Call the Fire and Emergency Services Division to

properly secure the area

Notify the ROICC or Contract Representative so that

the EMD Spill Response Team will be contacted to

determine the appropriate course of action

Please note that if contaminated soil is removed during

excavation activities the soil will have to be characterized

prior to disposition While it is staged and awaiting

characterization sampling results contaminated soil is to be

placed within a bermed area on an impervious surface or

barrier and securely covered with plastic or appropriate

If there is an odor stop work and immediately clear the area of all personnel to a safe distance upwind of the suspected area



13-6

material Sample results and characterization will determine

the ultimate disposition of the soil In accordance with

installation policy contaminated

soil is not permitted to be

reintroduced into excavations

1332 Munitions and

Ordnance

MCB Camp Lejeune has been in

operation as a military training

installation since the early 1940s As such munitions or an

ordnance item may be encountered during site excavation or

construction activities MEC DMM or UXO at MCB Camp

Lejeune and its outlying areas typically include flares

mines grenades rockets artillery projectiles bulk

explosives fuses or blasting caps These items may vary in

condition from very goodeasily recognizable to

unrecognizable fragmented or corroded scrap metal MEC

DMM or UXO may be encountered on the ground surface

partially buried or completely buried

Contractors operating aboard the

installation should follow the ldquo3Rrdquo

concept if a possible munitions or

ordnance item is discovered

ldquoRecognize Retreat and Reportrdquo

Recognize Contractors with

the potential to encounter any

possible MEC DMM or UXO should have a basic

knowledge of these items The item does not have to

Recognize Retreat

Report

Recognize Retreat

Report


13-7

be specifically recognized or identified but it is

important for personnel to recognize the potential

hazard

Retreat If a suspected MEC DMM or UXO item is

encountered leave the immediate area and DO NOT

DISTURB the item If possible note the general size

and shape of the item any markings and the

location

Report Report all occurrences to the appropriate

authority including any observations (eg size

shape markings and location)

If a project unearths any

potential MECDMMUXO

recognize the potential hazard

Stop work immediately and

have all personnel clear the

immediate area Report the

situation and any observations

to the ROICC or Contract

Representative who will then

report the item to Range Control

and Explosive Ordnance

Disposal (EOD) The following

link is to a 6-minute ldquoUXO Safetyrdquo awareness training video

that provides additional guidance

httpwwwlejeunemarinesmilOfficesStaffExplosivesSaf

ety 20trainingandguidesaspx

For other emergency response procedures please refer to

Section 50 of this guide

Stop work immediately if a project unearths a hazardous material such as MECDMMUXO and report the situation to the ROICC or Contract Representative


13-8



14-1

140 PERMITTING

Contractors operating aboard the installation must ensure

that all relevant environmental permits are obtained before

work commences onsite Contractors must work with their

ROICC or Contract Representative to determine permitting

responsibilities prior to beginning work Contractors must

adhere to all permit conditions Examples of permits related

to the environment are provided in Section 143




contractor permitting



information in this section please

consult the ROICC or Contract



office if additional clarification is

necessary


Major Source Any source that emits or has the

potential to emit 100 tons per year or more of any

criteria air pollutant in accordance with Title V of the

CAA




14-2

Permit A legally enforceable document required by

statutory regulation for potential sources of pollution

that is required for operations that may have an

environmental impact Permits may be administered

at the Federal State or local level




age of 6 lives or is expected to live there) and

residential dwellings where the living areas are not

separated from the sleeping areas (efficiencies

studio apartments dormitories etc)

1412 Key Concepts

Permits Prior to beginning work aboard the

installation consult applicable permit requirements

and ensure that they are met before work begins

Copies of all applicable permitsauthorizations

should be retained onsite for the life of the project

Additional information on North Carolina permits is

found on the following webpage

httpdeqncgovaboutdivisionsenvironmental-

assistance-customer-servicedeacs-permit-

guidanceenvironmental-permit-assistance

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative for

additional information concerning the contractrsquos permit

requirements The contractor is responsible for ensuring that

all required permits are acquired prior to any work aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune


14-3


Currently no practices are associated with permitting under

the EMS


Please refer to the individual sections of this Guide for

applicable permitting regulations and requirements for each

environmental media Many permits have specific

timetables for submittal prior to project initiation

Contractors must consult the permit requirements and ensure

that all pertaining permits are obtained in the required

timeframe

143 PROJECT PERMITS AND

APPROVALS

Prior to work being awarded

EMDrsquos NEPA Section should

have performed an

environmental review of the

installation-associated action

proponent to comply with NEPA

1969 The outcome of this

review would be either a

Decision Memorandum or an

Environmental Assessment

Contractors must refer to their

contract and the requirements

outlined in the NEPA documentation for specific permitting

requirements EMD Program Managers are available for

The NCDEQ website (httpdeqncgov) is a useful reference for determining required permits and obtaining

necessary forms


14-4

guidance however if the contractor is tasked with preparing

permit applications the contractor is expected to have the

capability and expertise required to complete the submittals

in accordance with the guidance provided by the regulatory

agency that issues the permit In addition EMD must be

provided with copies of all permits submitted to the

NCDEQ In some cases EMD must submit the permit

application Please direct questions to the ROICC or


Some permits that may be required are discussed in

applicable sections of this Guide The following list of

permits is not meant to be all-inclusive please be aware that

other permits may also be required The NCDEQ website

(httpdeqncgov) is a useful reference for determining

required permits and obtaining necessary forms In addition

any inspection andor data collection required by the permits

must be retained onsite for review upon request

1431 Stormwater (Section 110)

NPDES Stormwater Discharge Permit for

Construction Activities (also referred to as

General Permit No NCG010000) Required for all

LDAs that exceed 1 acre also requires an

accompanying Erosion and Sedimentation Control

Plan

General Permit SWG050000 Required for

residential development activities within the 20

coastal counties (including Onslow County) located

within 12 mile and draining to class SA waters

(waters classified as SA are tidal salt waters that are


14-5

used for commercial shellfishing or marketing

purposes) that disturb less than 1 acre if adding more

than 10000 square feet of built-upon area that will

result in a built-upon area greater than 12 percent of

the total project area

High-Density Stormwater Permit Required when

(1) the LDA exceeds 1 acre and impervious surfaces

are greater than or equal to 25 percent of the total

project area adjacent to non-SA waters or greater

than or equal to 12 percent of the total project area

adjacent to SA water or (2) total development

exceeds 10000 square feet of impervious surface

Low-Density Stormwater Permit Required when

the LDA exceeds 1 acre and impervious surfaces are

less than 25 percent of the total project area when

adjacent to non-SA waters or less than 12 percent of

the total project area when adjacent to SA waters

1432 Asbestos (Section 80)

Asbestos Permit Application and Notification for

DemolitionRenovation DHHS Form 3768

available at the following website (under Forms amp

Applications)

httpepipublichealthncgovasbestosahmphtml

1433 Lead-Based Paint (Section 90)

North Carolina Lead-Based Paint Abatement

Permit Application Any person or firm conducting

an abatement of a child-occupied facility or target


14-6

housing is required to obtain a Lead Hazard

Management Plan Permit The application is

available at the following website

httpepipublichealthncgovleadpdfLeadAbatePe

rmit08-07pdf

1434 Air Quality (Section 40)

Construction Permits Construction permits are

required for all new stationary sources and all

existing stationary sources that are added to or are

modified with new equipment that may emit air

pollutants Permits may be required for the

construction or modification of the following types

of emission sources

Boilers

Generators

Engine test stands

Surface coatingpainting operations

Refrigerant recovery and recycling operations for

other ozone-depleting substances such as

industrial chillers refrigerators air conditioning

compressors or cleaning agents

Chemical or mechanical paint removal abrasive

blasting grinding or other surface preparation

activities


Woodworking shops


14-7

Welding shops

Bulk chemical or flammables storage

Open burning

Fire training

Rock crushing or other dust-causing activities

New Source Review Permit A New Source Review

permit is a pre-construction permit that authorizes

the construction of new major sources of air pollution

or major modifications of existing sources

1435 Wetlands (Section 106)

Section 404 Clean Water Act Permit Contractors

working aboard the installation will not perform any

work in waters of the United States or wetlands (see

definition below) without an approved permit (even

if the work is temporary) Unavoidable impacts to

wetlands or waters of the United States will require

coordination and written approval from the USACE

for a Section 404 CWA permit (individual or

applicable nationwide permit) the NCDWR for a

Section 401c Water Quality certification and the

NCDCM for a Federal Consistency Determination

Failure to acquire written authorization for making

impacts to wetlands andor waters of the United

States may result in significant project delays or

design modifications See the following website for

more information

httpwwwepagovlaws-regulations


14-8

1436 Drinking WaterWastewater

Approval of Engineering Plans and Specifications

for Water Supply Systems Applicants must submit

engineering plans and specifications at least 30 days

prior to the date upon which the Authorization to

Construct is desired Authorization to Construct must

be obtained prior to onset of work

Wastewater Extension Permit NCDEQ Form FTA

0203 ndash Rev 3 0405 Applicants submitting Form

FTA 0203 should plan to allow the State

approximately 90 days to issue the permit The

Wastewater Extension Permit must be obtained prior

to onset of work

PROJECT

01 11 00

01 12 00

01 13 00

01 14 00

01 20 00

01 30 00

01 31 50

01 32 16

01 33 00

01 35 29

01 42 00

01 45 10

01 50 00

01 57 19

01 74 19

01 78 00

01 78 23

01 78 30

02 41 00

02 82 30

03 01 32

03 11 1300 10

03 15 0000 10

03 20 0000 10

03 31 0100 10

03 39 0000 10

05 50 13

06 82 14

07 13 53

07 84 00

09 90 00

22 00 00

23 07 00

26 00 0000 20

26 05 1910 10

26 20 00

26 56 00

31 23 0000 20

32 01 19

32 16 13

32 92 19

33 34 00

33 71 02

40 05 00

40 95 00

41 21 00

46 20 20

46 23 00

ADDRVER

BRKTVER

DUPEREF

REFVER

REGISTER

SECTVER

SUBMLIST

SUBMVER

TSTRQLST

TTLDIFFS

Blank Page

Revised Contractor_Environmental_Guidepdf

Binder1

Binder1

CVR_MCB_Enviro_55x85_rlm

Blank page

Final Contractor Environmental Guide (85 x 55)

Table of Contents

Record of Changes

Certification Page

List of Acronyms and Abbreviations

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory

10 Contractor Environmental Guide Overview

11 Key Definitions and Concepts

111 Key Definitions

112 Key Concepts

12 Installation Background

121 Environmental Management Division and Environmental Affairs Department

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB Camp Lejeune) Organization Chart

Figure 1-2 Environmental Affairs Department (MCAS New River) Organization Chart

122 Expectations

13 Overview of Requirements



14 Points of Contact


15 Overview Map



21 Key Definition and Concepts

211 Key Definitions

212 Key Concepts




Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and Demolition Activities with the Environment

24 EMS Responsibilities

25 Contractor Environmental Guide and EMS

Table 2-1 Practices Identified Under MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMS

30 Training


311 Key Definitions

312 Key Concepts



33 Training Requirements



333 Recordkeeping

40 Air Quality


411 Key Definitions

412 Key Concepts



43 Permit Requirements

44 Additional Activities of Concern

50 Environmental Emergency Planning and Response


511 Key Definitions

512 Key Concepts




53 Spill Notification

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill Notification Procedures

532 Wastewater Spill and Water Line Break Notification

54 Follow-Up

60 Cultural Resources


611 Key Definitions

612 Key Concepts



63 Procedures

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow Chart

70 Hazardous MaterialsHazardous Waste Management


711 Key Definitions

712 Key Concepts




73 Hazardous Materials Requirements

74 Universal Waste Requirements

75 Hazardous Waste Requirements

751 Storage


76 NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Requirements


762 Used Antifreeze

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily Rags


765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated as Universal Waste)

80 Asbestos


811 Key Definitions

812 Key Concepts



83 Responsibilities Before a Demolition or Renovation Project


832 Notification

833 Removal

834 Training

84 Responsibilities During a Demolition or Renovation Project

85 Disposal of ACM Waste

90 Lead-Based Paint


911 Key Definitions

912 Key Concepts



93 Responsibilities Before Renovation or Demolition

94 Permits

95 Disposal

96 Training

100 Natural Resources



1012 Key Concepts



103 National Environmental Policy Act

104 Timber

105 Threatened and Endangered Species

106 Wetlands

1061 Avoidance

1062 Permits

1063 Impacts

1064 Mitigation


110 Stormwater



1112 Key Concepts



113 Prior to Site Work


1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I Industrial Permit

1133 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase II Municipal Permit


114 Responsibilities During Site Work

120 Solid Waste Recycling and Pollution Prevention (P2)



1212 Key Concepts



123 Solid Waste Requirements

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable Waste Streams


124 Recycling Requirements



125 Pollution Prevention and Green Procurment

130 Potential Discovery of Undocumented Contaminated Sites



1312 Key Concepts



133 Unforeseen Site Condition Procedures


1332 Munitions and Ordnance

140 Permitting



1412 Key Concepts



143 Project Permits and Approvals







Appendix 85 x 55

Blank Page

Blank Page

Blank Page

Blank Page



DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK01 12 00 CUTTING AND PATCHING01 13 00 TRAFFIC SAFETY01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS01 31 50 TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01 78 30 GIS DATA DELIVERABLES

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION02 82 30 RE-ESTABLISHING VEGETATION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 01 32 CONCRETE REHABILITATION FOR CIVIL WORKS03 11 1300 10 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS03 39 0000 10 CONCRETE CURING

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 82 14 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS26 05 1910 10 INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS32 92 19 SEEDING

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 34 00 FORCE MAINS SEWER33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 00 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATED SLIDE GATES40 95 00 PROCESS CONTROL

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 21 00 SCREENING amp GRIT CONVEYORS

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR46 23 00 GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

-- End of Project Table of Contents --



SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

0908

PART 1 GENERAL

11 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

111 Project Description

The work includes repairs and upgrades to the existing headworks facility at the existing Wastewater Treatment Plant and incidental related work

112 Location

The work shall be located at Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune North Carolina approximately as shown The exact location will be indicated by the Contracting Officer

12 EXISTING WORK

In addition to FAR 52236-9 Protection of Existing Vegetation Structures Equipment Utilities and Improvements

a Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain

b Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work as approved by the Contracting Officer At the completion of operations existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started

13 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a professional utility locator to scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered Verify the elevations of existing piping utilities and any type of underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be removed but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping ducts and other work to be installed Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made

131 Notification Prior to Excavation

Notify the Contracting Officer 48 hours prior to starting excavation work in order to permit making arrangements with public works personnel to scan the area for unmarked utilities Obtain station digging permits prior to starting excavation work



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 12 00

CUTTING AND PATCHING

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 CUTTING

Shall be done by sawing along straight lines The amount cut out shall bethe minimum necessary to accommodate the new work No flame cutting willbe permitted without written permission of the Officer in Charge ofConstruction

12 HOLES

Shall be rotary drilled The size shall be the minimum necessary toaccommodate the new work

13 PATCHING

Shall be done with materials which match the existing in color quality andsurface texture when finished

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 13 00

TRAFFIC SAFETY

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


US FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

MUTCD (2009) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices

12 MAINTENANCE FOR TRAFFIC

The existing road or an approved bypass shall be kept open to all traffic while undergoing improvements The Contractor shall furnish erect light and maintain barricades warning and informational signs delineators and flagmen in accordance MUTCD

121 TEMPORARY APPROACHES

Temporary approaches or crossings and intersections with trails roads streets residences and parking lots shall be maintained in a safely passable condition

13 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to assure the safety and convenience of the users and of those along the streets and roads and to assure the protection of persons and property

14 WARNING SIGNS

Warning signs shall be erected in advance of any place on the project where operations may interfere with the use of the road by traffic and at all intermediate points where the new work crosses or coincides with an existing road

141 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

The Contractor shall furnish erect maintain and remove when directed any informational identification indicated

142 CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGNS

Construction warning signs shall be displayed only when a crew is actually working at the site Men Working or Flagman signs shall be removed from view of traffic when not needed



15 TRAFFIC REROUTING PLANS

Traffic rerouting plans shall be submitted for approval seven calendar days before the anticipated rerouting and shall not be implemented before approval The Contractor shall erect and remove all detour signs

16 PAINTING -- TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT

Painting on each street or roadway shall begin within 48 hours after pavement is placed and shall be placed continuously during daylight hours except during rain until completion Painting interrupted for rain shall restart during daylight as soon as pavement is dry Provide temporary painting on all roadways and stress except where permanent markings can be placed within 48 hours after pavement is placed

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 Traffic Control Devices

MUTCD

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

a Permission to interrrupt any Station roads railroads andor utility service shall be requested in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption

12 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES

121 Station Regulations

Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Station become familiar with and obey Station regulations Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress as directed Do not enter restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry Wear hard hats in designated areas Do not enter any restricted aras unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry The Contractors equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification

122 Working Hours

Regular working hours shall consist of an eight and one-half hour period established by the Contracting Officer Monday through Friday excluding Government holidays

123 Work Outside Regular Hours

Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval Provide written request at least 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress During periods of darkness the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer

124 Occupied and Existing Buildings

The Contractor shall be working around existing buildings which are occupied Do not enter the buildings without prior approval of the Contracting Officer

The existing buildings and their contents shall be kept secure at all times Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as directed by the Contracting Officer

Provide dust covers or protective enclosures to protect existing work that remains and Government material located in the work area during the construction period

The Government will remove and relocate other Government property in the



areas of the buildings scheduled to receive work

125 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

a Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays Sundays and Government holidays Conform to procedures required in the paragraph Work Outside Regular Hours

b Ensure that new utility lines are complete except for the connection before interrupting existing service

c Interruption to water sanitary sewer storm sewer telephone service electric service air conditioning heating fire alarm compressed air shall be considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entitled Work Outside Regular Hours Such interruption shall be further limited to 4 hours This time limit includes time for deactivation and reactivation

d Operation of Station Utilities The Contractor shall not operate nor disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system including water sewer electrical and steam services The Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 20 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

0412

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



EP-1110-1-8 (2009) Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating Expense Schedule

12 SUBMITTALS



Schedule of prices

13 SCHEDULE OF PRICES

131 Data Required

Within 15 calendar days of notice of award prepare and deliver to Contracting Officer a schedule of prices (construction contract) on the forms furnished by the Government Provide a detailed breakdown of the contract price giving quantities for each of the various kinds of work unit prices and extended prices therefor Schedule of prices shall be separated by individual building numbers with subtotals for each building

132 Schedule Instructions

Payments will not be made until the schedule of prices has been submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer Identify the cost for site work and include incidental work to the 5 foot line Identify costs for the building(s) and include work out to the 5 foot line Workout to the 5 foot line shall include construction encompassed within a theoretical line 5 feet from the face of exterior walls and shall include attendant construction such as cooling towers placed beyond the 5 foot line

14 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS

In conjunction with the Contract Clause DFARS 252236-7000 Modification Proposals-Price Breakdown and where actual ownership and operating costs of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting records equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions



of the EP-1110-1-8

15 CONTRACTORS PAYMENT REQUEST

151 Proper Payment Request

A proper request for paymentinvoice shall comply with all requirements specified in this Section and the contract payment clauses If any invoice does not comply with these requirements it shall be returned with a statement of the reasons why it was not a proper invoice A proper payment requestinvoice includes the following information completed forms and number of copies indicated Upon request the Contracting Officer will furnish copies of Government forms

a Contractors Invoice on NAVFAC Form 730030 which shall show the basis for arriving at the amount of the invoice Submit one original and two copies

b Contractors Monthly Estimate for Voucher (LANTNAVFACENGCOM Form 4-4330110 Submit original and two copies

c Payment Certification Furnish as specified in FAR Clause 52232-5 (c) Payments under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts Submit one original

d QC Invoice Certification Furnish as specified in Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Submit one original

1511 Progress Payments

In addition to the requirements stated in Paragraph 151 Proper Payment Request above the Contractors request for progress payments shall include the following

a Updated Progress Schedule Furnish an updated progress schedule as specified in contract clause FAR 52236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts and Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Submit one copy

1512 Final Payments

The request for final payment is submitted after completion and acceptance of all work and all other requirements of the contract Before submitting the final invoice the Contractor shall meet with the appropriate Government representatives to determine the final invoice amount including the assessment of liquidated damages if any and to make sure the final release is complete and accurate In addition to the requirements in Paragraph 151 Proper Payment Request above the Contractors request for final payment shall include the following

a A final release executed on the standard form provided by the Contracting Officer Submit two originals with final payment request

b NC Tax certified statement and report for the prime and each subcontractor (FAR 52229-7) Submit two copies

c As-built drawings (if applicable)



d Warranties (if applicable)

e OampM manuals (if applicable)

f Final payrolls (FAR 52222-6)

g A release for an assignment of claims (if applicable) Submit three originals

152 Procedures for Submitting Payment Request

a The Contractor may submit only one invoice for payment each month as the work progresses

b The invoice shall be delivered to the ROICC Office Administrative Branch between five calendar days before and five calendar days after the contract award date Invoices received outside this schedule shall be returned to the Contractor unprocessed The Contractor will have to wait until the following month to submit their next invoice

c Invoices shall be delivered during normal work hours from 730 AM up to 400 PM (EST) Monday through Friday excluding holidays

16 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR

Payments will be made on submission of a proper payment requestinvoice by the Contractor

161 Obligation of Government Payments

The obligation of the Government to make payments required under the provisions of this contract will at the discretion of the Contracting Officer be subject to the following

a Reasonable retention andor deductions due to defects in material or workmanship potential liquidated damages andor failure to comply with any other requirements of the contract

b Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or in connection with this contract and

c Unless otherwise adjusted repayment to the Government upon demand for overpayments made to the Contractor

d Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in Contract Clause FAC 5252236-9310 Record Drawings NC State tax certified statement and report in accordance with FAR 52229-2 labor payrolls in accordance with FAR 52222-6 as-built drawings in accordance with Section 01 45 10 Quality Control warranties and OampM manuals and any other requirements in the contract

162 Payment for Onsite and Offsite Materials

Progress payments may be made to the contractor for materials delivered on the site for materials stored off construction sites or materials that are in transit to the construction sites under the following conditions



a FAR 52232-5(b) Payments Under Fixed Price Construction Contracts

b Materials delivered on the site but not installed including completed preparatory work and off-site materials to be considered for progress payment shall be major high cost long lead special order or specialty items not susceptible to deterioration or physical damage in storage or in transit to the construction site Examples of materials acceptable for payment considerations include but are not limited to structural steel non-magnetic steel non-magnetic aggregate equipment machinery large pipe and fittings precast prestressed concrete products plastic lumber (eg fender piles curbs) and high-voltage electrical cable Materials no t acceptable for payment include consumable materials such as nails fasteners conduits gypsum board glass insulation and wall coverings

c Materials to be considered for progress payment prior to installation shall be specifically and separately identified in the Contractors estimates of work submitted for the Contracting Officers approval in accordance with Earned Value Report requirement of this contract Requests for progress payment considerations for such items shall be supported by documents establishing their value and that the title requirements of the clause at FAR 52232-5 have been met

d Materials are adequately insured and protected from theft and exposure

e Provide a written consent from the surety company with each payment request for offsite materials

f Materials to be considered for progress payments prior to installation shall be stored in the Continental United States

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

0213

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures


List of contact personnel

12 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

Procure and maintain during the entire period of performance under this contract the following minimum insurance coverage

a Comprehensive general liability $500000 per occurrence

b Automobile liability $200000 per person $500000 per occurrence $20000 per occurrence for property damage

c Workmens compensation as required by Federal and State workers compensation and occupational disease laws

d Employers liability coverage of $100000 except in States where workers compensation may not be written by private carriers

e Others as required by State law

13 ELECTRONIC MAIL (EMAIL)

a The Contractor is required to establish and maintain electronic mail (email) capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments in Microsoft Adobe Acrobat and other similar formats

b Within 10 days after contract award the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer a single (only one) email address for the ROICC office to send communications related to this contract correspondence The ROICC office may also use email to notify the Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant such as hurricanes terrorist threats etc

c Multiple email addresses are not authorized

d It is the Contractors responsibility to make timely distribution of all ROICC email within its own organization including field office(s)

e The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer in



writing of any changes to their email address

14 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

141 Subcontractors and Personnel

Furnish a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an emergency As changes occur and additional information becomes available correct and change the information contained in previous lists

142 Identification Badges

Identification badges will be furnished without charge Application for and use of badges will be as directed below Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer Employees are required to resubmit a complete 50 state criminal records check in order to renew their contractor badge

143 Business Access Security Requirements

1431 Business Access Definition

Contractorsubcontractor employees requiring installation access to MCB Camp Lejeune or MCAS New River NC must obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for that particular installation Regularly scheduled delivery personnel to include FEDEX UPS Pick-up and deliveries should also follow the Business Access guidelines described below Personnel requiring Business Access Identification Badges shall submit all documentation listed below Badges are not required if the contracted position requires the employee to obtain a Common Access Card (CAC) which will be identified separately within the Government contract

1432 Installation Security Access Requirements

Contractor shall accomplish the security requirements below within 10 days after award or prior to performance under the contract

1433 Business Access Identification Badge Requirement

In order to obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for access to MCB Camp Lejeune and satellite activities or MCAS New River NC all personnel providing services under this contract shall be required to present the documentation below to the following offices as applicable

MCB Camp Lejeune NC and its satellite activities Report as follows

1 Identification Card Center 60 Molly Pitcher Road for badge (910-450-8444)

MCAS New River NC Report as follows

1 Pass and Identification Office Bldg AS-187 for badge (910-449-7695) and vehicle pass (910-449-5513)

1434 Proof of Employee Citizenship or Legal Alien Status

Employers may participate in the E-verify program (1-888-464-4218 wwwDHSgove-verify) allowing US employers to verify name DOB and SSN



along with immigration information for non-citizens against federal databases in order to verify the employment eligibility of both citizens and non-citizen new hires

1435 Proof of Criminal Records Check

Commercial and contract employees must provide proof of a complete 50 state criminal records check on an annual basis The record check may be obtained from any of the following Internet investigative services Kroll (former Infolink Screening Services) at wwwkrollcom Castle Branch at wwwcastlebranchcom or any other investigative services company that provides records checks for all 50 states These services also validate social security card numbers All criminal history checks must be completed no more than 30 days prior to start date of contract (Note These Internet screening services are listed as possible sources for obtaining a criminal background check The United States government and the United States Marine Corps do not endorse nor are they affiliated with any of these services)

1436 Letter Provided By Contracting Officer Indicating Contract

Letter provided by Contracting Officer indicating contract contract period and prime contractor Proof of employment on a valid Government contract (eg a letter on company letterhead from the prime contractor including contract number and term)

1437 Photo ID

Valid state or federal issued picture identification card Acceptable documents include state drivers license DMV issued photo identification or alien registration card

1438 National Crime Investigation Center (NCIC) Check

Provost Marshals are authorized to conduct a national crime information center (NCIC) check of all persons entering the installation ifwhere applicable the NCIC check may include driverss license query wants and warrants and criminal history

144 Denial of Access

Installation access shall be denied if it is determined that an employee

a Is on the National Terrorist Watch List

b Is illegally present in the United States

c Is subject to an outstanding warrant

d Has knowingly submitted an employment questionnaire with false or fraudulent information

e Has been issued a debarment order and is currently banned from military installations

f Is a Registered Sexual Offender

g Has been convicted of a felony or a drug crime within the past five years



h Individuals who have received a DUIDWI in the last year may be allowed access to the installation but will not be permitted to drive on the installation

i Any reason the Installation Commander deems reasonable for the good order and discipline

145 Appeal Process

All appeals should be directed to the Base Inspectors Office for any individual that has been denied access to the Base

146 Display of Badges

Contractorssubcontractors shall prominently display their badges on their person at all times Upon completiontermination of this contract or an individuals employment the Contractor shall collect and turn in to the Pass amp ID Office all badges If the Contactor fails to obtain the employees badge the Pass amp ID Office will be notified within 24 hours Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer

147 Contractor and Subcontractor Vehicle Requirements

Each vehicle to be used in contract performance shall show the Contractors or subcontractors name so that it is clearly visible and shall always display a valid state license plate and safety inspection sticker To obtain a vehicle decal which will be valid for one year or contract period whichever is shorter Contractor or subcontractor vehicle operators shall provide to the Vehicle Registration Office 60 Molly Pitcher Road (910-451-1158) or to MCAS Building AS-187 (910-449-5513) for vehicle decal

a An installation sponsor request forwarded to provost Marshall office

b A valid form of Federal or state government ID

c If driving a motor vehicle a valid drivers license vehicle registration and proof of insurance

Upon completiontermination of this contract or an individuals employment the Contractor shall collect and turn in to Vehicle Registration all Government vehicle decals If any are not collected the Contractor shall notify the Vehicle Registration Office within 24 hours

148 Security Checks

Contractor personnel and vehicles shall only be present in locations relevant to contract performance All Contractor personnel entering the base shall conform to all Government regulations and are subject to such checks as may be deemed necessary to ensure that violations do not occur Employees shall not be permitted on base when such a check reveals that their presence would be detrimental to the security of the base Subject to security regulations the Government will allow access to an area for servicing equipment andor performing required services Upon request the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer questionnaires and other forms as may be required for security purposes



149 Subcontractor Special Requirements

1491 Space Temperature Control HVAC TAB and Apparatus Inspection

All contract requirements shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor No work shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor

1492 Telecommunication and High Voltage Work

When telecommunications and high voltage work is required all work associated with telecommunications and high voltage shall be accomplished by a first tier subcontractor The contractor must possess a valid North Carolina Public Utility - Electrical contractors license and be insured to do such work in the State of North Carolina

1493 Paving Associated with Utility Cuts

All pavement repairs associated with utility cuts shall be completed within 14 days of completing work within paved area

15 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION

Contactor shall comply as follows

(a) The Contractor shall not release to anyone outside the Contractors organization any unclassified information regardless of medium (eg film tape document) pertaining to any part of this contract or any program related to this contact unless -

(1) The Contracting Officer has given prior written approval or

(2) The information is otherwise in th public domain before the date of release

(b) Requests for approval shall identify the specific information to be released the medium to be used and the purpose for the release The Contractor shall submit its request to the Contracting Officer at least 45 days before the proposed date for release

(c) The Contractor agrees to include a similar requirement in each subcontract under this contract Subcontractors shall submit requests for authorization to release through the prime contractor to the Contracting Officer

16 SUPERVISION

Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading writing and conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working hours In addition if a Quality Control (CQ) representative is required on the contract then that individual shall also have fluent English communication skills

NOTE If training and experience requirements of Section 01 45 10 Quality Control and 01 35 29 Safety and Occupational Health Requirements have been met the supervisor may also serve as QC Manager and Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)



17 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the site meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and safety program preparation of the schedule of prices shop drawings and other submittals scheduling programming and prosecution of the work Major subcontractors who will engage in the work shall also attend

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 31 50

TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY

0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS



Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp Acceptance of Military Real Property

12 Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp Acceptance of Military Real Property

Submit Interim DD-1354 thirty (30) days prior to beneficial occupancy date (draft copy attached)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 32 16

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

0412

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS



Construction schedule

Equipment delivery schedule

12 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Within 21 days after receipt of the Notice of Award prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a Critical Path Method (CPM) Network Schedule in accordance with the terms in Contract Clause FAR 52236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts except as modified in this contract Primavera P6 will be utilized to produce and update all progress schedules

13 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE

131 Initial Schedule

Within 30 calendar days after approval of the proposed construction schedule submit for Contracting Officer approval a schedule showing procurement plans for materials plant and equipment Submit in the format and content as prescribed by the Contracting Officer and include as a minimum the following information

a Description

b Date of the purchase order

c Promised shipping date

d Name of the manufacturer or supplier

e Date delivery is expected

f Date the material or equipment is required according to the current construction schedule

14 NETWORK ANALYSIS SYSTEM (NAS)

The Contractor shall use the critical path method (CPM) to schedule and control construction activities The Network shall have a minimum of 25



activities and a maximum of 50 activities The schedule shall identify as a minimum

a Construction time for all major systems and components

b Manpower requirements for each activity

c Major submittals and submittal processing time and

d Major equipment lead time

141 CPM Submittals and Procedures

The Contractor shall use the critical path method (CPM) to schedule and control project activities Project schedules shall be prepared and maintained using Primavera P6 Primavera SureTrak or current mandated scheduling program Save files in Concentric P6 or current mandated scheduling program file format compatible with the Governments version of the scheduling program The network analysis system shall be kept current with changes made to reflect the actual progress and status of the construction

15 UPDATED SCHEDULES

Update the construction schedule and equipment delivery schedule at monthly intervals or when schedule has been revised Reflect any changes occurring since the last update Submit copies of the purchase orders and confirmation of the delivery dates as directed

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

111 Government-Furnished Information

Submittal register will be delivered to the contractor in hard copy format Register will have the following fields completed to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage

Column (c) Lists specification section in which submittal is required

Column (d) Lists each submittal description (SD No and type eg SD-04 Drawings) required in each specification section

Column (e) Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements

Column (f) Indicate approving authority for each submittal The Contracting Officer is approving authority for all submittals

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Submittal

Shop drawings product data samples and administrative submittals presented for review and approval Contract Clauses FAR 52236-5 Material and Workmanship paragraph (b) and FAR 52236-21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction paragraphs (d) (e) and (f) apply to all submittals

122 Types of Submittals

All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph Submittal Descriptions (SD) Submittals also are grouped as follows

a Shop drawings As used in this section drawings schedules diagrams and other data prepared specifically for this contract by contractor or through contractor by way of subcontractor manufacturer supplier distributor or other lower tier contractor to illustrate portion of work

b Product data Preprinted material such as illustrations standard schedules performance charts instructions brochures diagrams manufacturers descriptive literature catalog data and other data to illustrate portion of work but not prepared exclusively



for this contract

c Samples Physical examples of products materials equipment assemblies or workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work illustrating portion of work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both

d Administrative submittals Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract documents

123 Submittal Descriptions (SD)


Certificates of insurance

Surety bonds

List of proposed subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction Progress Schedule

Submittal schedule

Schedule of values

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality control plan


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project

Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts illustrations schedules diagrams performance charts instructions and brochures illustrating size physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment for some portion of the work

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product



warranties

SD-04 Samples

Physical examples of materials equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged

Color samples from the manufacturers standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project

Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations mix designs analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material product or system identical to the material product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements (Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project)

Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site

Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site on portion of work during or after installation

Investigation reports

Daily checklists

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

SD-07 Certificates

Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product system or material attesting that product system or material meets specification requirements Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project

Document required of Contractor or of a supplier installer or subcontractor through Contractor the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications

Confined space entry permits




Preprinted material describing installation of a product system or material including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances hazards and safety precautions


Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturers representative to confirm compliance with manufacturers standards or instructions

Factory test reports


Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals


Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism

As-built drawings

Special warranties


Training plan

124 Approving Authority

Person authorized to approve submittal

125 Work

As used in this section on- and off-site construction required by contract documents including labor necessary to produce construction and materials products equipment and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction

13 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section


Submittal register


14 USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register as the work progresses Use the hard copy submittal register furnished by the Government or other approved format Do not change data which is output in columns (c) (d) (e) and (f) as delivered by government retain data which is output in columns (a) (g) (h) and (i) as approved



141 Submittal Register

Submit submittal register as a hard copy Submit with quality control plan and project schedule required by Section 01 45 10 Quality Control and Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Do not change data in columns (c) (d) (e) and (f) as delivered by the government Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing submittals Complete the following on the register

Column (a) Activity Number Activity number from the project schedule

Column (g) Contractor Submit Date Scheduled date for approving authority to receive submittals

Column (h) Contractor Approval Date Date contractor needs approval of submittal

Column (i) Contractor Material Date that contractor needs material delivered to contractor control

142 Contractor Use of Submittal Register


Column (b) Transmittal Number Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers

Column (j) Action Code (k) Date of action used to record contractors review when forwarding submittals to QC

Column (l) List date of submittal transmission

Column (q) List date approval received

143 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register


Column (b)

Column (l) List date of submittal receipt

Column (m) through (p)

Column (q) List date returned to contractor

144 Contractor Action Code and Action Code

Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form)

NR - Not Received

AN - Approved as noted

A - Approved

RR - Disapproved Revise and Resubmit



145 Copies Delivered to the Government

Deliver one copy of submitted register updated by contractor to government with each invoice request

15 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

151 Reviewing Certifying Approving Authority

QC organization shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in compliance with contract requirements The Contracting Officer is the approving authority for all submittals

152 Constraints

a Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this section unless explicitly stated otherwise

b Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work components of definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time

c When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions items or materials included in separate subsequent submittals submittal will be returned without review

d Approval of a separate material product or component does not imply approval of assembly in which item functions

153 Scheduling

a Coordinate scheduling sequencing preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing Allow for potential requirements to resubmit

b Except as specified otherwise allow review period beginning with receipt by approving authority that includes at least 15 working days for submittals for QC manager approval and 20 working days for submittals for contracting officer approval Period of review for submittals with contracting officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organization Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal

c For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer allow review period beginning when government receives submittal from QC organization of 45 working days for return of submittal to the contractor Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal

154 Variations

Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant to contract Clause entitled FAR 52236-21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction and will be considered where advantageous to government

1541 Considering Variations

Discussion with contracting officer prior to submission will help ensure



functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP)

1542 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation deliver written request to the contracting officer with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to government If lower cost is a benefit also include an estimate of the cost saving In addition to documentation required for variation include the submittals required for the item Clearly mark the proposed variation in all

documentation

1543 Warranting That Variation Are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation if incorporated will be compatible with other elements of work

1544 Review Schedule Is Modified

In addition to normal submittal review period a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations

155 Contractors Responsibilities

a Determine and verify field measurements materials field construction criteria review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and contract documents

b Transmit submittals to QC organization in accordance with schedule on approved Submittal Register and to prevent delays in the work delays to government or delays to separate contractors

c Advise contracting officer of variation as required by paragraph entitled Variations

d Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority When resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal the contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments for use by approving authority Direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted submittal to revisions not requested by approving authority on previous submissions

e Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by contracting officer to a limit of 20 copies per submittal

f Complete work which must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in time to allow submittal to occur as scheduled

g Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as approved or approved as noted except to the extent that a portion of work must be accomplished as basis of submittal



156 QC Organization Responsibilities

a Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each submittal

b Review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents

c Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents

d Act on submittals determining appropriate action based on QC organizations review of submittal

(1) When QC manager is approving authority take appropriate action on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible

(2) When contracting officer is approving authority or when variation has been proposed forward submittal to Government with certifying statement or return submittal marked not reviewed or revise and resubmit as appropriate The QC organizations review of submittal determines appropriate action

e Ensure that material is clearly legible

f Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or approving statement except that data submitted in bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only

(1) When approving authority is contracting officer QC organization will certify submittals forwarded to contracting officer with the following certifying statement

I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with contract Number N40085- 16-B- 0010 is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification can be installed in the allocated spaces and is submitted for Government approval

Certified by Submittal Reviewer _____________________ Date _______(Signature when applicable)

Certified by QC manager _____________________________ Date ______(Signature)

g Sign certifying statement or approval statement The person signing certifying statements shall be QC organization member designated in the approved QC plan The signatures shall be in original ink Stamped signatures are not acceptable

h Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the submittal register at project site until final acceptance of all work by contracting officer

i Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site including contractors copy of approved samples



157 Governments Responsibilities

When approving authority is contracting Officer the Government will

a Note date on which submittal was received from QC manager on each submittal for which the contracting officer is approving authority

b Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents

c Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible and with markings appropriate for action indicated

158 Actions Possible

Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations

a Submittals marked not reviewed will indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and approved is not required does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by contractor or is not complete A submittal marked not reviewed will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete with appropriate action coordination or change

b Submittals marked approved approved as submitted authorize contractor to proceed with work covered

c Submittals marked approved as noted authorize contractor to proceed with work as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the notations

d Submittals marked revise and resubmit or disapproved indicate submittal is incomplete or does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract documents and shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes No work shall proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved

16 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

161 Complete Submittal Package

Contractor shall make electronic copies of all submittals including the approved transmittal sheets and provide two (2) CDDVDs containing all submittals for the project


162 Transmittal Form

Transmit each submittal except sample installations and sample panels to office of approving authority Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by contracting officer and standard for project The transmittal form shall identify contractor indicate date of submittal and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in



paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding sample panels and sample installations

163 Identifying Submittals

Identify submittals except sample panel and sample installation with the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form Mark each copy of each submittal identically with the following

a Project title and location

b Construction contract number

c Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required

d Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal

e When a resubmission alphabetic suffix on submittal description for example SD-10A to indicate resubmission

f Name address and telephone number of subcontractor supplier manufacturer and any other second tier contractor associated with submittal

g Product identification and location in project

164 Format for Product Data

a Present product data submittals for each section as a complete bound volume Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for product data

b Indicate by prominent notation each product which is being submitted indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains

c Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist Identify this material as developed specifically for project

165 Format for Shop Drawings

a Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 12 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches

b Present 8 12 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for submittals required by section Present larger drawings in sets

c Include on each drawing the drawing title number date and revision numbers and dates in addition to information required in paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals

d Dimension drawings except diagrams and schematic drawings prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale Shop drawing dimensions shall be the same unit of measure



as indicated on the contract drawings Identify materials and products for work shown

166 Format of Samples

a Furnish samples in sizes below unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified

(1) Sample of Equipment or Device Full size

(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches Built up to 8 12 by 11 inches

(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 12 by 11 inches Cut down to 8 12 by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color texture and material variations

(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials 10 inch length or length to be supplied if less than 10 inches Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails

(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials Pint Examples of non-solid materials are sand and paint

(6) Color Selection Samples 2 by 4 inches

(7) Sample Panel 4 by 4 feet

(8) Sample Installation 100 square feet

b Samples Showing Range of Variation Where variations are unavoidable due to nature of the materials submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range

c Reusable Samples Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use

d Recording of Sample Installation Note and preserve the notation of area constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project

e When color texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style include one sample of that manufacturer and style for comparison

167 Format of Administrative Submittals

a When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become part of project record other than as a submittal do not apply contractors approval stamp to document but to a separate sheet accompanying document

b Operation and Maintenance Manual Data Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data Include components required in that section and the various technical sections



17 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

171 Number of Copies of Product Data

a Submit five copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval only by the Contracting Officer Submit three copies of submittals of product data for operation and maintenance manuals

172 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data

173 Number of Samples

a Submit two samples or two sets of samples showing range of variation of each required item One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be returned to contractor

b Submit one sample panel Include components listed in technical section or as directed

c Submit one sample installation where directed

d Submit one sample of non-solid materials

174 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals

a Unless otherwise specified submit administrative submittals compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data

b Submit administrative submittals required under SD-19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals to conform to Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

18 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS

181 Samples and Submittalsr

Except as otherwise noted submit samples and submittals to

Avolis Engineering PAPO Box 15564

New Bern NC 28561

1811 Administrative Submittals

Submit administrative submittals for asbestoslead removal and environmental protection plan to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction (ROICCOICC)

1812 Fire Protection and Fire Alarm System Submittals

Submit fire protection and fire alarm system submittals to ROICCOICC



1813 TAB Submittals

Submit to ROICCOICC for all projects

182 Shop Drawings Product Data and OampM Data

As soon as practicable after award of the contract and before procurement or fabrication submit shop drawings product data and OampM Data required in the technical sections of this specification

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 35 29

SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

0714

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASSESAFE Z3591 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems Subsystems and Components


ASME B3022 (2016) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B303 (2016) Tower Cranes

ASME B305 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B308 (2015) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks


NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 241 (2013 Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding ConstructionAlteration and Demolition Operations

NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding Cutting and Other Hot Work









29 CFR 1910146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 191094 Ventilation

29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment

29 CFR 1919 Gear Certification


29 CFR 1926500 Fall Protection

12 SUBMITTALS



Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Crane Critical Lift Plan

Crane Work Plan

Proof of qualifications for Crane Operators

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports

Submit reports as their incidence occurs in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled Reports

Accident Reports

Monthly Exposure Reports

Regulatory Citations and Violations

Crane Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Confined Space Entry Permit

Certificate of Compliance (Crane)

Third Party Certification of Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes



Submit one copy of each permitcertificate attached to each Daily Report

13 DEFINITIONS

a Associate Safety Professional (ASP) An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

b Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST) An individual who is currently certified as a CHST by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

c Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) An individual who is currently certified as a CIH by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene

d Certified Safety Professional (CSP) An individual who is currently certified as a CSP by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

e Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) An individual who is currently certified as an STS by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals

f Competent Person for Fall Protection A person who is cabable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof as well as their application and use with related equipment and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling

g High Visibility Accident Any mishap which may generate publicity andor high visibility

h Low-slope roof A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal)

i Medical Treatment Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel

j Multi-Employer Work Site (MEWS) A multi-employer work site as defined by OSHA is one in which many employers occupy the same site The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors

k Operating Envelope The area surrounding any crane Inside this envelope is the crane the operator riggers rigging gear between the hook and the load the load and the cranes supporting structure (ground rail etc)

l Qualified Person for Fall Protection A person with a recognized degree or professional certifictae extensive knowledge training and experience in the field of fall protection who is capable of performing design analysis and evaluation of fall protection systems and equipment

m Recordable Injuries or Illnesses Any work-related injury or illness that results in



(1) Death regardless of the time between the injury and death or the length of the illness

(2) Days away from work

(3) Restricted work

(4) Transfer to another job

(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid

(6) Loss of consciousness or

(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above

n Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) The superintendent or other qualified or competent person who is responsible for the on-site safety and health required for the project

o Steep roof A roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal)

p USACE property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be interpreted as Government property and equipment

q Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident A WHE accident occurs when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death material or equipment damage dropped load derailment two-blocking overload and collision including unplanned contact between the load crane andor other objects A dropped load derailment two-blocking overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or injury occurs A component failure (eg motor burnout gear tooth failure bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (eg dropped boom dropped load roll over etc)

14 CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

Contracting Officer will provide a Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation checklist to the Contractor at the pre-construction conference The checklist will be completed monthly by the Contractor and submitted with each request for payment voucher An acceptable score of 90 or greater is required Failure to submit the completed safety self-evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least 90 will result in a retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher


In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract work performed shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1 and the following laws ordinances criteria rules and regulations Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work Where the requirements of this specification applicable laws criteria ordinances regulations



and referenced documents vary the most stringent requirements shall apply

16 DRUG PREVENTION PROGRAM

Conduct a proactive drug and alcohol use prevention program for all workers prime and subcontractor on the site Ensure that no employee uses illegal drugs or consumes alcohol during work hours Ensure there are no employees under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours After accidents collect blood urine or saliva specimens and test the injured and involved employees for the influence of drugs and alcohol A copy of the test shall be made available to the Contracting Officer upon request

17 SITE QUALIFICATIONS DUTIES AND MEETINGS

171 Personnel Qualifications

Work performed under this contract shall meet Level 2

1711 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) shall be provided at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The SSHO shall meet the following requirements

Level 1 Worked on similar projects10-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 yearsCompetent person training as needed

Level 2 A minimum of 3 years safety work on similar project30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 years Competent person training as needed

Level 3 A minimum of 5 years safety work on similar projects30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 yearsAn average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 yearsCompetent person training as needed

Level 4 A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance



Level 5 Provide an Associate Safety Professional (ASP) Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) andor Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST) at the work site to perform safety management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor to meet the designated safety level in paragraph 17 The ASP STS andor CHST shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1 The ASP STS andor CHST shall be at the work site at all times whenever work or testing is being performed and shall conduct and document daily safety inspections The ASP STS andor CHST shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

Level 6

Provide a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) andor Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) at the work site to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The CSP andor CIH shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1 The CSP andor CIH shall have no other duties than safety and occupational health management inspections andor industrial hygieneA minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 yearsAn average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

1712 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry

Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 who is assigned in writing by the Designated Authority to assess confined spaces and who possesses demonstrated knowledge skill and ability to

a Identify the structure location and designation of confined and permit-required confined spaces where work is done

b Calibrate and use testing equipment including but not limited to oxygen indicators combustible gas indicators carbon monoxide indicators and carbon dioxide indicators and to interpret accurately the test results of that equipment



c Perform all required tests and inspections specified in 29 CFR 1910146 and 29 CFR 1915 Subpart B

d Assess hazardous conditions including atmospheric hazards in confined space and adjacent spaces and specify the necessary protection and precautions to be taken

e Determine ventilation requirements for confined space entries and operations

f Assess hazards associated with hot work in confined and adjacent space and determine fire watch requirements and

g Maintain records required

When the work involves marine operations that handle combustible or hazardous materials this qualified person shall be a NFPA certified marine chemist

1713 Competent Person for the Health Hazard Control and Respiratory Protection Program

Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 who is

a Capable by education specialized training andor experience of anticipating recognizing and evaluating employee exposure to hazardous chemical physical and biological agents in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 6

b Capable of spe cifying necessary controls and protective actions to ensure worker health

1714 Crane Operators

Crane operators shall meet the requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and Appendix G In addition for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50000 pounds or greater crane operators shall be designated as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (ie union a government agency or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators) Proof of current qualifications shall be provided

172 Personnel Duties

1721 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)Superintendent

a Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes areaoperation inspected date of inspection identified hazards recommended corrective actions estimated and actual dates of corrections Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors daily report

b Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors

c Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site



d Attend the pre-construction conference pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting and periodic in-progress meetings

e Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs

f Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety bulletin board

g Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements

h Ensure an approved Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit prior to starting any activity on energized electrical systems

Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the superintendent andor SSHO and a project work stoppage The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement

1722 Certified Safety Professional (CSP) Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) Associate Safety Professional (ASP) Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) andor Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician (CHST)

a Perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the project

b Perform as the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385-1-1

c Be on site whenever work or testing is being performed

d Conduct and document safety inspections

e Shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract

If the CSP CIH ASP STS CHST is appointed as the SSHO all duties of that position shall also be performed

173 Meetings

1731 Preconstruction Conference

a The Contractor will be informed in writing of the date of the preconstruction conference The purpose of the preconstruction conference is for the Contractor and the Contracting Officers representatives to become acquainted and explain the functions and operating procedures of their respective organizations and to reach mutual understanding relative to the administration of the overall projects Accident Prevention Plan (APP) before the initiation of work

b Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference This includes the project superintendent site safety and health officer quality control supervisor or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the



development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans program and procedures associated with it)

c The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans programs procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officers representative as to which phases will require an analysis In addition a schedule for the preparation submittal review and acceptance of AHAs shall be established to preclude project delays

d Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for acceptance Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP

e The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the Post-Awqrd Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts

1732 Weekly Safety Meetings

Conduct weekly safety meetings at the project site for all employees The Contracting Officer will be informed of the meeting in advance and be allowed attendance Minutes showing contract title signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed shall be attached to the Contractors daily report

1733 Work Phase Meetings

The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance documented by the Contractor at the preparatory initial and follow-up phases of quality control inspection The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of safety and health controls

18 TRAINING

181 New Employee Indoctrination

New employees (prime and sub-contractor) will be informed of specific site hazards before they begin work Documentation of this orientation shall be kept on file at the project site

182 Periodic Training

Provide Safety and Health Training in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 and the accepted APP Ensure all required training has been accomplished for all onsite employees

183 Training on Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Prior to beginning a new phase training will be provided to all affected employees to include a review of the AHA to be implemented



19 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 and as supplemented herein Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix A Minimum Basic Outline for Preparation of Accident Prevention Plan Where a paragraph or subparagraph element is not applicable to the work to be performed indicate Not Applicable next to the heading Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below at paragraph 181 The APP shall be job-specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written The APP shall interface with the Contractors overall safety and health program Any portions of the Contractors overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made site-specific The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP the Contractor the on-site superintendent the designated site safety and health officer and any designated CSP andor CIH

Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP The Contracting Officer reviews and comments on the Contractors submitted APP and accepts it when it meets the requirements of the contract provisions

Once accepted by the Contracting Officer the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work at the discretion of the Contracting Officer until the matter has been rectified

Once work begins changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer project superintendent SSHO and quality control manager Should any unforeseen hazard become evident during the performance of work the project superintendent shall inform the Contracting Officer both verbally and in writing for resolution as soon as possible In the interim all necessary action shall be taken by the Contractor to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel visitors the public and the environment

Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the resident engineers office and at the job site The APP shall be continuously reviewed and amended as necessary throughout the life of the contract Unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP shall be incorporated in the plan as they are discovered

191 EM 385-1-1 Contents

In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1 the following is required



a Names and qualifications (resumes including education training experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs CIHs STSs CHSTs The duties of each position shall be specified

b Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons As a minimum competent persons shall be designated and qualifications submitted for each of the following major areas excavation scaffolding fall protection hazardous energy confined space health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance

c Confined Space Entry Plan Develop a confined space entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910 29 CFR 1915 and 29 CFR 1926 and any other federal state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract Identify the qualified persons name and qualifications training and experience Delineate the qualified persons authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders (If there is no confined space work include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created)

d Health Hazard Control Program The Contractor shall designate a competent and qualified person to establish and oversee a Health Hazard Control Program in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 6 The program shall ensure that employees on-site Government representatives and others are not adversely exposed to chemical physical and biological agents and that necessary controls and protective actions are instituted to ensure health

e Crane Critical Lift Plan Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted movile cranes hoists) at any radius of lift lifts involving more thatn one crane or hoist lifts of personnel and lifts involving more than rigging or operation sensitive equipment or unusual safety risks The plan shall be submitted 15 calendar day6s prior to on-site work and include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 paragraph 16c18 and the following

(1) For lifts of personnel the plan shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926500 (g)

(2) For barge mounted mobile cranes barge stability calculations identifying barge list and trim based on anticipated loading and load charts based on calculated list and trim Teh amount of list and trim shall be within the crane manufacturers requirements

f Alcohol and Drug Abuse Plan

(1) Describe plan for random checks and testing with pre-employment screening in accordance with the DFAR Clause subpart 252223-7004 Drug Free Work Force

(2) Description of the on-site prevention program



g Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan The plan shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction It shall address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 18 m (6 feet) A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the plan The plan shall include fall protection and prevention systems equipment and methods employed for every phase of work responsibilities assisted rescue self-rescue and evacuation procedures training requirements and monitoring methods Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be revised every six months for lengthy projects reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel equipment systems or work habits The accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be kept and maintained at the job site for the duration of the project The Fall Protection Plan shall be included in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

h Training Records and Requirements List of mandatory training and certifications which are applicable to this project (eg explosive actuated tools confined space entry fall protection crane operation vehicle operator forklift operators personal protective equipment) list of requiremetns for periodic retrainingcertification outline requirements for supervisory and employee safety meetings

i Occupant Protection Plan The safety and health aspects of lead-based paint removal prepared in accordance with Section 02 83 1900 10 Lead Based Paint Hazard Abatement Target Housing amp Child Occupied Facilities 02 82 3313 20 RemovalControl and Disposal of Lead Containig Paint

j Lead Compliance Plan The safety and health aspects of lead work prepared in accordance with Section 02 83 1300 20 Lead in Construction

k Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan The safety and health aspects of asbestos work prepared in accordance with Section 02 2 1600 Engineering Control of Asbestos Containing Materials

l Site Safety and Health Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with this section

m PCB Plan The safety and health aspects of Polychlorinated Biphenyls work prepared in accordance with Sections 02 84 33 Removal and Disposal of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) and 02 61 23 Removal and Disposal of PCB Contaminated Soils)

n Site Demolition Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 0000 40 Demolition and referenced sources Include engineering survey as applicable

o Excavation Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 3100 Earthwork

p Crane Work Plan The contractor shall provide a crane work plan to the Contracting Officer for acceptance The crane work plan shall include the specific model of each crane and a drawing identifying their locations (exact) the dimensions wheel sizes number of



wheels wheel spacing tire pressure(s) number of axles axle spacing minimum wheel load to be exerted during operatins and maximum outrigger load to be exerted during operations The Contractor shall allow at least 10 working days for acceptancenon-acceptance of the crane work plan No crane operations shall begin prior to written acceptance of the crane plan by the Government ROICC shall be the government approving authority

110 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase Format subsequent AHA as amendments to the APP An AHA will be developed by the Contractor for every operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform work The analysis must identify and evaluate hazards and outline the proposed methods and techniques for the safe completion of each phase of work At a minimum define activity being performed sequence of work specific safety and health hazards anticipated control measures (to include personal protective equipment) to eliminate or reduce each hazard to acceptable levels equipment to be used inspection requirements training requirements for all involved and the competent person in charge of that phase of work For work with fall hazards including fall hazards associated with scaffold erection and removal identify the appropriate fall protection methods used For work with materials handling equipment address safeguarding measures related to materials handling equipment For work requiring excavations include requirements for safeguarding excavations An activity requiring an AHA shall not proceed until the AHA has been accepted by the Contracting Officers representative and a meeting has been conducted by the Contractor to discuss its contents with everyone engaged in the activity including on-site Government representatives The Contractor shall document meeting attendance at the preparatory initial and follow-up phases of quality control inspection The AHA shall be continuously reviewed and when appropriate modified to address changing site conditions or operations The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activitys safety and health controls

The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures scheduling or hazards change

Activity hazard analyses shall be updated as necessary to provide an effective response to changing work conditions and activities The on-site superintendent site safety and health officer and competent persons used to develop the AHAs including updates shall sign and date the AHAs before they are implemented

The activity hazard analyses shall be developed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA The AHAs will be developed by the contractor supplier or subcontractor and provided t othe prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Offficer

111 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

Within 1 calendar days after commencement of work erect a safety bulletin board at the job site The following information shall be displayed on



the safety bulletin board in clear view of the on-site construction personnel maintained current and protected against the elements and unauthorized removal

a Map denoting the route to the nearest emergency care facility

b Emergency phone numbers

c Copy of the most up-to-date APP

d Current AHA(s)

e OSHA 300A Form

f OSHA Safety and Health Protection-On-The-Job Poster

g Confined space entry permit

h Hot work permit

i A sign indicating the number of hours worked since last lost workday accident

j Safety and Health Warning Posters

112 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project including those listed in the article References Maintain applicable equipment manufacturers manuals

113 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment

114 REPORTS

1141 Accident Reports

a For recordable injuries and illnesses and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2000 in damages the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident complete the Navy Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR) form or USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 1 calendar day(s) of the accident The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms

b For a weight handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form



1142 Accident Notification

Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical but not later than four hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents property damage equal to or greater than $2000 or any weight handling equipment accident Information shall include contractor name contract title type of contract name of activity installation or location where accident occurred date and time of accident names of personnel injured extent of property damage if any extent of injury if known and brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used PPE used etc) Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on site and Government investigation is conducted

1143 Monthly Exposure Reports

Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be attached to the monthly billing request This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers both prime and subcontractor The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special forms

1144 Regulatory Citations and Violations

Contact the Contracting Officer immediately of any OSHA or other regulatory agency inspection or visit and provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of each citation report and contractor response Correct violations and citations promptly and provide written corrective actions to the Contracting Officer

1145 Crane Reports

Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections

1146 Certificate of Compliance

The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate) Certificate shall state that the crane and rigging gear meet applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA regulations are applicable eg cranes used in construction demolition or maintenance shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 section 16 and Appendix H Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be used For cranes at DOD activities in foreign countries the Contractor shall certify that the crane and rigging gear conform to the appropriate host country safety standards The Contractor shall also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (eg anti-two block devices) These certifications shall be posted on the crane

1147 Third Party Certification of Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes

Barge-mounted mobile cranes shall be certified in accordance with 29 CFR 1919 by an OSHA accredited person



115 HOT WORK

Prior to performing Hot Work (welding cutting etc) or operating other flame-producingspark producing devices a written permit shall be requested from the Fire Division CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A20 BC rated extinguishers for normal Hot Work All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any Hot Work done at this activity The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit

a Oil painting materials (paint brushes empty paint cans etc) and all flammable liquids shall be removed from the facility at quitting time All painting materials and flammable liquids shall be stored outside in a suitable metal locker or box and will require re-submittal with non-hazardous materials

b Accumulation of trays paper shavings sawdust boxes and other packing materials shall be removed from the facility at the close of each workday and such material disposed of in the proper containers located away from the facility

c The storage of combustible supplies shall be a safe distance from structures

d Area outside the facility undergoing work shall be cleaned of trash paper or other discarded combustibles at the close of each workday

e All portable electric devices (saws sanders compressors extension chord lights etc) shall be disconnected at the close of each workday When possible the main electric switch in the facility shall be deactivated

f When starting work in the facility Contractors shall require their personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency phone number 911 ANY FIRE NO MATTER HOW SMALL SHALL BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY

g Obtain services from th FIRE DIVISION for HOT WORK within or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems weldingcutting on fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells manholes vaults etc) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE

The Contractor shall provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers for all required confined spaces Signs wording DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE - DO NOT ENTER - in bold letters a minimum of 25 mm(one inch) in height and constructed to be clearly legible with all paint removed The signal word DANGER shall be



red and readable from 152 m(5 feet)

22 FALL PROTECTION ANCHORAGE

Fall protection anchorage conforming to ASSESAFE Z3591 installed under the supervision of a qualified person in fall protection shall be left in place for continued customer use and so identified by signage stating the capacity of the anchorage (strength and number of persons who may be tied-off to it at any one time)

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 CONSTRUCTION ANDOR OTHER WORK

The Contractor shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1 NFPA 241 the APP the AHA Federal andor State OSHA regulations and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations The most stringent standard shall prevail

311 Hazardous Material Use

Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material Any work or storage involving hazardous chemicals or materials must be done in a manner that will not expose Government or Contractor employees to any unsafe or unhealthful conditions Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent Government or Contractor employees from being exposed to any hazardous condition that could result from the work or storage The Prime Contractor shall keep a complete inventory of hazardous materials brought onto the work-site Approval by the Contracting Officer of protective measures and storage area is required prior to the start of the work

312 Hazardous Material Exclusions

Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizingnon-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls di-isocynates lead-based paint are prohibited The Contracting Officer upon written request by the Contractor may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials

313 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

The design should have identified materials such as PCB lead paint and friable and non-friable asbestos If additional material not indicated that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous If material is not hazardous or poses no danger the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52243-4 Changes and FAR 52236-2 Differing Site



Conditions

32 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING

Contractors are required to apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance As a minimum the request should include the location of the outage utilities being affected duration of outage and any necessary sketches Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section Once approved and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down the Contractor shall attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock-outtag-out procedures for worker protection No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist

33 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION

The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards The program shall include company policy identify responsibilities education and training requirements fall hazard identification prevention and control measures inspection storage care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and escape procedures

331 Training

The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training Training requirements shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 section 21A16

332 Fall Protection Equipment

The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan andor AHA at all times when an employee is on a surface 18 m(6 feet) or more above lower levels Fall protection systems such as guardrails personnel fall arrest system safety nets etc are required when working within 18m (6 feet) of any leading edge In addition to the required fall protection systems safety skiff personal floatation devices life rings etc are required when working above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 paragraphs 05I and 05J Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom swing stages or suspended platform In addition personal fall arrest systems may be required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising lowering or travel Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926500 Subpart M and USACE EM 385-1-1

3321 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment

Personal fall arrest equipment systems subsystems and components shall meet ASSESAFE Z3591 Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest device Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system (for



uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system) Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system Only locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used Webbing straps and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 18 m (6 feet) The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system

333 Fall Protection for Roofing Work

Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed The roof area to be accessed shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading

a Low Sloped Roofs

(1) For work within 18 m (6 feet) of an edge on low-slope roofs personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems guardrails or safety nets A safety monitoring system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized

(2) For work greater than 18 m (6 feet) from an edge warning lines shall be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926500 and USACE EM 385-1-1

b Steep Roofs Work on steep roofs requires a personal fall arrest system guardrails with toe-boards or safety nets This requirement also includes residential or housing type construction

334 Safety Nets

If safety nets are used as the selected fall protection system on the project they shall be provided at unguarded workplaces leading edge work or when working over water machinery dangerous operations and or other surfaces where the use of ladders scaffolds catch platforms temporary floors fall arrest systems or restraintpositioning systems are impractical Safety nets shall be tested immediately after installation with a drop test of 1814 kg (400 pounds) dropped from the same elevation a person might fall and every six months thereafter

335 Existing Anchorage

Existing anchorages to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be certified (or re-certified) by a qualified person for fall protection in accordance with ASSESAFE Z3591 Exiting horizontal lifeline achorages shall be certified (or re-certified) by a registered professional engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems

336 Horizontal Lifelines

Horizontal lifelines shall be designed installed certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (



29 CFR 1926500 )

337 Guardrail Systems

Guardrails shall consist of top and mid-rails post and toe boards The top edge height of standard railing must be 42 inches plus or minus 3 inches above the walkingworking level When mid-rails are used they must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walkingworking level Posts shall be placed no more than 8 feet apart ( 29 CFR 1926500 and USACE EM 385-1-1 )

338 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures

When personal fall arrest systems are used the contracator must ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor and include a detailed discussion of the following methods of rescue methods of self-rescue equipment used training requirement specialized training for the rescuers procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance and transportation routes to a medical facility The Rescue and Evaluation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

34 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

All personnel who enter a construction site area shall wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) at all times as outlined in the EM 385 1-1 In addition to the requirements of the EM 385 1-1 Safety Glasses (ANSI Z871) will be worn at all times on construction sites Hearing protection is required in noise hazard areas or when performing noise hazard tasks Mandatory PPE on all construction sites includes

a Hard Hats

b Safety Glasses

c Safety-Toed Shoes or Boots

35 SCAFFOLDING

Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited Access to scaffold platforms greater than 6 m (20 feet) in height shall be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system Vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers shall not be used for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 6 m (20 feet) in height The use of an adequate gate is required Contractor shall ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward Special care shall be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is prohibited The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base Work platforms shall



be placed on mud sills Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than six feet Delineate fall protection requirements when working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FPampP) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work

351 Stilts

The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction renovation repair or maintenance work is prohibited

36 EQUIPMENT

361 Material Handling Equipment

a Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturers printed operating instructions

b The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions

c Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA

362 Weight Handling Equipment

a Cranes must be equipped with

(1) Load indicating devices (LIDs) and a boom angle or radius indicator

(2) or load moment indicating devices (LMIs)

(3) Anti-two block prevention devices

(4) Boom hoist hydraulic relief valve disconnect or shutoff (stops hoist when boom reaches a predetermined high angle)

(5) Boom length indicator (for telescoping booms)

(6) Device to prevent uncontrolled lowering of a telescoping hydraulic boom

(7) Device to prevent uncontrolled retraction of a telescoping hydraulic boom

b The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated Contractors operator shall remain with the crane during the spot check

c The Contractor shall comply with the crane manufacturers specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work Erection shall be performed under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B305) All testing shall be performed in accordance with the



manufacturers recommended procedures

d The Contractor shall comply with ASME B305 for mobile and locomotive cranes ASME B3022 for articulating boom cranes ASME B303 for construction tower cranes and ASME B308 for floating cranes and floating derricks

e The presence of Government personnel does not relieve the Contractor of an obligation to comply with all applicable safety regulations The Government will investigate all complaints of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions received in writing from contractor employees federal civilian employees or military personnel

f Each load shall be riggedattached independently to the hookmaster-link in such a fashion that the load cannot slide or otherwise become detached Christmas-tree lifting (multiple rigged materials) is not allowed

g Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90 of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration

h When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and shall follow the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 section 11 and ASME B305 or ASME B3022 as applicable

i Crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) shall not be used unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible Personnel shall not be lifted with a line hoist or friction crane

j A fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 10BC and a minimum nominal capacity of 5lb of extinguishing agent shall be available at all operator stations or crane cabs Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected maintained and recharged as specified in NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

k All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads

l A weight handling equipment operator shall not leave his position at the controls while a load is suspended

m The Contractor shall use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers

n The crane hookblock must be positioned directly over the load Side loading of the crane is prohibited

o A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane

p A substantial and durable rating chart containing legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane and securely mounted onto the crane cab in a location allowing easy reading by the operator while seated in the control station

q Certification records which include the date of inspection



signature of the person performing the inspection and the serial number or other identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel

r Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel

s The Contractor shall certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (eg anti-two block devices)

363 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment

a Equipment shall be operated by designated qualified operators Proof of qualifications shall be kept on the project site for review

b Manufacture specifications or owners manual for the equipment shall be on site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1 Such additional safety precautions or requirements shall be incorporated into the AHAs

c Equipment and mechanized equipment shall be inspected in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for safe operation by a competent person prior to being placed into use

d Daily checks or tests shall be conducted and documented on equipment and mechanized equipment by designated competent persons

37 EXCAVATIONS

The competent person for excavations performed as a result of contract work shall be on-site when excavation work is being performed and shall inspect and document the excavations daily prior to entry by workers The competent person must evaluate all hazards including atmospheric that may be associated with the work and shall have the resources necessary to correct hazards promptly The competent person shall perform soil classification in accordance with 29 CFR 1926

371 Utility Locations

All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a third party independent private utility locating company in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract

372 Utility Location Verification

The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations including utility depth by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground system Digging within 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment hand digging shall be used If construction is parallel to an existing utility the utility shall be exposed by hand digging every 100 feet if parallel within 5 feet of the excavation



373 Utilities Within and Under Concrete Bituminous Asphalt and Other Impervious Surfaces

Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier decks bridges parking areas and the like are extremely difficult to identify Whenever contract work involves chipping saw cutting or core drilling through concrete bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third party independentprivate locating company The third party independent private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) X-ray bore scope or ultrasound prior to the start of demolition and construction Outages to isolate utility systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the contractor from meetingthis requirement

374 Shoring Systems

Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and AHA Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on site for review Job-made shoring or shielding shall have the registered professional engineer stamp specifications and tabulated data Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electric underground cables

375 Trenching Machinery

Trenching machines with digging chain drives shall be operated only when the spotterslaborers are in plain view of the operator Operator and spotterslaborers shall be provided training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating Documentation of the training shall be kept on file at the project site

38 ELECTRICAL

381 Conduct of Electrical Work

Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method When working in energized substations only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70 high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes as a minimum electrical hard hat safety shoes insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves



fire retarding shirts coveralls face shields and safety glasses In addition provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E Insulating blankets hearing protection and switching suits may be required depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractors AHA

382 Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis

Contractor shall provide an Arc Flash RiskHazsrd Analysis in accordance with NFPA 70E for all locations where workers may be exposed to arc flash hazard (work on energized electrical equipment) The Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis shall be sealed and signed by a qualified professional engineer

383 Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis Qualifications

Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified organization to provide Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis of the electrial distribution system Organization shall be independent of th aupplier manufacturer and installer of ht equipment The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor This work shall not be performed by a second tier subcontractor

a Submit name and qualificaitons of organization Organization shall have been regularaly engaged in providing Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis for a minimum of 5 years

b Submit name and qualifications of the professional engineer performing the analysis Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the engineer with specific names nad telephone numbers for reference

384 Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit

All work on energized electrical systems including high voltage must have an approved Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit The results of a Arc Flash RiskHazard Analysis per NFPA 70E shall be included in the Special Permission Energized Electrical Work Permit request Flame-resistant (FR) clothing and personel protective equipment (PPE) shall be rated for a minimum of 8 calories per square centimeter even if the flash hazard analysis indicates a lower value A blank copy of the permit request is attached An editable version may be obtained from the Contracting Officer

385 Portable Extension Cords

Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage All damaged extension cords shall be immediately removed from service Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70

39 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Section 06I of USACE EM 385-1-1 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910146 Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used

a Entry Procedures Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose including hot work until the qualified



person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented (See Section 06I05 of USACE EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures) All hazards pertaining to the space shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA

b Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level

c Ensure the use of rescue and retrieval devices in confined spaces greater than 15 m (5 feet) in depth Conform to Sections 06I09 06I10 and 06I11 of USACE EM 385-1-1

d Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection

e Include training information for employees who will be involved as entrants and attendants for the work Conform to Section 06I06 of USACE EM 385-1-1

f Daily Entry Permit Post the permit in a conspicuous place close to the confined space entrance

310 CRYSTALLINE SILICA

Grinding abrasive blasting and foundry operations of construction materials containing crystalline silica shall comply with OSHA regulations such as 29 CFR 191094 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix C The Contractor shall develop and implement effective exposure control and elimination procedures to include dust control systems engineering controls and establishment of work area boundaries as well as medical surveillance training air monitoring and personal protective equipment

311 HOUSEKEEPING

3111 Clean-Up

All debris in work areas shall be cleaned up daily or more frequently if necessary Construction debris may be temporarily located in an approved location however garbage accumulation must be removed each day

3112 Falling Object Protection

All areas must be barricaded to safeguard employees When working overhead barricade the area below to prevent entry by unauthorized employees Construction warning tape and signs shall be posted so they are clearly visible from all possible access points When employees are working overhead all tools and equipment shall be secured so that they will not fall When using guardrail as falling object protection all openings shall be small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects




SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS0810

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work These references are identified in each section by document number date and title The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (eg ASTM B564 Nickel Alloy Forgings) However when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes

12 ORDERING INFORMATION

The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization that information is also provided Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills MI 48331Ph 248-848-3700Fax 248-848-3701E-mail bkstoreconcreteorgInternet httpwwwconcreteorg

ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)National Headquarters1525 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600Arlington VA 22209Ph 703-358-2960Fax 703-358-2961Internet httpwwwaluminumorg

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)444 North Capital Street NW Suite 249Washington DC 20001Ph 202-624-5800Fax 202-624-5806E-Mail infoaashtoorgInternet httpwwwaashtoorg

AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)2025 M Street NW Suite 800Washington DC 20036Ph 202-367-1155



Fax 202-367-2155E-mail infoamericanbearingsorgInternet httpwwwabma-dcorg

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)1330 Kemper Meadow DriveCincinnati OH 45240Ph 513-742-2020 or 513-742-6163Fax 513-742-3355E-mail mailacgihorgInternet httpwwwacgihorg

AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)500 Montgomery Street Suite 350Alexandria VA 22314-1581Ph 703-684-0211Fax 703-684-0242E-mail websiteragmaorgInternet httpwwwagmaorg

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)One East Wacker Drive Suite 700Chicago IL 60601-1802Ph 312-670-2400Fax 312-670-5403Publications 800-644-2400E-mail pubsaiscorgInternet httpwwwaiscorg

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)1220 L Street NWWashington DC 20005-4070Ph 303-397-7993Fax 303-397-2740E-mail gregkallioihscomInternet httpwwwapiorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)1801 Alexander Bell DriveReston VA 20191-4400Ph 703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723Fax 703-295-6333E-mail memberasceorgInternet httpwwwasceorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)1791 Tullie Circle NEAtlanta GA 30329Ph 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400Fax 404-321-5478E-mail ashraeashraeorgInternet httpwwwashraeorg

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSESAFE)1800 East Oakton StreetDes Plaines IL 60018-2187Ph 847-699-2929Fax 847-768-3434



E-mail customerserviceasseorgInternet httpwwwasseorg

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)6666 West Quincy AvenueDenver CO 80235Ph 800-926-7337 Fax 303-347-0804E-mail smorrisonawwaorgInternet httpwwwawwaorg

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)550 NW LeJeune RoadMiami FL 33126Ph 800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353Fax 305-443-7559E-mail infoawsorg or customerserviceawspubscomInternet httpwwwawsorg

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)Three Park Avenue MS 10ENew York NY 10016-5990Ph 800-854-7179 or 800-843-2763Fax 212-591-7674E-mail infocentralasmeorgInternet httpwwwasmeorg

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)100 Barr Harbor Drive PO Box C700West Conshohocken PA 19428-2959Ph 610-832-9585Fax 610-832-9555E-mail serviceastmorgInternet httpwwwastmorg

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)933 North Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg IL 60173-4758Ph 847-517-1200 or 800-328-6306Fax 847-517-1206Internet httpwwwcrsiorg

CONCRETE SAWING AND DRILLING ASSOCIATION (CSDA)11001 Danka Way North Suite 1St Petersburg FL 33716PH 727-577-5004Fax 727-577-5012E-mail infocsdaorgInternet httpwwwcsdaorg

DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)245 Riverchase Parkway East Suite OBirmingham AL 35244Ph 205-402-8700Fax 205-402-8730E-mail infodipraorgInternet httpwwwdipraorg



FM GLOBAL (FM)270 Central AvenuePO Box 7500Johnston RI 02919Ph 401-275-3000 ext 1945Fax 401-275-3029E-mail servicedeskmyriskfmglobalcomInternet httpwwwfmglobalcom

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)University of South CaliforniaKaprielian Hall 200Los Angeles CA 90089-2531Ph 213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340Fax 213-740-8399E-mail fccchrusceduInternet httpwwwuscedudeptfccchr

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)120 Wall Street 17th FloorNew York NY 10005Ph 212-248-5000Fax 212-248-5018E-mail IESIESorgInternet httpwwwIESorg

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)445 Hoes Lane or 2001 L Street NW Suite 700Piscataway NJ 08855-1331 or Washington DC 20036-4910 USAPh 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333Fax 732-562-6380E-mail onlinesupportieeeorg or ieeeusaieeeorgInternet httpwwwieeeorg

INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)PO Box 1568Carrollton GA 30112Ph 1 800 447 3352Fax 1 303 397 2599E-mail globalihscomInternet httpwwwiceanet

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)5360 Workman Mill RoadWhittier CA 90601Ph 1-888-422-7233Fax 562-908-5524E-mail webmastericcsafeorgInternet wwwiccsafeorg


3050 Centre Ave Suite 102Portage MI 49024Ph 269-488-6382Fax 269-488-6383E-mail netanetaworldorgInternet httpwwwnetaworldorg



INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)3 rue de Varembe PO Box 131CH-1211 Geneva 20 SwitzerlandPh 41-22-919-0211Fax 41-22-919-0300E-mail custserviecchInternet httpwwwiecch

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)127 Park Street NEVienna VA 22180Ph 703-281-6613Fax 703-281-6671E-mail infomss-hqcomInternet httpwwwmss-hqcom

MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)2800 Engleton AvenueBurnaby BC CANADA V5C 6G7Ph 604-298-7578Fax 604-298-7571E-mail infopaintinfocomjodympinetbglmpinetInternet httpwwwpaintinfocommpi

MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)16712 Elm CircleOmaha NE 68130Ph 800-747-6422Fax 402-330-9702E-mail micatconlcomInternet httpwwwmicainsulationorg

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)800 Roosevelt Road Bldg C Suite 312Glen Ellyn IL 60137Ph 630-942-6591Fax 630-790-3095E-mail wlewis7coxnet(Vernon Lewistechnical consultant)Internet httpwwwnaammorg

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)1300 North 17th Street Suite 1752Rosslyn VA 22209Ph 703-841-3200Fax 703-841-5900Internet httpwwwnemaorg

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)1 Batterymarch ParkQuincy MA 02169-7471Ph 617-770-3000 or 800-344-3555Fax 617-770-0700E-mail webmasternfpaorgInternet httpwwwnfpaorg

NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)100 Bureau Drive



Stop 1070Gaithersburg MD 20899-1070Ph 301-975-NIST (6478E-mail inquiriesnistgovInternet httpwwwnistgov

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)900 Spring StreetSilver Spring MD 20910Ph 240-485-1165E-mail jjenkinsnrmcaorg (jacques jenkins)Internet httpwwwnrmcaorg

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)789 North Dixboro RoadPO Box 130140Ann Arbor MI 48113-0140Ph 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARKFax 734-769-0109E-mail infonsforgInternet httpwwwnsforg

POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills MI 48331Ph 248-848-3180Fax 248-848-3181E-mail infopost-tensioningorgInternet httpwwwpost-tensioningorg

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)2200 Powell Street Suite 725Emeryville CA 94608Ph 510-452-8000Fax 510-452-8001Internet httpwwwscs1com

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)40 24th Street 6th FloorPittsburgh PA 15222-4656Ph 412-281-2331Fax 412-281-9992E-mail infosspcorgInternet httpwwwsspcorg

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)2500 Wilson Blvd Suite 300Arlington VA 22201Ph 703-907-7700Fax 703-907-7727Internet httpwwwtiaonlineorg

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)2600 NW Lake RoadCamas WA 98607-8542Ph 877-854-3577Fax 360-817-6278



E-mail CECususulcomInternet httpwwwulcomUL Directories available through IHS at httpwwwihscom

US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS fromUS Army Engineer Waterways Experiment StationATTN Technical Report Distribution Section ServicesBranch TIC3909 Halls Ferry RoadVicksburg MS 39180-6199E-mail MTC-INFOerdcusacearmymilInternet httpgslerdcusacearmymilSLMTChandbookhandbookhtmOrder Other Documents fromUSACE Publications DepotAttn CEHEC-IM-PD2803 52nd AvenueHyattsville MD 20781-1102Ph 301-394-0081Fax 301-394-0084E-mail pubs-armyusacearmymilInternet httpwwwusacearmymilpublications or httpwwwhndusacearmymiltechinfoengpubshtm

US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)Order AMS Publications fromAGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch801 Summit Crossing Place Suite CGastonia NC 28054-2193Ph 704-810-8871Fax 704-852-4189E-mail seedamsusdagovInternet httpwwwamsusdagovlsgseedhtmOrder Other Publications fromUS Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service14th and Independence Avenue SW Room 4028-SWashington DC 20250Ph 202-720-2791 Fax 202-720-2166Internet httpwwwusdagovrus

US DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)Order DOD Documents fromRoom 3A750-The Pentagon1400 Defense PentagonWashington DC 20301-1400Ph 703-571-3343FAX 215-697-1462E-mail piahqafisasdmilInternet httpwwwdodgovObtain Military Specifications Standards and Related Publications fromAcquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)Building 4D



700 Robbins AvenuePhiladelphia PA 19111-5094Ph 215-697-6396 - for accountpassword issuesInternet httpassistdapsdlamilonlinestart account registration requiredObtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) fromWhole Building Design Guide (WBDG)National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)1090 Vermont Avenue NW Suite 700Washington CD 20005Ph 202-289-7800Fax 202-289-1092Internet httpwwwwbdgorgreferencesdocs_refsphp

US ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)Ariel Rios Building1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NWWashington DC 20004Ph 202-272-0167for Fax and E-mail see belowInternet httpwwwepagov--- Some EPA documents are available only from National Technical Information Service (NTIS)5301 Shawnee RoadAlexandria VA 22312Ph 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332Fax 703-605-6900E-mail infontisgovInternet httpwwwntisgov

US FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)Order for sale documents fromSuperintendent of DocumentsUS Government Printing Office (GPO)732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgovOrder free documents fromFederal Aviation AdministrationDepartment of Transportation800 Independence Avenue SWWashington DC 20591Ph 1-866-835-5322Internet httpwwwfaagov

US FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)FHWA Office of Safety 1200 New Jersey Ave SEWashington DC 20590-Ph 202-366-0411Fax 202-366-2249E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwsafetyfhwadotgovOrder fromSuperintendent of DocumentsU S Government Printing Office (GPO)



732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgov

U S GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)2101 L St NW Suite 500Washington DC 20037Fax 202-828-5110E-mail infousgbcorgInternet httpwwwusgbcorg

US GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)General Services Administration1800 F Street NWWashington DC 20405Ph 202-501-0800Internet wwwGSAgovObtain documents fromAcquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)Building 4D700 Robbins AvenuePhiladelphia PA 19111-5094Ph 215-697-6396 - for accountpassword issuesInternet httpassistdapsdlamilonlinestart account registration required

US NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)8601 Adelphi Road College Park MD 20740-6001Ph 866-272-6272Fax 301-837-0483E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwarchivesgovOrder documents fromSuperintendent of DocumentsUSGovernment Printing Office (GPO)732 North Capitol Street NWWashington DC 20401Ph 202-512-1800Fax 202-512-2104E-mail contactcentergpogovInternet httpwwwgpoaccessgov

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 45 10

QUALITY CONTROL

0901

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM A 880 (1996) Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Organizations for Examination and Inspection of Steel Stainless Steel and Related Alloys

ASTM C 1077 (2010c) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM D 3666 (2009a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D 3740 (2010) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing andor Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

ASTM E 329 (2009) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing andor Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

ASTM E 543 (2009) Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Non-Destructive Testing

12 SUBMITTALS



Quality Control Plan ( QC PLAN)

Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award

13 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

Deliver the following to the Contracting Officer



a Combined Contractor Production ReportContractor Quality Control Report (1 sheet) Original and 1 copy by 1000 AM the next work ing day after each day that work is performed

b QC Specialist Reports and Test Results Originals and 1 copy by 1000 AM the next working day after each day that work is per formed

c Testing Plan and Log 1 copy at the end of each month

d QC Meeting Minutes 1 copy within 2 calendar days of the meeting

e Rework Items List 1 copy by the last working day of the month and

f QC Certifications As required by the paragraph entitled QC Certifications

14 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section The QC program consists of a QC Organization a QC Plan attending a QC Plan meet ing attending a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conducting QC meetings performing three phases of control performing submittal review ensuring testing is performed and preparing QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials equipment workmanship fabrication construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this Contract The QC program shall cover construction operations onsite and off-site and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence

15 QC ORGANIZATION

151 QC Manager

1511 Duties

Provide a QC Manager at the work site to manage and implement the QC program The QC Manager is required to attend the QC Plan meeting attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conduct the QC meetings perform the three phases of control perform submittal review ensure testing is performed and prepare QC certifications and documentation required in this Contract The QC Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and documentation performed by the QC specialists In addition to managing and implementing the QC program the QC Manager may perform the duties of project superintendent

1512 Qualifications

An individual with a minimum of five years experience as a foreman super intendent inspector QC Manager project manager or construction manager on similar size construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract

1513 Construction Quality Management Training

In addition to the above experience and education requirements the QC Manager shall have completed the course entitled Construction Quality



Management for Contractors This course is periodically offered by the Navy and the Corps of Engineers However it is sponsered by both the AGC and the ABC of Charlotte North Carolina Call one of the following to sign up for the next available class

The Army Corps of Engineers Baltimore District(Offered in Baltimore MD)Contact Corps of Engineers Baltimore District10 South Howard StreetBaltimore MD 21201Phone 410-962-2323

The Associated General Contractors (AGC) Virginia Chapterin Cooperation with the Army Corps of Engineers Norfolk District and the Naval Facilities Engineering Command Atlantic Division(Offered at rotating locations in Norfolk Williamsburg and Richmond)Contact AGC of Virginia8631 Maylan Drive Parham ParkRichmond VA 23294Phone 804-346-3383

Carolinas Associated General Contractors (CACG)Contact CACG 1100 Euclid AvenueCharlotte NC 28203Phone 704-372-1450 (ext 5248)

Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC) Carolinas ChapterContact ABC Carolinas Chapter3705 Latrobe DriveCharlotte NC 28211Phone 704-367-1331 or 877-470-4819

152 Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications

Designate an alternate for the QC Manager at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QC Managers absence The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC Manager shall be three years of experience in one of the specified positions

16 QC PLAN

161 Requirements

Provide for approval by the Contracting Officer a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes the following

a A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order

I QC ORGANIZATION II NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS III DUTIES RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL IV OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS V APPOINTMENT LETTERS



VI SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER VII TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION VIII TESTING PLAN AND LOG IX PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS X DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES XI LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES XII PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE THREE PHASES OF CONTROL XIII PERSONNEL MATRIX XIV PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION

b A chart showing the QC organizational structure and its relationship to the production side of the organization

c Names and qualifications in resume format for each person in the QC organization

d Duties responsibilities and authorities of each person in the QC organization

e A listing of outside organizations such as architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide

f A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QC Manager and stating that heshe is responsible for managing and implementing the QC program as described in this contract Include in this letter the QC Managers authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work

g Procedures for reviewing approving and managing submittals Provide the names of the persons in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval

h Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled Accredited Laboratories or Testing Laboratory Requirements as applicable

i A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test the frequency and the person responsible for each test

j Procedures to identify record track and complete rework items

k Documentation procedures including proposed report formats

l A list of the definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements As a minimum if approved by the Contracting Officer consider each Section of the Specifications as a definable feature of work However at times there may be more than one definable feature of work in each Section of the Specifications

m A personnel matrix showing for each section of the specification who will perform and document the three phases of control and who will perform and document the testing

o Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion



Inspection process Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection prefinal inspection and final acceptance inspection

162 Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval

The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers and surveying

163 Approval

Approval of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary to ensure the specified quality of work The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify hisher submitted qualifications

164 Notification of Changes

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change including changes in the QC organization personnel a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change Proposed changes must be approved by the Contracting Officer

17 QC PLAN MEETING

Prior to submission of the QC plan meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission

18 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING

After submission of the QC Plan but prior to the start of construction meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC program required by this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details including forms to be used for documentation administration for on-site and off-site work and the coordination of the Contractors management production and QC personnel with the Contracting Officer As a minimum the Contractors personnel required to attend shall include the project manager project superintendent and QC Manager Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QC Manager and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer

19 QC MEETINGS

After the start of construction the QC Manager shall conduct weekly QC meetings at the work site with the project superintendent and QC specialists The QC Manager shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the Contracting Officer within 2 working days after the meeting The Contracting Officer may attend these meetings The QC Manager shall notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each meet ing As a minimum the following shall be accomplished at each meeting

a Review the minutes of the previous meeting



b Review the schedule and the status of work

- Work or testing accomplished since last meeting - Rework items identified since last meeting - Rework items completed since last meeting

c Review the status of submittals

- Submittals reviewed and approved since last meeting - Submittals required in the near future

d Review the work to be accomplished in the next 2 weeks and documen tation required Schedule the three phases of control and testing

- Establish completion dates for rework items - Preparatory phases required - Initial phases required - Follow-up phases required - Testing required - Status of off-site work or testing - Documentation required

e Resolve QC and production problems and

f Address items that may require revising the QC plan

- Changes in QC organization personnel - Changes in procedures

191 THREE PHASES OF CONTROL

The QC Manager shall perform the three phases of control to ensure that work complies with Contract requirements The Three Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements

192 Preparatory Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each preparatory phase Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the definable feature Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Perform the following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work

a Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections

b Review the Contract drawings

c Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and equipment have been submitted and approved Verify receipt of approved factory test results when required

d Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing

e Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work



has been completed

f Examine the required materials equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data

g Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted and

h Discuss construction methods

193 Initial Phase

Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each initial phase When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work conduct the initial phase with the QC Specialists the super intendent and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work Observe the initial segment of the definable feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met Perform the following for each definable feature of work

a Establish the quality of workmanship required

b Resolve conflicts

c Review the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and

d Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory

194 Follow-Up Phase

Perform the following for on-going work daily or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report

a Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements

b Maintain the quality of workmanship required

c Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory and

d Ensure that rework items are being corrected

195 Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work

Notify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases

110 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

Procedures for submittals are as described in Section entitled Submittal Procedures



111 TESTING

Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections perform sampling and testing required under this Contract

1111 Testing Laboratory Requirements

Provide an independent testing laboratory or establish a laboratory quali fied to perform sampling and tests required by this Contract When the proposed testing laboratory is not accredited by an acceptable accreditation program as described by the paragraph entitled Accredited Laboratories submit to the Contracting Officer for approval certified statements signed by an official of the testing laboratory attesting that the proposed laboratory meets or conforms to the following requirements

a Sampling and testing shall be under the technical direction of a Registered Professional Engineer (PE) with at least 5 years of experience in construction material testing

b Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077

c Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666

d Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock as used in engineering design and construction shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740

e Laboratories engaged in inspection and testing of steel stainless steel and related alloys will be evaluated according to ASTM A 880 Laboratories shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329

f Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing (NDT) shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 543

g Laboratories engaged in hazardous materials testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA

1112 Accredited Laboratories

Acceptable accreditation programs are the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program Furnish to the Contracting Officer a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation Scope of Accreditation and latest directory of the accrediting organization for accredited laboratories The scope of the laboratorys accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract

1113 Inspection of Testing Laboratories

Prior to approval of non-accredited laboratories the proposed testing laboratory facilities and records shall be subject to inspection by the Contracting Officer Records subject to inspection include equipment inventory equipment calibration dates and procedures library of test procedures audit and inspection reports by agencies conducting laboratory evaluations and certifications testing and management personnel



qualifications test report forms and the internal QC procedures

1114 Capability Check

The Contracting Officer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technicians testing procedures techniques and other items pertinent to testing for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract

1115 Test Results

Cite applicable Contract requirements tests or analytical procedures used Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters CONFORMS or DOES NOT CONFORM to the specification requirements whichever is applicable Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports Furnish the signed reports certifications and other documentation to the Contracting Officer via the QC Manager Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month

112 QC CERTIFICATIONS

1121 Contractor Quality Control Report Certification

Each Contractor Quality Control Report shall contain the following statement On behalf of the Contractor I certify that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best of my knowledge except as noted in this report

1122 Invoice Certification

Furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment request signed by the QC Manager attesting that as-built drawings are current and attesting that the work for which payment is requested including stored material is in compliance with contract requirements

1123 Completion Certification

Upon completion of work under this Contract the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that the work has been completed inspected tested and is in compliance with the Contract

113 DOCUMENTATION

Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities

1131 Contractor Production Report

Reports are required for each day that work is performed and shall be attached to the Contractor Quality Control Report prepared for the same day Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Production Reports are to be



prepared signed and dated by the project superintendent and shall contain the following information

a Date of report report number name of contractor contract number title and location of Contract and superintendent present

b Weather conditions in the morning and in the afternoon including maximum and minimum temperatures

c A list of Contractor and subcontractor personnel on the work site their trades employer work location description of work performed and hours worked

e A list of job safety actions taken and safety inspections conducted Indicate that safety requirements have been met including the results on the following

(1) Was a job safety meeting held this date (If YES attach a copy of the meeting minutes)

(2) Were there any lost time accidents this date (If YES attach a copy of the completed OSHA report)

(3) Was cranemanlifttrenchingscaffoldhv electricalhigh workhazmat work done (If YES attach a statement or checklist showing inspection performed)

(4) Was hazardous materialwaste released into the environment (If YES attach a description of incident and proposed action)

f A list of safety actions taken today and safety inspections conducted

g A list of equipmentmaterial received each day that is incorporated into the job

h A list of construction and plant equipment on the work site including the number of hours used idle and down for repair

i Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received problems encountered during construction work progress and delays conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications field changes safety hazards encountered instructions given and corrective actions taken delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site

1132 Contractor Quality Control Report

Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work and on the last day of a no-work period Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Quality Control Reports are to be prepared signed and dated by the QC Manager and shall contain the following information

a Identify the control phase and the definable feature of work



b Results of the Preparatory Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the drawings and specifications have been reviewed submittals have been approved materials comply with approved submittals materials are stored properly preliminary work was done correctly the testing plan has been reviewed and work methods and schedule have been discussed

c Results of the Initial Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the preliminary work was done correctly samples have been prepared and approved the workmanship is satisfactory test results are acceptable work is in compliance with the Contract and the required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests

d Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held including the location of the definable feature of work Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase and that required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests

e Results of the three phases of control for off-site work if applicable including actions taken

f List the rework items identified but not corrected by close of business

g List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken

h Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received quality control problem areas deviations from the QC plan construction deficiencies encountered QC meetings held acknowledgement that as-built drawings have been updated corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action taken by the Contractor

i Contractor Quality Control Report certification

1133 Testing Plan and Log

As tests are performed the QC Manager shall record on the Testing Plan and Log the date the test was conducted the date the test results were forwarded to the Contracting Officer remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used Attach a copy of the updated Testing Plan and Log to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month

1134 Rework Items List

The QC Manager shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract identifying what items need to be reworked the date the item was originally discovered and the date the item was corrected There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered Attach a copy of the Contractor Rework Items List to the



last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the Contracting Officer


The QC Manager is required to review the as-built drawings required by Section 01 78 00 Closeout Procedures to ensure that as-built drawings are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract drawings The QC Manager shall initial each deviation and each revision Upon completion of work the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the Contracting Officer

1136 Report Forms

The following forms which are attached at the end of this section are acceptable for providing the information required by the paragraph entitled Documentation While use of these specific formats are not required any other format used shall contain the same information

a Combined Contractor Production Report and Contractor Quality Control Report (1 sheet) with separate continuation sheet

b Testing Plan and Log

c Rework Items List

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used



SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)

AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)

FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies

FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control

12 SUBMITTALS



Traffic control plan

SD-03 Product Data

Backflow preventers

SD-06 Test Reports

Backflow Preventer Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Backflow Tester Certifications

Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval

13 BACKFLOW TESTER CERTIFICATIONS

Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List University of Southern California attesting that the design size and make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval Certificate



of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable

131 Backflow Preventers Certificate

The Contractor shall submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours or training in backflow preventer installations The certificate must be current

14 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

141 Availability of Utility Services

a The Contract clause related to utilities applies Reasonable amounts of water and electricity from the nearest outlet will be provided free of charge for pursuance of work within a facility under this contract If the nearest available outlet cannot be utilized by the Contractor because of improper voltage insufficient current improper pressure incompatible connectors etc it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide temporary utilities as required

b Reasonable amounts of utilities for contractor trailers and storage buildings will be made available to the Contractor when available The Contractor shall be responsible for providing transformers electrical service poles and drops for electrical services and backflow preventer devices on connections to domestic water lines Final taps and tie-ins to the Government utility grid will be made by the Contractor after approval by the Contracting Officer Tap-in cost if any shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Under no circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining domestic water

142 Trailers

Electrical service will be supplied by the Government when available except at Tarawa Terrace where Carolina Power and Light Company will be the supplier

143 Energy and Utilities Conservation

The Contractor shall carefully conserve utilities furnished without charge The Contractor at his own expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines and remove the same prior to final acceptance of the construction

144 Location of Underground Utilities

Location and Protection of underground utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Where existing-to-remain piping utilities and underground obstructions of any type are indicted in locations to be traversed by new piping ducts and other excavations the elevations of the existing utilities and obstructions shall be determined before the new work is completed

a In addition the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a professional utility locator prior to digging Contractor will provide documentation that the site has been



surveyed and checked for underground utilities All utilities must be located including but not limited to power water sewer storm drains fiber optics TV cable telephone and intrusion detection wiring A set of known utility drawings will be available in the ROICC office for review to assist the locator

b It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact the Base Telephone Office (451-2531) prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune A telephone office representative will assist in locating telephone lines

c It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact Charter Communications cable TV service prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune to ensure that all buried cable lines are identified Contact Mr Olin Criswell at 353-8677 for assistance

d It is mandatory that the contractor also contact the North Carolina One-Call Center to coordinate the location of underground natural gas infrastructure North Carolina 811 Inc can be reached at 811 on a touch-tone phone in the state of North Carolina or toll-free at 18006324949 if calling from out of state Work requests may also be submitted online at wwwnc811org

1441 The Locations of Underground Utilities

The locations of underground utilities shown at only approximate and the information provided may be incomplete Contractor shall attempt to ascertain locations of existing underground utilities prior to and during digging operations

1442 Damage to Underground Utilities

Immediate notice shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer of any damage The Contractor shall make temporary repairs immediately and shall provide permanent repairs as soon as practicable For any additional work required by reason of conflict between the new and existing work an adjustment in contract price will be made in accordance with Contract clause entitled Differing Site Conditions if appropriate

15 WEATHER PROTECTION

Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are monitored carefully Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent and at the end of each workday Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage

151 Building and Site Storm Protection

When a warning of gale force winds is issued take precautions to minimize danger to persons and protect the work and nearby Government property Precautions shall include but are not limited to closing openings removing loose materials tools and equipment from exposed locations and removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work Close openings in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government property



1511 Hurricane Conditions of Readiness

Unless directed otherwise comply with

a Condition FIVE Normal weather conditions are expected for the foreseeable future No action is required

b Condition FOUR (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 72 hours) Contractors shall continue normal daily clean up and good house keeping practices Collect and store in piles or containers scrap lumber waste material and rubbish for removal and disposal at the close of each work day Stack lumber in neat piles less than 4 feet high Prepare to remove or secure all debris trash or stored materials that could become missile hazards during high wind conditions Meetings should be held on-site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to need to be taken should the base go to a higher readiness condition Contact the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions

c Condition THREE (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 48 hours) Once Condition 3 is set contractors shall shift their focus from their normal activities to taking the actions that are required to prepare the job site for the potential of destructive weather All debris and rubbish shall be removed form the site at the end of the workday All stored materials shall either be removed from the job site or secured (metal straps or heavy linesropes) All tools equipment and gear shall be secured at the end of the workday Begin preparations to adequately secure the facility (windows boarded up etc) Meetings should be held on-site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to be taken should base go to a higher readiness condition Contract the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions

d Condition TWO (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 24 hours) Cease all normal activities until the job-site is completely prepared for the onslaught of destructive weather The job site should be completely free of debris rubbish and scrap materials The facility being worked on should be made weather-tight All scaffolding planking shall be removed All formwork and free standing structural steel shall be braced All machinery tools equipment and materials shall be properly secured or removed from the job-site Expend every effort to clear all missiles hazards and loose equipment from the job site When the contractor secures for the day the job site should be left in a condition that is ready for the storm and the contractor should assume that they will not be allowed to return to their job site until after the storm passes and the base is reopened Contact ROICC for additional updates and upon completion of required actions

e Condition ONE (Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 12 hours) If still on the job site the contractor will be required to immediately leave the base until the storm passes and the base is reopened



16 STORAGE AREAS

The Contract Clause entitled FAR 52236-10 Operations and Storage Areas and the following apply

161 Storage Size and Location

The open site available for storage shall be confined to the indicated operations area

17 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

Provide adequate sanitary conveniences of a type approved for the use of persons employed on the work properly secluded from public observation and maintained in such a manner as required and approved by the Contracting Officer Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance Upon completion of the work remove the conveniences from the premises leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance Dispose of sewage through connection to a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system Where such systems are not available use chemical toilets or comparably effective units and periodically empty wastes into a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system or remove waste to a commercial facility Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors

18 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS

Locate these where directed and within the indicated operations area

181 Maintenance of Temporary Facilities

Suitably paint and maintain the temporary facilities Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal

182 Trailers or Storage Buildings

Trailers or storage buildings will be permitted where space is available subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer The trailers or buildings shall be in good condition free from visible damage rust and deterioration and meet all applicable safety requirements Trailers shall be roadworthy and comply with all appropriate state and local vehicle requirements Failure to maintain storage trailers or buildings to these standards shall result in the removal of non-complying units at the Contractors expense A sign not smaller than 24 by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed on the trailer depicting the company name business phone number and emergency phone number Trailers shall be anchored to resist high winds and must meet applicable state of local standards for anchoring mobile trailers

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 Backflow Preventers

Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements AWWA C511 Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged cast iron mounted gate valve and strainer 304 stainless steel or bronze internal parts The particular make modeldesign and size of backflow preventers to be installed shall be included in the latest edition of the List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR List



and shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Provide an approved reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly at each location where the Contractor taps into the Government potable water supply

A certified tester(s) shall perform testing of backflow preventer(s) for proper installation and operation and provide subsequent tagging Backflow preventer tests shall be performed using test equipment procedures and certification forms conforming to those outlined in the latest edition of the Manual of Cross-Connection Control published by the FCCCHR Manual Test and tag each reduced pressure backflow preventer upon initial installation (prior to continued water use) and quarterly thereafter Tag shall contain the following information make model serial number dates of tests results maintenance performed and signature of tester Record test results on certification forms conforming to requirements cited earlier in this paragraph

Not used




SECTION 01 57 19

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

0914

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



MIL-S-16165 (Rev E) Shielding Harnesses Shielding Items and Shielding Enclosures for Use in the Reduction of Interference from Engine Electrical Systems

MIL-STD-461 (2007 Rev F) Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment

MIL-STD-462 (Rev D Notice 4) Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics


EPA 832-R-92-005 (1992) Storm Water Management for Construction Activities Developing Pollution Preventions and Plans and Best Management Practices



40 CFR 12226 Storm Water Discharges (Applicable to State NPDES Programs see section 12325)

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and



Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan

49 CFR 171 General Information Regulations and Definitions

49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table Special Provisions Hazardous Materials Communications Emergency Response Information and Training Requirements

49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings

12 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection

Contractors shall complete and provide environmental training documentation for training required by Federal State and local regulations

13 DEFINITIONS

131 Sediment

Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind

132 Solid Waste

Rubbish debris garbage and other discarded solid materials except recyclables and hazardous waste as defined in paragraph entitled Hazardous Waste resulting from industrial commercial and agricultural operations and from community activities

133 Sanitary Wastes

Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage

134 Rubbish

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as non-recyclable paper and cardboard crockery and bones

Recyclables includes clean paper cardboard glass plastics (No 1 amp 2) metal and cans

Non-recyclable paper and cardboard are defined as material that has become wet or contaminated with food or other residue that render it un-acceptable for recycling

Treated woodlumber is defined as wood that has been stained or treated to prevent rot or composite wood products such as OSB pressboard furniture etc

Untreated wood is defined as lumber trees stumps limbs tops and shrubs



135 Debris

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as ashes and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work (excluding organic matter) leaves pine straw grass and shrub clippings

136 Chemical Wastes

This includes salts acids alkalies herbicides pesticides and organic chemicals

137 Garbage

Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation cooking dispensing and consumption of food

138 Hazardous Waste

Hazardous substances as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and local regulations

139 Hazardous Materials

Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172

1310 Landscape Features

Trees plants shrubs and ground cover

1311 Lead Acid Battery Electrolyte

The electrolyte substance (liquid medium) within a battery cell

1312 Oily Waste

Petroleum products and bituminous materials

1313 Class I Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)

Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Sections 602 (a and b) of The Clean Air Act

14 SUBMITTALS




Preconstruction survey report

Permit for storm water discharge

Notice of Intent

Notice of Termination



Pollution Prevention Plan


Solid waste disposal permit

Disposal permit for hazardous waste

Environmental training documentation

Permit to transport hazardous waste

Hazardous waste certification

Erosion and sediment control inspection reports

Environmental Plan Review

Annual Report of Products Containing Recovered Materials

141 Solid Waste Disposal Permit

Submit one copy of a State and local permit or license for the solid waste disposal facility

142 Disposal Permit for Hazardous Waste

Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and State permits manifests or licenses for transportation treatment storage and disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities

143 Permit to Transport Hazardous Waste

Submit one copy of the EPA or State permit license or regulation for the transporter who will ship the hazardous waste to the permitted Treatment Storage and Disposal (TSD) facility

144 Hazardous Waste Certification

Submit written certification that hazardous waste turned in for disposal was generated on Government property and is identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 40 CFR 261 40 CFR 262 and 40 CFR 263

145 Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports

Submit to the Contracting Officer once every 7 calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event that produces 05 inch of rain

15 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain during the life of the contract environmental protection as defined in this Section Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction practice Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project Comply with Federal State and local regulations pertaining to the environment including but not limited to water air solid waste and noise pollution



16 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

161 Contents of Environmental Protection Plan

a Include any hazardous materials (HM) planned for use on the station shall be included in the station HM Tracking Program maintained by the Safety Department To assist this effort submit a list (including quantities) of HM to be brought to the station and copies of the corresponding material safety data sheets (MSDS) Submit this list to the Contracting Officer At project completion remove any hazardous material brought onto the station Account for the quantity of HM brought to the station the quantity used or expended during the job and the leftover quantity which (1) may have additional useful life as a HM and shall be removed by the Contractor or (2) may be a hazardous waste which shall then be removed as specified herein

b The Environmental Protection Plan shall list and quantify any Hazardous Waste (HW) to be generated during the project

c In accordance with station regulations store HW near the point of generation up to a total quantity of one quart of hazardous waste or 55 gallons of hazardous waste Move any volume exceeding these quantities to a HW permitted area within 3 days Prior to generation of HW contact Contracting Officer for labeling requirements for storage of hazardous wastes

d In accordance with station regulations substitute materials as necessary to reduce the generation of HW and include a statement to that effect in the Environmental Plan

e Contact Contracting Officer for conditions in the area of the project which may be subject to special environmental procedures Include this information in the Preconstruction Survey Describe in the Environmental Protection Plan any permits required prior to working the area and contingency plans in case an unexpected environmental condition is discovered

f Obtain permits for handling HW and deliver completed documents to Contracting Officer for review File the documents with the appropriate agency and complete disposal with the approval of Contracting Officer Deliver correspondence with the State concerning the environmental permits and completed permits to Contracting Officer

162 Environmental Protection Plan Format

The Environmental Protection Plan shall follow the following format



1 Hazardous materials to be brought onto the station 2 MSDS package 3 Employee training documentation 4 HW storage plan





5 HW to be generated 6 Preconstruction survey results 7 Permitting requirements identified

163 Environmental Plan Review

Fourteen days after the environmental protection meeting submit the proposed environmental plan for further discussion review and approval

164 Preconstruction Survey

Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site with the Contracting Officer and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site

17 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

40 CFR 12226 EPA 832-R-92-005 Provide Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

a Identify potential sources of pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the site

b Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity at the construction site

c Ensure compliance with terms of EPA general permit for storm water discharge

d Select applicable management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005

e Provide completed copy of Notice of Intent and Notice of Termination except for effective date

171 Notice of Intent

The Contractor shall prepare a completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form in accordance with the requirements of the States general permit for storm water discharges from construction sites Submit NOI and the appropriate permit fee to the Contracting Office a minimum of 14 days prior to start of construction

The Contractor shall keep a copy of the approved permit on site at the Contractors trailer at all times

172 Class I and II ODS Prohibition

Class I ODS as defined and identified herein shall not be used in the performance of this contract nor be provided as part of the equipment This prohibition shall be considered to prevail over any other provision specification drawing or referenced documents



18 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

181 Licenses and Permits

Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to FAR 52236-7 Permits and Responsibilities except for those permits which will be obtained by the Contracting Officer as follows

For permits obtained by the Contracting Officer whether or not required by the permit perform inspections of the work in progress and submit certifications to the applicable regulatory agency via the Contracting Officer that the work conforms to the contract and permit requirements The inspections and certifications shall be provided through the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the work is being performed As a part of the quality control plan which is required to be submitted for approval by the quality control section provide a subitem containing the name PE registration number address and telephone number of the professional engineer(s) who will be performing the inspections and certifications for each permit listed above

19 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS

The Contractor shall familiarize himself with requirements of the attached Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune Contractor Environmental Guide

110 CAMP LEJEUNE SANITARY LANDFILL INFORMATION

1 Contractors may ONLY use the Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill for the disposal of asbestos containing materials building products with tightly adhered lead containing paint non-contaminated clean dirt and clean gravel The hours of operation are 0730-1530

2 Delivery of acceptable materials (identified above) shall be by appointment only Appointments made by phone at 910-451-5011 or 910-451-2946 ALL other contractor generated material shall be weighed through the Base Landfill scales before being removed from the Base Contractors utilizing the base scales will require Contracting Officer assisted pre-registration with the Landfill Manager

3 The Contracting Officer will register the contract via E-mail with the Base Landfill All haul vehicles will maintain a secure vehicle placard as a condition to utilize the scale E-mail the contract information to the Landfill Clerk including the name on the Prime Contractor contract number job namedescription completion date and whether or not any of the above materials will be delivered to the Landfill

4 As of May 01 2014 the above supersedes any other statementsspecifications pertaining to the delivery of materials to the Base Landfill

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS

The Contractor shall submit data annually (by December 1) products used during the previous fiscal year (October 1 - September 30) as required by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by Resource Conservation



and Recovery Act (RCRA) Report forms is attached to end of this section as Appendix A

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of work Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified Conform to the State permitting requirements of the Clean Water Act

311 Land Resources

Except in areas to be cleared do not remove cut deface injure or destroy trees or shrubs without Contracting Officers permission Do not fasten or attach ropes cables or guys to existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by Contracting Officer Where such use of attach ropes cables or guys is authorized the Contractor shall be responsible for any resultant damage

3111 Protection of Trees

Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged by construction operations Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas By approved excavation remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed Removal of trees and the procedure for removal requires approval of the Contracting Officer

3112 Landscape Replacement

Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations and replace with equivalent undamaged trees and landscape features Obtain Contracting Officers approval before removal or replacement


Remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads work area structures foundations of temporary structures stockpiles of excess or waste materials and other signs of construction Grade temporary roads parking areas and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours

312 Water Resources

3121 Stream Crossings

The Contracting Officers approval is required before any equipment will be permitted to ford live streams In areas where frequent crossings are required install temporary culverts or bridges Remove temporary culverts or bridges upon completion of work and repair the area to its original condition or as indicated

3122 Oily Wastes

Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground



drainage areas or local bodies of water Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks in the event of leakage or spillage

313 Fish and Wildlife Resources

Do not disturb fish and wildlife Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife except as indicated or specified

32 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Contracting Officer historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed by the Contracting Officer to resume work The Government retains ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources

33 NOISE

Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products as certified by the EPA Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted without written permission from the Contracting Officer and then only during designated times

34 RESTRICTIONS ON EQUIPMENT

341 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression

a Electric motors must comply with MIL-STD-461 relative to radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference A test for electromagnetic interference will not be required for motors that are identical physically and electrically to those that have previously met the requirements of MIL-STD-461 An electromagnetic interference suppression test will not be required for electric motors without commutation or sliprings having no more than one starting contact and operated at 3600 revolutions per minute or less

b Equipment used by the Contractor shall comply with MIL-S-16165 for internal combustion engines and MIL-STD-461 for other devices capable of producing radiated or conducted interference

c Conduct tests for electromagnetic interference on electric motors and Contractors construction equipment in accordance with MIL-STD-461 and MIL-STD-462 Test location shall be reasonably free from radiated and conducted interference Furnish testing equipment instruments and personnel for making the tests a test location and other necessary facilities

342 Radio Transmitter Restrictions

Conform to the restrictions and procedures for the use of radio transmitting equipment as directed Do not use transmitters without prior approval



35 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

351 Local Erosion and Sediment Control Plan

Follow the approved storm water management erosion and sediment control plan

352 Burnoff

Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted

353 Borrow Pit Areas

Manage and control borrow pit areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby streams or lakes Restore areas including those outside the borrow pit disturbed by borrow and haul operations Restoration includes grading replacement of topsoil and establishment of a permanent vegetative cover Uniformly grade side slopes of borrow pit to not more than a slope of 1 part vertical to 2 parts horizontal Uniformly grade the bottom of the borrow pits to provide a flat bottom and drain by outfall ditches or other suitable means Stockpile topsoil removed during the borrow pit operation and use as part of restoring the borrow pit area

354 Protection of Erodible Soils

Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade as indicated or specified Immediately protect side and back slopes upon completion of rough grading Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils

355 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils

Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation

3551 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site This includes construction of diversion ditches benches berms and use of silt fences and strawbales to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses

3552 Sediment Basins

Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins Pump dry and remove accumulated sediment after each storm Use a paved weir or vertical overflow pipe for overflow Remove collected sediment from the site Institute effluent quality monitoring programs

3553 Borrow

Permit only in areas where suitable environmental controls are possible

3554 Vegetation and Mulch

Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent vegetation temporary vegetation mulching or netting Stabilize slopes by hydroseeding anchoring mulch in place covering with anchored netting



sodding or such combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control

a Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed Include topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of grass

36 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES

Pick up and separate solid wastes and place in covered containers which are regularly emptied Do not prepare or cook food on the project site Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes At project completion leave the areas clean

361 Disposal of Metal Paint Cans

All metal paint cans shall be taken to Building 962 for recycling The cans shall be empty and completely dry The cans shall be triple rinsed and stenciled Triple Rinsed prior to turn in The Contractor shall give the Government 72 hours advance notice prior to turn-in Contractor is responsible for rinsing stenciling crushing and deposting in Government owned receptable located at Building 962

362 Disposal of Rubbish and Debris

Rubbish and debris shall be taken off-base for disposal unless specifically directed otherwise

Metals shall be taken to the DRMO disposal area at Lot 203 as specified

363 Disposal Off-Base

a Provide 24-hour advance written notice to the Contracting Office of Contractors intention to dispose of off base

b Disposal at sites or landfills not holding a valid State of North Carolina permit is specifically prohibited The prohibition also applies to sites where a permit may have been applied for but not yet obtained

c Off-base disposal of construction debris outside the parameters of this paragraph at site without State permits andor not in accordance with regulatory requirements shall require the Contractor at his own expense to remove transport and relocate the debris to a State approved site The Contractor shall also be required to pay any fines penalties or fees related to the illegal disposal of construction debris

37 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

371 Hazardous Waste Generation

Handle generated hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 262

372 Hazardous Waste Disposal

Dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with Federal State and local regulations especially 40 CFR 263 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 265 Removal of hazardous waste from Government property shall not occur without prior



notification and coordination with the Contracting officer Transport hazardous waste by a permitted licensed or registered hazardous waste transported to a TSD facility Hazardous waste shall be properly identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 49 CFR 172 Provide completed manifest for hazardous waste disposed of off-site to the Contracting Officer within 7 days of disposal Hazardous waste shall not be brought onto the station

373 Hazardous Waste Storage

Store hazardous waste in containers in accordance with 49 CFR 178 Identify hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261 and 40 CFR 262 Identify hazardous waste generated within the confines of the station by the stations EPA generator identification number

374 Spills of Oil and Hazardous Materials

Take precautions to prevent spills of oil and hazardous material In the event of a spill immediately notify the Contracting Officer Spill response shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and applicable State regulations

375 Lead-Acid Batteries

Dispose of lead-acid batteries that are not damaged or leaking at a State-approved battery recycle or at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility For lead-acid batteries that are leaking or have cracked casings dispose of the electrolyte solution using one of the following alternatives

a An industrial waste water treatment plant if available and approved by the Contracting Officer for disposing of lead-acid battery electrolyte

b Dispose of the lead-acid battery electrolyte at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility

The management and disposal of waste lead-acid batteries and electrolyte shall comply with requirements for management and disposal of hazardous wastes

376 Mercury Control

Prior to starting work remove thermostats switches and other components that contain mercury Upon removal place items containing mercury in doubled polyethylene bags label and turn over to the Contracting Officer for disposal

377 Petroleum Products

Protect against spills and evaporation during fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles Dispose of lubricants to be discarded and excess oil

38 DUST CONTROL

Keep dust down at all times including nonworking periods Sprinkle or treat with dust suppressants the soil at the site haul roads and other areas disturbed by operations Dry power brooming will not be permitted



Instead use vacuuming wet mopping wet sweeping or wet power brooming Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks concrete and bituminous concrete Do not shake bags of cement concrete mortar or plaster unnecessarily

381 Abrasive Blasting

3811 Blasting Operations

The use of silica sand is prohibited in abrasive blasting

Provide tarpaulin drop cloths and windscreens to enclose abrasive blasting operations to confine and collect dust abrasive agent paint chips and other debris in accordance with the requirements specified Perform work involving removal of hazardous material in accordance with 29 CFR 1910

3812 Disposal Requirements

Collect dust abrasive paint and other debris resulting from abrasive blasting operations and store in 55 gallon drums with watertight lids Take a representative sample of this material and test for EP toxicity with respect to lead chromium and cadmium content The sampling and testing shall be performed in accordance with 40 CFR 261 Handle debris resulting from the abrasive blasting operations as a hazardous material and dispose of in accordance with 40 CFR 262 40 CFR 263 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 265 Transport hazardous material by a transporter licensed and permitted for transportation of hazardous materials Dispose of hazardous material in an EPA-approved and permitted facility specifically designated for hazardous waste disposal

39 QUARANTINE FOR IMPORTED FIRE ANT (482)

Onslow Jones and Cartaret Counties and portions of Duplin and Craven Counties have been declared a generally infested area by the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) for the imported fire ant Compliance with the quarantine regulations established by this authority as set forth in USDA Publication 30181 of 31 December 1992 is required for operations hereunder Pertinent requirements of the quarantine for materials originating on the Camp Lejeune reservation the Marine Corps Air Station (Helicopter) New River and the Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point which are to be transported outside Onslow County or adjacent suppression areas include the following

a Certification is required for the following articles and they shall not be moved from the reservation to any point outside Onslow County and adjacent designated areas unless accompanied by a valid inspection certificate issued by an Officer of the Plant Protection and Quarantine Program (PPQ) of the US Department of Agriculture

(1) Bulk soil

(2) Used mechanized soil-moving equipment (Used mechanized soil-moving equipment is exempt if cleaned of loose noncompacted soil)

(3) Other products articles or means of conveyances if it is determined by an inspector that they present a hazard of



transporting spread of the imported fire ant and the person in possession thereof has been so notified

b Authorization for movement of equipment outside the imported fire and regulated area shall be obtained from USDA Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS) Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) Box 28 Goldsboro North Carolina 27533-0028 Attn Mr William Scroggins or Mr Frank Best telephone (919) 735-1941 If Mr Scroggins or Mr Best are not available contact Mr Jim Kelley at (910) 815-4667 the supervisors office in Wilmington Requests for inspection shall be made sufficiently in advance of the date of movement to permit arrangements for the services of authorized inspectors The equipment shall be prepared and assembled so that it may be readily inspected Soil on or attached to equipment supplies and materials shall be removed by washing with water or such other means as necessary to accomplish complete removal Resulting spoil shall be wasted as necessary and as directed



ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS

Page 1 of 3

Contractor shall submit data annually (By 1 December) for the followingproducts used during the previous fiscal year (1 October - 30 September) asrequired by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as ammended by ResourceConservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)

Contract Number __________________ Fiscal Year _____________=============================================================================| MATERIAL | UNIT | QUANTITY (CRM) | TOTAL QUANTITY |=============================================================================|A Insulation | | | || 1 Loose fill | Ft3 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 2 Blanket or batt | Ft2 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 3 Board | Ft2 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 4 Spray-in-place | m3 | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 5 Other | | | ||============================|=========|===================|================||B Cement and Concrete | yd3 | | ||============================|=========|===================|================||C Paper and Paper Products | | | || 1 Copy Paper | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 2 PrintingWriting Paper| Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 3 Corrugated and | | | || fiberboard boxes | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 4 Folding boxboard and | | | || cartons | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 5 Stationary office | | | || papers envelopes and| | | || computer paper | $Amt | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 6 Toilet tissue paper | | | || towels fasial tissue| | | || paper napkins doilies| | | || and industrial wipes | $Amt | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 7 Brown papers and | | | || coarse papers | Box | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| 8 Other | | | ||----------------------------|---------|-------------------|----------------|| | | | ||===========================================================================|

APPENDIX A



Page 2 of 3

=============================================================================| MATERIAL | DEFINITION |=============================================================================|1 Quantity (CRM) | Quantity used containing recovered materials||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||2 Total Quantity | Quantity used containing recovered materials || | plus quantity used not containing recovered || | materials ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||3 Unit | Ft3 (cubic feet) Ft2 (square feet) || | m3 (cubic meters) yd3 (cubic yards) box || | (number of boxes used) $ Amt (dollar value || | of material used) ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||4 Loose-Fill Insulation | Includes but is not limited tocellulose || | fiber mineral fibers (fiberglass and rock || | wool) vermiculite and perlite ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||5 Blanket or Batt | Includes but is not limited to mineral || Insulation | fibers (fiberglass and rock wool) ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||6 Board Insulation | This category refers to sheathing roof || | decking and wood panel insulation It || | includes but is not limited to cellulose|| | fiber fiberboard perlite composite board || | polyurethane polyisocyanurate polystyrene || | phenolics and composites ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||7 Spray-in-place | Includes but is not limited to foam-in- || Insulation | place polyurethane and polyisocyanurate || | and spray-on cellulose ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||8 Cement or Concrete | || Containing Recovered | || Materials Cement or | || Concrete Containing | || Fly Ash | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||9 Copy Paper | This item refers to any grade of paper || | suitable for copying by the xerographic || | method ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||10 Printing amp Writing | This item refers to paper designed for || Paper | printing other than newsprint such as || | offset or book paper and paper || | suitable for pen and ink pencil typewriter || | or printing ||===========================================================================|

APPENDIX A



Page 3 of 3

=============================================================================| MATERIAL | DEFINITION |=============================================================================|11 Corrugated amp Fiberboard | Corrugated boxes refer to boxes made of || Boxes | corrugated paperboard which in turn is || | made from a fluted corrugating medium pasted || | to two flat sheets of paperboard || | (linerboard) Fiber or fiberboard boxes || | refer to boxes made from containerboard || | either solid fiber or corrugated paperboard || | (general term) or boxes made from solid || | paperboard of the same material throughout ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||12 Folding Boxes and | This item refers to a paperboard || Cartons | suitable for the manufacture of folding || | cartons ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||13 Stationery Office | This item is considered self-explanatory || Papers Envelopes and | however if questions arise refer to || Manifold Business Forms | 40 CFR 2504 for definitions of any of these || | items ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||14 Toilet Tissue Paper | This item is considered self-explanatory || Towels Facial Tissue | however if questions arise refer to || Paper Napkins Doilies | 40 CFR 2504 for definitions of any of these || and Industrial Wipes | items ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||15 Brown Papers and Coarse| Brown papers refer to papers usually || Papers | made from unbleached kraft pulp and used || | for bags sacks wrapping paper and so || | forth Coarse papers refer to papers || | used for industrial purposes as || | distinguished from those used for cultural || | or sanitary purposes ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------||16 Other | Any other type of paper not included in any || | of the above categories ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|| | ||===========================================================================|



APPENDIX A




SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT0107

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


US GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED BD+C (2009 R 2010) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Building Design and Construction (LEED-NC)

12 GOVERNMENT POLICY

Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design construction and use of facilities As part of the implementation of that policy (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing cutting and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse Divert a minimum of 60 percent by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill

13 MANAGEMENT

Develop and implement a waste management program Take a pro-active responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors vendors and suppliers to participate in the effort The Environmental Manager as specified in Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS is responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal excess or unusable construction materials packaging materials for construction products and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work In the management of waste consider the availability of viable markets the condition of the material the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates Implement any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage or recycling accrue to the Contractor Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling reuse and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal state and local regulations Also provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation handling recycling salvage reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project

14 SUBMITTALS




PROCEDURES


Waste Management Plan ( LEED BD+C)


Records ( LEED BD+C)

15 MEETINGS

Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings After award of the Contract and prior to commencement of work schedule and conduct a meeting with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste management The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL At a minimum discuss environmental and waste management goals and issues at the following additional meetings

a Preconstruction meeting

b Regular site meetings

c Work safety meetings

16 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Submit a waste management plan within 15 days after contract award and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting The plan demonstrates how to meet the the project waste diversion goal Also include the following in the plan

a Name of individuals on the Contractors staff responsible for waste prevention and management

b Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation

c Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management

d Description of the specific approaches to be used in recyclingreuse of the various materials generated including the areas on site and equipment to be used for processing sorting and temporary storage of wastes

e Characterization including estimated types and quantities of the waste to be generated

f Name of landfill andor incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the project

g Identification of local and regional reuse programs including non-profit organizations such as schools local housing agencies and organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity Include the name location and



phone number for each reuse facility to be used and provide a copy of the permit or license for each facility

h List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale salvaged and reused on the current project salvaged and stored for reuse on a future project or recycled Identify the recycling facilities by name location and phone number including a copy of the permit or license for each facility

i Identification of materials that cannot be recycledreused with an explanation or justification to be approved by the Contracting Officer

j Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item (h) above will be protected from contamination

k Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site)

l Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue generated by sale of the materials and the incineration andor landfill cost avoidance

Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer Approval of Contractors Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project cumulative waste diversion requirement Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to each subcontractor the Quality Control Manager and the Contracting Officer

17 RECORDS

Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated the quantity of waste diverted through sale reuse or recycling and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration Quantities may be measured by weight or by volume but must be consistent throughout List each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date Identify the landfill recycling center waste processor or other organization used to process or receive the solid waste Provide explanations for any waste not recycled or reused With each application for payment submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion and submit manifests weight tickets receipts and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material Make the records available to the Contracting Officer during construction and deliver to the Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records

18 REPORTS

Provide quarterly reports and a final report to the Contracting Officer Include project name information for waste generated this quarter and cumulative totals for the project in quarterly and final reports Also include in each report supporting documentation to include manifests weight tickets receipts and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material Include timber harvest and demolition information if any



19 COLLECTION

Separate store protect and handle at the site identified recyclable and salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and salvagability of identified materials Provide the necessary containers bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable Locate out of the way of construction traffic Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and coordinate with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Separate materials by one of the following methods

191 Source Separated Method

Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (eg free of dirt adhesives solvents petroleum contamination and other substances deleterious to the recycling process) Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area

a Land clearing debris

b Asphalt

c Concrete and masonry

d Metal (eg banding stud trim ductwork piping rebar roofing other trim steel iron galvanized stainless steel aluminum copper zinc lead brass bronze)

(1) Ferrous

(2) Non-ferrous

e Glass (colored glass allowed)

f Paper

(1) Bond

(2) Newsprint

(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials

g Plastic



Type

1 Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET PETE)

2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

3 Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)

4 Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)

5 Polypropylene (PP)

6 Polystyrene (PS)

7 Other Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above or is made of more than one resin listed above and used in a multi-layer combination

192 Co-Mingled Method

Place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and then transport to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed

193 Other Methods

Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer

110 DISPOSAL

Control accumulation of waste materials and trash Recycle or dispose of collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications dispose of in accordance with the following

1101 Reuse

Give first consideration to salvage for reuse since little or no re-processing is necessary for this method and less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form Coordinate reuse with the Contracting Officer Consider sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse

1102 Recycle

Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse but having value as being recyclable Recycle all fluorescent lamps HID lamps and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials



1103 Waste

Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to waste-to-energy plants where available As the last choice dispose of materials at a landfill or incinerator

1104 Return

Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used -- End of Section --



SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUBMITTALS



Equipmentproduct warranty list

Submit Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data


As-built drawings

Record of materials


Equipmentproduct warranty tag

12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

As-Built Drawings will be submitted as specified in 121 along with GIS Deliverables which will be created and submitted as specified in Section 01 78 30 DIGITAL DATA DELIVERABLES (GIS)


FAC 5252236-9310 Record Drawings As-built drawings will be submitted in redline mark-up format

122 As-Built Record of Materials

Furnish a record of materials

Where several manufacturers brands types or classes of the item listed have been used in the project designate specific areas where each item was used Designations shall be keyed to the areas and spaces depicted on the contract drawing Furnish the record of materials used in the following format


__________ _____________ ____________ _______________ ________




13 EQUIPMENTPRODUCT WARRANTIES

131 EquipmentProduct Warranty List

Furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing written warranties for equipmentproducts that have extended warranties (warranty periods exceeding the standard one-year warranty) furnished under the contract and prepare a complete listing of such equipmentproducts The equipmentproducts list shall state the specification section applicable to the equipmentproduct duration of the warranty therefor start date of the warranty ending date of the warranty and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty The warranty period shall begin on the same date as project acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period Execute the full list and deliver to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance of the facility

132 Equipment Warranty Tags and Guarantors Local Representative

Furnish with each warranty the name address and telephone number of the guarantors representative nearest to the location where the equipment and appliances are installed The guarantors representative upon request of the station representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty At the time of installation tag each item of warranted equipment with a durable oil- and water-resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer Attach tag with copper wire and spray with a clear silicone waterproof coating Leave the date of acceptance and QCs signature blank until project is accepted for beneficial occupancy Tag shall show the following information

EQUIPMENTPRODUCT WARRANTY TAG

Type of EquipmentProduct ____________________Warranty Period __________ From __________ To __________Contract No ____________________Inspectors Signature ____________________ Date Accepted ______________

Construction ContractorName ____________________Address _______________________Telephone _______________________

Warranty Contact __________________Name ____________________Address ________________________Telephone ________________________

STATION PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

14 COMPLETE SUBMITTAL PACKAGE

Contractor shall make electronic copies of all submittals including the approved transmittal sheets and provide two (2) CDDVDs containing all



submittals for the project


15 CLEANUP

Leave premises broom clean Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view remove temporary labels stains and foreign substances polish transparent and glossy surfaces vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition Clean filters of operating equipment Clean debris from roofs gutters downspouts and drainage systems Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas Remove waste and surplus materials rubbish and construction facilities from the site

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA0706

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM E1971 (2005 R 2011) Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings

12 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit Operation and Maintenance (OampM) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment product or system stressing and enhancing the importance of system interactions troubleshooting and long-term preventative maintenance and operation The subcontractors must compile and prepare data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel The Contractor must compile and prepare aggregate OampM data including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain OampM requirements at the system equipment component and subassembly level Include an index preceding each submittal Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

121 Package Quality

Documents must be fully legible Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted

122 Package Content

Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections including the content of the packages and addressing each product component and system designated for data package submission except as follows Commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections must use Data Package 3 Commissioned items with a Data Package 1 or 2 requirement must use instead Data Package 3

123 Changes to Submittals

Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data must be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the OampM Data Submit changes additions or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change



requirement

124 Review and Approval

The Contractors Commissioning Authority (CA) must review the commissioned systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability The CA must verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the requirements of the Contract documents and design intent particularly as they relate to functionality energy performance water performance maintainability sustainability system cost indoor environmental quality and local environmental impacts The CA must communicate deficiencies to the Contracting Officer Upon a successful review of the corrections the CA must recommend approval and acceptance of these OampM manuals to the Contracting Officer This work is in addition to the normal review procedures for OampM data

125 OampM Database

Develop a database from the OampM manuals that contains the information required to start a preventative maintenance program

13 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN OampM DATA PACKAGES

131 Operating Instructions

Include specific instructions procedures and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system

1311 Safety Precautions and Hazards

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions

1312 Operator Prestart

Include procedures required to install set up and prepare each system for use

1313 Startup Shutdown and Post-Shutdown Procedures

Provide narrative description for Startup Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure

1314 Normal Operations

Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment

1315 Emergency Operations

Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire explosion spills or other foreseeable contingencies Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled



1316 Operator Service Requirements

Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication adjustment inspection and recording gage readings


Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature humidity and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each product component or system Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run

1318 Operating Log

Provide forms sample logs and instructions for maintaining necessary operating records

132 Preventive Maintenance

Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials

1321 Lubrication Data

Include preventative maintenance lubrication data in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled Operator Service Requirements

a A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications

b Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points recommended types and grades of lubricants and capacities

c A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency

1322 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule

Include manufacturers schedule for routine preventive maintenance inspections tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance Provide manufacturers projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily weekly monthly and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft For periodic calibrations provide manufacturers specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation

1323 Cleaning Recommendations

Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E1971

133 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)

Include manufacturers recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air



quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials

1331 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement

1332 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work On diagrams number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type identically to actual installation configuration and numbering

1333 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards

1334 Removal and Replacement Instructions

Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal replacement disassembly and assembly of components assemblies subassemblies accessories and attachments Provide tolerances dimensions settings and adjustments required Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations

1335 Spare Parts and Supply Lists

Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain

134 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours

Include manufacturers projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including requirements by type of craft Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately

135 Appendices

Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment Include the following

1351 Product Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections




Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions submittals required in the applicable technical sections

1353 OampM Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections

1354 Parts Identification

Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component assembly subassembly and accessory of the end items subject to replacement Include special hardware requirements such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts Identify parts by make model serial number and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification Provide clear and legible illustrations drawings and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items When illustrations omit the part numbers and description both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index reference or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components assemblies and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment components assemblies subassemblies attachments or accessories such as typically shown in a master parts catalog

1355 Warranty Information

List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force Include warranty information for primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system

1356 Extended Warranty Information

List all warranties for products equipment components and sub-components whose duration exceeds one year For each warranty listed indicate the applicable specification section duration start date end date and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment Also list or reference all specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to keep the warranty valid

1357 Personnel Training Requirements

Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems

1358 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information

Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation maintenance and repair of components



1359 Testing and Performance Data

Include completed prefunctional checklists functional performance test forms and monitoring reports Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms

13510 Field Test Reports

Provide Field Test Reports (SD-06) that apply to equipment associated with the system

13511 Contractor Information

Provide a list that includes the name address and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment or system For each item also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturers representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site Provide the name address and telephone number of the product equipment and system manufacturers

14 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS OampM DATA PACKAGES

Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems

a Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions features modes and other operations including unoccupied operation seasonal changeover manual operation and alarms Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms

b Full as-built sequence of operations

c Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not Cx tests)

d Full points list A listing of rooms shall be provided with the following information for each room

(1) Floor

(2) Room number

(3) Room name

(4) Air handler unit ID

(5) Reference drawing number

(6) Air terminal unit tag ID

(7) Heating andor cooling valve tag ID

(8) Minimum cfm

(9) Maximum cfm

e Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system



f Full as-built print out of software program

g Electronic File

(1) Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file in PDF format Provide HDDrsquos DVDs or CDs as appropriate so that each one contains all maintenance and record files and also the Project Record Documents and Training Videos of the entire program for this facility

(2) Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory

(3) Link the index to separate files within the composite of files Book mark maintenance and record files that have a Table of Contents according to the Table of Contents

h Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations

15 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Furnish the OampM data packages specified in individual technical sections The required information for each OampM data package is as follows

151 Data Package 1


b Cleaning recommendations

c Maintenance and repair procedures

d Warranty information

e Contractor information

f Spare parts and supply list

152 Data Package 2


b Normal operations

c Environmental conditions

d Lubrication data

e Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

f Cleaning recommendations

g Maintenance and repair procedures

h Removal and replacement instructions



i Spare parts and supply list

j Parts identification

k Warranty information

l Contractor information

153 Data Package 3


b Operator prestart


d Normal operations


f Environmental conditions

g Lubrication data

h Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

i Cleaning recommendations

j Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

k Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

l Maintenance and repair procedures

m Removal and replacement instructions

n Spare parts and supply list

o Product submittal data

p OampM submittal data

q Parts identification

r Warranty information

s Testing equipment and special tool information

t Testing and performance data

u Contractor information

154 Data Package 4


b Operator prestart




d Normal operations


f Operator service requirements

g Environmental conditions

h Lubrication data

i Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

j Cleaning recommendations

k Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

l Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

m Maintenance and repair procedures

n Removal and replacement instructions

o Spare parts and supply list

p Corrective maintenance man-hours

q Product submittal data

r OampM submittal data

s Parts identification

t Warranty information

u Personnel training requirements

v Testing equipment and special tool information

w Testing and performance data

x Contractor information

155 Data Package 5


b Operator prestart

c Start-up shutdown and post-shutdown procedures

d Normal operations

e Environmental conditions

f Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

g Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques



h Wiring and control diagrams

i Maintenance and repair procedures

j Removal and replacement instructions

k Spare parts and supply list

l Product submittal data

m Manufacturers instructions

n OampM submittal data

o Parts identification

p Testing equipment and special tool information

q Warranty information

r Testing and performance data

s Contractor information

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 01 78 30

GIS DATA DELIVERABLES

0814

PART 1 GENERAL

11 OBJECTIVE

The primary objective of this section is to provide detailed specifications for collection and delivery of geospatial data commonly referred to as Geographic Information System (GIS) data Additionally this section shall provide guidance to ensure that all GIS data delivered is compatible and will add value to the Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune Installation Geospatial Information and Services (IGIampS) GEOdatabase

Failure to comply with the specifications outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverables

111 Point of Contact for MCB Camp Lejeune

The Points of Contact (POC) for assistance in preparation of GISdeliverables are

Resident Officer In Charge Of Construction Public Works DivisionConstruction Manager (CM) Project Manager (PM) or GIS1005 Michael Drive 1005 Michael RoadCamp Lejeune NC 28547-2521 Camp Lejeune NC 28547-2521 (910) 451-2581 (910) 451-2212

12 SUBMITTALS



GIS Data Deliverables

13 GOVERNMENT GEOSPATIAL DATA AND SCHEMA

1 The IGIampS repository model schema is based on the Spatial Data Standards for Facilities Infrastructure and Environment (SDSFIE) GEOFidelis Data Model with recurring business driven modifications and or adaptations

a Data will be created and delivered by developing an ARCGIS Personal GEODatabase using ArcGIS 101 or higher if a higher version is being utilized by the Government at the time the deliverable is being developed

b The Contractor shall verify the ArcGIS and schema version via the CM or PM at the commencement of this contract All GIS DATA DELIVERABLES will be created in accordance with the current version and these specifications



c The Contractor is responsible for requesting the existing GIS Data Schema and Domain Properties by means of a Data Request Package (DRP) Receipt of request will include Geospatial Database table structure schema Domain configuration Attribute text format ie case size as well as Meta Data information

d The DRP should be submitted prior to the start of data collection efforts and again on an as needed basis The Contractor shall ensure that all GIS data has been created and delivered utilizing the most up to date IGIampS GEODatabase schema

2 The Contractor shall submit a request for a Geospatial DRP to the CM or the PM

a Request shall be completely filled out and include the all information as instructed on the data request form

b Request only GIS data and or schema for feature classes that are relevant to the contract and within the boundary of project area

c Utilize associated Government modified domain structure(s)

d Attach Scope of Work which is defined by this GIS DATA DELIVERABLES section for each project request

e Return the DRP to the CM or PM for sponsorship and submittal to the Installation Geospatial Information amp Services (IGIampS) Office

f Incomplete forms may delay receipt of the requested GIS data and Schema

The following Spatial Data Standards for Facilities Infrastructure and Environment (SDSFIE) website may offer definitions for Feature data sets Feature Classes and other applicable information However please note that specific Schema or Domain modifications are not available via this resource

httpwwwsdsfieonlineorg

131 Global Positioning System (GPS) and Spatial Reference Properties

GPS data shall be completed in accordance with the GPS Data Collection and Documentation Standards Version 3 (or higher version if available at the time of this project) as prepared by Geographic Information Coordinating Council (GICC) Statewide Mapping Advisory Committee (SMAC) and adopted by the North Carolina Geographic Information Coordinating Council

1 Prior to GPS efforts ALL underground utilities shall be located utilizing a utility locating service in order to verify and obtain accurate feature locations

2 Only bench marks included in the North Carolina Geodetic Survey Base Station Network shall be used for GPS data collection

3 Mission planning is essential and Contractor shall utilize the best Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) values for data accuracy

4 Utility data as identified in paragraph ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION



AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES will be collected utilizing Survey Grade GPS data collection methods

5 Infrastructure data as identified in paragraph ATTRIBUTE DATACOLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES shall be collected utilizing Sub-Foot or better GPS data collection methods

a Spatial accuracy requirements for Survey and Sub-Foot grade data collection are as follows

i Sub-Foot requirements

1) All points shall be within + 12 inches


ii Survey Grade requirements

1) All points shall be within + 1 centimeter


6 Every effort shall be made to capture feature locations without using offsets All Offsets will be noted in the Final Report for each feature

7 Excessive offsets included in the Final Data which shall be referenced in the Final Report shall be reviewed for quality control

a Resubmittal of data will be required if PDOP planning was not observed per this specification

The following GEODatabase Coordinate Systems and Spatial Reference Properties should be utilized for Camp Lejeune

1 Transverse Mercator (UTM) Zone 18N

a GRS 1980 spheroid

b North American Datum 1983 (NAD83) horizontal datum

c North American Vertical Datum 1988 (NAVD88) vertical datum

2 Domain precision of 1000 which will result in a database accuracy of 11000 m

132 Demolished and Abandoned in Place (AIP) features

The Contractor shall reference all Demolished and or AIP features in the data delivered Should the current feature data class attributes and or domains not reference AIP or demolished features the Contractor shall be responsible for appropriately delivering these features by creating an associated Demolished or AIP feature class ie CLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment

The Contractor shall

1 Utilize a blank schema for the associated feature class



2 Rename associated feature class and add DEMO or AIP as a prefix ie DEMOCLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment AIPCLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment

3 All demolished and or AIP features should provide existing spatial and non-spatial data which may be copied from existing data

4 The Contractor will update attributes appropriately to include the following

a Contract Number

b Drawing Number

c isDemolished

d dateDemolished or dateAIP

e Status

133 Creating a New Feature Class

Should a new feature class be required that is not readily available in the current GIS schema provided by the Government the Contractor shall develop the feature class utilizing the schema consistent with the most current version of SDSFIE and document in the Final Report

1 The Contractor shall include the following modifications (fields) to the schema structure and shall submit all information to the CM or PM for direction and final approval

a Contract Number

b Drawing Number

134 GIS Topology Rules

All data must be created using GIS topology rules for polygons points and lines such as but not limited to the following examples

1 Polygons Polylines and points rules please reference illustrating topology rules in ArcGIS at wwwesricom

2 Polygons must not have slivers

3 All utility or infrastructure system data which is but is not limited to transportation system and electrical water steam distribution and wastewater collection etc will be created using GIS spatial connectivity rules which specify that vertex edge and endpoints be snapped to features within the system

4 Features will be snapped to the appropriate item

5 Data will be created to represent the real world for example water sewer and transportations systems etc will be drawn and or created in the direction of flow

6 Utility and transportation systems will be created from source to sink etc



7 Abandoned In Place (AIP) utility lines will be located and updated in the current feature data set and identified as AIP in the attribute table

135 Creation of Geographic Data Documentation (METADATA)

For each digital file delivered containing geographic information the Contractor shall provide documentation consistent with the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) Content Standards for Digital Geospatial Metadata (CSDGM) Both GEOFidelis Mandatory and FGDC Mandatory fields shall be completed for each geographic data set

The Geospatial Information amp Services (IGIampS) Metadata Authoring Guide is included in the DRP package

Metadata generation tools included in the ArcGIS suite of software (or equivalent technology) shall be used in the production of the required metadata in XML format Regardless of the tools used for metadata creation the Contractor must ensure that the metadata is delivered in XML format and can be easily imported into the IGIampS GEODatabase A copy of the FGDC metadata standard can be obtained on the internet at httpwwwfgdcgov or by contacting

Federal Geographic Data Committee590 National CenterReston Virginia 20192Email fgdcfgdcgov

(NOTE The metadata should be formatted from the Government perspective not the Contractor project perspective Therefore such items as Point of Contact (POC) should be the POC currently associated with the data and NOT the Contractors Project Manager The Contractor shall use language and format consistent with existing metadata)

136 New Feature Class Requirements

When developing a new feature class the Contractor shall develop the initial structure consistent with the most current version of SDSFIE

a If further modifications to the database structure are required the Contractor shall consult with the Government Project Manager for direction and final approval

b All new feature data classes shall be created in compliance with SDSFIE noted on the final report

137 GIS Submittals Guidelines

All GIS Submittals will be submitted to the CM or PM and then analyzed by Government GIS personnel prior to final approval Failure to comply with the specifications outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverables

1 Prior to any database development the Contractor shall provide the Government with a technical approach document for review and approval The Technical Approach document will describe in detail the Contractors technical approach to designing and developing the database



2 All attributes shall be populated in accordance with the ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES and shall be obtained via contract specifications plans and record drawings

3 The Contractor may be required to conduct research collect data and make copies of reports and studies as necessary to verify existing andor record drawing data Record drawing data and closed contracts can be located in the Technical Records Section in the Public Works Department

4 Raw GPS data and collection data files shall be included with every phase of delivery

5 Actual spatial and non-spatial conditions in the field always supersede drawings It is the Contractors responsibility to locate and field verify all features to ensure attribute data and location is correctly recorded

6 The Contractor shall submit a preliminary review of data at 15 to 25 percent contract completion to ensure specifications compliance

7 The Contractor shall deliver digital geographic maps GPS collection files and related data All working text and documents and personal geodatabase shall be included for review in the draft and final delivery of data

a All maps of GIS DATA DELIVERABLES will be ANSI C size and include a project title contract number scale legend standard symbology attributes ie building numbers road names segment diameters etc

8 The Contractor may be required to provide a technical consultant to meet on site

9 The Contractor shall not deliver blank unused schema or feature class data with no attributes Deliver only data pertinent to the contract that adds value to the GEODatabase per this section

10 The Contractor shall deliver GIS Data at the end of each phase for all Phased Projects and Construction projects

11 The Contractor accepts the responsibility to perform quality assurance for all data and related materials required in the section prior to submitting product to the Government

12 The data will be analyzed for discrepancies in subject content correct format in accordance with this statement of work and compatibility with the existing GIS system as well as all other specifications in this section

138 Formats Versions and Guidelines

All data deliverables will be in the following formats andor versions

1 GIS data will be provided in an ArcGIS 101 or higher if a higher version is being used by the Government at the time of this project The Contractor shall verify the ArcGIS version via the CM or PM at the commencement of this contract



2 Microsoft Office (MS) Suite data shall be delivered in MS 2010

3 Microsoft Windows 7 operating system unless otherwise approved by the Government

4 All reports and maps will be delivered as a hard copy and in a searchable Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)

5 All text spreadsheet and database files reports and maps shall be delivered on Compact Disc read - only memory (CD-ROM) or Digital Versatile Disc read - only memory (DVD-ROM)

6 The Contractor shall verify required version(s) of software and schema via the CM or PM

7 Map submittals shall accompany each geospatial deliverable

a Include ANSI C map for each projectarea

b Data should be labeled and attributed per specification

c All maps should include the date a legend scale contract title and number

139 Final Report Requirements with additional Guidelines

The Contractor shall follow the following

1 Specific procedures and list of equipment software and versions that were utilized for the GPS data collection and creation of geospatial data

2 Submit all GPS data files

3 Provide the date(s) the IGIampS schema and geospatial data was received

4 Provide steps taken to create the GEODatabase

5 Provide details on any offsets to include justification as to why offsets were utilized and on which features and or points offsets were used

6 Describe all modifications to the geodatabase to include the name of all new features classes ie new demolished or AIP

7 Provide the source that was utilized for required attributes

a Include an ANSI C size copy of all design drawings that were referenced in the attribute data This information should be included in all phases of delivery to include draft and final reviews

b Provide the overall utility site plan drawing(s)with each submittal

8 Specify Deliverable Draft or Final Submittal when data is submitted to the CM or PM for review



9 Provide the name and contact information for the GIS Technical Point of Contact who can answer questions regarding the data deliverable

10 GIS DATA DELIVERABLES must be provided in a format that does not require translation or prepost processing prior to being loaded into the IGIampS GEODatabase

11 Provide any miscellaneous information that the Contractor deems significant

12 Provide the current version of the GIS DATA DELIVERABLES specification utilized for this contract submittal

1310 Ownership

All digital files final hardcopy products GPS raw data source data acquired for this project and related materials including that furnished by the Government shall become the property of the Government and will not be issued posted distributed or published by the Contractor

Note No endorsement of software or hardware is implied

14 ATTRIBUTE DATA COLLECTION AND GPS REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC FEATURES

141 CLJNCLCommon



CLJNCLRoadCenterline (The center of the road area)

a) roadCategoryb) numberOfLanesc) speedLimitd) isPaved YNe) isOneWay YNf) baseRoadName g) dateConstructedh) gisFeatureCollectionMethodi) contractNumberj) designDrawingNumber

142 CLJNCLREALPROPERTY



CLJNCLBuilding (A roofed floored and walled structure that is completely enclosed)

a) isDemolishedb) structureNumberc) buildingType



d) buildingUsee) heightMaxf) heightUOMg) dateConstructedh) dateDemolishedi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) sdsFeatureNamem) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLFence (A freestanding structure designed to restrict or prevent movement across a boundary)

a) fenceIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) fenceMaterial c) fenceUsed) dateConstructede) gisFeatureCollectionMethodf) contractNumberg) designDrawingNumberh) sdsFeatureNamei) sdsFeatureDescription

143 CLJNCLUTILITIES



CLJNCLElecUtilNode_eExteriorLight (Exterior lighting is supplied by local distribution systems and is generally the only service for which the electric utility installs operates and maintains utilization equipment)

a) exteriorLightTypeb) electricalNodeTypec) operationalStatusd) isLEDe) cableCircuitNamef) hasSensorg) lightingFixtureHeighth) heightUOMi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_eSupportStructure (A structure that supports electric devices Examples include poles towers Hframes and push brace poles)

a) utilityFeatureTypeb) networkTypec) heightValue



d) heightUOMe) utilityOwnerf) operationalStatusg) cableCircuitName - List is available from CM or PMh) gisFeatureCollectionMethodi) contractNumberj) designDrawingNumberk) equipmentInstallationDatel) sdsFeatureNamem) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_sPretreatmentDevice (A wastewater pretreatment device is a piece of equipment that removes contaminants before they enter the waste stream ie OWS amp Trap etc)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) operationalStatusd) pretreatmentDeviceTypee) designCapacityf) designCapacityUOMg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sPumpStation (This is a collection of waste water Pump Station is a facility - this is used to show total capacity for the station)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) numberOfPumpse) totalDesignCapacityf) designCapacityUOMg) totalRatedFlowh) ratedFlowUOMi) operationalStatusj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sSCADASensor (The SCADA sensor is a feature that is used to remotely measure the status of network components)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatus



f) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sSepticTank (A wastewater septic tank is a small-scale anaerobic digester and leach field designed to treat wastewater from an individual facility and is not connected to the wastewater collection system)

a) utilityFeatureTypeb) networkTypec) storageTankProductd) tankLocatione) volumef) volumeUOMg) isContainedh) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemai) isRegulatedj) numberLateralsk) operationalStatusl) gisFeatureCollectionMethodm) contractNumbern) designDrawingNumbero) equipmentInstallationDatep) sdsFeatureNameq) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilityFeature_sUtilityArea (The sUtilityArea is an area of land surrounding a wastewater utility asset or an area of land specifically designated for wastewater utility use ie septic fields storm water basin Oil water separator etc)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) wastewaterUtilityAreaTyped) networkTypee) networkSubTypef) designCapacityg) designCapacityUOMh) operationalStatusi) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sFitting (The wastewater fitting class represents the joint between two lines)

a) wastewaterNodeTypeb) networkSubTypec) diameterd) diameterUOM



e) operationalStatusf) pipeMaterialg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sManhole (The wastewater fitting class represents the joint between two lines)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) operationalStatusd) numberOfPipese) pipeMaterialf) diameterg) diameterUOMh) rimElevationi) elevationUOMj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilityNode_sPump (A wastewater pump is a piece of equipment that adds energy to a fluid being conveyed through a pipe or other closed conduit)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) networkSubTypec) ratedFlowd) ratedFlowUOMe) operationalStatusf) pumpHorsepowerg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastewaterUtilitySegment (Wastewater Line - A pipeline for the transport of sewage or industrial waste between the source holding facilities andor treatment facilities)

a) wastewaterSegmentTypeb) networkSubTypec) pipeLocationd) utilityOwner (CLJN ONWASA)e) operationalStatusf) pipeMaterialg) isLinedh) isMarkedForLocating



i) diameterj) diameterUOMk) gisFeatureCollectionMethodl) contractNumberm) designDrawingNumbern) equipmentInstallationDateo) sdsFeatureNamep) downstreamInvertElevationq) upstreamInvertElevationr) elevationUOMs) slopet) slopeUOMu) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sCleanOut (A wastewater A clean out is an access point in a lateral used for maintenance purposes)

a) wastewaterNodeTypeb) pipeMaterialc) diameterd) diameterUOMe) operationalStatusf) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sSystemValve (A system valve is a facility that is fitted to a pipeline or orifice in which the closure member is either rotated or moved transversely or longitudinally in the waterway so as to control or stop the flow)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) networkSubTyped) wastewaterValveMateriale) diameterf) diameterUOMg) operationalStatush) wastewaterValveTypei) gisFeatureCollectionMethodj) contractNumberk) designDrawingNumberl) equipmentInstallationDatem) sdsFeatureNamen) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLWastUtilNode_sTreatmentPlant (A facility designed to treat wastewater using physical chemical andor biological processes prior to discharge into receiving waters)

a) wastewaterUtilityNodeIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) wastewaterNodeTypec) designCapacityd) designCapacityUOM



e) operationalStatusf) buildingIDFKg) gisFeatureCollectionMethodh) contractNumberi) designDrawingNumberj) equipmentInstallationDatek) sdsFeatureNamel) sdsFeatureDescription

144 CLJNCLUTILITIES_RESTRICTED



CLJNCLElectricalUtilityNode_eSwitch (Electrical Switches are installed at strategic locations throughout distribution feeder circuits)

a) normalPositionb) operationalStatusc) electricalSwitchTyped) electricalSwitchInstallatione) cableCircuitNamef) numberOfPhasesg) numberOfSwitchesh) voltagei) utilityOwnerj) gisFeatureCollectionMethodk) contractNumberl) designDrawingNumberm) equipmentInstallationDaten) sdsFeatureNameo) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLElectricalUtilitySegment (A subdivision of an electrical distribution network particularly a line for the transmission of electricity)

a) electricalSegmentTypeb) electricCableMaterialc) pipeLocationd) voltagee) utilityOwnerf) operationalStatusg) electricalCableClassh) electricCableMaterialSubtypei) insulationMaterialj) conductSizek) neutralSizel) numberOfConductm) numberOfNeutraln) numberOfPhaseso) cableCircuitName - List is available from CM or PMp) gisFeatureCollectionMethodq) contractNumberr) designDrawingNumber



s) equipmentInstallationDatet) sdsFeatureNameu) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_eUndergroundStructure (UndergroundStructure is a simple junction feature that includes vaults and manholes that house and protect electrical equipment)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK (Structure Number)b) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatusf) electricalJunctionType (manhole Junction Box Handhole etc)g) diameterh) diameterUOMi) numberOfCablesj) rimElevationk) rimElevationUOMl) cableCircuitName List is available from CM or PMm) gisFeatureCollectionMethodn) contractNumbero) designDrawingNumberp) equipmentInstallationDateq) sdsFeatureNamer) sdsFeatureDescription

CLJNCLUtilFeat_oPumpingFacility (A structure typically a building containing pumps filters and controls as part of a larger fuel handling system)

a) utilityFeatureIDPK - Structure ID until Field is created in schemab) utilityFeatureTypec) networkTyped) networkSubTypee) operationalStatusf) gisFeatureCollectionMethodg) contractNumberh) designDrawingNumberi) equipmentInstallationDatej) sdsFeatureNamek) sdsFeatureDescription

145 Non-Compliance

Failure to follow the specification outlined in this document will result in non-acceptance of data deliverable

Note Geospatial data delivery does not replace record drawing requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 145 (1991 R 2012) Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes

AASHTO T 180 (2015) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 454-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in) Drop


ASSESAFE A106 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations



US FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

FAA AC 707460-1 (2015 Rev L) Obstruction Marking and Lighting


40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

12 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

121 Demolition Plan

Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged coordination with other work in progress and a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations Identify components and materials to be salvaged for reuse or recycling with reference to paragraph Existing Facilities to be Removed Append tracking forms for all removed materials



indicating type quantities condition destination and end use Coordinate with Waste Management Plan Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning


Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer The work of this section is to be performed in a manner that maximizes the value derived from the salvage and recycling of materials Remove rubbish and debris from the project site do not allow accumulations inside the work area The work includes demolition salvage of identified items and materials and removal of resulting rubbish and debris Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily unless otherwise directed Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer In the interest of occupational safety and health perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 23 Demolition and other applicable Sections

13 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE

Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place to be reused or to remain the property of the Government Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated Construct and maintain shoring bracing and supports as required Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal or demolition work performed under this contract Do not overload structural elements or pavements to remain Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition deconstruction or removal work Repairs reinforcement or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work

131 Existing Construction Limits and Protection

Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas Remove dust dirt and debris from work areas daily

132 Utility Service

Maintain existing utilities - electrical power SCADA controlmonitor and water indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations Prior to start of work utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor

133 Facilities

Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities Where removal of existing utilities is specified or indicated provide approved barricades temporary covering of exposed areas and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities Floors roofs walls columns pilasters and other structural components that are



designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring and are determined to be in stable condition must remain standing without additional bracing shoring or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing shoring or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal or demolition work performed under this contract

14 BURNING

The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted Where burning is permitted adhere to federal state and local regulations

15 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS

Areas in which the work is to be accomplished will be available in accordance with the following schedule

Schedule

Area Date

French Creek WWTP Headworks and Adjacent Area as Shown by the Plans

To Coincide with Notice to Proceed

16 SUBMITTALS



Demolition Plan

Existing Conditions

SD-07 Certificates

Notification


Submit timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to Federal State regional and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M Notify the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M Comply with federal state and local hauling and disposal regulations In addition to the requirements of the Contract Clauses conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSESAFE A106 Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified Use of explosives will not be permitted

171 Dust and Debris Control

Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a



nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as but not limited to ice flooding or pollution

18 PROTECTION

181 Traffic Control Signs

a Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work use traffic barricades with flashing lights Notify the Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work

Provide a minimum of 2 FAA type L-810 steady burning red obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above ground level The use of LED based obstruction lights are not permitted For temporary structures (including cranes) over 200 ft above ground level provide obstruction lighting in accordance with FAA AC 707460-1 Light construction and installation shall comply with FAA AC 707460-1 Lights shall be operational during periods of reduced visibility darkness and as directed by the Contracting Officer Maintain the temporary services during the period of construction and remove only after permanent services have been installed and tested and are in operation


Before during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site No area section or component of floors roofs walls columns pilasters or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing shoring or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area

19 RELOCATIONS

Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items including the grit removal units as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved Repair or replace items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer

110 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before beginning any demolition work survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls finish floor elevations possible conflicting electrical conduits plumbing lines alarms systems the location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to starting work It is the Contractors responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work and to note these outages on the record document Submit survey results



PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FILL MATERIAL

a Comply with excavating backfilling and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill basements voids depressions or excavations resulting from demolition of structures

b Fill material shall conform to the definition of satisfactory soil material as defined in AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1 A-2-4 A-2-5 and A-3 In addition fill material shall be free from roots and other organic matter trash debris frozen materials and stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension

c Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved soil testing laboratory as follows

Soil classification AASHTO M 145

Moisture-density relations AASHTO T 180 Method B or D

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse Existing construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated set aside and prepared as specified and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse remanufacture recycling or other disposal as specified Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible

311 Utilities and Related Equipment


Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided Do not begin demolition work until all utility disconnections have been made Shut off and cap utilities for future use as indicated

312 Concrete

Unless specified otherwise s aw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work and the remaining concrete is sound At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete

313 Patching

Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent



finished surfaces using on-site materials when available Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish Patching shall be as specified and indicated and shall include

a Concrete and Masonry Completely fill holes and depressions caused by previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions

314 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect mechanical and electrical hardware at the nearest connection to existing services to remain unless otherwise noted Disconnect mechanical equipment and fixtures at fittings Remove service valves attached to the unit Remove existing mechanical bar screen in such a way as to facilitate installation of new equipment with minimum disassembly of of adjacent structures and equipment to remain in-servce Any disassembly and re-assembly of adjacent service catwalk andor conveyor shall require design drawing for re-assembly signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina The frame for each of the existing barscreen(s)is embedded in the concrete channel wall Prior to demolition the contractor shall submit an installation plan for the proposed equipment that adheres to requirements of the manufacturer for review and approval by the Contracting Officer The contractor shall not remove the mechanical bar screen without approval of the installation plan and permission from Contracting Officer

3141 Preparation for Temporary Storage

Remove water dirt dust and foreign matter from units Seal openings with caps plates or plugs Secure motors attached by flexible connections to the unit Change lubricating systems with the proper oil or grease Disconnect grit unit attachments to structures including foundation piers influent channel effluent channel wastewater pipes non-potable water pipes power or control coduitwire and other appurtenances Move the grit units to area convenient to the work that allows performance of modifications as shown by the drawings

315 Electrical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect primary secondary control communication and signal circuits at the point of attachment to their distribution system

3151 Electrical Devices

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of switches switchgear transformers conductors including wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable regulators meters instruments plates circuit breakers panelboards outlet boxes and similar items as shown by the drawings Box and tag these items for identification according to type and size

3152 Wiring Ducts or Troughs

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of wiring ducts or troughs as



shown by the drawings

3153 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items

Remove and re-install replace or dispose of conduit except where embedded in concrete or masonry as shown by the drawings

32 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

321 Title to Materials

Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections and for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property Title to materials resulting from demolition and materials and equipment to be removed is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractors demolition and removal procedures and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of or damage to such property after contract award Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited

322 Reuse of Materials and Equipment

Remove and store materials and equipment including the grit units indicated to be reused or relocated in a manner to prevent damage and reinstall as the work progresses

323 Salvaged Materials and Equipment

Remove materials and equipment that are indicated to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the Government and deliver to a storage site as directed by the Contracting Officer

a Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible

b Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the Contracting Officer and remove from Government property before completion of the contract On site sales of salvaged material is prohibited

c Remove salvaged items to remain the property of the Government in a manner to prevent damage and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage or during shipment Items damaged during removal or storage must be repaired or replaced to match existing items Properly identify the contents of containers Deliver the items reserved as property of the Government to the areas designated by the Contracting Officer

324 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material

Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable noncombustible material in the disposal area designated by the Contracting Officer

33 CLEANUP

Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or



adjacent areas Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal

34 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

341 Regulation of Removed Materials

Dispose of debris rubbish scrap and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal state and local regulations as contractually specified off the Government property Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited

342 Burning on Government Property

Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures will not be permitted on Government property

343 Removal from Government Property

Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures except waste soil from Government property for legal disposal Dispose of waste soil as directed

35 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS

Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before installation Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations or restore them as necessary to usable condition




SECTION 02 82 30

RE-ESTABLISHING VEGETATION

0312

PART 1 GENERAL


The work covered by this section consists of preparing seedbeds furnishing and placing limestone fertilizer and seed compacting seedbeds furnishing placing and securing mulch mowing and other operations necessary for the permanent establishment of grasses

Seeding and mulching shall be performed on all earth areas disturbed by construction The Contractor shall adapt his operations to variations in weather or soil conditions as necessary for the successful establishment and growth

The quantity of mowing to be performed will be affected by the actual conditions which occur during the construction of the project The quantity of mowing may be increased decreased or eliminated entirely at the direction of the Contracting Officer Such variations in quantity will not be considered as alterations in the details of construction or a change in the character of the work

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FERTILIZER

The quality of all fertilizer and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Fertilizer Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Agriculture in accordance with the provisions of said law in effect at the time of sampling Fertilizer shall be 10-10-10 Dry fertilizer shall have been manufactured from cured stock Liquid fertilizer shall be stored and cared for after manufacture in a manner that will prevent loss of plant food values

22 LIMESTONE

The quality of all limestone and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Lime Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Limestone shall be agricultural grade ground Dolomitic limestone All limestone shall contain not less than 90 percent calcium carbonate equivalents Dolomitic limestone shall contain not less than 10 percent of magnesium Dolomitic limestone shall be so graded that at least 90 percent will pass through a US Standard 20 mesh screen and at least 35 percent will pass through a US Standard 100 mesh screen

23 SOD

Sod shall consist of a live dense well rooted growth of centipede grass free from an excessive amount of restricted noxious weeds as defined by



the North Carolina Board of Agriculture The area from which sod is to be obtained shall have been mowed to a height of not less than 2 inches Sod shall be cut into rectangular sections of sizes convenient for handling without breaking or loss of soil It shall be cut with a sod cutter or other acceptable means to a depth that will retain in the sod practically all of the dense root system of the grass During wet weather the sod shall be allowed to dry sufficiently before lifting to prevent tearing during handling and placing and during extremely dry weather it shall be watered before lifting if such watering is necessary to insure its vitality and to prevent loss of soil during handling

24 MULCH FOR EROSION CONTROL

Mulch for erosion control shall consist of grain straw or other acceptable material and shall have been approved by the Contracting Officer before being used All mulch shall be reasonably free from mature seed bearing stalks roots or bulblets Material for holding mulch in place shall be asphalt or other approved binding material

25 SEED

The quality of all seed and all operations in connection with the furnishing of this material shall comply with the requirements of the North Carolina Seed Law and with the rules and regulations adopted by the North Carolina Board of Agriculture Seed shall have been approved by the North Carolina Department of Agriculture before being sown No seed will be accepted with a date of test more than 8 months prior to the date of sowing excluding the month in which the test was completed Seed mix by weight shall be as specified on the plans

26 MATTING FOR EROSION CONTROL

261 General

Matting for erosion control shall be or excelsior matting Other acceptable material manufactured especially for erosion control may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer in writing before being used Matting for erosion control shall not be dyed bleached or otherwise treated in a manner that will result in toxicity to vegetation

262 Erosion Control Matting

Matting shall consist of a machine produced mat of curled wood excelsior a minimum of 47 inches in width The mat shall weigh 16 pounds per square yard with a tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent At least 80 percent of the individual fibers shall be 6 inches or more in length The fibers shall be evenly distributed over the entire area of the blanket One side of the excelsior matting shall be covered with an extruded plastic mesh The mesh size for the plastic mesh shall be a maximum of 1 inch x 1 inch

263 Wire Staples

Staples shall be machine made of No 11 gage new steel wire formed into a U shape The size when formed shall be not less than 6 inches in length with a throat of not less than 1 inch in width

27 WATER

Water used in the planting or care of vegetation shall meet the requirements



of Class C fresh waters as defined in 15 NAC 2B0200

PART 3 EXECUTION


The work shall be performed immediately upon completion of earthwork areas No exception will be made to this requirement unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Contracting Officer Upon failure or neglect on the part of the Contractor to coordinate his grading with seeding and mulching operations and diligently pursue the control of erosion and siltation the Contracting Officer may suspend the Contractors operations until such time as the work is coordinated in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer

32 SEEDBED PREPARATION

The Contractor shall cut and satisfactorily dispose of weeds or other unacceptable growth on the areas to be seeded The soil shall then be scarified or otherwise loosened to a depth of not less than 3 inches except as otherwise provided below or otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer Clods shall be broken and the top 2 to 3 inches of soil shall be worked into an acceptable seedbed by the use of soil pulverizers drags or harrows or by other methods approved by the Contracting Officer All rock and debris 3 inches or larger shall be removed prior to the application of seed and fertilizer On cut slopes that are 21 and steeper both the depth of preparation and the degree of smoothness of the seedbed may be reduced as permitted by the Contracting Officer but in all cases the slope surface shall be scarified grooved trenched or punctured so as to provide pockets ridges or trenches in which the seeding materials can lodge On cut slopes that are either 21 or steeper the Contracting Officer may permit the preparation of a partial or complete seedbed during the initial grading of the slope If at the time of final sodding and mulching operations such initial preparation is still in a condition acceptable to the Contracting Officer additional seedbed preparation may be reduced or eliminated Seedbed preparation within 2 feet of the edge of any pavement shall be limited to a depth of 2 to 3 inches The preparation of seedbeds shall not be done when the soil is frozen extremely wet or when the Contracting Officer determines that it is an otherwise unfavorable working condition

33 LIMESTONE AND FERTILIZER

Limestone may be applied as a part of the seedbed preparation provided it is immediately worked into the soil If not so applied limestone and fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the prepared seedbed and then harrowed raked or otherwise thoroughly worked into the seedbed Apply fertilizer at the rate as specified on the plans Apply lime at the rate as speicified on the plans Application equipment for liquid fertilizer other than a hydraulic seeder shall be calibrated to ensure that the required rate of fertilizer is applied uniformly

34 SODDING

Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent breaking the sod sections and to prevent the sod from drying out Any sod that is torn broken or too dry will be rejected Torn or broken sod if kept moist may be used for filling unavoidable small gaps in sod cover as permitted by the Contracting Officer Sod shall be placed on the designated areas within 24



hours after being cut The area to be sodded shall be brought to a firm uniform surface The limestone and fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area The area shall be roughened by means of picks rakes or other approved means to a depth of not less than 2 inches without distorting the uniformity of the surface The finished surface shall be moistened with water prior to placing the sod Within 24 hours after soil preparation has been completed place the sod Each piece of sod shall be packed tightly against the edge of adjacent pieces so that the fewest possible gaps will be left between the pieces Unavoidable gaps shall be closed with small pieces of sod Sod shall be placed beginning at either the top or the toe of the slope Sod shall be placed with the long edge horizontal and with staggered vertical joints The edge of the sod shall be turned slightly into the ground at the top of a slope and a layer of earth placed over it and tamped as to conduct the surface water over and onto the top of the sod On all slopes 21 or steeper in drainage channels and on any areas that are in such condition that there is danger of sod slipping sod shall be stapled in place by driving staples flush with the sod Stapling shall be done concurrently with sod placement and prior to tamping Use wire staples per Section 263 The number of staples shall be sufficient to prevent slipping or displacement of the sod Staples shall be driven perpendicular to the slope Where backfill is necessary on cut slopes to obtain a uniform sodding area staples shall be of sufficient length to reach a minimum of 3 inches into the solid earth underneath the backfill Sod shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 32 degrees F Frozen sod shall not be used After sod has been placed and tamped it shall be carefully and thoroughly watered as required to maintain the sod in a healthy condition Watering shall be conducted until final acceptance Application of water may be made by the use of hydraulic seeding equipment farm type irrigation equipment or by other acceptable means

35 MULCHING

All seeded areas shall be mulched Grain straw or excelsior mat may be used as mulch at any time of the year Mulch shall be applied within 24 hours after completion of seeding unless otherwise permitted by the Contracting Officer Care shall be exercised to prevent displacement of soil or seed or other damage to the seeded area during the mulching operations Mulch shall be uniformly spread by hand or by approved mechanical spreaders or blowers which will provide an acceptable application An acceptable application will be that which will allow some sunlight to penetrate and air to circulate but also partially shade the ground reduce erosion and conserve soil moisture Mulch shall be held in place by applying a sufficient amount of asphalt or other approved binding material to assure that the mulch is properly held in place The rate and method of application of binding material shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer Where the binding material is not applied directly with the mulch it shall be applied immediately following the mulch application During the application of binding material adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to vehicles structures guardrails and devices Areas where seeding and mulching have been performed shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until final acceptance of the project Maintenance shall include mowing at the location and times directed by the Contracting Officer Areas of damage or failure due to any cause shall be corrected by being repaired or by being completely redone as may be directed by the Contracting Officer Excelsior matting shall be installed on all seeded slopes greater than 31 (hv) Install the matting per the manufacturers printed instructions



36 SEEDING

Seed shall be distributed uniformly over the seedbed at the rate as specified on the plans Seed shall be harrowed dragged raked or otherwise worked so as to cover the seed with a layer of soil The depth of covering shall be 14 inch When a hydraulic seeder is used for application of seed and fertilizer the seed shall not remain in water containing fertilizer for more than 30 minutes prior to application unless otherwise permitted by the Contracting Officer Immediately after seed has been properly covered the seedbed shall be compacted in the manner and degree approved by the Contracting Officer




SECTION 03 01 32

CONCRETE REHABILITATION FOR CIVIL WORKS1109

PART 1 GENERAL

11 RELATED SECTIONS

111 Formwork

Formwork shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 11 1300 10 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING Do not use form oil with epoxy or polymer-modified repair materials


Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

113 Field-Molded Sealants

Field-molded sealants shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

114 Compression Seals

Compression seals shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

115 Concrete

Unless otherwise specified concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

116 Disposal of Waste Materials

Dispose waste materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Dispose of waste water in accordance with 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

12 UNIT PRICES


1211 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with concrete removal which includes preparatory work removal of concrete and embedded items and disposal of debris Payment will be made at the contract price per cubic yard of concrete removed No payment will be made for concrete removal as such that is in connection with items for which payment is made as a lump sum

1212 Measurement

Concrete removal will be measured for payment based upon the actual volume



of concrete removed within the pay lines as indicated on the drawings Measurement will be made in accordance with paragraph MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES No measurement will be made of concrete removal outside the pay lines shown which is incidental to the indicated removal unless such removal is specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or for voids or embedded items that are either less than five cubic feet in volume or one square foot in cross section


Unit of measure cubic yards


1221 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with drilling holes and grouting dowels and anchors for anchoring new concrete and for repairs to existing concrete The price shall include the cost of furnishing all equipment labor and materials except dowels and anchors and all other incidental costs in connection with completing the item of work as shown and as specified Payment for dowels and anchors will be made as specified for dowels anchors and reinforcing steel bars

1222 Measurement

Measurement of drilling holes and grouting dowels and anchors will be made by the linear foot of hole actually drilled and grouted to the depth indicated Measurement will be made from the surface of the concrete after removal or surface preparation and will be made to the nearest inch No payment will be made for holes improperly drilled or grouted nor for repairs required due to damage caused by the drilling and grouting operations


Unit of measure linear feet

123 Dowels and Anchors

Measurement and payment for furnishing and placing dowels anchors and reinforcing steel bars for anchorage will be made as specified in Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

124 Concrete

Measurement and payment for cement-based concrete will be made as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

1241 Payment

Payment for polymer-modified concrete will be made at the respective contract unit prices per cubic yard These payments shall constitute full compensation for performing the work and shall include the cost of all labor equipment and tools materials and supplies required to complete the concrete work under this contract except steel reinforcement and embedded parts which are specified to be paid for separately No



measurement and payment will be made for concrete as such which is placed in structures for which payment is made as a lump sum No separate payment will be made for bonding coats or agents

1242 Measurement

Measurement of concrete will be made on the basis of the actual volume of concrete placed within the limits of work as indicated on the contract drawings Measurement of concrete placed against the sides of any excavation without the use of intervening forms will be made only within the pay lines of the structure shown on the contract drawings Measurement will be made in accordance with paragraph MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or space occupied by metal work electrical conduits or other materials nor for individual voids or embedded items which are either less than five cubic feet in volume or one square foot in cross section


Unit of measure cubic yard

125 Crack or Joint Sealing

Measurement and payment for crack or joint sealing including sawing or routing cracks or joints removing existing deteriorated sealants and joint materials surface preparation installing sealant and backup materials and cleanup upon completion of sealing will be made as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

126 Notch and Seal Crack Filling

1261 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with filling cracks with dry-pack mortar or polymer-modified mortar including preparing the cracks Payment for will be made at the contract price per cubic foot of material placed

1262 Measurement

Measurement of crack filling will be made on the basis of the actual volume of mortar placed and accepted within the limits of work as indicated on the contract drawings


Unit of measure cubic foot

127 Measurement Procedures


Remove concrete to the lines of removal indicated on the contract drawings A tolerance of plus or minus 12 inch will be allowed about the lines indicated Concrete removals that vary by more than the indicated tolerance will be acceptable unless evidence indicates that deteriorated concrete is still present or the variation in tolerance results in a violation of the requirements for material placement in



which case removal shall continue to the lines indicated Additional concrete removal beyond the allowable tolerance will be acceptable when deteriorated concrete is found as determined in accordance with paragraph Determination of Removal Limits and the limits of such removal are set and approved by the Contracting Officer Unauthorized concrete removals in excess of 1 inch beyond the lines shown will not be acceptable and repair of such excess area shall be performed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to the Government

1272 Measurement of Vertical Concrete Removal

Determine the volume of vertical concrete removal from cross sections made prior to and after removal Make cross sections from surveyed measurements at a minimum of 20 points unless otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer Take initial survey of the existing surface prior to removal and take final surveys on the same control stations Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified For areas of vertical concrete removal which are not readily accessible for survey determine the volume of concrete from the neat lines of concrete removal as shown on the contract drawings with the approval of the Contracting Officer Do not include any volume of concrete removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

1273 Measurement of Horizontal Concrete Removal

Determine volumes of horizontal concrete removal from cross sections made prior to and after removal Make cross sections from surveyed measurements at a minimum of 20 points unless otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer Take initial survey of the existing surface prior to removal and take final cross sections at the same control stations Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified Do not include any volume of concrete removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

1274 Measurements of Concrete

For areas that are readily accessible by a survey crew determine volumes by cross sections of the areas prior to and after concrete placement Take the initial and final cross sections at the same control stations used for concrete removal where possible Calculate volumes by the average-end-area method using the cross sections surveyed unless otherwise specified For areas of concrete placement which are not readily accessible for survey determine the volume of concrete from the neat lines of concrete placement as shown on the contract drawings Do not include any volume of concrete placed to compensate for removal made beyond the allowable tolerances specified

13 REFERENCES



AASHTO T 334 (2008 R 2016) Standard Method of Test for Estimating the Cracking Tendency of



Concrete



ACI 2111 (1991 R 2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Heavyweight and Mass Concrete


ACI 5484 (2011) Standard Specification for Latex-Modified Concrete (LMC) Overlays





ASTM A996A996M (2016) Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C1059C1059M (2013) Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete


ASTM C109C109M (2016a) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in or (50-mm) Cube Specimens)




ASTM C1438 (2013) Standard Specification for Latex



and Powder Polymer Modifiers for Hydraulic Cement Concrete and Mortar

ASTM C144 (2011) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C157C157M (2008 R 2014 E 2014) Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete


ASTM C192C192M (2016a) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory


ASTM C273C273M (2016) Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials




ASTM C469C469M (2014) Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poissons Ratio of Concrete in Compression


ASTM C596 (2009 E 2015) Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing Hydraulic Cement

ASTM C881C881M (2015) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

ASTM C937 (2016) Grout Fluidifier for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete

ASTM C940 (2016) Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory

ASTM D1623 (2009) Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics





CONCRETE SAWING AND DRILLING ASSOCIATION (CSDA)

CSDA-W-104 (June 1 1998 R 2007) Track Mounted Wall Sawing

POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)

PTI TAB1 (2006) Post-Tensioning Manual


COE CRD-C 164 (1992) Standard Test Method for Direct Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete or Mortar Specimens

COE CRD-C 39 (1981) Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Concrete

COE CRD-C 400 (1963) Requirements for Water for Use in Mixing or Curing Concrete



CID A-A-55614 (Basic Notice 2) Shield Expansion (Non-Drilling Expansion Anchors)

14 DEFINITIONS

141 Concrete

A mixture of binder material water and fine and coarse aggregate with or without admixtures

142 Mortar

A mixture of binder material water and fine aggregate with or without admixtures

143 Grout

A mixture of binder material and water with or without a filler

144 Cement-Based Material

A material consisting of portland cement andor other cementitious materials as a binder and aggregate As used in this specification cement-based materials do not include materials with polymer modifiers



145 Polymer-Modifier

A polymer used to modify the properties of a cement-based concrete or mortar The polymers commonly associated with concrete rehabilitation are styrene-butadiene and acrylic latex

146 Polymer-Modified Material

A combination of polymer portland cement andor other cementitious materials and fine andor coarse aggregate Polymer-modified concrete is normally placed to a thickness of 1 inch or greater Polymer-modified mortar is normally placed to a thickness of less than 1 inch


A two-component epoxy resin binder system in low and medium viscosities used by itself as a primer or for producing epoxy concrete or mortars when mixed with aggregate

148 Epoxy Concrete

A combination of epoxy resin and fine and coarse aggregate

149 Epoxy Mortar

A combination of epoxy resin a mineral filler and fine aggregate


A combination of epoxy resin binder a mineral filler and a thixotropic agent


A low viscosity epoxy resin system pumped under pressure into cracks

1412 Rapid-Hardening Repair Material

A combination of rapid-setting cement and aggregate(s) that can develop sufficient compressive strength at an early age to permit intended use

1413 Non-Structural Cracks

Cracks that do not affect the load-carrying capacity of the structure

1414 Structural Cracks

Cracks that affect the load-carrying capacity of the structure



Submit manufacturers literature from suppliers that demonstrates compliance with applicable specifications for the above materials For proportioned materials submit three copies of the proposed mix design prior to placement The mix design shall indicate the weight of each ingredient of the mixture No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the proposed mix design No deviation from the approved job-mix



formula will be permitted without prior approval

a Concrete Design the concrete mixtures in accordance with Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

b Grout Design the grout mixtures to produce material having an average compressive strength of 8000 psi at 28 days of age determined in conformance with ASTM C109C109M Design the mixtures to secure an air content by volume of 5 percent plus or minus 1-12 percent based on measurements made on concrete at the point of placement in conformance with ASTM C231C231M The range of slump shall be 12 to 2 inches when tested in accordance with ASTM C143C143M except that maximum slump may be increased to 4 inches when the Contractor has included an approved water-reducing high range admixture conforming to ASTM C494C494M in the mix design To minimize drying shrinkage the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio by weight shall be 045 and the maximum cement content shall be kept to a minimum to limit water volume Make mix design studies and tests in accordance with ASTM C39C39M and ASTM C192C192M and submit the test results for approval

d Repair Materials Provide the services of a technical specialist experienced in using the polymer for repair materials

152 Repair Material Performance Requirements

Place repair materials to the lines indicated on the drawings Construction tolerances for concrete and mortar repair materials shall meet the requirements of ACI 117 Design repair materials to conform to the following requirements at 28 days unless otherwise indicated

Physical Properties of Cement-Based Repair materials

Property Test method Criteria

Tensile Strength (28 days) COE CRD-C 164 400 psi (minimum)

Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C469C469M 3500000 psi (maximum)


COE CRD-C 39 67 millionthsdegree F(maximum)

Drying Shrinkage ASTM C157C157M (modified)

(28 days) 400 millionths (maximum)

(1 year) 1000 millionths (maximum)

Restrained Shrinkage Cracking Implied strain at 1 year

AASHTO T 334 No cracks within 14 days1000 millionths (maximum)

Notes on Table

a ASTM C157C157M (modified) The modifications to the test method for this requirement are as follows

(1) Standard specimen size is 3x3x11-14 inch for concrete mortar expanded with aggregate and mortar



(2) Remove sample from mold at 23 plus or minus 12 hours and make initial comparator reading immediately (For rapid hardening materials remove sample from mold at 3 hours and make initial comparator reading)

(3) The specimens are then stored under the standard conditions at 734 plus or minus 3 degrees F and 50 plus or minus 4 percent RH

Subsequent comparator readings are to be taken at ages of 3 days 7 days 14 days 1 month 2 months measurements shall continue until 90 percent of ultimate drying shrinkage is reached Ultimate shrinkage is to be determined as described in ASTM C596

153 Sequencing and Scheduling

Unless otherwise specified perform the work in such sequence that new work does not damage previously completed work Do not perform concrete removal and other operations which cause vibrations within 50 feet of repair materials that have cured less than 24 hours Perform the work as shown in the following SCHEDULE

SCHEDULE

Concrete Removal Methods

Removal Method

Feature A B C D E F G H I J K

Horizontal Surface X X X X X X X X

Vertical Surface X X X X X X X X X X

Slab-On-Grade X X X X X

A Controlled Blasting

B Abrasive Water Jet Cutting

C Diamond Blade Cutting

D Diamond Wire Cutting

E Stitch Cutting

F Boom Mounted Breaker

G Hand Held Breaker

H Hydromilling

I Rotary Head Milling

J Presplitting (Expansive Agent)

K Mechanical Presplitting



Repair Material

Repair Material

Feature A B C D E F G H I

Horizontal Surfaces (repair)

X X X X X

Horizontal Surfaces (Overlay)

X X X X

Vertical Surfaces (repair) X X X X X X X X

Vertical Surfaces (Refacing)

X X X X X X

A Cement-Based Concrete

B Cement-Based Mortar

C Precast Portland Cement Concrete

D Polymer-Modified Mortar

E Polymer-Modified Concrete

F Epoxy Mortar

G Epoxy Concrete

H Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete

I Shotcrete

Crack Repair

Repair Method


Open Crack on Surface X X

Structural Crack (Inactive) X X X X

Structural Crack (Active) X X



Crack Repair

Repair Method


A Clean and Seal

B Clean and Fill

C Drill and Plug

D Injection

E Stitching

F Mechanical Anchoring

16 SUBMITTALS



Work PlanDemolition and Removal PlanWater Control PlanContractor QualificationsWorker QualificationsBlasting Personnel Qualifications

SD-03 Product Data

Rapid-Hardening Repair MaterialPolymer ModifierPolyurethane Injection AdhesivePolyester Resin GroutEpoxy Resin MaterialsBond BreakerMechanical AnchorsHigh Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) SealerTesting Technicians

SD-04 Samples

Field-Molded Sealants and Primer

SD-05 Design Data

Repair Material Mixture Proportioning

SD-06 Test Reports

Compression Seals and LubricantCement-Based Concrete



Cement-Based MortarDry-Pack MortarPolymer-Modified ConcretePolymer-Modified MortarSieve Analysis Test for AggregateEpoxy Resin Binder TestsEpoxy Resin Grout Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Grout FluidifierAggregate


Polymer-Modified MortarPolymer-Modified ConcretePolymer ModifierEpoxy ConcreteEpoxy MortarEpoxy GroutEpoxy Injection AdhesiveRapid-Hardening Repair MaterialPolyurethane Injection AdhesiveHigh Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) SealerManufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets


Perform all work in accordance with EM 385-1-1 To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials conform to the applicable manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local regulation Submit the MSDS for epoxies polyurethanes and other potentially hazardous materials

171 Qualifications

The submittals shall where applicable identify individuals who will be working on this contract and their relevant experience Do not make changes in approved personnel without prior approval of the Contracting Officer

1711 Contractor Qualifications

The Contractor performing the repair work shall have been involved in a minimum of three (3) concrete repair projects similar in size and scope to this project for at least five (5) years Submit information including name dollar value date and point-of-contact for similar projects which demonstrates the required experience andor training

1712 Worker Qualifications

Each worker engaged in the use of specialized removal or application equipment including saw operators epoxy injection process shall have satisfactorily completed an instruction program in the operation of the equipment Each worker engaged in the operation of specialized equipment for the contract work shall have a minimum of three years of experience in the operation of the equipment



1713 Quality Control Personnel Qualifications

The individuals who sample and test concrete as required in this specification shall have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I Submit resumes pertinent information past experience training and education of all operators of specialized demolition equipment if needed for this and the three paragraphs above


Perform all work in accordance with applicable Federal State and local safety health and environmental requirements and EM 385-1-1 The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all permits required by Federal State and local agencies for the performance of the work

173 Pre-Construction Conference

Arrange a pre-construction conference for the repair materials to ensure that the Contractors personnel understand all aspects of the repair material its properties and application procedures The conference shall include the Contracting Officer or authorized representative the Contractor and a competent Technical Representative of the material manufacturer The Technical Representative shall be fully qualified to perform the work

174 Repair Material Mixture Proportioning

Submit at least 15 days before work commences a repair material mixture proportioning for each use of polymer-modified concrete Test reports and test results shall accompany the mixture proportions Identify the proposed source of the materials and state the proportions of each constituent When determining the mixture design use samples of materials to be used on the job

a Trial batches Trial batches and testing requirements for various repair materials specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor The laboratory performing the tests shall be on site and shall conform to ASTM C1077 Samples of aggregates shall be obtained in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D75D75M Samples of materials other than aggregate shall be representative of those proposed for the project and shall be accompanied by the manufacturers test reports indicating compliance with applicable specified requirements Trial mixtures having proportions consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on methodology described in ACI 2111 which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for the work The maximum water-cementitious materials ratios required in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS RATIO will be converted to a weight ratio of water to cementitious materials

b Supporting criteria Include in the submittal the following data for each trial batch

(1) Proportions by weight

(2) Unit weights and specific gravities of constituents



(3) Batch weights

(4) Compressive strengths in accordance with the following

Material Specimen Size Test

Concrete 6 by 12 inch cylinders ASTM C39C39M

Mortar 3 by 6 inch cylinders ASTM C39C39M

Grout 2 inch cube ASTM C109C109M

(5) Curing time

(6) Working time (polymer-modified materials)

(7) Slump

(8) Air content

175 Test Reports



a Viscosity

b Consistency

c Gel time

d Absorption

e Shrinkage

f Thermal compatibility

1752 Epoxy Resin Grout


a Epoxy number

b Consistency

c Compressive single shear strength

d Pot life

1753 Cement-Based Concrete and Cement-Based Mortar


a Initial Slump

b Slump over Time



c Air Content

d Compressive Strength at 7 28 56 days

e Water to cementitious materials ratio

f Tensile Strength

g Flexural Strength



a Tensile Strength (28 days)

b Modulus of Elasticity

c Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

d Drying Shrinkage

e Restrained Shrinkage

f Cracking

g Implied strain at 1 year

176 Field Samples

Prepare a work plan describing the methods of concrete removal and repair including methods equipment and materials to be used for each feature Submit the work plan for approval at least 30 days prior to the start of the work The plan shall include but shall not be limited to repair materials to be used with specific information on products andor constituents and requirements for handling storage etc equipment to be used surface preparation and requirements for placement finishing curing and protection specific to the materials used The work plan shall include a description of field demonstrations Do not commence work until the work plan and field demonstration representative of the type of work are approved


Prior to commencement of production concrete removal perform a test break on an area of sufficient size to demonstrate that the proposed removal procedure will result in compliance with the specified requirements The test break shall verify suitability of the equipment to remove the existing materials

1762 Joint and Crack Sealing

Prepare and seal a test section consisting of approximately 2 feet at a location determined by the Contracting Officer to demonstrate the preparatory and application procedures prior to beginning production sealing Additional test sections may be required by the Contracting Officer Remove any material that does not comply with the contract requirements and replace at no additional cost to the Government Test



sections that comply with the contract requirements may remain in place and will be included payment for the work Use the same procedures and materials as used in the successful test section for production work The test section may be incorporated in the final work if accepted by the Contracting Officer

1763 Sample Repair Panels

Construct field test panels prior to beginning of work using the repair materials and procedures proposed for use on the job to demonstrate the results to be attained The panel shall contain reinforcing steel and embedded items as the production work The quality and appearance of each panel are subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer and if not judged satisfactory construct additional panels until approval is attained Formed and finished surfaces in the completed structure must match the quality and appearance of the approved sample repair panel For wall refacing construct a minimum of one sample panel at least 4 feet by 5 feet and the same thickness as the production panel to demonstrate each type of formed and unformed finish required Each panel must include a full length and full width joint line


181 Packing Shipping Handling and Unloading

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage unload and store with a minimum of handling Deliver resin components and aggregate materials in original sealed containers where applicable

182 Epoxy-Resin Materials

Deliver epoxy-resin materials to the site in such manner as to avoid damage or loss Do not allow epoxy-resin materials to freeze Storage areas shall be in a windowless and weatherproof but ventilated insulated noncombustible building with provision nearby for conditioning the material to 70 degrees F to 85 degrees F for a period of 48 hours prior to use Store epoxy resin components and aggregate materials in dry covered areas at temperatures below 90 degrees F Remove unused mixed materials that have reached end of working or pot life from the job site Use epoxy-resin materials before the expiration date marked on the packaging


Storage areas shall be in a windowless and weatherproof but ventilated insulated noncombustible building Store polymer materials at temperatures between 40 degrees F to 85 degrees F Do not allow polymer materials to freeze


Protect chemical admixtures and store and maintain between 40 degrees F to 90 degrees F Remove from the site any admixtures subjected to temperatures outside this range or stored for longer than recommended by the manufacturer Do not use any admixture that has been in storage for longer than recommended by the manufacturer or that has been subjected to freezing in the work Remove such materials from the site



185 Waste Management and Disposal

Prepare a water control plan to describe methods and equipment to be used for controlling collection treatment and disposal of wastewater from drilling sawing and other concrete removal operations at least 15 days prior to performance of any operations that produce wastewater The plan shall include copies of required permits or other evidence of compliance with applicable Federal State and local laws and regulations Unless otherwise specified do not permit concrete and other debris to drop into the water or wastewater in Plant Collect concrete andor debris and retain near to its point of removal Submit the demolition and removal plan describing the method of debris control and removal and the procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the demolition and removal work The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work including procedures and methods to provide necessary supports lateral bracing and shoring when required careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged protection of property which is to remain undisturbed coordination with other work in progress and timely disconnection of utility services The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operations in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Where applicable the plan shall include drilling patterns and means of controlling crack propagation The work plan shall also include an access plan for personnel and method of controlling collecting and removing debris The method of debris control and removal shall be approved by the Contracting Officer Dispose of debris in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT Remove all concrete which falls into the water wastewater at no additional cost to the Government Do not permit waste water from surface preparation cleaning drilling and cutting operations to directly enter the Plants water wastewater Collect wastewater and treat in accordance with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS


191 Environmental Requirements

Do not place repair materials when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of the finished product Do not place cement-based repair materials when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F in the shade When air temperature is likely to exceed 90 degrees F the cement-based repair material shall have a temperature not exceeding 90 degrees F when deposited and the surface of such placed cement-based repair material shall be kept damp with a water fog until the approved curing medium is applied Do not place polymer-modified repair materials when the air temperature is below 45 degrees F or above 85 degrees F unless approved by the polymer manufacturer Do not place sealant in joints or cracks when the temperature is below 50 degrees F Placement restrictions for other materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturers published literature Halt work when weather conditions are potentially detrimental to the quality of repairing or bonding concrete Apply epoxy resin materials only when the contact surfaces are completely dry and if the ambient and surface temperature ranges are suitable for the specified epoxy material Follow manufacturers instructions for weather conditions and temperature ranges



192 Existing Conditions

1921 Embedded Materials

The contract drawings and reference drawings do not constitute a complete description of all metal parts and other materials that may be encountered but represent the best information available to the Government Other items or different locations for items shown may exist Exercise care to avoid drilling through functional embedded items intended to remain in service The Contractors selection of equipment and methods shall consider the presence of such materials and the Government will not be responsible in any way for the effect of such items on the Contractors equipment or progress Where indicated remove existing metal items to the limits noted on drawings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Cement-Based Materials

Cementitious materials shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS

212 Admixtures

Admixtures to be used when required or permitted shall conform to the appropriate specification listed Admixtures shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Grout Fluidifier shall conform to ASTM C937 submit manufacturers certifications in lieu of laboratory test results for proposed materials Certificates should certify compliance with the appropriate specification referenced herein Do not place materials without prior approval from the Contracting Officer

213 Aggregate

Aggregates shall meet the quality and grading requirements of ASTM C33C33M Class Designations 4M or better or state highway department specification and the following specific requirements For material passing No 200 sieve provide a non-plastic material composed of a minimum of 75 percent limestone dust talc or silica inert filler Provide dry aggregate

a For epoxy concrete ASTM C33C33M maximum size 38 inch

b For epoxy mortar ASTM C144

c For dry-pack mortar ASTM C144 maximum size No 16 sieve

d For polymer-modified concrete ASTM C33C33M Size No 8

214 Water

Water for cleaning mixing and curing shall be fresh clean potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali except that non-potable water may be used if it meets the requirements of COE CRD-C 400




2151 Polymer Modifier for Concrete or Mortar

ASTM C1438 Type II

2152 Polyurethane Injection Adhesive

Two part system composed of polyurethane resin and water Polyurethane resin shall be 100 percent hydrophilic resin capable of forming either a flexible closed-cell foam or cured gel when mixed with water When mixed with water the resin shall meet the following requirements

Performance Criteria Properties of the Cured Polyurethane Injection Grout

Property Test Method Criteria

Tensile Strength ASTM D1623 20 psi (minimum)

Elongation ASTM D1623 400 percent (minimum)

Bond to Concrete (wet) ASTM C273C273M 20 psi (minimum)

2153 Latex Bonding Compound

Latex bonding compound agents for bonding fresh to hardened concrete shall conform to ASTM C1059C1059M Type II

216 Epoxy Resin Materials

Epoxy compounds for repairs shall be moisture insensitive

2161 Epoxy Resin Binder for Concrete and Mortar

ASTM C881C881M Type III Grade and Class as required by application


ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 2 with or without mineral filler For setting anchors and dowels use Type III Grade 2 or 3 with mineral filler


ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 1 without filler

2164 Crack Surface Sealer for Injection Grouting

ASTM C881C881M Type IV Grade 3 with mineral filler

2165 Epoxy Bonding Agent

ASTM C881C881M Type II or V Type II material for non-loadbearing applications Type V material for load bearing applications



217 Field-Molded Sealants and Primer

Sealants and primers shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

218 Compression Seals and Lubricant

Compression seals shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

219 Anchors


2110 Dowels


2111 Anchor Head

Anchor head shall consist of steel bearing plate with nut Anchorage devices shall be capable of developing 95 percent of the guaranteed ultimate strength of prestressing steel The anchorage devices shall conform to the static strength requirements of Section 316 (1) and Section 318 (1) and (2) of PTI TAB1 Threaded anchorage items for epoxy coated bars shall be designed to fit over the epoxy coating and maintain the capacity of the prestressing steel

2112 Mechanical Anchors

CID A-A-55614 galvanized unless otherwise indicated Provide sleeve anchors of the length and diameter indicated Minimum concrete embedment shall be as shown Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E488E488M



22 EQUIPMENT

Assemble at the site of the work sufficient equipment that is dependable appropriate and adequate to accomplish the work specified Deliver the equipment a sufficient time before the start of repairs to permit thorough inspection calibration of weighing and measuring devices adjustment of parts and the making of any repairs that may be required Machines tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory condition at all times Maintain the equipment in good working condition Provide dust suppression on equipment as needed to comply with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

221 Cement-Based Concrete Mixing Equipment

Mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS



222 Polymer-Modified Concrete Mixing Equipment

Use proportioning and mixing equipment with capacity and continuous rate so that final finishing can be completed prior to the formation of a plastic film on the polymer-modified concrete surface The equipment shall consistently produce a uniformly blended mixture within the specified air content and slump limits The mixer shall also

a Be equipped with a recording meter with a ticket printout device to record an indication of the cement quantity being introduced into the mix The metering device shall be accurate within a tolerance of -1 to +3 percent

b Be equipped with a polymer metering device to indicate volume dispensed The metering device shall be accurate within a tolerance of -1 to +2 percent In addition the polymer tank shall have a stand pipe marked in gallons

c Be equipped with a water flow indicator and have a water flow control that is readily adjustable to provide for minor variations in aggregate moisture content The flow indicator shall be accurate within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 percent in the range of expected use

d Be equipped with a control to regulate the quantity of each of the polymer-modified concrete components to permit production of a mix having the specified composition To ensure that the mixer can accurately proportion and blend all components of the polymer-modified concrete on a continuous or intermittent basis the mixer shall be calibrated prior to the start of the overlay placement

223 Epoxy Mixing Equipment

Use a container recommended by the epoxy manufacturer as the mixing vessel Use a power drive (air or spark-proof) propeller type blade for mixing except that hand mixing may be used for small batches Use equipment specified by epoxy manufacturer for field mixing of aggregates and epoxy resin

224 Grout Mixing Equipment

Use a high-speed high-shear colloidal type grout mixer capable of continuous mechanical mixing that will produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout which is free of lumps and undispersed cement The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable water and admixture measuring devices calibrated to read in cubic feet and tenths and so designed that after each delivery the device can be conveniently set back to zero

225 Joint and Crack Sealing Equipment

Joint and crack sealing equipment shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03 15 0000 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

226 Drilling Equipment

Use percussion or rotary drilling equipment of a type suitable for the depth diameter and material to be drilled Use only rotary drilling equipment where vibration from percussion drilling could damage the concrete to remain or adjacent structures Use equipment capable of



maintaining the required alignment

227 Hydromilling Equipment

Use hydromilling equipment consisting of filtering and pumping units operating in conjunction with a remote-controlled robotic device or beam The equipment shall operate at a noise level of less than 90 decibels at a distance of 50 feet from the equipment The equipment shall produce a highly roughened bondable surface

228 Rotary Milling Equipment


Use milling equipment for horizontal surfaces consisting of a self-propelled unit with rotary cutter head with tungsten-carbide bits


Use rotary equipment consisting of a boom-mounted rotary cutter

23 ACCESSORIES

231 Stitching staples

ASTM A615A615M bar size as shown with legs bend for embedment as shown on the drawings

24 MIXTURE PROPORTIONING

241 Cement-Based Concrete

Mixes for cement-based concrete shall be in accordance with paragraph DESIGN REQUIREMENTS and the applicable provisions of Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Approved batch tickets shall be furnished for each load of ready-mixed concrete

242 Dry-Pack Mortar

Prepare mortar consisting of one part portland cement three parts fine sand which passes a No 16 sieve and only enough water so the mortar will stick together in a ball when molded by hand The water-cementitious materials ratio shall not be greater than 045 by weight Let mortar set 12 hour prior to placing

243 Polymer-Modified Mortar

Polymer-modified mortar shall consist of portland cement fine aggregate water and polymer Proportion mortar in accordance with polymer manufacturers recommendations Cured mortar shall comply with the requirements of paragraph REPAIR MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


Polymer-modified concrete shall consist of portland cement fine and coarse aggregate water and polymer Proportion concrete in accordance with polymer manufacturers recommendations Cured concrete shall comply with the requirements of paragraph REPAIR MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Polymer-modified concrete for overlays shall conform to



ACI 5484

245 Ultra-fine Cement Grout

Proportion the ultra-fine cement grout to eliminate shrinkage The watercement ratio shall be by volume and shall not exceed manufacturer recommendations for the required strength Proportion the grout to limit bleed water The final bleeding in accordance with ASTM C940 shall be less than 2 percent The expansion in accordance with ASTM C940 shall be 0 to 5 percent Mix the ultra-fine cement using a high shear colloidal mixer

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION

311 Protection of Existing Features

Before beginning any concrete removal work carefully survey the structure and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work Take all necessary precautions to insure against damage to existing concrete or other structures to remain in place and repair or replace any damage to such items as approved by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government Carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work and construct and maintain shoring bracing and supports as required Insure that structural elements are not overloaded and increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any removal work performed under any part of this contract


Insure that adequate measures are in place to protect workers facility operation personnel and the public from injury due to the operations being performed Provide protective measures in accordance with EM 385-1-1

32 REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE

321 General

Prepare a demolition plan describing the methods and equipment to be used to remove existing concrete Remove the existing concrete in the area to be repaired to the minimum depth indicated and to such additional depth where necessary to expose a surface of sound unweathered concrete that is uncontaminated by oils greases or deicing salts or solutions The actual depth of removal shall be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer Remove concrete with care to avoid damage to adjacent structures and concrete that is not to be repaired under this contract and embedded metal that is not to be removed Repair any such damage at no additional cost to the Government Mark on the surface the limits of concrete removal for approval by the Contracting Officer prior to any removal Do not remove metal and other embedded items exposed during the concrete removal operations without authorization of the Contracting Officer Unless otherwise indicated continue removal using appropriate equipment to remove unsound concrete and to eliminate any offsets in the area to be repaired which would cause an abrupt change in thickness of the repair and to remove protrusions between holes Variations in the final prepared surface shall not exceed the nominal maximum size aggregate of the repair material except for relatively thin repairs in which case the variation



shall not exceed 25 percent of the repair thickness Any removal beyond the limits shown on the drawings shall be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to performing the additional removal All equipment and removal methods shall comply with applicable sections of EM 385-1-1

3211 Determination of Removal Limits

Approximate locations and areas of repairs are indicated on the drawings Determine actual locations and limits of deteriorated concrete by visual inspection and by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and listening for dull or hollow sounds On horizontal surfaces a chain drag may be used in lieu of the hammer or rod Perform sounding in the presence of the Contracting Officer or authorized representative Mark areas where sounding does not produce a solid tone with highly visible paint After the investigation process is completed the Contracting Officer will inspect the areas marked by the Contractor to confirm andor adjust the limits of removal Do not remove concrete from these areas until the Contracting Officer or authorized representative approves the areas Upon completion of removal sound the surface and remove additional concrete until testing produces a solid tone Additional removal of concrete within these areas will be measured for payment as specified

3212 Perimeter Saw Cut

Make a perpendicular saw cut at least 1 inches deep but no deeper than the reinforcing steel a minimum of 1 inch outside of the area to be repaired to delineate the perimeter of the repair area and avoid feather edges The perimeter saw cut shall have no angles less than 90 degrees Exercised care not to cut through existing steel reinforcement or embedded metal that is not to be removed Omit saw-cutting where prohibited by existing metal or other items which are not to be removed Perform sawing in accordance with CSDA-W-104 except as specified herein Edges of repaired areas which are not mechanically anchored shall be dove-tailed Where concrete is being removed from a vertical face by controlled blasting mechanical presplitting or expansive agents sawcut the bottom limit of the removal area to the full depth of the removal

3213 Preliminary Surface Cleaning

Clean concrete surfaces that are contaminated with oil grease or dirt prior to beginning concrete removal in the area Use detergents proprietary cleaners formulated for removal of contaminants from concrete or steam cleaning in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions Do not use solvents for removal of oil or grease All traces of cleaning agents and contaminants shall be removed from the surface


Following the concrete removal operation inspect the condition of all exposed reinforcing bars designated to remain in place Remove and replace bars which are deteriorated at any point where the original cross section of any bar has been reduced by more than 50 percent Splice new replacement steel in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318 Secure to adjacent bars all reinforcing steel that is free to vibrate or otherwise move excessively Concrete reinforcement shall conform to Section 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING Where the bond between the concrete and any reinforcing steel has been destroyed or where the concrete deterioration is caused by corrosion of the reinforcing steel remove the



adjacent concrete to a depth that will permit cleaning of the steel and bonding of the concrete Provide a minimum clearance below the steel of 1 inch or 14 inch plus the maximum size of aggregate in the repair material which ever is greater clearance around the steel except where other reinforcing steel makes this impractical Use chipping hammers weighing less than 15 pounds abrasive water cutting or high-pressure water for removal of concrete around reinforcing steel Remove all corrosion from reinforcing steel by sandblasting

322 Cutting

3221 General

Use cutting to remove segments of concrete intact or to define the limits of removal by other methods

3222 Diamond-Blade Cutting

Use diamond-blade cutting for cutting through relatively thin sections and defining limits of removal to be performed by other methods Perform diamond blade cutting using equipment of the correct type and power and with appropriate blade composition for the material being cut Use a track system for maintaining the alignment of the saw for vertical cuts or where multiple cuts are required for deep cuts Provide supports as required to support the concrete to be removed Core drill corners of removal area or use corner saw to avoid overcutting

323 Impacting

Removal of concrete may be accomplished by use of impact-type power tools Take adequate precautions to prevent impact equipment from vibrating on reinforcing steel All demolition equipment shall be subject to approval of the Contracting Officer

3231 Hand-Held Breaker

Use hand-held breakers or chipping hammers for removal of concrete in small or restricted areas where the energy to be applied is limited to prevent damage to adjacent concrete structures or facilities which are not to be removed and to complete removal where other methods have been used

324 Milling

3241 Hydromilling

Remove concrete from vertical or horizontal surfaces by means of high pressure water applied though nozzles attached to a remotely-controlled device or beam Adjust water pressure and rate of movement as required to remove concrete to the required depth and avoid excessive removal Supplement hydromilling with abrasive water-jet high-pressure wand or other methods in areas not accessible to the hydromilling equipment Submit proposed hydromilling equipment and procedures to the Contracting Officer for review and approval before beginning work Remove slurry from the prepared surface before it hardens

3242 Rotary Head Milling

Use rotary head milling for uniform depth removal on horizontal or



vertical surfaces Use boom-mounted milling head for vertical surfaces When operating rotary head equipment from top of wall for removal from vertical surfaces provide communication between observer and operator to aid in control of removal

33 ANCHORING AND REINFORCING


Drill holes for dowels and anchors using drilling equipment suitable for the intended purpose as approved by the Contracting Officer Diameter of holes shall be as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer Clean holes by flushing with water and compressed air prior to placing grout Anchor dowels and anchors with epoxy grout Place grout and install dowels and anchors as recommended by the grout manufacturer Remove excess grout after the dowel or anchor has been set in place

332 Drilling and Installing Mechanical Anchors

Drill holes for anchors using drilling equipment suitable for the intended purpose as approved by the Contracting Officer Diameter of holes shall be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer Clean holes by flushing with water and compressed air prior to placing grout Install anchors and set anchors in place in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

333 Installing Reinforcement

Place reinforcement steel and accessories as specified and as shown on the contract drawings Placement details of steel and accessories not specified or shown on the drawings shall be in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318 or as directed by the Contracting Officer Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with 03 20 0000 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING

34 MIXING MATERIALS

Make batches small enough to ensure placement before binder sets Mix materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations


351 General

After removal of concrete to the specified limits clean the surface to which the repair material is to be applied to remove dust debris and laitance Perform final cleaning immediately prior to placement of the repair material Unless otherwise specified keep the existing concrete wet for a minimum of 12 hours and dried for 12 hours immediately prior to placing new concrete The surface shall be dry with no standing water on the surface upon which concrete is placed

352 Cleaning

Perform all cleaning operations to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer Protect adjacent structures and embedded items Use potable water for all cleaning operations Perform a preliminary washing as soon as the chipping and trimming are completed to remove loose materials and dust particles Clean surfaces to which new concrete is to be bonded in accordance with Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE



FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph CONSTRUCTION JOINT TREATMENT Final cleaning shall remove all laitance carbonation scum dirt oil grease and loose or disintegrated concrete Perform additional surface chipping to remove coarse aggregate that is undercut by cleaning process Perform such additional chipping as determined necessary by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government Wire brush or sandblast metal surfaces against which concrete is to be placed to remove rust and other contaminants which would prevent proper bond with the concrete Perform final cleaning immediately prior to concrete placement Protect all work from contamination during all phases of cleanup and preparation prior to repair

353 Waste Water Disposal

Dispose of waste water employed in cutting washing and rinsing of concrete surfaces in a manner such that the waste water does not stain discolor or affect exposed surfaces of the structures or damage the environment of the project area The method of disposal shall meet all requirements of Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

36 SURFACE REPAIRS

Place dowels and anchors as shown on the contract drawings

361 Epoxy Mortar

Prime surfaces with epoxy resin binder Scrub prime coat into surface with a stiff bristle brush Place epoxy mortar while primer is still tacky Apply at a thickness recommended by the manufacturer Work mortar into place and consolidate thoroughly so that contact surfaces are wetted by the mortar Finish surface of mortar to the required texture Do not feather edge epoxy mortar onto adjacent surfaces

362 Polymer-Modified Mortar or Concrete


Prime surfaces prepared to receive repair material using the manufacturers recommended bonding agent using a stiff bristle brush and in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Place polymer-modified concrete before the bonding agent dries and in layers not exceeding one inch thick for mortar and two inches thick for concrete Moist cure polymer-modified material for a minimum of 24 hours but not more than 48 hours and then air dry


For vertical surfaces that are troweled follow the procedure for horizontal surfaces For formed vertical surfaces follow the procedure for cement-based concrete for vertical surfaces Moist cure polymer-modified material for a minimum of 24 hours but not more than 48 hours and then air dry



37 CRACK REPAIR

371 Routing and Sealing

3711 Preparation

Clean cracks by saw cutting or routing to provide the proper profile for sealants After the crack is sawcut or routed clean the surfaces by sandblasting andor waterjetting Adjust the height angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to provide satisfactory results Provide protective covers and barriers as required to prevent over-spray onto adjacent surfaces Remove dust dirt and loosely bonded materials resulting from cleaning Ensure surfaces are dry before application of repair material Apply bond breaker to the bottom of the routed or sawed crack Where cracks extend through surfaces to be repaired make the repair first and then tool rout or saw the original line of the cracks into the repaired area

3712 Rate of Progress

Limit the stages of crack sealing which includes preparation and placement of bond breaker so only that length of crack that can be sealed during the same workday is prepared


Seal prepared cracks immediately following the cleaning and drying process Walls of the prepared crack shall be surface dry and the atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of the sealant Provide an approved temporary seal for open routed cracks that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified

3714 Sealing

Do not apply sealant until the prepared cracks have been inspected and approved Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a crack cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after crack has been filled and tooled Fill the cracks from the bottom up and tool the top surface as indicated or as recommended by the manufacturer Apply sealant as recommended by the manufacturer

3715 Preformed Compression Seals

Rout or cut the crack to the dimensions indicated Install the seals with equipment that is capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal and with no more than five percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the crack and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant and install the seal to the depth indicated with joint installation equipment Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant

38 CLEANING AND RESEALING JOINTS

381 Preparation of Joints

Immediately before the installation of the sealant thoroughly clean the



joints to remove all laitance loose or deteriorated filler and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the joint space to be sealed Clean joints to sufficient depth to remove all loose material and debris and to permit placement of the backup material and sealant as shown on the drawings Concrete surfaces shall be dry at the time of sealant application


Cut the in-place sealant and expansion joint material loose from both joint faces and to the minimum depth required to permit placement of the back-up material and sealant depth equal to one half the width of joint or as recommended by the sealant manufacturer unless otherwise shown on the drawings using the waterjetting equipment as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Removal may be efficiently accomplished using high pressure water jet with abrasive added Prior to further cleaning operations remove all loose old sealant remaining in the joint opening by blowing with compressed air Chipping spalling or otherwise damaging the concrete will not be permitted For compression seals sawcut the joint to the width and depth shown on the drawings

3812 Sandblasting and Waterjetting

Sandblast or waterjet clean the newly exposed concrete joint faces to at least the depth of the back-up material and sealant and the concrete surfaces extending a minimum of 12 inch from the joint edges Use a multiple-pass technique until the surfaces are free of dust dirt filler old sealant residue or any foreign debris that might prevent the bonding of the sealant to the concrete After final cleaning and immediately prior to sealing blow the joints out with compressed air to ensure that the joints are completely free of debris and water

3813 Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation

Limit the joint preparation which includes sandblasting or waterjetting air pressure cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal footage that can be sealed during the same day

382 Installation of Sealant

Store and apply the primer and sealant in accordance with the manufacturers written safety instructions and precautions and using manufacturer recommended procedures


Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint sidewalls and following the placement of the bond breaker and back-up material Reclean open joints that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified or when rain interrupts sealing operations and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant

3822 Back-Up Material and Bond Breaker

Plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation



3823 Sealing Joints

Perform a final cleaning with compressed air immediately preceding but not more than 50 feet ahead of the sealing operations The joint surfaces shall be dry at the time the sealant is installed Apply primer evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturers instructions before placement of the back-up material Place bond breaker material after the primer is applied Fill the joints from the bottom up to the surface of the concrete Depth of sealant shall be one-half the joint width or as recommended by the sealant manufacturer Commence sealing of joints at the bottom of the slope or wall and continue up the concrete slope or wall Remove excess or spilled sealant from the concrete surface by approved methods and discard Install the sealant using a gun cartridge in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air Do not install sealant material using gravity methods or pouring pots Check joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified Tool the sealant concave immediately after application

383 Installation of Preformed Compression Seals

Install the joint seals with equipment capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal and with no more than five percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the joint and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant and install the seal to the depth indicated with joint installation equipment Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant


391 General

The individuals who sample and test repair materials as required in this specification shall have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I

392 Preparations for Placing

Inspect prepared surfaces forms and embedded items in sufficient time prior to each placement of repair material to certify that the surfaces are ready to receive the repair material

393 Grouted Dowels and Anchors

Test the first three dowels or anchors of each type and a minimum of three dowels or anchors per 1000 dowels or anchors in accordance with ASTM E488E488M Use incremental loading for tensile test to 75 percent of the yield strength of the dowel or anchor Consider anchors to have failed if displacement exceeds 01 inch or if any of the failure modes of paragraph 122 occur

394 Epoxy Mortar

3941 Sampling

As soon as epoxy resin and aggregate materials are available for sampling obtain by random selection a sample of each batch Clearly identify



samples by designated name specification number batch number project contract number intended use and quantity involved

3942 Testing

At the discretion of the Contracting Officer samples provided may be tested by the Government for verification

3943 Inspection

Check each repaired area for cracks spalls popouts and loss of bond between repaired area and surrounding concrete Check each repaired area for voids by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and listening for dull or hollow sounds Immediately repair defects

395 Polymer-Modified Concrete and Mortar

3951 Air Content

Check air content at least once during each shift that concrete is placed for each type and class of repair material required Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172C172M and test in accordance with ASTM C231C231M

3952 Slump

Check slump once during each shift that concrete is produced for each type and class of repair material required Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172C172M and test in accordance with ASTM C143C143M

3953 Consolidation and Protection

Ensure that the repair material is properly consolidated finished protected and cured

3954 Compression Tests

Prepare compression test cubes in accordance with ASTM C31C31M and cure at the site under the same conditions as the repair Test in accordance with ASTM C109C109M

3955 Curing

a Moist-Curing Inspections - At least once each shift and once per day on nonwork days inspect all areas subject to moist curing Note and record the surface moisture condition

b Membrane-Curing Inspection - Do not apply curing compound until the Contractors authorized representative has verified that the compound is properly mixed and ready for spraying At the end of each operation estimate the quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area of repair material surface covered and compute the rate of coverage in square feetgallon Note whether or not coverage is uniform

c Sheet-Curing Inspection - At least once each shift and once per day on nonwork days inspect all areas being cured using material sheets Note and record the condition of the covering and the tightness of the laps and tapes



396 Aggregates

Test gradation in accordance with ASTM C136C136M and ASTM C117 Determine the percent passing the No 200 sieve by washing in accordance with ASTM C117

397 Action Required

3971 Placing

The placing foreman shall not permit placing to begin until he has verified that appropriate placement consolidation and finishing equipment which are in working order and have competent operators are available

3972 Grouted Anchors and Dowels

Test a minimum of two adjacent anchors or dowels for each anchor or dowel that fails

3973 Air Content

Whenever a test result is outside the specification limits do not deliver the concrete to the forms and adjust the dosage of the air-entrainment admixture

3974 Slump

Whenever a test result is outside the specification limits do not deliver the concrete to the forms and an adjustment should be made in the batch weights of water and fine aggregate The adjustments are to be made so that the water-cementitious materials ratio does not exceed that specified in the submitted concrete mixture proportion

3975 Curing

a Moist-Curing Corrective Action - When a daily inspection report lists an area of inadequate curing take immediate corrective action and extend the required curing period for such areas by one day

b Membrane-Curing Corrective Action - When the coverage rate of the curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not uniform spray the entire surface

c Sheet-Curing Corrective Action - When a daily inspection report lists any tears holes or laps or joints that are not completely closed promptly repair the tears and holes or replace the sheets close the joints and extend the required curing period for those areas by one day

398 Final Inspection

Following completion of the work inspect surfaces for damage staining and other distresses Inspect repairs for cracking crazing delamination unsoundness staining and other defects Inspect the finish and surface tolerances of the repairs to verify that all requirements have been met Repair all surfaces exhibiting defects as directed at no cost to the Government when defects are due to Contractor workmanship or procedures



399 Reports

Report the results of all tests and inspections conducted at the project site 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL Submit copies of test results within 24 hours of physical completion of laboratory testing Manufacturers certifications may be submitted rather than laboratory test results for proposed materials Certificates should certify compliance with the appropriate specification referenced herein Do not place materials without prior approval from the Contracting Officer


Provide the services of a manufacturers technical representative experienced in mixture proportioning and placement procedures for the following materials

a Epoxy mortar or concreteb Polymer-modified mortar or concreteb Epoxy injection groutd Concrete containing High-Range Water Reducers (HRWRA)e Concrete containing Silica Fume

Provide at no additional cost to the Government the services of the manufacturers experienced technical representative during mixture proportioning planning and production The manufacturers representative shall be available for consultation by both the Contractor and the Contracting officer during mixture proportioning planning and production of the materials and shall be on-site immediately prior to and during at least the first placement of the material and at other times if directed

310 CLEAN UP

Clean all surfaces of concrete and adjacent facilities which are stained by dirt oil grease fuel or other byproducts that are created by the construction operations with detergent and pressure wash Dispose of debris in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

311 DUST CONTROL

Control dust resulting from demolition to prevent the spread of dust and avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area Do not use water when it will result in or create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice flooding or pollution

312 PROTECTION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

Where shelter or other protective measures are provided for repair during inclement weather maintain such protective measures until the repair material has cured and discontinuance of the measures is authorized




SECTION 03 11 1300 10

STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES





ACI 347 (2004 Errata 2008 Errata 2012) Guide to Formwork for Concrete


ASTM C578 (2016) Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Formwork

Form Removal Schedule

SD-03 Product Data

Form Materials

SD-04 Samples

Sample Panels

Fiber Voids

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 1


Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

Fiber Voids


Provide Sample Panels of sufficient size to contain joints and not less than 6 feet long and 4 feet wide The panels shall be of typical wall thickness and constructed containing the full allocation of reinforcing steel that will be used in the structure with the forming system that duplicates in every detail the one that will be used in construction of the structure Use the same concrete mixture proportion and materials the same placement techniques and equipment and the same finishing techniques and timing that are planned for the structure Construction of a finish SF-30 will not be permitted until sample panels have been approved Protect sample panels from construction operations in a manner to protect approved finish and are not to be removed until all surface finish SF-30 concrete has been accepted After shop drawings have been reviewed submit sample panels for a surface finish SF-30 with applied architectural treatment build panels on the project site where directed


Store fiber voids above ground level in a dry location Keep fiber voids dry until installed and overlaid with concrete

PART 2 PRODUCTS


The design engineering and construction of the formwork is the responsibility of the Contractor Design formwork in accordance with methodology of ACI 347 for anticipated loads lateral pressures and stresses and capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration of concrete Comply with the tolerances specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS paragraph CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES However for surfaces with an ACI Class A surface designation limit the allowable deflection for facing material between studs for studs between walers and walers between bracing to 00025 times the span Design the formwork as a complete system with consideration given to the effects of cementitious materials and mixture additives such as fly ash cement type plasticizers accelerators retarders air entrainment and others Monitor the adequacy of formwork design and construction prior to and during concrete placement as part of the Contractors approved Quality Control Plan Submit design analysis and calculations for form design and methodology used in the design

22 FORM MATERIALS

Submit manufacturers data including literature describing form materials accessories and form releasing agents

221 Formwork

Comply with ACI 301 Section 2 Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view a surface finish SF-10 Provide for surfaces exposed to public view

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 2


a surface finish SF-30 Patch holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301 Submit form removal schedule indicating element and minimum length of time for form removal

222 Fiber Voids

Fiber voids must be the product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the commercial production of fiber voids Construct the voids of double faced corrugated fiberboard Fabricate the corrugated fiberboard of standard kraft paper liners impregnated with paraffin and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive with a board strength of 275 psi Voids which are impregnated with paraffin after construction in lieu of being constructed with paraffin impregnated fiberboard are acceptable Design voids to support not less than 1000 psf To prevent separation during concrete placement fiber voids assemble with steel or plastic banding at 4 feet on center maximum or by adequate stapling or gluing as recommended by the manufacturer Fiber voids placed under concrete slabs and that are 8 inches in depth may be heavy duty waffle box type constructed of paraffin impregnated corrugated fiberboard Submit one sample unit of fiber voids prior to installation of the voids and certificates attesting that fiber voids conform to the specified requirements

23 FIBER VOID RETAINERS

231 Polystyrene Rigid Insulation

Polystyrene rigid insulation must conform to ASTM C578 Type V VI or VII square edged Size 1-12 inches thick by 16 inches in height by 3 feet in length unless otherwise indicated

232 Precast Concrete

Precast concrete units must have a compressive strength of not less than 2500 psi reinforced with 6 inch by 6 inch by W14 WWF wire mesh and 12 inches (height) by 3 feet (length) by 1-58 inches (thickness) in size unless indicated

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

311 Formwork

Comply with ACI 301 Section 2 with surface tolerances in accordance with ACI 117

312 Fiber Voids

Place voids on a smooth firm dry bed of suitable material to avoid being displaced vertically and set tight with no buckled cartons in order that horizontal displacement cannot take place Seal the ends of each section of void by dipping in paraffin with any additional cutting of voids at the jobsite field dip in the same type of sealer unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with paraffin Prior to placing reinforcement cover the entire formed area for slabs with a 4 x 8 feet minimum flat sheets of fiber void corrugated fiberboard Seal joints with a moisture resistant tape having a minimum width of 3 inches If voids are destroyed or damaged and are not capable of supporting the design

SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 3


load replace prior to placing of concrete

313 Fiber Void Retainers

Install fiber void retainers continuously on both sides of fiber voids placed under grade beams in order to retain the cavity after the fiber voids biodegrade

32 INSPECTION

Inspect forms and embedded items in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete Report the results of each inspection in writing Submit field inspection reports for concrete forms and embedded items


SECTION 03 11 1300 10 Page 4


SECTION 03 15 0000 10

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C919 (2012) Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications




ASTM D2628 (1991 R 2011) Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements

ASTM D2835 (1989 R 2012) Lubricant for Installation of Preformed Compression Seals in Concrete Pavements



ASTM D5249 (2010 R 2016) Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold-and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints


COE CRD-C 513 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications for Rubber Waterstops

COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 1


for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Waterstops

SD-03 Product Data


Sealant

Waterstops

SD-04 Samples

Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals

Field-Molded Type

Waterstops

Splicing Waterstops

SD-07 Certificates


Sealant

Waterstops


Protect material delivered and placed in storage off the ground from moisture dirt and other contaminants Deliver sealants in the manufacturers original unopened containers Remove sealants from the site whose shelf life has expired

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

Use preformed expansion joint filler material conforming to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752 Type I or resin impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752 Submit certified manufacturers test reports for premolded expansion joint filler strips compression seals and lubricant and metallic waterstops to verify compliance with applicable specification Unless otherwise indicated filler material must be 38 inch thick and of a width applicable for the joint formed Backer material when required must conform to ASTM D5249

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 2


22 SEALANT

Joint sealant conforming to the following

221 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type

ASTM D2628

222 Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals

ASTM D2835 Submit a piece not less than 9 ft of 1 inch nominal width or wider seal or a piece not less than 12 ft of compression seal less than 1 inch nominal width Provide one quart of lubricant

223 Field-Molded Type

ASTM C920 Use Type M Grade P or NS Class 25 Use T sealant for horizontal joints Type M Grade NS Class 25 Use NT for vertical joints Use polyethylene tape coated paper metal foil or similar type materials as bond breaker The back-up material must be compressible non-shrink nonreactive with sealant and non-absorptive material type such as extruded butyl or polychloroprene rubber Submit 1 gallon of field-molded sealant and 1 quart of primer (when primer is recommended by the sealant manufacturer) identified to indicate manufacturer type of material quantity and shipment or lot represented

23 WATERSTOPS

Submit a sample of each material consisting of a piece not less than 12 inches long cut from each 200 feet of finished waterstop furnished but not less than a total of 4 linear feet of each type and size furnished For spliced segments of waterstops to be installed in the work furnish one spliced sample of each size and type for every 50 splices made in the factory and every 10 splices made at the job site for inspection and testing Make the spliced samples using straight run pieces with the splice located at the mid-length of the sample and finished as required for the installed waterstop the total length of each spliced sample not less than 12 inches Submit waterstop materials and splice samples for inspection and testing identified to indicate manufacturer type of material size and quantity of material and shipment represented Submit a shop drawing of the waterstops showing the placement and configuration

231 Non-Metallic Materials `

Manufacture non-metallic waterstops from a prime virgin resin reclaimed material is not acceptable The compound must contain plasticizers stabilizers and other additives to meet specified requirements Rubber waterstops conforming to COE CRD-C 513 Polyvinylchloride waterstops conforming to COE CRD-C 572 Thermoplastic elastomeric rubber waterstops conforming to ASTM D471 Submit a piece not less than 12 inch long cut from each 200 ft of finished waterstop furnished but not less than a total of 4 ft of each type size and lot furnished One splice sample of each size and type for every 50 splices made in the factory and every 10 splices made at the job site Make the splice samples using straight run pieces with the splice located at the mid-length of the sample and finished as required for the installed waterstop the total length of each splice not less than 12 inches long

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 3


232 Non-Metallic Hydrophilic

Swellable strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene rubber that swells upon contact with water conforming to ASTM D412 as follows Tensile strength 420 psi minimum ultimate elongation 600 percent minimum Hardness must be 50 minimum on the type A durometer and the volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 70 degrees F shall be 3 to 1 minimum


241 Splicing Waterstops

2411 Procedure and Performance Qualifications

Demonstrate procedure and performance qualifications for splicing waterstops in the presence of the Contracting Officer Submit procedures for splicing waterstops for approval

2412 Non-Metallic Waterstops

Demonstrate procedure and performance qualifications for splicing non-metallic waterstops by the manufacturer at the factory and the Contractor at the job site by each making three spliced samples of each size and type of finished waterstop

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Provide joint locations and details including materials and methods of installation of joint fillers and waterstops as specified and indicated In no case may any fixed metal be continuous through an expansion or contraction joint

311 Expansion Joints

Use preformed expansion joint filler in expansion and isolation joints in slabs around columns and between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where indicated Extend the filler to the full slab depth unless otherwise indicated neatly finish the edges of the joint with an edging tool of 18 inch radius except where a resilient floor surface will be applied Where the joint is to receive a sealant install the filler strips at the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered dressed and oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top to form a recess to the size shown on the drawings Remove the wood strip after the concrete has set Contractor may opt to use a removable expansion filler cap designed and fabricated for this purpose in lieu of the wood strip Thoroughly clean the groove of laitance curing compound foreign materials protrusions of hardened concrete and any dust If blowing out the groove use oil-free compressed air

312 Joint Sealant

Fill sawed contraction joints and expansion joints in slabs with joint sealant unless otherwise shown Joint surfaces must be clean dry and free of oil or other foreign material which would adversely affect the bond between sealant and concrete Apply joint sealant as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 4


3121 Joints With Preformed Compression Seals

Install compression seals with equipment capable of installing joint seals to the prescribed depth without cutting nicking twisting or otherwise distorting or damaging the seal or concrete and with no more than 5 percent stretching of the seal Cover the sides of the joint and if necessary the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant Coat butt joints with liberal applications of lubricant

3122 Joints With Field-Molded Sealant

Do not seal joints when the sealant material ambient air or concrete temperature is less than 40 degrees F When the sealants are meant to reduce the sound transmission characteristics of interior walls ceilings and floors follow the guidance provided in ASTM C919 Coat joints requiring a bond breaker with curing compound or with bituminous paint Install bond breaker and back-up material where required Prime joints and fill flush with joint sealant in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

32 WATERSTOPS INSTALLATION AND SPLICES

Install waterstops at the locations shown to form a continuous water-tight diaphragm Embed the bottom of each waterstop a minimum of 6 inches in firm rock or sealed to other cut-off systems Make adequate provision to support and completely protect the waterstops during the progress of the work Repair or replace any waterstop punctured or damaged Protect exposed waterstops during application of form release agents to avoid being coated Provide suitable guards to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of partially embedded waterstops from damage when concrete placement has been discontinued Accomplish splices with certified trained personnel using approved equipment and procedures

321 Non-Metallic

Fittings must be shop made using a machine specifically designed to mechanically weld the waterstop Use a miter guide proper fixturing (profile dependant) and portable power saw to miter cut the ends to be joined to ensure good alignment and contact between joined surfaces Splice straight lengths by squaring the ends to be joined Maintain continuity of the characteristic features of the cross section of the waterstop (for example ribs tabular center axis protrusions) across the splice

3211 Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop

Make splices by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop edges together using a thermoplastic splicing iron utilizing a non-stick surface specifically designed for waterstop welding Use the correct temperature to sufficiently melt without charring the plastic Reform waterstops at splices with a remolding iron with ribs or corrugations to match the pattern of the waterstop The spliced area when cooled must show no signs of separation holes or other imperfections when bent by hand in as sharp an angle as possible

3212 Quality Assurance

Edge welding will not be permitted Compress or close centerbulbs when

SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 5


welding to non-centerbulb type Waterstop splicing defects which are unacceptable include but are not limited to the following 1) Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent section 2) Free lap joints 3) Misalignment of centerbulb ribs and end bulbs greater than 116 inch 4) Misalignment which reduces waterstop cross section more than 15 percent 5) Bond failure at joint deeper than 116 inch or 15 percent of material thickness 6) Misalignment of waterstop splice resulting in misalignment of waterstop in excess of 12 inch in 10 feet 7) Visible porosity in the weld area including pin holes 8) Charred or burnt material 9) Bubbles or inadequate bonding 10) Visible signs of splice separation when cooled splice is bent by hand at a sharp angle

322 Non-Metallic Hydrophilic Waterstop Installation

Miter cut ends to be joined with sharp knife or shears Adhere the ends with cyanacryiate (super glue) adhesive When joining hydrophilic type waterstop to PVC waterstop the hydrophilic waterstop shall be positioned as shown on the drawings Apply a liberal amount of a single component hydrophilic sealant to the junction to complete the transition

33 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Treat construction joints coinciding with expansion and contraction joints as expansion or contraction joints as applicable


SECTION 03 15 0000 10 Page 6


SECTION 03 20 0000 10

CONCRETE REINFORCING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 UNIT PRICES

111 Deformed Steel Bars

1111 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement Payment for steel in laps will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1112 Measurement

Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place The measured lengths will be converted to weights for the size of bars listed by the use of the nominal weights per linear foot specified in ASTM A615A615M



112 Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats

1121 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing fabricated deformed steel bar mats for concrete reinforcement Payment for steel in laps will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1122 Measurement

Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place Determine the weights by weighing or by manufacturers or catalog weights when weighing is not practicable



113 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement

1131 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing steel welded wire reinforcing for concrete Payment for steel in laps

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 1


will be made as indicated or required No payment will be made for additional steel in laps wherein the additional steel lap was made for the convenience of the Contractor

1132 Measurement

Steel Welded Wire Reinforcing for Concrete will be measured for payment based upon the quantity of pounds in place Determine the weights by weighing or by manufacturers or catalog weights when weighing is not practicable



114 Accessories

No payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and placing accessories incidental to and included in the payment for other items of work

12 REFERENCES







AWS D14D14M (2011) Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel


ASTM A1035A1035M (2016a) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-carbon Chromium Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement


ASTM A184A184M (2006 E2011) Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 2


ASTM A370 (2016) Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products



ASTM A675A675M (2014) Standard Specification for Steel Bars Carbon Hot-Wrought Special Quality Mechanical Properties

ASTM A706A706M (2016) Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A884A884M (2014) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement



13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcement

SD-03 Product Data

Reinforcing Steel

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests Inspections and Verifications

SD-07 Certificates

Reinforcing Steel

Qualified Welders


141 Welding Qualifications

Welders are required to be qualified in accordance with AWS D14D14M Perform qualification test at the worksite and notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours prior to conducting tests Special welding procedures and welders qualified by others may be accepted as permitted by

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 3


AWS D14D14M Submit a list of qualified welders names


Store reinforcement and accessories off the ground on platforms skids or other supports

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 DOWELS

Provide dowels conforming to ASTM A675A675M Grade 80 Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53A53M Schedule 80 may be used as dowels provided the ends are closed with metal or plastic inserts or with mortar

22 FABRICATED BAR MATS

Fabricated bar mats conforming to ASTM A184A184M

23 REINFORCING STEEL

Reinforcing steel of deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615A615M ASTM A706A706M or ASTM A1035A1035M grades and sizes as indicated Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement must conform to ASTM A1064A1064M

Submit certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing steel furnished contains no less than 25 percent recycled scrap steel and meets the requirements specified herein prior to the installation of reinforcing steel

24 WELDED WIRE REINFORCING

Welded wire reinforcing conforming to ASTM A1064A1064M When directed by the Contracting Officer for special applications use welded wire reinforcing conforming to ASTM A884A884M For wire with a specified yield strength (fy) exceeding 60000 psi fy must be the stress corresponding to a strain of 035 percent

25 WIRE TIES

Use wire ties that are 16 gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire Ties for epoxy-coated bars mustl be vinyl-coated or epoxy-coated Use zinc-coated ties for zinc-coated bars

26 SUPPORTS

Design bar supports for formed surfaces in accordance with CRSI 10MSP and fabricate of steel or precast concrete blocks Provide precast concrete blocks with wire ties and not less than 4 inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground Precast concrete block must have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete Coat steel supports for coated or galvanized bars with electrically compatible material for a distance of at least 2 inches beyond the point of contact with the bar Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be painted use galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel supports within 12 inch of concrete surface Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view must have the same color and texture as the finish surface For slabs on grade and topping slabs on steel deck supports use precast concrete blocks plastic coated steel fabricated with

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 4


bearing plates or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of plastic

27 SYNTHETIC FIBER REINFORCEMENT

Polypropylene synthetic fiber with a denier less than 100 and a nominal fiber length of 2 inches


Perform material tests specified and required by applicable standards by an approved laboratory and certified to demonstrate that the materials are in conformance with the specifications Perform and certify tests inspections and verifications and certify Submit certified tests reports of reinforcement steel showing that the steel complies with the applicable specifications for each steel shipment and identified with specific lots prior to placement Submit three copies of the heat analyses for each lot of steel furnished certifying that the steel conforms to the heat analyses

281 Reinforcement Steel Tests

Perform mechanical testing of steel in accordance with ASTM A370 except as otherwise specified or required by the material specifications Perform tension tests on full cross-section specimens using a gage length that spans the extremities of specimens with welds or sleeves included From chemical analyses of steel heats report the percentages of carbon phosphorous manganese sulphur and silicon present in the steel

282 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds

Perform non-destructive testing of welds in accordance with AWS D14D14M Section 7 except that radiographic testing is not permitted

PART 3 EXECUTION 31 REINFORCEMENT

Fabricate and place reinforcement steel and accessories as specified as indicated and as shown on approved shop drawings Fabrication and placement details of steel and accessories not specified or shown mustl be in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318 Cold bend reinforcement unless otherwise authorized Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill Do not bend bars after embedment in concrete Place safety caps on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement bars that pose a danger to life safety Face wire tie ends away from the forms Submit detail drawings showing reinforcing steel placement schedules sizes grades and splicing and bending details Show support details including types sizes and spacing

311 Placement

Reinforcement must be free from loose rust and scale dirt oil or other deleterious coating that could reduce bond with the concrete Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 at locations indicated plus or minus one bar diameter Do not continue reinforcement through expansion joints and place as indicated through construction or contraction joints Cover with concrete coverage as indicated or as required by ACI 318 If bars are moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other

SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 5


reinforcement conduits or embedded items the resulting arrangement of bars including additional bars required to meet structural requirements requires approval before concrete is placed

312 Placing Tolerances

Conform bar spacing and concrete cover to ACI 117

313 Splicing

Conform splices of reinforcement to ACI 318 and make only as required or indicated Bars may be spliced at alternate or additional locations at no additional cost to the Government subject to approval Splicing must be by lapping or by mechanical or welded butt connection except that lap splices must not be used for bars larger than No 11 unless otherwise indicated

3131 Lap Splices

Place lapped bars in contact and securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in concrete Do not space lapped bars farther apart than 15 the required length of lap or 6 inches

32 WELDED-WIRE REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT

Place welded-wire reinforcement in slabs as indicated Reinforcement placed in slabs on grade must be continuous between expansion construction and contraction joints Reinforcement placement at joints must be as indicated

May lap splices in such a way that the overlapped area equals the distance between the outermost crosswires plus 2 inches Stagger laps to avoid continuous laps in either direction Wire or clip together reinforcement at laps at intervals not to exceed 4 feet Position reinforcement by the use of supports

33 DOWEL INSTALLATION

Install dowels in slabs on grade at locations indicated and at right angles to joint being doweled Accurately position and align dowels parallel to the finished concrete surface before concrete placement Rigidly support dowels during concrete placement Coat one end of dowels with a bond breaker


SECTION 03 20 0000 10 Page 6


SECTION 03 31 0100 10

CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES





ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting

ACI SP-15 (2011) Field Reference Manual Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 301-05 with Selected ACI References




ASTM C1017C1017M (2013 E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C1064C1064M (2011) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete


ASTM C1107C1107M (2014a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 1


ASTM C1157C1157M (2011) Standard Specification for Hydraulic Cement


ASTM C123C123M (2014) Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate

ASTM C1240 (2014) Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C127 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C128 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

ASTM C131C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine


ASTM C142C142M (2010) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates


ASTM C150C150M (2016 E 2016) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)




SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 2


ASTM C260C260M (2010a R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C295C295M (2012) Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete




ASTM C40C40M (2016) Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C441 (2011) Effectiveness of Pozzolans or Ground Blast-Furnace Slag in Preventing Excessive Expansion of Concrete Due to the Alkali-Silica Reaction


ASTM C535 (2016) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM C595C595M (2016) Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements

ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C666C666M (2015) Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

ASTM C87C87M (2010) Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar

ASTM C94C94M (2016a) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C989C989M (2014) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars


SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 3





NIST HB 44 (2013) Specifications Tolerances and Other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices

NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)

NRMCA CPMB 100 (2000 R 2006) Concrete Plant Standards


COE CRD-C 104 (1980) Method of Calculation of the Fineness Modulus of Aggregate

COE CRD-C 114 (1997) Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing of Concrete Specimens

COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles

COE CRD-C 143 (1962) Specifications for Meters for Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregate

COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete

COE CRD-C 94 (1995) Corps of Engineers Specification for Surface Retarders


Design in accordance with ACI 301 Section 4 Submit concrete mix designs with the following properties

121 Air Content

Air content between 4 and 7 percent as delivered to the forms and as determined by ASTM C231C231M except that when the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate is 34 inch between 45 and 75 percent

122 Slump

The slump within the range of 1 to 4 inches as determined in accordance with ASTM C143C143M Where placement by pump is approved the slump must not exceed 6 inches

123 Concrete Strength

Provide specified compressive strength fc as follows

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 4


COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSI) STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

4000 28 days All New Concrete

124 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material (WC) Ratio

Maximum WC allowed as follows

WATER-CEMENT RATIO BY MASS

STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE

045 All New Concrete

These WCs may cause higher strengths than that required by paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH

125 Construction Tolerances

Except as specified otherwise a plus tolerance increases and a minus tolerance decreases the dimension to which it applies A tolerance without sign means plus or minus Where only one sign is specified there is no limit in the other direction Tolerances are not cumulative The most restrictive tolerance will control Tolerances can not extend the structure beyond legal boundaries

a Make level and grade tolerance measurements of slabs as soon as possible after finishing When forms or shoring are used make the measurements prior to removal

b Construction tolerances must meet the requirements of ACI 117 and any of the following requirements that are applicable

1251 Formed Concrete Surfaces

For High Velocity flow Class A-HV-Abrupt variation a positive offset between concrete surfaces is a raise of elevation in the direction of water flow and a negative offset is a drop of elevation in the direction of the water flow

Direction of water flow + 0 inches

- 18 inch

Perpendicular to the direction of water flow

18 inch

1252 Appearance

Clean permanently exposed surfaces if stained or otherwise discolored by a method that does not harm the concrete and that is approved by the Contracting Officer

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 5


Reinforcing steel

SD-03 Product Data

Concrete Mix DesignsBatch PlantConcrete MixersConveying EquipmentPlacing EquipmentCold-Weather RequirementsHot-Weather RequirementsCementitious Materials Admixtures and Curing CompoundNonshrink GroutMechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors

SD-06 Test Reports

AggregatesMill Test ReportsTests and InspectionsQuality of AggregatesWater

SD-07 Certificates

Concrete Field Testing TechniciansConcrete Construction Inspector (CCI)Cementitious MaterialsBlended Hydraulic Cement


Curing Compound


The Government will sample and test aggregates and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples Samples of aggregates will be obtained at the point of batching in accordance with ASTM D75D75M Concrete will be sampled in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Do not use a material until the Contracting Officer gives notice that test results are satisfactory The Government will sample and test chemical admixtures curing compounds and cementitious materials The individuals who sample and test concrete or the constituents of concrete as required in this specification must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians Grade I The individuals who perform the inspection of concrete construction must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Construction Inspector (CCI) Submit statements that the concrete testing technicians and the concrete inspectors meet the specified requirements Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15 and CRSI 10MSP at project site

141 Cement and Pozzolan

If cement or pozzolan is to be obtained from more than one source state the estimated amount to be obtained from each source and the proposed

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 6


schedule of shipments in the initial notification

1411 Prequalified Cement Sources

Deliver and use cement directly from a mill of a producer designated as a qualified source Samples of cement for check testing will be taken at the project site or concrete-producing plant by a representative of the Contracting Officer for testing at the expense of the Government A list of prequalified cement sources is available from Director US Army Corps of Engineers Engineer Research and Development Center - Structures Laboratory 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180-6199 ATTN CEERD-SC

1412 Prequalified Pozzolan Sources

Deliver and use pozzolan directly from a producer designated as a qualified source Samples of pozzolan for check testing will be taken at the project site by a representative of the Contracting Officer for testing at the expense of the Government A list of prequalified pozzolan sources is available from the Director US Army Corps of Engineers Engineer Research and Development Center - Structures Laboratory 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180-6199 ATTN CEERD-SC

142 Cementitious Materials Admixtures and Curing Compound

At least 60 days in advance of concrete placement notify the Contracting Officer of the sources for cementitious materials admixtures and curing compound along with sampling location brand name type and quantity to be used in the manufacture andor curing of the concrete Cementitious Materials including Cement and Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag will be accepted on the basis of the manufacturers certification of compliance Do not use cementitious materials until receiving Contracting Officer notice of acceptance Cementitious materials will be subject to check testing from samples obtained at the source at transfer points or at the project site as scheduled by the Contracting Officer and such sampling will be by or under the supervision of the Government at its expense Promptly remove material not meeting specifications from the site of work Submit samples of materials for Government testing and approval Submit manufacturers instructions for placement of curing compound


Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing and reject if test results are not satisfactory Chemical admixtures will be accepted based on compliance with the requirements of paragraph CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Submit mill test reports attesting that materials meet the requirements of the specification under which they are furnished Certification and mill test reports must be from samples taken from the particular lot furnished Certify the following for compliance with all specification requirements Impervious-Sheet Curing Materials Air-Entraining Admixture Other Chemical Admixtures Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 7


Submit descriptive literature of the Nonshrink Grout proposed for use together with a certificate from the manufacturer stating that it is suitable for the application or exposure for which it is being considered

211 Cementitious Materials

Cementitious materials are portland cement portland-pozzolan cement portland blast-furnace slag cement portland cement in combination with pozzolan or GGBF slag or portland cement in combination with silica fume conforming to appropriate specifications listed below Restrict the use of cementitious materials in architectural concrete to one color one source and one type

2111 Portland Cement

ASTM C150C150M Type I or II except that the maximum amount of C3A in Type I cement is 15 percent low alkali when used with aggregates listed at the end of this section which require it In lieu of low-alkali cement the Contractor may use a combination of portland cement that does not meet the low-alkali requirement with a pozzolan or GGBF slag provided the following requirement is met The expansion of the proposed combination when tested in accordance with ASTM C441 must be equal to or less than the expansion of a low-alkali cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C150C150M when tested in general conformance with ASTM C441 Run the expansion tests concurrently at an independent laboratory that is nationally recognized to perform such tests The Government reserves the right to confirm the test results and to adjust the percentage of pozzolan or slag in the combination to suit other requirements

2112 Fly Ash

ASTM C618 Class F except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must not exceed 6 percent Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 8 percent and a total equivalent alkali content less than 15 percent Add with cement

2113 Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

Natural pozzolan must be raw or calcined and conform to ASTM C618 Class N including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction and must have an ignition loss not exceeding 3 percent Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent and total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent

2114 Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan

Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) must conform to ASTM C618 Class F or N and the following additional requirements

a The strength activity index at 28 days of age is at least 95 percent of the control specimens

b The average particle size doest not exceed 6 microns

c The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 is greater than 77 percent

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 8


2115 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

Conform to ASTM C989C989M Grade 100

2116 Silica Fume

Silica fume may be furnished as a dry densified material or as a slurry Silica fume unprocessed or before processing into a slurry or a densified material must conform to ASTM C1240 with Table 2 and the Specific Surface Area and Uniformity Requirements in Table 4 invoked Provide the services of a manufacturers technical representative experienced in mixture proportioning placement procedures and curing of concrete containing silica fume Make the manufacturers representative available for consultation by both the Contractor and the Government during mixture proportioning planning and production of silica-fume concrete and onsite immediately prior to and during at least the first placement of concrete containing silica fume and at other times if directed

2117 Blended Hydraulic Cement

Conform to ASTM C595C595M and ASTM C1157C1157M Type IP or IS including the optional requirement for mortar expansion and sulfate soundness and consist of a mixture of ASTM C150C150M Type I or Type II cement and a complementary cementing material Provide slag added to the Type IS blend conforming to ASTM C989C989M ground granulated blast-furnace slag Use pozzolan added to the Type IP blend conforming ASTM C618 Class F and interground with the cement clinker Provide the manufacturers written statement that the amount of pozzolan in the finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the finished cement from lot-to-lot or within a lot The percentage and type of mineral admixture used in the blend cannot change from that submitted for the aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning

212 Aggregates

ASTM C33C33M except as modified herein Furnish aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one source Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33C33M

2121 Aggregate Expansion

Provide fine and coarse aggregates with expansions less than 008 percent at 28 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C1260 Should the test data indicate an expansion of 008 percent or greater reject the aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C1567 and using the proposed mix design In this case include the mix design low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials

a GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious

b Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of

(1) 30 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 65 percent or more(2) 25 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more(3) 20 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more(4) 15 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 9


c Silica fume at a minimum of 7 percent of total cementitious

If a combination of these materials is chosen the minimum amount must be a linear combination of the minimum amounts above Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 008 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567

2122 Unfavorable Properties

Do not provide aggregates possessing properties or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C295C295M


Provide chemical admixtures when required or permitted that conform to the appropriate specification listed

2131 Air-Entraining Admixture

Conform to ASTM C260C260M and consistently cause the concrete to have an air content in the specified ranges under field conditions

2132 Accelerating Admixture

Meet the requirements of ASTM C494C494M Type C or E except that calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride is not permitted

2133 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture

21331 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixtures

ASTM C494C494M Type A B or D except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived

21332 High-Range Water Reducing Admixture

ASTM C494C494M Type F or G except that the 6-month and 1-year strength requirements are waived The admixture may be used only when approved by the Contracting Officer such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as described in the Contractors Quality Control Plan

2134 Other Chemical Admixtures

Provide other chemical admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete in compliance with ASTM C1017C1017M Type 1 or 2 Only use these admixture for concrete listed in paragraph SLUMP

214 Water

Provide water for mixing and curing compliance with the requirements of ASTM C1602C1602M potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali Submit test report showing water complies with ASTM C1602C1602M

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 10



Provide reinforcing bars conforming to the requirements of ASTM A615A615M Grade 60 deformed Welded steel wire reinforcement must conform to the requirements of ASTM A1064A1064M Detail reinforcement not indicated in accordance with ACI 301 Provide mechanical reinforcing bar connectors in accordance with ACI 301 and with 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar

216 Nonshrink Grout

Cconform to ASTM C1107C1107M and a commercial formulation suitable for the application proposed

22 EQUIPMENT

Submit data on placing equipment and methods Conform the batch plant to the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 and as specified however rating plates attached to batch plant equipment are not required Submit batch plant data forconformance with applicable specifications

221 Batching Equipment

Use partially automatic semiautomatic or automatic batching controls Provide the semiautomatic batching system with interlocks such that the discharge device cannot be actuated until the indicated material is within the applicable tolerance Equip the batching system with an accurate recorder or recorders that meet the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 Provide separate bins or compartments for each size group of aggregate and cement pozzolan and GGBF slag Weigh aggregates either in separate weigh batchers with individual scales or cumulatively in one weigh batcher on one scale Do not weigh aggregate in the same batcher with cement pozzolan or GGBF slag If both cement and pozzolan or GGBF slag are used they may be batched cumulatively provided that the portland cement is batched first If measured by mass do not weigh the mass of the water cumulatively with another ingredient Interlock water batcher filling and discharging valves so that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully closed Provide an accurate mechanical device for measuring and dispensing each admixtured Interlock each dispenser with the batching and discharging operation of the water so that each admixture is separately batched and discharged automatically in a manner to obtain uniform distribution throughout the batch in the specified mixing period Do not combine admixtures prior to introduction in water Arrange the plant to facilitate the inspection of all operations at all times Provide facilities for obtaining representative samples of aggregates from each bin or compartment Clearly mark all filling ports for cementitious materials bins or silos with a permanent sign stating the contents

222 Scales

Provide equipment for batching by mass conforming to the applicable requirements of NIST HB 44 except that the accuracy is plus or minus 02 percent of scale capacity Provide standard test weights and any other auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating performance of each scale or other measuring devices Perform tests at the frequency required in paragraph TESTS AND INSPECTIONS and in the presence of a Government inspector

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 11


223 Batching Tolerances

a Weighing Tolerances

MATERIAL PERCENT OF REQUIRED MASS

Cementitious materials 0 to plus 2

Aggregate plus or minus 2

Water plus or minus 1

Chemical admixture 0 to plus 6

b Volumetric Tolerances - For volumetric batching equipment the following tolerances apply to the required volume of material being batched

Water Plus or minus 1 percent

Chemical admixtures Zero to plus 6 percent

224 Moisture Control

The plant must be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture content of the aggregates and to change the masses of the materials being batched Provide an electric moisture meter complying with the provisions of COE CRD-C 143 for measuring moisture in the fine aggregate Arrange the sensing element so that the measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the sand bin or in the sand batcher

225 Concrete Mixers

Do not charge the concrete mixers in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer Operate the mixers at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer Maintain the mixers in satisfactory operating condition and keep the mixer drums free of hardened concrete Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory results promptly discontinue its use until it is repaired Submit concrete mixer data including the make type and capacity of concrete mixers proposed for mixing concrete


Concrete plant mixers must be tilting nontilting horizontal-shaft vertical-shaft or pugmill and provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed The mixing time and uniformity must conform to all the requirements in ASTM C94C94M applicable to central-mixed concrete

2252 Truck Mixers

Truck mixers the mixing of concrete therein and concrete uniformity must conform to the requirements of ASTM C94C94M A truck mixer may be used either for complete mixing (transit-mixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a stationary mixer (shrink-mixed) Equip each truck with two

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 12


counters from which it will be possible to determine the number of revolutions at mixing speed and the number of revolutions at agitating speed

226 Conveying Equipment

Submit data on the conveying equipment and methods for transporting handling and depositing the concrete Conform the conveying equipment to the following requirements

2261 Buckets

The interior hopper slope shall be not less than 58 degrees from the horizontal the minimum dimension of the clear gate opening shall be at least five times the nominal maximum-size aggregate and the area of the gate opening shall not be less than 2 square feet The maximum dimension of the gate opening shall not be greater than twice the minimum dimension The bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed and may be manually pneumatically or hydraulically operated except that buckets larger than 2 cubic yards shall not be manually operated The design of the bucket shall provide means for positive regulation of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position

2262 Transfer Hoppers

Concrete may be charged into nonagitating hoppers for transfer to other conveying devices Transfer hoppers must be capable of receiving concrete directly from delivery vehicles and have conical-shaped discharge features Equip the transfer hopper with a hydraulically operated gate and with a means of external vibration to effect complete discharge Do not hold concrete in nonagitating transfer hoppers more than 30 minutes

2263 Trucks

Truck mixers operating at agitating speed or truck agitators used for transporting plant-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94C94M Nonagitating equipment may be used for transporting plant-mixed concrete over a smooth road when the hauling time is less than 15 minutes Bodies of nonagitating equipment shall be smooth watertight metal containers specifically designed to transport concrete shaped with rounded corners to minimize segregation and equipped with gates that will permit positive control of the discharge of the concrete

2264 Chutes

When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer agitator or nonagitating equipment the chutes attached to this equipment by the manufacturer may be used Use a discharge deflector when required by the Contracting Officer Separate chutes and other similar equipment will not be permitted for conveying concrete

2265 Belt Conveyors

Design and operate to assure a uniform flow of concrete from mixer to final place of deposit without segregation of ingredients or loss of mortar and provide with positive means for preventing segregation of the concrete at the transfer points and the point of placing Construct belt conveyors such that the idler spacing does not exceed 36 inches The belt speed must be a minimum of 300 feet per minute and a maximum of 750 feet

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 13


per minute If concrete is to be placed through installed horizontal or sloping reinforcing bars discharge the conveyor concrete into a pipe or elephant trunk that is long enough to extend through the reinforcing bars

2266 Concrete Pumps

Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pump when approved The pumping equipment must be piston or squeeze pressure The pipeline must be rigid steel pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose The inside diameter of the pipe must be at least three times the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate in the concrete mixture to be pumped but not less than 4 inches Do not use aluminum pipe

227 Vibrators

Use vibrators of the proper size frequency and amplitude for the type of work being performed in conformance with the following requirements

APPLICATION HEAD DIAMETER (inches)

FREQUENCY (VPM)

AMPLITUDE (inches )

Thin walls beams etc

1-14 to 2-12 9000 to 13500 002 to 004

General construction 2 to 3-12 8000 to 12000 0025 to 005

Determine the frequency and amplitude in accordance with COE CRD-C 521

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION FOR PLACING

311 Embedded Items

Before placement of concrete take care to determine that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated on the drawings or required Embedded items must be free of oil and other foreign matter such as loose coatings or rust paint and scale The embedding of wood in concrete will be permitted only when specifically authorized or directed Temproarily fill voids in sleeves inserts and anchor slots with readily removable materials to prevent the entry of concrete into voids Welding including tack welding will not be permitted on embedded metals within 2 feet of the surface of the concrete

312 Concrete on Earth Foundations

Earth surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed must be clean damp and free from debris frost ice and standing or running water Prior to placement of concrete compact the earth foundation in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

313 Concrete on Rock Foundations

Rock surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed mustl be clean free from oil standing or running water ice mud drummy rock coating debris and loose semidetached or unsound fragments Clean joints in rock to a satisfactory depth as determined by the Contracting Officer and to firm rock on the sides Immediately before the concrete is placed thoroughly clean all rock surfaces by the use of air-water jets or sandblasting as described in paragraph CONSTRUCTION JOINT TREATMENT Keep

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 14


all rock surfaces continuously wet for at least 24 hours immediately prior to placing concrete thereon Cover all approximately horizontal surfaces immediately before the concrete is placed with a layer of mortar proportioned similar to that in the concrete mixture Cover the mortar with concrete before the time of initial setting of the mortar

314 Construction Joint Treatment

Submit the method and equipment proposed for joint cleanup and waste disposal for review and approval Conform construction joint treatment to the following requirements

3141 Joint Preparation

Prepare concrete surfaces to which additional concrete is to be bonded for receiving the next lift or adjacent concrete by cleaning with either air-water cutting sandblasting high-pressure water jet or other approved method Air-water cutting will not be permitted on formed surfaces or surfaces congested with reinforcing steel Regardless of the method used the resulting surfaces must be free from all laitance and inferior concrete so that clean well bonded coarse aggregate is exposed uniformly throughout the lift surface Do not undercut the edges of the coarse aggregate Wash the surface again as the last operation prior to placing the next lift No standing water is allowed on the surface upon which concrete is placed

3142 Air-Water Cutting

Perform air-water cutting of a construction joint at the proper time and only on horizontal construction joints The air pressure used in the jet must be 90 to 110 psi and the water pressure must be just sufficient to bring the water into effective influence of the air pressure When approved by the Contracting Officer a retarder complying with the requirements of COE CRD-C 94 may be applied to the surface of the lift to prolong the period of time during which air-water cutting is effective Prior to receiving approval furnish samples of the material to be used and demonstrate the method to be used in applications After cutting wash and rinse the surface long as there is any trace of cloudiness of the wash water Where necessary to remove accumulated laitance coatings stains debris and other foreign material high-pressure water jet or sandblasting will be required as the last operation before placing the next lift

3143 High-Pressure Water Jet

A stream of water under a pressure of not less than 3000 psi may be used for cleaning Delay its use until the concrete is sufficiently hard so that only the surface skin or mortar is removed and there is no undercutting of coarse-aggregate particles If the water jet is incapable of a satisfactory cleaning clean the surface by sandblasting

3144 Wet Sandblasting

This method may be used when the concrete has reached sufficient strength to prevent undercutting of the coarse aggregate particles Then thoroughly wash the surface of the concrete to remove all loose materials

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 15


3145 Waste Disposal

Dispose of the waste water employed in cutting washing and rinsing of concrete surfaces such that the waste water does not stain discolor or affect exposed surfaces of the structures or damage the environment of the project area The method of disposal is subject to approval

32 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE

Convey and place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 Do not reconstitute concrete that has begun to solidify

321 Cold-Weather Requirements

Place concrete in cold weather in accordance with ACI 306R

322 Hot-Weather Requirements

Place concrete in hot weather in accordance with ACI 305R

323 Placing Concrete in Ogee Section

Finish he unformed portion of the ogee section by placing concrete slightly above grade and striking off to grade by accurate screeding Screeding may be accomplished by semimechanical devices or by a mechanical screed that consolidates and screeds the surface in one operation Ribs embedded in the fresh concrete as guides for screeds will not be permitted

33 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES

331 Setting of Plates

After being plumbed and properly positioned provide column base plates bearing plates for beams and similar structural members and machinery and equipment base plates with full bearing with nonshrink grout The space between the top of concrete or masonry-bearing surface and the bottom of the plate must be approximately 124 of the width of the plate but not less than 12 inch for plates less than 12 inches wide Concrete surfaces must be rough clean and free of oil grease and laitance and damp Clean metal surfaces free of oil grease and rust

332 Nonshrink Grout Application

Water content must be the minimum that will provide a flowable mixture and fill the space to be grouted without segregation bleeding or reduction of strength

3321 Mixing and Placing of Nonshrink Grout

Mix and place in accordance with the material manufacturers instructions and as specified Thoroughly dry-mix ingredients before adding water After adding water mix the batch for 3 minutes Size batches to allow continuous placement of freshly mixed grout Discard grout not used within 30 minutes after mixing Fill the space between the top of the concrete or masonry-bearing surface and the plate solid with the grout Use forms of wood or other equally suitable material for retaining the grout and remove after the grout has set If grade A grout as specified in ASTM C1107C1107M is used form all surfaces to provide restraint Work the placed grout to eliminate voids however avoid overworking and

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 16


breakdown of the initial set Do not be retemper or subject grout to vibration from any source Where clearances are unusually small place under pressure with a grout pump Maintain temperature of the grout and of surfaces receiving the grout at 65 to 85 degrees F until after setting

3322 Treatment of Exposed Surfaces

After the grout has set cut back the exposed surfaces of those types containing metallic aggregate 1 inch and immediately cover with a parge coat of mortar proportioned by mass of one part portland cement two parts sand and sufficient water to make the mixture placeable The parge coat must have a smooth dense finish The exposed surface of other types of nonshrink grout must have a smooth dense finish

3323 Curing

Cure grout and parge coats in accordance with Section 03 39 0000 10 CONCRETE CURING


Submit test results and inspection reports daily and weekly Tests and inspect in accordance the following

341 General

Perform the inspections and tests described below and based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action required and submit reports as required When in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the concreting operation is out of control cease concrete placement Locate the laboratory performing the tests on site and conform with ASTM C1077 The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to start of concreting operations and at least once per year thereafter for conformance with ASTM C1077

342 Testing and Inspection Requirements

3421 Fine Aggregate

34211 Grading

At least once during each shift when the concrete plant is operating perform one sieve analysis and fineness modulus determination in accordance with ASTM C136C136M and COE CRD-C 104 for the fine aggregate or for each size range of fine aggregate if it is batched in more than one size or classification The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for control However the Contractor is responsible for delivering fine aggregate to the mixer within specification limits

34212 Corrective Action for Fine Aggregate Grading

When the amount passing on any sieve is outside the specification limits immediately resample and retest the fine aggregate If there is another failure on any sieve immediately be report to the Contracting Officer

34213 Moisture Content Testing

When in the opinion of the Contracting Officer the electric moisture meter

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 17


is not operating satisfactorily perform at least four tests for moisture content in accordance with ASTM C566 during each 8-hour period of mixing plant operation Randomly select the times for the tests within the 8-hour period Make an additional test whenever the slump is shown to be out of control or excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman When the electric moisture meter is operating satisfactorily make at least two direct measurements of moisture content per week to check the calibration of the meter Use the results of tests for moisture content to adjust the added water in the control of the batch plant

34214 Moisture Content Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of the fine aggregate changes by 05 percent or more adjust the scale settings for the fine-aggregate batcher and water batcher (directly or by means of a moisture compensation device) if necessary to maintain the specified slump

3422 Coarse Aggregate

34221 Grading

At least once during each shift in which the concrete plant is operating conduct a sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136C136M for each size of coarse aggregate The location at which samples are taken may be selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for production control A test record of samples of aggregate taken at the same locations must show the results of the current test as well as the average results of the five most recent tests including the current test The Contractor may adopt limits for control which are coarser than the specification limits for samples taken at locations other than as delivered to the mixer to allow for degradation during handling

34222 Corrective Action for Grading

When the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits immediately resample and retest the coarse aggregate If the second sample fails on any sieve report that fact to the Contracting Officer Where two consecutive averages of five tests are outside specification limits consider the operation out of control and report to the Contracting Officer Stop concreting and take immediate steps to correct the grading

34223 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Content

Make a test for moisture content of each size group of coarse aggregate at least twice per week When two consecutive readings for smallest size coarse aggregate differ by more than 10 percent increase frequency of testing to that specified above for fine aggregate until the difference falls below 10 percent

34224 Coarse Aggregate Moisture Corrective Action

Whenever the moisture content of any size of coarse aggregate changes by 05 percent or more adjust the scale setting for the coarse aggregate batcher and the water batcher if necessary to maintain the specified slump

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 18


3423 Quality of Aggregates

Submit aggregate quality tests at least 30 days prior to start of concrete placement

34231 Frequency of Quality Tests

Thirty days prior to the start of concrete placement perform all tests for aggregate quality listed below In addition after the start of concrete placement perform tests for aggregate quality in accordance with the frequency schedule shown below Take amples tested after the start of concrete placement immediately prior to entering the concrete mixer

FREQUENCY

PROPERTY FINE AGGREGATE COARSE AGGREGATE TEST

Specific Gravity Every 3 months Every 3 months ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Absorption Every 3 months Every 3 months ASTM C127 ASTM C128

Durability Factor (using Procedure A)

Every 12 months Every 12 months COE CRD-C 114 ASTM C666C666M

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles


Material Finer than No 200 Sieve

Not applicable Every 3 months ASTM C117

Impurities Every 3 months Not applicable ASTM C40C40M ASTM C87C87M

LA Abrasion Not applicable Every 6 months ASTM C131C131M ASTM C535

Soft and Friable (Scratch Hardness)

Not applicable Every 6 months COE CRD-C 130

Chert less than 240 specific gravity


Coal and Lignite less than less than 200 specific gravity


Petrographic Examination


34232 Corrective Action for Aggregate Quality

If the result of a quality test fails to meet the requirements for quality immediately prior to start of concrete placement change production

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 19


procedures or materials and perform additional tests until the material meets the quality requirements prior to proceeding with either mixture proportioning studies or starting concrete placement After concrete placement commences whenever the result of a test for quality fails the requirements immediately rerun the test If the second test fails the quality requirement report the fact to the Contracting Officer and take immediate steps to rectify the situation

3424 Scales

34241 Weighing Accuracy

Check the accuracy of the scales by test weights prior to start of concrete operations and at least once every 3 months for conformance with the applicable requirements of paragraph BATCHING EQUIPMENT Also make such tests as directed whenever there are variations in properties of the fresh concrete that could result from batching errors

34242 Batching and Recording Accuracy

Once a week check the accuracy of each batching and recording device during a weighing operation by noting and recording the required weight recorded weight and the actual weight batched Confirm that the calibration devices described in paragraph EQUIPMENT for checking the accuracy of dispensed admixtures are operating properly

34243 Scales Corrective Action

When either the weighing accuracy or batching accuracy does not comply with specification requirements do not operate the plant until necessary adjustments or repairs have been made Correct discrepancies in recording accuracies immediately

3425 Batch-Plant Control

Continuously control the measurement of all constituent materials including cementitious materials each size of aggregate water and admixtures Adjust the aggregate weights and amount of added water as necessary to compensate for free moisture in the aggregates Adjust the amount of air-entraining agent to control air content within specified limits Prepare a report indicating type and source of cement used type and source of pozzolan or slag used amount and source of admixtures used aggregate source the required aggregate and water weights per cubic yard amount of water as free moisture in each size of aggregate and the batch aggregate and water weights per cubic yard for each class of concrete batched during plant operation

3426 Concrete Mixture

34261 Air Content Testing

Conduct air content tests when test specimens are fabricated In addition make at least two tests for air content on randomly selected batches of each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour period of concrete production Make additional tests when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Government quality assurance representative Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM C231C231M Plot test results on control charts which at all times are readily available to the Government Keep copies of the current

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 20


control charts in the field by the Contractors quality control representatives and plotted results as tests are made When a single test result reaches either the upper or lower action limit immediately conduct a second test Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the air content of the batch to plot on both the control chart for air content and the control chart for range and for determining the need for any remedial action Plot the result of each test or average as noted in the previous sentence on a separate chart for each mixture on which an average line is set at the midpoint of the specified air content range from paragraph AIR CONTENT Set an upper warning limit and a lower warning limit line 10 percentage point above and below the average line Set an upper action limit and a lower action limit line 15 percentage points above and below the average line respectively Plot the range between each two consecutive tests on a control chart for range where an upper warning limit is set at 20 percentage points and up upper action limit is set at 30 percentage points Samples for air content may be taken at the mixer however the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated air content If the materials or transportation methods cause air content loss between the mixer and the placement take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the air content at the mixer as directed

34262 Air Content Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for percent air reach either warning limit immediately adjust the amount of air-entraining admixture batched As soon as is practical after each adjustment conduct another test to verify the result of the adjustment Whenever a point on the control chart range reaches the warning limit recalibrate the admixture dispenser to ensure that it is operating accurately and with good reproducibility Whenever a point on either control chart reaches an action limit line the air content is considered out of control and immediately halt the concreting operation until the air content is under control Make additional air content tests when concreting is restarted

34263 Slump Testing

In addition to slump tests made when test specimens are fabricated make at least four slump tests on randomly selected batches in accordance with ASTM C143C143M for each separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour or less period of concrete production each day Also make additional tests shall when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing foreman or Governments quality assurance representative Plot test results on control charts which are readily available to the Government at all times Keep copies of the current control charts in the field by the Contractors quality control representatives and plot results as tests are made When a single slump test reaches or goes beyond either the upper or lower action limit immediately make a second test on the same batch of concrete Average the results of the two tests and use this average as the slump of the batch to plot on both the control chart for percent air and the chart for range and for determining the need for any remedial action Set an upper warning limit at 12 inch below the maximum allowable slump on separate control charts for percent air used for each type of mixture as specified in paragraph SLUMP and set an upper action limit line and lower action limit line at the maximum and minimum allowable slumps respectively as specified in the same paragraph Plot the range between each consecutive slump test for each type of mixture on a single control chart for range on which an upper action limit is set at

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 21


2 inches Take samples for slump at the mixer however the Contractor is responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated slump If the materials or transportation methods cause slump loss between mixer and the placement take correlation samples at the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer and control the slump at the mixer as directed

34264 Slump Corrective Action

Whenever points on the control chart for slump reach the upper warning limit immediately adjust the batch weights of water and fine aggregate Make adjustments so that the total water content does not exceed that amount allowed by the maximum WC specified based upon aggregates which are in a saturated surface-dry condition When a single slump reaches the upper or lower action limit no further concrete may be delivered to the placing site until proper adjustments have been made Immediately after each adjustment make another test to verify the correctness of the adjustment Whenever two consecutive slump tests made during a period when there was no adjustment of batch weights produce a point on the control chart for range at or above the upper action limit immediately halt the concreting operation and take appropriate steps to bring the slump under control Also make additional slump tests as directed

34265 Temperature

Measure the temperature of the concrete when compressive strength specimens are fabricated Measure in accordance with ASTM C1064C1064M Report the temperature along with the compressive strength data

34266 Compressive-Strength Specimens

Obtain samples and test concrete for quality control during placement Sample fresh concrete for testing in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Make six test cylinders Test concrete for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for each design mix and for every 100 cubic yards of concrete Test two cylinders at 7 days two cylinders at 28 days and hold two cylinders in reserve Prepare concrete test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31C31M Perform compressive strength testing in accordance with ASTM C39C39M

3427 Inspection Before Placing

Inspect foundation or construction joints forms and embedded items for quality in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify to the Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete Report the results of each inspection in writing

3428 Placing

34281 Placing Inspection

The placing foreman supervises all placing operations determines that the correct quality of concrete or grout is placed in each location as directed and is for measuring and recording concrete temperatures and ambient temperature hourly during placing operations weather conditions time of placement yardage placed and method of placement

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 22


34282 Placing Corrective Action

The placing foreman must not permit batching and placing to begin until he has verified that an adequate number of vibrators in working order and with competent operators are available Discontinue placing if any pile of concrete is inadequately consolidated If any batch of concrete fails to meet the temperature requirements take immediate steps to improve temperature controls

3429 Vibrators

34291 Vibrator Testing and Use

Determine the frequency and amplitude of each vibrator in accordance with COE CRD-C 521 prior to initial use and at least once a month when concrete is being placed Make sdditional tests as directed when a vibrator does not appear to be adequately consolidating the concrete Determine the frequency at the same time the vibrator is operating in concrete with the tachometer held against the upper end of the vibrator head while almost submerged and just before the vibrator is withdrawn from the concrete Determine the amplitude with the head vibrating in air Take two measurements one near the tip and another near the upper end of the vibrator head and average these results Report the make model type and size of the vibrator and frequency and amplitude results in writing

34292 Vibrator Corrective Action

Immediately remove any vibrator not meeting the requirements of paragraph VIBRATORS from service and repair or replace

34210 Mixer Uniformity

Submit the results of the initial mixer uniformity tests at least 5 days prior to the initiation of placing


Prior to the start of concrete placing and once every 6 months when concrete is being placed or once for every 75000 cubic yards of concrete placed whichever results in the longest time interval dtermine uniformity of concrete mixing in accordance with ASTM C94C94M

342102 Truck Mixers

Prior to the start of concrete placing and at least once every 6 months when concrete is being placed determine uniformity of concrete in accordance with ASTM C94C94M Randomly select the truck mixers for testing When satisfactory performance is found in one truck mixer the performance of mixers of substantially the same design and condition of the blades may be regarded as satisfactory

34211 Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action

When a mixer fails to meet mixer uniformity requirements either remove the mixer from service on the work increase the mixing time change the batching sequence reduce the batch size or adjust the mixer until compliance is achieved

SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 23


343 Reports

Report all results of tests or inspections conducted informally as they are completed and in writing daily Prepare a weekly report for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week During periods of cold-weather protection make reports of pertinent temperatures daily These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs Confirm such reports of failures and the action taken in writing in the routine reports The Contracting Officer has the right to examine all test and inspection records


SECTION 03 31 0100 10 Page 24


SECTION 03 39 0000 10

CONCRETE CURING0514

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




ACI 3081 (2011) Specification for Curing Concrete



12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Curing Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing and Inspection for CQC


Curing Compound


Store materials in such a manner as to avoid contamination and deterioration Materials must be capable of being accurately identified after bundles or containers are opened

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CURING MATERIALS

Provide curing materials in accordance with ACI 301 Sections 5 and ACI 3081 Section 2 Submit product data and manufacturers instructions for concrete curing compound

SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 1


22 WATER

Provide water for curing that is fresh clean potable and free of injurious amounts of oil acid salt or alkali except that non-potable water may be used if it meets the requirements of ASTM C1602C1602M

PART 3 EXECUTION


Cure and protect concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5

32 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CQC

Perform the inspection and tests described below and based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action required Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports including curing compound proposed for use on this project

321 Moist Curing Inspections

At least once each shift and not less than twice per day on both work and non-work days inspect all areas subject to moist curing Note and record the surface moisture condition

322 Moist Curing Corrective Actione

When a daily inspection report lists an area of inadequate curing take immediate corrective action and extend the required curing period for those areas by 1 day

323 Membrane Curing Inspection

Apply no curing compound until the Contractor has verified that the compound is properly mixed and ready for spraying At the end of each operation estimate the quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area of concrete surface covered compute the rate of coverage in square feetgallon and note whether or not coverage is uniform

324 Membrane Curing Corrective Action

When the coverage rate of the curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not uniform spray the entire surface again

325 Sheet Curing Inspection

At least once each shift and once per day on non-work days inspection all areas being cured using impervious sheets Note and record the condition of the covering and the tightness of the laps and tapes

326 Sheet Curing Corrective Action

When a daily inspection report lists any tears holes or laps or joints that are not completely closed promptly repair the tears and holes or replace the sheets close the joints and extend the required curing period for those areas by 1 day


SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 2


SECTION 03 39 0000 10 Page 3


SECTION 05 50 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 303 (2016) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
















ASTM A467A467M (2007 R 2012) Standard Specification for Machine Coil Chain

ASTM A500A500M (2013) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes


ASTM A653A653M (2015 E 2016) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780A780M (2009 R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A924A924M (2016a) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B108B108M (2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings



ASTM B26B26M (2014 E 2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM C1513 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections

ASTM D1187D1187M (1997 E 2011 R 2011) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal






NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 (2009) Metal Bar Grating Manual



12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication Drawings


Galvanzied Steel Platform

Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder




Galvanized Steel Platform

Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder


Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s) connections to structural system and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303

Submit templates erection and installation drawings indicating thickness type grade class of metal and dimensions Show construction details reinforcement anchorage and installation with relation to the building construction

Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of weir box platform grating and ladder shall be designed in accordance with NC Building Code and other applicable standards Structural analysis shall be prepared signed and sealed by a NC Professional Engineer who is responsible for preparation

SD-03 Product Data



Aluminum Grating

Aluminum Ladder

Aluminum Treads

13 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D11D11M Use procedures materials and equipment of the type required for the work

14 DELIVERY STORAGE AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion deformation and other types of damage Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather Remove and replace damaged items with new items

15 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

151 General

In engineering stair units ladders handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following

Aluminum AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures

Stainless Steel ASCE Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members

Cold-Formed Structural Steel AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

AISC Steel Construction Manual

Construct metal stair units to sizes and arrangements indicated to support a minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot Provide framing hangers columns struts clips brackets bearing plates and other components as required for the support of stairs and platforms

152 Structural Performance of Steps Ladders Handrails Monorails and Railing Systems

Design fabricate and install to withstand structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for steps ladders handrails railing systems anchors and connections Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems Structural loads shall be as prescribed by the State Building Code in the State the project is located Whether the above systems including platforms are not shown as structurally designed on the Contract drawings or the Contractor requests deviation the Contractor shall provide erection drawings signed and sealed by a Registered Engineer responsible for the design The Design Professional shall be registered in the State the project is located

153 Field Measurements

Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal



fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work

154 Thermal Movements

Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering fabricating and installing steps ladders handrails and railing systems to prevent buckling opening of joints overstressing of components and connections and other detrimental effects Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss

Temperature Change (Range) 120 degrees F (67 deg C) ambient 180 degrees F100 deg C) material surfaces

155 Control of Corrosion

Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Structural Carbon Steel

ASTM A36A36M

212 Structural Tubing

ASTM A500A500M

213 Steel Pipe

ASTM A53A53M Type E or S Grade B

214 Anchor Bolts

ASTM A307 Where exposed shall be of the same material color and finish as the metal to which applied

2141 Adhesive Anchors

Provide 58 in ch diameter unless otherwise noted adhesive anchors Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4 12 in ch Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E488E488M




ASME B1821 type and grade best suited for the purpose




ASME B1822 or ASTM A307

2144 Screws

ASME B1821 ASME B1862 ASME B1863 and ASTM C1513

2145 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18211 Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels square or rectangular tapered in thickness and smooth Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18211

215 Aluminum Alloy Products

Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate ASTM B221 for extrusions and ASTM B26B26M or ASTM B108B108M for castings as applicable Provide aluminum extrusions at least 18 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0050 inch thick

22 FABRICATION FINISHES

221 Galvanizing

Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated after fabrication where practicable Galvanizing ASTM A123A123M ASTM A153A153M ASTM A653A653M or ASTM A924A924M G90 as applicable

222 Galvanize

Anchor bolts grating fasteners washers and parts or devices necessary for proper installation unless indicated otherwise

223 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A780A780M or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing as approved by Contracting Officer Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material

224 Shop Cleaning and Painting

2241 Surface Preparation

Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6NACE No3 Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust dirt oil grease or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces including contact surfaces within slip critical joints but coat with rust preventative applied in the shop



2242 Pretreatment Priming and Painting

Apply pretreatment primer and paint in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions On surfaces concealed in the finished construction or not accessible for finish painting apply an additional prime coat to a minimum dry film thickness of 10 mil Tint additional prime coat with a small amount of tinting pigment

225 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating anodic or organic coatings

226 Aluminum Surfaces

2261 Surface Condition

Before finishes are applied remove roll marks scratches rolled-in scratches kinks stains pits orange peel die marks structural streaks and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces

2262 Aluminum Finishes

Unexposed sheet plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated Sandblast castings finish medium AA DAF45 Otherwise provide all other aluminum items with an anodized A41 finish

23 FLOOR GRATINGS AND STAIR TREADS

Design aluminum grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 for bar type grating

a Design floor gratings to support a live load of 300 pounds per square foot for the spans indicated with maximum deflection of L240

b NAAMM MBG 531 band edges of grating with bars of the same size as the bearing bars Weld banding in accordance with the manufacturers standard for trim Design tops of bearing bars cross or intermediate bars to be in the same plane and match grating finish

c Slip resistance requirements must exceed both wet and dry a static coefficient of friction of 05

d The weight of individual panels should not exceed 80 pounds

e All grating shall lie flat with no tendency to rock when installed

f Toeplates shall extend the full depth of grating and 4 inches above the top shall be provided around openings and on the open sides of stairway landings overhead platforms overhead walkways and other locations indicated on the drawings

24 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework such as miscellaneous mountings and frames Provide with connections and fasteners

Provide angles and plates ASTM A36A36M as indicated



25 SAFETY CHAINS

Construct safety chains of galvanized steel straight link type 316 inch diameter with at least twelve links per foot and with snap hooks on each end Test safety chain in accordance with ASTM A467A467M Class CS Provide snap hooks of boat type Provide galvanized 38 inch bolt with 34 inch eye diameter for attachment of chain anchored as indicated Supply two chains 4 inches longer than the anchorage spacing for each guarded area Locate safety chain where indicated Mount the top chain 3 feet 6 inches above the floor and mount the lower chain 2 feet above the floor

26 ALUMINUM HANDRAILING

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings all railings provided under this section shall be of the same type and design Aluminum railings shall be provided

All welding of aluminum shall be done in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society Welds shall be free of porosity cracks holes and flux

All fasteners used in connection with aluminum railings shall be stainless steel

261 Railings

All aluminum railings shall be fabricated from 1 12 inch Schedule 40 pipe or 2 inch square tubing with wall thickness of at least 18 inch

All fabricated aluminum railings shall be provided with the manufacturers standard clear anodic A41 finish

262 Connections

All angles offsets or other changes in alignment in pipe railings shall be made with fabricated railing ells and welding connectors All fittings and connections in prefabricated aluminum railings shall be as recommended by the railing manufacturer Field joints in welded railings shall be made with manufacturer double lock or splice lock at least 3 34 inches long Welding connectors and splice-locks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

263 Fabrication

Railings shall be smooth with all projecting joints and sharp corners ground smooth Welded joints shall be flush type Members shall be neatly coped and continuously welded or mechanically connected at all junctions Top rails shall run continuously over posts All rails and posts shall be in the same plane and shall not be offset All welding shall be done neatly and substantially by a TIG or MIG process to produce a smooth weld All weld spatter and burrs shall be removed and all welds shall be thoroughly brushed with a stainless steel power wire brush

27 WEIR PLATES

Stainless steel weir plates shall be fabricated to dimensions indicated on



the drawings with top surface cut to shape The top edge of each weir plate shall be straight within 18 inch Particular care shall be taken in cutting operations All burrs or irregularities on cut edges shall be removed by grinding Weir plates shall fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel Before installation surfaces in contact with concrete shall be given a heavy coating of sealant as specified in the caulking section Weir plates shall be adjusted after installation to provide uniform overflow rate at all points

28 GALVANIZED STEEL STAIRS

Galvanized steel stairs shall be of the dimensions arrangements sizes and members to match existing conditions as indicated on the drawings They shall be accurately framed strongly and rigidly connected and smoothly finished When erected stairs shall be true to line and slope rigidly supported and shall be braced and tightened to prevent movement Treads shall be similar to grating All treads shall be level and in perfect alignment and spacing Grating stair treads shall be provided with carrier plates and abrasive nosings Stair treads shall be fastened to stair stringers with stainless steel bolts Handrails shall be in alignment and rigidly connected

After installation stairs shall be rigid and shall not sway noticeably or deflect under foot traffic If necessary to prevent noticeable movement additional supports or bracing shall be provided

29 ALUMINUM LADDERS

Aluminum ladders shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and shall be fabricated to meet all applicable OSHA requirements Ladder rails shall be fabricated of 1 12 diameter schedule 40 aluminum tubing Ladder rung s shall be at least a 1 square aluminum extrusion with grooves for nonslip surface Provide connections as shown on plans All connections shall be minimum of 12 stainless steel

PART 3 EXECUTION


Install items at locations indicated according to manufacturers instructions Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials shall generally match in color and finish and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item even though such work is not definitely shown or specified Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection Conceal fastenings where practicable Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water Items listed below require additional procedures

32 WORKMANSHIP

Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true curves Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces Provide continuous welding along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth Provide a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise



approved flush exposed riveting Mill joints where tight fits are required Corner joints shall be coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place Install in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions and approved drawings cuts and details

33 ANCHORAGE FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts expansion shields and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts lag bolts and screws for wood Do not use wood plugs in any material Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials generally matching in color and finish to which fastenings are applied Conceal fastenings where practicable

34 BUILT-IN WORK

Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry or provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses

35 WELDING

Perform welding welding inspection and corrective welding in accordance with AWS D11D11M Use continuous welds on all exposed connections Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation

36 FINISHES

361 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action Where aluminum is in contact with concrete plaster mortar masonry wood or absorptive materials subject to wetting protect with ASTM D1187D1187M asphalt-base emulsion

362 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer Surfaces when assembled shall be free of rust grease dirt and other foreign matter


Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F unless approved by the Contracting Officer

37 MOUNTING OF SAFETY CHAINS

Mount safety chains 3 feet 6 inches and 2 feet above the floor






SECTION 06 82 14

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS0215

PART 1 GENERAL

This Section includes but is not limited to new fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and tube railingguards mounting systems and accessories

11 REFERENCES





ASSESAFE A103 (2013) Operations - Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems





ASME B18212M (1999 R 2014) Lock Washers (Metric Series)





ASTM C1107C1107M (2014a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic-Cement Grout



(Nonshrink)

ASTM D1148 (2013) Standard Test Method for Rubber DeteriorationmdashDiscoloration from Ultraviolet (UV) and Heat Exposure of Light-Colored Surfaces

ASTM D2344D2344M (2016) Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates

ASTM D430 (2006 R 2012) Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration - Dynamic Fatigue


ASTM D696 (2016) Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer

ASTM D790 (2015 E 2016 E 2016) Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials




ICC IBC (2015) International Building Code


NFPA 101 (2015 ERTA 2015) Life Safety Code


29 CFR 191023 Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes


12 SUBMITTALS



Manufacturers Sample Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings




SD-03 Product Data

FRP Pipe and Tube

RailingsGuards

Anchorage Materials

Adhesives

Resins

Hardeners

SD-06 Test Reports

Ultraviolet Test Reports

Thermal Expansion Test Reports

Flame Spread Test Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Manufacturers Certification by the State of North Carolina Product Approval

Proof of Certification from a minimum of two quality assurance programs for its facilities or products (UL DNV ABS USCG AARR)


Manufacturers Instructions


Manufacturers Certification of Installation



13 QUALITY CONTROL

131 Qualifications of Manufacturer

Provide items within this section from manufacturers having a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems

Submit documentation proving of a minimum of at least 5 previous separate similar installations within the last 5 years

Provide Manufacturers sample warranty for all FRP products against defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of 5 years Provide evidence of manufacturers ISO 9001-2000 standard certification



14 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE

Deliver all manufactured materials in original unbroken pallets packages containers or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturers clearly marked and identified relative to the complete system Provide all adhesives resins and their catalysts and hardeners in clearly marked or noted crates or boxes to facilitate their safe movement to a dry indoor storage facility with a constant temperature range between 70 and 85 degrees F until they are required

Handle all materials to prevent abrasion cracking chipping twisting or other deformations and other types of damage

PART 2 PRODUCTS


211 Installation Drawings

Submit templates erection and installation drawings indicating thickness type and dimensions Show construction details reinforcement anchorage and installation with relation to the building construction

Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to other work Indicate for installed products to comply with design loads Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation

212 Product Data

Submit manufacturers catalog data including two copies of manufacturers specifications load tables dimension diagrams and anchor details for the following items

a FRP Pipe and Tube

b RailingsGuards

c Anchorage Materials

d Adhesives

e Resins

f Hardeners


Ensure all posts and rails are FRP structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process Compose structural shapes of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities quantities properties arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements in accordance with ASCE 7 29 CFR 191023 NFPA 101 and dimensions specified

Ensure fiberglass reinforcements a combination of continuous roving continuous strand mat and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application andor physical properties required



Provide resins with appropriate hardeners of isophthalic polyester with chemical formulation necessary for corrosion resistance strength and other physical properties as required

Ensure all finished surfaces of FRP items including FRP pipe and tube railingsguards anchorage materials and fabrications are smooth resin-rich free of voids and without dry spots cracks and un-reinforced areas Provide complete coverage of all glass fibers with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering

Protect all pultruded structural shapes from ultraviolet (UV) attack with

a Integral UV inhibitors within the resin

b Synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a resin rich surface

c UV resistant coating for outdoor exposures

Provide FRP products which have a flame spread rating of 25 or less as per ASTM E84 Tunnel Test Submit five (5) copies of Flame Spread Test Reports to the Contracting Officer

Ensure rails posts and kick plates are integrally pigmented yellow Submit five (5) copies of Ultraviolet Test Reports for FRP material similar to the requirements of ASTM D1148 for rubber deterioration and ASTM D430 to the Contracting Officer Submit testing data relating to Thermal Expansion Test Reports

Provide structural shapes in the guardrail system to meet minimum longitudinal mechanical properties as follows

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 30000 psi

Tensile Modulus ASTM D638 2500000 psi

Flexural Strength ASTM D790 30000 psi

Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 1800000 psi

Flexural Modulus-Full Section

2800000 psi

Short Beam Shear ASTM D2344D2344M 4500 psi

Shear Modulus-Transverse 450000 psi


ASTM D696 000008 ininF

Flame Spread ASTM E84 25 or less


2141 Structural Performance of Pipe and Tube Railings

Provide a pipe and tube railing system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads in accordance with ASCE 7 and International Building



Code ICC IBC the State of North Carolina Building Code with the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

a Handrails




b Top Rails of Guards




c Infill of Guards

(1) Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq ft

(2) Uniform load of 25 lbfsqft applied horizontally

(3) Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently

22 FABRICATION

Perform fabrication of the handrail postrail connection such that the rails are unbroken and continuous through the post without the use of packs or splices Install the bottom rail through the post at a prepared hole made to fit the outside dimensions of the rail and the top rail fit into a machined u-shaped pocket formed into top of the post such that the rail is located at the center of the post Radius all exposed corners to eliminate sharp edges Join the rails to the post through a combination of bonding and riveting No sharp protruding edges are to remain after assembly of the handrail Spacing of the posts are not to exceed 6-0 Attach post base according to the construction contract drawings Reinforce post base to a height of 8-12-inches All field and shop fabricated cuts are to be coated with a vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance

23 MATERIALS

231 Fasteners

Provide Type 316 stainless-steel concealed fasteners unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated

232 Anchors

Provide cast-in-place epoxy mechanical anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to six times the design load imposed when installed in unit



masonry and equal to four times the design load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488E488M

233 Grout And Anchoring Cement

Provide factory-packaged non-shrink nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C1107C1107M or water-resistant non-shrink anchoring cement recommended by manufacturer for exterior use Ensure all other adhesives conform to the manufacturers recommendations and instructions

234 Component Connections


Provide lag screws and bolts conforming to ASME B1821 of the type and grade best suited for the purpose

2342 Toggle Bolts

Provide toggle bolts conforming to ASME B1821


Provide bolts nuts studs and rivets conforming to ASME B1822 and ASTM A307

2344 Power Driven Fasteners

Follow safety provisions of ASSESAFE A103

2345 Screws

Provide screws conforming to ASME B1821 ASME B1862 and ASME B1863

2346 Washers

Provide plain washers conforming to ASME B18211 Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels square or rectangular tapered in thickness and smooth Provide lock washers conforming to ASME B18212M and ASME B18211

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install items in accordance with 29 CFR 191023 and 29 CFR 1926 at locations indicated according to manufacturers instructions Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication Materials and parts necessary to complete each item even though such work is not definitely shown or specified to be included Perform cutting drilling and fitting required for installing railings Set railings accurately in location alignment and elevation Submit five (5) signed copies of Manufacturers Certification of Installation

a Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 116 inch in three (3) feet

b Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 14 inch in twelve (12) feet



311 Anchorage Fastenings and Connections

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous FRP items securely in place Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts expansion shields and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts and screws Conceal fastenings where practicable

312 Workmanship

FRP work to be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true curves Drilling and punching to produce clean true lines and surfaces Exposed surfaces of work in place to have a smooth finish Where tight fits are required joints to be milled Corner joints to be coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place Installation to be in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions and approved drawings cuts and details


321 Warranty

Submit five (5) signed copies of the Manufacturers Warranty 30 calendar days before final inspection


Submit manufacturers instructions for shipping handling erection procedures and care and maintenance upon completion of installation




SECTION 07 13 53

ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING0216

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C1305 (2008) Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane

ASTM D1004 (2013) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting

ASTM D1149 (2007 R 2012) Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber

ASTM D1204 (2014) Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature

ASTM D146D146M (2004 E 2012 R 2012) Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing

ASTM D1876 (2008 R 2015 E 2015) Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test)

ASTM D2136 (2002 R 2012) Coated Fabrics - Low-Temperature Bend Test

ASTM D2240 (2015) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

ASTM D297 (2015) Rubber Products - Chemical Analysis

ASTM D3045 (1992 R 2010) Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics Without Load

ASTM D41D41M (2011 R 2016) Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing Dampproofing and Waterproofing


ASTM D429 (2014) Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid



Substrates


ASTM D5385D5385M (1993 R 2014 E 2014) Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes

ASTM D570 (1998 E 2010 R 2010) Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics

ASTM D573 (2004 R 2010) Standard Test Method for Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven

ASTM D624 (2000 R 2012) Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers


ASTM D746 (2014) Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact

ASTM D751 (2006 R 2011) Coated Fabrics

ASTM D903 (1998 R 2010) Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds

ASTM E154E154M (2008a R 2013 E 2013) Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs on Walls or as Ground Cover


12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturers Standard Details



SD-06 Test Reports


Field Quality Control documentation

SD-07 Certificates





Draft Special Warranties

Final Special Warranties

Certificates Of Compliance




Certificates Of Compliance with sustainable requirements for items listed in SD-07

13 MANUFACTURERS DETAILS

Submit manufacturers standard details indicating methods of attachment and spacing transition and termination details and installation details Include verification of existing conditions

14 PRODUCT DATA

Include data for material descriptions recommendations for product shelf life requirements for protective coverings and manufacturers material safety data sheets (MSDS) for primers adhesives and mastics

15 DELIVERY STORAGE HANDLING IDENTIFICATION

Deliver and store materials in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions out of the weather in manufacturers original packaging with brand name and product identification clearly marked Keep materials wrapped and separated from off-gassing materials (such as drying paints and adhesives) Do not use materials that have visible moisture or biological growth Do not permit unidentified materials in the work area or in the project


Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when there is ice frost surface moisture or visible dampness on the surface to receive waterproofing for when ambient and surface temperatures are 40 degrees F or below

17 SPECIAL WARRANTIES

171 Guarantee

Guarantee waterproofing membrane installation against failure due to leaks for a period of two years from the date of Beneficial Occupancy Submit draft and final guarantees in accordance with Sections 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS and 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA



172 Warranty

Provide manufacturers material warranty for all system components for a period of ten years from the date of Beneficial Occupancy Submit draft and final warranties in accordance with Sections 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS and 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Provide one of the types of elastomeric waterproofing sheet material and related primers adhesives and mastics as specified herein Ensure compatibility of waterproofing materials with each other and with materials on which they are applied Provide materials that comply with applicable requirements cited below when tested in accordance with the referenced ASTM publications

22 BUTYL RUBBER SHEETING

Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness

221 Butyl Rubber Sheeting Performance Requirements

a Thickness Tolerance ASTM D412 Plus or minus 10 percent

b Specific Gravity ASTM D297 120 plus or minus 005

c Tensile Strength ASTM D412 1200 psi minimum

d Tensile Stress at 300 percent elongation ASTM D412 600 psi minimum

e Elongation ASTM D412 300 percent minimum

f Tear Resistance Die C ASTM D624 150 pound force per inch (lbfinch) minimum

g Shore A Hardness ASTM D2240 5-second interval before reading 60 plus or minus 10

h Ozone Resistance ASTM D1149 No cracks 7 days - 50 pphm - 100 degrees F 20 percent elongation

i Heating Aging-Accelerated ASTM D573 Tensile retention 60 percent of minimum original elongation retention 60 percent of minimum original requirement 7 days 240 degrees F

j Butyl Identification ASTM D471 REV A Tricresyl Phosphate Immersion Maximum volume swell 10 percent 70 hrs 212 degrees F

k Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D746 No failure at minus 40 degrees F

l Water Absorption ASTM D471 REV A Plus 1 percent maximum 7 days 158 degrees F

m Exposure to Fungi and Bacteria in Soil ASTM E154E154M REV A Minimum 16 Weeks Unaffected



n Water Vapor Transmission 80 degrees F Permeance ASTM E96E96M Procedure B or BW 015 perms maximum

222 Adhesive Cement and Tape for Use with Butyl Rubber

As recommended by the butyl rubber waterproofing membrane manufacturer

23 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) flexible sheets with non-woven fiberglass reinforcing not less than 60 mils minimum thickness

231 Thermoplastic Membrane Performance Requirements

a Overall thickness ASTM D751 059 inches minimum

b Tensile strength ASTM D638 1600 psi minimum

c Elongation at break ASTM D638 250 percent minimum

d Seam strength ASTM D638 90 percent minimum of tensile strength

e Retention of properties after heat aging ASTM D3045

f Tensile strength ASTM D638 95 percent of original

g Elongation ASTM D638 95 percent of original

h Tear resistance ASTM D1004 17 lbf

i Low Temperature Bend ASTM D2136 minus 40 degrees F

j Liner Dimensional Change ASTM D1204 0002 percent

k Weight Change After Immersion in Water ASTM D570 20 percent maximum

232 Adhesives

a Adhesive for thermoplastic flashings as recommended by manufacturer

b Adhesive for Sub-Membrane Grid 100 percent solids two part urethane with minimum tensile strength of 150 psi in accordance with ASTM D412 and adhesion to concrete of 12 ply in accordance with ASTM D429 as recommended by manufacturer

233 Accessories

Securement Strip 14 gauge stainless steel metal bar 1 inch wide pre-punched 1 inch on center for securement

24 COMPOSITE SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE SHEETING

Cold applied composite sheet consisting of rubberized asphalt and cross laminated high density polyethylene film Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness is required

241 Composite Self-Adhering Sheeting Performance Requirements

a Tensile Strength ASTM D412 Die C 250 psi minimum



b Ultimate Elongation ASTM D412 Die C 200 percent minimum

c Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E96E96M 80 degrees F Permeance Procedure B 01 perm maximum

d Pliability degrees ASTM D146D146M (180 degrees Bend Over 1 Inch Mandrel) No cracks at minus minus 25 degrees F

e Provide test report data for crack bridging ability Either in accordance with ASTM C1305 as modified for a dry film thickness specified by the manufacturer and conducted at low temperature or in accordance with a cycling over crack test also conducted for the specified dry film thickness at low temperature Using either test verify crack bridging up to 14 inch without damage to the membrane system

f Puncture Resistance ASTM E154E154M REV A 40 lb minimum

g Lap Adhesion at Minimum Application Temperature ASTM D1876 Modified 5 lbsin

h Peel Strength ASTM D903 Modified 9 lbsin

i Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D5385D5385M 231 ft of water

j Water Absorption ASTM D570 01 percent maximum

242 Primers

Asphalt composition ASTM D41D41M or synthetic polymer in solvent as recommended by the membrane manufacturer

243 Mastics

Polymer modified asphalt in suitable solvent of trowel grade consistency and as recommended by the membrane manufacturer

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

Before starting the work verify surfaces that must be waterproofed are in satisfactory condition Notify the Contracting Officer of defects or conditions anticipated to prevent a satisfactory application Do not start application until defects and conditions have been corrected


Ensure surfaces to receive treatment are clean dry smooth and free from deleterious materials and projections Cut off high spots or grind smooth Finish top surfaces of projecting masonry or concrete ledges below grade except footings to a steep bevel with Portland cement mortar Sweep surfaces to receive covering before applying waterproofing to remove dust and foreign matter Cure concrete by a method compatible with the waterproofing system



33 APPLICATION

331 General Installation Requirements

Provide sheet waterproofing in accordance with manufacturers printed installation instructions Ensure the surface to receive membrane is clean smooth and dry without surface irregularities correct deficiencies prior to installation When using solvent welding liquid avoid prolonged contact with skin and breathing of vapor and provide adequate ventilation Carry waterproofing of horizontal surfaces up abutting vertical surfaces and adhere solid to the substrate Avoid wrinkles and buckles in applying membrane and joint reinforcement

3311 Non-Self-Adhering Membrane

Unroll membrane and allow to remain flat for at least one-half hour before application Apply an asphalt concrete primer prior to application of asphaltic adhesive Where solvent adhesive is applied allow major portion of solvent to evaporate so that bonding adhesive does not stick to a dry finger touching it Apply elastomeric waterproofing membrane in a full bed of adhesive at a uniform coverage rate in accordance with the membrane manufacturers printed instructions Where membrane on horizontal surfaces are to receive concrete fill apply adhesive in 4 inch wide strips at 2 feet on center Pull membrane tight without stretching As soon as adhesive is fully set and dry recheck lap splices Where openings or fishmouths appear reseal and reroll lap splices

3312 Self-Adhering Membrane

Apply composite self-adhering membrane on surfaces primed at a uniform coverage rate in accordance with membrane manufacturers printed instructions Remove release sheet and apply with tacky surface in contact with dried primer

3313 Protection

Protect membrane over horizontal surfaces from traffic during installation Use only equipment with rubber tires Provide walkway protection where heavy traffic from other trades is expected Do not store material on membrane

332 Butyl Rubber

Lap sheets at sides and ends a minimum of 6 inches over the preceding sheet Apply lap splicing cement over entire 6 inches splice area prior to application of sealant Make sealant continuous along the entire length of the splice Maintain a continuous bead of sealant at all membrane splices or as required by the manufacturer Provide a tongue and groove cemented splice a minimum of 6 inches wide with factory made heat vulcanized seam of not less than 2 inches or as required by the manufacturer when membrane is below water table

333 Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC)

Consult with membrane manufacturer prior to grid application Install 12 inches wide sub-membrane containment grid as required by manufacturer Provide the containment grid at intervals across the width and length of the substrate at the base of all transitions walls curbs penetrations and at the perimeter of each decksubstrate section Fully adhere strips



to the deck in a full bedding of two-part urethane adhesive Weld adjacent sheets in accordance with manufacturers instructions Hot-air weld all side and end lap joints Provide lap area a minimum of 3 inch wide when machine welding and a minimum of 4 inch wide when hand welding but not less than recommended by the manufacturer Orient overlaps with the direction of flow of water

34 COMPOSITE SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE

Lap sheets at edges and ends a minimum of 2-12 inches over the preceding sheet Provide all side laps a minimum 2-12 inches and end laps 5 inches Provide self-adhesive mastic laps in accordance with manufacturers recommendation Roll or firmly press to adhere membrane to substrate Cover corners and joints with two layers of reinforcement by first applying a 12 inch width of membrane centered along the axis Flash drains and projections with a second ply of membrane for a distance of 6 inches from the drain or projection Finish exposed terminated edges of membrane on horizontal or vertical surfaces with a toweled bead of mastic Apply mastic around edges of membrane and drains and projections Apply mastic at end of each work day


Notify the Contracting Officer 5 working days prior to date of performing tests Before concealment cover elastomeric waterproofing on horizontal surfaces over finished spaces with 4 inches of ponded water for 24 hours Do not add water after start of 24 hour period Accurately measure water level at beginning and end of 24 hour period If water level falls remove water and inspect waterproofing membrane Make repairs or replacement as directed and repeat test Do not proceed with work that conceals membrane waterproofing before receiving approval and acceptance of the Contracting Officer




SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING0510

PART 1 GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

Furnish and install tested and listed firestopping systems combination of materials or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls partitions floors and ceiling-floor assemblies including through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps

a Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes tubes conduit wires cables and vents

b Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion contraction wind or seismic movement firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the joint

Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the roof or floor deck above and at the intersection of shaft assemblies and adjoining fire resistance rated assemblies

12 REFERENCES



ASTM E119 (2016a) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

ASTM E1399E1399M (1997 E 2013R 2013) Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems

ASTM E1966 (2015) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

ASTM E2174 (2014b) Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops

ASTM E2307 (2015a) Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale Multi-story Test Apparatus

ASTM E2393 (2010a) Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers



ASTM E699 (2009) Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing Quality Assurance and Evaluating of Building Components

ASTM E814 (2013a) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops


FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM 4991 (2013) Approval of Firestop Contractors



UL 1479 (2015) Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

UL 2079 (2004 Reprint Dec 2014) Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems


UL Fire Resistance (2014) Fire Resistance Directory

13 SEQUENCING

Coordinate the specified work with other trades Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes and ducts prior to insulating unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Apply firestopping materials at building joints and construction gaps prior to completion of enclosing walls or assemblies Cast-in-place firestop devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement Pipe conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made inaccessible Firestop material shall be inspected and approved prior to final completion and enclosing of any assemblies that may conceal installed firestop

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Firestopping System

SD-03 Product Data




SD-06 Test Reports

Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

Inspector Qualifications


Installer Qualifications


151 Installer

Engage an experienced Installer who is

a FM Research approved in accordance with FM 4991 operating as a UL Certified Firestop Contractor or

b Certified licensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary staff training and a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of manufacturers products in accordance with specified requirements Submit documentation of this experience A manufacturers willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer installer qualifications on the buyer The Installer shall have been trained by a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent) in the proper selection and installation procedures The installer shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit written certification of training and retain proof of certification for duration of firestop installation

152 Inspector Qualifications

The inspector shall meet the criteria contained in ASTM E699 for agencies involved in quality assurance and shall have a minimum of two years experience in construction field inspections of firestopping systems products and assemblies The inspector shall be completely independent of and divested from the installer the manufacturer and the supplier of any material or item being inspected The inspector shall not be a competitor of the installer the contractor the manufacturer or supplier of any material or item being inspected Include in the qualifications submittal a notarized statement assuring compliance with the requirements stated herein


Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name Store materials off the ground protected from damage and exposure to elements and temperatures in accordance with manufacturer requirements Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the site Use materials within their indicated shelf life



PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM

Submit detail drawings including manufacturers descriptive data typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report For those firestop applications for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer a manufacturers engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be submitted for review and approval prior to installation Submittal must indicate the firestopping material to be provided for each type of application When more than a total of 5 penetrations andor construction joints are to receive firestopping provide drawings that indicate location F T and L ratings and type of application

Also submit a written report indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firstopping used at each location record type by UL list printed numbers


Provide firestopping materials supplied from a single domestic manufacturer consisting of commercially manufactured asbestos-free nontoxic products FM APP GUIDE approved or UL listed for use with applicable construction and penetrating items complying with the following minimum requirements

221 Fire Hazard Classification

Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory

222 Toxicity

Material shall be nontoxic and carcinogen free to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions and shall not contain hazardous chemicals or require harmful chemicals to clean material or equipment

223 Fire Resistance Rating

Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM APP GUIDE approved with F rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected Where required firestop systems shall also have T rating at least equal to the fire-rated floor in which the openings are to be protected

2231 Through-Penetrations

Firestopping materials for through-penetrations as described in paragraph SYSTEM DESCRIPTION shall provide F T and L fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 Fire resistance ratings shall be as follows



22311 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions

F Rating = 2 hour 2 Rating of wall or partition being penetrated

22312 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors Floor-Ceiling Assemblies and the Ceiling Membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies

F Rating = 2 hour Where the penetrating item is outside of a wall cavity the F rating must be equal to the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated

22313 Penetrations of Fire and Smoke Resistance Rated Walls Floors Floor-Ceiling Assemblies and the ceiling membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies

F Rating = 2 hour

2232 Construction Joints and Gaps

Fire resistance ratings of construction joints as described in paragraph SYSTEM DESCRIPTION and gaps such as those between floor slabs and curtain walls shall be as follows construction joints in walls 2 hour construction joints in floors 2 hour gaps between floor slabs and curtain walls 2 hour gaps between top of the walls and the bottom of roof and floor decks 2 hour Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E119 ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating Curtain wall joints shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E2307 to meet the required fire resistance rating Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E1399E1399M or UL 2079 All joints at the intersection of the top of a fire resistance rated wall and the underside of a fire-rated floor floor ceiling or roof ceiling assembly shall provide a minimum class II movement capability

224 Material Certification

Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified requirements For all intumescent firestop materials used in through penetration systems manufacturer shall provide certification of compliance with UL 1479

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

Areas to receive firestopping must be free of dirt grease oil or loose materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system For cast-in-place firestop devices formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement must be sound and capable of supporting device Prepare surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer

32 INSTALLATION

Completely fill void spaces with firestopping material regardless of geometric configuration subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction must be capable of supporting the same load as the



floor is designed to support or be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturers written instructions Provide tested and listed firestop systems in the following locations except in floor slabs on grade

a Penetrations of duct conduit tubing cable and pipe through floors and through fire-resistance rated walls partitions and ceiling-floor assemblies

b Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases elevator shafts and utility chutes

c Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls including inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab

d Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks

e Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions

f Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction

321 Insulated Pipes and Ducts

Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Replace thermal insulation with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics

322 Data and Communication Cabling

Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re-enterable firestopping products and devices as indicated

3221 Re-Enterable Devices

Firestopping devices shall be pre-manufactured modular devices containing built-in self-sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves additions or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials Devices must be capable of maintaining the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill of penetrants while maintaining L rating of lt10 cfmsf measured at ambient temperature and 400 degrees F at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill

3222 Re-Sealable Products

Provide firestopping pre-manufactured modular products containing self-sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping products shall allow for cable moves additions or changes Devices shall be capable of maintaining the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill of penetrants

33 INSPECTION

For Navy projects install one of each type of penetration and have it inspected and accepted by the Atlantic Division Naval Facilities



Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer prior to the installation of the remainder of the penetrations At this inspection the manufacturers technical representative of the firestopping material shall be present For all projects the remainder of the firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved by the Contracting Officer The inspector must inspect the applications initially to ensure adequate preparations (clean surfaces suitable for application etc) and periodically during the work to assure that the completed work has been accomplished according to the manufacturers written instructions and the specified requirements Submit written reports indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at each location type shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers

331 Inspection Standards

Inspect all firestopping in accordance to ASTM E2393 and ASTM E2174 for firestop inspection and document inspection results to be submitted

332 Inspection Reports

Submit inspection report stating that firestopping work has been inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturers recommendations and the specified requirements




SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS0511

PART 1 GENERAL

The contractor shall paint exterior items including the bar screen motors plus ferrous and non-ferrous metals - primarily exposed pipelines valves and fittings plus other related items (not galvanized and not stainless steel)installed as shown by the drawings Interior walls uncovered to allow mounting of electricalcontrol panels shall be painted upon direction of the Contracting Officer

The coatings for concrete rehabilitation including specialty products are specifed elsewhere

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH 0100 (2015 Suppl 2002-2016) Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices


ASTM D235 (2002 R 2012) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)

ASTM D4214 (2007 R 2015) Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films

ASTM D4263 (1983 R 2012) Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

ASTM D523 (2014) Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

ASTM F1869 (2016) Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride


MPI 101 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

MPI 107 (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water-Based)

MPI 108 (Oct 2009) High Build Epoxy Coating Low Gloss









MPI 146 (Oct 2009) Institutional Low OdorVOC Interior Latex MPI Gloss Level 4

MPI 147 (May 2016) Institutional Low Odor VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 164 (Oct 2009) Exterior WB Light Industrial Coating Gloss MPI Gloss Level 6

MPI 23 (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer

MPI 4 (Oct 2009) InteriorExterior Latex Block Filler

MPI 50 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer

MPI 72 (Oct 2009) Polyurethane Two Component Pigmented Gloss


MPI 9 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd Gloss MPI Gloss Level 6

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

SCS SP-01 (2000) Environmentally Preferable Product Specification for Architectural and Anti-Corrosive Paints


SSPC 7NACE No4 (2007 E 2004) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC PA 1 (2000 E 2004) Shop Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel

SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982 E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint



Application

SSPC QP 1 (2012 E 2012) Standard Procedure for Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field Application to Complex Industrial Structures)

SSPC SP 1 (2015) Solvent Cleaning


SSPC SP 12NACE No5 (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating

SSPC SP 2 (1982 E 2000 E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 (1982 E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning


SSPC VIS 1 (2002 E 2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning

SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Hand and Power Tool Cleaning




MIL-STD-101 (2014 Rev C) Color Code for Pipelines and for Compressed Gas Cylinders


FED-STD-313 (2014 Rev E) Material Safety Data Transportation Data and Disposal Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government Activities


29 CFR 19101000 Air Contaminants

12 SUBMITTALS


The current MPI Approved Product List which lists paint by brand label product name and product code as of the date of contract award will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI Approved Product List however only one list may be used for the entire



contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer No variation from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable

Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with specification requirements

In keeping with the intent of Executive Order 13101 Greening the Government through Waste Prevention Recycling and Federal Acquisition products certified by SCS as meeting SCS SP-01 shall be given preferential consideration over registered products Products that are registered shall be given preferential consideration over products not carrying any EPP designation

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Piping identification

Submit color stencil codes

SD-03 Product Data

Coating

Manufacturers Technical Data Sheets

SD-04 Samples

Color

Submit manufacturers samples of paint colors

SD-07 Certificates

Applicators qualifications


Application instructions

Mixing

Detailed mixing instructions minimum and maximum application temperature and humidity potlife and curing and drying times between coats

Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets

Submit manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings solvents and other potentially hazardous materials as defined in FED-STD-313

13 APPLICATORS QUALIFICATIONS

131 SSPC QP 1 Certification

All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or coating application shall be certified by the Society for Protective Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the



requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award and shall remain certified while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating application The painting contractors and painting subcontractors must remain so certified for the duration of the project If a contractors or subcontractors certification expires the firm will not be allowed to perform any work until the certification is reissued Requests for extension of time for any delay to the completion of the project due to an inactive certification will not be considered and liquidated damages will apply Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in contractor certification status


141 Field Samples and Tests

The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government Take samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph Sampling Procedures Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph Testing Procedure Products which do not conform shall be removed from the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced specification Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing shall be at no cost to the Government

1411 Sampling Procedure

The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that have been delivered to the job site for sample testing The Contractor shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials The samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer and labeled identifying each sample Provide labels in accordance with the paragraph Packaging Labeling and Storage of this specification

1412 Testing Procedure

Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings The qualification testing lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and the result of each test The summary shall clearly indicate whether the tested paint meets each test requirement Note that Qualification Testing may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform due to the extent of testing required

Submit name address telephone number FAX number and e-mail address of the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of coating samples for compliance with specification requirements Submit documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint samples for conformance with specifications and that employees performing testing are qualified If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch Quality Conformance testing the above submittal information is not required only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI will perform the testing


151 Environmental Protection

In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of



the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to conform

152 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 006 percent by weight of nonvolatile content

153 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate

154 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos

155 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds

156 Silica

Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica

157 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100 confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2)

16 PACKAGING LABELING AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number designation name formula or specification number batch number color quantity date of manufacture manufacturers formulation number manufacturers directions including any warnings and special precautions and name and address of manufacturer Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers written directions and as a minimum stored off the ground under cover with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F

17 SAFETY AND HEALTH

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the following

Work shall comply with applicable Federal State and local laws and regulations and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1 The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone

171 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3



172 Toxic Materials

To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials conform to the most stringent guidance of

a The applicable manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local regulation

b 29 CFR 19101000

c ACGIH 0100 threshold limit values


Comply at minimum with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation during and after installation

181 Coatings

Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are

a Less than 5 degrees F above dew point

b Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations

182 Post-Application

Vacate space for as long as possible after application Wait a minimum of 48 hours before occupying freshly painted rooms Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the curing period or for 72 hours after application

a Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day

b Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour when outside temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is between 30 percent and 60 percent

c Supply airflow at a rate of 15 air changes per hour when outside air conditions are not within the range stipulated above

19 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified Where not indicated or specified colors shall be selected by the Contracting Officer Manufacturers names and color identification are used for the purpose of color identification only Named products are acceptable for use only if they conform to specified requirements Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to specified requirements

Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of coats



110 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1101 Painting Included

Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following unless indicated otherwise

a Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal of fasteners such as screws and bolts

b New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work

c Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work

11011 Exterior Painting

Includes new surfaces existing coated surfaces and existing uncoated surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances Also included are existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations

11012 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces existing uncoated surfaces and existing coated surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following items unless indicated otherwise

a Exposed columns girders beams joists and metal deck and

b Other contiguous surfaces

1102 Painting Excluded

Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise

a Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards fixed ductwork machinery and equipment fixed in place

b Surfaces in concealed spaces Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings furred spaces attic spaces crawl spaces elevator shafts and chases

c Steel to be embedded in concrete

d Copper stainless steel aluminum brass and lead except existing coated surfaces

e Hardware fittings and other factory finished items

1103 Mechanical and Electrical Painting

Includes field coating of interior new and existing surfaces

a Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following items unless indicated otherwise (1) Exposed piping



conduit and ductwork

(2) Supports hangers air grilles and registers

(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings

b Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise

(1) New zinc-coated aluminum and copper surfaces under insulation

(2) New aluminum jacket on piping

1104 Exterior Painting of Site Work Items

Field coat the following items

Exposed pipe fittings valves and appurtenances 1105 Definitions and Abbreviations

11051 Qualification Testing

Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in the product specification This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify each product for the MPI Approved Product List and may also be accomplished by Contractors third party testing lab if an alternative to Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired

11052 Batch Quality Conformance Testing

Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product specification This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab

11053 Coating

A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate A coating may be a metal alloy paint or solidliquid suspensions on various substrates (metals plastics wood paper leather cloth etc) They may be applied by electrolysis vapor deposition vacuum or mechanical means such as brushing spraying calendaring and roller coating A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or both The term coating as used herein includes emulsions enamels stains varnishes sealers epoxies and other coatings whether used as primer intermediate or finish coat The terms paint and coating are used interchangeably

11054 DFT or dft

Dry film thickness the film thickness of the fully cured dry paint or coating

11055 DSD

Degree of Surface Degradation the MPI system of defining degree of surface degradation Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual



11056 EPP

Environmentally Preferred Products a standard for determining environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101

11057 EXT

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system

11058 INT

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system

11059 micron microns

The metric measurement for 0001 mm or oneone-thousandth of a millimeter

110510 mil mils

The English measurement for 0001 in or oneone-thousandth of an inch equal to 254 microns or 00254 mm

110511 mm

The metric measurement for millimeter 0001 meter or oneone-thousandth of a meter

110512 MPI Gloss Levels

MPI system of defining gloss Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals Traditionally Flat refers to G1G2 Eggshell refers to G3 Semigloss refers to G5 and Gloss refers to G6

Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows

Gloss Description Units UnitsLevel at 60 degrees at 85 degrees

G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 maxG2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 minG5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70 G6 Gloss 70 to 85G7 High Gloss

Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D523 Historically the Government has used Flat (G1 G2) Eggshell (G3) Semi-Gloss (G5) and Gloss (G6)

110513 MPI System Number

The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting Manual and defined as an exterior (EXTREX) or interior system (INTRIN) The Division number follows the CSI Master Format



110514 Paint

See Coating definition

110515 REX

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems

110516 RIN

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3 Submit manufacturers technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents Submit manufacturers application instructions Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications remove mask or otherwise protect hardware hardware accessories machined surfaces radiator covers plates lighting fixtures public and private property and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated Following completion of painting workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials to original condition and repair damaged items


Remove dirt splinters loose particles grease oil and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet newly painted surfaces Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints shall be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas

321 Additional Requirements for Preparation of Surfaces With Existing Coatings

Before application of coatings perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-adhered coatings defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife

a Test existing finishes for lead before sanding scraping or removing If lead is present refer to paragraph Toxic Materials



b Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings except stucco and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean dry cloth saturated with mineral spirits ASTM D235 Allow surface to dry Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the first coat of any coating unless specified otherwise

c Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss Brush and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust

d The requirements specified are minimum Comply also with the application instructions of the paint manufacturer

e Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted or damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease dirt dust or other foreign matter

f Blistering cracking flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings shall be removed

g Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214 the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8

h Slick surfaces shall be roughened Damaged areas such as but not limited to nail holes cracks chips and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas

i Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth

j Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements Solvent mechanical or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting

k New proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings

322 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand spackle and treat minor defects to render them smooth Minor defects are defined as scratches nicks cracks gouges spalls alligatoring chalking and irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coatings Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214 the chalk rating is not less than 8

323 Removal of Existing Coatings

Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces

a Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects

b Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area and

c Surfaces designated by the Contracting Officer such as surfaces where rust shows through existing coatings

324 Substrate Repair

a Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal

b Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal



and

c Clean and prime the substrate as specified

33 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

331 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces

a Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease Where shop coat is missing or damaged clean according to SSPC SP 3 Use inhibitor as recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent premature rusting Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection

b Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances Clean entire surface in accordance with SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 SSPC SP 12NACE No5 WJ-2

332 Final Ferrous Surface Condition

For tool cleaned surfaces the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and SSPC SP 3 As a visual reference cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3

For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces the requirements are stated in SSPC 7NACE No4 SSPC SP 6NACE No3 and SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 As a visual reference cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1

34 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

341 Concrete and Masonry

a Curing Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting except concrete slab on grade which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting

b Surface Cleaning Remove the following deleterious substances

(1) Dirt Grease and Oil Wash new surfaces with a solution composed of 12 cup trisodium phosphate 14 cup household detergent and 4 quarts of warm water Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water For large areas water blasting may be used

c Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects including but not limited to spalls in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and prior to coating application

d Allowable Moisture Content Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces but not to surfaces with droplets of water Do not apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F1869 In all cases follow manufacturers recommendations Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30 days before painting



35 APPLICATION

351 Coating Application

Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal state and local laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1 SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates except as modified herein

At the time of application paint shall show no signs of deterioration Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application

Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer paint may be applied by brush roller or spray Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based paints or using spray equipment with any paints

Paints except water-thinned types shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch

Thoroughly work coating materials into joints crevices and open spaces Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges corners crevices welds and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces

Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs drops ridges waves pinholes or other voids laps brush marks and variations in color texture and finish Hiding shall be complete

Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material

a Drying Time Allow time between coats as recommended by the coating manufacturer to permit thorough drying but not to present topcoat adhesion problems Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat

b Primers and Intermediate Coats Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days or longer than recommended by manufacturer before applying subsequent coats Follow manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats

c Finished Surfaces Provide finished surfaces free from runs drops ridges waves laps brush marks and variations in colors

d Thermosetting Paints Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window recommended by the manufacturer



352 Mixing and Thinning of Paints

Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint except when thinning is mandatory to suit surface temperature weather conditions application methods or for the type of paint being used Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use

When thinning is allowed paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding full film thickness or required gloss Thinning shall not cause the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed

353 Two-Component Systems

Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of substrate

354 Coating Systems

a Systems by Substrates Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications listed in the following Tables

Table

Division 5 Exterior Metal Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table

Division 3 Interior Concrete Paint Table

Division 4 Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table

b Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) Apply paints primers varnishes enamels undercoats and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables Coating thickness where specified refers to the minimum dry film thickness

c Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise Coat surfaces which have not been specified the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure

d Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces Coat surfaces with the following

(1) One coat of primer

(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat

(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces

e Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Painted Apply coatings conforming to the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein except that pretreatments sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces where existing coatings are soundly adhered and in good condition Do not omit undercoats or primers



36 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior

a Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation requirements at time of application

b Inaccessible Surfaces Prior to erection use one coat of specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection

c Shop-primed Surfaces Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer

d Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane Apply MPI 101 15 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings

e Pipes and Tubing The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat but shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application of finish coats

f Exposed Nails Screws Fasteners and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107

37 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 4 for Interior

38 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

Piping Identification Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-101 Place stenciling in clearly visible locations On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101 stencil approved names or code letters in letters a minimum of 12 inch high for piping and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere Stencil arrow-shaped markings on piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint

39 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

In addition to meeting previously specified requirements demonstrate mobility of moving components including swinging and sliding doors cabinets and windows with operable sash for inspection by the Contracting Officer Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment

310 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers Close and seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary for reuse Store in protected well-ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers



311 PAINT TABLES

All DFTs are minimum values Acceptable products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products List available at httpwwwspecifygreencomAPLProductIdxByMPInumasp

3111 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 5 EXTERIOR METAL FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

STEEL FERROUS SURFACES

A New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3

1 New MPI EXT 51Q-G6 (Gloss) Existing MPI REX 51D-G6 Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 23 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

B New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6NACE No3

1 New MPI EXT 51D-G6 (Gloss) Existing MPI REX 51D-G6 Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

C Existing steel that has been spot-blasted to SSPC SP 6NACE No3

1 Surface previously coated with alkyd or latex

Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI REX 51C-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

2 Surface previously coated with epoxy

Waterborne Light Industrial MPI REX 51L-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

Pigmented Polyurethane b MPI REX 51H-G6 (Gloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 72 System DFT 85 mils

D New and existing steel blast cleaned to SSPC SP 10NACE No 2

1 Waterborne Light Industrial MPI EXT 51R-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 164 System DFT 85 mils



STEEL FERROUS SURFACES 2 Pigmented Polyurethane MPI EXT 51J-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 72 System DFT 85 mils

EXTERIOR SURFACES OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)

E Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces Mechanical Electrical valves conduit hangers supports and miscellaneous metal items not otherwise specified Match surrounding finish

1 Alkyd MPI EXT 51D-G6 (Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 525 mils

2 Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI EXT 51C-G6(Gloss) Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 164 MPI 164 System DFT 5 mils

3112 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 4 INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

A Uncoated Existing Concrete masonry

1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 42D-G4 (Satin) Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 NA MPI 140 MPI 140 System DFT 11 mils

Fill all holes in masonry surface

2 Institutional Low Odor Low VOC Latex New MPI INT 42E-G4 (Satin) Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 NA MPI 146 MPI 146 System DFT 4 mils

B Existing previously painted Concrete masonry

1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI RIN 42K-G2 (Flat) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 138 MPI 138 System DFT 45 mils

MPI RIN 42K-G3 (Eggshell) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT 45 mils



DIVISION 4 INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE MPI RIN 42K-G4 Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 140 MPI 140 System DFT 45 mils

MPI RIN 42K-G5 (Semigloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 141 MPI 141 System DFT 45 mils

2 Institutional Low Odor Low VOC Latex Existing MPI RIN 42L-G2 (Flat) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 144 MPI 144 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G3 (Eggshell) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 145 MPI 145 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G4 (Satin) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 146 MPI 146 System DFT 4 mils

Existing MPI RIN 42L-G5 (Semigloss) Spot Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 147 MPI 147 System DFT 4 mils




SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE1115

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASME A11261M (1997 R 2012) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use


ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120


ASTM D2672 (2014) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement

ASTM D2855 (2015) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F1760 (2016) Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content


ICC IPC (2015) International Plumbing Code


MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded Socket-Welding Solder Joint Grooved and Flared Ends




NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSFANSI 14 (2016a) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSFANSI 61 (2016) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects


PL 93-523 (1974 A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Plumbing System

Detail drawings consisting of schedules performance charts instructions diagrams and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections dimensions for roughing-in foundation and support points schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated details shall include loadings and proposed support methods Mechanical drawing plans elevations views and details shall be drawn to scale

SD-03 Product Data

Plumbing System

Diagrams instructions and other sheets proposed for posting Manufacturers recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria completion and testing of the installed system Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls

SD-07 Certificates



Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a



manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period


Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer Replace damaged or defective items


Unless otherwise required herein plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC


The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work verify dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work

17 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install valves cleanouts and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content in accordance with ASTM F1760 Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials Plastic pipe fittings and solvent cement shall meet NSFANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended Plastic pipe fittings and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal NSF-PW In line devices such as water meters check valves valves and fittings shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSFANSI 61 Section 8

211 Pipe Joint Materials

a Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855

212 Miscellaneous Materials

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following

a Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures ASME A11261M



213 Pipe Insulation Material

Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

22 PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58

23 VALVES

Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures Valves 2 inches and larger shall be PVC Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application Valves shall conform to the following standards

Description Standard

Ball Valves Threaded Socket-Welding MSS SP-110

231 Frost Proof Hydrants

Two-inch frost proof hydrants shall have valve housings located below heat trace and insolation Water from the casing shall be drained after valve is shut off Hydrant shall be bronze with cast-iron box or casing guard A 10-inch diameter handwheel shall be provided

24 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

241 Pipe Hangers (Supports)

Provide MSS SP-58 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods except as specified or indicated otherwise Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21 28 29 or 30 clamps Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping

PART 3 EXECUTION


The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fittings valves and accessories Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building unless otherwise indicated A ball valve shall be installed on water service laterals inside the building at indicated locations Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines

311 Water Pipe Fittings and Connections

3111 Utilities

The piping shall be extended to fixtures outlets and equipment The non-potable piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining The supply line to each item of equipment shall be equipped



with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures Supply piping to equipment and valves shall be anchored to prevent movement

3112 Cutting and Repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided Damage to piping wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved

3113 Protection of Fixtures Materials and Equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt water chemicals and mechanical injury Upon completion of the work the fixtures materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned adjusted and operated

3114 Mains Branches and Runouts

Piping shall be installed as indicated Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top bottom or side of main using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions Supply pipes valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 12 inch between finished covering on the different services Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice Change in direction shall be made with fittings

312 Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended

313 Supports

3131 General

Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment to direct the expansion movement and to prevent buckling swaying and undue strain Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe



run Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent

3132 Pipe Hangers Inserts and Supports

Installation of pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 except as modified herein

a Types 5 12 and 26 shall not be used

b Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe

c Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts

d Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-58 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable

e Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter

f Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames

g Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe

h Type 40 shields shall

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater

i Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-58 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction

j Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications

k Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress distort cut or abrade the piping and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansioncontraction

3133 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in



concrete inserts built-in anchors or masonry anchor devices Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5 Supports shall not be attached to metal decking Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only

314 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required Cleanouts in connection with PVC pipe where indicated shall be wye fittings with plastic plugs installed Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches

32 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

321 Identification Tags

Identification tags made of brass engraved laminated plastic or engraved anodized aluminum indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves Tags shall be 1-38 inch minimum diameter and marking shall be stamped or engraved Indentations shall be black for reading clarity Tags shall be attached to valves with No 12 AWG copper wire chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose

322 Pipe Color Code Marking

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

33 PAINTING

Painting of pipes hangers supports and other iron work either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

34 TESTS FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

341 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC

a Water Supply Systems Tests

342 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable

343 System Flushing

3431 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection water piping system shall be flushed Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that



is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system

3432 After Flushing

System shall be drained

344 Hydrostatic Tests

The pipeline shall be subjected to both a pressure test and a leakage test The test may be witnessed by the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 7 days in advance of equipment tests The final test report shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of the test

3441 Pressure Test

After the pipe has been installed joints completed thrust blocks have been in place for at least five days and the trench has been partially backfilled leaving the joints exposed for examination the pipe shall be filled with water to expel all air The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of 150 psi for a period of at least one hour Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test The exposed pipe joints fittings and valves shall be examined for leaks Visible leaks shall be stopped or the defective pipe fitting joints or valves shall be replaced

3442 Leakage Test

The leakage test may be conducted subsequent to or concurrently with the pressure test The amount of water permitted as leakage for the line shall be placed in a sealed container attached to the supply side of the test pump No other source of supply will be permitted to be applied to the pump or line under test The water shall be pumped into the line by the test pump as required to maintain the specified test pressure as described for pressure test for a 2 hour period Exhaustion of the supply or the inability to maintain the required pressure will be considered test failure PE pipe can experience diametric expansion and pressure elongation during initial testing The manufacturer shall be consulted prior to testing for special testing considerations Allowable leakage shall be determined by the following I-P formula

L = NDPK Where









3443 Retesting


35 TABLES

TABLE II

PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Item Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A SERVICE B SERVICE C SERVICE D

1 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120 ASTM D1785

X

2 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent cement ASTM D2672

X

SERVICE A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses - Type L - Hard - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors - In or under slab floors only brazed joints




SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS0213

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only At the discretion of the Government the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification





ASTM C1136 (2012) Standard Specification for Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C195 (2007 R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C534C534M (2014) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 (2015) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 (2016a) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C916 (2014) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation


ASTM E2231 (2015) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E84 (2016) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building



Materials


FM GLOBAL (FM)




MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial amp Industrial Insulation Standards


NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B (2015) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems





121 General

Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein

122 Recycled Materials

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are



Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight

Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight

Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material

13 SUBMITTALS


Submit the three SD types SD-02 Shop Drawings SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions at the same time for each system

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories

SD-03 Product Data





Recycled Content for Pipe Insulation Materials


141 Installer Qualification

Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years


Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturers unopened containers Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather humidity dirt dust and other contaminants The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty dusty wet or contaminated by some other means Packages or standard containers of insulation jacket material cements adhesives and coatings delivered for use and samples required for approval shall have manufacturers stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand and a description of the material date codes and approximate shelf life (if applicable) Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

For products in this section where applicable and to extent allowed by



performance criteria provide and document the following

211 Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials

Provide documentation that the following products meet the recycled content requirements as outlined in this section

a Pipe Insulation Systems


Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening Submit a complete list of materials including manufacturers descriptive technical literature performance data catalog cuts and installation instructions The product number k-value thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included The product data must be copyrighted have an identifying or publication number and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet (SD-02) Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable

221 Insulation System

Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification Provide field-applied insulation for piping systems that are located within on under and adjacent to buildings and for plumbing systems Provide CFC and HCFC free insulation

222 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified insulation must have a maximum flame spreadindex of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested inaccordance with ASTM E84 Flame spread and smoke developed indexesshall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723 Test insulation inthe same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in theactual construction Prepare and mount test specimens according to ASTM E2231

23 MATERIALS

Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP Insulation exterior shall be cleanable grease resistant non-flaking and non-peeling Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion soften or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state Materials shall be asbestos free Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE

231 Adhesives

2311 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable fire-resistant adhesive conforming to



ASTM C916 Type I

2312 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195

232 Caulking

ASTM C920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use A

233 Jackets


Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated embossed or smooth sheet 0016 inch nominal thickness ASTM B209 Temper H14 Temper H16 Alloy 3003 5005 or 3105 Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel 0015 inch thick 12 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0016 inch aluminum matching jacket material The jacket may at the option of the Contractor be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or Z type longitudinal joint When the Z joint is used the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place

234 Heat Trace Tape

Provide 120 V heat tape and thermostat controls for all insulated pipe fittings and valves as recommended by manufacturer for temperatures down to 0 Degrees F Tape shall be self-regulating to prevent over-temperature and shall be easily field spliced to the desired length Provide terminations splices tee and seal kits as required

235 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type the styrene-butadiene rubber type or the butyl type of sealants Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 002 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96E96M and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84

24 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Conform insulation materials to Table 1 and minimum insulation thickness as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP Comply with EPA requirements for material with recycled content Limit pipe insulation materials to those listed herein and meeting the following requirements

241 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg F )

Insulation for outdoor indoor exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows

2411 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552 Type II and Type III Supply the insulation from the fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ))



ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic

2412 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive complying with ASTM C534C534M Grade 1 Type I or II Type I Grade 1 for tubular materials Type II Grade 1 for sheet materials Type I and II shall have vapor retardervapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications

2413 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)

ASTM C547 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4

25 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS

251 Duct Insulation Jackets

2511 Metal Jackets


ASTM B209 Temper H14 minimum thickness of 27 gauge ( 0016 inch ) with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide stainless steel bands minimum width of 12 inch

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists studs columns ducts hangers etc The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period any insulation found to pull apart after one hour shall be replaced

311 Display Samples

Submit and display after approval of materials actual sections of installed systems properly insulated in accordance with the specification requirements Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site Each material used shall be identified by indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material and the material by each manufacturer intended to meet the requirement The Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the construction period Upon completion of construction the display sample



sections will be closed and sealed

3111 Pipe Insulation Display Sections

Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee a valve dielectric waterways and flanges a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert or dowel as required at support point method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap circumferential lap butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs and terminating points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines both interior and exterior even when the same type of insulation is used for these services

312 Installation

Except as otherwise specified material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of this specification are completed Material such as rust scale dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation Insulation shall be kept clean and dry Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition the insulation will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces Insulation jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings

313 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls fire partitions above grade floors and fire rated chase walls the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A andor NFPA 90B All other penetrations such as piping conduit and wiring through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL FM or a NRTL

314 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

315 Pipes That Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes except for omitted items as specified

32 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturers published installation instructions



321 Pipe Insulation

3211 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarderbarrier including straight runs fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following

a Pipe used solely for fire protection

b Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures However fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain including the trap insulated where exposed

c Sanitary drain lines

d Air chambers

e Adjacent insulation

f ASME stamps

g Cleanouts or handholes

3212 Pipes Passing Through Hangers

Insulation whether hot or cold application shall be continuous through hangers All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-58 Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used

32121 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches at 60 Degrees F and Above

Supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-58 and Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE

32122 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches and Below 60 Degrees F

Supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP-58 An insulation insert of cellular glass prefabricated insulation pipe hangers or perlite above 80 degrees F shall be installed above each shield The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation as an option to installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert



32123 Vertical Pipes

Supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-58 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation as an option instead of installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe penetrating the pipe insulation These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service

32124 Inserts

Covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-12 inches and seal as required for the pipe jacket The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136 Type 1 and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material


Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe On pipes larger than 12 inches the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 13 of the pipe Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarderbarrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications

3214 Pipes in high abuse areas

In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms kitchens and mechanical rooms aluminum jackets shall be utilized Pipe insulation shall be fully protected All project piping requires full jacketed protection

3215 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

Pipe insulation materials must be as listed in Table 1 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 901 - IP



TABLE 1

Insulation Material for Piping

Service

Material Specification Type Class VRVB Reqd

Cold Water Piping

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular ASTM C534C534M I No

TABLE 2

Piping Insulation Thickness ( inch ) Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications exposed to

outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4

Cold Water Piping

Cellular Glass 15 15 15 15 15

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1 1 1 NA NA

322 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted This includes but is not limited to the following

a Non-potable water lines

b Grit underdrain lines

3221 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2

3222 Factory or Field applied Jacket

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacketvapor barrier or field applied aluminum jacket shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather In high abuse areas aluminum jackets shall be provided for pipe insulation

3223 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Cold Pipe

Apply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints Seal all butted joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape

32231 Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket Material

Overlap not less than 1-12 inches Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for circumferential joints



32232 Laps and Butt Strips

Secure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing If staples are used seal in accordance with paragraph STAPLES below Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems

32233 Factory Self-Sealing Lap Systems

May be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation Install the lap system in accordance with manufacturers recommendations Use a stapler only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer Where gaps occur replace the section or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling

32234 Staples

Coat all staples including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape Coat all seams except those on factory self-seal systems with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape

32235 Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket Material

Patch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it with adhesive staple and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape Extend the patch not less than 1-12 inches past the break

32236 Penetrations Such as Thermometers

Fill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape


Install by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing Alternately whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing Secure all seams and butt joints and seal with adhesive When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive Push insulation on the pipe never pulled Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints Clean cut all edges Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted Use proper tools such as sharp knives Do not stretch Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches On pipes larger than 12 inches adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 13 of the pipe

3224 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000



perm adhesive tape

b Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein 5 for anchors 10 11 and 13 for fittings 14 for valves and 17 for flanges and unions Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity Where precutpreformed is unavailable rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used If nesting size insulation is used the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 1220 Mitered Insulation Elbow Submit a booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each pipe duct or equipment insulating system after approval of materials and prior to applying insulation

(1) The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and the specific insulation application Submit all MICA plates required showing the entire insulating system including plates required to show insulation penetrations vessel bottom and top heads legs and skirt insulation as applicable The MICA plates shall present all variations of insulation systems including locations materials vaporproofing jackets and insulation accessories

(2) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of edited MICA Plates the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal

c Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges unions valves anchors fittings and accessories terminations seams joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 116 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 00000 perm adhesive tape standard grade silver white black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 116 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation

d Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface

e Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions strainers and check valves

3225 Optional PVC Fitting Covers

At the option of the Contractor premolded one or two piece PVC fitting



covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape adhesive seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers Seams in the cover and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal

323 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed After this procedure a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed) vapor barrierweatherproofing jacket - less than 00000 permeability (greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white black and embossed aluminum jacket Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3




SECTION 26 00 0000 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS0706

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES







IEEE C571228 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C571229 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments






This section applies to certain sections of Division 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS and Division 33 UTILITIES This section applies to all sections of Division 26 ELECTRICAL Division 40 PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS and Division 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections This section has been incorporated into and thus does not apply to and is not referenced in the following sections

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 1


13 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100

b The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products installation procedures and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types

c The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products systems installation procedures equipment and test methods

14 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 60 Hz and 277480 volts secondary three phase four wire Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing MCC shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer

15 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable

151 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices

152 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves





Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 2


regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise

17 WARRANTY



Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel The operating instructions shall include the following

a Wiring diagrams control diagrams and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment

b Start up proper adjustment operating lubrication and shutdown procedures

c Safety precautions

d The procedure in the event of equipment failure

e Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic Post instructions where directed For operating instructions exposed to the weather provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 3





ASTM D709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 25 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 025 inch high normal block style

111 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations pad-mounted transformers pad-mounted switches generators and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts

a When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C571228 or IEEE C571229 such as for pad-mounted transformers and pad-mounted SF6 switches provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s) Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters The word DANGER shall be in white letters on a red background and the words HIGH VOLTAGE shall be in black letters on a white background Decal shall be Panduit No PPSO710D72 or approved equal

b When such equipment is guarded by a fence mount signs on the fence Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT printed in three lines of nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field


Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein

113 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

Where specified in the technical sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment including pertinent safety requirements as required Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man-days of instruction are

SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 4


specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications

PART 2 PRODUCTS



PART 3 EXECUTION






Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart


SECTION 26 00 0000 20 Page 5


SECTION 26 05 1910 10

INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE0516

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-58-679 (2014) Control Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Conductor Identification


ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 (2014) Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the Distribution of Electric Energy

NEMA WC 26 (2008) Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard

NEMA WC 57 (2014) Standard for Control Thermocouple Extension and Instrumentation Cables

NEMA WC 70 (2009) Power Cable Rated 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy--S95-658

NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 (2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy





12 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Wire and Cable

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 1


Conductors

Cable Manufacturing Data

SD-06 Test Reports

Test Report(s) Inspection Report(s) and Verification Report(s)


Furnish cables on reels or coils Each cable and the outside of each reel or coil must be plainly marked or tagged to indicate the cable length voltage rating conductor size and manufacturers lot number and reel number Each coil or reel of cable must contain only one continuous cable without splices Cables for exclusively dc applications as specified in paragraph High-Voltage Test Source must be identified as such Shielded cables rated 2001 volts and above must be reeled and marked in accordance with NEMA WC 26 as applicable Reels must remain the property of the Contractor

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

211 Wire Table

Furnish wire and cable in accordance with the requirements of the wire table below conforming to the detailed requirements specified herein

212 Rated Circuit Voltages

All power wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Power wire and cable for circuit voltages rated 0-600 volts must be rated not less than 600 volts Control wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 57 but must be rated 600 volts if routed in raceway with other conductors that are rated 600 volts

213 Conductors

2131 Material for Conductors

Conductors must conform to all the applicable requirements of NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Copper conductors must be annealed copper material and they may be bare or tin- or lead-alloy-coated if required by the type of insulation used

2132 Size

Minimum wire size must be No 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits No 10 AWG for current transformer secondary circuits No 14 AWG for potential transformer relaying and control circuits No 16 AWG for annunciator circuits and No 19 AWG for alarm circuits Minimum wire sizes for rated circuit voltages of 2001 volts and above must not be less than those listed for the applicable voltage in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 2


2133 Stranding

Conductor stranding classes cited herein must be as defined for control conductors in NEMA WC 57 or as defined for 0-2000 volts power conductors in NEMA WC 70 as applicable Lighting conductors No 10 AWG and smaller must be solid or have Class B stranding Any conductors used between stationary and moving devices such as hinged doors or panels must have Class H or K stranding All other conductors must have Class B or C stranding except that conductors as shown or in the schedule as No 12 AWG may be 19 strands of No 25 AWG and conductors shown as No 10 AWG may be 19 strands of No 22 AWG Conductor stranding classes for circuit voltages 2001 volts and above must be as defined in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 and NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

2134 Conductor Shielding

Use conductor shielding conforming to NEMA WC 57 for control wire and cable as applicable Use conductor shielding conforming to ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable on power cables having a rated circuit voltage above 2000 volts

2135 Separator Tape

Where conductor shielding strand filling or other special conductor treatment is not required a separator tape between conductor and insulation is permitted

214 Insulation

2141 Insulation Material

Unless specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 wires in conduit other than service entrance must be 600-volt Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83 Insulation for control wire and cable must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 57 Insulation requirements for wire and cable rated less than 2000 volts must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 70

a XLPE if used must be tree-retardant

b Insulation must be chemically bonded to conductor shielding

c The insulation material and its manufacturing handling extrusion and vulcanizing processes must all be subject to strict procedures to prevent the inclusion of voids contamination or other irregularities on or in the insulation Insulation material must be inspected for voids and contaminants

d Cables with repaired insulation defects discovered during factory testing or with splices or insulation joints are prohibited

2142 Insulation Thickness

The insulation thickness for each conductor must be based on its rated circuit voltage

21421 Power Cables 2000 Volts and Below

The insulation thickness for single-conductor and multiple-conductor power cables rated 2000 volts and below must be as required by NEMA WC 70 as

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 3


applicable Some thicknesses of NEMA WC 70 will be permitted only for single-conductor cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated cables without a jacket NEMA WC 70 ethylene-propylene rubber-insulated conductors must have a jacket

21422 Single-Conductor and Multiple-Conductor Control Cables

The insulation thickness of control conductor sizes 22 AWG to 10 AWG used for control and related purposes must be as required by NEMA WC 57 as applicable Control conductors larger than 10 AWG must be as required by NEMA WC 70

2143 Insulation Shielding

Unless otherwise specified provide insulation shielding for conductors having rated circuit voltages of 2001 volts and above The voltage limits above which insulation shielding is required and the material requirements are given in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The material if thermosetting must meet the wafer boil test requirements as described in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The method of shielding must be in accordance with the current practice of the industry however the application process must include strict precautions to prevent voids or contamination between the insulation and the nonmetallic component Voids protrusions and indentations of the shield must not exceed the maximum allowances specified in ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable The cable must be capable of operating without damage or excessive temperature when the shield is grounded at both ends of each conductor All components of the shielding system must remain tightly applied to the components they enclose after handling and installation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations Shielding systems which require heat to remove are prohibited unless specifically approved

215 Jackets

All cables must have jackets meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 and NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable and as specified herein Individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be required to have jackets only if they are necessary for the conductor to meet other specifications herein Jackets of single-conductor cables and of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables except for shielded cables must be in direct contact and adhere or be vulcanized to the conductor insulation Multiple-conductor cables and shielded single-conductor cables must be provided with a common overall jacket which must be tightly and concentrically formed around the core Repaired jacket defects found and corrected during manufacturing are permitted if the cable including jacket afterward fully meets these specifications and the requirements of the applicable standards

2151 Jacket Material

The jacket must be one of the materials listed below

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 4


21511 General Use

Heavy-duty black neoprene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Heavy-duty chlorosulfonated polyethylene NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Heavy-duty cross-linked (thermoset) chlorinated polyethylene

NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

21512 Accessible Use Only 2000 Volts or Less

Cables installed where they are entirely accessible such as cable trays and raceways with removable covers or where they pass through less than 10 feet of exposed conduit only must have jackets of one of the materials in item a General Use or one of the following

General-purpose neoprene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Black polyethylene (MDPE) NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

Thermoplastic chlorinated polyethylene NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639

2152 Jacket Thickness

The minimum thickness of the jackets must be not less than 80 percent of the respective nominal thicknesses specified below


Thickness of the jackets of the individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be as required by NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable and must be in addition to the conductor insulation thickness required by the applicable respective NEMA publication for the insulation used Thickness of the outer jackets and associated coverings of the assembled multiple-conductor cables must be as required by NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable

21522 Single-Conductor Cables

Single-conductor cables must have a jacket thickness as specified in

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 5


NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable


Grounding conductor(s) conforming to NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable must be furnished for each multiple-conductor cable Assembly and cabling must be as specified in paragraph CABLING

22 CABLE IDENTIFICATION

221 Color-Coding

Insulation of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be color-coded in accordance with ICEA S-58-679 except that colored braids will not be permitted Only one color-code method must be used for each cable construction type Control cable color-coding must be in accordance with ICEA S-58-679 Method as follows - 277480 VAC Power cable color-coding must be brown for Phase A orange for Phase B blue for Phase C white for grounded neutral and green for an insulated grounding conductor if included

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Submit cable manufacturing data The following information must be provided by the cable manufacturer for each size conductor quantity and type of cable furnished

a Minimum bending radius in inches - For multiple-conductor cables this information must be provided for both the individual conductors and the multiple-conductor cable

b Pulling tension and sidewall pressure limits in pounds

c Instructions for stripping semiconducting insulation shields if furnished with minimum effort without damaging the insulation

d Upon request compatibility of cable materials and construction with specific materials and hardware manufactured by others must be stated Also if requested recommendations must be provided for various cable operations including installing splicing terminating etc

32 TEST REPORT(S) INSPECTION REPORT(S) AND VERIFICATION REPORT(S)

321 Cable Data

Do not begin any wire and cable fabrication until materials are submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer Submit cable data for approval including but not limited to dimensioned sketches showing cable construction and sufficient additional data to show that wire and cable meet the requirements of this Section

322 Inspection and Tests

Inspection and tests of wire and cable furnished under these

SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 6


specifications must be made by and at the plant of the manufacturer The Government may require or perform further tests before or after installation Testing in general must comply with NEMA WC 57 NEMA WC 70 ANSINEMA WC 71ICEA S-96-659 or NEMA WC 74ICEA S-93-639 as applicable Specific tests required for particular materials components and completed cables must be as specified in the sections of the above standards applicable to those materials components and cable types Tests must also be performed in accordance with the additional requirements specified below Submit six (6) certified copies of test reports


SECTION 26 05 1910 10 Page 7


SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM0214

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES











ANSI C801 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C803 (2015) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses







NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)



NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA WD 1 (1999 R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications

NEMA Z5354 (2011) American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels




NFPA 780 (2017) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises


UL 1 (2005 Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1063 (2006 Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool Wires and Cables

UL 1203 (2013 Reprint Apr 2015) UL Standard for Safety Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1283 (2015 Reprint Oct 2016) UL Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters

UL 1449 (2014 Reprint Mar 2016) UL Standard for Safety Surge Protective Devices



UL 1660 (2014) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 20 (2010 Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 360 (2013 Reprint Jan 2015) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2014 Reprint Feb 2015) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables



UL 486C (2013 Reprint Jan 2016) Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2012 Reprint Jul 2016) UL Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 50 (2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 506 (2008 Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999 Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment




UL 514C (2014 Reprint Dec 2014) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes Flush-Device Boxes and Covers



UL 674 (2011 Reprint Jul 2013) Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1



Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 797 (2007 Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel


UL 870 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Wireways Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings

UL 943 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

UL 984 (1996 Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors

12 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings are as defined in IEEE 100

13 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Motor control centers

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices

Wireways

Existing MCCs

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles

Circuit breakers

Switches

Enclosed circuit breakers

Motor controllers

Combination motor controllers



Surge protective devices

Include performance and characteristic curves

SD-06 Test Reports


Grounding system test

Ground-fault receptacle test

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses


Electrical Systems Data Package 5

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein


141 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph FUSES of this section


In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall or must had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Provide equipment materials installation and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship and

a Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size

b Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period

c Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required provide products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section






Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable

15 MAINTENANCE

151 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building Include the following

a Single line diagram of the as-built building electrical system

b Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC covered elsewhere)

c Manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment

16 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract

PART 2 PRODUCTS


As a minimum meet requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials equipment and devices

22 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following


2211 Rigid Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C801 UL 6


1 Rigid threaded zinc coated steel conduit

2 Rigid steel conduit ANSI C801 FS WW C 581 Conduits shall be



rigid steel hot dipped galvanzied sinc metallized sherradized mild steel Schedule 40 size threaded manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratory standard and so labeled Rigid galvanized conduit shall include a PVC jacket PVC jacket shall have a minimum thickness of 15-20 mills

222 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40 and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2 UL 651

223 Electrical Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797 ANSI C803

224 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1

2241 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Steel

UL 360

225 Fittings for Metal Conduit EMT and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B Ferrous fittings cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B

2251 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type Split couplings unacceptable

2252 Fittings for EMT

Die Castcompression type

226 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC and UL 514B

227 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660

23 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A cadmium- or zinc-coated if ferrous metal UL 514C if nonmetallic

24 CABINETS JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches UL 50 hot-dip zinc-coated if sheet steel

25 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation jacket and conductor specified or indicated Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site



251 Conductors


a Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper unless indicated otherwise

b Conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter stranded

c Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter solid

d Conductors for remote control alarm and signal circuits classes 1 2 and 3 stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise

e All conductors copper 2511 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements

When manufacturers equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment provide copper conductors or splices splice boxes and other work required to satisfy manufacturers requirements

2512 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following

a Branch circuits No 12 AWG

b Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits No 14 AWG

c Class 2 low-energy remote-control and signal circuits No 16 AWG

252 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service feeder branch control and signaling circuit conductors

2521 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows

a Grounding conductors Green

b Neutral conductors White

c Exception where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals color coding white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each

2522 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows


(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red



(3) Phase C - blue


(1) Phase A - brown




253 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83

254 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller diameter ASTM B8 Class B stranded bare copper wire for sizes No 6 AWG and larger diameter

26 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes Connectors for No 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires insulated pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector) Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors

27 DEVICE PLATES


a UL listed one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed

b For metal outlet boxes plates on unfinished walls zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges

c Plates on finished walls satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum minimum 003 inch thick

d Screws machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate

e Sectional type device plates are not be permitted

f Plates installed in wet locations gasketed and UL listed for wet locations

28 SWITCHES

281 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1 UL 20 single pole totally enclosed with bodies of



thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw Include the following

a Handles ivory thermoplastic

b Wiring terminals screw-type side-wired

c Contacts silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy

d Switches rated quiet-type ac only 120277 volts with current rating and number of poles indicated

282 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1 Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated where switches are rated higher than 240 volts and for double-throw switches Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches unless indicated otherwise Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means Provide switches in NEMA 4-X Stainless Steel enclosure

29 FUSES

NEMA FU 1 Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers for proper operation Submit coordination data for approval Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage

210 RECEPTACLES


a UL 498 hospital grade grounding-type

b Ratings and configurations as indicated

c Bodies ivory as per NEMA WD 1

d Face and body thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap

e Dimensional requirements per NEMA WD 6

f Screw-type side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement

g Grounding pole connected to mounting strap

h The receptacle containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts

2101 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles UL listed for use in wet locations Include cast metal box with gasketed hinged lockable and weatherproof while-in-use cover plate



2102 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943 duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices Provide screw-type side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads

211 PANELBOARDS

2111 Circuit Breakers

UL 489 thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted Breaker terminals UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable

21111 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A B and C respectively

212 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489 Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings number of poles overload trip setting and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated Enclosure type as indicated Provide solid neutral

213 MOTORS

Provide motors in accordance with the following

a NEMA MG 1 invertor duty rated

b Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors Also comply with UL 984

c Provide the size in terms of HP or kVA or full-load current or a combination of these characteristics and other characteristics of each motor as indicated or specified

d Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters

e Rate motors for operation on 208-volt 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts and those for operation on 480-volt 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts

f Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating

g Unless otherwise indicated use continuous duty type motors if rated 1 HP and above

h Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment



manufacturer provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated

2131 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified make adjustments to wiring disconnect devices and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay

2132 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies the conduit and wiring connecting such centers assemblies or other power sources to equipment as specified herein Power wiring and conduit conform to the requirements specified herein Control wiring provided under and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment

214 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following

a UL 508 NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2

b Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase and one spare normally open auxiliary contact and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact

c Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss undervoltage and overvoltage

d Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay

e When used with pressure float or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch provide a handoffautomatic selector switch with the controller

f Connections to selector switch wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in hand position

g Safety control devices such as low and high pressure cutouts high temperature cutouts and motor overload protective devices connected in motor control circuit in hand and automatic positions

h Control circuit connections to handoffautomatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device made in



accordance with indicated or manufacturers approved wiring diagram

i Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position

j Provide a disconnecting means capable of being locked in the open position for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location As an alternative provide a motor controller disconnect capable of being locked in the open position to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location

l Overload protective devices provide adequate protection to motor windings be thermal inverse-time-limit type and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case

m Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in off position

n Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller 18000 rms symmetrical amperes

o Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated

2141 Control Wiring

Provide control wiring in accordance with the following

a All control wire stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44 or Type MTW meeting UL 1063 and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards

b Hinge wire Class K stranding

c Current transformer secondary leads not smaller than No 10 AWG

d Control wire minimum size No 14 AWG

e Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below the same type as control wiring with No 12 AWG minimum size

f Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points

2142 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following

a NEMA ICS 4

b Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring molded or fabricated type with barriers rated not less than 600 volts

c Provide terminals with removable binding fillister or washer head screw type or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts



d Terminals not less than No 10 in size with sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal

e Terminal arrangement subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent whichever is greater provided on each block or group of blocks

f Modular pull apart terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type

g Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires are of adequate current-carrying capacity and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts

21421 Types of Terminal Blocks

a Short-Circuiting Type Short-circuiting type terminal blocks furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit Terminal blocks comply with the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above

b Load Type Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits except those for feeder tap units Provide terminals of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated For conductors rated more than 50 amperes provide screws with hexagonal heads Conducting parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating Provide eEach connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color

2143 Control Circuits

Control circuits maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure Transformers conform to UL 506 as applicable Transformers other than transformers in bridge circuits provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load Provide disconnect switch on primary side Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded

2144 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 6

2145 Pushbutton Stations

Provide with startstop momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts and red lights to indicate when motor is running Stations heavy duty oil-tight design



2146 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide LED cluster lamps

215 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)

2151 Pilot Lights

Provide yoke-mounted seven element LED cluster light module Color green red amber in accordance with NEMA ICS 2 Provide yoke-mounted candelabra-base sockets rated 125 volts and fitted with glass or plastic jewels Provide clear 6 watt lamp in each pilot switch Jewels for use with switches controlling motors green jewels for other purposes white red amber

216 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2161 Ground Rods

UL 467 Ground rods copper-clad steel with minimum diameter of 34 inch and minimum length 10 feet Sectional ground rods are permitted

2162 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated

217 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Electrical materials equipment and devices for installation in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 specifically approved by Underwriters Laboratories Inc or Factory Mutual for particular Class Division and Group of hazardous locations involved Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations as indicated Equipment in hazardous locations comply with UL 1203 for electrical equipment and industrial controls and UL 674 for motors


Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturers name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable


Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following

a ASTM D709

b Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified or as indicated on the drawings

c Each nameplate inscription identify the function and when applicable the position

d Nameplates melamine plastic 0125 inch thick white with black center core



e Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated

f Surface matte finish Corners square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core

g Minimum size of nameplates one by 25 inches

h Lettering size and style a minimum of 025 inch high normal block style

220 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z5354 for switchboards panelboards industrial control panels and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination adjustment servicing or maintenance of the equipment


Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

222 WIREWAYS

UL 870 Material steel 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches Provide in length required for the application with screw-cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6

223 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance panelboards MCC and control panels Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker

Provide the following modes of protection

FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Phase to phase ( L-L ) Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )

Provide SPDs per NFPA 780 for the lightning protection system

Maximum L-N L-G and N-G Voltage Protection Rating




Provide SPDs Maximum L-N L-G and N-G Voltage Protection Rating


The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L-G modes of operation 120 of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below 115 of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts

Provide EMIRFI filtering per UL 1283 for each mode with the capability to attenuate high frequency noise Minimum attenuation 20db


Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following

a NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein

b Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting

c Exterior surfaces free from holes seams dents weld marks loose scale or other imperfections

d Interior surfaces receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice

e Exterior surfaces primed filled where necessary and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish

f Equipment located indoors ANSI Light Gray

g Provide manufacturers coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts plenums and other air-handling spaces conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein

311 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection

312 Hazardous Locations

Perform work in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular Class Division and Group of



hazardous locations involved Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70 Provide conduit with tapered threads

313 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices switches and enclosures labeled and identified as such

3131 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure as permitted by NFPA 70 label each enclosure new and existing as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices Label at minimum indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES Use lettering of at least 025 inch in height and engrave on black-on-white matte finish Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure provided only as permitted by NFPA 70

314 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit IMC rigid nonmetallic conduit or EMT except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise Grounding conductor separate from electrical system neutral conductor Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways Minimum conduit size 12 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls fire-rated partitions or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

3141 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits Pull wire plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire

315 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls ceilings and floors Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project

3151 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a Do not install underground

b Do not encase in concrete mortar grout or other cementitious materials

c Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but



not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT

d Do not use in hazardous areas

e Do not use outdoors

f Do not use in fire pump rooms

g Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3152 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to mechanical equipment rooms electrical equipment rooms hospitals power plants missile magazines and other such areas

(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas

(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms

(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions or fire-rated floors

(5) Do not use above grade except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise

(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3153 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP)

3154 Underground Conduit

Plastic-coated rigid steel plastic-coated steel IMC PVC Type EPC-40 Convert nonmetallic conduit other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 to plastic-coated rigid or IMC steel conduit before rising through floor slab Plastic coating extend minimum 6 inches above floor

3155 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab

3156 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6



inches above floor Where no equipment connections are made install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end

3157 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps wall brackets threaded rod conduit hangers or ceiling trapeze Fasten by wood screws to wood by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick and by machine screws welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel work Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 12 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 34 inch in concrete joints Fill unused holes In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws In suspended-ceiling construction run conduit above ceiling Do not support conduit by ceiling support system Conduit and box systems supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals Where conduit crosses building expansion joints provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means For conduits greater than 2 12 inches inside diameter provide supports to resist forces of 05 times the equipment weight in any direction and 15 times the equipment weight in the downward direction

3158 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine Do not install crushed or deformed conduits Avoid trapped conduits Prevent plaster dirt or trash from lodging in conduits boxes fittings and equipment during construction Free clogged conduits of obstructions

3159 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulated bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box otherwise use at least minimum single locknut and bushing Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures Install bushings on ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70

31510 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for motors Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack Minimum flexible steel conduit size 12 inch diameter Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations



for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission movement or motors Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections

316 Boxes Outlets and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures Boxes for metallic raceways cast-metal hub-type when located in wet locations when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically indicated Boxes in other locations sheet steel except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures minimum 4 inches square or octagonal except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations as approved Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls square-cornered tile-type or standard boxes having square-cornered tile-type covers Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and with machine screws or welded studs on steel Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws expansion shields or machine screws In open overhead spaces cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers Where bar hangers are used attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box When penetrating reinforced concrete members avoid cutting reinforcing steel

3161 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems minimum 1 12 inches deep except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets minimum 4 inches square except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet Telecommunications outlets a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 18 inches deep Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls

3162 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers Where several feeders pass through common pull box tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics circuit number and panel designation

3163 Extension Rings

Extension rings are not permitted for new construction Use only on



existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish

317 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards enclosed circuit breakers motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated Mount other devices as indicated Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in the hazardous area to the bottom of the outlet box

318 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap splice or termination is made For conductors No 6 AWG and smaller diameter provide color coding by factory-applied color-impregnated insulation For conductors No 4 AWG and larger diameter provide color coding by plastic-coated self-sticking markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shrink-type sleeves Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Vendor drawings

3181 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following

a Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips fastened by screws to each terminal block for wire designations

b Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides or provide two marking strips with each block

d Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers

e Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractors schematic and connection diagrams

f The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractors wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractors standard practice however provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Governments wire designations

g Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings along with any rearrangement of points required

319 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations Make splices in conductors No 10



AWG and smaller diameter with insulated pressure-type connector Make splices in conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation

3110 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices Plaster fillings are not permitted Install plates with alignment tolerance of 116 inch Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations

3111 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls partitions floors or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

3112 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780 Ground exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment metallic raceway systems grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways telecommunications system grounds grounding conductor of nonmetallic sheathed cables and neutral conductor of wiring systems Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential This includes lightning protection electrical service telecommunications system grounds as well as underground metallic piping systems Make interconnection to the gas line on the customers side of the meter Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system In addition to the requirements specified herein provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607 Where ground fault protection is employed ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection

31121 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods Measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81 Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod additional rods spaced on center not less than twice the distance of the length of the rod or if sectional type rods are used additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod In high-ground-resistance UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add



a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturers written recommendations Welds which are puffed up



or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds

b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire

31123 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor Make connections and splices of the brazed welded bolted or pressure-connector type except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment For raised floor equipment rooms in computer and data processing centers provide a minimum of 4 one at each corner ground buses connected to the building grounding system Use bolted connections in lieu of thermoweld so they can be changed as required by additions andor alterations

31124 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system do not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms contact Contracting Officer for further instructions

3113 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified automatic control wiring control devices and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment

3114 Repair of Existing Work

Perform repair of existing work as follows

31141 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance Exercise care where cutting channeling chasing or drilling of floors walls partitions ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation support or anchorage of conduit raceways or other electrical work Repair damage to buildings piping and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved

31142 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed

Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source Remove conductors cut conduit flush with floor underside of floor and through walls and seal openings



31143 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System

Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipments associated wiring including conductors cables exposed conduit surface metal raceways boxes and fittings back to equipments power source as indicated

31144 Continuation of Service

Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain Maintain existing circuits of equipment energized Restore circuits wiring and power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to original condition

3115 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet




Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test

351 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times demonstrating satisfactory operation each time

352 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance Minimum resistance 250000 ohms

353 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a load (such as a plug in light) to verify that the line and load leads are not reversed



354 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made




SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING0513

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AASHTO LTS (2013 Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs Luminaires and Traffic Signals


ASHRAE 1891 (2014) Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings



ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011 Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010 Addendum A 2008 Addenda B 2009 Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011 Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources








ANSI C13613 (2004 R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment Metal Brackets for Wood Poles

ANSI C13621 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminaires

ANSI C1363 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments


NEMA ANSLG C78377 (2015) American National Standard for Electric Lampsmdash Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA C13631 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

NEMA C8277 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment

NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)




47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 1310 (2011 Reprint Dec 2014) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units



UL 1598 (2008 Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

UL 8750 (2015 Reprint Nov 2016) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

12 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16

b For LED luminaire light sources Useful Life is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions This is also known as 70 percent Rated Lumen Maintenance Life as defined in IES LM-80

13 SUBMITTALS



Photometric Plan

LED Luminaire Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings

Poles

SD-03 Product Data

HIDand LED Luminaires

Luminaire (Drivers)

Lighting standard

Aluminum poles

SD-04 Samples

Submit one sample of each luminaire type complete with light source and ballast generator or power supply unit Sample will be returned to the Contractor for installation in the project work

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report



LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Operating test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled Field Quality Control

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided The useful life shall be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21 Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration


Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information summary of procedures and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project Indicate manufacturers commitment to reclaim materials for recycling andor reuse


141 Drawing Requirements

1411 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions effective projected area (EPA) accessories and installation and construction details Photometric data including zonal lumen data average and minimum ratio aiming diagram and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings

1412 Poles

Include dimensions wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS pole deflection pole class and other applicable information

142 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires include computer-generated photometric analysis of the designed to values for the end of useful life of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 07 For LED and all other types of luminaires the submittal shall include the following

Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade taken at a maximum of every 10 feet

Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade

Minimum and maximum footcandle levels

Average maintained footcandle level



Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only

143 Design Data for Luminaires

a Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in IES HB-10

b Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or BUG rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15

c Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family Include listing labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC) Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include CSA (Canadian Standards Association) ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory) and UL (Underwriters Laboratories)

d Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21 Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80

e Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area

144 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturers standard production model luminaire Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements as well as all other pertinent data outlined under 140 Test Report in IES LM-79

145 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturers standard production LED package array or module Submittal shall include

a Testing agency report number date type of equipment and LED light source being tested

b All data required by IES LM-80

1451 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following

a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program

b One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy Efficiency amp Renewable Energy Solid-State Lighting web site

c A manufacturers in-house lab that meets the following criteria

1 Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and



production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturers lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years

2 Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology




Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 15-year period


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise

15 WARRANTY


151 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate




a Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material fixture finish and workmanship On-site replacement includes transportation removal and installation of new products

1 Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering cracking peeling chalking or fading

2 Material warranty shall include

(a) All power supply units (drivers)

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting

b Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment

16 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options and submit to Contracting Officer Services shall reclaim materials for recycling andor reuse Services shall not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury When such a service is not available local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires equipment or accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

22 LED LUMINAIRES

UL 1598 NEMA C8277 and UL 8750 Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity type and wattage indicated All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer


a LED luminaire housings shall be explosion proof

b LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 122 degrees F

c Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598 Optical compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529



d LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table tested per IES LM-79 Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable

Application Luminaire Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior PoleArm-Mounted Decorative Luminaires

65

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60

e Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10

f Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel anodized or baked-on powder coat paint Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling

g Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight Uplight and Glare (BUG) ratings

1 Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed

2 Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0

3 Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed

h Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory

i The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans

j Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel

k Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic Provide polycarbonate vandal-resistant lenses as indicated

l The wiring compartment on pole-mounted street and area luminaires must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws bolts or hardware

m Incorporate modular electrical connections and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics heat sinks power supply units ballasts surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver

n Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturers name address model number date of manufacture and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place The nameplate of the distributing



agent will not be acceptable

o Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with ANSI C1363

p Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C13631

q All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp locking or latching style connectors Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable

222 Luminaire Light Sources

2221 LED Light Sources

a Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA ANSLG C78377

Nominal CCT 4000 degrees K 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

b Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be

Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 degrees K light sources

c Color Consistency

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires

223 Luminaire (Drivers

2231 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements

a Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent

b Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA plus or minus 10 percent

c Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22 degrees F and 104 degrees F

d Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal

e Operating frequency shall be 50 or 60 Hz

f Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 090

g Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent

h Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15 Class B

i Shall be RoHS-compliant



j Shall be mounted integral to luminaire Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed

k Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure such as a canopy or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A

l Shall be dimmable and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system

m Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved

224 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as defined by IEEE C62412 Scenario 1 Location Category C

23 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

Controls shall comply with Section 9 of ASHRAE 901 - IP ASHRAE 1891

24 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors Scratched stained chipped or dented poles shall not be installed

241 Rigid Galvanized ConduitPole with PVC Jacket

Provide 2-inch rigid galvanized conduitpipe with PVC jacket 15 - 20 mils

25 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

ANSI C1363 ANSI C13613 and ANSI C13621 as applicable Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 14 inch stainless steel pipe secured to pole Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head

26 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

261 Manufacturers Nameplate




262 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper light source type The following light source characteristics shall be noted in the format Use Only LED

a Light source type wattage bulb type (eg ED17 BD56) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires

b Start type (eg programmed-start rapid-start instant-start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires

c ANSI ballast type (eg M98 M57) for HID luminaires

d Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires

Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place



PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein

311 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles luminaires mounting arms brackets and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose




Upon completion of installation verify that equipment is properly installed connected and adjusted Conduct an operating test after 100 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section




SECTION 31 23 0000 20

EXCAVATION AND FILL0406

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES





ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 1140 (2000 R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56000 ft-lbfft3) (2700 kN-mm3)

ASTM D 2216 (2005) Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

ASTM D 2321 (2008) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D 2434 (1968 R 2006) Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head)

ASTM D 2487 (20 10) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 4318 (2005) Liquid Limit Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2008a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D 698 (2007e1) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 1


Effort (12400 ft-lbfcu ft (600 kN-mcu m))


EPA 530F-93004 (1993 Rev O Updates I II IIA IIB and III) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste (Vol IA IB IC and II) (SW-846)

EPA 6004-79020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Scope of Work

As shown by the drawings the Scope of Work for which this specification is applicable includes but is not limited to excavation to uncover existing force main pipelines that discharge to the headworks to allow installation of tapping tee and adjacent pipe fittings and valves plus excavation for placement of temporary by-pass piping beneath access to the work-site In concert with excavation and pipe installation backfill shall be placed to protect the pipe installation and reinstate access to the work-site

Upon completion of the project work excavation and backfill shall be required to allow removal of temporary by-pass piping and resumption of flow through the existing permanent pipe that discharges to the headworks In addition to these primary objectives this specification is applicable to incidental work such as replacement of sidewalks or other parts of the existing facility as required by construction activity

Installation of the temporary by-pass piping and its backfill are for performance of project work by the Contractor and not subject to soil test and compaction requirements The installation of backfill associated with permanent tapping-tee and blind-flange plus piping specified elsewhere are subject to test requirements called for by the specification The placement of soil about pipes to remain in-service and soil placed beneath and adjacent to the work inlcuding the access are subject to soil testing and compaction requirements called for by the specification

122 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 for general soil types abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density

123 Hard Materials

Weathered rock dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of rock but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal

124 Rock

Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting drilling and the

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 2


use of expansion jacks or feather wedges or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers also large boulders buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceeding 12 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production

125 Pile Supported Structure

As used herein a structure where the foundation is pile supported

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Borrow Site Testing

Fill and backfill test

Select material test

Density tests

Moisture Content Tests

Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test


Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials

15 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria

a Surface elevations are as indicated

b Pipes or other artificial obstructions except those indicated will not be encountered

c Hard materials and rock will not be encountered

d Borrow material in the quantities required is not available at the project site

e Blasting will not be permitted Remove material in an approved manner

16 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL

Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH BTEX and full TCLP including ignitability corrosivity and reactivity Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and less than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene Toluene Ethyl Benzene and Xylene (BTEX) and shall not fail the

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 3


TCPL test TPH concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 6004-79020 Method 4181 BTEX concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 530F-93004 Method 50308020 TCLP shall be performed in accordance with EPA 530F-93004 Method 1311 Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site with at least one test from each borrow site Material shall not be brought on site until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer


171 Shoring and Sheeting Plan

The Contractor shall perform excavation in accordance with Industry Saefty Standards and Conformance to OSHA Requirements

172 Utilities

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractors risk Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction excavate by hand Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SOIL MATERIALS

211 Satisfactory Materials

Any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW GP GM GP-GM GW-GM GC GP-GC GM-GC SW SP SMSP-SMfree of debris roots wood scrap material vegetation refuse soft unsound particles and deleterious or objectionable materials Unless specified otherwise the maximum particle diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location

212 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills trash refuse or backfills from previous construction Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter frozen material and stones larger than 3 inches The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials

213 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW GP SW and SP Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC SC ML CL MH and CH Materials classified as GM GP-GM GW-GM SW-SM SP-SM and SM shall be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic (plasticity index equals zero) Materials classified as GM and

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 4


SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero

214 Common Fill

Approved unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location

215 Backfill and Fill Material

ASTM D 2487 classification GW GP GM GCSW SP SM SCwith a maximum ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35 maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12 and a maximum of 25 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140 No 200 sieve

216 Select Material

Provide materials classified as GW GP SW or SP by ASTM D 2487 where indicated The liquid limit of such material shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 The plasticity index shall not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and not more than 35 percent by weight shall be finer than No 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140 Coefficient of permeability shall be a minimum of 0002 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434 217 Topsoil

Natural friable soil representative of productive well-drained soils in the area free of subsoil stumps rocks larger than one inch diameter brush weeds toxic substances and other material detrimental to plant growth Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 55 to 7


Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600 Type 4 except as specified herein Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows

a Class I Angular 025 to 15 inches graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral slag cinders crushed stone and crushed shells

b Class II Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 15 inches including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines generally granular and noncohesive either wet or dry Soil Types GW GP SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487


221 Sand

Clean coarse-grained sand classified as SW or SP by ASTM D 2487 for bedding

23 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of Government property at Contractors

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 5


cost

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PROTECTION

311 Drainage and Dewatering

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction

3111 Drainage

So that construction operations progress successfully completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry The Contractor shall establishconstruct storm drainage features (pondsbasins) at the earliest stages of site development and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity andor provide temporary ditches dikes swales and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils prevent erosion and undermining of foundations When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing Excavation shall be performed so that the site the area immediately surrounding the site and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained

3112 Dewatering

Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls boils uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction French drains sumps ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure except with specific written approval and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material

312 Underground Utilities

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department for assistance in locating existing utilities The Contractor shall scan the construction site with electromagnetic and sonic equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered

313 Machinery and Equipment

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractors risk Repair or remove and

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 6


provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged


321 Clearing and Grubbing

Unless indicated otherwise remove trees stumps logs shrubs brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction operations within the clearing limits Remove stumps entirely Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below existing surface

322 Stripping

Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for backfilling Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading Where sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed

323 Unsuitable Material

Remove vegetation debris decayed vegetable matter sod mulch and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs

33 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours elevation and dimensions indicated Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location Keep excavations free from water Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractors operations soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density Unless specified otherwise refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill and fill material and satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated without specific direction of the Contracting Officer shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade except as specified for spread footings Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer

331 Pipe Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length Rock where encountered shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 7


332 Excavated Materials

Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

34 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

Fill and backfill to contours elevations and dimensions indicated Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift

341 Select Material Placement

Provide under structures not pile supported Place in 8 inch lifts Do not place over wet or frozen areas Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted Backfill against concrete only when approved Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structure

342 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction testing and acceptance of work permits Place and compact backfill to top of trench in 8 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas

35 BORROW

Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations approved borrow materials shall be obtained from off-base sources at Contractors expense

36 COMPACTION

Determine in-place density of existing subgrade if required density exists no compaction of existing subgrade will be required

361 General Site

Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557

362 Structures Spread Footings and Concrete Slabs

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 Compact fill and backfill material to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

363 Adjacent Area

Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557

364 Paved Areas

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 Compact fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 8


37 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling and brush refuse stumps roots and timber


381 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests

382 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used Provide additional tests for each source change

3821 Fill and Backfill Material Testing

Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable

3822 Select Material Testing

Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable

3823 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938 When ASTM D 6938 density tests are used verify density test results by performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 6938 tested as specified herein Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the start of the job and for every 10 ASTM D 6938 density tests thereafter Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of subgrade in cut Include density test results in daily report

3824 Moisture Content Tests

In the stockpile excavation or borrow areas a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of materials being placed is required during stable weather conditions During unstable weather tests shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved moisture content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 2216 Include moisture content test results in daily report


SECTION 31 23 0000 20 Page 9


SECTION 32 01 19

FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS0808

PART 1 GENERAL

11 UNIT PRICES

111 Measurement

Determine the quantity of each sealing item to be paid for by actual measurement of the number of linear feet of in-place material that has been approved by the Contracting Officer

112 Payment

Payment will be made at the contract unit bid prices per linear foot for the sealing items scheduled The unit bid prices will include the cost of all labor materials and the use of all equipment and tools required to complete the work

12 REFERENCES



ASTM C1016 (2014) Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Absorption of Sealant Backing (Joint Filler) Material


ASTM D789 (2015) Determination of Relative Viscosity and Moisture Content of Polyamide (PA)

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturers Recommendations

SD-04 Samples

Materials




Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects unload and store them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage Provide storage facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at the temperatures and conditions recommended by the manufacturer


The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising at the time of application of the materials Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed in the joint

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SEALANTS

Materials for sealing cracks in the various paved areas indicated on the drawings shall be as follows

Area Sealing Material

Concrete Sidewalks ASTM D5893D5893M

22 BACKUP MATERIALS

Provide backup material that is a compressible nonshrinking nonstaining nonabsorbing material nonreactive with the joint sealant The material shall have a melting point at least 5 degrees F greater than the pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with ASTM D789 The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5 percent of the sample weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C1016 Use backup material that is 25 plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter than the nominal width of the crack

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXECUTING EQUIPMENT

Machines tools and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be approved before the work is started maintained in satisfactory condition at all times

311 Joint Cleaning Equipment

3111 Concrete Saw

Provide a self-propelled power saw with water-cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for refacing joints or cleaning sawed joints where sandblasting does not provide a clean joint

3112 Hand Tools

Hand tools may be used when approved for removing defective sealant from a crack and repairing or cleaning the crack faces



312 Sealing Equipment

3121 Cold-Applied Single-Component Sealing Equipment

The equipment for installing ASTM D5893D5893M single component joint sealants shall consist of an extrusion pump air compressor following plate hoses and nozzle for transferring the sealant from the storage container into the joint opening The dimension of the nozzle shall be such that the tip of the nozzle will extend into the joint to allow sealing from the bottom of the joint to the top Maintain the initially approved equipment in good working condition serviced in accordance with the suppliers instructions and unaltered in any way without obtaining prior approval Small hand-held air-powered equipment (ie caulking guns) may be used for small applications

32 SAFETY

Do not place joint sealant within 25 feet of any liquid oxygen (LOX) equipment LOX storage or LOX piping Thoroughly clean joints in this area and leave them unsealed

33 PREPARATION OF JOINTS

Immediately before the installation of the sealant thoroughly clean the joints to remove all laitance curing compound filler protrusions of hardened concrete and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the joint space to be sealed


Cut loose the in-place sealant from both joint faces and to the depth shown on the drawings using the concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Depth shall be sufficient to accommodate any separating or backup material that is required to maintain the depth of new sealant to be installed Prior to further cleaning operations remove all loose old sealant remaining in the joint opening by blowing with compressed air Hand tools may be required to remove sealant from random cracks Chipping spalling or otherwise damaging the concrete will not be allowed

332 Sawing

3321 Facing of Joints

Accomplish facing of joints using a concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT to remove all residual old sealant and a minimum of concrete from the joint face to provide exposure of newly cleaned concrete Thoroughly clean immediately following the sawing operation the joint opening to remove all saw cuttings and debris

333 Back-Up Material

When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant depth plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation



34 PREPARATION OF SEALANT

341 Single-Component Cold-Applied Sealants

Inspect the ASTM D5893D5893M sealant and containers prior to use Reject any materials that contain water hard caking of any separated constituents nonreversible jell or materials that are otherwise unsatisfactory Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be cause for rejection

35 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT


Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and following the placement of the separating or backup material Open joints that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant

352 Sealing Joints

Immediately preceding but not more than 50 feet ahead of the joint sealing operations perform a final cleaning with compressed air Fill the joints from the bottom up to 14 inch plus or minus 116 inch below the pavement surface Remove and discard excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods Install the sealant in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air In no case shall gravity methods or pouring pots be used to install the sealant material Traffic shall not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting Officer Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified

36 INSPECTION

361 Joint Cleaning

Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or back-up material and joint sealant

362 Joint Sealant Application Equipment

Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements proper proportioning and mixing and proper installation Evidences of bubbling improper installation failure to cure or set will be cause to suspend operations until causes of the deficiencies are determined and corrected

363 Joint Sealant

Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set bonding to the joint walls cohesive separation within the sealant reversion to liquid entrapped air and voids Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the joint wasted and replaced as specified herein at no additional



cost to the Government

37 CLEAN-UP

Upon completion of the project remove all unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition




SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS0408

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 182 (2005 R 2012) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats


ASTM A185A185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement Plain for Concrete



ASTM C171 (2016) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete


ASTM C173C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method


ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete










Provide plant equipment machines and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product meeting grade controls thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete

Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control

Copies of all reports within 24 hours of completion of the test


141 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling or is already below that point Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising or is already above 40 degrees F Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air aggregates or water is below 35 degrees F placement and protection shall be approved in writing Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions The



underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited Mixing water and aggregates shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved The aggregates shall be free of ice snow and frozen lumps before entering the mixer Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period

142 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used The mixing water andor aggregates shall be cooled if necessary to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at any time

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONCRETE

Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-12 inches

211 Air Content

Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer

212 Slump

The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143C143M

213 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615A615M Wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185A185M

22 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

221 Impervious Sheet Materials

Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171 type optional except that polyethylene film if used shall be white opaque

222 Burlap

Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182

223 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309 Type 2

23 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS

Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal



parts by volume of linseed oil and either mineral spirits naphtha or turpentine At the option of the Contractor commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable

24 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

241 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter

Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard

242 Expansion Joint Filler Premolded

Expansion joint filler premolded shall conform to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752 12 inch thick unless otherwise indicated

25 JOINT SEALANTS

Joint sealant cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893D5893M

26 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions lines and elevations and within the tolerances specified Forms shall be of wood or steel straight of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete Wood forms shall be surfaced plank 2 inches nominal thickness straight and free from warp twist loose knots splits or other defects Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet Radius bends may be formed with 34 inch boards laminated to the required thickness Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming corner forms form spreaders and fillers Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms

261 Sidewalk Forms

Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement Subgrade shall be placed and compacted as directed

311 Sidewalk Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms



312 Maintenance of Subgrade

The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited

32 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment grade and dimensions Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet Corners deep sections and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces as required Clamps spreaders and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed Wood forms may instead be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed except that with probable freezing temperatures oiling is mandatory

321 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 18 inch in any 10 foot long section After forms are set grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge Forms shall have a transverse slope of 14 inch per foot with the low side adjacent to the roadway Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed

33 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

331 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer When consolidated and finished the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated After concrete has been placed in the forms a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off

332 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging when most of the water sheen has disappeared and just before the concrete hardens finish the surface with a wood or magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves irregularities or tool marks A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic followed by edging

333 Edge and Joint Finishing

All slab edges including those at formed joints shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 18 inch Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned



and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished

334 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 516 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 14 inch

34 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers whichever is less and shall be continuous across the slab Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in width Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement using joint filler of the type thickness and width indicated Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally

341 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness using a jointer to cut the groove or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw unless otherwise approved Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 18 inch blade to the depth indicated An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations

342 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed with 12 inch joint filler strips Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752 or building paper Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing Immediately after finishing operations are completed joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 18 inch and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed At the end of the curing period expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color Joints shall be sealed as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned



343 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed



Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period

3511 Mat Method

The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days

3512 Impervious Sheeting Method

The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used The curing medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days

3513 Membrane Curing Method

A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane If any drying has occurred the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feetgallon for the total of both coats The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat The compound shall form a uniform continuous coherent film that will not check crack or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections If pinholes abrasion or other discontinuities exist an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied



shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints and that no curing compound enters the joints The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane

352 Backfilling

After curing debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled graded and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated

353 Protection

Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed

354 Protective Coating

Protective coating of linseed oil mixture shall be applied to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured

3541 Application

Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yardsgallon for first application and not more than 70 square yardsgallon for second application except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry

3542 Precautions

Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame sparks and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators Material shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50



degrees F



Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing Based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action and submit reports as required below and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met

362 Concrete Testing

3621 Strength Testing

Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172C172M Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31C31M by an approved testing laboratory Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days unless otherwise specified or approved Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi

3622 Air Content

Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173C173M or ASTM C231C231M ASTM C231C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector If results are out of tolerance the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified

3623 Slump Test

Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete

363 Thickness Evaluation

The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement the subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the



thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab

364 Surface Evaluation

The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks

37 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

371 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 14 inch the deficient section will be removed between regularly scheduled joints and replaced

372 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 14 inch Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced

373 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified Areas which exhibit excessive cracking discoloration form marks or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced




SECTION 32 92 19

SEEDING1006

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



ASTM C602 (2013a) Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D4972 (2013) pH of Soils

US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

AMS Seed Act (1940 R 1988 R 1998) Federal Seed Act

DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No 42 Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual Version 30

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Stand of Turf

95 percent ground cover of the established species


Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL applies to this section for plant establishment requirements with additions and modifications herein

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Mulch

Fertilizer

Include physical characteristics and recommendations

SD-06 Test Reports

Topsoil Composition Tests (reports and recommendations)

SD-07 Certificates

State certification for seed




151 Delivery

1511 Seed Protection

Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery on-site storage and handling

1512 Fertilizer and Lime Delivery

Deliver to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturers chemical analysis name trade name trademark and indication of conformance to state and federal laws Instead of containers fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information

152 Storage

1521 Seed Fertilizer and Lime Storage

Store in cool dry locations away from contaminants

1522 Topsoil

Prior to stockpiling topsoil treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil

1523 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles

16 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

161 Restrictions

Do not plant when the ground is frozen snow covered muddy or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit

17 TIME LIMITATIONS

171 Seed

Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 SEED

211 Classification

Provide State-certified seed of the latest seasons crop delivered in original sealed packages bearing producers guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures purity germination weedseed content and inert material Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws Wet moldy or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the



presence of the Contracting Officer

212 Seed Purity

Common Name Minimum Pure Live Seed

Maximum Total Other Crop Seed

Maximum Total Weed Seed

Bermuda 70 200 100

Fescue Tall (KY-31) 80 200 100

Centipede 80 200 100

213 Permanent Seeding Schedule

Planting Date Seeding Mixture and Rate

Season 1(March through August)

50acre Fescue KY-3125acre Bermuda Grass (Hulled)10acre Centipede

Season 2(September through February)

50acre Fescue KY-3135acre Bermuda Grass (Unhulled)10acre Centipede

Temporary seeding of disturbed areas shall be performed whenever one or more of the following conditions exist

(1) The Contracting Officer determines temporary seeding is necessary to

prevent or stop erosion of disturbed areas

(2) Work is suspended or delayed on any portion of the project for 15 days and the potential for erosion exists

(3) Whenever permanent seeding is delayed beyond that required by the contract documents

22 TOPSOIL

221 On-Site Topsoil

Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled Composition When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

222 Off-Site Topsoil

Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled Composition Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor

223 Composition

Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the



topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon 6A Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42 Maximum particle size 34 inch with maximum 3 percent retained on 14 inch screen The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4972 Topsoil shall be free of sticks stones roots and other debris and objectionable materials Other components shall conform to the following limits

Silt 25-50 percent

Clay 10-30 percent

Sand 20-35 percent

pH 55 to 70

Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

23 SOIL CONDITIONERS

Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with composition standard for topsoil as specified herein

231 Lime

Commercial grade hydrate limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (CCE) as specified in ASTM C602 of not less than 100 percent

232 Sand

Clean and free of materials harmful to plants

24 FERTILIZER

241 Granular Fertilizer

Organic granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients

10 percent available nitrogen20 percent available phosphorus20 percent available potassium

25 MULCH

Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds mold and other deleterious materials

251 Straw

Stalks from oats wheat rye barley or rice Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Straw shall contain no fertile seed

26 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no elements toxic to plant life



27 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS

Erosion control material shall conform to the following

271 Erosion Control Blanket

100 percent agricultural straw stitched with a degradable nettings designed to degrade within 18 months

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

311 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners as required) fertilizing seeding and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces unless indicated otherwise and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractors operations

3111 Topsoil

Provide 4 inches of off-site or on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade incorporate fertilizer and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking harrowing tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer Remove debris and stones larger than 34 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic

3112 Soil Conditioner Application Rates

Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site

Lime 4000 pounds per acre

3113 Fertilizer Application Rates

Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site

Fertilizer 10-20-20 500 pounds per acre

32 SEEDING

321 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions

Immediately before seeding restore soil to proper grade Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions submit a written request to the Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and proposed variance Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation Sow seed by approved sowing equipment Sow one-half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing



322 Seed Application Method

Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding

3221 Broadcast and Drop Seeding

Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate of 05 pounds per 1000 square feet Use broadcast or drop seeders Sow one-half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 14 inch in clay soils and 12 inch in sandy soils by means of spike-tooth harrow cultipacker raking or other approved devices

323 Mulching

3231 Straw Mulch

Straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre Mulch shall be spread by hand blower-type mulch spreader or other approved method Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes and continued uniformly until the area is covered The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading

3232 Mechanical Anchor

Mechanical anchor shall be a V-type-wheel land packer a scalloped-disk land packer designed to force mulch into the soil surface or other suitable equipment

3233 Asphalt Adhesive Tackifier

Asphalt adhesive tackifier shall be sprayed at a rate between 10 to 13 gallons per 1000 square feet Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface

324 Rolling

Immediately after seeding firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width

325 Erosion Control Material

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions where indicated or as directed by the Contracting Officer

326 Watering

Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off During the germination process seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out



33 RESTORATION

Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations at the Contractors expense




SECTION 33 34 00

FORCE MAINS SEWER0408

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

API Spec 6D (2014 Errata 1-2 2014 Errata 3-5 2015 ADD 1 2015) Specification for Pipeline Valves




AWWA C110A2110 (2012) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111A2111 (2012) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C115A2115 (2011) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

AWWA C151A2151 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast for Water

AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service




ASTM D3139 (1998 R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D3261 (2016) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing



ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape

ASTM F477 (2014) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)

DIPRA TRD (2006) Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe


MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings

Installation and As-Built drawings as specified

SD-06 Test Reports

Hydrostatic Tests

Copies of test results


Do not damage pipe fittings and accessories and pipe coatings during delivery handling and storage

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Unless otherwise shown or specified force main products shall be asspecified in this section

21 PIPE AND FITTINGSTemporary bypass piping for force mains 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be ductile iron or high density polyethylene pipe Force main exposed piping shall be ductile iron pipe with bolted flange joints All temproary bypass piping and fittings shall be proivded as restrained joint Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below

211 Ductile Iron Pipe

a Ductile Iron Pipe AWWA C151A2151 working pressure not less than 200 psi unless otherwise shown or specified

b Fittings Mechanical AWWA C110A2110 rated for 200 psi



c Fittings Push-On AWWA C110A2110 and AWWA C111A2111 rated for 150 psi


a HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSIAWWA C906 and shall meet pressure classification and dimension ratios (DR) as indicated in the following table

Nominal Size Pressure Class DR

4 - 24 200 psig 9

HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to Standard DIPS (Ductile-Iron OD Pipe Sizing) Dimensions If CONTRACTOR wants to use Standard IPS (Iron Pipe OD pipe sizing) dimension then the next larger pipe shall be installed at no additional cost to the OWNER

Materials used for the manufacture of HDPE pipe and fittings shall meet the following physical property requirements


Material Designation - PPIASTM PE 3408

Material Classification - D-1248 III C 5 P34

Cell Classification - D-3350 345434C

Density gmcm3 D-1505 0955

Melt Index gm10 min D-1238 010

Flexural Modulus psi D-790 133000

Tensile Strength psi D-638 3200

ESCR Hrs D-1693 gt5000

HDB psi D-2837 1600

UV Stabilizer Carbon Black D-1603 2 to 3

Elastic Modulus psi D-638 110000

Brittleness Temperature Degrees F D-746 -180

Vicat Softening Temp Degrees F D-1525 255

Thermal Expansion inindegrees F D-696 8 x 10 -5




Hardness Shore D D-2240 64

Molecular Weight Category - Extra High

Molecular Weight - GPC 330000



(1) Test procedures are ASTM unless otherwise specified

(PPI - Plastics Institute GPC = Gel Permenation Chromatography)

The pipe shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved

b Fittings for HDPE Fittings for HDPE shall be miter fusion fabricated and shall provide a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe Outlet ends of such fabricated fittings shall be machined to match system piping

Molded butt fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3261

Special flanged stub end transition fittings recommended by the HDPE pipe manufacturer shall be used when joining HDPE pipe to other types of pipes The transition fitting shall be capable of resisting pull out forces due to seasonal subsurface temperature changes or from changes in anticipated internal or external loadings

22 JOINTS

221 PVC Piping

a Push-On Joint Fittings ASTM D3139 with ASTM F477 gaskets

b Solvent Cement ASTM D2564

c Couplings for use with plain end pipe shall have centering rings or stops to ensure the coupling is centered on the joint

222 Ductile Iron Piping

a Push-on Joints AWWA C111A2111 Class 200

b Mechanical Joints AWWA C111A2111 as modified by AWWA C151A2151 Class 350 for 24 and smaller and Class 250 forfittings larger than 24

c Flanged Joints AWWA C115A2115 Class 125


Joints for HDPE Pipe HDPE pipe and fittings shall be butt fusion jointed utilizing procedures tools and equipment recommended by the pipe manufacturer The procedure shall be performed by craftsmen knowledgeable



and experienced in the techniques of butt fusion of HDPE pipe for high pressure service

A representative of the pipe manufacturer qualified to perform butt fusion procedures on HDPE pipe shall be on site to advise the CONTRACTOR as to procedures and quality control to ensure the best quality and integrity of the completed HDPE pipe system unless waived by the OWNER and ENGINEER as a result of superior qualifications presented by the CONTRACTOR himself

23 VALVES

231 Gate Valves

Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall comply with AWWA C500 Valves for buried service shall be non-rising stem (NRS) 2 inch square nut operated with joints applicable to the pipe or installation Buried valves shall be furnished with extension stems comprising socket extension stem and operating nut and shall be of an appropriate length to bring operating nut to within 6 inches of grade One 4 foot T handle valve wrench shall be furnished for each quantity of 6 buried valves Gate valves that are exposed or installed inside shall be outside screw and yoke (OSampY) handwheel operated with flange ends unless otherwise indicated Gate valve operating nuts and handwheels shall have an arrow and the word OPEN cast in raised letters to indicate the direction of opening Gate valves 14 inches and larger shall be equipped with gearing to reduce operating effort Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in horizontal lines in horizontal position with stems horizontal shall be equipped with bronze track roller and scrapers to support the weight of the gate for its full length of travel Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in vertical pipe lines with stems horizontal shall be fitted with slides to assist the travel of the gate assembly

232 Plug Valves

Cast iron valves shall comply with MSS SP-78 Steel plug valves shall comply with API Spec 6D

24 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Miscellaneous materials shall comply with the following requirements

241 Joint Lubricants

Joint lubricants shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer

242 Bolts Nuts and Glands

AWWA C111A2111

243 Joint Compound

A stiff mixture of graphite and oil or inert filler and oil

244 Joint Tape

ASTM D3308



PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Pipe pipe fittings and appurtenances shall be installed at the locations indicated Excavation trenching and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

311 Cutting

Pipe shall be cut in a neat manner with mechanical cutters Wheel cutters shall be used where practicable Sharp and rough edges shall be ground smooth and loose material removed from the pipe before laying

312 Laying

Except where otherwise authorized pipe shall be laid with bells facing the direction of laying Before lowering and while suspended the pipe shall be inspected for defects Defective material shall be rejected Pipe shall be laid in compliance with the following

a Ductile Iron AWWA C600

b High density polyethylene Manufacturers instructions

313 Jointing

3131 Joints for 4D PE Pipe

Heat fusion joints shall comply with the manufacturers instructions concerning equipment temperature melt time heat coat and joining time Flanged and mechanical joints shall be made in compliance with the manufacturers instructions

3132 Joints for Ductile Iron Pipe

Installation of mechanical and push-on type joints shall comply with AWWA C600 and the manufacturers instructions Installation of flanged joints shall comply with manufacturers instructions

314 Installation of Valves

Prior to installation valves shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and inspected for damage Valves shall be fully opened and closed to ensure that all parts are properly operating Valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertical position

315 Installation of Temporary Valve Boxes (PVC Pipe)

Temporary valve boxes shall be fashioned from PVC pipe and installed over each outside gate valve unless otherwise indicated Valve boxes shall be centered over the valve Fill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet

316 Thrust Restraint

Plugs caps tees and bends deflecting 11-14 degrees or more either vertically or horizontally shall be provided with thrust restraint



Valves shall be securely anchored or shall be provided with thrust restraints to prevent movement Thrust restraints shall be either thrust blocks or for ductile-iron pipes restrained joints

3161 Thrust Blocks

Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 cement 2-12 sand 5 gravel and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored Unless otherwise indicated or directed the base and thrust bearing sides of thrust blocks shall be poured directly against undisturbed earth The sides of thrust blocks not subject to thrust may be poured against forms The area of bearing shall be as shown or as directed Blocking shall be placed so that the fitting joints will be accessible for repair Steel rods and clamps protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks

3162 Restrained Joints

For ductile iron pipe restrained joints shall be designed by the Contractor or the pipe manufacturer in accordance with DIPRA TRD

32 HYDROSTATIC TESTS

The pipeline shall be subjected to both a pressure test and a leakage test The method proposed for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic tests shall be approved by the Contracting Officer Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor The test may be witnessed by the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 7 days in advance of equipment tests The final test report shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of the test

321 Pressure Test

After the pipe has been installed joints completed thrust blocks have been in place for at least five days and the trench has been partially backfilled leaving the joints exposed for examination the pipe shall be filled with water to expel all air The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of 150 psi for a period of at least one hour Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test The exposed pipe joints fitting and valves shall be examined for leaks Visible leaks shall be stopped or the defective pipe fitting joints or valve shall be replaced

322 Leakage Test

The leakage test may be conducted subsequent to or concurrently with the pressure test The amount of water permitted as leakage for the line shall be placed in a sealed container attached to the supply side of the test pump No other source of supply will be permitted to be applied to the pump or line under test The water shall be pumped into the line by the test pump as required to maintain the specified test pressure as described for pressure test for a 2 hour period Exhaustion of the supply or the inability to maintain the required pressure will be considered test failure HDPE pipe can experience diametric expansion and pressure elongation during initial testing The manufacturer shall be consulted prior to testing for special testing considerations Allowable leakage shall be determined by the following I-P formula



L = NDPK Where







323 Retesting





SECTION 33 71 02

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION0215

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire







NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


ANSI C1191 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts

NEMA RN 1 (2005 R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit


NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC



Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TC 9 (2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation












UL 854 (2004 Reprint Nov 2014) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables



Items provided under this section must be specifically suitable for the following service conditions


Section 26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELETRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

14 DEFINITIONS

a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary

b In the text of this section the words conduit and duct are used



interchangeably and have the same meaning

c Underground structures subject to aircraft loading are indicated on the drawings

15 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Copper conductors

Submit modified drawings and engineering calculations associated with design changes required for use of copper conductors

SD-03 Product Data

Compositefiberglass handholes

Cable supports

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Cable Installation Plan and Procedure

Six copies of the information described below in 8-12 by 11 inchbinders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced including a separate section for each cable pull Separate sections by heavy plastic dividers with tabs with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull

a Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified

b A list of equipment used with calibration certifications The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull

c The cable manufacturer and type of cable

d The dates of cable pulls time of day and ambient temperature

e The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions

f The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull

SD-07 Certificates

Directional Boring Certificate of Conformance




161 Directional Boring Certificate of Conformance

Provide certification of compliance with the registered Professional Engineers design requirements for each directional bore including HDPE conduit size and type bend radius elevation changes vertical and horizontal path deviations conductor size and type and any conductor derating due to depth of conduit Record location and depth of all directional-bore installed HDPE conduits using Global Positioning System (GPS) recording means with resource grade accuracy


In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word must had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2-year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items must be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable unless specified otherwise

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21 CONDUIT DUCTS AND FITTINGS

211 Rigid Metal Conduit

UL 6



2111 Rigid Metallic Conduit PVC Coated

NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness must be nominal 85 Shore A durometer dielectric strength must be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz and tensile strength must be minimum 3500 psi

212 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial and Riser Applications

UL 651 and NEMA TC 2 EPC-40 or EPC-80

213 Duct Sealant

UL 94 Class HBF Provide high-expansion urethane foam duct sealant that expands and hardens to form a closed chemically and water resistant rigid structure Sealant must be compatible with common cable and wire jackets and capable of adhering to metals plastics and concrete Sealant must be capable of curing in temperature ranges of 35 degrees F to 95 degrees F Cured sealant must withstand temperature ranges of -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F without loss of function

214 Fittings

2141 Metal Fittings

UL 514B

2142 PVC Conduit Fittings

NEMA TC 3

2143 PVC Duct Fittings

NEMA TC 9

2144 Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit

Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit must be cast-metal cadmium or zinc-coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and must conform to UL 514A

22 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 including listing requirements Wires and cables manufactured more than 24 months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854 type USE

221 Conductor Types

Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHNTHWN unless otherwise noted Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller must be solid Conductors No 8 AWG and larger must be stranded Conductors No 6 AWG and smaller must be copper Conductors No 4 AWG and larger may be either copper or aluminum at the Contractors option All conductors must be copper



222 Conductor Material

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 wires in conduit other than service entrance must be 600-volt Type THWNTHHN conforming to UL 83 Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8

223 Cable Marking

Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length

Identify each cable by means of a fiber laminated plastic or non-ferrous metal tags or approved equal in each manhole handhole junction box and each terminal Each tag must contain the following information cable type conductor size circuit number circuit voltage cable destination and phase identification

Conductors must be color coded Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made Conductor identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers colored nylon cable ties and plates heat shrink type sleevesor colored electrical tape Control circuit terminations must be properly identified Color must be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals must be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows


(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue


(1) Phase A - brown




d On three-phase four-wire delta system high leg must be orange as required by NFPA 70

23 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS

Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors

a For use with copper conductors UL 486A-486B



24 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES

Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply with ANSI C1191

241 Heat Shrinkable Splice

Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions

242 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice

Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation The installation must not require heat or flame or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive It must be designed for use with inline compression type connectors or indoor outdoor direct-burial or submerged locations

25 TAPE

251 Insulating Tape

UL 510 plastic insulating tape capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C

252 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

253 Fireproofing Tape

Provide tape composed of a flexible conformable unsupported intumescent elastomer Tape must be not less than 030 inch thick noncorrosive to cable sheath self-extinguishing noncombustible adhesive-free and must not deteriorate when subjected to oil water gases salt water sewage and fungus

26 PULL ROPE

Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds

27 GROUNDING AND BONDING

271 Driven Ground Rods

Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 34 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length Sectional type rods may be used for rods 20 feet or longer


Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B8 Class B soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated Solid-bare copper conductors must



conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No 8 and smaller Insulated conductors must be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded except that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts Aluminum is not acceptable

28 LOW VOLTAGE EXTERIOR PULL BOX

a Concrete polymer pull boxes impact resistant per ASTM D 2444 high strength low water absorption

b Design load 22500 lbs test load 33750 lbs per ANSI tier 22

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturers published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable

32 CABLE INSPECTION

Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions signs of physical damage and broken end seals prior to installation If end seal is broken remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturers recommendations

33 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE

Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction insulation type cable diameter bending radius cable temperature limits for installation lubricants coefficient of friction conduit cleaning storage procedures moisture seals testing for and purging moisture maximum allowable pulling tension and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure

34 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE SYSTEM

341 Trenching

Excavate trenches for direct-burial cables to provide a minimum cable cover of 24 inches below finished grade for power conductors operated at 600 volts or less and 30 inches below finished grade for over 600 volts in accordance with IEEE C2 When rock is encountered remove to a depth of at least 3 inches below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 14 inch Bottoms of trenches must be smooth and free of stones and sharp objects Where materials in bottoms of trenches are other than sand a 75 mm 3 inch layer of sand must be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil Trenches must be not less than 6 inches wide and must be in straight lines between cable markers Bends in trenches must have a radius of not less than 36 inches

342 Cable Installation

Ducts must extend at least 5 feet beyond each edge of any paving and at least 5 feet beyond each side of any railroad tracks Cables may be pulled into duct from a fixed reel where suitable rollers are provided in the trench Where direct burial cable transitions to duct-enclosed cable



direct-burial cables must be centered in duct entrances and a waterproof nonhardening mastic compound must be used to facilitate such centering If paving or railroad tracks are in place where cables are to be installed coated rigid steel conduits driven under the paving or railroad tracks may be used in lieu of concrete-encased ducts Prevent damage to conduit coatings by providing ferrous pipe jackets or by predrilling Where cuts are made in any paving the paving and subbase must be restored to their original condition Where cable is placed in duct(eg under paved areas roads or railroads) slope ducts to drain

343 Splicing

Provide cables in one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which cables are manufactured Where splices are required install splices only in maintenance manholeshandholes or cabinetspedestals

344 Bends

Bends in cables must have an inner radius not less than those specified in NFPA 70 for the type of cable or manufacturers recommendation

345 Horizontal Slack

Leave approximately 3 feet of horizontal slack in the ground on each end of cable runs on each side of connection boxes and at points where connections are brought above ground Where cable is brought above ground leave additional slack to make necessary connections

346 Identification Slabs or Markers

Provide a slab at each change of direction of cable over the ends of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and roadways over the ends of ducts or conduits stubbed out for future use and over each splice Identification slabs must be of concrete approximately 20 inches square by 6 inches thick and must be set flat in the ground so that top surface projects not less than 34 inch nor more than 1 14 inches above ground Concrete must have a compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi and have a smooth troweled finish on exposed surface Inscribe an identifying legend such as electric cable telephone cable splice or other applicable designation on the top surface of the slab before concrete hardens Inscribe circuit identification symbols on slabs as indicated Letters or figures must be approximately 2 inches high and grooves must be approximately 14 inch in width and depth Install slabs so that the side nearest the inscription on top must include an arrow indicating the side nearest the cable Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

35 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS

351 Requirements

Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated Bond bare copper grounding conductor to ground rings (loops) in all manholes and to ground rings (loops) at all equipment slabs (pads) Ducts must have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings laid with a minimum slope of 3 inches per 100 feet Depending on the contour of the finished grade the high-point may be at a terminal



a manhole a handhole or between manholes or handholes Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures

Perform changes in ductbank direction as follows

a Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers unless specifically indicated as acceptable

b The minimum manufactured bend radius must be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter

c As an exception to the bend radius required above provide field manufactured longsweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees either horizontally or vertically using a combination of curved and straight sections Maximum manufactured curved sections 30 degrees

352 Treatment

Ducts must be kept clean of concrete dirt or foreign substances during construction Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools and match factory tapers A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid Plastic ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun

353 Conduit Cleaning

As each conduit run is completed for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit After which draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs For conduit sizes less than 3 inches draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs

354 Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures

Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be disturbed and under roads and railroad tracks must be zinc-coated rigid steel jacked into place Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement rigid steel conduit must be installed because of its strength To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used Separators or spacing blocks must be made of steel concrete plastic or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers Hydraulic jet method must not be used

355 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations

Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs pavement and walls) in wet locations must be PVC coated and must extend from at least 2 inches



within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete (minimum of 6 inches from penetration)

356 Multiple Conduits

Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches except that light and power conduits must be separated from control signal and conduits by a minimum distance of 12 inches Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally Spacer assembly must consist of base spacers intermediate spacers ties and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly Install spacers per manufacturers instructions but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly

357 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope

New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs on each end Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits

358 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement

Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench Grade bottom of trench smooth where rock soft spots or sharp-edged materials are encountered excavate the bottom for an additional 3 inches fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles that would be retained on a 14 inch sieve The first 6 inch layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously specified The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

3581 Directional Boring

HDPE conduits must be installed below the frostline and as specified herein

For branch circuit wiring less than 600 volts depths to the top of the conduit must not be less than 30 inches in pavement- or non-pavement-covered areas

359 Duct Encased in Concrete

3591 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads

For duct bank connections to concrete pads break an opening in the pad out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad Cut the steel and extend into the duct bank envelope Chip out the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope

3592 Partially Completed Duct Banks

During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank prevent debris such as mud and and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs Fit concrete envelope of a partially



completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the envelope Provide one No 4 bar in each corner 3 inches from the edge of the envelope Secure corner bars with two No 3 ties spaced approximately one foot apart Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring

3593 Removal of Ducts

Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures close the openings to waterproof the structure Chip out the wall opening to provide a key for the new section of wall

3510 Duct Sealing

Seal all electrical penetrations for radon mitigation maintaining integrity of the vapor barrier and to prevent infiltration of air insects and vermin

36 CABLE PULLING

Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions including turnups into switches transformers switchgear switchboards and other enclosures Cable with tape shield must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating

361 Cable Lubricants

Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables

37 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths Form cables to closely parallel walls not to interfere with duct entrances and support on brackets and cable insulators Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the splice Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks leaving top space open for future cables except as otherwise indicated for existing installations Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure

371 Cable Tag Installation

Install cable tags in each manhole as specified including each splice Tag wire and cable provided by this contract Install cable tags over the fireproofing if any and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes

38 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING

Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or



specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes handholes or aboveground termination pedestals

39 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms

391 Grounding Electrodes

Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded If the specified ground resistance is not met an additional ground rod must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not less than 6 feet from the first rod) Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer immediately



a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturers written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds

b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies must be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire


Provide bare grounding conductors except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors Ground cable sheaths cable shields conduit and equipment with No 6 AWG Ground other noncurrent-carrying metal parts and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment Ground metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No 6 AWG Provide direct connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated full-size conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit which is spliced within the manhole

394 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints

Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement Use stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across such separations



310 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 0000 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

3101 Reconditioning of Surfaces

31011 Unpaved Surfaces

Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area re-seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding and provide topsoiling fertilizing liming seeding sodding sprigging or mulching

311 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3111 Concrete Slabs (Pads) for Equipment

Unless otherwise indicated the slab must be at least 8 inches thick reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W29 by W29 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab Slab must be placed on a 6 inch thick well-compacted gravel base Top of concrete slab must be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage Edges above grade must have 12 inch chamfer Slab must be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment

Stub up conduits with bushings 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas

3112 Sealing

When the installation is complete seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound Seals must be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents insects or other foreign matter


3121 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS

31211 Low Voltage Cables 600-Volt

Perform tests after installation of cable splices and terminations and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits

a Visual and Mechanical Inspection

(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage

(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with



contract plans and specifications

(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections

(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation

(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition

(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement

b Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 1000 volts dc for one minute

(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection

31212 Grounding System

a Visual and mechanical inspection

Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications

b Electrical tests

Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE 81 On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturers instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument must be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with associated distances and provide a plot of resistance vs distance

3122 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing




SECTION 40 05 00

STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATED SLIDE GATES0617

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES




AWS D16 (2007) Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel


AWWA C560 (2000 R2007) Cast Iron Slide Gates

AWWA C561 (2004) Fabricate Stainless Steel Slide Gates





ASTM B584 (2014) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

ASTM B62 (2015) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

ASTM D4020 (2011) Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials

ASTM F593 (2013a E 2016) Standard Specification for



Stainless Steel Bolts Hex Cap Screws and Studs

ASTM F594 (2009 E 2015) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts



12 DEFINITIONS

This section includes materials installation and testing of fabricated stainless steel slide gate open channel type conforming to AWWA C561 and as supplemented herein and also includes requirements for materials installation and testing of cast stainless steel slide gates (formerly called sluice gates) conforming to AWWA C560 and as supplemented herein Gates shall be installed complete with electric actuatorsoperators where indicated

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop and Erection Drawings

Certified shop and erection drawings including but not limited to dimensional drawings calculations to show that gates stems and left meet the specifications all catalog data and detail drawing showing slide gate parts and described by material of construction specification (such as AISI ASTM SAE or CDA) and grade or type show coatings show each gate by tag number data regarding motor characteristics and performance accessory items templates or certified setting plans with tolerances for anchor bolts manufacturers literature operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists warranty listing of reference installations as specified with contact names and telephone numbers qualifications of field service engineer list of spare parts other than those specified recommendations for long term and short term storage special tools shop and field testing procedures and equipment to be used number of service man days provided and per diem field service rate manufacturers product data and specifications for shop painting listing of material recommended for each service specified and indicated providing compatibility with process fluid and service specified and indicated


Maintenance Manuals

14 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for a two year period



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Fabricated gates shall be self contained upward opening type with guides for surface mounting on existing wall or pipe flange as required The gates shall be furnished with floorstand where indicated Gates at grit influent are manual

Electric actuators shall be provided to replace manual operators on two (2) existing stainless steel slide gates located downstream of the existing bar screens


Fabricated stainless steel gates shall comply with AWWA C 561 except as modified herein Leakage shall not exceed 01 gpm per foot of wetted seating perimeter Gates shall be design complete with gates guides frames base plates seats stems stem guides seals actuator and anchor bolts for a minimum seating and unseating head of 10 feet Measure the seating and unseating heads from the top surface of the water to the centerline of the disc Provide rising stem design


Gate performance requirements are outlined under the design requirements

22 MATERIALS

221 Fabricated Stainless Slide Gates Design

Design frames to be suitable for flush mounting on existing wall or pipe flange as noted herein The fabricated slide gate guides shall incorporate a two-slot design One slot shall accept the disc plate The second slot shall accept the reinforcing ribs of the disc The guides shall extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for handwheel operator stand The extended guides or posts shall require no additional reinforcing to support the operator Construct the guides of formed plate into a rigid continuous structural shape Provide a flush invert at the bottom of the frame Provide a rubber insert to function as a seating surface for the gate disc Provide rubber J-bulb or UHMW polyurethane seals or seats along the sides of the gatesFor self-contained gates provide replaceable polyethylene bearing strips in extruded retainer slots along the guides Provide strips along both sides of the guide channels containing the disc Mount strips in dovetail grooves in the guides Alternatively mount the replaceable polyethylene bearing strips on the disc Provide rubber or UHMWPE J-bulb seals along the top of the gate for submerged applications Fabricate the disc using stainless steel flat plate with stainless steel structural or formed members welded to the plate Provide disc components with a minimum material thickness of 14 inch The disc shall be a one-piece plate reinforced with ribs so that the disc will not deflect more than 1720 the gate span when the upstream side of the gate is subjected to the specified seating head and the downstream side of the gate contains no liquid Design the disc to limit deflection to a maximum of 18 inch when the disc is subjected to the maximum specified unseating head Attach reinforcing ribs to disc by welding do not use bolting Reinforcing ribs shall extend into the guides such that they overlap the seating surface of the guide Design the disc so that all surfaces are free of metal-to-metal contact with the frames



Attach the actuator support yoke to the extensions of the guides Provide two angles or structural channels bolted to opposite sides of the guide extensions Mount the actuator on a plate bolted to the support yoke Maximum deflection of the yoke shall not exceed 14 inch when subjected to a load induced by an 80-pound pull on the actuator or 1360 span when subjected to a load induced by a 40-pound pull on the actuator whichever is less Lifting stems shall be one piece with a minimum diameter of 1 12 inches The stem shall withstand an actuator effort of 80 pounds without buckling assuming the critical buckling load as determined by using the Euler Column Formula with C = 20 Support the stems with stem guides such that the LR ratio for the unsupported part of the stem does not exceed 200 The stem connection to the disc shall be either the clevis type with structural members welded to the slide and containing a bolt to act as a pivot pin or a threaded and bolted or keyed thrust nut supported in a welded nut pocket The pocket shall be capable of withstanding a load of 80 pounds on the actuator Design crank-operated or handwheel-operated floor stand hoists to permit gate operation with 40 pounds of maximum effort under the head conditions noted in the drawings Provide clear plastic polycarbonate stem cover with position indication graduated in feet and inches Provide vent holes in the cover to prevent condensation

222 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates Materials of Construction

Materials of construction shall be as listed in AWWA C561 and conform to the requirements listed below


Guides Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M or ASTM A276A276M Type 316 or 316L

Disc Yoke Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M or ASTM A276A276M Type 316 or 316L

Stems Stem Guides Bushings Pivot Pin

Stainless Steel ASTM A276A276M Type 304 or 303

Bolts Fasteners (Including Anchor Bolts)

Stainless Steel ASTM A193A193M ASTM F593 or ASTM F594 Grade B8M

Lift Nut Bronze ASTM B62 or ASTM B584 Alloys C83600 C83800 or C86500

J-Bulb Seals Flush Bottom Seals

Rubber or UHMW Polyurethane ASTM D2000 Grades BC610 BC611 BC612 BC613 BC614 or BC615 or ASTM D4020

23 ELECTRIC OPERATOR

Electric operators shall be provided complete with actuators speed controls and accessories The actuators shall operate on 480 VAC 3 phase 60 Hz with a 100 percent duty cycle and shall be equipped with an AC thermal overload protector with automatic rest reversing (bi-directional) operation for use with rotating equipment to full rotation Gearing shall be a two-stage planetary permanently lubricated self-locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings connections via male output staff The start-up torque shall be suitable for the gate being operating The stall



torque shall exceed the start-up torque by no less than 25 Two travel stop limit switches with cams internal independent adjustable and actuated by cams shall be mounted on the drive shaft A side mounted hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual override The actuators shall have a NEMA 250 Type 4X corrosion resistant enclosure as standard The actuator shall operate in a temperature range of -40 to plus 65 degrees C -40 to plus 150 degrees F Actuators shall fail in last position unless otherwise indicated Electric operators shall be furnished with features noted on the gate schedule in the contract drawings Limit switches shall be provided on all actuators

231 Limit Switches

Limit switches shall be single-pole double-throw (SPDT) type rated 10 amps at 120 volts ac housed in a NEMA 250 Type 4X enclosure and adjustable for open and closed positions

24 SPARE PARTS

Provide the following spare parts for each size of fabricated slide gate


2 Lift Nuts

4 Stem Guides for Each Type and Size

2 Pivot Pins

1 Set Sealing Strips


25 SHOP AND FACTORY FINISHING

Coat any cast-iron and steel surfaces above deck level including actuator per Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS Apply the prime coat at the factory Color of the finish coat shall be OSHA Safety Red unless directed otherwise Do not coat stainless steel components

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

Examine all gates delivered to the site Reject damaged products

32 INSTALLATION

Install fabricated stainless steel slide gates per AWWA C561 paragraph 46 Install the cast stainless steel slide gates per AWWA C560 paragraph 46 Welder qualifications shall comply with AWS D16 Welding rod and electrodes shall comply with AWS A54A54M In addition to structural welds seal weld interfaces between mating parts to prevent moisture intrusion




331 Tests

Operate each fabricated stainless steel slide gate through two complete cycles Gates shall operate without binding Determine the pulling force required to turn the handwheel with a torque wrench Pulling force required shall be less than the limit specified Fill channels to which the gates are attached with water Measure leakage through each slide gate Measure the actual field seating and unseating heads The allowable leakage shall be as specified above If the leakage rate is exceeded adjust or replace the gate and retest until it passes




SECTION 40 95 00

PROCESS CONTROL1007

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES



IEEE 142 (2007 Errata 2014) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book

IEEE C62411 (2002 R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits



INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 61131-3 (2013) Programmable Controllers - Part 3 Programming Languages






NIST SP 250 (1991) Calibration Services Users Guide


UL 1059 (2001 Reprint Oct 2011) Standard for Terminal Blocks

12 DEFINITIONS

Definitions Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations shall conform to IEEE Stds Dictionary as applicable




The existing SCADA system at the French Creek WWTP consists of parallel data highway loops interconnecting six (6) Allen-Bradley 540 Programmable Logic Controllers to the Human-Machine Interface located in the Control Room of the Administration Building The six (6) existing PLCs are located in instrumentation rooms strategically located throughout the existing WWTP to monitor and control operation of various process equipment The existing control system provides for operator interaction overall control system supervision and process equipment control and monitoring The existing SCADA programming software is Citect by Schneider Electric

PLC No 1 is located in the instrumentation room of the Primary Sludge Pump Station which is in close proximity to the existing headworks structure and equipment Motor starters with integral hand-off -auto switches for the existing bar screen screening conveyors screenings washercompactor and grit conveyor are housed in the Motor Control Center in the electrical room located adjacent to the instrumentation room Local hand-off-auto switches are located at each individual piece of equipment The main control panel for the existing grit removal system is located beside the grit removal system Control and monitoring functions for the existing screening equipment as well as the grit removal system are integrated through existing PLC No 1

The existing process instrumentation and control system will be modified to integrate control and monitoring requirements associated with upgrades to the screening system equipment and grit removal system at the headworks structure The systems integrator shall modify the process instrumentation and control system to integrate controls signals alarms etc associated with modified equipment and controls provided by others


Equipment and control changes for the WWTP include

1 Two (2) mechanical bar screens with main control panel located remotely in the instrumentation room adjacent to the bar screens at the headworks

2 One (1) new wash presscompactor with main control panel located remotely in the instrumentation room adjacent to the existing PLC No 1 and local push button control station located adjacent to the wash press at the headworks

One (1) new main control panel for grit removal system located adjacent to the grit removal system at the headworks

The bar screen main control panel will include a PLC During normal operation bar screen operations are controlled from the main control panel based on water level in the bar screen channels The bar screen main control panel also provides the run signal to initiate operation of the downstream screening conveyors and wash presscompactor Dry contact discrete and analog signals and alarms from the screening equipment motor starters and control panels shall be terminated and integrated through PLC No 1 to accommodate remote monitoring alarm registers data logging reporting etc The main control panel for the grit removal system includes a PLC to provide various timer functions for operations of electric valves grit classifiers and grit conveyor Dry contact



discrete signals and alarms from the grit equipment motor starters and control panel shall be terminated and integrated through PLC No 1 to accommodate remote monitoring at the HMI

132 Operation

Control system modifications provided under this specification shall operate using algorithms or ladder logic type supervisory control to provide the required sequences of operation Input data to the controller shall be obtained from instruments and controls interfaced to new mechanical electrical and utility systems as shown and specified All required setpoints settings alarm limits and sequences of operation shall be as identified in the sequences of operation

133 Points

Inputs to and outputs from the control system shall be in accordance with the InputOutput (IO) Summary Table included herein as Table I Each connected analog output (AO) analog input (AI) digital output (DO) digital input (DI) and other input or output device connected to the control system shall represent a point where referred to in this specification

134 Data Transmission Systems (DTS)

Data transmission systems for communication between PLCs and field control panels shall be as shown on the drawings

14 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation

Wiring

Detail drawings containing complete piping wiring schematicflow diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate thatthe system has been coordinated and will properly function as aunit Piping and Instrumentation (PampID) drawings (prepared usingindustry recognized device symbols clearly defined and describingpiping designations to define the service and materials ofindividual pipe segments and instrument tags employing InstrumentSociety of America suggested identifiers) Include in theDrawings as appropriate product specific catalog cuts adrawing index a list of symbols a series of drawings for eachcontrol system using abbreviations symbols nomenclature andidentifiers as shown valve schedules etc

SD-03 Product Data

Control Drawings

Manufacturers descriptive and technical literature performance charts and installation instructions Product specific catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed to the unique identifiers



and shall consist of data sheets that document compliance with the specification Where multiple components are shown on a catalog cut mark the application specific component

Performance Verification Test (PVT)

The performance verification test procedure it shall refer to the actions and expected results to demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequence of control Include a list of the equipment to be used during the testing plus manufacturers name model number equipment function the date of the latest calibration and the results of the latest calibration

Field Test Procedure

Documentation containing field test methods and procedures

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Test Report

Testing Adjusting and Commissioning

Performance Verification Test(PVT)

Endurance Test

Test Results in report format

SD-07 Certificates

Certified test results for surge protection


Instrumentation and Control System

Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the instructions layout wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and trouble shooting guides

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Materials and equipment must be standard unmodified products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer Items of the same type and purpose shall be identical and supplied by the same manufacturer unless replaced by a new version



approved by the Government

212 Nameplates

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturers name and address and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for equipment devices and panels furnished Each nameplate shall identify the device such as pump P-1 or valve VLV-402 Labels shall be coordinate with the schedules and the process and instrumentation drawings Laminated plastic shall be 18 inch thick white with black center core Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 by 3 inches with minimum 14 inch high engraved block lettering Nameplates for devices smaller than 1 by 3 inches shall be attached by a nonferrous metal chain All other nameplates shall be attached to the device


Equipment located outdoors not provided with climate controlled enclosure shall be capable of operating in the ambient temperature range indicated in paragraph ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS unless otherwise specified Electrical equipment will conform to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Equipment and wiring must be in accordance with NFPA 70 with proper consideration given to environmental conditions such as moisture dirt corrosive agents and hazardous area classification

23 MONITORING AND CONTROL PARAMETERS

The control system shall be complete including sensors field preamplifiers signal conditioners offset and span adjustments amplifiers transducers transmitters control devices engineering units conversions and algorithms for the applications and shall maintain the specified end-to-end process control loop accuracy from sensor to display and final control element Control equipment shall be powered by a 120 vAc single phase 60 Hz power source with local transformers included as needed for signal transmission and subsystem operation Connecting conductors shall be suitable for installed service Enclosures shall be rated for NEMA Class 1 Div 2 within 5 feet of the headworks structure

231 Electrical Instrumentation

Electrical power measurements with a range for the specific application plus or minus 10 percent of range (display and print to nearest kWh and kW) Electrical measurements with a range for the specific application plus or minus 10 percent of range (display and print to nearest 01 for volts and amperes and to the nearest 001 for VAR and PF)

24 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)


The existing WWTP SCADA PLC is Allen-Bradley 540 with Citect programming software by Schneider Electric The systems integrator shall modify the existing PLC and appurtenances to integrate input signals from various new control panels provided by others PLC interfaces to the existing WWTP SCADA system with DH+ communication protocol



242 Modular PLC

2421 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Module

The existing CPU module is a self contained microprocessor based unit that provides time of day scanning application (ladder rung logic) program execution storage of application programs storage of numerical values related to the application process and logic IO bus traffic control peripheral and external device communications and self diagnostics Utilize the existing CPU to facilitate proposed improvements

2422 Communications Module

The existing communications module allow s peer-to-peer communication with other PLCs and allow s the PLC to communicate with the central station or workstation The communication module utilize s the manufacturers standard communication architecture and protocol ethernet architecture and protocol or a combination of these The communication module allow s programming of the PLC to be done locally through the use of a laptop computer or from the central station or remote workstation Utilize the existing communications module

2423 Power Supply Module

Existing power supply modules shall continue to be utilized to power other modules installed in the same cabinet Power supply modules shall plug directly into the backplane Auxiliary power supplies may be used to supply power to remote cabinets or modules as necessary

a Power supply modules shall use AC power with a nominal voltage of 120 vAc plus or minus 5 percent with 24 vDc or 5 vDc as required by PLC components The power supply module shall monitor the incoming line voltage level and shall provide over current and over voltage protection If the voltage level is detected as being out of range the power supply module shall continue to provide power for an adequate amount of time to allow for a safe and orderly shutdown Power supply modules shall be capable of withstanding a power loss for a minimum of 20 milliseconds while still remaining in operation and providing adequate power to all connected modules

b Each power supply module shall be provided with an on-off switch integral to the module If the manufacturers standard power supply module is not provided with an on-off switch a miniature toggle type switch shall be installed near the PLC and shall be clearly labeled as to its function

c Provide power supply modules with an indicating light which shall be lit when the module is operating properly

2424 InputOutput (IO) Modules

Existing IO Modules are self contained microprocessor based units that provide an interface to field devices Provide additional IO modules to match existing Located in the same mounting rack as the other PLC components The unit shall plug directly into the backplane of the mounting rack Each module shall contain visual indication to display the on-off status of individual inputs or outputs



243 Loop PLC

Existing PLC is a single or multiple loop controller based on the control system requirements Controller is self contained and include s a central processing unit (CPU) program memory power supply inputoutput capability network communications capability and displaykeyboard The controller has a scaleable process variable for each loop Analog input signals are based on the use of proportional integral and derivative (PID) control logic Analog outputs are configured as direct acting or reverse acting The controller has keyboard display automanual selection for control of each loop output remote setpoint adjustmentlocal setpoint adjustment selection with adjustable high-end and low-end limits ratio and bias adjustment on remote setpoint input operator-initiated self-tunemanual-tune selection and anti-reset wind-up feature Controller power s analog output loops to 20 mAdc when connected to a load of 600 ohms Utilize existing PLC for integration of new signals

2431 Power Requirements

Existing controller is powered by 120 vAc Power consumption does not exceed 25 watts Controller provide s electrical noise isolation between the AC power line and the process variable inputs remote setpoint inputs and output signals of not less than 100 dB at 60 Hertz common mode rejection ration and not less than 60 dB at 60 hertz normal-mode rejection ration

2432 On-Off Switch

Existing controller is provided with an integral on-off switch Otherwise a miniature toggle type switch is installed near the controller

2433 Parameter Input and Display

Control parameters shall be entered and displayed directly in the correct engineering units through a series of keystrokes on a front panel display with decimal point and polarity indication Display shall be in English units

2434 Self Tuning

Controllers are provided with self-tuning operation which shall apply to proportional integral and derivative modes of control and shall modify the mode constants as required Self-tuning shall only be in operation when selected from the front panel

2435 Manual Tuning

Controllers are provided with manual tuning operation which shall apply to proportional integral and derivative modes of control by means of individually adjustable mode constants Adjustments shall be set for the appropriate value if a particular control mode action is required or to zero if that particular mode is not desired

244 Program StorageMemory Requirements

The CPU utilize s the manufacturers standard non-volatile memory for the operating system The controller shall have electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) for storage of user programs and battery backed RAM for application memory



245 InputOutput Characteristics

Each controller shall allow for analog input analog output discrete input and discrete output The number and type of additional inputs and outputs for the system shall be as indicated herein The system capacity shall include a minimum of 20 percent spare input and output points (no less than two points) for each point type provided During normal operation a malfunction in any inputoutput channel shall affect the operation of that channel only and shall not affect the operation of the CPU or any other channel Analog input circuits shall be available in 4-20 mA Discrete input circuits shall be available in 79-132 vAc All input circuits shall have a minimum optical isolation of 1500 VRMS and shall be filtered to guard against high voltage transients from the externally connected devices Analog output circuits shall be available in 4-20 mA Discrete output circuits shall be available in 79-132 vAc All output circuits shall have a minimum optical isolation of 1500 VRMS and shall be filtered to guard against high voltage transients from the externally connected devices

246 Wiring Connections

Wiring connections shall be heavy duty self lifting pressure type screw terminals to provide easy wire insertion and secure connections The terminals shall accept two 14 AWG wires A hinged protective cover shall be provided over the wiring connections The cover shall have write-on areas for identification of the external circuits Identification shall be typed Hand written is not acceptable

247 Diagnostics

Each PLC shall have diagnostic routines implemented in firmware The CPU shall continuously perform self-diagnostic routines that will provide information on the configuration and status of the CPU memory communications and inputoutput The diagnostic routines shall be regularly performed during normal system operation A portion of the scan time of the controller shall be dedicated to performing these housekeeping functions In addition a more extensive diagnostic routine shall be performed at power up and during normal system shutdown The CPU shall log inputoutput and system faults in fault tables which shall be accessible for display When a fault affects inputoutput or communications modules the CPU shall shut down only the hardware affected and continue operation by utilizing the healthy system components All faults shall be annunciated at the PLC and the central station Diagnostic software shall be useable in conjunction with the portable tester

248 Accuracy

Controllers shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 025 percent of input span

25 PLC SOFTWARE

Existing PLC software is Citect by Schneider Electric and shall be utilized function seamlessly with the existing PLCSCADA System



251 Operating System

Utilize the existing Allen-Bradley DH+ operating system Programming methods and interactions shall be based on IEC 61131-3 A combination of the programming methods shall be possible within a single controller The operating system shall allow loading of software locally or from the central station and data files from the portable tester It shall also support data entry and diagnostics using an operator interface panel attached directly to the PLC

2511 Startup

Utilize the PLC with startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention including startup of all connected IO functions A PLC restart program based on detection of power failure at the PLC shall be included in the PLC software The restart program shall include start time delays between successive commands to prevent demand surges or overload trips

2512 Failure Mode

Upon failure for any reason each PLC shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all PLC outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device

252 Functions

The controller operating system shall be able to scan inputs control outputs and read and write to its internal memory in order to perform the required control as indicated in the sequence of control on the drawings The controller shall periodically perform self diagnostics to verify that it is functioning properly

2521 Analog Monitoring

The system shall measure and transmit all analog values including calculated analog points

2522 Logic (Virtual)

Logic (virtual) points shall be software points entered in the point database which are not directly associated with a physical IO function Logic (virtual) points shall be analog or digital points created by calculation from any combination of digital and analog points or other data having all the properties of real points including alarms without the associated hardware Logic (virtual) points shall be defined or calculated and entered into the database The calculated analog point shall have point identification in the same format as any other analog point

2523 State Variables

If an analog point represents more than two (up to 8) specific states each state shall be nameable For example a level sensor shall be displayed at its measured engineering units plus a state variable with named states usable in programs or for display such as low alarmlownormalhighhigh alarm



2524 Analog Totalization

Any analog point shall be operator assignable to the totalization program Up to eight analog values shall be totalized within a selectable time period

2525 Trending

Any analog or calculated point shall be operator assignable to the trend program Up to eight points shall be sampled at individually assigned intervals selectable between 1 minute and 2 hours A minimum of the most recent 128 samples of each trended point shall be stored The sample intervals shall be able to be defined modified or deleted online

253 Alarm Processing

PLC shall have alarm processing software for AI DI and PA alarms for all real and virtual points connected to that PLC

2531 Digital Alarms

Digital alarms are those abnormal conditions indicated by DIs as specified and shown The system shall automatically suppress analog alarm reporting associated with a digital point when that point is turned off

2532 Analog Alarms

Analog alarms are those conditions higher or lower than a defined value as measured by an AI Analog readings shall be compared to predefined high and low limits and alarmed each time a value enters or returns from a limit condition Unique high and low limits shall be assigned to each analog point in the system In control point adjustment (CPA) applications key the limit to a finite deviation traveling with the setpoint The system shall automatically suppress analog alarm reporting associated with an analog point when that analog point is turned off

254 Constraints

2541 Equipment Constraints Definitions

Each control point in the database shall have PLC resident constraints defined and entered by the Contractor including as applicable maximum starts (cycles) per hour minimum off time minimum on time high limit (value in engineering units) and low limit (value in engineering units)

2542 Constraints Checks

All control devices connected to the system shall have the PLC constraints checked and passed before each command is issued Each command point shall have unique constraints assigned High and low reasonableness values or one differential rate-of-change value shall be assigned to each AI Each individual point shall be capable of being selectively disabled by the operator from the central station

255 Control Sequences and Control Loops

Specific functions to be implemented are defined in individual system control sequences and database tables shown on the drawings and shall include as applicable the following functions PI control shall provide



proportional control and proportional plus integral control two position control shall provide control for a two state device by comparing a set point against a process variable and an established dead band floating point control shall exercise control when an error signal exceeds a selected dead band and shall maintain control until the error is within the dead band limits signal selection shall allow the selection of the highest or lowest analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to cascade analog values so that large numbers of inputs can be reduced to one or two outputs signal averaging shall allow the mathematical calculation of the average analog value from a group of analog values as the basis of control and shall include the ability to weight the individual analog values so that the function output can be biased as necessary to achieve proper control reset function shall develop an AO based on up to two AIs and one operator specified reset schedule

256 Command Priorities

A scheme of priority levels shall be provided to prevent interaction of a command of low priority with a command of higher priority Override commands entered by the operator shall have higher priority than those emanating from applications programs

257 Resident Application Software

Utilize existing Citect applications program developed in accordance with paragraph Graphical Object Oriented Programming to achieve the sequences of operation parameters constraints and interlocks necessary to provide control of the process systems connected to the control system All application programs shall be resident in the PLC and shall execute in the PLC and shall coordinate with each other to insure that no conflicts or contentions remain unresolved

2571 Program Inputs and Outputs

Use program inputs listed for each application program to calculate the required program outputs Where specific program inputs are not available a default value or virtual point appropriate for the equipment being controlled and the proposed sequence of operation shall be provided to replace the missing input thus allowing the application program to operate

2572 Failure Mode

In the event of a PLC failure the controlled equipment shall continue to function in the failure mode specified

2573 Graphical Object Oriented Programming

The system includes Citect graphical object oriented programming functionwhich shall be used to create or modify all control sequences utilized in the new control panels This function shall reside in the central station to create modify and test software for control panel resident programs The graphical object oriented programming function shall provide programming elements to be connected together to create a logic diagram The diagram shall be compilable to produce executable code for the control panel The graphical object oriented programming function shall include elements necessary to create logic diagrams that represent sequences of operation Program elements shall be able to be combined into a custom



template which can then be used as a standard function Program checkout and debug facilities shall include display of dynamic andor simulated system variables and points on the programming screens The user shall be able to fix or force values of variables to enable program checkout duringdebugging The programming shall allow for the use of the portable testerfor loading files directly into the control panel uploading of existingcontrol panel programming and database information and downloading ofcontrol panel programming and database information

Existing graphical screens associated with screening and grit removal equipmentfacilities shall be modified or replaced to reflect function status and alarms associated with new system controls

26 CONTROL PANELS

261 Components

2611 Terminal Blocks

Terminal blocks shall comply with NEMA ICS 4 and UL 1059 Terminal blocks for conductors exiting control panels shall be two-way type with double terminals one for internal wiring connections and the other for external wiring connections Terminal blocks shall be made of bakelite or other suitable insulating material with full deep barriers between each pair of terminals A terminal identification strip shall form part of the terminal block and each terminal shall be identified by a number in accordance with the numbering scheme on the approved wiring diagrams

262 Panel Assembly

Control panels shall be modified to accommodate installation and mounting of devices as required Each panel shall be modified for control system wiring and communications system wiring to other control panels as necessary

263 Electrical Requirements

Wiring shall terminate inside the panel on terminal blocks Electrical work shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown on the drawings

27 CENTRAL STATION AND OPERATORS WORKSTATION EQUIPMENT

271 Workstation Computer

Interface new process control items with existing PLCSCADA SYSTEM and its HMI Modify or replace graphical screens associated with screening and grit removal systems to accommodate function status and alarms

28 FIELD TEST

The control system shall be tested following installation Written notification of planned testing shall be given to the Government at least 21 days prior to testing and in no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Government approval of the test procedures

281 Field Test Setup

Conduct the field test setup as specified to prove that performance of the



system satisfies all requirements of this project including system communications requirements in accordance with the approved test procedures The field test shall take place during regular daytime working hours on weekdays The field test setup shall include the following

Field Test

modified control panel

test set one of each type

portable tester one of each type

communications circuits one of each type and speed to be utilized in the proposed system including bridges modems encoderdecoders transceivers and repeaters

surge protection equipment for power communications IO functions and networks

IO functions sufficient to demonstrate the IO capability and system normal operation

software software required for proper operation of the proposed system

282 Field Test Procedure

Test procedures shall define the tests required to ensure that the systemmeets technical operational and performance requirements The testprocedures shall define milestones for the tests and identify simulation programs equipment and supplies required The test procedures shall provide for testing all control system capabilities and functions specified and shown The procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for test setup execution and evaluation of test results The test reports shall document results of the tests Reports shall be delivered to the Government within 7 days after completion of each test The procedures shall include the following

Test Procedure

equipment block diagram

hardware and software descriptions



Test Procedure

commands operator commands

IO functions test database points with failure modes

each type of digital and analog point in the test database

description

test equipment list

surge protection circuit diagrams

inputs required (IO point values and status) and corresponding expected results of each set of input values

for each application program

default values for the application program inputs not implemented or provided for in the contract documents for the application programs to be tested

283 Field Test Report

Original copies of data produced during the field test shall be delivered to the Government at the conclusion of the test The report shall be arranged so that commands responses and data acquired are correlated to allow logical interpretation of the data

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

311 Installation

Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and provide necessary interconnections services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system Adjust or replace devices not conforming to the required accuracies Replace factory sealed devices rather than adjusting

a Install instrumentation and communication equipment and cable grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops noise and surges from adversely affecting system operation

b Install wiring in exposed areas including low voltage wiring in conduit as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

c Submit detail drawings containing complete piping wiring schematic flow diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit Piping and Instrumentation (PampID) drawings (prepared using industry recognized device symbols clearly defined and describing piping designations to define the service and materials of individual pipe



segments and instrument tags employing Instrument Society of America suggested identifiers) Include in the Drawings as appropriate product specific catalog cuts a drawing index a list of symbols a series of drawings for each control system using abbreviations symbols nomenclature and identifiers as shown valve schedules compressed instrument air station schematics and ASME air storage tank certificates for each type and make of compressed instrument air station

3111 Isolation Penetrations and Clearance from Equipment

Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals are used for connection and support Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exteriors shall be made watertight Holes in concrete brick steel and wood walls shall be drilled or core drilled with proper equipment conduits installed through openings shall be sealed with materials which are compatible with existing materials Openings shall be sealed with materials which meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Installation shall provide clearance for control-system maintenance Control system installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance

3112 Device Mounting

Devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as shown Control devices to be installed in piping shall be provided with required gaskets flanges thermal compounds insulation piping fittings and manual valves for shutoff equalization purging and calibration Any deviations shall be documented and submitted to the Government for approval prior to mounting Damaged insulation shall be replaced or repaired after devices are installed to match existing work Damaged galvanized surfaces shall be repaired by touching up with zinc paint

312 Sequences of Operation

Study the operation and sequence of equipment controls provided by others as a part of the conditions report and note any deviations from the described sequences of operation on the contract drawings Perform necessary adjustments to make the equipment operate in an optimum manner and shall fully document changes made

32 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

Install equipment as specified as shown and as required in the manufacturers instructions for a complete and fully operational control system

321 Control Panels

Devices located in the control panels shall be as shown on the drawings or as needed to provide the indicated control sequences

33 WIRE CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE

331 Metering and Sensor Wiring 3311 Power Line Surge Protection

Control panels shall be protected from power line surges Protection



shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62411 and IEEE C62412 Fuses shall not be used for surge protection

34 SOFTWARE

Utilize Citect software to produce an operational control system including databases (for points specified and shown) operational parameters and system command and application programs Adjust tune debug and commission all software and parameters for controlled systems to assure proper operation in accordance with the sequences of operation and database tables

35 CONTROL DRAWINGS

Control drawings reproducible with corresponding CADD files shall be provided for equipment furnished and for interfaces to equipment at each respective equipment location Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system manually shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified for the instrumentation and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams Diagrams and instructions shall be submitted prior to posting The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system

36 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT

Provide personnel equipment instrumentation and supplies necessary to perform site testing The Government will witness the PVT and written permission shall be obtained from the Government before proceeding with the testing Original copies of data produced including results of each test procedure during PVT shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing prior to Government approval of the test The test procedures shall cover actual equipment and functions specified for the project

361 Testing Adjusting and Commissioning

After successful completion of the factory test as specified the Contractor will be authorized to proceed with the installation of the system equipment hardware and software Once the installation has been completed test adjust and commission each control loop and system in accordance with NIST SP 250 and shall verify proper operation of each item in the sequences of operation including hardware and software Calibrate field equipment including control devices adjust control parameters and logic (virtual) points including control loop setpoints gain constants constraints and verify data communications before the system is placed online Test installed ground rods as specified in IEEE 142 and submit certification stating that the test was performed in accordance with IEEE 142 Calibrate each instrumentation device connected to the control system control network by making a comparison between the reading at the device and the display at the workstation using a standard at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated Check each control point within the control system control network by making a comparison between the control command at the central station and field-controlled device Deliver trend logsgraphs of all points showing to the Government that stable control has been achieved Points on common systems shall be trended simultaneously One log shall be provided showing concurrent samples taken once a minute for a total of 4 hours One log shall be



provided showing concurrent samples taken once every 30 minutes for a total of 24 hours Verify operation of systems in the specified failure modes upon Control system network failure or loss of power and verify that systems return to control system control automatically upon a resumption of control system network operation or return of power Deliver a report describing results of functional tests diagnostics calibrations and commissioning procedures including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated tested adjusted and commissioned and is ready to begin the PVT The report shall also include a copy of the approved PVT procedure

362 Performance Verification Test (PVT)

Submit test procedures for the PVT The test procedure shall describe all tests to be performed and other pertinent information such as specialized test equipment required and the length of the PVT The test procedures shall explain in detail step-by-step actions and the expected results to demonstrate compliance with all the requirements of the drawings and this specification The test procedure shall be site specific and based on the inputs and outputs required calculated points and the sequence of control Refer to the actions and expected results to demonstrate that the control system performs in accordance with the sequence of control Include a list of the equipment to be used during the testing plus manufacturers name model number equipment function the date of the latest calibration and the results of the latest calibration

Demonstrate that the completed Control system complies with the contract requirements All physical and functional requirements of the project including communication requirements shall be demonstrated and shown Demonstrate that each system operates as required in the sequence of operation The PVT as specified shall not be started until after receipt of written permission by the Government based on the written report including certification of successful completion of testing adjusting and commissioning as specified and upon successful completion of training as specified Upon successful completion of the PVT furnish test reports and other documentation

363 Endurance Test

Use the endurance test to demonstrate the overall system reliability of the completed system The endurance test shall be conducted in phases The endurance test shall not be started until the Government notifies the Contractor in writing that the PVT is satisfactorily completed training as specified has been completed outstanding deficiencies have been satisfactorily corrected and that the Contractor has permission to start the endurance test Provide an operator to man the system 8 hours per day during daytime operations including weekends and holidays during Phase I endurance testing in addition to any Government personnel that may be made available The Government may terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified Upon termination of testing by the Government or by the Contractor commence an assessment period as described for Phase II Upon successful completion of the endurance test deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the Government prior to acceptance of the system

3631 Phase I (Testing)

The test shall be conducted 24 hours per day 7 days per week for 7 consecutive calendar days including holidays and the system shall



operate as specified Make no repairs during this phase of testing unless authorized by the Government in writing

3632 Phase II (Assessment)

After the conclusion of Phase I identify failures determine causes of failures repair failures and deliver a written report to the Government The report shall explain in detail the nature of each failure corrective action taken results of tests performed and shall recommend the point at which testing should be resumed After delivering the written report convene a test review meeting at the job site to present the results and recommendations to the Government The meeting shall not be scheduled earlier than 5 business days after receipt of the report by the Government As a part of this test review meeting demonstrate that failures have been corrected by performing appropriate portions of the performance verification test The Government reserves the right to cancel the test review meeting if no failures or deficiencies occur during the Phase I testing If the Government chooses to do so the Contractor will be notified in writing Based on the Contractors report and the test review meeting the Government will determine if retesting is necessary and the restart point The Government reserves the right to require that the Phase I test be totally or partially rerun Do not commence any required retesting until after receipt of written notification by the Government After the conclusion of any retesting which the Government may require the Phase II assessment shall be repeated as if Phase I had just been completed

3633 Exclusions

The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures resulting from the following Outage of the main power supply in excess of the capability of any backup power source provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the control system performed as specified Failure of a Government furnished communications link provided that the PLC automatically and correctly operates in the stand-alone mode as specified and that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment installation or software Failure of existing Government owned equipment provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment installation or software

37 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES

Obtain the services of a manufacturers representative experienced in the installation adjustment and operation of the equipment specified The representative shall supervise the installing adjusting and testing of the equipment

38 FIELD TRAINING

Field training oriented to the specific system shall be provided for designated personnel Furnish a copy of the training manual for each trainee plus two additional copies Manuals shall include an agenda the defined objectives for each lesson and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson Furnish audiovisual equipment and other training supplies and materials Copies of the audiovisuals shall be delivered with the printed training manuals The Government reserves the right to videotape training sessions for later use A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction excluding lunchtime Monday



through Friday during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility Submit the training manual and schedule to receive approval from the Government at least 30 days before the training

381 Preliminary Operator Training

Prior to the start of field testing preliminary operator training shall be taught at the project site for 2 consecutive training days Upon completion of this course each student using appropriate documentation should be able to perform elementary operations with guidance and describe the general hardware architecture and functionality of the system This course shall include general system architecture functional operation of the system including workstations operator commands application programs control sequences and control loops database entry and modification reports generation alarm reporting diagnostics and historical files

382 Additional Operator Training

Following the field testing additional classroom training for operators shall be taught for 2 consecutive training days individual instruction sessions of 4-hour periods in the morning (or afternoon) of the same weekday for 2 consecutive days and an additional 1 day classroom session for answering operator questions Individual instruction shall consist of hands-on training under the constant monitoring of the instructor Classroom training shall include instruction on the specific hardware configuration of the installed control system and specific instructions for operating the installed system Schedule activities during this period so that the specified amount of time on the equipment will be available for each student The final session will address specific topics that the students need to discuss and to answer questions concerning the operation of the system Upon completion of the course the students should be fully proficient in system operation and have no unanswered questions regarding operation of the installed control system Each student should be able to start the system operate the system recover the system after a failure and describe the specific hardware architecture and operation of the system and be fully proficient in all system operations Report the skill level of each student at the end of this course

383 Maintenance Training

Following the endurance test a minimum period of five training days shall be provided by a factory representative or a qualified Contractor trainer for ten designated personnel on maintenance of the equipment The training shall include physical layout of each piece of hardware calibration procedures preventive maintenance procedures schedules troubleshooting diagnostic procedures and repair instructions

39 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA REQUIREMENTS

Outline the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the instructions layout wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features

List routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and trouble shooting guides



310 TABLES

TABLE I



















TABLE I



Power On Running DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

Start Solenoid Running DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

Common Fault Fail DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

In Auto Auto DI Main Control Panel - WasherCompactor

















TABLE I













Grit Conveyor Run DI Main Control Panel - Grit Removal




SECTION 41 21 00

SCREENING amp GRIT CONVEYORS0617

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)

AGMA 6013 (2016) Standard for Industrial Enclosed Gear Drives





AWS A59A59M (2012) Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and Rods


ASME B201 (2015) Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment


ASTM A108 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Bar Carbon and Alloy Cold-Finished


ASTM A194A194M (2016a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service or Both







ASTM C581 (2015) Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service

12 DEFINITIONS

This section includes material and installation of serpentine belt conveyors for screenings and grit Conveyors include motor drive idlers take-up belt scraper drip pan plows structural steel supports safety equipment and other appurtenances to provide a complete and ready to operate system

13 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings

Submit dimensional drawings Show relationship between conveyors and the equipment feeding them such as bar screen washer compactor and grit washerdewatering screws Submit manufacturers catalog data and detail drawings showing all conveyor parts and described by material of construction specification (such as AISI ASTM SAE or CDA) and grade or type Show coatings Identify each conveyor by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain

SD-03 Product Data

Conveyor Belt Material

Drive Sprocket and Take-up Sprocket

Conveyor Gear Drive

SD-05 Design Data

Design Calculations

Seismic and Wind load calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer


Provide manufacturers installation instructions




Provide a manufacturers field report certifying that the conveyor is installed correctly


Maintenance Manuals

Five copies of operation and five copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished Once complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance Operation manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown Include in the operation manuals the manufacturers name model number parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features List in the maintenance manuals routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides Maintenance manuals shall include equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training course


Ship equipment material and spare parts complete except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection of components Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and piece of equipment for which intended Store equipment according to manufacturers instructions

15 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty document for a three year period from the date of the acceptance of the work

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide and test troughed type conveying equipment and appurtenances as indicated and specified Unit shall collect screenings or dewatered grit as shown on the drawings and transport it to dumpsters Conveyor controls shall be integrated with the bar screenwasher compactor and grit collectiongrit washing equipment as indicated


Coordinate with equipment so that conveyors receive material to be conveyed without problems Coordinate discharge with receiving equipment Coordinate drip pan drains with building drains as indicated


Screenings and grit conveying equipment shall transport screenings and dewatered grit from location of equipment to discharge indicated Conveying equipment shall be capable of handling capacity range and range of moisture content of material continuously Conveying equipment shall



be capable of being cleaned of all material and shall continuously and substantially remove material that would otherwise cling to the belt on the return side Material will tend to cling at normal operating conditions Conveying equipment shall not spatter or drip material

22 GENERAL

Submit seven copies of shop drawings and five copies of maintenance manuals for the conveyor equipment in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

23 MANUFACTURED UNITS

Conveyor system shall consist of conveyor belt pans tracks and supports take-up and drive stations The conveyor belt material shall have a watertight modular conveying surface with a 20-degree troughed cross-section Each modular conveying section shall have a convolution that permits the assembled belt to make continuous vertical horizontal and helical turns and that will flatten out as it goes over the terminal for scraping Reinforce the modular belt pan section with nonmetallic stiffeners molded into each modular belt section to achieve troughing Design the conveyor so that the moving parts of the system except the drive and take-up stations will pass a single designated point along the conveying path which may be used for maintenance andor service of the unit Provide list of proposed products for the conveyor components shall include track sections supports frame drip pan belt motor gear reducer chain sprockets and skirtboards Comply with ASME B201 Maximum belt speed shall be 30 fpm


Provide design calculations for the girt conveyor Design frame supports with stiffeners and top flanges anchor bolts and lifting system per the following requirements

a Seismic Design Parameters - Conform to ICC IBC (and North Carolina Building Code) Section 1613 and ASCE 7 Chapter 15

Si per USGS ASCE 7 Centroid Sa data

Seismic Importance Factor I 150

R 3


Wind Velocity mph 130

I 115

Exposure Category C

Adjustment Factor 121 per ASCE 7 Figure 6-2

c Weight W Weight of conveyor system plus 60 pounds per linear foot load on belt

d An unreinforced concrete housekeeping pad above the reinforced concrete structural slab shall not be considered to have structural



value in the design of the anchor bolts Tension and shear values for drilled or epoxied anchor shall be ICBO approved

25 EQUIPMENT

Performance conditions and design data shall be as shown in Tables that follow





Elevation 30 MSL +-


Motor Type TEFC


Material Carried Loose screenings from raw wastewater





Elevation 30 MSL +-


Motor Type TEFC


Material Carried Compact screenings from raw wastewater

Grit Conveyor





Grit Conveyor



Elevation 30 MSL +-


Motor Type TEFC


Material Carried Grit from raw wastewater

26 COMPONENTS

Drive sprocket and take-up sprocket shall be 8-tooth 20 inches in diameter and 12 inch thick Fabricate sprockets from Type 316 stainless steel The guide channel shall be an ultra high molecular weight polyethylene track (formed with minimum 1 inch thick sides 38-inch thick base and 58 inch thick top caps) to guide the 4 inch pitch steel chain The guide channel shall be permanently attached to a steel I-beam structure Provide 10-gauge skirtboards on both sides of the conveyor at the loading point only The skirtboards shall be supported with aluminum support bands and retaining bars shall be 019 inch thick minimum Provide a 019 inch thick aluminum support bracket for each band Provide stainless steel nuts bolts and washers Provide splash guards (12-gauge minimum thickness) on both sides along the full length of the conveyor

Belt shall have a minimum overall width of 24 inches Provide a minimum carry width of 22 inches design the belt for a minimum working tension of 210 pounds per inch of width the conveying surface shall consist of individually replaceable modular belt pan sections of molded plastic fastened every 8 inches and supported by a steel attachment welded to a case hardened steel chain having a breaking strength of 32000 pounds that guides the conveying surface Each modular belt pan section shall have a convolution at least 1-12 inches high permanently molded into the rubber The dual flex steel chain links with alternate single and double bars shall be joined by pins that are slightly loose in the single bar link holes so the chain can be turned in two or more directions The dual flex steel chain links with alternate single and double bars shall be joined by pins that are slightly loose in the single bar link holes so the chain can be turned in two or more directions

The belt take-up station shall consist of a tail sprocket a constant pressure spring-loaded tensioner and track all mounted in a structural steel frame ready for installation Furnish Type 316 stainless steel expanded guards around the take-up sprocket

Provide a Type 316 stainless steel scraping mechanism with a replaceable rubber strip to remove material from the conveying surface at the discharge end of the conveyor

Provide a minimum 18-gauge stainless steel enclosure safety guards for



exposed gears chain sprockets flexible couplings and V-belts Guards shall be rigidly supported and designed to permit easy removal Provide expanded metal shield around the take-up sprocket

Provide a motor and gear reducer to drive the belt Conveyor gear drive shall be of the helical and spiral-bevel type or of the worm-gear type The thermal rating shall equal or exceed the mechanical rating Spiral bevels shall be heavy-duty right-angel construction using only case hardened matched and lapped gears Spiral bevels shall be manufactured to AGMA 6013 Quality 10 level per the AGMA 6013 Classification Manuals 2009 and 2011 Helical gears and worms shall be through hardened or if case hardened shall be either ground after hardening or 100 analytically checked and documented to AGMA 6013 Quality 10 levels Gear drive housings shall be either steel ( ASTM A36A36M or ASTM A108) or cast iron (ASTM A48A48M Class 30 or higher) and shall be fully stress relieved prior to machining Drive housings shall be pressure tested Drives shall be test run at the factory for one hour while filled with oil Minimum AGMA 6013 rating for the gear drive shall be 15 for continuous 24-hour per day service Provide two antifriction bearing assemblies for the gear drive One assembly shall be free to float within the frame to carry radial thrust only Design the other bearing assembly to carry both radial and axial thrust Bearings may be either ball or tapered roller type Bearing life shall be a minimum of 20000 hours per the AFBMA L-10 rating Bearings shall be oil automatically lubricated via 120 VAC solenoid controlled oiler Oiler solenoid shall open when the conveyor motor is operating and shall close when the conveyor motor is off

Provide chain and sprockets with OSHA safety guard for reduction to final belt speed Provide each drive with a shear pin and slip clutch to protect the drive in the event of overloading

27 MATERIALS

Stainless steel members shall have a minimum thickness of 14 inch with minimum diameter bolts of 12 inch All bearings with high pressure grease fittings shall have extended tubing where necessary for greasing from the accessible side of the conveyor

Materials of construction for the conveyor shall be as follows


Skirtboards belt scrapers frame and supports shafts drip pans guards adjustable motor bases all-thread for motor bases expanded metal guards splash guards take-up assemblies

Stainless Steel ASTM A240A240M

Type 316 or 316L

Grease fittings Stainless Steel ASTM A276A276M

Type 303




Screws keys bolts nuts Stainless Steel ASTM A193A193M ASTM A194A194M

Type 316

28 ACCESSORIES

Provide cable-operated safety stop switch equipped with positive safety lock complete with 3 32-inch orange vinyl coated 7 x 7 preformed stainless steel aircraft-type cable on all accessible sides of conveyor belt

Provide full width hoods on portion of conveyor located outdoors except where equipment discharges onto conveyor Hoods shall be 14 inch thick (minimum) FRP or minimum 004 inch thick aluminum For FRP hoods use a resin resistant to moist hydrogen sulfide gas (up to 5000 ppm) attack as determined by ASTM C581 Construct hoods in accordance with ASTM D3982 For the hood aluminum support bands and retaining bars shall be 019 inch thick minimum Provide a 019 inch thick aluminum support bracket for each band Provide Type 316 stainless steel nuts bolts and washers Provide the following spare parts for each conveyor unit


10 Belt pans with hardware

2 Chain master links

3 Thrust bearings

2 Rubber scraper blades

2 Radial bearings

6 Sets Shear pins


29 CONTROL


Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the bar screen control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR


Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency



Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the compactor control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 20 20 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR

293 Grit Conveyor

Provide a local control panel for the conveyor with a Hand-Off-Remote (H-O-R) maintained position selector switch and a mushroom-head Emergency Stop (E-Stop) maintained position switch With H-O-R placed in R-remote position the grit control panel in the controls room will cause conveyor to START and STOP as described in Section 46 23 00 GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Welder qualification shall comply with AWS D16 Welding rod and electrodes shall comply with AWS A54A54M Bare wire shall comply with AWS A59A59M Welds shall be continuous along the full length of contact of adjoining members Do not use skip or spot welding

Install the equipment in strict conformance with the reviewed shop drawings and the manufacturers written instructions Install equipment to interface items



Provide equipment manufacturers services at the jobsite for the minimum labor days listed below travel time excluded

Three labor days to check the installation and advise during start-up testing and adjustment of the equipment

One labor day to instruct the Owners personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment


331 Demonstration

Operate the belt conveyor for a minimum of 8 consecutive hours for 3 days to assure proper installation Check for binding sticking and overloading and repair all malfunctions Simulate conditions to initiate automatic operation and verify that the controls are operating normally

34 PROTECTION

Shop apply to all exterior ferrous surfaces a high solids (69) polyamidoamine self priming epoxy applying three coats of 4 to 6 mils per coat Color to be selected by the Owner Top coat the epoxy with an opaque polyurethane coating to prevent chalking Do not coat stainless steel




SECTION 46 20 20

MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREEN AND WASHPRESS COMPACTOR0211

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

ABMA 11 (2014) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

ABMA 9 (2015) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings


ASCE 7-10 (2010 Errata 2011 Supp 1 2013) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures



ASTM A47A47M (1999 R 2014) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings





NEMA ICS 3 (2005 R 2010) Medium-Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 V AC










UL 98 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches

12 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Materials And Equipment


SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 1 month prior to equipment start up The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service

Framed Instructions

SD-06 Test Reports


Tests

Test reportsupon completion and testing of the installed system in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to provide compliance with the specified performance criteria Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls





Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides The instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as installed

SD-11 Closeout Materials



Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather humidity and temperature variation dirt and dust or other contaminants

14 EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish a complete set of manufacturers recommended standard spare parts

a Manufacturer shall provide any speciality toolds and recommended spare parts required for maintaining the equipment as follows

1 Drive Clevis Pin (1)

2 SnapRetaining Rings (10)

3 Link Clevis Pins (4)

4 Scraper Bolts (4)

5 Scraper Nuts (4)

6 Snap Ring Tool (1)

7 Never Seez 1 oz tube (1)

b Manufacturer shall provide one tube of Multi-Purpose grease which is a 5-year supply of lubrication required for maintaining all bar screen components

PART 2 PRODUCTS


a Provide material and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products that conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified and that essentially duplicate equipment that has been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is in the opinion of the Contracting Officer reasonably convenient to the site

b Each major item of equipment shall have manufacturers name address and catalog or model number on a plate securely attached to item A 316 stainless steel engraved nameplate with manufacturers name or



trademark shall be permanently attached to the washpress compactor and bar screen

c Fully enclose moving parts of the equipment such as drive chains and sprockets in removable guards Equipment above the level of the sewage-carrying channel shall be fully enclosed in a brushed satin finish 14 gauge 304 stainless steel sheet steel or housing Housing shall be provided with a sufficient number of doors or removable panels to ensure ready access to any part of equipment for repairs replacements or cleaning The joint(s) between the housing and the concrete foundation shall be made leak-proof after equipment and enclosure installation and the Contractor shall also install as required field-fit closeout platinggrating to the washpress compactor and bar screen

d Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials including manufacturers descriptive and technical literature catalog cuts and installation instructions Detail drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams equipment layout and anchorage and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit

e Project ton include two catenary style mechanically cleaned fine bar screens to discharge to existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 Screenings Conveyor No 1 will feed a single proposed Wash PressCompactor The proposed Wash PressCompactor will discharge existing Screenings Conveyor No 2 which feeds the compacted and dewatered debris into an existing solids waste container Existing and proposed components shall be integrated into a seamless working design provided by a single manufacturer

211 Bearings

ABMA 9 and ABMA 11

212 Iron Steel and Miscellaneous Metal

2121 Miscellaneous Metal

Bolts nuts anchors washers and other types of supports necessary for the installation of equipment shall be of steel or 316 stainless steel

2122 Malleable Iron

ASTM A47A47M grade No 32510 minimum

2123 Structural Stainless Steel

ASTM A276A276M

213 Motors Electric

NEMA 250 NEMA ICS 1 NEMA ICS 3 NEMA ICS 4 NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA MG 1

214 Motor Controls

NEMA ICS 2



215 Switches Enclosed

UL 98

22 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide electrical equipment and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Electrical characteristics shall be as indicated Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not shown on electrical plans shall be provided under this section of the specification

221 Electric Motors

Provide equipment complete with inverter duty rated motors of the EPNV ball-bearing squirrel-cage induction type with a maximum speed not to exceed 1800 rpm Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to drive equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding rating shown on nameplate attached to the motor

222 Motor Controls

A single integrated main control panel shall be provided that integrates operation of the bar screens existing screenings conveyors and wash presscompactor The Main Control Panel shall be remotely located from the bar screens in an ambient controlled instrumentation room The main controls shall include both PLC and relay-based controls to monitor differential water level in the bar screen channel and operate the screens in multiple operator-selected modes The Main Control Panel shall house the variable frequently drives provide a main fusible disconnect hand-off-auto selector switches E-stop button run time meters and indicatorsalarms as specified Local Control Push Button stations shall be provided at each bar screen to provide forward jog reverse and E-stop buttons to meet required safety codes

23 MECHANICALLY-CLEANED BAR SCREEN

Bar screen shall consist of a stationary bar screen a screen rake a catenary style rake mechanism operated by an electric drive unit and a dead plate and rake-cleaning device Equipment shall be installed so as not to obstruct the flow of sewage to bar screen Unless otherwise specified metal that is submerged in the sewage-carrying channel or that comes in contact with sewage shall the manufacturers highest grade of stainless steel and as a minimum the grade specified herein

231 Bar Screen

Each bar screen shall be suitable for installation in a rectangular channel 6-feet 0-inches wide by 7-feet 0-inches deep and shall be designed for handling sewage flows as follows

a Minimum 25 MGD

b Average 15 MGD

c Maximum 24 MGD

d Total 2 bar screens



e Bar rack spacing 38 inch clear opening

f Setting inclination 75 degrees from horizontal

232 Screen Rake Scrapers

Scrapers shall be designed to rake up screenings collected on the bar screen and in the openings between bars and to convey screenings to existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 Scrapers shall be of 304 stainless steel and UV stable UHMW-PE materials Scraper teeth shall be spaced so as to pass between bars of the screen Scraper plate s shall be easily removable and replaceable

2321 Rake Mechanism

a Mechanism shall be endless catenary-chain type and shall include parts and accessories necessary for a complete operating unit Parts of the mechanism shall be amply proportioned for stresses that may occur during fabrication erection and operation Individual parts that are alike in each unit shall be interchangeable A VFD is included as an electronic mechanism and shall be provided for overload protection RakeScraper speed shall not exceed 28 inches per minute at standard operating speed of 12 rpm Rake mechanism shall be provided with a complete and adequate system of lubrication to moving parts subject to wear Bearings shall be grease- or oil-lubricated except submerged bearings which shall be of alloy-bearing metal designed to operate without any lubrication and to prevent accumulation of deposits Bearings shall have a 247365 L10 life of 20 years

b The mechanically cleaned bar screen system shall be fully automatic and shall consist of the following components

1 Bar Rack - 316 Stainless Steel

2 Dead Plate - 316 Stainless Steel

3 Discharge Chute - 316 Stainless Steel

4 RakeScraper Assembly - 316 Stainless SteelUHMW-PE

5 Frame Supports and Guides - 316 Stainless Steel

6 Drive Machinery - 316 Stainless Steel

7 Link System - 316 Stainless Steel

8 Electrical Cable Assembly shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor

9 Electrical Controls and Control Panel - NEMA 12 painted carbon steel

10 Anchor Bolts - 316 Stainless Steel

11 Screen Enclosure - 316 Stainless Steel

In addition any other components required to provide a system which



will be capable of fully performing the functions specified

c The design shall be such to ensure that all planned maintenance can be accomplished at the operating floor level or above No part of the drive system including sprockets shall be located below the water surface at maximum design flow

d All platforms ladders or other safety devices required as a part of this equipment design shall be in accordance with applicable OSHA Regulations and be provided by the Contractor

e The device output shaft rotation shall be constant and in one direction during normal operation in order to reduce maintenance requirements

f All equipment shall be designed and built for 247 continuous service and for moderate shock without overheating excessive vibration or strain

g Design screens to comply with the STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND SUPPORTS article of this specification

2322 Frame Assembly

a The side frames shall be formed from plate with a minimum of four engineered bends to provide a rigid assembly capable of withstanding all operating forces when installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

b The frame shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel plate having a minimum thickness of 316 inches The frame shall extend fully from the bottom of the channel to the top of the bar screen assembly Channel width is 6 feet 0 inches

c Link slide assembly shall be provided per manufacturer standard design and shall be constructed of UV Stable UHMW PE rollers and 316 stainless steel supports and components

2323 RakeScraper Assembly

a Scrapers shall be spaced 21 inches apart To provide long product life the scraper shall move at no greater than 28 inches per minute at standard operating speed of 12 rpm Staging Scrapers and Thru Bar Scrapers shall be a maximum ratio of 31 per manufacturer recommendations At least one scraper every 84 inches shall fully penetrate the bar screen cleaning all three sides of the bars as well as through to the cross members

1 Staging Scrapers shall be 1 inch thick x 4 inches x screen width UV Stable UHMW-PE with a serrated edge

2 Thru Bar Scrapers shall be minimum 375 inch thick x 5 inches x screen width 316 stainless steel

b The equipment shall have multiple scrapers on the bar screen at one time cleaning continuously from bottom to top the entire width of the bar screen

c All structural components of the rake assembly shall be 316 stainless



steel

2324 Drive Assembly

a Each mechanically cleaned bar screen unit shall operate independently and shall have its own drive unit and driven components The drive head shall be located at the top of the mechanically cleaned bar screen Drive sprockets and end castings shall be cast 304 stainless steel Drive shaft shall be 316 stainless steel

b Gearbox shall be shaft-mounted right angle type and include spiral bevel gearing The output shaft speed shall be controlled by a vector type inverter or per rake manufacturers recommendation It shall have at least a 152 or great service factor based on machine torque requirements The gearbox shall be grease filled Oil filled gearboxes are not allowed

c The motor shall be AC induction type inverter duty 1 phase 120240 or 3 phase 240480 volt and mounted to the gear reducer The motor shall be 12 hp designed for 1800 rpm base speed and rated for Class I Groups C amp D Class II Groups F amp G environments The motor shall have an EPNV enclosure NEMA design B with a 56C frame size Service factor shall be 10 or greater Class F insulation and be optimized for IGBT type inverters The motor must be UL listed and designed for continuous operation

d Motor shall have built in normally closed thermostat to protect from overheating that is to be field wired to corresponding terminal in control panel for redundant (ambient) overload protection

e Bearing shall be greased ball bearing type non self-aligning sealed and lubricated and shall have a 247365 L10 life of 20 years when in compliance with stated OampM recommendations Non-sealed bearings are not acceptable

f Speed reducer shall be a double-reduction cycloidal style and shall comply with all applicable AGMA Standards The speed reducer shall be capable of a 41 speed range with variable output speeds between 050 to 22 output rpm (in high flow conditions) The speed reducer shall produce an output torque of 11417 in lb and have a gear ratio of 8091

2325 Bar Rack

a The bar rack shall consist of equally spaced parallel bars having 38-inch clear spacing between each bar The bars shall be straight and inclined at 75 degrees above the horizontal plans

b A stainless steel channel bottom plate shall be an integral part of the bar screen assembly to fully engage scrapers in the bar screen at the base of the unit and assure that the raking mechanism reaches the bottom of the screen to prevent debris accumulation

c Screen bars shall be 316L stainless steel and be tear-shaped with a hydraulic coefficient shape factor of 076 and the minimum dimensions of 025 inch x 075 inch x 013 inch Bars shall be individually replaceable without welding



2326 Dead Plate

a Dead plate shall be 025 inch thick 316 stainless steel The dead plate shall be flat and true span the entire width of the unit and transition from bar screen to discharge point

b Designs in which the dead plate does not extend to the point of discharge shall not be acceptable

2327 Discharge Chute

a The discharge chute shall be 11ga ( 012 inch ) 304 stainless steel The discharge chute shall be bolted to the dead plate and shall be designed to allow debris to be transferred from discharge point into the debris containment

b The rake assembly shall be designed to each a predetermined discharge height above the floor elevation A discharge chute positioned at the top of the dead plate shall be a part of each bar screen

c Discharge chute shall be fully enclosed

2328 Wiper Assembly

a A 316 stainless steel and UV Stable UHMW-PE debris blade assembly which does not require a separate drive shall be installed to assist in removing debris from the scraper on the mechanically cleaned bar screen unit as recommended by the manufacturer Hydraulic shock or spring controlled debris blade mechanisms are not acceptable

2329 Side Frame Enclosures

a The bar screen shall be provided with removable enclosures encompassing both the upstream and downstream portions of the bar screen side frame

b A 14ga 4 brushed satin finish 316 SSTL Enclosure shall be installed to cover the screen above the operating deck level Front Enclosure shall have removable panels for access to equipment Removable panels shall be 16ga 316 SSTL and shall be provided with knurled knobs for no tool required access Rear Enclosure shall have hinged removable doors and shall be secured with a lift-slide-latch handle Rear removable door shall include an integral viewing door that shall be secured with a lift-slide-latch handle All fasteners hinges and latches shall be 316 stainless steel

233 Controls

Controls for each rake shall be in an enclosure provided by the bar screen manufacturer The bar screen manufacturer shall be responsible for proper sizing and function of the controls at 480V unless specified otherwise

a Main control panel shall be capable of operating within a temperature range between 35 degrees F and 104 degrees F

b Controls shall be designed to accept incoming power supply and shall include a step-down transformer as needed to achieve 120V



c Control panel shall be constructed to meet the appropriate NEMA classification requirements and will include a main lockable disconnect The panel shall be constructed by a UL certified control panel build facility to support UL labeling

d Controls shall be tested prior to shipment The rake manufacturer shall verify all overload settings in the rake controller to insure proper overload and speed settings required for the application are properly programmed

e Control panel shall be wired complete with a minimum of 16 MTW wire in the appropriate colors for the circuits being supplied 120VAC control shall be red grounded AC neutral shall be white DC control shall be blue DC neutral shall be blue with a white tracer equipment ground shall be green and all incoming and outgoing external power source wires shall be a yellow configuration All AC power wiring shall be a minimum of 12 black All wires shall be labeled at both ends with heat-shrink wire markers Internal panel wiring shall be contained in non-flammable covered wire way

f Panel and all panel mounted devices shall be labeled with engraved ID markers that reference back to the system schematics Tags shall be white with black core engraved as required

g All field wiring and power cables between the bar screen Main Control Panel and the Local Push Button Station shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor Motor cables shall be VFD rated to accommodate required length from panel to bar screen

2331 Main Control Panel

a Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 painted for indoor installation

b Enclosure shall not be located in an explosive environment

c Main Control Panel shall be designed with a SCCR rating of 18KA at 480VAC minimum and labeled as such unless otherwise specified

d All terminals utilized in the main panel shall be 600V rated terminals and 20 spare terminal space shall be provided for any potential future revisions

e The Main Control Panel shall include at a minimum the following

1 Main fusible disconnect with lockable operator unless otherwise specified

2 Physical or virtual HandOffAuto (HOA) Selector and PushPull E-Stop button


4 Indication for Power On Forward and necessary faults

f PLC Based Controls shall include the following

1 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)



3 HMI programmable functions as required

4 SCADA Interlocking via Hard Contact andor Ethernet Communications Protocols as required

2332 Local Control Push Button Station

a Enclosure shall be NEMA 79 rated

b Local station shall be mounted within 10 feet or as close to the equipment as safely possible and be field wired by the Electrical Subcontractor to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

c The remote push button station shall include Forward Jog Reverse and E-Stop buttons

2333 Instrumentation

Each screen assembly shall have a separate level system that shall be installed and field wired by the Electrical Contractor per the manufacturers instructions The level transducertransmitter shall be remotely mounted on the headworks structure remotely and wired to the control panel

a Differential Level Control The bar screen main control panel shall be fitted with a PLC and built-in HMI The PLC shall be compatible with the existing WWTP SCADA PLC which is Allen-Bradley 540 using Citect software in order to facilitate communications status signals alarms levels etc via dry contact discrete and analog signals to the WWTP SCADAEthernet System

The control panel shall transmit the following dry contact signals

Discrete Outputs









Analog Outputs







The control panel shall receive analog water level signals from the upstream and downstream level transducerstransmitters to provide the following primary functions

1 Control operations of the two (2) mechanical bar screens

2 Provide openclose signals and timing function to control automatic action of two (2) motorized slide gates located upstream of each bar screen

3 Provide automatic run signal to Screenings Conveyor No 1 which receives screenings discharge from each bar screen

4 Provide run signal to washer compactor main control panel

5 Provide high water level alarm to SCADA and local alarm beacon

The PLC shall include differential setpoints used to automatically startstop the rake based on the headloss across the screen The PLC shall also allow for single or dual screen operation as well as alternation to equalize run times The variable frequency drive shall provide for rake speed adjustment

The logic shall include multiple differential water level setpoints as follows in order to control operation of the screens and motorized slide gates Setpoints shall be operator definable at the OIT

1 Low Rake Off setpoint to avoid intermittent screen startingstopping intermittent opening and closing of slide gates and to allow alternation between the lead and lag screens

2 Lead Screen On Low Speed

3 Lead Screen On High Speed

4 Lead and Lag Screens On Low Speed

5 Lead and Lag Screens On High Speed

6 High Water Alarm

Cycle timing logic shall also be included in the program to function in parallel with the differential level control logic for optimal rake run time

Under normal operating conditions the lead slide gate will be open and the associated lead screen will be called to run at low speed when the lead screen water level differential is achieved Should water level continue to rise the lead screen VFD will increase to its maximum speed setting when the associated water level differential is achieved Under high flow conditions should the water level continue to rise the lag slide gate will open and its associated lag screen will be called to run The VFD for both screens will operate at low speed If water level differential continues to increase then both VFDs will increase to their maximum speed setting when the associated



differential level is achieved Should the high water level be achieved the control panel will convey an alarm signal to the WWTP SCADA system as well as activate a local beacon located at the headworks structure When both slide gates are open and dual screens are called to run they will operate in tandem until the low water Rake Off setpoint is achieved If the parallel cycle time has expired then the lead slide gate will close and its associated bar screen will deactivate while the alternate slide gate and screen will become the lead If the cycle time has not yet expired both gates will remain open but the alternate screen will become the lead

Level sensing instrumentation shall be installed upstream and downstream from the rakes and shall be the following type

Two (2) Siemens Hydroranger 200 HMI with (4) Ultrasonic Level Transducers (two transducers per each transmitter) Transducers shall be installed upstream and downstream of each rake at least 1 foot above the highest anticipated water elevation and the beam angle shall not have obstructions between the transducer face and the water surfaces

b Float Switches Two normally open direct acting float switches shall be provided for installation upstream of each bar screen The float switches shall be compatible without modification to the control system and shall be capable of operating at temperatures from zero degrees F to 180 degrees F

Each float shall have molded polyethylene body internal redundant polyurethane foam flotation and potted switch and cable connections The cable shall be fine-stranded KAWG 18 with heavy-duty synthetic rubber jacket and supplied in ample length to provide a continuous unspliced run to a waterproof junction box The Contractor shall supply clamps and brackets for mounting the float in the channel

The switch within the float shall be mercury-to-electrode tilt type normally open contact for a pump-down application ONOFF operation shall occur on differentials of less than 1 inch of liquid level change The liquid level float switches shall operate at 24 VAC Floats shall be installed by the Contractor as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations

24 WASHING PRESSCOMPACTOR FOR SCREENINGS

a Design Features

1 Compacting Action Dual augers shall provide positive displacement action be positioned on top of each other and rotate in opposing directions The augers shall be intermeshed and be of (1) left hand and (1) right hand lead and shall have ability to rotate 97 RPM in opposing directions Compactor augers shall be designed with a limited float on top of a perforated plate allowing them to accommodate irregular debris

2 Washing Action Wash port manifold shall be integrated prior to the compaction housing and deliver 3 to 5 GPM from a supply with 40 to 60 PSI at a 12 inch NPT connection for attaching water source utilizing filtered effluent or municipal water Washing action shall be flood wash type from a single 12 inch NPT supply Drain connection shall be 3 inch NPT male



3 Operation Washer compactor shall be designed to be continuous run not requiring operator Washer compactor shall be equipped with a self-regulating active pressure zone designed to accept non-standard wastewater debris in its original form such as rocks broken concrete and metal (bolts short pipe etc) up to 4 inches long Washer compactor shall have the ability to process multiple pieces of clothing variable volumes of debris and unprocessed septage or grease Compactor shall move at normal operating speed of 98 RPM with the ability to run intermittently to sync with upstream equipment

b Design Requirements

Number of Units 1

Peak Capacity 140 cubic fthr (for approx 5 minutes)

Average Capacity 90 cubic fthr (continuous service)

Mass Reduction Up to 60

Volume Reduction Up to 84

Wash Water Requirements 3 - 5 gpm at 40 - 60 PSI

c The inlet hopper for the washing press shall be designed to receive screenings material form existing Screenings Conveyor No 1 to the washing press screw housing The inlet hopper shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel All attachment hardware shall be of 316 stainless steel

241 Components

a Compactor Housing Shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and be a minimum of 11 gauge and connect to 38 inch thick flanges

b Augers Shall be of 316 stainless steel with flights 38 inch and have a 4 inch flight pitch Augers shall be coupled to a transmission at the drive end and supported at the compaction end with UHMW plane bearings Such arrangement shall allow movement for accommodation of irregular debris

c Drive Assembly

1 The washing presscompactor unit shall operate independently and have its own drive unit and driven components The gearbox shall not be vented to the outside atmosphere

2 The gearbox shall be grease lubricated and designed for 5 years (or 20000 hours of operation) between recommended clean and re-grease services The gearbox shall be right angle type and shall incorporate cycloidal and spiral bevel gearing with a total ration of 1791 The gear reducer output shaft speed shall be 35 rpm minimum - 98 rpm maximum and controlled by an AC Tech vector type inverter or greater service factor based on unit torque requirements The gearbox shall be shaft mounted utilizing a keyless bushing



3 The motor shall be mounted to the gear reducer by utilizing a quill C-Face mounting style The gearmotor shall be AC induction type 3 hp 360230460 volt explosion proof inverter duty model

d Auger Transmission

1 The drive assembly shall be coupled to a dual gear transmission which drives the augers in counter rotation

2 The spur gears are contained in a stainless steel housing and supported by plane bearings

3 Grease fittings shall be located outside of the transmission housing to provide lubrication to the gears

e Speed Reducer Shall have a maximum output of 98 rpm 1791 reduction ration with 18142 in-lb of output torque

f Thrust Bearings Shall be self-lubricating and capable of withstanding a minimum of 2000 lb of thrust load (each auger) at 98 rpm for life of machine

g Screw Supports Shall be UHMW plane type self-lubricating and fastened into place using stainless steel fasteners

h Spur Gears Shall be 17-4 PH stainless steel

242 Controls

a Controls shall be provided by Washer Compactor manufacturer

b Controls shall be designed to accept 3 PH 240480 volt incoming power supply Control panel power shall be 1PH120VAC and shall include a step-down transformer to achieve 120V

c Controls shall be built by a UL-approved panel builder and bear the UL-approved logo Controls shall be tested by panel builder and by the Washer Compactor manufacturer prior to shipment to Owner The Washer Compactor Manufacturer shall verify all overload settings in the Washer Compactor controller to insure proper overload and speed settings required for the application are properly programmed

2421 Main Panel

a Main control panel shall be operated within a temperature range between 35 and 104 F

b The controls shall be rated NEMA 12 and located in a climate-controlled environment

c Control panel shall have an inner door pocket that includes a copy of As-Built drawings from the manufacturer as well as any other pertinent documentation necessary to properly operate the controls

d The control package shall include the following and utilize the panel builders standard component manufacturers unless otherwise approved by the Washer Compactor manufacturer



1 N4X 304 SSTL enclosure with continuous hinge exterior lockable door

2 High volt transformer

3 HOA Selector where Hand mode shall enable the local station and Auto receives a Run signal from a remotediscrete source When input signal is cut the Washer Compactor shall utilize an off-delay timer to allow debris to finish depositing

4 Speed controlled (based on vector drive technology) pre-programmed for speedoverload control by the panel builder and verified by the Washer Compactor manufacturer

5 Dry contact input for motor thermostat to shut down if motor overtemp condition occurs

6 Dry contact output signals for Run Start Solenoid Common Fault and In Auto conditions Washer Compactor main control panel shall provide automatic run signal to Screenings Discharge Conveyor No 2 which receives compacted and dewatered screenings Off-delay timer shall maintain screen conveyor run signal until compactor debris has finished depositing

7 120 VAC output power to wash water solenoid

8 Dry contact input terminals for Remote Run Motor Thermostat and remote station

9 Main control power breaker with lockable thru-door operator


11 Push-to-Test type indicator lights for Power One Forward VFD Fault and Motor Overtemp

12 Phenolic label on outer door indicating equipment identification number

13 PushPull E-Stop on outside of enclosure

2422 Remote Panel

a A NEMA 79 remote push button station is required to maintain equipment requirements and local safety codes

b The remote station shall be rated NEMA 79 and include Forward Jog Reverse and E-Stop buttons The remote station shall be mounted as close to the equipment as safely possible and be field-wired by the Electrical Subcontractor to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

2423 Sequence of Operations

a The controls shall enable the remote push button station installed near the Washer Compactor when in Hand mode and utilize an input signal from a remote source when in Auto mode Upon receiving a stop signal in Auto mode the Washer Compactor shall utilize an off-delay



timer to allow debris to finish depositing

b The speed controller fault shall be cleared by turning off the Washer Compactor then waiting approximately three minutes (to time designated per current UL standards) and then turning the HOA back to the desired setting A motor overtemp fault shall clear automatically when the motor cools to be within normal operating range

2424 Miscellaneous

a The following shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor and are not part of the Water Compactor manufacturers scope of supply

1 Mounting stands

2 Mounting hardware

3 Field wiring and conduit

4 Junction boxes

5 Installation

b The field wiring shall include (but not be limited to) the following connections as applicable

1 Incoming power supply to the main control panel

2 All required grounding of the motor and controls

3 Motor to the main control panel

c VFD rated motor cable for all motors

d Motor cables shall be provided to accommodate required length from panel to WasherCompactor

e Motor thermostat to the terminal inputs in the control panel

f Input and output signal wiring for remote startstop

g Remote station contacts to the corresponding terminal inputs in the main control panel

243 Fasteners

All fasteners and anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated in this specification Anchor bolts shall be provided by the manufacturer for mounting the washing press and the solenoid valve manifoldlocal control station support stand All threaded fasteners shall be coated with a nickel based anti-seize thread lubricant prior to assembly

244 Lubrication

The lubricant type and quantity shall be provided in the manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Manual



245 Protective Coatings

a Stainless steel and plastic components shall not be painted The stainless steel structural components and enclosures panels shall be bead blasted and passivated as required after fabrication to remove embedded iron surface rust and weld burn All other surfaces shall be blast cleaned to an SSPC SP 6NACE No3 finish removing all dirt rust scale and foreign materials

b Motor gearbox shall be coated in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers specification Surface preparation shall be done in accordance with SSPC SP 10NACE No 2 Near White The three-part coating system shall be manufactured by Tnemec as follows Prime Coat Series 90-97 Tnemec Zinc at 25 - 35 mils DFT Intermediate Coat Series 27 FC Typoxy at 30 - 50 mils DFT and Top Coat Series 1075U Endura-Shield II at 20 - 30 mils DFT Standard color is 11SF Safety Blue Material shall meet all State and Federal VOC and other regulatory requirements

246 Spare Parts

The manufacturer shall furnish the following spare parts for each press

Two (2) side screw supports

Two (2) upperlower screw supports

Fasteners

All spare parts shall be properly packed in a white wooden box labeled and stored where directed by the Contracting Officer


Provide design calculations for the bar screens and for the screenings washercompactor discharge pipe and supports Design frame supports with stiffeners and top flanges anchor bolts and lifting system per the following requirements

a Seismic Design Parameters - Conform to ICC IBC (and North Carolina Building Code) Section 1613 and ASCE 7-10 Chapter 15

1 Si per USGS ASCE 7-10 Centroid Sa data

2 Seismic Importance Factor I 150

3 R3


1 Wind Velocity mph 130

2 I 115

3 Exposure Category C

4 Adjustment Factor 121 per ASCE 7-10 Figure 6-2

c Weight W Weight of discharge system plus 80 pounds per linear foot



load in pipe

d An unreinforced concrete housekeeping pad above the reinforced concrete structural slab shall not be considered to have structural value in the design of the anchor bolts Tension and shear values for drilled or epoxied anchor shall be ICBO approved

26 PAINTING

Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned primed and given two finish coats of paint at the factory in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and compatible with field paint requirements specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work

32 INSTALLATION

Install all materials and equipment as shown and in accordance with the approved written recommendations of the equipment manufacturer

33 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS

Use concrete for foundations as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTRAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Concrete foundations shall be integral with and of same strength as the building floor unless otherwise specified Concrete used in foundations that are entirely separated from the surrounding floor shall be 2500 psi When new foundations are constructed on existing concrete new concrete shall be bonded to old as specified in Section 03 31 0100 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORKS Furnish foundation bolts as required for proper positioning during placement of concrete

34 FIELD PAINTING

Field painting is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS


351 Tests

After installation of the sewage bar screen S and wash presscompactor is complete conduct operational tests required to demonstrate that the equipment will operate in accordance with the requirements of this section of the specifications Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls

352 Manufacturers Field Services

Obtain the services of the manufacturers representative who is experienced in the installation adjustment and operation of the equipment specified The representative shall supervise the installation adjustment and testing of the equipment




361 Framed Instructions

Provide framed instructions including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system posted where directed The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams Submit proposed diagrams instructions and other sheets prior to posting

362 Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Submit operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Submit maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guides The instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as installed

363 Training

Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members Training shall be provided for a total period of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions

364 Manufacturers Warranty

Manufacturer shall provide a written one year standard warranty from the date of use of the mechanically cleaned bar screen and was press compactor equipment to guarantee that there shall be no defects in material or workmanship in any item supplied

Manufacturer shall warrant for the period of 5 years all rotating parts of the Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screen and Wash Press Compactor including the gear motor bearing drive head and the link system including the links castings pins and retaining rings Manufacturer warrants that these components shall be replaced if damaged or defective in the normal use of the equipment




SECTION 46 23 00

GRIT REMOVAL AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS0211

PART 1 GENERAL

11 REFERENCES


ASCE 7-10 (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures














ASTM B30 (2016) Standard Specification for Copper Alloys in Ingot Form

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent



Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems






SSPC PS 1001 (1982 E 2004) Hot-Applied Coal Tar Enamel Painting System

SSPC Paint 16 (2006 R 2015 E 2015) Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint



MIL-DTL-24441 (2009 Rev D) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide General Specification for

MIL-DTL-2444129 (2009 Rev B) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide Green Primer Formula 150 Type IV

MIL-DTL-2444131 (2009 Rev B) Paint Epoxy-Polyamide White Formula 152 Type IV

MIL-P-21035 (1991 Rev B Notice 2 2003) Paint High Zinc Dust Content Galvanizing Repair (Metric)

MIL-PRF-24635 (2009 Rev E) Coating Systems Weather Resistant Exterior Use


CID A-A-3120 (Rev A) Paint For Swimming Pools

FS TT-P-645 (Rev C) Primer Paint Zinc-Molybdate Alkyd Type

12 DEFINITIONS

121 Grit

The settleable solids load present in wastewater such as sand gravel cinders metal fragments not ameliorated by secondary treatment andor sludge removal techniques and capable of producing excessive wear on mechanical equipment

122 Grit Separation

The process of separating grit from wastewater by controlling the velocity



of the wastewater to suspend organics andor by tank configuration to separate the grit from the organic solids by differential sedimentation and scour

123 Grit Collection

The process of gathering the separated grit in a hopper or other point of collection by mechanical equipment designed for the purpose

124 Grit Removal

The process of conveying grit out of the chamber from the point of collection in the chamber to classifying equipment for further processing Grit removal equipment may accomplish some dewatering

125 Grit Classifying and Grit Dewatering Unit

The process of further separation of grit by washing putrescible matter from the removed grit by means of sprays or washing the tanks and dewatering with screw conveyors These screw conveyors also convey the grit to the indicated point of discharge


The existing grit removal system is designed to separate collect remove classify and deposit grit at the indicated point of its discharge within the area and at the elevations indicated The existing grit collectionremoval system will be modified and lowered to the elevation indicated in order to increase its hydraulic capacity Stainless steel extensions shall be fabricated and installed on the existing grit separator to increase the equipment height to the elevations indicated A new Class I Division 2 HOA local control panel shall be provided to select local or automated operation of the grit system existing grit classifiers and grit conveyor A new PLC-based control panel shall be provided for automated operation monitoring and control of the grit system equipment including classifiers and conveyor The PLC control panel shall convey status and signals via dry contacts to the WWTP PLCSCADA system The WWTP PLC is Allen Bradley 540 using Citect SCADA software Grit system PLC shall be compatible with the WWTP PLC Equipment shall duplicate units that have been manufactured installed and operated for a minimum of 2 years

131 Vortex Type Grit Removal System

Grit is separated in a vortex type grit removal system Removal of grit is by carrier water Classifying equipment is screw-type classifiers

132 System Requirements

System is capable of separating and removing 95 percent of 110 mesh grit having a specific gravity of 265 from a flow ranging from 0 to 375 million gallons per day Following modification the system shall be capable of separating and removing 95 percent of 300 micron grit having a specific gravity of 265 from a flow ranging from 0 to 6 million gallons per day

14 SUBMITTALS




PROCEDURES

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Grit handling and control equipment modifications layout



SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

Spare parts for each different item of material and equipment specified after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 1 month prior to equipment start up The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service

Framed Instructions



Grit handling and control equipment Data Package 3

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit operation and maintenance data for each item of the grit separation collection removal classifying and control system


Five complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The instructions shall include the manufacturers name model number service manual parts list and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Five complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance



Submit text of posted operating instructions for each component of the grit separation collection removal and classifying system





Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D11D11M using procedures materials and equipment of the type required for the work

151 Layout Drawings

Submit drawings showing layout of all equipment Include construction and erection details for all modifications to the complete grit separation collection removal and classifying system and also show associated piping to connection with plant piping


Equipment and parts shall be packaged for shipment to prevent breakage damage or cause out-of-adjustment calibration readings or controls Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage and shall be unloaded and stored with a minimum of handling Equipment and materials shall be stored indoors off the floor Area shall be dry with adequate ventilation free from dust or water and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling

17 SPARE PARTS

Spare parts for the equipment specified above shall be furnished by the manufacturer in the quantities listed below The spare parts shall be identical and interchangeable with the original parts The parts shall be furnished in wooden containers clearly marked with contents on two sides and top Where the number of spare part units required by the schedule results in a fractional number of units the number furnished shall be rounded off to the next highest

Description of Spare Part Unit Number of Spare Units Required as Percentage of Part Units Installed

a 3 electric actuated plug valve1 each

b 2 solenoid valve 1 each

c 1 solenoid valve 1 each


Manufacturer to p rovide new posted operating instructions including wiring and control diagrams showing the layout of the entire system posted where directed Provide condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system in typed form framed as specified above for wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Unless otherwise specified materials and equipment shall be standard commercial products in regular production by the manufacturers and suitable for the required service Components shall be 304 stainless steel where called out in the specificationsdrawings Unless otherwise specified structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36A36M hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123A123M or ASTM A153A153M Submerged steel shall have a minimum thickness of 14 inch Unless otherwise specified cast iron shall conform to ASTM A48A48M Grade 30 Bronze castings not otherwise specified shall conform to ASTM B30 Drives lubrication and bearings shall be accessible from walkways at or above ground level

211 Equipment

2111 Design Data

Number of Existing Units 4

Existing Size 95 diameter

Existing Configuration Free Standing on concrete piers lower existing units on existing piers

Proposed Design Flow (mgd) 15 Proposed Peak flow (mgd) 24

Performance Existing 95 removal of all grit (specific gravity 265) greater-than or equal to 110 microns at design flow of 375 MGD

Proposed 95 removal of all grit (specific gravity 265) greater-than or equal to 300 microns at peak flow of 6 MGD

Average FlowUnit Existing 375 MGD with no more than 4 headloss

Peak Hourly FlowUnit (4 units online) Proposed 6 MGD with 17 headloss

Depth of Flow Design AveragePeak Hourly in effluent channel 1216

Recommended Underflow Rate 112 gpm

Existing Influent Connection 16 flanged pipe

Existing Effluent Connection 24 wide channel



Existing Underflow Connection 3

Existing Underflow Layout Gravity

Existing Underflow Control Reg-U-Flo Vortex Valve

Existing EFW Connection 1 NPT

Existing Materials of Construction 304 SS

Existing Operating Pressure Atmospheric

2112 Operation

Each Grit Separator is designed to separate grit from screened rawwastewater using Hydro-dynamic separation and boundary layer effects to aidgravitational forces

All flow passages shall be self-cleaning and free of sharp projections orfittings that may snag stringy or fibrous materials

Each Grit Separator is characterized by a predetermined flow path caused bythe vessel geometry and flow modifying components to maximize theconcentration and removal of settleable solids

Each Grit Separator includes a fluidizing system to prevent the collected grit from compacting in the collection area release entrapped organics aid in transporting the accumulated grit to the Grit Classifier (Grit Dewatering Unit)

2113 Construction

a The Grit Separator consists of a free standing vessel with a sloping base fabricated from stainless steel

(1) The Grit Separator and overflow channel extension walls shall be 14 inch thick Manufacturer shall supply 8 inch channel height extensions for each unit specific to the layout of each unit

(2) The channel extension shall be fabricated from 304 SS

(3) The Grit Separator and effluent channel extension shall be bolted onto existing Grit King bodies and effluent channels

b A center shaft and cone is mounted so that its edge is clear of the sloping base of the vessel It is removable from the top of the unit

(1) The center shaft extensions shall be 10 gauge in thickness with38 thick top and bottom plates Manufacturer shall supply center shaft extensions at 8 inches in height for each unit

(2) The center shaft extension shall be fabricated from 304 SS

(3) The center shaft extension shall be bolted onto the existingcenter shaft with 304 SS fasteners by Contractor

c The installation of the extension to each Grit Separator shall beperformed by the Contractor Disassembly of existing parts shall be



required prior to installation

2114 Valves and Accessories

a Manufacturer shall supply each Grit Separator with the following new valves

(1) One (1) 3 cast iron plug valve with electric actuator 120 V 60Hz 1 PH NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) to control the underflow

(2) One (1) 3 cast iron plug valve with quarter-turn lever actuator

(3) One (1) 1 NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) brass sole noid valve 120 V 60 Hz 1 PH to automate the fluidizing water supply

(4) One (1) 1 bronze ball valve to shut off the fluidizing water isolate the solenoid valve

(5) One (1) 2 NEMA 4X (per NEMA 250) brass solenoid valve 120 Hz 1 PH to automate flushing water supply

(6) One (1) 2 bronze ball valve to shut off flushing and fluidizing water to isolate the solenoid valves

b The following pressure gauges shall be provided for each grit removalsystem

One (1) 0-100 psig pressure gauge to monitor the flushing water delivery pressure

c Each pair of Grit Separators are currently provided with an existing Type 364 SV Reg-U-Floreg Vortex Valve installed on the underflow pipe to regulate the flow rate to each grit classifierdewatering unit

d Water

Each Grit Separator shall require an intermittent supply of minimum 50gpm clarified non-potable water (EFW) at 50 psig supplied to the grit flushingfluidizing pipe via a 2 NPT connection

e Manufacturer shall supply each grit separator with one (1) flow switch 120 V 60 Hz 1 PH suitable for tapping and sensing flow within the 16-inch inlet pipe

2115 Overflow Weir

Depth of liquid in the grit influent channel shall be regulated by anoverflow weir fitted at the end of the settling tank The weir shall befabricated of structural stainless steel or aluminum conforming to ASTM B209or ASTM B221 Alloy 6061 Temper T6

22 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

221 HOA Control Panel

a One new (1) HOA control panel shall be furnished completely pre-wired andtested




(1) Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 for Class I Division 2 Environment

(2) Material Cast Aluminum


(4) Phase 1 Phase

(5) Frequency 60 Hz

(6) Load TBD Amp c The HOA Control panel shall contain switches indicator lights and

other components necessary to operate the following equipment in hand mode


(2) Two (2) Existing Grit Classifiers


In auto mode equipment shall be controlled from the PLC control panel In off position the equipment shall be un-powered

f The HOA panel door layout shall include the following items

(1) Front panel mounted combination main disconnect switch and circuit breaker

(2) Control Power OnOff Switch

(3) Grit Separator 1-4 three position HOA switch

(4) Grit Separator 1-4 fluidizing water valve OpenClose switch

(5) Grit Separator 1-4 fluidizing water valve OPEN indicating light

(6) Grit Separator 1-4 underflow plug valve OpenClose switch

(7) Grit Separator 1-4 underflow plug valve OPENCLOSE indicating lights

(8) Grit Separator 1-4 flushing valve OpenClose switch

(9) Grit Separator 1-4 flushing valve OPEN indicating light

(10) Grit Classifier 1-2 running light

(11) Grit Classifier 1-2 fail indicating light

(12) Grit Classifier 1-2 three position HOA switch

(13) Grit Conveyor three position HOA switch



222 PLC Control Panel

a One (1) new PLC control panel shall be furnished pre-wired and tested


(1) Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 for indoor installation

(2) Material Painted Steel


(4) Phase 1 Phase

(5) Frequency 60 Hz

(6) Load TBD Amp

(7) Logre PLC shall be compatible with WWTP SCADA PLC which is Allen Bradley 540 with Citect SCADA software

c The PLC panel shall contain front panel mounted combination disconnect switch and circuit breaker PLC Operator Interface Terminal rail mounted terminal blocks inputoutput cards and other components necessary to operate the following equipment when the HOA control panel is in automatic mode


(2) Two (2) Existing Grit Classified


In hand mode equipment shall be controlled by the operator from the HOA control panel In off position the equipment shall be un-powered

d The PLC control panel shall be programmed to provide monitoring control and timing functions as described by the Sequence of Operation below

e Dry contacts shall be provided to transmit discrete output signals to the WWTP SCADA PLC as indicated below

(1) Grit King in Auto (x4)

(2) Grit King Underflow Opened (x4)

(3) Grit King Underflow Closed (x4)

(4) Grit Classifier Running (x2)

(5) Grit Classifier Fault (x2)

(6) Grit Conveyor Running

223 Sequence Of Operation

a The system shall be controlled to provide PLC automatic operation or HOA manual operation The system shall provide starting and stopping



and system shut down when a fault is detected

b Clarified plant water shall be supplied to the Grit Separator

c Grit Separator

(1) Screened raw wastewater shall be gravity fed into the Grit Separator continuously

(2) A PLC-based time clock (TC) shall initiate when grit discharge cycles occur The time clock shall be adjustable to initiate cycles up to every 20 minutes

(3) When the time clock initiates a cycle the Grit Classifier and Grit Conveyor operate for an adjustable time period

(4) Concurrently the control panel shall send a signal to open the solenoid valve located on the fluidizing line for an adjustable time period (typically 60 seconds)

(5) After the fluidizing time runs out and the solenoid valve closesthe electrically actuated plug valve shall open for an adjustable time period (typically 120 seconds)

(6) After the plug valve closes the flushing solenoid valve located on the underflow line between the Grit King and classifier shall open for an adjustable time period to ensure the line is clear from grit

(7) The classifier and conveyor will continue to operate for a period of time after the flushing solenoid closes to ensure the solids are discharge off the end of the unit

224 Sub Title

Text


Unless indicated or specified otherwise electrical components of mechanical equipment such as control stations electrical disconnecting (isolating) means and other devices functioning to control associated mechanical equipment are included under this section The work shall be complete and operable and shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 Installation shall be made with conduit and fittings as indicated on the drawings Liquid tight flexible steel conduit shall be used for short connections to motors and their controllers Wiring and equipment in hazardous locations as defined by the NFPA 70 shall conform to Class I Group I Division D requirements The interconnecting conduit and wire (except when included in factory-assembled equipment) in the motor-control equipment forming a part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies and the electrical connection of the mechanical equipment to the electrical power circuit are specified in Section 26 00 0000 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

24 WELDING

Perform welding welding inspection and corrective welding in accordance with AWS D11D11M Weld in a manner to prevent permanent distortion of



the connected parts Weld continuously along the entire area of contact Grind smooth visible welds in the finished installation

25 REPAIR OF ZINC-COATED SURFACES

Repair surfaces damaged by welding or other means with galvanizing repair paint conforming to MIL-P-21035 or by the application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing as approved Clean areas to be repaired and remove the slag from the welds Surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied shall be heated with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste spread the molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe the excess material off

26 TREATMENT AND PAINTING

Except as otherwise specified equipment shall be treated and painted in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice Exposed surfaces of ferrous metals other than piping including those to be submerged shall be sandblasted in accordance with SSPC SP 6NACE No3 and shop coated with two coats of epoxy polyamide conforming to SSPC Paint 16 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils per coat The maximum time between coats shall be 72 hours The following items shall be finished in accordance with manufacturers standard practice suitable for end use environment motors gear motors motor-driven speed reducers shafts and pushbutton stations Aluminum shall have an AA DAF45 finish Stainless steel stellite and nonferrous metals shall not be coated Exposed surfaces of concrete tanks shall be provided with two coats of rubber-base paint gloss or semi-gloss conforming to CID A-A-3120 Surfaces of housings and enclosures shall be coated with zinc-molybdate primer conforming to FS TT-P-645 and finish coat conforming to MIL-PRF-24635 or an epoxy polyamide system in accordance with MIL-DTL-24441 with a primer coat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444129 intermediate coat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444131 and a topcoat conforming to MIL-DTL-2444131 Exterior surfaces of piping which are not subject to submersion or which are buried shall be given a coal tar coating system in accordance with SSPC PS 1001

PART 3 EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

Install grit handling equipment and accessories specified herein in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations Includes providing all lubricants for initial operation

311 Water Piping

Piping shall be installed in alignment and supported with pipe hangers and supports Mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 Flanged joints shall be made up tight care being taken to avoid undue strain on flanges valves fittings and other equipment and accessories Screwed joints shall be made up tight with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape pipe cement and oil or PTFE powder and oil applied to the male threads only Threads shall be full cut not more than three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed Provide exposed ferrous pipe threads with one coat of FS TT-P-645 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil Joints for PVC pipe shall be made with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564 and shall be joined in



accordance with the Appendix thereto


321 Grit Separation Collection Removal and Classifying Equipment

Test in operation to demonstrate correct alignment smooth operation freedom from vibration and freedom from noise and overheating of moving machinery Correct all defects

322 Performance Tests

Provide field test data from full scale units of comparable design capacity demonstrating the performance of grit removal efficiencies as specified Grit removal efficiency shall be determined by averaging the results obtained from at least 20 sample performance test runs on similar installations

323 Manufacturers Representative

Equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of an engineer representative to supervise the field installation of the equipment and accessories in accordance with the manufacturers specifications In addition manufacturer of the equipment shall provide the services of an engineer representative for 1 man day to instruct operating personnel during the initial operating period






13Schedule of prices


141List of contact personnel


12Interim DD-1354 Transfer amp

Acceptance of Military Real

Property


12Construction schedule

13Equipment delivery schedule


141Submittal register



19Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

110Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

191Crane Critical Lift Plan

191Crane Work Plan

1714Crane Operators

SD-06 Test Reports

114Reports

1141Accident Reports

1143Monthly Exposure Reports

1144Regulatory Citations and

Violations




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




01 35 29 1145Crane Reports

SD-07 Certificates

111Confined Space Entry Permit

1146Certificate of Compliance

1147Third Party Certification of

Barge-Mounted Mobile Cranes


16QC PLAN


21Backflow preventers

SD-06 Test Reports

31Backflow Preventer Tests

SD-07 Certificates

13Backflow Tester Certifications

131Backflow Preventers Certificate


161Environmental protection plan

164Preconstruction survey

17Permit for storm water discharge

17Notice of Intent

171Notice of Intent

17Notice of Termination

17Pollution Prevention Plan


141Solid waste disposal permit




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




01 57 19 142Disposal permit for hazardous

waste

12Environmental training

documentation

143Permit to transport hazardous

waste

144Hazardous waste certification

145Erosion and sediment control

inspection reports

163Environmental Plan Review

21Annual Report of Products

Containing Recovered Materials


16Waste Management Plan


17Records


Data

131Equipmentproduct warranty list


121As-built drawings

122Record of materials


132Equipmentproduct warranty tag


137GIS Data Deliverables




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





121Demolition Plan

110Existing Conditions

SD-07 Certificates

17Notification


176Work Plan

185Demolition and Removal Plan

185Water Control Plan

1711Contractor Qualifications

1712Worker Qualifications

SD-03 Product Data



216Epoxy Resin Materials

2112Mechanical Anchors

1713Testing Technicians

SD-04 Samples

217Field-Molded Sealants and

Primer

SD-05 Design Data

174Repair Material Mixture

Proportioning

SD-06 Test Reports

218Compression Seals and Lubricant

1753Cement-Based Concrete




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 01 32 1753Cement-Based Mortar



213Aggregate



1752Epoxy Resin Grout

SD-07 Certificates

212Grout Fluidifier

213Aggregate





361Epoxy Mortar

2162Epoxy Grout

2163Epoxy Injection Adhesive



Data Sheets


221Formwork

311Formwork

221Form Removal Schedule

SD-03 Product Data

22Form Materials




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 11 1300 10 SD-04 Samples

13Sample Panels

222Fiber Voids

SD-05 Design Data

21Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

32Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

222Fiber Voids


23Waterstops

SD-03 Product Data


22Sealant

23Waterstops

SD-04 Samples

222Lubricant for Preformed

Compression Seals

223Field-Molded Type

23Waterstops

241Splicing Waterstops

SD-07 Certificates


22Sealant

23Waterstops





CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 20 0000 10 31Reinforcement

SD-03 Product Data

23Reinforcing Steel

SD-06 Test Reports

28Tests Inspections and

Verifications

SD-07 Certificates

23Reinforcing Steel

141Qualified Welders


215Reinforcing steel

SD-03 Product Data

12Concrete Mix Designs

22Batch Plant

225Concrete Mixers

226Conveying Equipment

22Placing Equipment

321Cold-Weather Requirements

322Hot-Weather Requirements


Admixtures and Curing

Compound

216Nonshrink Grout

215Mechanical Reinforcing Bar

Connectors

SD-06 Test Reports




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




03 31 0100 10 212Aggregates

21Mill Test Reports

34Tests and Inspections

3423Quality of Aggregates

214Water

SD-07 Certificates

14Concrete Field Testing

Technicians

14Concrete Construction Inspector

(CCI)


2117Blended Hydraulic Cement


142Curing Compound


21Curing Materials

SD-06 Test Reports

32Testing and Inspection for CQC


21Curing Compound


131Manufacturers Sample Warranty

SD-03 Product Data

212FRP Pipe and Tube

212RailingsGuards

212Anchorage Materials




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




06 82 14 212Adhesives

212Resins

212Hardeners

SD-06 Test Reports

213Ultraviolet Test Reports

213Thermal Expansion Test Reports

213Flame Spread Test Reports


322Manufacturers Instructions

SD-09 Manufacturerrsquos Field

Reports

31Manufacturers Certification of

Installation


321Manufacturers Warranty


13Manufacturers Standard Details


Material



SD-06 Test Reports


Material


SD-07 Certificates




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




07 13 53 21Elastomeric Waterproofing Sheet

Material









21Firestopping System

SD-03 Product Data


SD-06 Test Reports

33Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

152Inspector Qualifications


151Installer Qualifications


38Piping identification

38stencil

SD-03 Product Data

21Coating

21Manufacturers Technical Data

Sheets




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




09 90 00 SD-04 Samples

19Color

SD-07 Certificates

13Applicators qualifications


321Application instructions

352Mixing


Data Sheets


341Plumbing System

SD-03 Product Data

341Plumbing System

SD-06 Test Reports

34Tests Flushing and Disinfection

SD-07 Certificates

13Materials and Equipment




SD-03 Product Data









CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





211Recycled Content


211Wire and Cable

2131Conductors

31Cable Manufacturing Data

SD-06 Test Reports

32Test Report(s) Inspection

Report(s) and Verification

Report(s)


222Wireways

SD-03 Product Data

210Receptacles

2111Circuit breakers

28Switches

212Enclosed circuit breakers

214Motor controllers

223Surge protective devices

SD-06 Test Reports


354Grounding system test

353Ground-fault receptacle test

SD-07 Certificates

29Fuses




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS





Data

151Electrical Systems


142Photometric Plan

151LED Luminaire Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings

1411Luminaire drawings

1412Poles

SD-03 Product Data

223Luminaire (Drivers)

SD-05 Design Data

143Design Data for luminaires

SD-06 Test Reports

144LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test

Report

145LED Light Source - IES LM-80

Test Report

32Operating test

SD-07 Certificates

151Luminaire Useful Life Certificate


Data

16Operational Service

31 23 0000 20 SD-06 Test Reports

3821Fill and backfill




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




31 23 0000 20 3822Select material

3823Density tests

3824Moisture Content Tests


21Concrete

SD-06 Test Reports



24Fertilizer

SD-06 Test Reports

223Topsoil Composition Tests

SD-07 Certificates

21seed


32Hydrostatic Tests


3121Field Acceptance Checks and

Tests

33Cable Installation Plan and

Procedure

SD-07 Certificates

161Certificate of Conformance


311Installation

311Wiring

SD-03 Product Data




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS




40 95 00 35Control Drawings

362Performance Verification Test

(PVT)

SD-06 Test Reports

361Testing Adjusting and

Commissioning

362Performance Verification

Test(PVT)


21Materials And Equipment

SD-03 Product Data

361Framed Instructions

SD-06 Test Reports

351Tests


Data

362Operating and Maintenance

Instructions


151layout


Data

21equipment


18Posted operating instructions




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH

DATE RCDFROMCONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS


March 2016

Version Number 3




i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents i

Record of Changes ix

Certification Page xi

List of Acronyms and Abbreviations xiii

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory xix

10 Contractor Environmental Guide Overview 1-1




12 Installation Background 1-5

121 Environmental Management Division and

Environmental Affairs Department 1-6

122 Expectations 1-7


131 Contractor Environmental Guide 1-9

132 Environmental and EMS Training 1-10

14 Points of Contact 1-12

15 Overview Map 1-13


21 Key Definition and Concepts 2-2





24 EMS Responsibilities 2-8

25 Contractor Environmental Guide and EMS 2-9


ii

30 Training 3-1






33 Training Requirements 3-4

331 General Environmental Awareness 3-4


333 Recordkeeping 3-5

40 Air Quality 4-1






43 Permit Requirements 4-5

44 Additional Activities of Concern 4-6

50 Environmental Emergency Planning and Response 5-1






53 Spill Notification 5-6

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill Notification

Procedures 5-6


Notification 5-8

54 Follow-Up 5-9

60 Cultural Resources 6-1



iii





63 Procedures 6-7

70 Hazardous MaterialsHazardous Waste Management 7-1






73 Hazardous Materials Requirements 7-14

74 Universal Waste Requirements 7-16

75 Hazardous Waste Requirements 7-18

751 Storage 7-19

752 Manifesting and Disposal 7-21

76 NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Requirements 7-22

761 Used Oil and Oil Filters 7-22

762 Used Antifreeze 7-24

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily Rags 7-

25

764 Used Electronic Equipment 7-25

765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated as

Universal Waste) 7-25

80 Asbestos 8-1






83 Responsibilities Before a Demolition or Renovation

Project 8-6

831 Identification of ACM and PACM 8-7


iv

832 Notification 8-8

833 Removal 8-8

834 Training 8-9

84 Responsibilities During a Demolition or Renovation

Project 8-9

85 Disposal of ACM Waste 8-10

90 Lead-Based Paint 9-1






93 Responsibilities Before Renovation or Demolition 9-6

94 Permits 9-8

95 Disposal 9-8

96 Training 9-9

100 Natural Resources 10-1






103 National Environmental Policy Act 10-10

104 Timber 10-11

105 Threatened and Endangered Species 10-13

106 Wetlands 10-14

1061 Avoidance 10-14

1062 Permits 10-15

1063 Impacts 10-18

1064 Mitigation 10-19

107 Temporary Construction 10-20


v

110 Stormwater 11-1






113 Prior to Site Work 11-11

1131 Construction Notifications 11-12

1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I Industrial

Permit 11-12


Municipal Permit 11-13

1134 Project-Specific Construction Permits 11-13

114 Responsibilities During Site Work 11-16

120 Solid Waste Recycling and Pollution Prevention (P2) 12-

1






123 Solid Waste Requirements 12-7

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable Waste

Streams 12-9

124 Recycling Requirements 12-14

1241 Recycling Center 12-15

1242 Other Recyclables 12-16

125 Pollution Prevention and Green Procurment 12-17

130 Potential Discovery of Undocumented Contaminated

Sites 13-1





vi



133 Unforeseen Site Condition Procedures 13-4

1331 Petroleum Oil and Lubricants 13-5

1332 Munitions and Ordnance 13-6

140 Permitting 14-1






143 Project Permits and Approvals 14-3

1431 Stormwater (Section 110) 14-4

1432 Asbestos (Section 80) 14-5

1433 Lead-Based Paint (Section 90) 14-5

1434 Air Quality (Section 40) 14-6

1435 Wetlands (Section 106) 14-7

1436 Drinking WaterWastewater 14-8


vii

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Contacts in Case of a Spill 1-13


EMS 2-10

Table 5-1 Environmental Emergency Response Contacts 5-3

Table 12-1 Base Landfill Requirements 12-11

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB Camp

Lejeune) Organization Chart 1-7


River) Organization Chart 1-7

Figure 1-3 Overview Map 1-14

Figure 2-1 Plan Do Check Act Cycle 2-4

Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and Demolition

Activities with the Environment 2-7

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow Chart 6-8

Figure 7-1 Diamond Hazard Label 7-7

Attachments and Appendix

Attachment 2-1 MCB Camp Lejeunersquos Environmental Policy

Statement

Attachment 3-1 Spill Reporting Form


Inspection Form MCB Camp Lejeune


Inspection Form MCAS New River

Appendix General EMS amp Environmental Awareness

Training for Contractors amp Vendors


viii



ix

RECORD OF CHANGES

Date Description of

Changes Page NameInitials


x



xi

CERTIFICATION PAGE

I certify that I have read understood and accept this document

and all attachments and that all those within my party working

on a job site within Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune andor

Marine Corps Air Station New River will comply with the

environmental policies and regulations herein I am aware that

there are penalties for not complying with this Guide

__________________________________

Signature

__________________________________

Date


xii



xiii

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND

ABBREVIATIONS

ACM Asbestos-Containing Material

AHERA Asbestos Hazard and Emergency Response

Act

AHPA Archaeological and Historic Preservation

Act

ARPA Archeological Resource Protection Act

ASHARA Asbestos School Hazard Abatement

Reauthorization Act

ASD Accumulation Start Date

ASO Air Station Order

BMP Best Management Practice

BO Base Order

CampD Construction and Demolition

CAA Clean Air Act

CAMA Coastal Area Management Act

CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response

Compensation and Liability

CETEP Comprehensive Environmental Training and

Education Program

CFC Chlorofluorocarbon

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CG Commanding General

CWA Clean Water Act

CZMA Coastal Zone Management Act

DHHS Department of Health and Human Services

DLADS Defense Logistics Agency Disposition

Services

DM Decision Memorandum


xiv

DMM Discarded Military Munitions

DoD Department of Defense

DoN Department of Navy

DOT Department of Transportation

DRMS Defense Reutilization and Marketing

Service

EA Environmental Assessment

EAD Environmental Affairs Department

ECON Environmental Conservation Branch

EISA Energy Independence and Security Act

EHS Extremely Hazardous Substances

ELLAP Environmental Lead Laboratory

Accreditation Program

EMD Environmental Management Division

EMS Environmental Management System

EO Executive Order

EOD Explosives and Ordnance Disposal

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

EPR Extended Producer Responsibility

EPCRA Emergency Planning and Community Right-

to-Know Act

EPEAT Electronic Product Environmental

Assessment Tool

FAR Federal Acquisition Regulation

FIFRA Federal Insecticide Fungicide and

Rodenticide Act

FSC Facilities Support Contracts

FWS Fish and Wildlife Service

GIS Geographic Information System

GP Green Procurement

HAP Hazardous Air Pollutants


xv

HCFC Hydrochlorofluorocarbon

HCS Hazard Communication Standard

HHCU Health Hazards Control Unit (North

Carolina)

HM Hazardous Material

HMTA Hazardous Materials Transportation Act

HQMC Headquarters Marine Corps

HQW High Quality Water

HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning

HW Hazardous Waste

HWMP Hazardous Waste Management Plan

IGIampS Installation Geospatial Information amp

Services

INRMP Integrated Natural Resources Management

Plan

IRP Installation Restoration Program

LBP Lead-Based Paint

LDA Land-Disturbing Activities

LQG Large Quantity Generator

MAG Marine Aircraft Group

MCAS Marine Corps Air Station

MCB Marine Corps Base

MCM Minimum Control Measure

MCIEAST Marine Corps Installations East

MCO Marine Corps Order

MEC Munitions and Explosives of Concern

MEF Marine Expeditionary Force

MRF Materials Recovery Facility

MS4 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems

MSW Municipal Solid Waste

NAPL Non-Aqueous Phase Liquid


xvi

NC North Carolina

NCAC North Carolina Administrative Code

NCDAQ North Carolina Department of Air Quality

NCDCM North Carolina Division of Coastal

Management

NCDEQ North Carolina Department of

Environmental Quality

NCDFR North Carolina Division of Forest Resources

NCDMS North Carolina Division of Mitigation

Services

NCDWR North Carolina Division of Water Resources

NEPA National Environmental Policy Act

NESHAP National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants

NHPA National Historic Preservation Act

NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination

System

NPL National Priorities List

NRC National Response Center

NRHP National Register of Historic Places

ODS Ozone-Depleting Substance

OPA Oil Pollution Act

ORW Outstanding Resource Water

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health

Administration

OWS Oil-Water Separator

P2 Pollution Prevention

PACM Presumed Asbestos-Containing Material

PCB Polychlorinated biphenyl

POC Point of Contact

POL Petroleum Oil and Lubricant

PPA Pollution Prevention Act

ppm Parts Per Million


xvii

PPV Public-Private Venture

PWD Public Works Division

QRP Qualified Recycling Program

RACM Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material

RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act

RCRS Resource Conservation and Recovery

Section

ROICC Resident Officer in Charge of Construction

RRP Renovation Repair and Painting

SAA Satellite Accumulation Area

SARA Superfund Amendments amp Reauthorization

Act

SDS Safety Data Sheet

SHPO State Historic Preservation Officer

SPCC Spill Prevention Control and

Countermeasures

SSPP Strategic Sustainability Performance Plan

SWDA Solid Waste Disposal Act

SWPPP Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (Also

referred to as SPPP in NC)

TampP Treatment and Processing

TCLP Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure

TSD Treatment Storage and Disposal

TSI Thermal System Insulation

ULCP Unit Level Contingency Plan

USC United States Code

USACE United States Army Corps of Engineers

USMC United States Marine Corps

UW Universal Waste


xviii

UXO Unexploded Ordnance

XRF X-Ray Fluorescence


xix

CONTRACTORrsquoS PHONE DIRECTORY

In the event of an emergency refer to the emergency

numbers below All non-emergency contractor inquiries

regarding the operations at Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp

Lejeune and Marine Corps Air Station New River should be

directed to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction

(ROICC) or Contract Representative The ROICC or

Contract Representative will either directly contact or refer

contractors to the appropriate Division or Organization

Emergency and Important Non-Emergency Numbers

Fire and Emergency Services Division 911

Ambulance 911

Hearing Impaired (910) 451-4444

CHEMTREC (Emergency 24-hourOutside MCB Camp

Lejeune) (800) 424-9300

Hazardous Chemical Spill 911

Military Police 911

National Response Center (Outside MCB Camp

Lejeune) (202) 372-2428

Toll Free (800) 424-8802

Provost Marshall Office 911

Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune

Operator Directory Assistance (910) 451-1113

Confined Space Program Manager (910) 451-5725

Environmental Management Division (910) 451-5003

-Environmental Compliance Branch (910) 451-5837


xx

Asbestos Management

Resource Conservation and Recovery Section

(910) 451-1482

Hazardous Material Consolidation SiteFree Issue

(910) 451-1482

Recycling Center Building 982 (910) 451-4214

-Environmental Conservation Branch (910) 451-5063

Fish amp Wildlife

Forestry Management

NEPA

Conservation Law Enforcement

(910) 451-21965226

-Environmental Quality Branch (910) 451-5068

Air Quality

Underground Storage Tanks

Water Quality

Explosives and Ordnance Disposal (910) 451-0558


-Construction Project Managers (910) 451-2583

-Contracts Branch (910) 451-2582

-Officer In Charge of Construction (Main) (910) 451-2581

-Public Works Base Utility Director (910) 451-5024

Water Line BreakWastewater Line Break (910)

451-7190 (x225)

-Public Works Solid Waste DivisionLandfill

(910) 451-2946

Range Control (910) 451-3064

Regional Geospatial Information amp Services (Installation

Manager) (910) 451-8915



xxi

Marine Corps Air Station New River

Confined Space Program (910) 449-4964

Consolidated Hazardous Material Reutilization and

Inventory Management Program (910) 449-45314533

Environmental Affairs Department

(Director) (910) 449-5441

-Environmental Affairs Department (Environmental

Manager) (910) 449-5442

-Environmental Affairs Department (GIS

Manager) (910) 449-6144

-Environmental Affairs Department (Hazardous

Waste) (910) 449-5997

-Conservation Law Enforcement (910) 449-0108

Explosives Safety Officer (910) 449-5443

Military Police (Non-Emergency) (910) 449-42484249


-Officer In Charge of Construction (910) 449-5587



1-1



1-1

10 CONTRACTOR

ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDE

OVERVIEW

Environmental protection is an integral part of the Marine

Corps mission in order to protect public health preserve

environmental quality comply with regulatory

requirements and develop and strengthen relationships

between the Marine Corps community and external

stakeholders The purpose of the MCB Camp Lejeune

Contractor Environmental Guide is to assist contractors

working aboard Marine Corps Installations Eastrsquos

(MCIEASTrsquos) Marine Corps Base (MCB) Camp Lejeune

and Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS) New River in

maintaining the mission by complying with Federal and

State environmental laws and regulations as well as the

United States Marine Corps

(USMC) and installation

environmental policies This

guide is written in accordance

with Marine Corps Order

(MCO) P50902A and designed

to answer many of the

environmental questions that

arise as well as to provide

pertinent information on

environmental topics and

training requirements

NOTE This document should be used only as a guide to the

environmental issues contractors may face while working




1-2

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River It is

expected that contractors will work closely with the

Environmental Management Division (EMD) at MCB Camp

Lejeune the Environmental Affairs Department (EAD) at

MCAS New River and Contract Representatives regarding

environmental management issues concerns andor

questions Should the need arise this guide provides

contractors with EMD EAD

and emergency response points

of contact (POCs) All initial

inquiries should be directed to

the Resident Officer in Charge of

Construction (ROICC) or


will either direct the contractor

or contact the appropriate environmental office if additional

clarification regarding an environmental issue is necessary

NOTE It is very important to note that this guide is designed

to provide requirements specific to MCB Camp Lejeune-

issued contracts It is the contractorrsquos responsibility to know

and comply with all Federal State and local regulations

MCB Camp Lejeune environmental personnel will assist




replace any required regulatory environmental training or

certification as per contract requirements All required

environmental training should be completed prior to

working at MCIEAST installations


questions


1-3

NOTE It is the contractorrsquos responsibility to review the

project-specific contract and specifications Additional

environmental requirements submissions andor meetings

not documented in this guide may be required


The following key definitions and concepts are used

throughout this guide If you have any questions about these

definitions or concepts please consult the ROICC or


environmental office if additional clarification is necessary

111 Key Definitions

Environment Surroundings to include all surface

water groundwater drinking water supply land

surface or subsurface area or ambient air within the

United States or under the jurisdiction of the United

States including manmade structures indoor air

environments natural resources and archeological

and cultural resources

Environmental Management Division MCB

Camp Lejeunersquos division responsible for

environmental issues and compliance at MCB Camp

Lejeune

Environmental Affairs Department MCAS New

Riverrsquos department responsible for environmental

issues and compliance at MCAS New River

Environmental Management System (EMS) A



1-4



across all missions practices and functions The


environmental improvement and reducing risks to

mission through ongoing planning review and


112 Key Concepts

Environmental Requirement A defined standard

pertaining to environmental compliance pollution

prevention (P2) or naturalcultural resources subject

to uniform application Environmental requirements

may be in the form of a law regulation Executive

Order (EO) policy ordinance permit Base Order

(BO) or other form that prescribes a standard

Executive Order Legally binding orders given by

the President as head of the Executive Branch to

direct Federal agencies and officials in their

execution of congressionally established laws or

policies

MCB Camp Lejeune Throughout this document

MCB Camp Lejeune includes all MCB Camp

Lejeune real property and contracts for work

performed at MCAS New River and all outlying

fields associated with MCB Camp Lejeune

Marine Corps Order A directive of continuing

authority or information meant to be a permanent

reference and requiring continuing action issued by

Headquarters Marine Corps (HQMC) In accordance


1-5

with MCO 52151K (10 May 2007) all MCOs shall

where applicable establish describe or change

existing policy programs and major activities and

organizations define missions assign

responsibilities issue procedural guidance and be

written in standardized format

Resident Officer In Charge of Construction The

ROICC administers construction contracts and is the

contractorrsquos first line of contact with the government

Regulatory Requirements Government (including

Federal State and local) environmental regulations

implemented by environmental statutes Federal

regulations often establish minimum standards for

State and local governmentsrsquo implementing

programs

Statutory Requirements Federal environmental

statutes are laws that generally require compliance

by US Department of Defense (DoD) installations

12 INSTALLATION BACKGROUND

MCB Camp Lejeune was established in 1941 in Onslow

County along the southern coast of North Carolina (NC)

MCB Camp Lejeune is just south of MCAS New River

MCB Camp Lejeune takes advantage of 156000 acres and

11 miles of beach capable of supporting amphibious

operations 32 gun positions 48 tactical landing zones three

state-of-the-art training facilities and 80 live fire ranges for

its training mission


1-6

The primary function of MCB Camp Lejeune is national

defense providing a home installation for the II Marine

Expeditionary Force (MEF) 2nd Marine Division 2nd

Force Service Support Group and other combat units and

support commands MCB Camp Lejeunersquos mission is to

maintain combat-ready units for expeditionary deployment

MCB Camp Lejeune maintains and utilizes supply

warehouses maintenance shops hazardous material storage

nonhazardous and hazardous waste storage bulk fuel storage

and transfer facilities fleet parking housing areas

recreational areas two golf courses and a marina

MCAS New River is the principal USMC helicopter

operating location on the East Coast and supports aircrew

training in the H-53 helicopter It is also the evaluation and

prospective bed-down site for the V-22 Osprey The mission

of MCAS New River is to provide the necessary support for

its Marine Aircraft Group (MAG) tenant units MAG-26 and

MAG-29

121 Environmental Management Division

and Environmental Affairs Department

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMD within the Installation and

Environment Department is responsible for all natural

resource and environmental matters aboard the installation

EMD works closely with MCB Camp Lejeune personnel

educating and training them to comply with environmental

laws while accomplishing the military mission

The EAD at MCAS New River works closely with the EMD

on environmental compliance and protection matters Due to


1-7

various joint operations MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS

New River participate together in one EMS See Figure 1-1

and Figure 1-2 for organization charts of EMD and EAD

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB

Camp Lejeune) Organization Chart


River)

Organization Chart

122 Expectations

Contractors aboard the installation which are committed to

strict compliance with environmental laws and regulations


1-8

assist MCB Camp Lejeune in providing the best possible

training facilities for todayrsquos Marines and Sailors while

honoring our environmental responsibilities and objectives

Violation of environmental laws may result in severe civil or

criminal penalties and fines




environmental regulations and requirements which include

but may not be limited to the following

EO 12088 Federal Compliance with Pollution

Control Standards (October 13 1978) Requires

all facilities owned by or leased to or by the military

to be designed operated and maintained in

compliance with all applicable environmental

standards Military and civilian personnel must

cooperate with Federal State and local

environmental protection agencies and comply with

applicable standards and criteria issued by these

agencies to the extent permitted by law



Requires Federal agencies to comply with applicable

Federal State local and host nation environmental

laws and regulations Additionally requirements

include more widespread use of EMSs as the

framework for sustainability management


1-9


Energy and Economic Performance Requires

Federal agencies to meet various sustainability goals

to include the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions

Applicable provisions for meeting these goals are to

be included in acquisition and service contracts


Protection Manual (26 August 2013) USMC

policies and responsibilities for compliance with

environmental statutes and regulations as well as the

management of USMC environmental programs


This guide consists of the following information

MCB Camp Lejeune Contractor Environmental

Guide

EMS overview and requirements

Environmental program-specific requirements

MCB Camp Lejeune General EMS and

Environmental Awareness Training for Contractors

and Vendors

Signature Page


1-10

Prior to beginning work onsite

or within 30 days of beginning

work onsite all contractors and

their employees performing

work aboard MCB Camp

Lejeune must review these

materials and complete EMS and

General Environmental

Awareness training This guide

summarizes the EMS and

environmental programs at

MCB Camp Lejeune as well as

key requirements associated

with the various environmental

issues contractors may

encounter while performing

work aboard the installation

Contractors are expected to work

with their ROICC or Contract

Representatives and EMDEAD when environmental

concerns or issues arise


In accordance with Department of Defense (DoD)

instructions and MCOs EMD has implemented a

Comprehensive Environmental Training and Education

Program (CETEP) The goal of the CETEP is to ensure that

appropriate environmental instruction and related

information are provided to all levels of the Marine Corps in

the most effective and efficient manner to achieve full

compliance with all applicable environmental training

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors and their employeesperforming work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune mustreview these materials and complete EMS and General EnvironmentalAwareness

training

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors and their employees performing work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must review these materials and complete EMS and General Environmental Awareness

training


1-11

requirements A major component of the CETEP is to


awareness training to all

individuals associated with the

installation including

contractors

In addition to CETEP

requirements MCB Camp

Lejeune has implemented an

installation-wide EMS The

EMS highlights the fact that the

authority and principal

responsibility for controlling environmental impacts belong

to those commands units offices and personnel (including

contractors) whose activities have the potential to impact the

environment

All contractors are required to receive both EMS and general

environmental awareness training at the level necessary for

their job function This guide satisfies these training

requirements (See the Appendix)

As such contractors working aboard MCB Camp Lejeune

will do the following

Conduct job responsibilities in compliance with

environmental regulations and in conformance with

EMS requirements

Complete all applicable environmental training and

maintain associated records as per contract

requirements

All contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness training at the level necessary for their job function


1-12

Complete EMS and general environmental

awareness training and be aware of and understand

the MCB Camp Lejeune Environmental Policy

Contact their ROICC or Contract Representative

immediately regarding environmental andor EMS

issues

Prior to beginning work onsite or within 30 days all

contractors must sign and date the signature page and return

it to the installation Contract Representative Anyone who

works on a contract at any point during the contract period

must receive this information and training

14 POINTS OF CONTACT

EMD Branches and phone numbers are found in the

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory on pages xv and xvi of this

Guide All initial inquiries regarding an environmental issue

should be directed to the ROICC or Contract Representative

who will either directly contact or refer the contractor to the


necessary In the case of a spill or environmental emergency

immediately dial 911 Additional emergency response

procedures are provided in Section 50 of this Guide


1-13


15 OVERVIEW MAP

Figure 1-3 provides an overview map that displays the

locations of installation facilities discussed throughout this

Guide

For spills of Call

Follow-

up


Report


Report


surface 911

Spill

Report


911 Spill

Report



waterways

911


451-1482911


1-14



2-1

20 ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS

New River jointly operate an

EMS which provides a

systematic way of continually

implementing environmental

requirements and evaluating

performance The EMS is

founded on the principles of

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos

Environmental Policy which is

endorsed by the Commanding

General (CG) Three key

principles of the Environmental

Policy are to

Comply with relevant environmental laws and

regulations

Prevent pollution and

Continually improve the EMS

The EMS promotes sustained mission readiness through

actively identifying and implementing opportunities for

efficient resource use The USMC implements EMS at all

levels to continually improve environmental compliance

programs and meet evolving EOs and DoD requirements for

mission sustainability The EMS highlights the fact that the

authority and principal responsibility for controlling

environmental impacts belong to those commands units

Three key principles of the Environmental Policy are to comply with relevant environmental laws and regulations prevent pollution and continually improve our EMS


2-2

offices and personnel (including contractors and vendors)

whose activities have the potential to impact the

environment

21 KEY DEFINITION AND CONCEPTS



an EMS Please consult the

ROICC or Contract

Representative with any

questions about these definitions

or concepts

211 Key Definitions

Environment Surroundings in which an

organization operates including air water land

natural resources flora fauna humans and their

interrelation

Environmental Aspect A characteristic of an

organizationrsquos activities products or services that

may cause in normal operation or upset mode an

impact to an environmental or other resource Each

practice may have several aspects

Environmental Impact An effect beneficial or

adverse of a practicersquos aspect on an environmental

or other resource Each practice may have several

impacts

Environmental Resources Sensitive

environmental receptors (eg air water natural


questions


questions


2-3

resources) or cultural or historic assets at MCB Camp

Lejeune or MCAS New River in the surrounding

community within the ecosystem or beyond that

may be impacted by the operation of practices

Practice A unit process that supports a military

mission and may impact environmental resources (It

is the ability to impact an environmental resource

that is key to defining a practice However practices

may also impact other resources)

Practice Owner Person(s) responsible for control of

practices EMS procedures use the term practice

owner when the assignment of more specific

responsibilities is left to the owning organizations

Requirement Legislation regulation or policy

issued by any Executive Federal State local DoD

Department of Navy (DoN) or USMC authority that

addresses environmental considerations and requires

action

212 Key Concepts

Environmental Management System A




across all missions activities and functions The


environmental improvement and for reducing risks

to mission through ongoing planning review and



2-4

Environmental Policy Public commitment by

senior leaders to the management of the installationrsquos

environmental affairs including environmental

compliance pollution prevention naturalcultural

resource management cleanup risk to mission and

continual improvement of the EMS

Plan Do Check Act Four-step model by which the

EMS carries out change ndash Plan establish objectives

and processes Do implement and execute the plan

Check study and analyze the results Act take

action based on what you learned



2-5



MCAS New River must be aware of and adhere to all

applicable regulations and requirements concerning EMS


EO 13148 Greening the Government Through

Leadership in Environmental Management

Mandates that environmental management

considerations must be an integral component of

Federal Government policies operations planning

and management with the primary goal for each

agency to promote the sustainable management of

Federal facility lands through the implementation of

cost-effective environmentally sound practices and

programs to reduce adverse impacts to the natural

environment



Establishes the EMS as the primary management

approach for addressing environmental aspects

including energy and transportation aspects and as

the reporting mechanism for communicating

progress on meeting performance goals

EO 13514 Leadership in Environmental Energy

and Economic Performance Requires continuing

implementation of formal EMSs at all appropriate

organizational levels to support the sustainability

performance requirements of the Order


2-6

23 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM

An EMS is a systematic way to identify and eliminate or

minimize the installationrsquos environmental risk-to-mission

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMS identifies practices and their

aspects as a starting point for prioritizing environmental

management initiatives Each installation practice such as

constructionrenovationdemolition equipment

operationmaintenancedisposal landscaping or

pesticideherbicide management and application has one or

more environmental aspects Figure 2-2 illustrates the

simplified potential interactions of one practice

constructionrenovationdemolition with the environment


2-7

Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and

Demolition Activities with the Environment


2-8

24 EMS RESPONSIBILITIES

Contractors are expected to understand that the practices

they support on the installation may interact with and have

the potential to impact the

environment Therefore it is

expected that contractors will do

the following

Review the Contractor

Environmental Guide

Be aware of the


(Attachment 2-1)

Conduct practices in a

way that avoids andor

minimizes impacts to the

environment by complying with all applicable

Federal State and local environmental regulations

and BOs

Be familiar with spill response procedures

Report all environmental emergencies and spills

Report any environmental problems or concerns

promptly and notify the ROICC or Contract

Representative

Respond to data collection efforts upon request


environment


environment


2-9

25 CONTRACTOR ENVIRONMENTAL

GUIDE AND EMS

The sections of this Contractor Environmental Guide are

categorized based on the type of environmental requirements

routinely encountered by contractors at MCB Camp

Lejeune The following matrix is derived from MCB Camp

Lejeunersquos EMS Working Group sessions and relates the

contents of this guide to the practices aboard MCB Camp

Lejeune It is provided to assist contractors in narrowing

down specific requirements that may apply to onsite

activities


2-10


EMS


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se

S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites

S

ec

tio

n 1

30

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Was

te R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

T

rain

ing

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Battery management

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e



Boiler operation Building operation maintenance repair

Channel dredging

Chlorination

Composting Constructiondemo renovation


De-greasing Drinking water management



Erosion runoff control

Fish stocking


2-11


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

Tra

inin

g

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Fueling and fuel mgt storage

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Grease traps

Habitat management

HCP operation

HM storage

HM transportation HW disposal offsite transport



HW transportation

Land clearing

Landfill gas energy recovery system

Landscaping

Laundry Live fire range operation

Livestock operation

Metal working Non-destructive inspection

ODS halon management

Packagingunpack-aging


2-12


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

T

rain

ing

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Secti

on

140

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Paint booth

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d A

bo

ard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Paint gun cleaning

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement Pesticideherbicide mgt and application

Polishing Pumping station force main





Roofing kettle

Sewers






2-13


nv E

merg

en

cy R

esp

on

se S

pill

Resp

on

se S

ecti

on

50

HM

HW

Secti

on

70

Po

ten

tial D

isco

very

of

Un

do

cu

men

ted

Co

nta

min

ate

d S

ites S

ecti

on

130

Asb

es

tos

Secti

on

80

Lead

-Base

d P

ain

t

Secti

on

90

Sto

rmw

ate

r

Secti

on

110

So

lid

Waste

R

ecyclin

g

an

d P

2

Secti

on

120

Tra

inin

g

Secti

on

30

Cu

ltu

ral R

es

ou

rces

Secti

on

60

Perm

itti

ng

Sec

tio

n 1

40

Air

Qu

ality

Secti

on

40

Natu

ral

Reso

urc

es

Secti

on

100

Stormwater collection conveyance

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Ap

plic

ab

le t

o A

ll P

racti

ces C

on

du

cte

d

Ab

oard

MC

B C

am

p L

eje

un

e

Surface washing Swimming pool operation and maintenance

Timber management

Universal waste storage collection


UXOEOD operations

Vehicle maintenance

Vehicle parking

Wash rack


2-14



2-15

Attachment 2-1

MCB Camp Lejeunersquos Environmental

Policy Statement


2-16


2-17



2-18


3-1

30 TRAINING

The contractor is responsible

for ensuring that every

employee completes a

program of classroom

instruction or on-the-job

training that teaches the

employee to perform his or

her duties in compliance with

Federal State and local

regulatory requirements

To minimize the

environmental impact of

MCB Camp Lejeune

operations all civilian and

military personnel including

contractors are required to

receive both EMS and general environmental awareness

training at the level necessary for their job function Use of

the Contractor Environmental Guide satisfies these training

requirements A training presentation is provided in the

Appendix

NOTE The contractor is responsible for knowing and

complying with Federal State and local regulations MCB

Camp Lejeune environmental personnel will assist





To minimize the environmental impact of MCB Camp Lejeune operations all contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness training at the level necessary for their job function


3-2

replace any required regulatory training as per contract

requirements Required training should be completed prior

to working at MCB Camp Lejeune




contractor training If you have








necessary

311 Key Definitions

Explicitly Required Training Training expressly

required by specific laws regulations or policies that

apply due to the nature of work assignments job

functions andor specific licensing or certification

requirements mandated by environmental laws

regulations or policies

Implicitly Required Training

Instructioninformation that is not expressly required

by laws regulations or policies but that may be

reasonably inferred as being required to maintain

compliance or is determined through EMS to reduce

overall environmental risk



3-3

312 Key Concepts

Comprehensive Environmental Training and

Education Program (CETEP) The USMC training

program designed to ensure that high-quality

efficient and effective environmental training

education and information are provided at all levels

of the USMC

Environmental Management System (EMS) The

part of the overall management system that includes

organizational structure planning activities

responsibilities practices procedures processes

and resources for developing implementing

achieving reviewing and maintaining the


EMS Training All contractors are required to

receive EMS training at the level necessary for their

job function

General Environmental Awareness Training

Instruction designed to ensure that MCB Camp

Lejeune and MCAS New River personnel become

familiar with the installation environmental policies

and programs for regulatory compliance natural

resource conservation P2 and environmental

protection General EMS and Environmental

Awareness Training for contractors and vendors is

required for all MCB Camp Lejeune contractors The

training presentation is included as an Appendix to

this document


3-4


Training is potentially applicable to all EMS practices

conducted aboard MCB Camp Lejeune




regulations and requirements concerning training which


Executive Order 13423 Strengthening Federal

Environmental Energy and Transportation

Management Requires implementation of an EMS at

all appropriate organizational levels

33 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS


In accordance with DoD instructions

and MCO the EMD at MCB Camp

Lejeune has implemented a CETEP A

major component of the CETEP is to


awareness training to all individuals

associated with the installation

including contractors and vendors

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning

work onsite all contractors and their

employees performing work aboard Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors are required to receive

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all contractors are required to receive both EMS and general environmental awareness

training


3-5

MCB Camp Lejeune must receive general environmental

awareness training


In addition to CETEP requirements MCB Camp Lejeune

has implemented an installation-wide EMS per EO 13423

Strengthening Federal Environmental Energy and

Transportation Management and DoD and USMC EMS

policy The EMS highlights the fact that the authority and

principal responsibility for controlling environmental

impacts belong to those commands units offices and

personnel (including contractors and vendors) whose

activities have the potential to impact the environment

Prior to or within 30 days of beginning work onsite all

contractors and their employees performing work aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune must receive EMS training

333 Recordkeeping

Upon completion of the training materials included in the

Appendix of the Contractor Environmental Guide each

employee must sign the Training Roster The Contracting

Representative must maintain these records in the contract

file

All training records including other applicable

environmental training must be maintained onsite for

review


3-6



4-1

40 AIR QUALITY

The Air Quality Program is responsible for ensuring that the

installation complies with all applicable Federal State and

local air quality regulations The ROICC or Contract

Representative will provide a copy of BO 50906A Air

Quality Management which has additional information




air quality If you have any


information in this section






necessary

411 Key Definitions

Criteria Pollutants Pollutants that the US

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

Administrator has determined will cause or

contribute to air pollution that may reasonably be

anticipated to endanger public health and welfare

and for which air quality criteria have been

established (ie sulfur dioxide nitrogen oxides




4-2

ground-level ozone carbon monoxide lead and

particulate matter)

Dust-Causing Activity Any activity that has the

potential to generate an excess level of dust

including but not limited to construction and

demolition (CampD) blasting and sanding

construction of haul roads land clearing or fallow

fields

Hazardous Air Pollutants Air pollutants as

identified within 42 United States Code (USC) 7412

that cause or may cause cancer or other serious health

effects such as reproductive effects or birth defects

or adverse environmental and ecological effects

Ozone-Depleting Substance Chemicals such as

certain refrigerants that cause depletion of the

stratospheric ozone layermdashprimarily

chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and

hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) and their blends

Particulate Matter A criteria air pollutant that

includes dust soot and other small materials that are

released into and transported by air

Title V Operating Permit Permit issued under the

Clean Air Act (CAA) Amendments of 1990 for all

major sources of air pollution All emission sources

at the installation must be listed on the permit

412 Key Concepts

Emission Sources Before beginning any emitting

activity please have the ROICC or Contract


4-3

Representative contact EMD to determine whether

any permitting monitoring reporting testing andor

recordkeeping requirements apply

Permitted Sources Ensure that

constructionauthorization permits are in place prior

to beginning construction andor prior to the arrival

onsite of new or additional emission sources

(emergency generators paint booths etc)


Contractor activities associated with air quality include the

following

Boat operationmaintenance

Boiler operation

Chlorination

Degreasing



Hazardous material (HM) storagetransportation

Hazardous waste (HW) satellite accumulation

areaHW transportation


Metal working

Ozone-depleting substance (ODS)halon

management


4-4

Paint booth operationspaint gun cleaningpaint

removal

Polishing





Unexploded ordnance (UXO)explosives and

ordnance disposal (EOD) operations

Vehicle maintenance


include degradation of air quality degradation of quality of

life and depletion of nonrenewable resources




regarding air quality which include but may not be limited

to

Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 Protect

human health and clean air resources by establishing

standards and regulations for the control of air

pollutants

Title V Operating Permit Operating permit

required for any major stationary source that emits or


4-5

has the potential to emit 100 tons per year or more of

any criteria air pollutant and outlines the

requirements to address and ensure air quality

compliance

BO 50906A Air Quality Management

Implements policies and procedures at the

installation level that all personnel must follow in

order to demonstrate compliance with the Title V

permit and USMC requirements

Base Bulletin 5090 Open Burning of Vegetative

Debris Outlines procedures for conducting open

burning in accordance with State regulations and

installation procedures

North Carolina Department of Air Quality

(NCDAQ) Rules Outlines all State-specific air

quality rules control requirements procedures for

permits and approvals contained in 15A North

Carolina Administrative Code (NCAC) 02D 02H

and 02Q applicable to North Carolina entities

43 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS

The installation has a single permit the CAA Title V

Construction and Operating Permit which includes all

stationary air emission sources at the facility therefore all

permit application submittals to the NCDAQ must be

coordinated through the EMD The NCDAQ will review and

process the application and then issue a permit to construct

and operate or to modify the emission source(s) A permit is

required prior to the construction of any emission source

Timely submittal of the permit application is required to


construction


4-6

obtain the final permit prior to

commencing construction The most

common types of emission sources

at the installation are as follows

Boilers

Generators

Engine test stands

Surface coatingpainting

operations

Paint removal (chemical and

mechanical) abrasive

blasting or other surface preparation activities


Grinding

Woodworking

Welding

ODSrefrigerant recovery and recycling operations

(industrial chillers refrigerators air conditioning

compressors cleaning agents etc)

Bulk chemical and flammable materials storage

44 ADDITIONAL ACTIVITIES OF

CONCERN


additional information regarding activities that do not


construction


4-7

necessarily require modification to the Title V permit but

that must be coordinated with or tracked by EMD or the

NCDAQ Examples of these activities include but are not


Use Maintenance and Management of

Refrigerants and other ODS Includes installation

recovery replacement conversion or service of

refrigerant-containing equipment (chillers

refrigerators air conditioning condensers etc) All

contractors will use Best Management Practices

(BMPs) during refrigerant management activities

All Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning

(HVAC) technicians will maintain their appropriate

State-specific licenses and present them to the

ROICC or Contract Representative upon request

Emergency Generators Includes the installation

and temporary use of emergency generators during

electrical failures and construction activities All

contractors will coordinate with the ROICC or

Contract Representative to determine if the intended

generator may be exempted or must be temporarily

permitted for the intended use

Open Burning (eg right-of-way clearing storm

debris burning) Open burning activities aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River must

coordinated through EMD and the Fire Department

Open burning activities are only permissible for land

clearing and right-of-way maintenance when the

following conditions are met


4-8

The wind direction at the time the burning is

initiated is away from any public transport roads

within 250 feet so they are not affected by smoke

ash or other air pollutants from the burning

The location of the burning is at least 500 feet

from any dwelling group of dwellings

commercial or institutional establishment or

other occupied structure not located on the

property on which the burning is conducted

unless an air curtain burner is used If an air

curtain burner is used the regional office

supervisor may grant exceptions to the setback

requirements

Heavy oils asphaltic materials (eg shingles and

other roofing materials) items containing natural

or synthetic rubber or any materials other than

vegetative plant growth are not burned

Initial burning must begin between 0800 and

1800 After 1800 no material may be added to

the fire until 0800 the following day

No fires may be started and no vegetation may

be added to existing fires when the North

Carolina Division of Forest Resources has

banned burning for that area

Burners that have the potential to burn more than

8100 tons per year may be subject to Title V air

quality permitting requirements

Situations that require a regulatory exemption

evaluation by the NCDAQ Regional Office


4-9

Supervisor are coordinated through EMDrsquos

Environmental Quality Branch Air Quality Program

Manager The ROICC or Contract Representative

will address any additional questions or provide a

copy of Base Bulletin 5090 which contains a

summary of the installationrsquos open burning

requirements

The four designated sites at MCB Camp Lejeune that

are permitted for storing andor burning storm debris

are in the following areas Mainside at the borrow pit

near the Piney Green landfill Courthouse Bay Camp

Johnson and Camp Geiger Only storm debris may

be accumulated at these sites EMD must notify the

NCDAQ if the installation intends to burn the storm

debris at one of these sites Contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative for more information

Fire training outside of designated fire training

pits State approval is required to conduct fire

training outside of the designated fire training pits

First complete the Notification of Open Burning for

the Training of Firefighting Personnel form The

form is available at the following site

httpdaqstatencusenfopenburnob_firetrainpdf

Before the training exercise an accredited North

Carolina Asbestos Inspector must inspect any

structure to be burned to ensure that it is free from

asbestos Turn in the completed form to EMD for

submittal to NCDAQ and the Division of Public

Health Health Hazards Control Unit Contact the


4-10

ROICC or Contract Representative for additional

information

Dust-causing activities (eg concrete and rock

crushing) Wet suppression is required during the

entire dust-causing operation Ensure that an

adequate water supply is available and coordinate

with the Fire and Emergency Services Division if

access to a fire hydrant is necessary Applicable wet

suppression may be required during temporary

concrete-crushing operations during CampD activities

Noise Management USMC commands engaged in

any activity resulting in noise emissions must

comply with Federal State interstate and local

requirements for the control and management of

environmental noise to minimize disruption to the

local community To the maximum extent

practicable personnel should limit the use of power

tools machinery construction equipment and other

noisy devices to normal working hour


5-1

50 ENVIRONMENTAL EMERGENCY

PLANNING AND RESPONSE

Environmental emergency planning and response can reduce

injuries protect employees reduce asset losses minimize

downtime and minimize environmental impacts of

uncontrolled releases of pollutants to air land and water

The purpose of emergency planning is to prepare for

mitigate respond to and recover from environmental

emergencies while minimizing any potential impacts to

human health and the environment Contractors operating

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must be aware of and adhere to

all environmental emergency response procedures and

notification requirements to minimize detrimental effects

from inadvertent releases

Procedures relating to emergencies caused by unforeseen

site conditions are addressed in Section 50of this guide If

an environmental emergency is identified contact 911

immediately Additional inquiries should be directed to the

ROICC or Contract

Representative

51 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS



environmental emergency

response and spill response



this section


this section


5-2

questions or concerns about the information in this section




511 Key Definitions

Berm A mound used to prevent the spread of a

contaminant

Discharge Any spilling leaking pumping pouring

emitting emptying or dumping not explicitly

permitted

Navigable waters The waters of the United States

and territorial seas including waters that have been

or may be used for commerce waters subject to tidal

flow interstate waters and wetlands and all other

waters (intrastate lakes rivers streams intermittent

streams flats wetlands sloughs prairies wet

meadows natural ponds tributaries etc)

Petroleum Oil and Lubricant (POL) A broad

term that includes all petroleum and associated

products or oil of any kind or in any form including

but not limited to petroleum fuel oil vegetable oil

animal oil sludge oil refuse and oil mixed with

wastes

Release Pumping pouring emitting emptying

discharging injecting escaping leaching dumping

or disposing into the environment (including the

abandonment or discarding of barrels containers

and other closed receptacles) of any hazardous


5-3

chemical hazardous substance or extremely

hazardous substance (EHS) Releases may be

aboveground belowground or to water

Spill Event The reportable discharge of oil into or

upon the navigable waters of the United States or

adjoining shorelines in harmful quantities as defined

by the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in 40 CFR

110

512 Key Concepts

Environmental Emergency Response Contacts

The following table identifies the emergency contact

information for various spill scenarios In addition to

these emergency response contacts the ROICC or

Contract Representative should be notified

immediately after an incident


For spills of Call

Follow-

up


Report


Report


surface 911

Spill

Report


5-4

Contractors have containment and cleanup

responsibilities following a spill and there may be

additional follow-up reporting or requirements


additional guidance


Environmental planning and response are potentially

applicable to all EMS practices conducted aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune




regulations and requirements regarding emergency response

For spills of Call

Follow-

up


911 Spill

Report



waterways

911


451-1482911


5-5

and spill response procedures which include but may not be


Clean Air Act of 1970 Section 112r Mandates the

prevention and control of air emissions and specifies

emergency planning where the potential exists for

accidental release of hazardous air pollutants

Clean Water Act (CWA) of 1972 Establishes the

basic structure for regulating discharges of pollutants

into the waters of the United States The CWA

establishes that there should be no discharges of oil

or hazardous substances into or upon the navigable

waters of the United States or adjoining shorelines

which may affect natural resources under the

management of the United States

Comprehensive Environmental Response

Compensation and Liability (CERCLA) Act of

1980 Authorizes a Federal response to any release

or threatened release of a hazardous substance into

the environment This act defines hazardous

substances by reference to substances that are listed

or designated under other environmental statutes


Know Act (EPCRA) of 1986 Section 304

Establishes requirements for reporting a release to

ensure a quick response by local emergency

responders Notification requirements apply to two

chemical lists the CERCLA Hazardous Substance

list and the EHS list The ldquoList of Listsrdquo provides a

comprehensive identification of hazardous


5-6

substances and EHSs In addition facilities may be

required to submit a list of their hazardous materials

inventory maintained onsite or Safety Data Sheets

(SDS) to response personnel

Oil Pollution Act (OPA) of 1990 Addresses oil

storage at facilities and emphasizes preparedness and

response activities This act prohibits the harmful

discharge of oil and hazardous substances into waters

of the United States The OPA requires contingency

planning for ldquoworst caserdquo discharges and

demonstrated response capabilities through

planning equipment training and exercises

Resource Conservation and Recovery Act

(RCRA) of 1976 Protects human health and the

environment from the hazards associated with

hazardous waste handling generation

transportation treatment storage and disposal

Subtitle C of the RCRA requires owners and

operators of hazardous waste facilities to develop

comprehensive management plans that address spill

prevention and cleanup

53 SPILL NOTIFICATION

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill

Notification Procedures

In accordance with MCB Camp Lejeune notification

requirements any discharge of oil or hazardous materials

must be immediately reported to the MCB Camp Lejeune

Fire Department at 911



5-7

MCB Camp Lejeune maintains a Spill Prevention Control

and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan that establishes

procedures to prevent oil spills and documents existing oil

spill prevention structures procedures and equipment The

Installation SPCC Plan provides general information for any

type of response actions needed for spills aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune Contractors

engaged in the handling and

transfer of POL or hazardous

materials must develop a Unit-

Level Contingency Plan (ULCP)

that addresses the spill response for

their specific sites and potential

spill types This ULCP must be

maintained onsite and all personnel

working within that site must be

made aware of its location and use

In the event of a spill contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative (after contacting emergency responders) to

obtain a spill report form Return the completed spill report

form to EMD (fax to (910) 451-3471) and to the ROICC or

Contract Representative A copy of the spill report form is

included as Attachment 5-1 The following information must

be provided when reporting a spill


Location of spill (building number street)

Number and type of injuries if any




5-8

Source of the spill (container vehicle etc)



Do not wait to report a spill even if all of the required

information is not immediately available


Notification


MCAS New River must be aware of water and wastewater

utilities in their specific workproject area

Wastewater Spills

In the event of a wastewater spill report the incident to the




provided




Source of the spill




5-9

Water Line Breaks

In the event of a water line break report the incident to the




provided



Reason for the break

Estimated time of the break

54 FOLLOW-UP

If surface run-off is contaminated the contractor will under

the advisement of the Fire Department or EMD construct a

temporary berm or containment area Contaminated surface

water will be removed in accordance with all safety and

environmental requirements for the installation Notify the

Resource Conservation and Recovery Section (RCRS) at

(910) 451-1482) the RCRS will provide concurrence for

temporary containment areas and removal of contaminated

runoff

If solid or hazardous waste was generated as the result of a

spill refer to Sections 120 and 70 of this guide for disposal

requirements


5-10



5-11

Attachment 5-1

Spill Reporting Form


5-12


5-13



5-14


6-1

60 CULTURAL RESOURCES

MCB Camp Lejeune enjoys a rich history and remnants of

our past may be found throughout the real properties that

make up the installation All personnel at MCB Camp

Lejeune are responsible for ensuring the cultural resources

entrusted to the USMC care remain intact and available for

future generations Contractors are responsible for notifying

the ROICC or Contract Representative immediately if they

encounter suspected archaeological sites artifacts or human

remains




cultural resource management If

you have any questions or

concerns about the information

in this section please consult the

ROICC or Contract



office if additional clarification

is necessary

611 Key Definitions

Archaeological Resource Defined by the

Archaeological Resources Protection Act (ARPA) as

any material remains of past human life or activities


this section


this section


6-2

that are at least 100 years old and are capable of

providing scientific or human understanding of past

human behavior and cultural adaptation including

the site on which the remains are located Examples

include pottery basketry bottles weapons weapon

projectiles tools structures or portions of structures

pit houses rock paintings rock carvings intaglios

graves human skeletal materialsremains or any

portion or piece of any of the foregoing items or

structures Non-fossilized and fossilized

paleontological specimens or any portion or piece

thereof are not considered archaeological resources

unless found in an archaeological context

(According to the National Historic Preservation Act

(NHPA) of 1966 some historic properties built

within the past 50 years can achieve significance if

they are of exceptional importance [National

Register Criteria Consideration G])

Cultural Resource A generic term for the collective

evidence of the past activities and accomplishments

of people including buildings structures districts

sites features and objects of significance in history

architecture archaeology engineering or culture

per MCO P50902A

Effect Any condition of a project that may cause a

change in the quality of the historic architectural

archaeological or cultural character of a property

that qualifies it for listing in the National Register of

Historic Places (NRHP) A project is considered to

have an effect on a historic or cultural property when

any aspect of the project changes the integrity of the


6-3

location design setting materials workmanship

feeling or association of the property that

contributes to its significance

Historic Property Any prehistoric or historic

district site building structure or object significant

in US history architecture archaeology

engineering or culture and included or eligible for

listing in the NRHP per the NHPA and MCO

P50902A

State Historic Preservation Officer The person

designated to administer the State Historic

Preservation Program including identifying and

nominating eligible properties to the NRHP and

administering applications for listing historic

properties in the NRHP

612 Key Concepts


Contract Representative if they encounter any

cultural resources

Policy DoD policy is to preserve significant historic

and archaeological resources


Contractor practices associated with cultural resources



Land clearing


6-4




include damage destruction alteration theft or demolition

of historic properties


It is DoD policy to integrate the archeological and historic

preservation requirements of applicable laws with the

planning and management of activities under DoD control

to minimize expenditures through judicious application of

options available in complying with applicable laws and to

encourage practical economically feasible rehabilitation

and adaptive use of significant historical resources



regulations and requirements regarding cultural resources


BO 50908A Sets forth regulations and establishes

responsibilities associated with management of

archaeological and historic resources aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune

Archaeological and Historic Preservation Act

(AHPA) of 1974 (16 USC 469 et seq) Amends the

Reservoir Salvage Act to extend its provisions

beyond the construction of dams to any terrain

alteration resulting from any Federal construction


6-5

project or federally licensed project activity or

program

Archeological Resources Protection Act of 1979

(16 USC 470 et seq) Requires Federal land

managers to issue permits for the excavation or

removal of artifacts from lands under their

jurisdiction The ARPA requires that relevant Native

American tribes be notified of permit issuance if

significant religious or cultural sites will be affected

It prohibits the excavation damage alteration theft

or defacement of an archaeological site or artifacts

unless permitted by the Federal land manager

DoD Directive 47101 Archaeological and

Historic Resources Management Provides policy

for the management of archaeological and historic

resources on land and in water under DoD control

EO 11593 May 13 1971 Requires all Federal

agencies to administer cultural properties under their

control Agencies are required to direct their policies

plans and programs so that significant sites and

structures are preserved

Historic Sites Buildings and Antiquities Act of

1935 (Public Law 74-292 16 USC 461 et seq)

States that it is Federal policy to preserve historic and

prehistoric properties of national significance

National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) of

1969 (42 USC 4321 et seq) States that it is Federal

government policy to preserve important historic

cultural and natural aspects of our national heritage


6-6

and requires the consideration of environmental

concerns during project planning and execution

National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16

USC 470 et seq) Establishes historic preservation

as a national policy and requires Federal agencies

undertaking actions that may affect NRHP-eligible

historic properties to consult State historic

preservation offices and the Advisory Council on

Historic Preservation Section 110 of NHPA requires

Federal agencies to inventory evaluate identify and

protect cultural resources that are determined eligible

for listing in the NRHP

Public Buildings Cooperative Use Act of 1976

(Public Law 94-541) Encourages adaptive reuse of

historic buildings as administrative facilities for

Federal agencies

Title 36 CFR Part 65 National Historic

Landmarks Program Identifies and designates

National Historic Landmarks and encourages the

long-range preservation of nationally significant

properties that illustrate or commemorate the history

and prehistory of the United States


6-7

63 PROCEDURES

All contractors are expected to follow these procedures

Notify the ROICC or Contract Representative

immediately concerning

any encounter with

suspected archaeological

sites artifacts human

remains or any other

suspected cultural

resources during

contractor activities

Stop work in the

immediate area of the

discovery until directed

by the Contract

Representative to resume

work

Be particularly aware of surroundings when working in a

designated historic area The Camp Lejeune Installation

Geospatial Information amp Services Office of the Geospatial

Services Division can provide resource mapping of known

cultural resource areas for all planners project managers

contractors and others through formal request The ROICC

or Contract Representative will assist with making

arrangements to request access for Geographic Information

System mapping




6-8

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow

Chart


7-1

70 HAZARDOUS

MATERIALSHAZARDOUS WASTE

MANAGEMENT

All persons on a USMC installation are subject to

compliance with Federal State and local regulations and

permit conditions addressing the proper management of

hazardous materials and waste Mishandling these wastes

and materials may result in violation notices fines andor

penalties The EPA regulates hazardous wastes through the

RCRA which provides specific regulatory definitions for

hazardous waste and its management The RCRA governs

all hazardous waste from the point of generation to ultimate

disposal including hazardous waste generated by

contractors aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New

River Hazardous materials including those used by

contractors aboard the installation are also regulated by the

EPCRA Additionally the North Carolina Department of

Environmental Quality (NCDEQ) has issued more stringent

rules and regulations governing hazardous materials and

hazardous waste management that also apply to contractors




hazardous materials (HM)

hazardous wastes (HW) and

their management If you have






7-2




711 Key Definitions

90-day Accumulation Area These areas are used to

store HW temporarily until it is either manifested and

shipped off site for disposal or transferred to a

permitted storage facility HW may be accumulated

for up to 90 days in these areas MCB Camp

Lejeunersquos 90-day accumulation facility is located on

Michael Road

Generator Any person whose activity or process

produces HW or whose activity or process subjects

HW to regulation

Hazardous Material A chemical compound or a

combination of compounds posing or capable of

posing a significant risk to public health safety or

the environment as a result of its quantity

concentration or physicalchemicalinfectious

properties

Hazardous Waste Any discarded material

(including solid liquid or gas) or combination of

discarded materials which due to quantity

concentration or physical chemical or infectious

characteristics may

Cause or significantly contribute to an increase in

mortality or cause a serious irreversible or

incapacitating reversible illness or


7-3

Pose a substantial present or potential hazard to

human health or the environment when

improperly treated stored transported disposed

of or otherwise managed

Manifest A document that allows all parties

involved in HW management (eg generators

transporters disposal facilities EPA State agencies)

to track the movement of HW from the point of

generation to the point of ultimate treatment storage

or disposal All HW manifests for waste generated

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune must be reviewed and

released by personnel from the Resource

Conservation and Recovery Section EMD who can

be contacted at (910) 451-1482

NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Waste that is not

regulated or is exempt from regulation under RCRA

HW requirements but has other regulatory

requirements for proper management

Satellite Accumulation Area (SAA) Designated

areas at or near the point of generation where HW is

accumulated Generators may accumulate up to 55

gallons of HW or one quart of acute HW at a satellite

area for an indefinite amount of time When 55

gallons of HW (or 1 quart of acute HW) are

exceeded the generator must date the container and

transfer it to an approved 90-day site or long-term

HW storage facility within 72 hours EMD

authorization for an SAA must be obtained and

posted at the site EMD authorization will establish

individual limits for each SAA No SAA


7-4

authorizations will exceed 55 gallons of HW or 1

quart of acute HW In accordance with installation

policy HW in an SAA should not be stored longer

than 365 days even if the container is not full

Safety Data Sheet (SDS) A document that provides

information about (1) chemical properties

environmental hazards and health hazards and (2)

protective measures along with safety precautions

for handling storing and transporting hazardous

chemical products The Hazard Communication

Standard (HCS) 29 CFR 19101200(g) was revised

in 2012 to mandate the use of a single Globally

Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling

of Chemicals (GHS) by manufacturers distributors

and importers to communicate information on

chemical-related hazards The information contained

in the SDS is standardized in a 16-section format

Employers must ensure that the SDSs for all

hazardous chemicals in the workplace are readily

accessible to employees

Treatment Any method technique or process

designed to change the physical chemical or

biological character or composition of any HW to

neutralize the waste or to recover energy or material

resources from the waste or to render such waste

nonhazardous or less hazardous safer to transport

store or dispose of or amenable for recovery or

storage or reduction in volume

Treatment Storage and Disposal (TSD)

Facilities TSD facilities conduct HW treatment


7-5

storage or disposal operations and require an RCRA

part B permit for final approval to operate The part

B permit is maintained to accurately identify the

most current operations at the TSD facility MCB

Camp Lejeune does not have a TSD facility

Universal Waste (UW) UW regulations streamline

HW management standards for batteries pesticides

mercury-containing equipment and fluorescent

lamps The regulations govern the collection and

management of these widely generated wastes thus

facilitating environmentally sound collection and

proper recycling or treatment In North Carolina

batteries thermostats obsolete agricultural

pesticides and fluorescent lamps may be managed

under the UW Rule UW must be transferred off site

within 1 year of the date when the material was first

identified as waste

Used Oil Any oil that has been refined from crude

oil or synthetic oil and as a result of use storage or

handling has become unsuitable for its original

purpose due to the presence of impurities or loss of

original properties Used oil may be suitable for

further use and is economically recyclable therefore

it is managed as a separate category of material

712 Key Concepts

HW Management The systematic control of the

collection source separation storage transportation

processing treatment recovery and disposal of HW

In addition HW Management includes processes to


7-6

reduce the HWrsquos effect on the environment and to

recover resources from it

HW Minimization The USMC policy is to reduce

the quantity of HW disposed of by source reduction

recycling treatment and disposal The highest

priorities are reducing HW generation and

recycling The goal of the USMC is to achieve

continuous reduction of HW generation through P2

initiatives BMPs and use of the best available

demonstrated technology

National Fire Protection Association The US

trade association that creates and maintains private

copyrighted standards and codes including the

diamond hazard label in Figure 7-1 which is used by

emergency personnel to quickly and easily identify

the risks posed by hazardous materials


7-7



7-8


Contractor practices associated with HM and HW

management include but are not limited to the following

Battery management


Boiler operation

Building operation maintenancerepair

Chlorination


Constructionrenovation demolition

Degreasing

Drinking water management




Habitat management

HCP operation

HM storage

HM transportation




7-9


HW transportation

Laboratory

Landscaping

Laundry


Metal working

Non-destructive inspection

ODShalon management

Paint gun cleaning

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement

Pesticideherbicide management and

application

Polishing

Pumping stationforce main



Roofing kettle



Swimming pool operation and maintenance


7-10

Universal waste storagecollection

UXOEOD operations

Vehicle maintenance

The potential impacts of these activities on the

environment include depletion of the HW landfill

depletion of non-renewable resources and

degradation of soil quality


7-11




regulations and requirements regarding HM and HW which


BO 50909 Hazardous MaterialWaste

ManagementAir Station Order (ASO) 50902

Environmental Compliance and Protection

Program for MCAS New River Establishes

procedures and general responsibilities for the

disposal of HM and HW under environmental

permits and authorizations


Know Act Establishes requirements regarding

emergency planning and the reporting of hazardous

chemical storage and use

Hazardous Material Transportation Act (HMTA)

of 1975 The principal Federal law regulating the

transportation of HM Established to mitigate the

risks to health property and the environment

inherent in the transportation of HM in intrastate

interstate and foreign commerce The HMTA is

administered by the US Department of

Transportation (DOT) and regulates the shipping

marking labeling placarding and recordkeeping

requirements for HM including HW and military

munitions


7-12


Establishes standards for HW generators as

necessary to protect human health and the

environment by instituting statutory standards for

generators and transporters of HW that will ensure

the following proper recordkeeping and reporting

use of a manifest system use of appropriate labels

and containers containerization and accumulation

time and proper management of TSD facilities In

addition it gives the EPA and State agencies

authority to access facility premises and all records

regarding HW management

40 CFR Subchapter I (Parts 260ndash299) Solid

Wastes Federal regulations promulgated under the

1976 RCRA that regulate HW management

generators transporters and owners or operators of

TSD facilities North Carolina has adopted the

Federal HW rules by reference

Because the installation is designated as a Large Quantity

Generator (LQG) of HW all HW generated aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune must meet the regulatory requirements of this

generator designation An LQG may maintain three types of

HW accumulationstorage areas satellite 90-day and

permitted Typically HW is accumulated at an SAA and

later transferred to a 90-day or permitted storage area

Both MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River maintain

Hazardous Waste Management Plans (HWMPs) that outline

the specific requirements for managing HM and HW The

HWMP identifies and provides guidance to implement all

regulatory HW management activities and is available to all


7-13

personnel who accumulate generate transport (including

on-installation transportation) treat store or dispose of

HW

Contractors are responsible for

the management of all HM and

the ultimate disposition of any

HW generated aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune during a contract

performance period The ROICC

or Contract Representative will

contact Environmental

personnel who will provide

additional guidance and

oversight to verify compliance

with applicable Federal State

and local laws governing the generation handling and

disposal of HM HW UW used oil petroleum-

contaminated materials RCRA-regulated HW and nonndash

RCRA-regulated waste

Depending on the type of project contractors may be

required to submit a site-specific HWMP to the ROICC or

the Contract Representative prior to beginning work

Additionally the Contracting Officer may require a

Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log and

corresponding SDSs for all materials to be used during the

execution of the contract EMDEAD will use the SDSs to

help contractors establish their Hazardous Material Storage

and SAAs

Contractors may be required to submit a Hazardous Waste Management Plan to the ROICC or the Contract Representative prior to beginning work


7-14

73 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

REQUIREMENTS

If a project uses HM

Reducereuserecycle when possible meet contract

requirements for recycling

Segregate incompatible

materials Consult the SDS

or material manufacturers

with questions about a

materialrsquos compatibility

Some examples of

incompatible materials

likely to be used by

contractors are

Corrosives (eg batteries stripping and cleaning

compounds containing acids or bases) and

Flammables (eg fuels oils paints and

adhesives)

Corrosives and Oxidizers (eg peroxide

perchlorates sodium hypochloritebleach or

calcium hypochlorite)

Oxidizers and Flammables

All compatible materials should be segregated and

stored within designated storage lockers or cabinets

(ie flammable materials should be stored in

designated flammable storage lockers or cabinets

and corrosives should be stored in designated

corrosives storage lockers or cabinets)




7-15

Do not store large quantities of materials Keep on

hand only what can be used

Maintain an inventory of all HM maintained onsite

with adequate controls in place to prevent

unauthorized access

Do not dump any HM into floor drains sinks oil-

water separators (OWSs) or storm drains or onto the

ground

Store containers that

hold 55 gallons or more

(including in-use electrical

generators and portable

equipment) in proper

secondary containment

Permanent secondary

containment must be

inspected weekly temporary

secondary containment must

be inspected daily all

inspections and drainage of

stormwater from secondary

containment must be documented

Maintain SDSs and appropriate spill controlcleanup

materials onsite at all times

Provide HM storage and usage information for

regulatory reporting to the appropriate

environmental office upon request

Stop work immediately if a project unearths any

unknown HM (eg munitions and explosives of

Stop work immediately if a project unearths a hazardous material (such as MECDMMUXO) and report the situation to the ROICC or Contract Representative


7-16

concern [MEC] discarded military munitions

[DMM] or unexploded ordnance [UXO]) and

immediately report the situation to the ROICC or


Do not leave HM (or HW) onsite once the contract is

completed Remove it from the installation or make

arrangements through the ROICC or Contract

Representative to contact RCRS or EAD for turn-in

procedures upon completion of the contract

74 UNIVERSAL WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

The NCDEQ allows thermostats obsolete agricultural

pesticides lamps and certain types of batteries to be

managed as UW UW has less stringent requirements for

storage transport and collection but it must still comply

with full HW requirements for final recycling treatment or

disposal Federal UW requirements are outlined in 40 CFR

273 Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative

regarding any additional direction or questions on the

handling of UW

All UW must be properly containerized stored and labeled

when the waste is first generated Containersareas for

accumulating UW must be labeled as follows

Words UNIVERSAL WASTE



which is available from EMD (eg batteries


7-17

fluorescent lamps pesticides mercury-containing

equipment)

Accumulation Start Date (ASD) The ASD must be

marked on the subject container as soon as the UW

item is placed in the container Storage of UW cannot

exceed 365 days

Number of Containers The number of containers

marked reflects the total number of containers

disposed of within the current document (ie 1 of 1

etc)

Contractors who need UW accumulation areas should

contact the ROICC or Contract Representative who will

contact RCRS or EAD personnel to help contractors

establish an accumulation area for UW Key points for this

process


contractor generating the waste and must be closed

at all times except when waste is being adding

Per installation policy UW containersareas must be

inspected weekly using the Weekly Hazardous Waste

(HW) Site Inspection Form included as Attachment

7-1 and Attachment 7-2 Written records noting

discrepancies and corrective actions must be

maintained onsite for 3 years Copies of inspection

reports should be provided to the ROICC or Contract

Representative

When the ASD reaches 1 year or when the container

is full the waste generator has 72 hours (3 days) to

arrange for the transportation of the UW to an RCRA


the FSC


7-18

Part B permitted storage area Contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative to coordinate the removal of

the UW when the container is full or the contract is

finished

75 HAZARDOUS WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

The appropriate environmental

office must be notified before any

HW is generated on projects

managed by the ROICC or the

Facilities Support Contracts (FSC)

Have the ROICC or Contract

Representative contact RCRS or

EAD with questions regarding

whether or not a waste meets the

definition of HW Installation

personnel must approve all

regulated waste and HW storage locations

If a project generates HW

Minimize generation through waste minimization

and P2 techniques


RCRS or EAD with questions regarding how to

manage the waste Do not mix waste types (eg used

oil rags and solvent rags)


RCRS or EAD for turn-in procedures as wastes are


the FSC


7-19

generated to determine if waste can be disposed of

on the installation

Do not dump any HW into floor drains sinks OWSs

or storm drains or onto the ground Do not place HW

into generalmunicipal trash dumpsters

Ensure that HW drums are properly labeled and lids

are secured (wrench tight)

Ensure that SAAs are managed properly and storage

limits are not exceeded have the ROICC or Contract

Representative consult RCRS or EAD prior to

creating a new SAA

751 Storage

All HW must be properly containerized stored and labeled

at the time the waste is first generated HW must be stored

in containers that meet applicable DOT specifications HW

labels as required by the EPA and the NCDEQ must contain

the following information

Words HAZARDOUS WASTE



provided by RCRS or EAD

ASD For HW accumulated in an SAA the ASD will

be affixed once the container is filled or at the 1-year

anniversary whichever comes first

Number of Containers Reflects the total number of

containers (e g 1 of 1 etc)


7-20

Any HW generated by contractors must be stored in an SAA

Contractors who need an SAA should contact the ROICC or

Contract Representative who will contact RCRS or EAD

personnel to help the contractor establish each SAA A

summary of procedures follows

The HW generator may accumulate as much as 55

gallons of a specific HW stream (or up to one quart

of acute HW) in a container at or near the point of

generation


contractor generating the waste and must be kept

closed (wrench tight) at all times except when waste

is being added

HW containers must be inspected weekly using the

Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site Inspection

Form included as Attachment 7-1 and Attachment

7-2 Written records noting discrepancies and

corrective actions must be maintained for a period of

3 years Copies of inspection reports should be

provided to the ROICC or Contract Representative

The generating contractor must monitor the level of

waste in the SAA container and contact the ROICC

or Contract Representative to coordinate disposal or

determine if the contractor can turn in the HW to

RCRS or EAD before the container is full If the

SAA container becomes full the generating

contractor has 72 hours (3 days) to arrange for the

transport of the HW to an RCRA Part B permitted


7-21

storage area Storage of HW in an SAA should not

exceed 365 days even if the container is not full


All disposal of HW generated by contractors must be

coordinated with the installation HW and UW generated

aboard MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River must be

transported off the installation by a permitted HW

transporter and must include a Uniform Hazardous Waste

Manifest form (EPA Form 8700-22) or an equivalent

approved manifest The following procedures must be

followed for disposal of HW

Use the MCB Camp Lejeune or MCAS New River

EPA identification number for disposal of all

contractor-generated HW

HW may only be transported by authorized

personnel or permitted companies Prior to

transportation offsite the HW

generator must ensure that all

DOT requirements for labeling

marking placarding and

containerizing are met The HW

generator must also ensure that

the transporter has obtained the

installationrsquos EPA identification

number for the transportation of

HW and that an appropriate

waste manifest accompanies

each shipment

Only personnel from EMD who have been designated in writing by the MCB Camp Lejeune Commanding General can sign the hazardous waste manifest


7-22

The HW manifest can only be signed by personnel

from the installation who have been designated in

writing by the CG The ROICC or Contract

Representative should contact RCRS or EAD about

manifesting regulated and non-regulated wastes

offsite Under NO circumstances can a contractor

ROICC or Contract Representative sign a HW

manifest or use another EPA identification number

for wastes generated at the installation

All HW must be submitted to a permitted TSD

facility HW generators must certify that the facility

receiving the waste employs the most practical and

current treatment storage or disposal methods for

minimizing present and future threats to human

health and the environment

76 NONndashRCRA-REGULATED WASTE

REQUIREMENTS

Non-RCRA-regulated wastes include used oil (when

recycled) non-terne (tin and lead alloy) plated oil filters (not

mixed with listed waste) CFC refrigerants (from totally

enclosed equipment) certain wastes containing

Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) asbestos and batteries not

managed as UW


Used motor oil itself is not regulated as HW in North

Carolina if it is recycled or burned for energy recovery If

used oil is not recycled the generator must determine prior

to disposal whether it is HW Used oil must be collected in


7-23

drums or another approved container marked ldquoUsed Oilrdquo If

the used oil storage container has a volume of 55 gallons or

more it must be stored in secondary containment

Do not dump used oil into drains sinks or trash

containers or onto the ground

Do not store used oil in open buckets or drip pans

damaged or rusted containers or containers that

cannot be fully closed

Do not mix used oil with other waste materials

Terne plated oil filters contain an alloy of tin and lead They

are considered a hazardous waste due to their lead content

and are typically located on industrial and heavy duty

vehicles and equipment All other used oil filters are not

regulated as HW in North Carolina as long as they are not

mixed with listed HW To qualify for this exclusion the

following conditions must be met

Used oil filters must be gravity hot-drained by

puncturing the filter anti-drain back valve or filter

dome and hot draining into a ldquoUsed Oilrdquo storage

drum ldquoHot-drainedrdquo means that the oil filter is

drained at a temperature that approximates the

temperature at which the engine operates

Any incidental spillage that occurs must be cleaned

up with a dry sweep rags or ldquoabsorbent mattingrdquo

Drained used oil filters must be collected in a

container that is in good condition and is labeled with

the words ldquoDrained Used Oil Filtersrdquo


7-24

No other waste streams should be deposited in

containers collecting used oil filters for disposal

Coordinate with the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if the drained used oil

filters can be given to RCRS or EAD

762 Used Antifreeze

Antifreeze is composed of regulated chemicals including

ethylene glycol and propylene glycol and during typical use

may become contaminated with traces of fuel or metal

particles (ie lead cadmium or chromium) It may also

become HW if it has been mixed with other wastes such as

gasoline or solvents Additional characterization may be

required to determine whether or not used antifreeze is HW

Used antifreeze that is not recycled may be regulated as HW

if the results from the Toxic Characteristics Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) indicate metal contents that meet or

exceed RCRA thresholds

The State of North Carolina does not regulate used antifreeze

as HW as long as it is recycled by reuse distillation

filtration or ion exchange Used antifreeze must be stored in

closed containers on an impermeable concrete surface with

adequate spill controls (secondary containment appropriate

stocked spill kits etc) Contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if used antifreeze can be given

to RCRS or EAD


7-25

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily

Rags

Petroleum-contaminated wipes and oily rags are to be

managed as non-regulated waste Follow these procedures

Store oil-contaminated wipes and oily rags in metal

containers because of their

flammabilitycombustibility and to protect them

from the weather

Do not throw these non-regulated waste items into

solid waste dumpsters or garbage cans

Contact the ROICC or Contract Representative to

determine if petroleum-contaminated wipes and oily

rags can be given to RCRS or EAD


Used electronic equipment may contain lead solder or PCB

oils (eg light ballast) Turn in these items as they are

generated Have the ROICC or Contract Representative

contact RCRS or EAD for proper handling andor turn-in

procedures

765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated

as Universal Waste)

Store compatible batteries together (ie lithium

batteries should be stored with other lithium

batteries)


7-26

Store batteries off the ground to prevent them from

coming into contact with water

Store lead-acid batteries away from an open flame

Place rechargeable batteries in plastic bags before

storing them with other rechargeable batteries

Do not dispose of batteries unless authorized


RCRS or EAD for proper handling andor turn-in

procedures


7-27

Attachment 7-1


Inspection Form

MCB Camp Lejeune


7-28



7-29

MCB Camp Lejeune Weekly Hazardous Waste (HW) Site

Inspection

Universal Waste (UW)Satellite Accumulation Area (SAA)

Building Numberlocation of HW Site _______________

Unit Evaluated _____________________________

Evaluation Date _______________

Evaluation By (Site Manager) __________________

Evaluation Time _______________



Action 1 Is housekeeping maintained

in acceptable manner

2 Is any HW present at the

site

3 Are HW containers properly

marked

4 Are HW containers in

serviceable condition

5 Are container bungs caps

and openings properly secured

6 Is a unit spill planactivation

prominently posted

7 Is 911 spill response sign

posted

8 Are Danger-Unauthorized

Personnel Keep Out signs

posted so they may be seen

from any approach

9 Are No Smoking signs

posted


7-30



Action 10 Does the site have


system or two-man rule in

effect If the two-man rule is

implemented is a sign posted

with the legend Two-Man

Rule in Effect

11 Are properly charged fire

extinguishers as well as eye

wash stations present and

inspected at least monthly

12 Is the post indicator valve in

good operating condition and

secured in the closed position

and are there any structural

defects such as cracked

concrete

13 Is the proper spill response

equipment readily available

14 Is the site designated and

recognizable and is the EMD

Authorization posted within the

site as to be visible to personnel

placing waste into the

container (SAA site only)

15 Are all HWs properly

segregated and stored in the

designated site

16 Are any hazardous materials

being stored in the Satellite

Accumulation Area or lt 90-day

storage site


7-31

Attachment 7-2


Inspection Form

MCAS New River


7-32



7-33

Weekly Hazardous Waste Storage

Area Inspection Form

Squadron _____________ Inspector ___________________

Date ___________ Signature ________________


NA

1 Is the HW container located

at or near the point of

generation

2 Is the HW container DOT

approved

3 Is the HW container marked

correctly with the words

ldquoHazardous Wasterdquo correct

noun name of contents

NSNrsquoS and unit designator

4 Is the HW container closed

and wrench tight when no one

is adding to the container

5 If a funnel is left in place

does that funnel have a plug or

ball valve to be considered

closed or secured

6 Is the HW container in good

condition (No excessive rust

or dents in critical areas seals

are in place no bulging or

collapsing and no signs of

spillage or leakage)

7 Is the Spill Contingency

Plan posted and in plain view

8 Is the SAA Site approval

letter from EAD posted at the

SAA site

9 Is the SAA Site limited to

Authorized Personnel only


7-34


NA

10 Is the HW container below

the proper ullage for a liquid

to expand (4 inches from the

top)

11 Are SAA HW containers

moved to the 90-Day Site

within 72 hours when filled to

the proper ullage or weight

capacity of the container


palletized waste streams

correctly marked with

ldquoHazardous Wasterdquo or

ldquoUniversal Wasterdquo noun

name of the waste NSN and

unit designator on the pallet or

wall of the waste structure


HW containers turned in prior

to the 90th day after the ASD

14 Are adequate spill

response supplies readily

available for use in case of

spill or leakage

15 Is there a means of


between storage facilities and

working spaces

16 Is the SAA site or 90-Day

Site in a good state of police


7-35


7-36



8-1

80 ASBESTOS

Asbestos was widely used in many products (especially

building parts) prior to 1990 for its fire resistance strength

and affordability However exposure to friable asbestos can

lead to lung diseases including cancer Contractors working

aboard the installation must follow all Federal State and

local regulationsspecifications for the proper notification

removal disposal and management of all asbestos-

containing materials (ACM) associated with demolition and

renovation projects

81 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS



asbestos and its management If you

have any questions or concerns

about the information in this section



EMD program if additional clarification is necessary

811 Key Definitions

Abatement Work performed to repair maintain

remove isolate or encapsulate ACM

Asbestos Asbestos is the generic term for a group of

naturally occurring fibrous silicate minerals

including those that typically exhibit high tensile


this section


this section


8-2

strength flexibility and resistance to thermal

chemical and electrical conditions Asbestos was

commonly used in installed products such as roofing

shingles floor tiles cement pipe and sheeting

roofing felts insulation ceiling tiles fire-resistant

drywall and acoustical products

Asbestos-Containing Material Any material

containing more than 1 percent asbestos per 29 CFR

19261101

Category I Non-friable ACM Asbestos-containing

packings gaskets resilient floor covering and

asphalt roofing products containing more than 1

percent asbestos per 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

Category II Non-friable ACM Any material

excluding Category I non-friable ACM containing

more than 1 percent asbestos that when dry cannot

be crumbled pulverized or reduced to powder by

hand pressure per 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

Demolition The wrecking or removal of any load-

bearing walls or structure with any related handling

operations

Friable Any ACM that when dry can be crumbled

pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure

(may include damaged ACM that was previously

identified as non-friable) per 40 CFR 763

Glove Bag A sealed compartment with attached

inner gloves that is used for handling ACM Glove

bags provide a small work area enclosure typically

used for small-scale asbestos stripping operations


8-3

Presumed Asbestos-Containing Material

(PACM) Thermal system insulation (TSI) and

surfacing material found in buildings constructed no

later than 1980 per 29 CFR 19261101

Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material

(RACM) Includes friable ACM Category I non-

friable ACM that has become friable Category I

non-friable ACM that has been sanded ground cut

etc and Category II non-friable ACM that has a high

probability of becoming crumbled pulverized or

reduced to powder during demolition or renovation


Removal Stripping chipping sanding sawing

drilling scraping sucking and other methods of

separating material from its installed location in a

building

Renovation Altering a facility or its components in

any way including stripping or removal of RACM


812 Key Concepts

Demolition Notification North Carolina law

requires notification for all demolition regardless of

whether asbestos is present 10 working days prior to

starting demolition

Disposal ACM waste can be accepted at the MCB

Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill Work with the

ROICC or Contract Representative to coordinate the

disposal through the MCB Camp Lejeune Sanitary


8-4

Landfill Asbestos waste is only accepted on

Mondays through Thursdays from 0700 to 1000

Removal Requirements Permits for asbestos

removal or demolition must be obtained when the

ACM present exceeds 260 linear feet 160 square

feet or 35 cubic feet Additionally proper work

practice procedures must be followed during

demolition or renovation operations

Renovation Notification If ACM is present within

a structure North Carolina law requires notification

of renovation 10 working days prior to starting

renovation


Contractor practices associated with asbestos management





HW transportation

Parts replacement


include soil contamination degradation of water quality and

air quality and the potential exposure of installation

occupants


8-5




regarding ACM which include but may not be limited to the

following

Asbestos General Standard 29 CFR 19101001 ndash

Asbestos Applies to all occupational exposures to

asbestos in all industries covered by the

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA)

Asbestos Hazard and Emergency Response Act

(AHERA) 1986 AHERA was written primarily to

provide officials in schools grades K-12 with rules

and guidance for the management of ACM

Asbestos School Hazard Abatement

Reauthorization Act 1992 This act extended

AHERA regulations to cover public and commercial

buildings

National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air

Pollutants (NESHAP) Subpart A General

Provisions and 40 CFR 61 ndash Subpart M ndash

National Emission Standard for Asbestos

Includes standards for asbestos demolition

renovation and disposal and administrative

requirements





8-6

that routinely affect facilities operations to protect

workers building occupants and the environment

Naval Facilities Guide Specifications and

Engineering Control of Asbestos Materials

Covers the requirements for safety procedures and

requirements for the demolition removal

encapsulation enclosure repair and disposal of

ACM

North Carolina Asbestos Hazard Management

Program NC General Statutes Chapter 130A

Article 19 10A NCAC 41C0601ndash0608 and 0611

Incorporates 40 CFR 763 and 29 CFR 19261101 by

reference and outlines criteria for asbestos exposures

in public areas accreditation of persons conducting

asbestos management activities and asbestos

permitting and fee requirements

Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

Asbestos 29 CFR 19261101 Regulates asbestos in

the construction demolition alteration repair

maintenance or renovation of structures that contain

asbestos

83 RESPONSIBILITIES BEFORE A


PROJECT

Prior to starting a demolition or renovation project

contractors must



8-7

Determine whether ACM PACM andor RACM are

present in the buildings involved in the project

Complete the necessary notifications to the State of

North Carolina and obtain any necessary permits for

the removal of ACM PACM andor RACM

Understand what actions to

take if ACM PACM andor

RACM are unexpectedly

encountered during project

execution

Remove all non-friable and

friable ACM in accordance

with all Federal State and

local regulations prior to

demolition activities

Know how to properly

dispose of ACM and

provide any waste disposal

manifests generated for disposal


Contract documents will identify

the presence of known ACM

PACM and RACM Contact the


with questions regarding the

presence of these materials as

identified in the contract

documents An inspection conducted by a Health Hazards

Form DHHS 3768 must be posted onsite during all permitted projects

A demolition renovation notification form DHHS 3768 must be submitted to the NC HHCU



8-8

Control Unit (HHCU)-licensed asbestos inspector may be

necessary to confirm the location and quantities of any

ACM PACM andor RACM and determine if any

previously unidentified materials are present

832 Notification

To maintain accurate files and

records the ROICC or Contract

Representative is required to notify

the Asbestos Program Manager who

is part of the Installations and

Environment Department of all

work involving asbestos removals

including glove bag projects

The North Carolina Department of

Health and Human Services (DHHS)

Form 3768 Asbestos Permit

Application and Notification for

Demolition and Renovation must be submitted to the North

Carolina HHCU 10 working days in advance of demolition

activities regardless of whether asbestos is present This

form must be posted onsite during the entire duration of the

project Have the ROICC or Contract Representative contact

the Asbestos Program Manager with questions or concerns

about requirements for notification of demolition or

renovation

833 Removal

Any ACM PACM andor RACM present must be removed

before the area is disturbed during renovation or demolition

A demolition renovation notification form DHHS 3768 must be submitted to the NC HHCU 10 working days before demolition activities regardless of whether asbestos

is present


8-9

activities (except in certain rare instances) Certification and

handling requirements for asbestos removal are provided in

10A NCAC 41C and the Asbestos NESHAP Refer to these

regulations for detailed requirements

834 Training

North Carolina regulations require that all persons who

perform asbestos management activities in the State of North

Carolina must be accredited by the North Carolina HHCU

under the appropriate accreditation category (ie Building

Inspector Project Supervisor andor Abatement Worker)

Training documentation should be available upon request

84 RESPONSIBILITIES DURING A


PROJECT

North Carolina regulations require that DHHS Form 3768

Asbestos Permit Application and Notification for Demolition

and Renovation be acquired by the contractor and posted

onsite during all permitted projects Contractors must post

this form when the project will remove the following at least

260 linear feet 160 square feet or 35 cubic feet of RACM

or asbestos that might become regulated as a result of

handling The form must also be posted for nonscheduled

asbestos removal that will exceed these numbers in a

calendar year

During a renovation or demolition project if the contractor

suspects the presence of additional ACM (other than the

materials identified in contract documents) the contractor


8-10

must immediately report the suspected area to the ROICC or

Contract Representative Before proceeding the facility

must be inspected by an asbestos inspector licensed by the

North Carolina HHCU The individual performing the

asbestos survey will coordinate with the ROICC or Contract

Representative throughout the

process A legible copy of the

building inspection report must

be provided to the North

Carolina HHCU prior to each

demolition and upon request for

renovations a building

inspection report will be

acceptable only if the inspection

was performed during the 3

years prior to the demolition A

copy of the report should also be

forwarded to the Asbestos

Program Manager

For specific work procedures and requirements for glove bag

projects refer to 29 CFR 19261101

85 DISPOSAL OF ACM WASTE

Contractors can dispose of ACM waste at the MCB Camp

Lejeune Sanitary Landfill after first coordinating with the

MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill office through the ROICC or

Contract Representative The contractor must provide the

MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill with Form DHHS 3787

North Carolina Health Hazards Control Unitrsquos Asbestos

During a renovation or demolition project a contractor who suspects additional ACM is present must immediately report the suspected area to the ROICC or Contract Representative


8-11

Waste Shipment Record The contractor must submit this

form to the North Carolina HHCU for all permitted

asbestos removal projects


8-12



9-1

90 LEAD-BASED PAINT

Lead was used in paint for its color and water-resistant

properties until it was banned in 1978 for its highly toxic

properties that may cause a range of health problems

especially in young children Improper removal of lead-

based paint (LBP) may result in paint chips and dust which

may contaminate a structure inside and out The North

Carolina DHHS regulations require any person who

performs an inspection risk assessment or abatement to be

certified North Carolina DHHS also requires a person to

obtain a permit for conducting an abatement of a child-

occupied facility or target housing



with LBP activities If you have any questions or concerns



appropriate Environmental Department or Safety

Representative if additional clarification is necessary

911 Key Definitions

Abatement The permanent removal or elimination

of all LBP hazards

Demolition The removal of any load-bearing walls

or structure


9-2

Inspection A surface-by-surface investigation to

determine the presence of LBP and a report

explaining the results of the investigation

Lead-Based Paint Surface coatings that contain

lead in amounts equal to or in excess of 10 milligram

per square centimeter as measured by X-ray

fluorescence (XRF) or laboratory analysis or more

than 05 percent by weight per 40 CFR 745

Lead-Containing Paint Surface coatings that

contain lead in any amount greater than the

laboratory reporting limit but less than 10 milligram

per square centimeter or less than 05 percent by

weight per 29 CFR 192662 and 29 CFR 19101025

(also contained in 40 CFR 745 Subpart L and

adopted by the State of North Carolina under North

Carolina General Statute Chapter 130A Article

19A)

Renovation Alteration of a facility or its

components in any way




age of 6 lives there) and residential dwellings where

the living areas are not separated from the sleeping

areas (efficiencies studio apartments dormitories

etc)


9-3

912 Key Concepts

Disposal Analysis is required to determine proper

disposal of waste (non-hazardous or hazardous) A

Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

analysis must be conducted to determine whether

lead levels have exceeded 5 parts per million (ppm)

which is the RCRA threshold for HW determination

LBP Survey A LBP survey is required prior to

disturbing painted surfaces to determine whether the

paint meets the criteria of lead containing over 10

milligram per square centimeter or over 05 percent

by weight

Training LBP training requirements set forth by the

OSHA must be followed by all personnel involved in

all LBP removal activities MCB Camp Lejeune

Base Safety tracks this training for contract staff as

the Safety Office houses the Lead Program Manager


Contractor practices associated with LBP include the

following


HW transportation

Paint removal


include the potential degradation of soil water and air


9-4

environments and the potential exposure of installation

occupants



of and adhere to all applicable Federal State and local

regulations and requirements regarding LBP activities





that routinely impact facilities operations in order to

protect workers building occupants and the

environment


NC General Statutes Chapter 130A Article 19A

Section 130A-45301 through 45311 Requires a

person who performs an inspection risk assessment

abatement or abatement design work in a child-

occupied facility (daycare center pre-school etc) or

housing built before 1978 to be certified and

establishes the requirements for certification

including the oversight of required training It also

requires a person who conducts an abatement of a

child-occupied facility or target housing to obtain a

permit for the abatement establishes work practice

standards for LBP abatement activities and has

adopted requirements included in 40 CFR Part 745

Subpart L and 40 CFR Part 745 Subpart D


9-5


for Renovation Repair and Painting (RRP) 10A

NCAC 41C0900 Common renovation activities

may create hazardous lead dust and chips by

disturbing LBP which may be harmful to adults and

children This article requires that dust sampling

technicians firms and individuals performing

renovation repair and painting projects for

compensation that disturb LBP in housing and child-

occupied facilities built before 1978 be certified and

follow specific work practices to prevent lead

contamination Child-occupied facilities include but

are not limited to child care facilities and schools

(with children under the age of 6) that were built

before 1978

10A NCAC 41C0800 Lead-Based Paint Hazard

Management Program Requires (1) all individuals

and firms involved in LBP activities to be certified

and (2) all LBP activities to be carried out in

accordance with 40 CFR 745

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction Contains the OSHA requirements for

construction activities where workers may come into

contact with lead

40 CFR Part 745 Lead-Based Paint Poisoning

Prevention in Certain Residential Structures

Ensures that (1) LBP abatement professionals

including workers supervisors inspectors risk

assessors and project designers are well trained in

conducting LBP activities and (2) inspections for the


9-6

identification of LBP risk assessments for the

evaluation of LBP hazards and abatements for the

permanent elimination of LBP hazards are conducted

safely effectively and reliably by requiring

certification of professionals

93 RESPONSIBILITIES BEFORE

RENOVATION OR DEMOLITION

Ordinary renovation and

maintenance activities may

create dust that contains lead but

following lead-safe work

practices may help mitigate or

prevent lead hazards The North

Carolina RRP Program (10A

NCAC 41C0900) mandates that contractors property

managers and others working for compensation in homes

and child-occupied facilities built before 1978 be trained in

and use lead-safe work practices In addition it mandates

that contractors provide the owner and occupants with The

Lead-Safe Certified Guide to Renovate Right information

pamphlet which is found at the following website

httpepipublichealthncgovleadpdfRenovateRightpdf

Individuals must be certified by the State of North Carolina

to perform RRP activities for compensation in housing and

child-occupied facilities built before 1978 A firm engaged

in regulated renovation activities (such as RRP that disturbs

more than 6 square feet of interior painted surfaces or 20

square feet of exterior painted surfaces or dust sampling

after renovation) must be a certified renovation firm

Buildings constructed prior to 1978 are assumed to contain LBP


9-7

To address the hazards associated with the improper

abatement or removal of LBP any person who performs an

inspection risk assessment abatement or abatement design

work in a child-occupied facility (child development centers

preschools etc) or housing built before 1978 must be

certified by the State of North Carolina Any person who

conducts an abatement of a child-occupied facility or target

housing must also obtain a permit for the abatement

Individuals conducting LBP abatement activities in North

Carolina such as inspections risk assessments LBP hazards

abatement clearance testing or abatement project design in

housing and child-occupied facilities built before 1978 must

be certified by the State of North Carolina A firm engaged

in abatement activities must be a certified lead abatement

firm

Prior to any renovation or demolition aboard the installation

that involves the disturbance of painted surfaces a LBP

survey must be completed by an inspector certified in North

Carolina retained through the ROICC or Public Works

Division (PWD) Certain projects will use PWD staff to

conduct the sampling and other projects will use contracted

personnel Buildings constructed prior to 1978 are assumed

to contain LBP therefore no LBP survey is necessary The

LBP survey (through sampling and analysis) will determine

whether painted surfaces meet the criteria of LBP (lead

content equal to or greater than 10 milligram per square

centimeter as measured by XRF or lab analysis or 05

percent by weight) Naval Facilities Guide Specifications

and contract documents must be implemented for contracts

where LBP is to be abatedremoved prior to demolition or

renovation


9-8

If the area is to be reoccupied final clearance must be

conducted including a visual inspection and sample

collection prior to reoccupation Clearance on all projects

involving abatement must be provided by a certified risk

assessor or a certified LBP inspector Clearance for RRP

projects may be conducted by a certified risk assessor

certified LBP inspector or certified dust sampling

technician

94 PERMITS

Contractors must obtain a North Carolina LBP Abatement

Permit from North Carolina DHHS when lead paint is

removed from targeted structures (child-occupied facilities

or housing built prior to 1978)

95 DISPOSAL

If the LBP survey determines

that LBP will be abated as part of

a renovation or demolition

project the contractor must take

analytical samples to determine

whether the waste material is

hazardous Usually a TCLP

sample is collected from a

ldquorepresentativerdquo sample of the

material removed The

laboratory conducting the sample analysis must be

accredited by the Environmental Lead Laboratory

Accreditation Program A list of these accredited labs is

available by contacting (703) 849-8888 or visiting




9-9

httpappsaihaorgqms_aihapublicpagesreportspublicSc

opeViewaspxProgramCode=37ampVersion=2

If the LBP is removed from the underlying building material

then the paint is the waste stream If the LBP is removed with

the building material then both materials are considered the

waste stream

If the lead content is below HW regulatory disposal levels

consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to determine

whether if the contract allows for the disposal of the material

in the MCB Camp Lejeune Sanitary Landfill Lead waste is

only accepted on Mondays through Thursdays from 0700 to

1000

If the abated LBP is above HW regulatory levels refer to

Section 70 of this guide for information on HW

management and disposal requirements

96 TRAINING

Before the project begins workers who are subject to lead

exposure during abatement or removal activities must be

trained according to the OSHA regulations in 29 CFR

192662 concerning lead exposure in construction and they

must receive all training and certification specified by

10A NCAC 41C0800 and 10A NCAC 41C0900 The

contractor is responsible for providing this training before

initiating any work aboard MCB Camp Lejeune


9-10



10-1

100 NATURAL RESOURCES

The installation has stewardship and recovery

responsibilities over the natural resources on the installation

These responsibilities are regulated under numerous laws

described in this section The installation ensures

compliance with these laws through an interdisciplinary

process of review and coordination of all activities occurring

on the installation

Contractors working on the installation are responsible for

complying with conditions and measures imposed on their

work as a result of this process these responsibilities include

preserving the natural resources within the project

boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work

restoring work sites to an equivalent or improved condition

after the work is complete and confining construction

activities to the limits of the work indicated or specified The

contractor is advised that the installation is subject to strict

compliance with Federal State and local wildlife laws and

regulations The contractor must not disturb wildlife (birds

nesting birds mammals reptiles amphibians and fish) or

the native habitat adjacent to the project area except when

indicated or specified

101 KEY DEFINITIONS

AND CONCEPTS



natural resources management If

you have any questions or concerns




10-2

about the information in this section or require assistance

regarding any wildlife matters (snakes nesting birds

nuisance wildlife etc) on the site or within the project area


will contact the Environmental Conservation Branch


Conservation The planned management use and

protection of natural resources to provide their

sustained use and continued benefit to present and

future generations

Ecosystem A dynamic natural complex of living

organisms interacting with each other and with their

associated nonliving environment

Habitat An area where a plant or animal species

lives grows and reproduces and the environment

that satisfies its life requirements

Natural Resource Soil water air plants and

animals according to the Natural Resources

Conservation Service

Endangered or Threatened Species Federally

listed taxon that is ldquoin danger of extinction

throughout all or a significant portion of its rangerdquo or

ldquolikely to become endangered within the foreseeable

future throughout all or a significant portion of its

rangerdquo

Riparian Buffer Vegetated area bordering a body

of water such as a stream lake or pond


10-3

Wetland Areas that are inundated or saturated by

surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration

sufficient to support and that under normal

circumstances do support a prevalence of vegetation

typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions

Wetlands generally include swamps marshes bogs

and similar areas per the EPA

1012 Key Concepts

Coastal Zone Management Act (CZMA) of 1972

Requires each installation to ensure that its

operations activities projects and programs

affecting the coastal zone in or on coastal lands or

waters are consistent with the federally approved

Coastal Zone Management Plan of the State

Ecosystem Management A goal-driven approach

to managing natural and cultural resources that

supports present and future mission requirements

preserves ecosystem integrity is at a scale

compatible with natural processes is cognizant of

natural processesrsquo time scales recognizes social and

economic viability within functioning ecosystems is

adaptable to complex changing requirements and is

realized through effective partnerships among

private local State tribal and Federal interests

Ecosystem management is a process that considers

the environment as a complex system functioning as

a whole not as a collection of parts and recognizes

that people and their social and economic needs are

a part of the whole


10-4

Integrated Natural Resources Management Plan

(INRMP) A planning document using ecosystem

management principles to direct the management

and conservation of installation natural resources

which includes all elements of natural resources

management applicable to the installation

National Environmental Policy Act Requires


the environmental impacts of projects prior to

implementation All projects that support military

training minor and major military construction

maintenance and natural resources management

actions are reviewed for potential environmental

impacts Contractors must obtain and review any

NEPA documentation associated with their projects

All NEPA documentation can be obtained from the


Threatened and Endangered Species Specific

requirements regarding protected areas on the

installation apply to contractor activities Eight

federally threatened and endangered species are

currently managed at MCB Camp Lejeune ndash red-

cockaded woodpecker green sea turtle loggerhead

sea turtle rough-leaved loosestrife seabeach

amaranth piping plover red knot and American

alligator In addition as of March 25 2015 the US

Fish and Wildlife Service lists six species as

threatened and nine as endangered for Onslow

County NC Consult the ROICC or Contract

Representative to determine if there are any project


10-5

requirements regarding threatened or endangered

species

Timber Contractors must ensure that the ROICC or

Contract Representative notify the EMDrsquos Forest

Management Program prior to conducting site work

Timber will not be released to contractors without the

approval of the Forest Management Program

Waters of the United States All waters that are

currently used were used in the past or may be

susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce

interstate waters the territorial seas impoundments

tributaries adjacent waters including wetlands

ponds lakes oxbows and impoundments waters

determined to have a significant nexus Carolina

bays Pocosins and waters within the 100-year

floodplain or within 4000 feet of the high tide line

or ordinary high water mark per 33 USC 1251 et

seq Section 3283

Wetlands Any work in installation waters or

wetlands requires a permit prior to the start of an

activity


Contractor practices associated with natural resources



Fish stocking

Habitat management


10-6

Land clearing




Timber management



include air emissions sedimentation eutrophication of

surface waters (addition of nutrients that stimulate aquatic

plant growth and depletes oxygen) degradation of habitat

impacts to marine mammals damage to commercial and

noncommercial timber impacts to endangered species and

natural resources and degradation of soil quality




regarding natural resources which include but may not be


Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act of 1940 as

Amended (16 USC 688 et seq) Prohibits taking

possessing and transporting bald eagles and golden

eagles and importing and exporting their parts nests

or eggs The definition of ldquotakerdquo includes pursue

shoot shoot at poison wound capture trap collect

molest or disturb


10-7

BO 509011A Protected Species Program Sets

forth regulations and establishes responsibilities to

ensure the conservation of threatened and

endangered species and species at risk aboard MCB

Camp Lejeune

BO 509012 Environmental Impact Review

Procedures Implements NEPA 1969 and NEPA

policy and guidance in Chapter 12 of MCO

P50902A


structure for regulating wastewater discharges and

placing fill materials into the waters of the United

States

CZMA of 1972 (16 USC 1451 et seq) Requires that

Federal actions affecting any landwater use or

coastal zone natural resource be implemented

consistent with the enforceable policies of an

approved State coastal management program

Requires concurrence from the State before taking an

action affecting the use of land water or natural

resources of the coastal zone

Endangered Species Act of 1973 (16 USC 1531 et

seq) Requires all Federal agencies to carry out

programs to conserve federally listed endangered

and threatened species of plants and wildlife

EO 11990 Protection of Wetlands 24 May 1977

Addresses Federal agency actions required to

identify and protect wetlands minimize the risk of

wetlands destruction or modification and preserve


10-8

and enhance the natural and beneficial values of

wetlands

EO 13186 Responsibilities of Federal Agencies to

Protect Migratory Birds 10 January 2001

Requires each Federal agency taking actions that

have or are likely to have a measurable negative

effect on migratory bird populations to develop and

implement a plan to promote the conservation of

migratory bird populations

Marine Mammal Protection Act of 1972

(MMPA) as Amended (16 USC 1361 et seq)

Mandates a moratorium on the killing capturing

harming and importing of marine mammals and

marine mammal products The MMPA also prohibits

the taking of any marine mammal including to

harass hunt capture collect or kill any marine

mammal including any of the following collection

of dead animals or their parts restraint or detention

of a marine mammal tagging a marine mammal the

negligent or intentional operation of an aircraft or

vessel or any other negligent or intentional act that

results in disturbing or molesting a marine mammal

Migratory Bird Treaty Act of 1918 as Amended

(16 USC 703 et seq) Protects migratory birds (listed

in 50 CFR 1013) and their nests and eggs and

establishes a permitting process for the taking of

migratory birds by establishing a Federal prohibition

to ldquopursue hunt take capture kill attempt to take

capture or kill possess offer for sale sell offer to

purchase purchase deliver for shipment ship cause


10-9

to be shipped deliver for transportation transport

cause to be transported carry or cause to be carried

by any means whatever receive for shipment

transportation or carriage or export at any time or

in any manner any migratory bird or any part nest

or egg of any such birdrdquo


Protection Manual Provides guidance and

instruction to installations to ensure the protection

conservation and management of watersheds

wetlands natural landscapes soils forests fish and

wildlife and other natural resources as vital USMC

assets

NEPA 1969 (42 USC 4321 et seq) Requires


the environmental impacts of projects before the

decisionmaker proceeds with the implementation

All projects that support military training major and

minor military construction maintenance and

natural resources management actions are reviewed

for potential environmental impacts

Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899 Prohibits the

excavation filling or alteration of the course

condition or capacity of any port harbor or channel

without prior approval from the Chief of Engineers

Sikes Act of 1960 as Amended (16 USC 670 et

seq) Requires military installations to manage

natural resources for multipurpose uses and public

access appropriate for those uses as well as ensuring

no net loss to training testing or other defined


10-10

missions of the installation through the development

and implementation of an INRMP

Neuse River Basin Riparian Buffer Rules (15A

NCAC 02B0233) Require a 50-foot riparian buffer

that is divided into two zones The 30 feet closest to

the water (Zone 1) must remain undisturbed The

outer 20 feet (Zone 2) may include managed

vegetation such as lawns or shrubbery The riparian

buffer rules also require diffuse flow of stormwater

runoff The buffers apply to intermittent streams

perennial streams lakes ponds estuaries and

modified natural streams that are depicted on the

most recent printed version of the soil survey map

prepared by the Natural Resources Conservation

Service or the 124000 scale quadrangle topographic

map prepared by the US Geologic Survey

103 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL

POLICY ACT

Staff specialists from various installation departments

participate in the NEPA process which coordinates the

review of projects and documents environmental impacts (or

lack thereof) for projects before implementation

The documentation of this review process occasionally

includes mandatory conditions affecting the design and

construction implementation of the project The

documentation when completed is provided to the action

proponent who is expected to provide it to the ROICC or



10-11

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to obtain or

review any NEPA documentation associated with the

project The documentation marks the end of the NEPA

review process it does not constitute approval for the

proponent of the action to implement the action Some

contracts may include stipulations from the NEPA document

that must be implemented prior to the onset of work to

prevent environmental impacts

and violations of Federal or State

rules and regulations

Stipulations could include

replacing monitoring wells if

damages occur from contractor

operations stopping work if

contamination is encountered

notification that a wetlands

permit is required seasonal

restrictions etc

104 TIMBER

Potential timber resources are identified during the NEPA

process The contractor is responsible for advising the

ROICC or Contract Representative to notify EMDrsquos Forest

Management Program prior to beginning site work

Additionally the ROICC or Contract Representative andor

contractor is required to notify the Forest Management

Program if the contract has been amended with

modifications to the site location

MCB Camp Lejeune manages its forest in accordance with

the installation INRMP The Forest Management Program

The contractor is responsible for advising the ROICC or Contract Representative to notify the Forest Management Program at (910) 451-7223 prior to beginning site work

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative to obtain or review any NEPA documentation associated with

the project


10-12

maintains first right of refusal for all timber products on

construction projects and will determine whether the

Government will harvest the timber or release it to the

contractor The Government retains exclusive rights to all

forest products on construction projects If the Government

elects to harvest the timber only merchantable timber will

be removed

Contractors must adhere to the following requirements when

performing site work that may

impact timber resources

Do not remove cut

deface injure or destroy

trees or shrubs without

authorization from the

ROICC or Contract

Representative

Do not fasten or attach

ropes cables or guy

wires to nearby trees for

anchorages without authorization from the ROICC

or Contract Representative (If these actions are

authorized the contractor is responsible for any

resultant damage)

Protect trees that are to remain in place and that may

be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged

by construction operations


approval use approved methods of excavation to

Protect existing trees that are to remain in place and that may be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged by construction operations


10-13

remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root

systems destroyed


approval remove trees and other landscape features

scarred or damaged by equipment operations and

replace with equivalent undamaged trees and

landscape features

Please refer to Section 120 for disposal information for

land-clearing debris

105 THREATENED AND ENDANGERED

SPECIES

With the exception of

improved roadways entry into

a threatened or endangered

species site or shorebird

nesting area marked with signs

andor white paint is prohibited

without written permission

from installation personnel BO

509011A lists threatened and

endangered species that may be

encountered at the installation

The following restrictions

apply on the installation unless

written permission is explicitly

provided

Work on Onslow Beach or Brownrsquos Island is not

permitted between April 1 and October 31 Traffic

Entry into a threatened or endangered species site or shorebird nesting area marked with signs andor white paint is prohibited without written permission from installation personnel

Entry into a threatened or endangered species site or shorebird nesting area marked with signs andor white paint is prohibited without written permission from installation

personnel


10-14

on the beaches should be limited to below the high

tide line

Vehicles and lighting are prohibited on the beaches

overnight between May 1 and October 31

Construction activities are prohibited within 1500

feet of a bald eaglersquos nest (JD MC and IF Training

area)

Cutting or damaging pine trees is not permitted

Altering hydrology through excavation ditching

etc is prohibited

Fish and wildlife must not be disturbed

Water flows may not be altered the native habitat

adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of

fish and wildlife may not be significantly disturbed

except as indicated or specified

106 WETLANDS

1061 Avoidance

In accordance with MCO

P50902A all facilities and

operational actions must

avoid to the maximum

degree feasible wetlands

destruction or degradation

regardless of the wetlands

size or legal necessity for a

permit Prior to the onset of

Contractors must incorporate avoidance and minimization measures to comply with the national policy to permit no overall net loss of wetlands


10-15

construction coordination with the Environmental

Conservation Branch of EMD should have taken place

during project design to ensure CWA permitting issues are

addressed by the contractor at the earliest opportunity

Contractors must incorporate avoidance and minimization

measures to comply with the national policy to permit no

overall net loss of wetlands as well as meeting concept

design criteria while incorporating avoidance and

minimization measures to protect wetlands streams and

waters of the United States Any proposed action that would

significantly affect wetlands must be coordinated with the

CG of MCB Camp Lejeune

The contractor must ensure that construction of all buildings

facilities and related amenities including earthwork

grading landscaping drainage stormwater management

parking lot and paved roadway sidewalks site excavation

sanitary sewer system extensions and domestic water

extensions avoids to the maximum degree feasible

wetlands destruction or degradation

Identified and mapped boundaries of the legally defined

wetlands on all USMC lands within the project area will be

distributed to the ROICC or Contract Representative for use

(if available) and included in all design products including

drawings plans and figures

1062 Permits

All unavoidable potential impacts to wetlands or waters of

the United States require prior coordination as described in

this section Failure to acquire written authorization for



10-16

impacts to wetlands andor

waters of the United States may

result in significant project

delays or design modifications

No discharge of fill material

mechanized land clearing or any

other activity is allowed in

jurisdictional wetlands or waters

of the United States without the

proper approvals The contractor

may be responsible for obtaining the following permits

(including pre-permit coordination preparation and

submission of all permit applications after review and

concurrence by the installation) and complying with all

regulations and requirements stipulated by the State of North

Carolina as conditions upon issuance of the permits

U S Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) Section

404 Permit (individual or applicable nationwide

permit) CWA of 1977 as Amended (Public Law 95-

217 33 U S C 1251 et seq)

North Carolina Division of Water Resources

(NCDWR) Section 401 Water Quality Certification

ndash (15A NCAC 02H) NCDEQ CWA of 1977 as

Amended (Public Law 95-217 33 U S C 1251 et

seq)

North Carolina Division of Coastal Management

(NCDCM) Federal Consistency Determination

(15A NCAC 07) NCDEQ CZMA of 1972 (16 USC

1451 et seq)


permits require


10-17

Two types of activities generally require a permit from the

USACE

Activities within navigable waters Activities such

as dredging constructing docks and bulkheads and

placing navigation aids

require review under

Section 10 of the Rivers

and Harbors Act of 1899

to ensure that they will

not cause an obstruction

to navigation

Activities in wetlands

and waters of the

United States

(regulated by Section

404 of the CWA of

1972) A major aspect of

the regulatory program

under Section 404 of the CWA is determining which

areas qualify for protection as wetlands Contractors

should contact the USACE the NCDWR or the

NCDCM if there is any question about whether

activities could impact wetlands streams or

protected buffers

Contractors working on the installation will not perform any

work in waters of the United States or wetlands without an

approved permit (even if the work is temporary) Examples

of temporary discharges include dewatering of dredged

material prior to final disposal and temporary fills for access

roadways cofferdams storage and work areas


temporary)


temporary)


10-18

1063 Impacts

Any disturbance to the soil or substrate (bottom material) of

a wetland or water body including a stream bed or protected

buffer is an impact and may adversely affect the hydrology

of an area Discharges of fill material generally include the

following without limitation

Placement of fill material that is necessary for the

construction of any structure or impoundment

requiring rock sand dirt or other material for its

construction site-development fills for recreational

industrial commercial residential and other uses

and causeways or road fills

Dams and dikes

Artificial islands

Property protection or reclamation devices such as

riprap groins seawalls breakwaters revetments

and beach nourishment

Levees

Fill for intake and outfall pipes and subaqueous

utility lines

Fill associated with the creation of ponds

Any other work involving the discharge of fill or

dredged material


10-19

1064 Mitigation

Any facility requirement that cannot be sited to avoid

wetlands must be designed to minimize wetlands

degradation and must include compensatory mitigation as

required by wetland regulatory agencies (USACE and

NCDWR) in all phases of project planning programming

and budgeting

The contractor may be required

to develop onsite mitigation if

appropriate consisting of

wetlandstreambuffer

restoration or creation for all

unavoidable wetland stream

and buffer impacts whenever

possible and feasible Use of

USMC lands and lands of other

entities may be permissible for

mitigation purposes for USMC

projects when consistent with

EPA and USACE guidelines or

permit provisions Land within

the project area suitable for

establishment of mitigation may be evaluated by the

contractor and used for mitigation where compatible with

mission requirements and approved by the CG Proposals for

permanent resource areas must be approved by the Assistant

Secretary of the Navy (Installations and Environment) or

hisher designee

The contractor may be required to develop onsite mitigation consisting of wetlandstream restoration or creation for all unavoidable wetland and stream impacts whenever possible

and feasible


10-20

Offsite mitigation is preferred and should be coordinated

through the North Carolina Division of Mitigation Services

or an approved private mitigation bank

107 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

Traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul

roads work areas structures foundations of temporary

structures stockpiles of excess or waste materials and other

signs of construction should be removed upon completion

of a contract or project Temporary roads parking areas and

similar temporarily used areas should be graded to conform

to surrounding contours and the area restored to the degree

practical to its state prior to any disturbing activities


11-1

110 STORMWATER

MCB Camp Lejeune is responsible for stormwater permits

associated with construction industrial or municipal

activities that discharge to outfalls leading to receiving

waters The most applicable permit for contractors is the

construction permit since the majority of the contractor

activities are affiliated with

constructionrenovation

However the contractor is also

responsible for adhering to the

requirements of the industrial and

municipal permits held by MCB

Camp Lejeune for all of the

contractor activities on the

installation In essence all

contractors for the installation

need to know and implement the

necessary measures to prevent stormwater runoff and

pollution runoff from land-disturbing activities (LDAs) and

associated construction permit requirements as well as

industrial and municipal activities The general requirements

for each area as they apply to contractors are discussed in

the following subsections



with stormwater If you have any questions or concerns




this section


this section


11-2


necessary


Best Management Practices Schedules of

activities prohibitions of practices maintenance

procedures and other management practices to

prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the

United States BMPs include structural and

nonstructural stormwater controls operation and

maintenance procedures treatment requirements

and practices to control site runoff (eg sediment

spillage or leaks sludge or waste disposal or

drainage from material storage) See the following

website for more information



Certificate of Stormwater Compliance A

document providing approval for development

activities that meet the requirements for coverage

under a stormwater general permit

Discharge (Pollutant) The addition of any pollutant

or combination of pollutants to waters of the United

States from any point source including but not

limited to any spilling leaking pumping pouring

emitting emptying or dumping of any pollutant this

excludes discharges in compliance with a National

Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)

permit


11-3

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Any

plan amended plan or revision to an approved plan

submitted to the North Carolina Division of Land

Resources or its delegated authority in accordance

with North Carolina General Statute 113A-57

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plans show the

devices and practices that are required to retain

sediment generated by the land-disturbing activity

within the boundaries of the tract during construction

and upon development of the tract Note that in North

Carolina the Erosion and Sedimentation Control

Plan and the NCG010000 Construction General

Permit are considered the Stormwater Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP or SPPP) for a

construction site See the following website for more

information



Land Disturbance Areas that are subject to

clearing excavating grading stockpiling and

placementremoval of earth material

Nonpoint Source Discharge All discharges from

stormwater runoff that cannot be attributed to a

discernible confined and discrete conveyance (See

also point source discharge below)

Point Source Discharge Any discernible confined

and discrete conveyance including but specifically

not limited to any pipe ditch channel tunnel

conduit well discrete fissure container rolling

stock or concentrated animal feeding operation from


11-4

which pollutants are or may be discharged to waters

of the State (See also nonpoint source discharge

above)

Stormwater (Runoff) The portion of precipitation

(rain andor snowmelt) that does not naturally

infiltrate into the ground or evaporate but flows via

overland flows channels or pipes into a defined

surface-water channel or stormwater system during

and immediately following a storm event As the

runoff flows over the land or impervious surfaces

(such as streets parking lots and building rooftops)

it accumulates sediment andor other pollutants that

could pollute receiving streams

Stormwater Associated with Construction

Activities The discharge of stormwater from

construction activities including clearing grading

and excavating that result in a land disturbance of

equal to or greater than 1 acre per 40 CFR 122

Stormwater Associated with Industrial Activities

The discharge from any conveyance that is used for

collecting and conveying stormwater and which is

directly related to manufacturing processing or raw

materials storage areas from an applicable industrial

plant or activity per 40 CFR 122

Stormwater Associated with Municipal Activities

The discharge of stormwater from municipal

activities including public works shops vehicle

maintenance shops and other municipal activities

with the potential to cause stormwater pollution


11-5

1112 Key Concepts

Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) In

December 2007 Section 438 of EISA was issued

This section requires that Federal facility projects

over 5000 square feet must ldquomaintain or restore to

the maximum extent technically feasible the

predevelopment hydrology of the property with

regard to temperature rate volume and duration of

flowrdquo In January 2010 the DoD Policy of

Implementing Section 438 of the EISA was issued

this document includes a flowchart with

implementation steps

Good Housekeeping Good housekeeping practices

refer to the maintenance of a clean and orderly

facility to prevent potential pollution sources from

coming into contact with stormwater The practices

include procedures to reduce the possibility of

mishandling materials or equipment Good

housekeeping practices benefit stormwater quality

and also provide for a clean safe place for employees

and clients Note that good housekeeping is one of

the six minimum control measures (MCMs) of the

MS4 permit requirements

Low Impact Development (LID) LID is a holistic

approach that incorporates site-specific ecosystem

and watershed-based considerations for planning and

design The goal of LID is to mimic a sitersquos

predevelopment hydrology by using design

techniques that infiltrate filter store evaporate and

detain runoff close to the source LID seeks to control


11-6

non-point source pollutants ldquonaturersquos wayrdquo through

the application of plant-soil-water mechanisms that

maintain and protect the ecological and biological

integrity of receiving waters and wetlands

National Pollution Discharge Elimination System

The national program for issuing modifying

revoking reissuing terminating monitoring and

enforcing permits The NPDES stormwater program

regulates stormwater discharges from three potential

stormwater sources as follows

o Construction Activities LDAs that disturb 1 or

more acres need an NPDES permit At a

minimum these permits require the development

of a site-specific Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan to address sediment controls during

construction and upon development of the tract

As previously noted the Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Plan and the NCG010000

Construction General Permit are considered the

SWPPP for a construction site in North Carolina

In the applicable areas of the installation a State

Stormwater Management Permit and coverage

under the Construction General Permit may be

required Note that construction site runoff

control is also one of the six MCMs of the

Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems (MS4)

permit requirements

Industrial Activities Owners and operators of

industrial facilities that fall into any of the 30

industrial sectors identified by EPA stormwater


11-7

regulations need an NPDES Phase I permit if

stormwater is discharged directly into surface

water (or MS4) The permit regulations specify

steps that facility operators must take prior to

becoming eligible for permit coverage and

actions that must be taken to continue coverage

under an existing permit These steps and actions

include but are not limited to effluent limits

monitoring inspection sampling reporting and

corrective action requirements

Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems

Owners and operators of MS4s need an NPDES

Phase II permit An MS4 is a system of pipes and

drainage ditches within an urbanized area used to

collect storm runoff and convey it to receiving

waters Polluted runoff is commonly transported

through MS4s from which it is often discharged

untreated into local waterbodies

Operational Requirements Equipment discharge

and material use requirements that apply to all

construction and industrial activities

Post-Construction Requirements The

management of stormwater generated on a stable

established site after the construction process is

complete The State Stormwater Management

Program sets forth requirements for post-

construction stormwater runoff control Note that

post construction is one of the six MCMs of the MS4

permit requirements


11-8

Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan A plan

required by permits provided under NPDES that

provides guidance to prevent stormwater pollution

from construction industrial or municipal activities

Note that the terminology for this plan (and

associated acronym) varies somewhat from State to

State


Contractor practices associated with stormwater include the

following


Channel dredging

Composting




HM storage

Land clearing

Laundry

Landscaping


Pesticideherbicide management and application



11-9


Sewers



Stormwater collectionconveyance

Surface washing

Vehicle parking

Wash rack

Other activities that contractors could be involved in that

may cause stormwater pollution include

Grounds maintenance (herbicide pesticides

fertilizer etc)

Outdoor material storage

Buildingroof repairs

Industrial activities


include degradation of water quality and damage to public

and private property due to flooding




regarding potential stormwater contamination which

include but may not be limited to


11-10


structure for regulating discharges of pollutants into

the waters of the United States The CWA establishes

that no oil or hazardous substances should be

discharged into or upon the navigable waters of the

United States or adjoining shorelines which may

affect natural resources under the management of the

United States through the following goals (1)

eliminate the introduction of pollutants into waters of

the United States and (2) develop water quality

which protects and propagates fish shellfish and

wildlife and provides for recreation in and on the

water

40 CFR 122 National Pollutant Discharge

Elimination System Requires industrial

construction and municipal stormwater permits for

the discharge of pollutants from any point source into

waters of the United States

15A NCAC Chapter 4 Requires all persons

conducting a land-disturbing activity to take all

reasonable measures to protect all public and private

property from damage caused by the release of

sediments from the activity The primary tool used to

accomplish the objective is the development of an

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan

Identify critical areas

Limit exposure areas

Limit time of exposure

Control surface water


11-11

Control sedimentation

Manage stormwater runoff

More information can be found at

httpreportsoahstatencusncacaspfolderNa

me=Title2015A20-

20Environmental20QualityChapter2004

20-20Sedimentation20Control

15A NCAC 02H1000 Stormwater Management

The State Stormwater Management Program

requires all persons conducting LDAs that (1) require

a Coastal Area Management Act (CAMA) Major

Development Permit or an Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Plan and (2) are located

within coastal counties or drain to specific

classifications of water bodies to protect surface

waters and highly productive aquatic resources from

the adverse impacts of uncontrolled high-density

development or the potential failure of stormwater

control measures To receive permit approval

projects must limit the density of development

reduce the use of conventional collection systems in

favor of vegetative systems and incorporate post-

construction structural BMPs

113 PRIOR TO SITE WORK

Contractors are required to address the following in the

below section prior to beginning site work


11-12


Any project involving LDAs aboard the installation must be

reviewed by the installationrsquos NEPA Review Board prior to

the onset of work so that potential impacts of the project and

associated mitigation measures (if necessary) can be

determined Documentation of

this review should have been

provided to the ROICC or

Contract Representative and may

include mandatory conditions

affecting the

constructionimplementation of

the project Consult the ROICC or

Contract Representative to obtain

or review any NEPA

documentation associated with the

project in the contract

1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I

Industrial Permit

Discharges of industrial

stormwater have the potential to

contain contaminants from

industrial activity Because of this

MCB Camp Lejeune holds a

Stormwater Phase I industrial

permit This type of discharge is

defined and regulated in 40 CFR

122 the EPA final rule regarding


Any project involving LDAs aboard the installation must be reviewed by the installationrsquos NEPA Review Board prior to the onset of work

Contractors are responsible for preparing project-specific permit

Contractors are responsible for preparing project-specific permit applications and related plans and for coordinating the permit review schedule with the ROICC or Contract

Representative


11-13

Daily industrial operations discharging stormwater aboard


under an individual NPDES permit In accordance with the

permit the installation maintains an industrial SWPPP that

identifies potential sources of pollution that may affect the

water quality of stormwater discharges associated with an

industrial activity Refer to Section 114 for more

information on contractor responsibilities associated with

this permit


Municipal Permit

Discharges of municipal stormwater have the potential to

contain contaminants from municipal activity Because of

this MCB Camp Lejeune holds a Stormwater Phase II

municipal permit This type of discharge is defined and

regulated in 40 CFR 122 the EPA final rule regarding


Daily municipal operations discharging stormwater aboard


under an NPDES permit In accordance with the permit the

installation maintains a municipal Stormwater Plan to

address the six MCMs of the permit as well as other

requirements Refer to Section 114 for more information on

contractor responsibilities associated with this permit


Contractors are responsible for preparing all project-specific

stormwater permit applications and related plans and for

coordinating the permit review schedule with the ROICC or


agency


11-14

Contract Representative MCB Camp Lejeune is the

responsible party for all project-specific stormwater permits

located outside of Public-Private

Venture (PPV) housing All

permit-required plans and

applications must be submitted

to the appropriate MCB Camp

Lejeune organization to go

through internal approval prior

to submission to the appropriate

State agency The permit review

schedule should allow adequate

time for internal review prior to

State submission deadlines

Adequate review time fluctuates and is based on the type of

permit application Stormwater compliance should be

coordinated with the appropriate PPV partner for housing-

related projects outside the jurisdiction of MCB Camp

Lejeune

Permit coverage is required under the North Carolina

General Permit No NCG010000 (General Permit) for

construction activities that disturb 1 acre or more of land

Three copies of a proposed Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan must be prepared and submitted to the NCDEQ

Sedimentation Control Commission (or to an approved local

program) at least 30 days prior to beginning construction

activity to obtain coverage under the General Permit A copy

of the plan will be kept on file at the job site at all times while

the site is active Coverage under the permit becomes

effective when a plan approval is issued No LDAs may

take place prior to receiving the plan approval The


agency


11-15

approved plan is considered a requirement or condition of

the General Permit deviation from the approved plan will

constitute a violation of the terms and conditions of the

permit unless prior approval for the deviations has been

obtained

A State Stormwater Management Permit issued in

accordance with 15A NCAC 02H1000 is required for all

development activities that require a CAMA Major

Development Permit or an Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan and that meet any of the following criteria

Development within the 20 coastal counties

Development within 1 mile of and draining to any

waters classified as High Quality Water (HQW) and

rated ldquoexcellentrdquo based on biological and physical

chemical characteristics through the NCDWR

monitoring or special studies primary nursery areas

designated by the Marine Fisheries Commission and

other functional nursery areas designated by the

Marine Fisheries Commission

Development that drains to

an Outstanding Resource

Water which is a subset of

HQW that is intended to

protect unique and special

waters having excellent

water quality and being of

exceptional ecological or

recreational significance to

the State or Nation




11-16

Because the installation is in a coastal county any project

that disturbs greater than 1 acre of land (requiring coverage

under the General Permit for construction activity) will also

require a State Stormwater Management Permit A State

Stormwater Management Permit application must be

submitted and filed with the NCDEQ Division of Water

Quality after the construction plans and specifications are

complete and before construction activities begin

Additional information is available on the NCDEQ website

httpdeqncgovaboutdivisionsenergy-mineral-land-

resourcesstormwater

State Stormwater Management Permits typically specify

design standards for conveyance systems and structural

BMPs a schedule of compliance and general conditions to

which the permittee must adhere

114 RESPONSIBILITIES DURING SITE

WORK

The contractor is responsible for maintaining the quality of

the stormwater runoff and preventing pollution of

stormwater at the constructionjob site The job site may be

inspected by installation environmental personnel to ensure

compliance with the contractorrsquos construction andor the

installationrsquos industrial SWPPP municipal stormwater plan

and applicable permits The following requirements apply to

all projects at the installation that have the potential to

impact water quality


11-17

Any changes to the project area that do not comply

with the approved Erosion and Sedimentation

Control Plan alter the approved post-construction

stormwater conveyance system or could otherwise

significantly change the nature or increase the

quantity of pollutants discharged should be

immediately communicated to the ROICC or


All permitted erosion and sedimentation control

projects will be inspected by the contractor at least

once every 7 calendar days (unless discharges to a

303(d)-listed water body are occurring) and within

24 hours after any storm event greater than 05 inch

of rain per 24-hour period as required by the North

Carolina General Permit No NCG010000

Inspection results shall be maintained by the

designated contractor throughout the duration of an

active construction project

Equipment used during the project activities must be

operated and maintained in such a manner as to

prevent the potential or actual pollution of the surface

or ground waters of the State

No POL products (eg fuels lubricants hydraulic

fluids) coolants (eg antifreeze) or any other

substance shall be discharged onto the ground into

surface waters or down storm drains (to include

leaking vehicles heavy equipment pumps andor

structurally deficient containers of hazardous

materials)


11-18

Spent fluids shall be disposed of in a manner so as

not to enter surface or ground waters of the State or

storm drains Disposal of spent fluids is outlined in

Section 70

Implement spill prevention measures clean up all

spills immediately and follow the spill reporting

requirements presented in Section 50 Any spilled

fluids shall be cleaned up to the extent practicable

and disposed of in a manner so as not to allow their

entry into the water (surface or ground) of the State

Refer to Section 50 for emergency and spill response

procedures

Herbicide pesticide and fertilizer use shall be

consistent with the Federal Insecticide Fungicide

and Rodenticide Act and shall be used in accordance

with label restrictions Refer to Section 70 for

additional information on Hazardous

MaterialHazardous Waste Management

Particular care must be used when storing materials

outside Materials and equipment stored outside that

could potentially affect the quality of stormwater

runoff include but are not limited to garbage

dumpsters vehicles miscellaneous metals chemical

storage fuels storage wood products and empty

storage drums These materials should be stored

under cover whenever practicable Contact the

ROICC or Contract Representative with any

questions about whether an outdoor storage practice

is acceptable


11-19

Use good housekeeping practices to maintain clean

and orderly work areas paying particular attention to

those areas that may contribute pollutants to

stormwater For industrial activities refer to the link

below for more information on best management

practices to prevent stormwater pollution EPA

Industrial Fact Sheet Series for Activities Covered by

EPArsquos multi-sector general stormwater permit

httpwwwepagovnpdes


11-20



12-1

120 SOLID WASTE RECYCLING

AND POLLUTION PREVENTION

(P2)

The installation has a proactive

P2 and recycling program and

contractors should minimize the

amount of solid waste requiring

disposal in a landfill This section

addresses solid waste including

both municipal solid waste

(MSW) and construction and

demolition (CampD) waste HM and HW are discussed in

Section 70 of this guide Contractors are required to comply

with all Federal State and local laws and regulations for

proper disposal and recycling of all solid wastes



with solid waste recycling and

pollution prevention If you have






environmental office if additional

clarification is necessary

Contractors should minimize the amount of solid waste requiring disposal in a landfill




12-2


Construction and Demolition Debris Inert

materials generated during the construction

renovation and demolition of buildings roads and

bridges CampD waste often contains bulky heavy

materials such as concrete lumber (from buildings)

asphalt (from roads and roofing shingles) gypsum

(the main component of drywall) and glass (from

windows)

Green Procurement (GP) The purchase of

products and services that are environmentally

preferable when compared with competing products

that serve the same purpose in accordance with

federally mandated ldquogreenrdquo procurement preference

programs GP is intended to have a lesser or reduced

negative effect on human health and the

environment and to permit fulfilling the social

economic and other requirements of present and

future generations

Pollution Prevention Reducing the amount of

pollution entering waste streams or otherwise

released to the environment through source reduction

and process efficiencies

Recycling Activities that may include collection

separation and processing by which products or

other materials are recovered from the solid waste

stream for use as raw materials in the manufacturing

of new products Recycling also includes using

reusing or reclaiming materials as well as processes


12-3

that regenerate a material or recover a usable product

from it

Municipal Solid Waste Any solid materials

discarded including garbage construction debris

commercial refuse non-hazardous materials non-

recyclable wood or other non-recyclable material

per BO 113501 Refuse Disposal Procedures

1212 Key Concepts

Pollution PreventionGreen Procurement

Installation contractors are strongly encouraged to

use P2 and GP practices

Qualified Recycling Program (QRP) An

organized operation that diverts or recovers scrap or

waste streams and that identifies segregates and

maintains the integrity of the recyclable materials in

order to maintain or enhance the marketability of the

materials

Recycling Recycling is required on the installation

The MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill (Base Landfill)

Recycling Center accepts specified recyclables

according to the schedule in Table 12-1 Call (910)

451-4214 prior to a bulk turn-in

Solid Waste Solid waste is disposed of in

accordance with contract specifications (off the

installation or at the Base Landfill) Data related to

disposal off the installation (to include CampD waste)

must be provided to the ROICC or Contract

Representative on a monthly basis


12-4

Source Reduction Any practice that reduces the

amount of any HM pollutant or contaminant

entering any waste stream or released into the

environment prior to recycling treatment and

disposal that could reduce the hazard to public health

and the environment Source reduction may include

equipment or technology modification process or

procedure modification reformulation or redesign of

products substitution of raw materials and

improvements in housekeeping maintenance

training or inventory control


Contractor practices associated with solid waste recycling

and P2 include the following

Battery management


Composting



Grease traps


Land clearing


Metal working

Packagingunpackaging


12-5

Paint removal

Painting

Parts replacement

Polishing



Road construction maintenance

Rock crushing operations




Vehicle maintenance


include soil degradation surface water quality degradation

depletion of landfill space and depletion of nonrenewable

resources




regarding solid waste disposal recycling and P2 which


BO 509017 Solid Waste Reduction ndash Qualified

Recycling Program Provides guidance for solid


12-6

waste reduction P2 and management of recyclable

materials

BO 113502D Refuse Disposal Procedures

Establishes procedures for the separation collection

and disposal of refuse and the disposal of waste wood

products

DoD Instruction 47154 Pollution Prevention

Establishes the DoD requirement for installation

QRPs and calls for GP



Integrates prior practices strategies and

requirements to further enhance the environmental

and energy performance and compliance

requirements The EO sets goals in several

environmental areas including recycling


Energy and Economic Performance Expands on

the environmental performance requirements for

Federal agencies to include setting goals for solid

waste diversion

Pollution Prevention Act of 1990 (42 USC 13101

et seq) Establishes the national policy that

ldquopollution should be prevented or reduced at the

source whenever feasiblerdquo and establishes the

following hierarchy source reduction recycling

treatment and disposal


Governs the disposal of solid waste and establishes


12-7

Federal waste disposal standards and requirements

for State and regional authorities The objectives of

Subtitle D are to assist in developing and

encouraging methods for the disposal of solid waste

that are environmentally sound and that maximize

the utilization of valuable resources recoverable

from solid waste

Solid Waste Disposal Act (SWDA) of 1965

Requires Federal facilities to comply with all

Federal State interstate and local requirements

concerning the disposal and management of solid

wastes including permitting licensing and

reporting requirements The SWDA encourages the

reuse of waste through recycling and requires the

procurement of products that contain recycled

materials

123 SOLID WASTE REQUIREMENTS

Contractors must follow all Federal State and local

requirements regarding the collection storage and disposal

of solid waste Contact the ROICC or Contract

Representative for additional information regarding solid

waste requirements

At a minimum the following actions are required for all

contractors

1 Prior to performing work that will or may generate

solid waste at the installation all contractors must

provide their ROICC or Contract Representative

with a copy of their Solid Waste Disposal Permit


12-8

unless the use of the Base Landfill is authorized for

disposal If the Base Landfill is authorized the

contractor must contact the Base Landfill Operations

Clerk to ensure the contract is registered in the

Landfill Tracking System Recycling should be

coordinated with the ROICC or Contract

Representative and the Landfill Manager

2 Provide the weight of ALL waste both MSW and

CampD that is either disposed of or recycled to the

ROICC or Contract Representative with a copy to

the Landfill Manager This requirement does not

apply if the landfillrecycling facility picks up or

accepts materials directly from the contractor If

contractors transport waste offsite for disposal it is

mandatory that they track the material weight and

provide that information to their ROICC or Contract

Representative for input into the annual Pollution

Prevention Annual Data Summary

In addition contractors producing solid waste on the

installation are required to take these steps

Pick up solid waste separate it according to material

type and place it in covered containers of the correct

type that are regularly emptied for recycling or

landfilling

Verify that the solid waste contains no HM or HW

Prevent contamination of the site and the

surrounding areas when handling and disposing of

waste


12-9

Leave the project site clean upon completion of a

project

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable

Waste Streams

To dispose of waste at the Base Landfill contractors must be

authorized with a valid construction pass and placard

representing the related contract Contractors must also

contact the Landfill Operator prior to unloading refuse


questions regarding use of the landfill or to coordinate

disposal

The Base Landfill accepts certain types of solid waste under

the conditions specified in Table 12-1 Base Landfill hours

of operation are 0730 to 1530 Monday through Friday but

ACM waste must be delivered between 0700 and 1000

Monday through Thursday Each material must be separated

into different loads


12-10



12-11


No Personal Property

Off-Base Trash Accepted

Landfill Operating Hours

0700-1500 Monday ndash Thursday

0700-1400 Friday

Wood Products

The following products may be

mixed together and delivered

to the landfill

Scrap lumber (unpainted)

Embark boxes (broken down)

Pallets (brokenuntreated)

The following products must be separated and delivered

to the landfill

Trees (cut to 10 feet or less and free of soil)

Leaves and scrubs

Serviceable pallets

Lead Based Painted Wood Products

Delivered before 1400 Monday ndash Thursday


Cut in less than 8-foot lengths

Wrapped in 6-millimeter plastic bagssealed

Asbestos (all types)

Appointment needed (910-451-5011 2946)

Delivered by 1000 (Mon ndash Thurs)


Double wrapped in 6-millimeter plastic bags


12-12

Sealed with duct tape

Labeled and manifested prior to delivery

Organic Products

Leaves pine straw grass and shrub clippings

No bags or containers allowed

No twigs or limbs over 2 inches in diameter

Less than 6-foot lengths

Concrete

Delivered separately from other items

Wire and rebar must be cut off flush with

exposed surfaces

Concrete and culverts

Bricks and blocks

Mortar products

Soil

Non-contaminated soil accepted

Recyclable Products

(Must be separated and dropped off at a designated

recycling drop-off point or at a Recycling Center)

Wood pallets (delivered separately)

White paper (mixed flat or shredded)

Newspaper

Magazines

Military publications (binders removed)

Phone books

Plastic and glass (containers or bottles)

Toner cartridges

Cardboard (delivered separately if in bulk)


12-13

Vinyl siding (delivered separately in less than 6-

foot lengths)

Asphalt shingles (delivered separately)

Scrap metals

Other Related Information

Asphalt may be accepted in small quantities as needed

at the discretion of the Landfill Manager (large quantities

of asphalt must be taken off the installation)

All furniture must be accompanied by a DD Form 1348

with a classification of rejected by the Base Property

Office AND downgraded to scrap by Defense Logistics

Agency Disposition Services (DLADS)

All other Base or USMC property must be

accompanied by a DD Form 1348 and downgraded to

scrap by DLADS

Scrap materials related to ordinance ammunition or

dangerous items including containers tubes and

packing must also be accompanied by Ammunition

Explosives and Other Dangerous Articles (AEDA)

certifications and copies of the certifier and verifierrsquos

appointment letters

Phone Numbers (area code 910)

Landfill Manager 451-4998

Recycling Manager 451-4214

Landfill Fax 451-9935

Landfill Clerk 451-2946

EMD 451-5837

EOD 451-0558


12-14

Unacceptable Items Hazardous Waste

Liquid Waste

Useable Appliances

Paint and Paint Cans

Appliances

Electronics

Computer Equipment

Batteries

Wire (CommunicationBarbed Concertina)

Oyster Shells

Contaminated Soil

Tires

55-Gallon Drums

Oil Filters

Petroleum Containers

Regulated Medical Waste

PCBs or PCB containers

Demilitarized Waste

Construction and Demolition Debris (unless

specified in the contract)

124 RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS

The installationrsquos QRP is managed by the EMD in

collaboration with the Public Works Division Reducing

solid waste saves money and helps protect the environment

by conserving natural resources Additionally USMC

facilities are mandated to recycle and the installation must

meet solid waste diversion goals specified in EO 13514 the


12-15

DoD Strategic Sustainability Performance Plan and the

EMS


The MCB Camp Lejeune Recycling Center Building 982 is

co-located with the Base Landfill on Piney Green Road

Normal working hours are Monday through Thursday

0700ndash1500 and Friday 0700-1400 All materials should be

brought to the Recycling Center Have the ROICC or

Contract Representative contact the Recycling Center at

(910) 451-4214 for additional details Call Recycling

Coordinator at (910) 451-4214 for specific types and

categories of materials accepted

The following types and categories of materials are accepted

for recycling but must be delivered to the Recycling Center

on Piney Green Road

Scrap metal

Steel (high temperature corrosion resistant)

Brass (includes spentfired munitions but excludes

brass casings above 50 caliber please call the

Recycling Coordinator at (901) 451-4214 for details

and documentation requirements)

Copper and copper wire

Aluminum (plate sheet scrap) and aluminum cans

Paper (white news magazine)

Cardboard


12-16

Glass bottles (no window windshields or drinking

glass)

Plastic bottles

Toner cartridges

Special arrangements may be made for other materials

(CampD waste) or larger volumes of commonly recycled

materials from events such as CampD Regulations set forth in

BO 113501 must be followed


Asphalt Pavement Asphalt must be removed and

delivered to an asphalt recycling facility Contractors

must provide a record of the total tons of asphalt

recycled and the corporate name and location of the

recycling facility to their ROICC or Contract

Representative with a copy to the Landfill Manager

Empty Metal Paint Cans Take empty metal paint

cans to Building S-962 for recycling Turn in all HM

cans or HM containers that are generated from MCB

Camp Lejeune or MEF contracts to Building S-962

on Michael Road on the scheduled contractor turn-in

day Have the ROICC or Contract Representative

contact EMD for more information Any waste

generated from this process must be managed

appropriately

Other Metals Take other metals to the DLADS

disposal area in Lot 201 following the guidelines of

BO 509017


12-17

Red Rag Recycling Contractors should seek a red

rag program to supply and launder shop rags This

service supplies clean rags and picks them up after

use The rags are laundered offsite and returned

Universal Waste See Section 70 of this guide for

management procedures

Unused Hazardous Materials Turn in these

materials to the HM Free Issue Point Building 977

on Michael Road Have the ROICC or Contract

Representative contact the Free Issue Point at (910)

451-1482

White Rag Recycling White rags are used in

painting (these have no dye and thus do not interfere

with these types of operations) and may be laundered

offsite in a program analogous to the red rag

recycling service

125 POLLUTION PREVENTION AND

GREEN PROCURMENT

MCB Camp Lejeune is subject to GP requirements GP

implements environmentally protective principles in the

procurement arena and includes preferential use of the

following

Products made from recovered materials

Biobased products

Water- and energy-efficient products

Alternatives to ozone-depleting substances


12-18

Non-toxic and less-toxic products

Electronics that meet Electronic Product

Environmental Assessment Tool standards

Products that do not contain toxic chemicals

hazardous substances or other pollutants targeted for

reduction and elimination by the DoD

Products with alternative fuel useincreased fuel

efficiency

Environmentally preferable purchasing practices

Contractors are encouraged to employ GP practices

whenever feasible


13-1

130 POTENTIAL DISCOVERY OF

UNDOCUMENTED CONTAMINATED

SITES

MCB Camp Lejeune was placed on the EPA National

Priorities List effective November 4 1989 To ensure the

protection of human health and the environment a proactive

Installation Restoration Program has been established to

assess and remediate various sites on the installation

Numerous investigations have been performed to ensure that

all of the installationrsquos contaminated sites have been found

but additional contaminated areas may still exist It is the

contractorrsquos responsibility to notify the ROICC or Contract

Representative of any unforeseen site conditions while on

the installation It is recommended that any contractors

performing intrusive activities on the installation be properly

trained in accordance with the OSHA standards in 29 CFR

1910120(e) If intrusive

activities are planned for known

contaminated areas all required

environmental training should be

completed prior to working at

MCB Camp Lejeune Copies of

training records should be

available upon request by Federal

or State regulators



13-2



with unforeseen site conditions If you have any questions or

concerns about the information in this section please consult

the ROICC or Contract Representative who will contact the


necessary


Free Product A discharged HMHW POL or

environmental pollutant that is present in the

environment as a floating or sinking non-aqueous

phase liquid that exists in its free state (ie exceeds

the solubility limit of liquids or saturation limit of

soilsolids)

National Priorities List List of sites of national

priority among the known releases or threatened

releases of hazardous substances pollutants or

contaminants

Petroleum Oil and Lubricants A broad term that

includes all petroleum and associated products or oil

of any kind or in any form including but not limited

to petroleum fuel oil vegetable oil animal oil

sludge oil refuse and oil mixed with wastes

Unforeseen Site Condition A potentially hazardous

or unanticipated site condition encountered on a job

site



13-3

Munitions and Explosives of Concern Military

munitions that may pose explosives safety risks

including MEC UXO DMM and munitions

constituents present in a high enough concentration

to present an explosives hazard

1312 Key Concepts


Contract Representative in writing of any

unforeseen site conditions prior to disturbing them

Response Contractors must stop working and

evacuate work areas if unforeseen site contaminants

HM or MECDMMUXO are suspected to be

present


Unforeseen site conditions are potentially applicable to all

EMS practices conducted aboard MCB Camp Lejeune




regarding unforeseen site conditions which include but may

not be limited to the following

CERCLA of 1980 and Superfund Amendments amp

Reauthorization Act (SARA) of 1986 Establishes

the Nationrsquos HW site cleanup program


13-4

Occupational Safety and Health Standards 29

CFR 1910 Federal standards that govern

occupational health and safety to ensure the

protection of employees from recognized hazards

such as exposure to toxic chemicals excessive noise

levels mechanical dangers heat or cold stress or

unsanitary conditions The standards include

provisions for many facets of employee safety and

health including but not limited to employee

training personal protective equipment HM

communication medical surveillance and

emergency planning

133 UNFORESEEN SITE CONDITION

PROCEDURES

Contractors must promptly before the conditions are

disturbed give a written notice to the ROICC or Contract

Representative of (1) any subsurface or latent physical

conditions at the site that differ materially from those

indicated in the contract or (2) any unknown physical

conditions at the site of an unusual nature that differ

materially from those ordinarily encountered

The ROICC or Contract Representative will investigate the

site conditions promptly after receiving the notice

The most common unforeseen conditions at MCB Camp

Lejeune typically relate to POL contamination and

MECDMMUXO Procedures for these scenarios are

provided in the following sections


13-5


The most frequently encountered condition that requires

EMD assistance is the presence of a POL odor while

excavating If an odor or any free product is encountered

during construction or excavation activities take the

following actions

Stop work

Immediately clear the area

of all personnel to a safe

distance upwind of the

suspected area

Call the Fire and

Emergency Services

Division (911)

immediately if personnel

are affected or injured by the suspected contaminant

Call the Fire and Emergency Services Division to

properly secure the area

Notify the ROICC or Contract Representative so that

the EMD Spill Response Team will be contacted to

determine the appropriate course of action

Please note that if contaminated soil is removed during

excavation activities the soil will have to be characterized

prior to disposition While it is staged and awaiting

characterization sampling results contaminated soil is to be

placed within a bermed area on an impervious surface or

barrier and securely covered with plastic or appropriate




13-6

material Sample results and characterization will determine

the ultimate disposition of the soil In accordance with

installation policy contaminated

soil is not permitted to be

reintroduced into excavations

1332 Munitions and

Ordnance

MCB Camp Lejeune has been in

operation as a military training

installation since the early 1940s As such munitions or an

ordnance item may be encountered during site excavation or

construction activities MEC DMM or UXO at MCB Camp

Lejeune and its outlying areas typically include flares

mines grenades rockets artillery projectiles bulk

explosives fuses or blasting caps These items may vary in

condition from very goodeasily recognizable to

unrecognizable fragmented or corroded scrap metal MEC

DMM or UXO may be encountered on the ground surface

partially buried or completely buried

Contractors operating aboard the

installation should follow the ldquo3Rrdquo

concept if a possible munitions or

ordnance item is discovered

ldquoRecognize Retreat and Reportrdquo

Recognize Contractors with

the potential to encounter any

possible MEC DMM or UXO should have a basic

knowledge of these items The item does not have to

Recognize Retreat

Report

Recognize Retreat

Report


13-7

be specifically recognized or identified but it is

important for personnel to recognize the potential

hazard

Retreat If a suspected MEC DMM or UXO item is

encountered leave the immediate area and DO NOT

DISTURB the item If possible note the general size

and shape of the item any markings and the

location

Report Report all occurrences to the appropriate

authority including any observations (eg size

shape markings and location)

If a project unearths any

potential MECDMMUXO

recognize the potential hazard

Stop work immediately and

have all personnel clear the

immediate area Report the

situation and any observations

to the ROICC or Contract

Representative who will then

report the item to Range Control

and Explosive Ordnance

Disposal (EOD) The following

link is to a 6-minute ldquoUXO Safetyrdquo awareness training video

that provides additional guidance

httpwwwlejeunemarinesmilOfficesStaffExplosivesSaf

ety 20trainingandguidesaspx

For other emergency response procedures please refer to

Section 50 of this guide

Stop work immediately if a project unearths a hazardous material such as MECDMMUXO and report the situation to the ROICC or Contract Representative


13-8



14-1

140 PERMITTING

Contractors operating aboard the installation must ensure

that all relevant environmental permits are obtained before

work commences onsite Contractors must work with their

ROICC or Contract Representative to determine permitting

responsibilities prior to beginning work Contractors must

adhere to all permit conditions Examples of permits related

to the environment are provided in Section 143




contractor permitting



information in this section please

consult the ROICC or Contract



office if additional clarification is

necessary


Major Source Any source that emits or has the

potential to emit 100 tons per year or more of any

criteria air pollutant in accordance with Title V of the

CAA




14-2

Permit A legally enforceable document required by

statutory regulation for potential sources of pollution

that is required for operations that may have an

environmental impact Permits may be administered

at the Federal State or local level




age of 6 lives or is expected to live there) and

residential dwellings where the living areas are not

separated from the sleeping areas (efficiencies

studio apartments dormitories etc)

1412 Key Concepts

Permits Prior to beginning work aboard the

installation consult applicable permit requirements

and ensure that they are met before work begins

Copies of all applicable permitsauthorizations

should be retained onsite for the life of the project

Additional information on North Carolina permits is

found on the following webpage

httpdeqncgovaboutdivisionsenvironmental-

assistance-customer-servicedeacs-permit-

guidanceenvironmental-permit-assistance

Consult the ROICC or Contract Representative for

additional information concerning the contractrsquos permit

requirements The contractor is responsible for ensuring that

all required permits are acquired prior to any work aboard

MCB Camp Lejeune


14-3


Currently no practices are associated with permitting under

the EMS


Please refer to the individual sections of this Guide for

applicable permitting regulations and requirements for each

environmental media Many permits have specific

timetables for submittal prior to project initiation

Contractors must consult the permit requirements and ensure

that all pertaining permits are obtained in the required

timeframe

143 PROJECT PERMITS AND

APPROVALS

Prior to work being awarded

EMDrsquos NEPA Section should

have performed an

environmental review of the

installation-associated action

proponent to comply with NEPA

1969 The outcome of this

review would be either a

Decision Memorandum or an

Environmental Assessment

Contractors must refer to their

contract and the requirements

outlined in the NEPA documentation for specific permitting

requirements EMD Program Managers are available for

The NCDEQ website (httpdeqncgov) is a useful reference for determining required permits and obtaining

necessary forms


14-4

guidance however if the contractor is tasked with preparing

permit applications the contractor is expected to have the

capability and expertise required to complete the submittals

in accordance with the guidance provided by the regulatory

agency that issues the permit In addition EMD must be

provided with copies of all permits submitted to the

NCDEQ In some cases EMD must submit the permit

application Please direct questions to the ROICC or


Some permits that may be required are discussed in

applicable sections of this Guide The following list of

permits is not meant to be all-inclusive please be aware that

other permits may also be required The NCDEQ website

(httpdeqncgov) is a useful reference for determining

required permits and obtaining necessary forms In addition

any inspection andor data collection required by the permits

must be retained onsite for review upon request


NPDES Stormwater Discharge Permit for

Construction Activities (also referred to as

General Permit No NCG010000) Required for all

LDAs that exceed 1 acre also requires an

accompanying Erosion and Sedimentation Control

Plan

General Permit SWG050000 Required for

residential development activities within the 20

coastal counties (including Onslow County) located

within 12 mile and draining to class SA waters

(waters classified as SA are tidal salt waters that are


14-5

used for commercial shellfishing or marketing

purposes) that disturb less than 1 acre if adding more

than 10000 square feet of built-upon area that will

result in a built-upon area greater than 12 percent of

the total project area

High-Density Stormwater Permit Required when

(1) the LDA exceeds 1 acre and impervious surfaces

are greater than or equal to 25 percent of the total

project area adjacent to non-SA waters or greater

than or equal to 12 percent of the total project area

adjacent to SA water or (2) total development

exceeds 10000 square feet of impervious surface

Low-Density Stormwater Permit Required when

the LDA exceeds 1 acre and impervious surfaces are

less than 25 percent of the total project area when

adjacent to non-SA waters or less than 12 percent of

the total project area when adjacent to SA waters


Asbestos Permit Application and Notification for

DemolitionRenovation DHHS Form 3768

available at the following website (under Forms amp

Applications)

httpepipublichealthncgovasbestosahmphtml


North Carolina Lead-Based Paint Abatement

Permit Application Any person or firm conducting

an abatement of a child-occupied facility or target


14-6

housing is required to obtain a Lead Hazard

Management Plan Permit The application is

available at the following website

httpepipublichealthncgovleadpdfLeadAbatePe

rmit08-07pdf


Construction Permits Construction permits are

required for all new stationary sources and all

existing stationary sources that are added to or are

modified with new equipment that may emit air

pollutants Permits may be required for the

construction or modification of the following types

of emission sources

Boilers

Generators

Engine test stands

Surface coatingpainting operations

Refrigerant recovery and recycling operations for

other ozone-depleting substances such as

industrial chillers refrigerators air conditioning

compressors or cleaning agents

Chemical or mechanical paint removal abrasive

blasting grinding or other surface preparation

activities


Woodworking shops


14-7

Welding shops

Bulk chemical or flammables storage

Open burning

Fire training

Rock crushing or other dust-causing activities

New Source Review Permit A New Source Review

permit is a pre-construction permit that authorizes

the construction of new major sources of air pollution

or major modifications of existing sources


Section 404 Clean Water Act Permit Contractors

working aboard the installation will not perform any

work in waters of the United States or wetlands (see

definition below) without an approved permit (even

if the work is temporary) Unavoidable impacts to

wetlands or waters of the United States will require

coordination and written approval from the USACE

for a Section 404 CWA permit (individual or

applicable nationwide permit) the NCDWR for a

Section 401c Water Quality certification and the

NCDCM for a Federal Consistency Determination

Failure to acquire written authorization for making

impacts to wetlands andor waters of the United

States may result in significant project delays or

design modifications See the following website for

more information

httpwwwepagovlaws-regulations


14-8


Approval of Engineering Plans and Specifications

for Water Supply Systems Applicants must submit

engineering plans and specifications at least 30 days

prior to the date upon which the Authorization to

Construct is desired Authorization to Construct must

be obtained prior to onset of work

Wastewater Extension Permit NCDEQ Form FTA

0203 ndash Rev 3 0405 Applicants submitting Form

FTA 0203 should plan to allow the State

approximately 90 days to issue the permit The

Wastewater Extension Permit must be obtained prior

to onset of work

PROJECT

01 11 00

01 12 00

01 13 00

01 14 00

01 20 00

01 30 00

01 31 50

01 32 16

01 33 00

01 35 29

01 42 00

01 45 10

01 50 00

01 57 19

01 74 19

01 78 00

01 78 23

01 78 30

02 41 00

02 82 30

03 01 32

03 11 1300 10

03 15 0000 10

03 20 0000 10

03 31 0100 10

03 39 0000 10

05 50 13

06 82 14

07 13 53

07 84 00

09 90 00

22 00 00

23 07 00

26 00 0000 20

26 05 1910 10

26 20 00

26 56 00

31 23 0000 20

32 01 19

32 16 13

32 92 19

33 34 00

33 71 02

40 05 00

40 95 00

41 21 00

46 20 20

46 23 00

ADDRVER

BRKTVER

DUPEREF

REFVER

REGISTER

SECTVER

SUBMLIST

SUBMVER

TSTRQLST

TTLDIFFS

Blank Page

Revised Contractor_Environmental_Guidepdf

Binder1

Binder1

CVR_MCB_Enviro_55x85_rlm

Blank page

Final Contractor Environmental Guide (85 x 55)

Table of Contents

Record of Changes

Certification Page

List of Acronyms and Abbreviations

Contractorrsquos Phone Directory

10 Contractor Environmental Guide Overview


111 Key Definitions

112 Key Concepts

12 Installation Background

121 Environmental Management Division and Environmental Affairs Department

Figure 1-1 Environmental Management Division (MCB Camp Lejeune) Organization Chart

Figure 1-2 Environmental Affairs Department (MCAS New River) Organization Chart

122 Expectations




14 Points of Contact


15 Overview Map



21 Key Definition and Concepts

211 Key Definitions

212 Key Concepts




Figure 2-2 Potential Interactions of Construction and Demolition Activities with the Environment

24 EMS Responsibilities

25 Contractor Environmental Guide and EMS

Table 2-1 Practices Identified Under MCB Camp Lejeunersquos EMS

30 Training


311 Key Definitions

312 Key Concepts



33 Training Requirements



333 Recordkeeping

40 Air Quality


411 Key Definitions

412 Key Concepts



43 Permit Requirements

44 Additional Activities of Concern

50 Environmental Emergency Planning and Response


511 Key Definitions

512 Key Concepts




53 Spill Notification

531 POLHazardous Materials Spill Notification Procedures

532 Wastewater Spill and Water Line Break Notification

54 Follow-Up

60 Cultural Resources


611 Key Definitions

612 Key Concepts



63 Procedures

Figure 6-1 Possible Cultural Resource Discovery Flow Chart

70 Hazardous MaterialsHazardous Waste Management


711 Key Definitions

712 Key Concepts




73 Hazardous Materials Requirements

74 Universal Waste Requirements

75 Hazardous Waste Requirements

751 Storage


76 NonndashRCRA-Regulated Waste Requirements


762 Used Antifreeze

763 Petroleum-Contaminated Wipes and Oily Rags


765 New and Used Batteries (Not Regulated as Universal Waste)

80 Asbestos


811 Key Definitions

812 Key Concepts



83 Responsibilities Before a Demolition or Renovation Project


832 Notification

833 Removal

834 Training

84 Responsibilities During a Demolition or Renovation Project

85 Disposal of ACM Waste

90 Lead-Based Paint


911 Key Definitions

912 Key Concepts



93 Responsibilities Before Renovation or Demolition

94 Permits

95 Disposal

96 Training

100 Natural Resources



1012 Key Concepts



103 National Environmental Policy Act

104 Timber

105 Threatened and Endangered Species

106 Wetlands

1061 Avoidance

1062 Permits

1063 Impacts

1064 Mitigation


110 Stormwater



1112 Key Concepts



113 Prior to Site Work


1132 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase I Industrial Permit

1133 Familiarity with the Stormwater Phase II Municipal Permit


114 Responsibilities During Site Work

120 Solid Waste Recycling and Pollution Prevention (P2)



1212 Key Concepts



123 Solid Waste Requirements

1231 MCB Camp Lejeune Landfill Acceptable Waste Streams


124 Recycling Requirements



125 Pollution Prevention and Green Procurment

130 Potential Discovery of Undocumented Contaminated Sites



1312 Key Concepts



133 Unforeseen Site Condition Procedures


1332 Munitions and Ordnance

140 Permitting



1412 Key Concepts



143 Project Permits and Approvals







Appendix 85 x 55

Blank Page

Blank Page

Blank Page

Blank Page